| DELETE | UPDATE |
** The new change is ignored. This case does not occur if the new
@@ -9787,7 +9787,7 @@ int sqlite3changegroup_add(sqlite3_changegroup*, int nData, void *pData);
**
** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the output
** variables (*pnData) and (*ppData) are set to 0. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK
-** is returned and the output variables are set to the size of and a
+** is returned and the output variables are set to the size of and a
** pointer to the output buffer, respectively. In this case it is the
** responsibility of the caller to eventually free the buffer using a
** call to sqlite3_free().
@@ -9815,21 +9815,21 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** change in the changeset, the filter callback is invoked with
** the table name as the second argument, and a copy of the context pointer
** passed as the sixth argument to this function as the first. If the "filter
-** callback" returns zero, then no attempt is made to apply any changes to
+** callback" returns zero, then no attempt is made to apply any changes to
** the table. Otherwise, if the return value is non-zero or the xFilter
** argument to this function is NULL, all changes related to the table are
** attempted.
**
-** For each table that is not excluded by the filter callback, this function
-** tests that the target database contains a compatible table. A table is
+** For each table that is not excluded by the filter callback, this function
+** tests that the target database contains a compatible table. A table is
** considered compatible if all of the following are true:
**
**
-** - The table has the same name as the name recorded in the
+**
- The table has the same name as the name recorded in the
** changeset, and
-**
- The table has at least as many columns as recorded in the
+**
- The table has at least as many columns as recorded in the
** changeset, and
-**
- The table has primary key columns in the same position as
+**
- The table has primary key columns in the same position as
** recorded in the changeset.
**
**
@@ -9838,11 +9838,11 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** via the sqlite3_log() mechanism with the error code SQLITE_SCHEMA. At most
** one such warning is issued for each table in the changeset.
**
-** For each change for which there is a compatible table, an attempt is made
-** to modify the table contents according to the UPDATE, INSERT or DELETE
-** change. If a change cannot be applied cleanly, the conflict handler
-** function passed as the fifth argument to sqlite3changeset_apply() may be
-** invoked. A description of exactly when the conflict handler is invoked for
+** For each change for which there is a compatible table, an attempt is made
+** to modify the table contents according to the UPDATE, INSERT or DELETE
+** change. If a change cannot be applied cleanly, the conflict handler
+** function passed as the fifth argument to sqlite3changeset_apply() may be
+** invoked. A description of exactly when the conflict handler is invoked for
** each type of change is below.
**
** Unlike the xFilter argument, xConflict may not be passed NULL. The results
@@ -9850,23 +9850,23 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** argument are undefined.
**
** Each time the conflict handler function is invoked, it must return one
-** of [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT], [SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT] or
+** of [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT], [SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT] or
** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE]. SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE may only be returned
** if the second argument passed to the conflict handler is either
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT. If the conflict-handler
** returns an illegal value, any changes already made are rolled back and
-** the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE. Different
+** the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE. Different
** actions are taken by sqlite3changeset_apply() depending on the value
** returned by each invocation of the conflict-handler function. Refer to
-** the documentation for the three
+** the documentation for the three
** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT|available return values] for details.
**
**
** - DELETE Changes
-
-** For each DELETE change, this function checks if the target database
-** contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
-** original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
-** stored in all non-primary key columns also match the values stored in
+** For each DELETE change, this function checks if the target database
+** contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
+** original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
+** stored in all non-primary key columns also match the values stored in
** the changeset the row is deleted from the target database.
**
** If a row with matching primary key values is found, but one or more of
@@ -9895,22 +9895,22 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** database table, the trailing fields are populated with their default
** values.
**
-** If the attempt to insert the row fails because the database already
+** If the attempt to insert the row fails because the database already
** contains a row with the same primary key values, the conflict handler
-** function is invoked with the second argument set to
+** function is invoked with the second argument set to
** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT].
**
** If the attempt to insert the row fails because of some other constraint
-** violation (e.g. NOT NULL or UNIQUE), the conflict handler function is
+** violation (e.g. NOT NULL or UNIQUE), the conflict handler function is
** invoked with the second argument set to [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT].
-** This includes the case where the INSERT operation is re-attempted because
-** an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned
+** This includes the case where the INSERT operation is re-attempted because
+** an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned
** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].
**
**
- UPDATE Changes
-
-** For each UPDATE change, this function checks if the target database
-** contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
-** original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
+** For each UPDATE change, this function checks if the target database
+** contains a row with the same primary key value (or values) as the
+** original row values stored in the changeset. If it does, and the values
** stored in all modified non-primary key columns also match the values
** stored in the changeset the row is updated within the target database.
**
@@ -9926,12 +9926,12 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** the conflict-handler function is invoked with [SQLITE_CHANGESET_NOTFOUND]
** passed as the second argument.
**
-** If the UPDATE operation is attempted, but SQLite returns
-** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, the conflict-handler function is invoked with
+** If the UPDATE operation is attempted, but SQLite returns
+** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT, the conflict-handler function is invoked with
** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT] passed as the second argument.
-** This includes the case where the UPDATE operation is attempted after
+** This includes the case where the UPDATE operation is attempted after
** an earlier call to the conflict handler function returned
-** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].
+** [SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE].
**
**
** It is safe to execute SQL statements, including those that write to the
@@ -9942,7 +9942,7 @@ void sqlite3changegroup_delete(sqlite3_changegroup*);
** All changes made by this function are enclosed in a savepoint transaction.
** If any other error (aside from a constraint failure when attempting to
** write to the target database) occurs, then the savepoint transaction is
-** rolled back, restoring the target database to its original state, and an
+** rolled back, restoring the target database to its original state, and an
** SQLite error code returned.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
@@ -9961,7 +9961,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
void *pCtx /* First argument passed to xConflict */
);
-/*
+/*
** CAPI3REF: Constants Passed To The Conflict Handler
**
** Values that may be passed as the second argument to a conflict-handler.
@@ -9970,32 +9970,32 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA
** The conflict handler is invoked with CHANGESET_DATA as the second argument
** when processing a DELETE or UPDATE change if a row with the required
-** PRIMARY KEY fields is present in the database, but one or more other
-** (non primary-key) fields modified by the update do not contain the
+** PRIMARY KEY fields is present in the database, but one or more other
+** (non primary-key) fields modified by the update do not contain the
** expected "before" values.
-**
+**
** The conflicting row, in this case, is the database row with the matching
** primary key.
-**
+**
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_NOTFOUND
** The conflict handler is invoked with CHANGESET_NOTFOUND as the second
** argument when processing a DELETE or UPDATE change if a row with the
** required PRIMARY KEY fields is not present in the database.
-**
+**
** There is no conflicting row in this case. The results of invoking the
** sqlite3changeset_conflict() API are undefined.
-**
+**
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT
** CHANGESET_CONFLICT is passed as the second argument to the conflict
-** handler while processing an INSERT change if the operation would result
+** handler while processing an INSERT change if the operation would result
** in duplicate primary key values.
-**
+**
** The conflicting row in this case is the database row with the matching
** primary key.
**
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY
** If foreign key handling is enabled, and applying a changeset leaves the
-** database in a state containing foreign key violations, the conflict
+** database in a state containing foreign key violations, the conflict
** handler is invoked with CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY as the second argument
** exactly once before the changeset is committed. If the conflict handler
** returns CHANGESET_OMIT, the changes, including those that caused the
@@ -10005,12 +10005,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
** No current or conflicting row information is provided. The only function
** it is possible to call on the supplied sqlite3_changeset_iter handle
** is sqlite3changeset_fk_conflicts().
-**
+**
** SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT
-** If any other constraint violation occurs while applying a change (i.e.
-** a UNIQUE, CHECK or NOT NULL constraint), the conflict handler is
+** If any other constraint violation occurs while applying a change (i.e.
+** a UNIQUE, CHECK or NOT NULL constraint), the conflict handler is
** invoked with CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT as the second argument.
-**
+**
** There is no conflicting row in this case. The results of invoking the
** sqlite3changeset_conflict() API are undefined.
**
@@ -10022,7 +10022,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
#define SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONSTRAINT 4
#define SQLITE_CHANGESET_FOREIGN_KEY 5
-/*
+/*
** CAPI3REF: Constants Returned By The Conflict Handler
**
** A conflict handler callback must return one of the following three values.
@@ -10030,13 +10030,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
**
** - SQLITE_CHANGESET_OMIT
-
** If a conflict handler returns this value no special action is taken. The
-** change that caused the conflict is not applied. The session module
+** change that caused the conflict is not applied. The session module
** continues to the next change in the changeset.
**
**
- SQLITE_CHANGESET_REPLACE
-
** This value may only be returned if the second argument to the conflict
** handler was SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA or SQLITE_CHANGESET_CONFLICT. If this
-** is not the case, any changes applied so far are rolled back and the
+** is not the case, any changes applied so far are rolled back and the
** call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_MISUSE.
**
** If CHANGESET_REPLACE is returned by an SQLITE_CHANGESET_DATA conflict
@@ -10049,7 +10049,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
** the original row is restored to the database before continuing.
**
**
- SQLITE_CHANGESET_ABORT
-
-** If this value is returned, any changes applied so far are rolled back
+** If this value is returned, any changes applied so far are rolled back
** and the call to sqlite3changeset_apply() returns SQLITE_ABORT.
**
*/
@@ -10060,24 +10060,24 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
/*
** CAPI3REF: Streaming Versions of API functions.
**
-** The six streaming API xxx_strm() functions serve similar purposes to the
+** The six streaming API xxx_strm() functions serve similar purposes to the
** corresponding non-streaming API functions:
**
**
** | Streaming function | Non-streaming equivalent |
-**
|---|
| sqlite3changeset_apply_str | [sqlite3changeset_apply]
-** | | sqlite3changeset_concat_str | [sqlite3changeset_concat]
-** | | sqlite3changeset_invert_str | [sqlite3changeset_invert]
-** | | sqlite3changeset_start_str | [sqlite3changeset_start]
-** | | sqlite3session_changeset_str | [sqlite3session_changeset]
-** | | sqlite3session_patchset_str | [sqlite3session_patchset]
+** | | sqlite3changeset_apply_str | [sqlite3changeset_apply]
+** | | sqlite3changeset_concat_str | [sqlite3changeset_concat]
+** | | sqlite3changeset_invert_str | [sqlite3changeset_invert]
+** | | sqlite3changeset_start_str | [sqlite3changeset_start]
+** | | sqlite3session_changeset_str | [sqlite3session_changeset]
+** | | sqlite3session_patchset_str | [sqlite3session_patchset]
** |
**
** Non-streaming functions that accept changesets (or patchsets) as input
-** require that the entire changeset be stored in a single buffer in memory.
-** Similarly, those that return a changeset or patchset do so by returning
-** a pointer to a single large buffer allocated using sqlite3_malloc().
-** Normally this is convenient. However, if an application running in a
+** require that the entire changeset be stored in a single buffer in memory.
+** Similarly, those that return a changeset or patchset do so by returning
+** a pointer to a single large buffer allocated using sqlite3_malloc().
+** Normally this is convenient. However, if an application running in a
** low-memory environment is required to handle very large changesets, the
** large contiguous memory allocations required can become onerous.
**
@@ -10099,12 +10099,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
**
**
** Each time the xInput callback is invoked by the sessions module, the first
-** argument passed is a copy of the supplied pIn context pointer. The second
-** argument, pData, points to a buffer (*pnData) bytes in size. Assuming no
-** error occurs the xInput method should copy up to (*pnData) bytes of data
-** into the buffer and set (*pnData) to the actual number of bytes copied
-** before returning SQLITE_OK. If the input is completely exhausted, (*pnData)
-** should be set to zero to indicate this. Or, if an error occurs, an SQLite
+** argument passed is a copy of the supplied pIn context pointer. The second
+** argument, pData, points to a buffer (*pnData) bytes in size. Assuming no
+** error occurs the xInput method should copy up to (*pnData) bytes of data
+** into the buffer and set (*pnData) to the actual number of bytes copied
+** before returning SQLITE_OK. If the input is completely exhausted, (*pnData)
+** should be set to zero to indicate this. Or, if an error occurs, an SQLite
** error code should be returned. In all cases, if an xInput callback returns
** an error, all processing is abandoned and the streaming API function
** returns a copy of the error code to the caller.
@@ -10112,7 +10112,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
** In the case of sqlite3changeset_start_strm(), the xInput callback may be
** invoked by the sessions module at any point during the lifetime of the
** iterator. If such an xInput callback returns an error, the iterator enters
-** an error state, whereby all subsequent calls to iterator functions
+** an error state, whereby all subsequent calls to iterator functions
** immediately fail with the same error code as returned by xInput.
**
** Similarly, streaming API functions that return changesets (or patchsets)
@@ -10142,7 +10142,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3changeset_apply(
** is immediately abandoned and the streaming API function returns a copy
** of the xOutput error code to the application.
**
-** The sessions module never invokes an xOutput callback with the third
+** The sessions module never invokes an xOutput callback with the third
** parameter set to a value less than or equal to zero. Other than this,
** no guarantees are made as to the size of the chunks of data returned.
*/
@@ -10190,12 +10190,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3session_patchset_strm(
int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
void *pOut
);
-int sqlite3changegroup_add_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
+int sqlite3changegroup_add_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
int (*xInput)(void *pIn, void *pData, int *pnData),
void *pIn
);
int sqlite3changegroup_output_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
- int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
+ int (*xOutput)(void *pOut, const void *pData, int nData),
void *pOut
);
@@ -10223,7 +10223,7 @@ int sqlite3changegroup_output_strm(sqlite3_changegroup*,
**
******************************************************************************
**
-** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file,
+** Interfaces to extend FTS5. Using the interfaces defined in this file,
** FTS5 may be extended with:
**
** * custom tokenizers, and
@@ -10267,19 +10267,19 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** EXTENSION API FUNCTIONS
**
** xUserData(pFts):
-** Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was
+** Return a copy of the context pointer the extension function was
** registered with.
**
** xColumnTotalSize(pFts, iCol, pnToken):
** If parameter iCol is less than zero, set output variable *pnToken
** to the total number of tokens in the FTS5 table. Or, if iCol is
** non-negative but less than the number of columns in the table, return
-** the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in
+** the total number of tokens in column iCol, considering all rows in
** the FTS5 table.
**
** If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
** in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
+** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
** returned.
**
** xColumnCount(pFts):
@@ -10293,7 +10293,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
**
** If parameter iCol is greater than or equal to the number of columns
** in the table, SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Or, if an error occurs (e.g.
-** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
+** an OOM condition or IO error), an appropriate SQLite error code is
** returned.
**
** This function may be quite inefficient if used with an FTS5 table
@@ -10320,8 +10320,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if an error occurs.
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
-** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
+** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
** (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always returns 0.
**
** xInst:
@@ -10336,11 +10336,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** with the offsets=0 option specified. In this case *piOff is always
** set to -1.
**
-** Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM)
+** Returns SQLITE_OK if successful, or an error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM)
** if an error occurs.
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option.
+** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option.
**
** xRowid:
** Returns the rowid of the current row.
@@ -10356,11 +10356,11 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
**
** with $p set to a phrase equivalent to the phrase iPhrase of the
** current query is executed. Any column filter that applies to
-** phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each
-** row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument
-** is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback
+** phrase iPhrase of the current query is included in $p. For each
+** row visited, the callback function passed as the fourth argument
+** is invoked. The context and API objects passed to the callback
** function may be used to access the properties of each matched row.
-** Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as
+** Invoking Api.xUserData() returns a copy of the pointer passed as
** the third argument to pUserData.
**
** If the callback function returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the
@@ -10375,14 +10375,14 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
**
** xSetAuxdata(pFts5, pAux, xDelete)
**
-** Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions
+** Save the pointer passed as the second argument as the extension functions
** "auxiliary data". The pointer may then be retrieved by the current or any
** future invocation of the same fts5 extension function made as part of
** of the same MATCH query using the xGetAuxdata() API.
**
** Each extension function is allocated a single auxiliary data slot for
-** each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked
-** more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a
+** each FTS query (MATCH expression). If the extension function is invoked
+** more than once for a single FTS query, then all invocations share a
** single auxiliary data context.
**
** If there is already an auxiliary data pointer when this function is
@@ -10401,7 +10401,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
**
** xGetAuxdata(pFts5, bClear)
**
-** Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension
+** Returns the current auxiliary data pointer for the fts5 extension
** function. See the xSetAuxdata() method for details.
**
** If the bClear argument is non-zero, then the auxiliary data is cleared
@@ -10421,7 +10421,7 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** method, to iterate through all instances of a single query phrase within
** the current row. This is the same information as is accessible via the
** xInstCount/xInst APIs. While the xInstCount/xInst APIs are more convenient
-** to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate
+** to use, this API may be faster under some circumstances. To iterate
** through instances of phrase iPhrase, use the following code:
**
** Fts5PhraseIter iter;
@@ -10439,8 +10439,8 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** xPhraseFirstColumn() and xPhraseNextColumn() as illustrated below).
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
-** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
+** "detail=none" or "detail=column" option. If the FTS5 table is created
+** with either "detail=none" or "detail=column" and "content=" option
** (i.e. if it is a contentless table), then this API always iterates
** through an empty set (all calls to xPhraseFirst() set iCol to -1).
**
@@ -10464,16 +10464,16 @@ struct Fts5PhraseIter {
** }
**
** This API can be quite slow if used with an FTS5 table created with the
-** "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either
-** "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table),
-** then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to
+** "detail=none" option. If the FTS5 table is created with either
+** "detail=none" "content=" option (i.e. if it is a contentless table),
+** then this API always iterates through an empty set (all calls to
** xPhraseFirstColumn() set iCol to -1).
**
** The information accessed using this API and its companion
** xPhraseFirstColumn() may also be obtained using xPhraseFirst/xPhraseNext
** (or xInst/xInstCount). The chief advantage of this API is that it is
** significantly more efficient than those alternatives when used with
-** "detail=column" tables.
+** "detail=column" tables.
**
** xPhraseNextColumn()
** See xPhraseFirstColumn above.
@@ -10487,7 +10487,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
int (*xRowCount)(Fts5Context*, sqlite3_int64 *pnRow);
int (*xColumnTotalSize)(Fts5Context*, int iCol, sqlite3_int64 *pnToken);
- int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*,
+ int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Context*,
const char *pText, int nText, /* Text to tokenize */
void *pCtx, /* Context passed to xToken() */
int (*xToken)(void*, int, const char*, int, int, int) /* Callback */
@@ -10516,15 +10516,15 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
void (*xPhraseNextColumn)(Fts5Context*, Fts5PhraseIter*, int *piCol);
};
-/*
+/*
** CUSTOM AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
*************************************************************************/
/*************************************************************************
** CUSTOM TOKENIZERS
**
-** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer
-** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the
+** Applications may also register custom tokenizer types. A tokenizer
+** is registered by providing fts5 with a populated instance of the
** following structure. All structure methods must be defined, setting
** any member of the fts5_tokenizer struct to NULL leads to undefined
** behaviour. The structure methods are expected to function as follows:
@@ -10535,16 +10535,16 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
**
** The first argument passed to this function is a copy of the (void*)
** pointer provided by the application when the fts5_tokenizer object
-** was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()).
+** was registered with FTS5 (the third argument to xCreateTokenizer()).
** The second and third arguments are an array of nul-terminated strings
** containing the tokenizer arguments, if any, specified following the
** tokenizer name as part of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement used
** to create the FTS5 table.
**
-** The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut)
+** The final argument is an output variable. If successful, (*ppOut)
** should be set to point to the new tokenizer handle and SQLITE_OK
** returned. If an error occurs, some value other than SQLITE_OK should
-** be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut
+** be returned. In this case, fts5 assumes that the final value of *ppOut
** is undefined.
**
** xDelete:
@@ -10553,7 +10553,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** be invoked exactly once for each successful call to xCreate().
**
** xTokenize:
-** This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated
+** This function is expected to tokenize the nText byte string indicated
** by argument pText. pText may or may not be nul-terminated. The first
** argument passed to this function is a pointer to an Fts5Tokenizer object
** returned by an earlier call to xCreate().
@@ -10567,8 +10567,8 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** determine the set of tokens to add to (or delete from) the
** FTS index.
**
-** FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY - A MATCH query is being executed
-** against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize
+** FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY - A MATCH query is being executed
+** against the FTS index. The tokenizer is being called to tokenize
** a bareword or quoted string specified as part of the query.
**
** (FTS5_TOKENIZE_QUERY | FTS5_TOKENIZE_PREFIX) - Same as
@@ -10576,10 +10576,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** followed by a "*" character, indicating that the last token
** returned by the tokenizer will be treated as a token prefix.
**
-** FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX - The tokenizer is being invoked to
+** FTS5_TOKENIZE_AUX - The tokenizer is being invoked to
** satisfy an fts5_api.xTokenize() request made by an auxiliary
** function. Or an fts5_api.xColumnSize() request made by the same
-** on a columnsize=0 database.
+** on a columnsize=0 database.
**
**
** For each token in the input string, the supplied callback xToken() must
@@ -10591,10 +10591,10 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** which the token is derived within the input.
**
** The second argument passed to the xToken() callback ("tflags") should
-** normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports
+** normally be set to 0. The exception is if the tokenizer supports
** synonyms. In this case see the discussion below for details.
**
-** FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the
+** FTS5 assumes the xToken() callback is invoked for each token in the
** order that they occur within the input text.
**
** If an xToken() callback returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, then
@@ -10608,7 +10608,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** SYNONYM SUPPORT
**
** Custom tokenizers may also support synonyms. Consider a case in which a
-** user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the
+** user wishes to query for a phrase such as "first place". Using the
** built-in tokenizers, the FTS5 query 'first + place' will match instances
** of "first place" within the document set, but not alternative forms
** such as "1st place". In some applications, it would be better to match
@@ -10617,7 +10617,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
**
** There are several ways to approach this in FTS5:
**
-** - By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the
+**
- By mapping all synonyms to a single token. In this case, the
** In the above example, this means that the tokenizer returns the
** same token for inputs "first" and "1st". Say that token is in
** fact "first", so that when the user inserts the document "I won
@@ -10627,7 +10627,7 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** as expected.
**
**
- By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
-** In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may
+** In this case, when tokenizing query text, the tokenizer may
** provide multiple synonyms for a single term within the document.
** FTS5 then queries the index for each synonym individually. For
** example, faced with the query:
@@ -10636,26 +10636,26 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** ... MATCH 'first place'
**
** the tokenizer offers both "1st" and "first" as synonyms for the
-** first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query
+** first token in the MATCH query and FTS5 effectively runs a query
** similar to:
**
**
** ... MATCH '(first OR 1st) place'
**
** except that, for the purposes of auxiliary functions, the query
-** still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)"
+** still appears to contain just two phrases - "(first OR 1st)"
** being treated as a single phrase.
**
**
- By adding multiple synonyms for a single term to the FTS index.
** Using this method, when tokenizing document text, the tokenizer
-** provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a
+** provides multiple synonyms for each token. So that when a
** document such as "I won first place" is tokenized, entries are
** added to the FTS index for "i", "won", "first", "1st" and
** "place".
**
** This way, even if the tokenizer does not provide synonyms
** when tokenizing query text (it should not - to do would be
-** inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for
+** inefficient), it doesn't matter if the user queries for
** 'first + place' or '1st + place', as there are entires in the
** FTS index corresponding to both forms of the first token.
**
@@ -10676,11 +10676,11 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
**
** It is an error to specify the FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED flag the first time
** xToken() is called. Multiple synonyms may be specified for a single token
-** by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence.
+** by making multiple calls to xToken(FTS5_TOKEN_COLOCATED) in sequence.
** There is no limit to the number of synonyms that may be provided for a
** single token.
**
-** In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add
+** In many cases, method (1) above is the best approach. It does not add
** extra data to the FTS index or require FTS5 to query for multiple terms,
** so it is efficient in terms of disk space and query speed. However, it
** does not support prefix queries very well. If, as suggested above, the
@@ -10692,18 +10692,18 @@ struct Fts5ExtensionApi {
** will not match documents that contain the token "1st" (as the tokenizer
** will probably not map "1s" to any prefix of "first").
**
-** For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case,
+** For full prefix support, method (3) may be preferred. In this case,
** because the index contains entries for both "first" and "1st", prefix
** queries such as 'fi*' or '1s*' will match correctly. However, because
** extra entries are added to the FTS index, this method uses more space
** within the database.
**
** Method (2) offers a midpoint between (1) and (3). Using this method,
-** a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal
+** a query such as '1s*' will match documents that contain the literal
** token "1st", but not "first" (assuming the tokenizer is not able to
** provide synonyms for prefixes). However, a non-prefix query like '1st'
** will match against "1st" and "first". This method does not require
-** extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index.
+** extra disk space, as no extra entries are added to the FTS index.
** On the other hand, it may require more CPU cycles to run MATCH queries,
** as separate queries of the FTS index are required for each synonym.
**
@@ -10717,10 +10717,10 @@ typedef struct fts5_tokenizer fts5_tokenizer;
struct fts5_tokenizer {
int (*xCreate)(void*, const char **azArg, int nArg, Fts5Tokenizer **ppOut);
void (*xDelete)(Fts5Tokenizer*);
- int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*,
+ int (*xTokenize)(Fts5Tokenizer*,
void *pCtx,
int flags, /* Mask of FTS5_TOKENIZE_* flags */
- const char *pText, int nText,
+ const char *pText, int nText,
int (*xToken)(
void *pCtx, /* Copy of 2nd argument to xTokenize() */
int tflags, /* Mask of FTS5_TOKEN_* flags */
@@ -10816,7 +10816,7 @@ struct fts5_api {
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-**
+**
** This file defines various limits of what SQLite can process.
*/
@@ -10864,9 +10864,9 @@ struct fts5_api {
#endif
/*
-** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
-** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
-** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
+** The maximum depth of an expression tree. This is limited to
+** some extent by SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH. But sometime you might
+** want to place more severe limits on the complexity of an
** expression.
**
** A value of 0 used to mean that the limit was not enforced.
@@ -10948,10 +10948,10 @@ struct fts5_api {
**
** Earlier versions of SQLite allowed the user to change this value at
** compile time. This is no longer permitted, on the grounds that it creates
-** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
-** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
-** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
-** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
+** a library that is technically incompatible with an SQLite library
+** compiled with a different limit. If a process operating on a database
+** with a page-size of 65536 bytes crashes, then an instance of SQLite
+** compiled with the default page-size limit will not be able to rollback
** the aborted transaction. This could lead to database corruption.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
@@ -11010,7 +11010,7 @@ struct fts5_api {
** Maximum depth of recursion for triggers.
**
** A value of 1 means that a trigger program will not be able to itself
-** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
+** fire any triggers. A value of 0 means that no trigger programs at all
** may be executed.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MAX_TRIGGER_DEPTH
@@ -11388,7 +11388,7 @@ typedef struct HashElem HashElem;
** element pointed to plus the next _ht.count-1 elements in the list.
**
** Hash.htsize and Hash.ht may be zero. In that case lookup is done
-** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the
+** by a linear search of the global list. For small tables, the
** Hash.ht table is never allocated because if there are few elements
** in the table, it is faster to do a linear search than to manage
** the hash table.
@@ -11403,7 +11403,7 @@ struct Hash {
} *ht;
};
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
@@ -12337,7 +12337,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p);
/*
** The second parameter to sqlite3BtreeGetMeta or sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta
-** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned
+** should be one of the following values. The integer values are assigned
** to constants so that the offset of the corresponding field in an
** SQLite database header may be found using the following formula:
**
@@ -12408,7 +12408,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p);
#define BTREE_BULKLOAD 0x00000001 /* Used to full index in sorted order */
#define BTREE_SEEK_EQ 0x00000002 /* EQ seeks only - no range seeks */
-/*
+/*
** Flags passed as the third argument to sqlite3BtreeCursor().
**
** For read-only cursors the wrFlag argument is always zero. For read-write
@@ -12473,13 +12473,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor*, u8 flags);
** key and pData,nData,nZero set to zero.
**
** Table btrees (used for rowid tables) contain an integer rowid used as
-** the key and passed in the nKey field. The pKey field is zero.
+** the key and passed in the nKey field. The pKey field is zero.
** pData,nData hold the content of the new entry. nZero extra zero bytes
** are appended to the end of the content when constructing the entry.
**
** This object is used to pass information into sqlite3BtreeInsert(). The
** same information used to be passed as five separate parameters. But placing
-** the information into this object helps to keep the interface more
+** the information into this object helps to keep the interface more
** organized and understandable, and it also helps the resulting code to
** run a little faster by using fewer registers for parameter passing.
*/
@@ -12549,7 +12549,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(BtCursor*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree*);
#else
-# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X)
+# define sqlite3BtreeEnter(X)
# define sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(X)
# define sqlite3BtreeSharable(X) 0
# define sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(X)
@@ -12718,7 +12718,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList;
#define P5_ConstraintFK 4
/*
-** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the
+** The Vdbe.aColName array contains 5n Mem structures, where n is the
** number of columns of data returned by the statement.
*/
#define COLNAME_NAME 0
@@ -12738,7 +12738,7 @@ typedef struct VdbeOpList VdbeOpList;
/*
** The following macro converts a relative address in the p2 field
-** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that
+** of a VdbeOp structure into a negative number so that
** sqlite3VdbeAddOpList() knows that the address is relative. Calling
** the macro again restores the address.
*/
@@ -13130,8 +13130,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(Vdbe*, int, int, int, LogEst, const ch
#define SQLITE_PAGER_H
/*
-** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative
-** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the
+** Default maximum size for persistent journal files. A negative
+** value means no limit. This value may be overridden using the
** sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit() API. See also "PRAGMA journal_size_limit".
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_DEFAULT_JOURNAL_SIZE_LIMIT
@@ -13157,9 +13157,9 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage;
/*
** Page number PAGER_MJ_PGNO is never used in an SQLite database (it is
** reserved for working around a windows/posix incompatibility). It is
-** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file
+** used in the journal to signify that the remainder of the journal file
** is devoted to storing a master journal name - there are no more pages to
-** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c
+** roll back. See comments for function writeMasterJournal() in pager.c
** for details.
*/
#define PAGER_MJ_PGNO(x) ((Pgno)((PENDING_BYTE/((x)->pageSize))+1))
@@ -13220,11 +13220,11 @@ typedef struct PgHdr DbPage;
/*
** The remainder of this file contains the declarations of the functions
-** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for
+** that make up the Pager sub-system API. See source code comments for
** a detailed description of each routine.
*/
-/* Open and close a Pager connection. */
+/* Open and close a Pager connection. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
sqlite3_vfs*,
Pager **ppPager,
@@ -13257,7 +13257,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE i64 sqlite3PagerJournalSizeLimit(Pager *, i64);
SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_backup **sqlite3PagerBackupPtr(Pager*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager*);
-/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */
+/* Functions used to obtain and release page references. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerGet(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno, DbPage **ppPage, int clrFlag);
SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage*);
@@ -13269,8 +13269,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWrite(DbPage*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(DbPage*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager*,DbPage*,Pgno,int);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(DbPage*);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *);
/* Functions used to manage pager transactions and savepoints. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager*, int*);
@@ -13366,7 +13366,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRefdump(Pager*);
**
*************************************************************************
** This header file defines the interface that the sqlite page cache
-** subsystem.
+** subsystem.
*/
#ifndef _PCACHE_H_
@@ -13443,7 +13443,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSetPageSize(PCache *, int);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void);
/* One release per successful fetch. Page is pinned until released.
-** Reference counted.
+** Reference counted.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch(PCache*, Pgno, int createFlag);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(PCache*, Pgno, sqlite3_pcache_page**);
@@ -13487,7 +13487,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache*);
#if defined(SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
/* Iterate through all dirty pages currently stored in the cache. This
-** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the
+** interface is only available if SQLITE_CHECK_PAGES is defined when the
** library is built.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHdr *));
@@ -13658,10 +13658,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
** 2006-10-31: The default prefix used to be "sqlite_". But then
** Mcafee started using SQLite in their anti-virus product and it
** started putting files with the "sqlite" name in the c:/temp folder.
-** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a
+** This annoyed many windows users. Those users would then do a
** Google search for "sqlite", find the telephone numbers of the
** developers and call to wake them up at night and complain.
-** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite"
+** For this reason, the default name prefix is changed to be "sqlite"
** spelled backwards. So the temp files are still identified, but
** anybody smart enough to figure out the code is also likely smart
** enough to know that calling the developer will not help get rid
@@ -13702,9 +13702,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
** UnlockFile().
**
** LockFile() prevents not just writing but also reading by other processes.
-** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen
-** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at
-** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the
+** A SHARED_LOCK is obtained by locking a single randomly-chosen
+** byte out of a specific range of bytes. The lock byte is obtained at
+** random so two separate readers can probably access the file at the
** same time, unless they are unlucky and choose the same lock byte.
** An EXCLUSIVE_LOCK is obtained by locking all bytes in the range.
** There can only be one writer. A RESERVED_LOCK is obtained by locking
@@ -13723,7 +13723,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
** The following #defines specify the range of bytes used for locking.
** SHARED_SIZE is the number of bytes available in the pool from which
** a random byte is selected for a shared lock. The pool of bytes for
-** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST.
+** shared locks begins at SHARED_FIRST.
**
** The same locking strategy and
** byte ranges are used for Unix. This leaves open the possibility of having
@@ -13739,7 +13739,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
** that all locks will fit on a single page even at the minimum page size.
** PENDING_BYTE defines the beginning of the locks. By default PENDING_BYTE
** is set high so that we don't have to allocate an unused page except
-** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic
+** for very large databases. But one should test the page skipping logic
** by setting PENDING_BYTE low and running the entire regression suite.
**
** Changing the value of PENDING_BYTE results in a subtly incompatible
@@ -13763,8 +13763,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PCachePercentDirty(PCache*);
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsInit(void);
-/*
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_file methods
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OsClose(sqlite3_file*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsRead(sqlite3_file*, void*, int amt, i64 offset);
@@ -13788,8 +13788,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsFetch(sqlite3_file *id, i64, int, void **);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsUnfetch(sqlite3_file *, i64, void *);
-/*
-** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods
+/*
+** Functions for accessing sqlite3_vfs methods
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpen(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file*, int, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsDelete(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, int);
@@ -13807,7 +13807,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs*);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *, sqlite3_int64*);
/*
-** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using
+** Convenience functions for opening and closing files using
** sqlite3_malloc() to obtain space for the file-handle structure.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(sqlite3_vfs *, const char *, sqlite3_file **, int,int*);
@@ -13877,9 +13877,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OsCloseFree(sqlite3_file *);
*/
#define sqlite3_mutex_alloc(X) ((sqlite3_mutex*)8)
#define sqlite3_mutex_free(X)
-#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X)
+#define sqlite3_mutex_enter(X)
#define sqlite3_mutex_try(X) SQLITE_OK
-#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X)
+#define sqlite3_mutex_leave(X)
#define sqlite3_mutex_held(X) ((void)(X),1)
#define sqlite3_mutex_notheld(X) ((void)(X),1)
#define sqlite3MutexAlloc(X) ((sqlite3_mutex*)8)
@@ -17164,7 +17164,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse*, Expr*);
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/* An array to map all upper-case characters into their corresponding
-** lower-case character.
+** lower-case character.
**
** SQLite only considers US-ASCII (or EBCDIC) characters. We do not
** handle case conversions for the UTF character set since the tables
@@ -17231,7 +17231,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3UpperToLower[] = {
** The equivalent of tolower() is implemented using the sqlite3UpperToLower[]
** array. tolower() is used more often than toupper() by SQLite.
**
-** Bit 0x40 is set if the character is non-alphanumeric and can be used in an
+** Bit 0x40 is set if the character is non-alphanumeric and can be used in an
** SQLite identifier. Identifiers are alphanumerics, "_", "$", and any
** non-ASCII UTF character. Hence the test for whether or not a character is
** part of an identifier is 0x46.
@@ -17314,7 +17314,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3CtypeMap[256] = {
** if journal_mode=MEMORY or if temp_store=MEMORY, regardless of this
** setting.)
*/
-#ifndef SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL
+#ifndef SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL
# define SQLITE_STMTJRNL_SPILL (64*1024)
#endif
@@ -17430,7 +17430,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PendingByte = 0x40000000;
** Properties of opcodes. The OPFLG_INITIALIZER macro is
** created by mkopcodeh.awk during compilation. Data is obtained
** from the comments following the "case OP_xxxx:" statements in
-** the vdbe.c file.
+** the vdbe.c file.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE const unsigned char sqlite3OpcodeProperty[] = OPFLG_INITIALIZER;
@@ -17462,7 +17462,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char sqlite3StrBINARY[] = "BINARY";
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/*
-** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should
+** An array of names of all compile-time options. This array should
** be sorted A-Z.
**
** This array looks large, but in a typical installation actually uses
@@ -18060,7 +18060,7 @@ struct VdbeCursor {
** When a sub-program is executed (OP_Program), a structure of this type
** is allocated to store the current value of the program counter, as
** well as the current memory cell array and various other frame specific
-** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
+** values stored in the Vdbe struct. When the sub-program is finished,
** these values are copied back to the Vdbe from the VdbeFrame structure,
** restoring the state of the VM to as it was before the sub-program
** began executing.
@@ -18147,7 +18147,7 @@ struct Mem {
** If the MEM_Str flag is set then Mem.z points at a string representation.
** Usually this is encoded in the same unicode encoding as the main
** database (see below for exceptions). If the MEM_Term flag is also
-** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
+** set, then the string is nul terminated. The MEM_Int and MEM_Real
** flags may coexist with the MEM_Str flag.
*/
#define MEM_Null 0x0001 /* Value is NULL */
@@ -18201,7 +18201,7 @@ struct Mem {
#endif
/*
-** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
+** Each auxiliary data pointer stored by a user defined function
** implementation calling sqlite3_set_auxdata() is stored in an instance
** of this structure. All such structures associated with a single VM
** are stored in a linked list headed at Vdbe.pAuxData. All are destroyed
@@ -18340,7 +18340,7 @@ struct Vdbe {
#define VDBE_MAGIC_DEAD 0x5606c3c8 /* The VDBE has been deallocated */
/*
-** Structure used to store the context required by the
+** Structure used to store the context required by the
** sqlite3_preupdate_*() API functions.
*/
struct PreUpdate {
@@ -18355,7 +18355,7 @@ struct PreUpdate {
i64 iKey1; /* First key value passed to hook */
i64 iKey2; /* Second key value passed to hook */
Mem *aNew; /* Array of new.* values */
- Table *pTab; /* Schema object being upated */
+ Table *pTab; /* Schema object being upated */
Index *pPk; /* PK index if pTab is WITHOUT ROWID */
};
@@ -18433,7 +18433,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(const VdbeCursor *, Mem *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterCompare(const VdbeCursor *, Mem *, int, int *);
-#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
+#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE)
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeEnter(Vdbe*);
#else
# define sqlite3VdbeEnter(X)
@@ -18674,7 +18674,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
break;
}
- /*
+ /*
** Return an approximation for the amount of memory currently used
** by all pagers associated with the given database connection. The
** highwater mark is meaningless and is returned as zero.
@@ -18718,7 +18718,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
HashElem *p;
nByte += sqlite3GlobalConfig.m.xRoundup(sizeof(HashElem)) * (
- pSchema->tblHash.count
+ pSchema->tblHash.count
+ pSchema->trigHash.count
+ pSchema->idxHash.count
+ pSchema->fkeyHash.count
@@ -18768,7 +18768,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
/*
** Set *pCurrent to the total cache hits or misses encountered by all
- ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set
+ ** pagers the database handle is connected to. *pHighwater is always set
** to zero.
*/
case SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT:
@@ -18824,7 +18824,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains the C functions that implement date and time
-** functions for SQLite.
+** functions for SQLite.
**
** There is only one exported symbol in this file - the function
** sqlite3RegisterDateTimeFunctions() found at the bottom of the file.
@@ -18833,7 +18833,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_status(
** SQLite processes all times and dates as julian day numbers. The
** dates and times are stored as the number of days since noon
** in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C. according to the Gregorian
-** calendar system.
+** calendar system.
**
** 1970-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2440587.5
** 2000-01-01 00:00:00 is JD 2451544.5
@@ -19181,7 +19181,7 @@ static void setRawDateNumber(DateTime *p, double r){
** The following are acceptable forms for the input string:
**
** YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.FFF +/-HH:MM
-** DDDD.DD
+** DDDD.DD
** now
**
** In the first form, the +/-HH:MM is always optional. The fractional
@@ -19191,8 +19191,8 @@ static void setRawDateNumber(DateTime *p, double r){
** as there is a year and date.
*/
static int parseDateOrTime(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- const char *zDate,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ const char *zDate,
DateTime *p
){
double r;
@@ -19213,7 +19213,7 @@ static int parseDateOrTime(
** Multiplying this by 86400000 gives 464269060799999 as the maximum value
** for DateTime.iJD.
**
-** But some older compilers (ex: gcc 4.2.1 on older Macs) cannot deal with
+** But some older compilers (ex: gcc 4.2.1 on older Macs) cannot deal with
** such a large integer literal, so we have to encode it.
*/
#define INT_464269060799999 ((((i64)0x1a640)<<32)|0x1072fdff)
@@ -19293,14 +19293,14 @@ static void clearYMD_HMS_TZ(DateTime *p){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_LOCALTIME
/*
** On recent Windows platforms, the localtime_s() function is available
-** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to
-** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the
+** as part of the "Secure CRT". It is essentially equivalent to
+** localtime_r() available under most POSIX platforms, except that the
** order of the parameters is reversed.
**
** See http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/a442x3ye(VS.80).aspx.
**
** If the user has not indicated to use localtime_r() or localtime_s()
-** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides
+** already, check for an MSVC build environment that provides
** localtime_s().
*/
#if !HAVE_LOCALTIME_R && !HAVE_LOCALTIME_S \
@@ -19356,7 +19356,7 @@ static int osLocaltime(time_t *t, struct tm *pTm){
/*
** Compute the difference (in milliseconds) between localtime and UTC
** (a.k.a. GMT) for the time value p where p is in UTC. If no error occurs,
-** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK.
+** return this value and set *pRc to SQLITE_OK.
**
** Or, if an error does occur, set *pRc to SQLITE_ERROR. The returned value
** is undefined in this case.
@@ -19682,9 +19682,9 @@ static int parseModifier(
** then assume a default value of "now" for argv[0].
*/
static int isDate(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
- sqlite3_value **argv,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
+ sqlite3_value **argv,
DateTime *p
){
int i, n;
@@ -20491,17 +20491,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vfs_unregister(sqlite3_vfs *pVfs){
**
*************************************************************************
**
-** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign"
+** This file contains code to support the concept of "benign"
** malloc failures (when the xMalloc() or xRealloc() method of the
** sqlite3_mem_methods structure fails to allocate a block of memory
-** and returns 0).
+** and returns 0).
**
** Most malloc failures are non-benign. After they occur, SQLite
** abandons the current operation and returns an error code (usually
** SQLITE_NOMEM) to the user. However, sometimes a fault is not necessarily
-** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this
-** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The
-** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure
+** fatal. For example, if a malloc fails while resizing a hash table, this
+** is completely recoverable simply by not carrying out the resize. The
+** hash table will continue to function normally. So a malloc failure
** during a hash table resize is a benign fault.
*/
@@ -20701,7 +20701,7 @@ static malloc_zone_t* _sqliteZone_;
#else /* if not __APPLE__ */
/*
-** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems.
+** Use standard C library malloc and free on non-Apple systems.
** Also used by Apple systems if SQLITE_WITHOUT_ZONEMALLOC is defined.
*/
#define SQLITE_MALLOC(x) malloc(x)
@@ -20881,13 +20881,13 @@ static int sqlite3MemInit(void *NotUsed){
/* defer MT decisions to system malloc */
_sqliteZone_ = malloc_default_zone();
}else{
- /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
+ /* only 1 core, use our own zone to contention over global locks,
** e.g. we have our own dedicated locks */
bool success;
malloc_zone_t* newzone = malloc_create_zone(4096, 0);
malloc_set_zone_name(newzone, "Sqlite_Heap");
do{
- success = OSAtomicCompareAndSwapPtrBarrier(NULL, newzone,
+ success = OSAtomicCompareAndSwapPtrBarrier(NULL, newzone,
(void * volatile *)&_sqliteZone_);
}while(!_sqliteZone_);
if( !success ){
@@ -21014,7 +21014,7 @@ struct MemBlockHdr {
** when this module is combined with other in the amalgamation.
*/
static struct {
-
+
/*
** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
*/
@@ -21025,7 +21025,7 @@ static struct {
*/
struct MemBlockHdr *pFirst;
struct MemBlockHdr *pLast;
-
+
/*
** The number of levels of backtrace to save in new allocations.
*/
@@ -21038,7 +21038,7 @@ static struct {
int nTitle; /* Bytes of zTitle to save. Includes '\0' and padding */
char zTitle[100]; /* The title text */
- /*
+ /*
** sqlite3MallocDisallow() increments the following counter.
** sqlite3MallocAllow() decrements it.
*/
@@ -21097,7 +21097,7 @@ static struct MemBlockHdr *sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(void *pAllocation){
pU8 = (u8*)pAllocation;
assert( pInt[nReserve/sizeof(int)]==(int)REARGUARD );
/* This checks any of the "extra" bytes allocated due
- ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure
+ ** to rounding up to an 8 byte boundary to ensure
** they haven't been overwritten.
*/
while( nReserve-- > p->iSize ) assert( pU8[nReserve]==0x65 );
@@ -21226,7 +21226,7 @@ static void *sqlite3MemMalloc(int nByte){
p = (void*)pInt;
}
sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
- return p;
+ return p;
}
/*
@@ -21236,7 +21236,7 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
struct MemBlockHdr *pHdr;
void **pBt;
char *z;
- assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0
+ assert( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bMemstat || sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0
|| mem.mutex!=0 );
pHdr = sqlite3MemsysGetHeader(pPrior);
pBt = (void**)pHdr;
@@ -21262,15 +21262,15 @@ static void sqlite3MemFree(void *pPrior){
randomFill(z, sizeof(void*)*pHdr->nBacktraceSlots + sizeof(*pHdr) +
(int)pHdr->iSize + sizeof(int) + pHdr->nTitle);
free(z);
- sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
+ sqlite3_mutex_leave(mem.mutex);
}
/*
** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
**
** For this debugging implementation, we *always* make a copy of the
-** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the
-** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is
+** allocation into a new place in memory. In this way, if the
+** higher level code is using pointer to the old allocation, it is
** much more likely to break and we are much more liking to find
** the error.
*/
@@ -21404,7 +21404,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugSync(){
}
/*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
** allocations into that log.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
@@ -21421,7 +21421,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
for(pHdr=mem.pFirst; pHdr; pHdr=pHdr->pNext){
char *z = (char*)pHdr;
z -= pHdr->nBacktraceSlots*sizeof(void*) + pHdr->nTitle;
- fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n",
+ fprintf(out, "**** %lld bytes at %p from %s ****\n",
pHdr->iSize, &pHdr[1], pHdr->nTitle ? z : "???");
if( pHdr->nBacktrace ){
fflush(out);
@@ -21434,7 +21434,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemdebugDump(const char *zFilename){
fprintf(out, "COUNTS:\n");
for(i=0; i= M*(1 + log2(n)/2) - n + 1
@@ -22206,7 +22206,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const sqlite3_mem_methods *sqlite3MemGetMemsys3(void){
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/*
-** This version of the memory allocator is used only when
+** This version of the memory allocator is used only when
** SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5 is defined.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMSYS5
@@ -22251,7 +22251,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global {
int szAtom; /* Smallest possible allocation in bytes */
int nBlock; /* Number of szAtom sized blocks in zPool */
u8 *zPool; /* Memory available to be allocated */
-
+
/*
** Mutex to control access to the memory allocation subsystem.
*/
@@ -22270,7 +22270,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct Mem5Global {
u32 maxCount; /* Maximum instantaneous currentCount */
u32 maxRequest; /* Largest allocation (exclusive of internal frag) */
#endif
-
+
/*
** Lists of free blocks. aiFreelist[0] is a list of free blocks of
** size mem5.szAtom. aiFreelist[1] holds blocks of size szAtom*2.
@@ -22446,7 +22446,7 @@ static void memsys5FreeUnsafe(void *pOld){
u32 size, iLogsize;
int iBlock;
- /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in
+ /* Set iBlock to the index of the block pointed to by pOld in
** the array of mem5.szAtom byte blocks pointed to by mem5.zPool.
*/
iBlock = (int)(((u8 *)pOld-mem5.zPool)/mem5.szAtom);
@@ -22515,7 +22515,7 @@ static void *memsys5Malloc(int nBytes){
p = memsys5MallocUnsafe(nBytes);
memsys5Leave();
}
- return (void*)p;
+ return (void*)p;
}
/*
@@ -22528,14 +22528,14 @@ static void memsys5Free(void *pPrior){
assert( pPrior!=0 );
memsys5Enter();
memsys5FreeUnsafe(pPrior);
- memsys5Leave();
+ memsys5Leave();
}
/*
** Change the size of an existing memory allocation.
**
** The outer layer memory allocator prevents this routine from
-** being called with pPrior==0.
+** being called with pPrior==0.
**
** nBytes is always a value obtained from a prior call to
** memsys5Round(). Hence nBytes is always a non-negative power
@@ -22668,7 +22668,7 @@ static void memsys5Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
/*
-** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
+** Open the file indicated and write a log of all unfreed memory
** allocations into that log.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){
@@ -22710,7 +22710,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Memsys5Dump(const char *zFilename){
#endif
/*
-** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
+** This routine is the only routine in this file with external
** linkage. It returns a pointer to a static sqlite3_mem_methods
** struct populated with the memsys5 methods.
*/
@@ -22763,11 +22763,11 @@ static SQLITE_WSD int mutexIsInit = 0;
/*
** Initialize the mutex system.
*/
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MutexInit(void){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( !sqlite3GlobalConfig.mutex.xMutexAlloc ){
/* If the xMutexAlloc method has not been set, then the user did not
- ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to
+ ** install a mutex implementation via sqlite3_config() prior to
** sqlite3_initialize() being called. This block copies pointers to
** the default implementation into the sqlite3GlobalConfig structure.
*/
@@ -22874,7 +22874,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_try(sqlite3_mutex *p){
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_leave() routine exits a mutex that was previously
-** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex
+** entered by the same thread. The behavior is undefined if the mutex
** is not currently entered. If a NULL pointer is passed as an argument
** this function is a no-op.
*/
@@ -22943,9 +22943,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_mutex_notheld(sqlite3_mutex *p){
*/
static int noopMutexInit(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
static int noopMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
-static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){
+static sqlite3_mutex *noopMutexAlloc(int id){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(id);
- return (sqlite3_mutex*)8;
+ return (sqlite3_mutex*)8;
}
static void noopMutexFree(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; }
static void noopMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){ UNUSED_PARAMETER(p); return; }
@@ -23010,7 +23010,7 @@ static int debugMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
/*
** The sqlite3_mutex_alloc() routine allocates a new
** mutex and returns a pointer to it. If it returns NULL
-** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
+** that means that a mutex could not be allocated.
*/
static sqlite3_mutex *debugMutexAlloc(int id){
static sqlite3_debug_mutex aStatic[SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_VFS3 - 1];
@@ -23187,7 +23187,7 @@ struct sqlite3_mutex {
** there might be race conditions that can cause these routines to
** deliver incorrect results. In particular, if pthread_equal() is
** not an atomic operation, then these routines might delivery
-** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
+** incorrect results. On most platforms, pthread_equal() is a
** comparison of two integers and is therefore atomic. But we are
** told that HPUX is not such a platform. If so, then these routines
** will not always work correctly on HPUX.
@@ -23269,7 +23269,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexEnd(void){ return SQLITE_OK; }
**
** Note that if one of the dynamic mutex parameters (SQLITE_MUTEX_FAST
** or SQLITE_MUTEX_RECURSIVE) is used then sqlite3_mutex_alloc()
-** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
+** returns a different mutex on every call. But for the static
** mutex types, the same mutex is returned on every call that has
** the same type number.
*/
@@ -23374,7 +23374,7 @@ static void pthreadMutexEnter(sqlite3_mutex *p){
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
@@ -23417,7 +23417,7 @@ static int pthreadMutexTry(sqlite3_mutex *p){
** is atomic - that it cannot be deceived into thinking self
** and p->owner are equal if p->owner changes between two values
** that are not equal to self while the comparison is taking place.
- ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
+ ** This implementation also assumes a coherent cache - that
** separate processes cannot read different values from the same
** address at the same time. If either of these two conditions
** are not met, then the mutexes will fail and problems will result.
@@ -23629,7 +23629,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex_methods const *sqlite3DefaultMutex(void){
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -24298,7 +24298,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_memory_alarm(
#endif
/*
-** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or
+** Set the soft heap-size limit for the library. Passing a zero or
** negative value indicates no limit.
*/
SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_soft_heap_limit64(sqlite3_int64 n){
@@ -24410,7 +24410,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3_memory_highwater(int resetFlag){
}
/*
-** Trigger the alarm
+** Trigger the alarm
*/
static void sqlite3MallocAlarm(int nByte){
if( mem0.alarmThreshold<=0 ) return;
@@ -24732,7 +24732,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3Realloc(void *pOld, u64 nBytes){
sqlite3_mutex_enter(mem0.mutex);
sqlite3StatusHighwater(SQLITE_STATUS_MALLOC_SIZE, (int)nBytes);
nDiff = nNew - nOld;
- if( nDiff>0 && sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >=
+ if( nDiff>0 && sqlite3StatusValue(SQLITE_STATUS_MEMORY_USED) >=
mem0.alarmThreshold-nDiff ){
sqlite3MallocAlarm(nDiff);
}
@@ -24774,7 +24774,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_realloc64(void *pOld, sqlite3_uint64 n){
/*
** Allocate and zero memory.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3MallocZero(u64 n){
void *p = sqlite3Malloc(n);
if( p ){
@@ -24804,13 +24804,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE void *dbMallocRawFinish(sqlite3 *db, u64 n){
assert( db!=0 );
p = sqlite3Malloc(n);
if( !p ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
- sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p,
+ sqlite3MemdebugSetType(p,
(db->lookaside.bDisable==0) ? MEMTYPE_LOOKASIDE : MEMTYPE_HEAP);
return p;
}
/*
-** Allocate memory, either lookaside (if possible) or heap.
+** Allocate memory, either lookaside (if possible) or heap.
** If the allocation fails, set the mallocFailed flag in
** the connection pointer.
**
@@ -24927,9 +24927,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(sqlite3 *db, void *p, u64 n){
}
/*
-** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These
+** Make a copy of a string in memory obtained from sqliteMalloc(). These
** functions call sqlite3MallocRaw() directly instead of sqliteMalloc(). This
-** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are
+** is because when memory debugging is turned on, these two functions are
** called via macros that record the current file and line number in the
** ThreadData structure.
*/
@@ -25011,20 +25011,20 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int apiOomError(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e.
+** This function must be called before exiting any API function (i.e.
** returning control to the user) that has called sqlite3_malloc or
** sqlite3_realloc.
**
** The returned value is normally a copy of the second argument to this
** function. However, if a malloc() failure has occurred since the previous
-** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead.
+** invocation SQLITE_NOMEM is returned instead.
**
** If an OOM as occurred, then the connection error-code (the value
** returned by sqlite3_errcode()) is set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){
/* If the db handle must hold the connection handle mutex here.
- ** Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed
+ ** Otherwise the read (and possible write) of db->mallocFailed
** is unsafe, as is the call to sqlite3Error().
*/
assert( db!=0 );
@@ -25039,7 +25039,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ApiExit(sqlite3* db, int rc){
/************** Begin file printf.c ******************************************/
/*
** The "printf" code that follows dates from the 1980's. It is in
-** the public domain.
+** the public domain.
**
**************************************************************************
**
@@ -25268,7 +25268,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VXPrintf(
break;
}
/* Find out what flags are present */
- flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign =
+ flag_leftjustify = flag_plussign = flag_blanksign =
flag_alternateform = flag_altform2 = flag_zeropad = 0;
done = 0;
do{
@@ -25550,7 +25550,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VXPrintf(
e2 = exp;
}
if( MAX(e2,0)+(i64)precision+(i64)width > etBUFSIZE - 15 ){
- bufpt = zExtra
+ bufpt = zExtra
= sqlite3Malloc( MAX(e2,0)+(i64)precision+(i64)width+15 );
if( bufpt==0 ){
setStrAccumError(pAccum, STRACCUM_NOMEM);
@@ -26001,7 +26001,7 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_vmprintf(const char *zFormat, va_list ap){
char zBase[SQLITE_PRINT_BUF_SIZE];
StrAccum acc;
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
if( zFormat==0 ){
(void)SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
return 0;
@@ -26153,7 +26153,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3XPrintf(StrAccum *p, const char *zFormat, ...){
**
** This file contains C code to implement the TreeView debugging routines.
** These routines print a parse tree to standard output for debugging and
-** analysis.
+** analysis.
**
** The interfaces in this file is only available when compiling
** with SQLITE_DEBUG.
@@ -26318,7 +26318,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewSelect(TreeView *pView, const Select *p, u8 m
sqlite3XPrintf(&x, " LEFT-JOIN");
}
sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&x);
- sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, ipSrc->nSrc-1);
+ sqlite3TreeViewItem(pView, zLine, ipSrc->nSrc-1);
if( pItem->pSelect ){
sqlite3TreeViewSelect(pView, pItem->pSelect, 0);
}
@@ -26564,7 +26564,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TreeViewExpr(TreeView *pView, const Expr *pExpr, u8 m
** is set to the column of the pseudo-table to read, or to -1 to
** read the rowid field.
*/
- sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)",
+ sqlite3TreeViewLine(pView, "%s(%d)",
pExpr->iTable ? "NEW" : "OLD", pExpr->iColumn);
break;
}
@@ -26865,13 +26865,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadCreate(
memset(p, 0, sizeof(*p));
p->xTask = xTask;
p->pIn = pIn;
- /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
+ /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
** function that returns SQLITE_ERROR when passed the argument 200, that
- ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
+ ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
** for testing purposes. */
if( sqlite3FaultSim(200) ){
rc = 1;
- }else{
+ }else{
rc = pthread_create(&p->tid, 0, xTask, pIn);
}
if( rc ){
@@ -26953,9 +26953,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadCreate(
*ppThread = 0;
p = sqlite3Malloc(sizeof(*p));
if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
- /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
+ /* If the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_FAULT_INSTALL callback is registered to a
** function that returns SQLITE_ERROR when passed the argument 200, that
- ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
+ ** forces worker threads to run sequentially and deterministically
** (via the sqlite3FaultSim() term of the conditional) for testing
** purposes. */
if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.bCoreMutex==0 || sqlite3FaultSim(200) ){
@@ -27084,7 +27084,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ThreadJoin(SQLiteThread *p, void **ppOut){
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8,
+** This file contains routines used to translate between UTF-8,
** UTF-16, UTF-16BE, and UTF-16LE.
**
** Notes on UTF-8:
@@ -27265,7 +27265,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3Utf8Read(
/*
** If the TRANSLATE_TRACE macro is defined, the value of each Mem is
** printed on stderr on the way into and out of sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate().
-*/
+*/
/* #define TRANSLATE_TRACE 1 */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
@@ -27296,7 +27296,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired
}
#endif
- /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then
+ /* If the translation is between UTF-16 little and big endian, then
** all that is required is to swap the byte order. This case is handled
** differently from the others.
*/
@@ -27374,13 +27374,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SQLITE_NOINLINE int sqlite3VdbeMemTranslate(Mem *pMem, u8 desired
if( pMem->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE ){
/* UTF-16 Little-endian -> UTF-8 */
while( zIn UTF-8 */
while( zIn=zEnd ) goto do_atof_calc; /*PREVENTS-HARMLESS-OVERREAD*/
@@ -28103,7 +28103,7 @@ do_atof_calc:
}
}
}else{
- /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be
+ /* 1.0e+22 is the largest power of 10 than can be
** represented exactly. */
while( e%22 ) { scale *= 1.0e+1; e -= 1; }
while( e>0 ) { scale *= 1.0e+22; e -= 22; }
@@ -28161,11 +28161,11 @@ static int compare2pow63(const char *zNum, int incr){
** Convert zNum to a 64-bit signed integer. zNum must be decimal. This
** routine does *not* accept hexadecimal notation.
**
-** If the zNum value is representable as a 64-bit twos-complement
+** If the zNum value is representable as a 64-bit twos-complement
** integer, then write that value into *pNum and return 0.
**
** If zNum is exactly 9223372036854775808, return 2. This special
-** case is broken out because while 9223372036854775808 cannot be a
+** case is broken out because while 9223372036854775808 cannot be a
** signed 64-bit integer, its negative -9223372036854775808 can be.
**
** If zNum is too big for a 64-bit integer and is not
@@ -28396,7 +28396,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE putVarint64(unsigned char *p, u64 v){
v >>= 7;
}
return 9;
- }
+ }
n = 0;
do{
buf[n++] = (u8)((v & 0x7f) | 0x80);
@@ -28606,8 +28606,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint(const unsigned char *p, u64 *v){
** If the varint stored in p[0] is larger than can fit in a 32-bit unsigned
** integer, then set *v to 0xffffffff.
**
-** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
-** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
+** A MACRO version, getVarint32, is provided which inlines the
+** single-byte case. All code should use the MACRO version as
** this function assumes the single-byte case has already been handled.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3GetVarint32(const unsigned char *p, u32 *v){
@@ -28825,7 +28825,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3HexToBlob(sqlite3 *db, const char *z, int n){
** argument. The zType is a word like "NULL" or "closed" or "invalid".
*/
static void logBadConnection(const char *zType){
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"API call with %s database connection pointer",
zType
);
@@ -28899,7 +28899,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AddInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
if( iA<0 && -(iA + LARGEST_INT64) > iB + 1 ) return 1;
}
*pA += iB;
- return 0;
+ return 0;
#endif
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SubInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
@@ -28945,7 +28945,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MulInt64(i64 *pA, i64 iB){
}
/*
-** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or
+** Compute the absolute value of a 32-bit signed integer, of possible. Or
** if the integer has a value of -2147483648, return +2147483647
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AbsInt32(int x){
@@ -28985,11 +28985,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FileSuffix3(const char *zBaseFilename, char *z){
}
#endif
-/*
+/*
** Find (an approximate) sum of two LogEst values. This computation is
** not a simple "+" operator because LogEst is stored as a logarithmic
** value.
-**
+**
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE LogEst sqlite3LogEstAdd(LogEst a, LogEst b){
static const unsigned char x[] = {
@@ -29097,8 +29097,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
** Conceptually:
**
** struct VList {
-** int nAlloc; // Number of allocated slots
-** int nUsed; // Number of used slots
+** int nAlloc; // Number of allocated slots
+** int nUsed; // Number of used slots
** struct VListEntry {
** int iValue; // Value for this entry
** int nSlot; // Slots used by this entry
@@ -29107,7 +29107,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u64 sqlite3LogEstToInt(LogEst x){
** }
**
** During code generation, pointers to the variable names within the
-** VList are taken. When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
+** VList are taken. When that happens, nAlloc is set to zero as an
** indication that the VList may never again be enlarged, since the
** accompanying realloc() would invalidate the pointers.
*/
@@ -29298,7 +29298,7 @@ static int rehash(Hash *pH, unsigned int new_size){
/* The inability to allocates space for a larger hash table is
** a performance hit but it is not a fatal error. So mark the
- ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of
+ ** allocation as a benign. Use sqlite3Malloc()/memset(0) instead of
** sqlite3MallocZero() to make the allocation, as sqlite3MallocZero()
** only zeroes the requested number of bytes whereas this module will
** use the actual amount of space allocated for the hash table (which
@@ -29348,7 +29348,7 @@ static HashElem *findElementWithHash(
*pHash = h;
while( count-- ){
assert( elem!=0 );
- if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){
+ if( sqlite3StrICmp(elem->pKey,pKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
@@ -29366,7 +29366,7 @@ static void removeElementGivenHash(
){
struct _ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
- elem->prev->next = elem->next;
+ elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
@@ -29698,7 +29698,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){
** Styles 4, 5, and 7 are only available of SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
** is defined to 1. The SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE also enables automatic
** selection of the appropriate locking style based on the filesystem
-** where the database is located.
+** where the database is located.
*/
#if !defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE)
# if defined(__APPLE__)
@@ -29809,7 +29809,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3OpcodeName(int i){
#define osGetpid(X) (pid_t)getpid()
/*
-** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
+** Only set the lastErrno if the error code is a real error and not
** a normal expected return code of SQLITE_BUSY or SQLITE_OK
*/
#define IS_LOCK_ERROR(x) ((x != SQLITE_OK) && (x != SQLITE_BUSY))
@@ -29876,7 +29876,7 @@ struct unixFile {
** whenever any part of the database changes. An assertion fault will
** occur if a file is updated without also updating the transaction
** counter. This test is made to avoid new problems similar to the
- ** one described by ticket #3584.
+ ** one described by ticket #3584.
*/
unsigned char transCntrChng; /* True if the transaction counter changed */
unsigned char dbUpdate; /* True if any part of database file changed */
@@ -29885,7 +29885,7 @@ struct unixFile {
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
- /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
+ /* In test mode, increase the size of this structure a bit so that
** it is larger than the struct CrashFile defined in test6.c.
*/
char aPadding[32];
@@ -30015,7 +30015,7 @@ static pid_t randomnessPid = 0;
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -30214,7 +30214,7 @@ static struct unix_syscall {
#ifdef __DJGPP__
{ "fstat", 0, 0 },
#define osFstat(a,b,c) 0
-#else
+#else
{ "fstat", (sqlite3_syscall_ptr)fstat, 0 },
#define osFstat ((int(*)(int,struct stat*))aSyscall[5].pCurrent)
#endif
@@ -30436,7 +30436,7 @@ static const char *unixNextSystemCall(sqlite3_vfs *p, const char *zName){
/*
** Do not accept any file descriptor less than this value, in order to avoid
-** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
+** opening database file using file descriptors that are commonly used for
** standard input, output, and error.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR
@@ -30475,7 +30475,7 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
}
if( fd>=SQLITE_MINIMUM_FILE_DESCRIPTOR ) break;
osClose(fd);
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_WARNING,
"attempt to open \"%s\" as file descriptor %d", z, fd);
fd = -1;
if( osOpen("/dev/null", f, m)<0 ) break;
@@ -30483,9 +30483,9 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
if( fd>=0 ){
if( m!=0 ){
struct stat statbuf;
- if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
+ if( osFstat(fd, &statbuf)==0
&& statbuf.st_size==0
- && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
+ && (statbuf.st_mode&0777)!=m
){
osFchmod(fd, m);
}
@@ -30500,11 +30500,11 @@ static int robust_open(const char *z, int f, mode_t m){
/*
** Helper functions to obtain and relinquish the global mutex. The
** global mutex is used to protect the unixInodeInfo and
-** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
+** vxworksFileId objects used by this file, all of which may be
** shared by multiple threads.
**
-** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
-** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
+** Function unixMutexHeld() is used to assert() that the global mutex
+** is held when required. This function is only used as part of assert()
** statements. e.g.
**
** unixEnterMutex()
@@ -30612,7 +30612,7 @@ static int lockTrace(int fd, int op, struct flock *p){
static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
int rc;
#ifdef __ANDROID__
- /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
+ /* On Android, ftruncate() always uses 32-bit offsets, even if
** _FILE_OFFSET_BITS=64 is defined. This means it is unsafe to attempt to
** truncate a file to any size larger than 2GiB. Silently ignore any
** such attempts. */
@@ -30628,32 +30628,32 @@ static int robust_ftruncate(int h, sqlite3_int64 sz){
** This routine translates a standard POSIX errno code into something
** useful to the clients of the sqlite3 functions. Specifically, it is
** intended to translate a variety of "try again" errors into SQLITE_BUSY
-** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
+** and a variety of "please close the file descriptor NOW" errors into
** SQLITE_IOERR
-**
+**
** Errors during initialization of locks, or file system support for locks,
** should handle ENOLCK, ENOTSUP, EOPNOTSUPP separately.
*/
static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
- assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
- (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
+ assert( (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK) ||
+ (sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK) ||
(sqliteIOErr == SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK) );
switch (posixError) {
- case EACCES:
+ case EACCES:
case EAGAIN:
case ETIMEDOUT:
case EBUSY:
case EINTR:
- case ENOLCK:
- /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
+ case ENOLCK:
+ /* random NFS retry error, unless during file system support
* introspection, in which it actually means what it says */
return SQLITE_BUSY;
-
- case EPERM:
+
+ case EPERM:
return SQLITE_PERM;
-
- default:
+
+ default:
return sqliteIOErr;
}
}
@@ -30668,7 +30668,7 @@ static int sqliteErrorFromPosixError(int posixError, int sqliteIOErr) {
**
** A pointer to an instance of the following structure can be used as a
** unique file ID in VxWorks. Each instance of this structure contains
-** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
+** a copy of the canonical filename. There is also a reference count.
** The structure is reclaimed when the number of pointers to it drops to
** zero.
**
@@ -30684,7 +30684,7 @@ struct vxworksFileId {
};
#if OS_VXWORKS
-/*
+/*
** All unique filenames are held on a linked list headed by this
** variable:
*/
@@ -30756,7 +30756,7 @@ static struct vxworksFileId *vxworksFindFileId(const char *zAbsoluteName){
*/
unixEnterMutex();
for(pCandidate=vxworksFileList; pCandidate; pCandidate=pCandidate->pNext){
- if( pCandidate->nName==n
+ if( pCandidate->nName==n
&& memcmp(pCandidate->zCanonicalName, pNew->zCanonicalName, n)==0
){
sqlite3_free(pNew);
@@ -30849,7 +30849,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
** cnt>0 means there are cnt shared locks on the file.
**
** Any attempt to lock or unlock a file first checks the locking
-** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
+** structure. The fcntl() system call is only invoked to set a
** POSIX lock if the internal lock structure transitions between
** a locked and an unlocked state.
**
@@ -30882,7 +30882,7 @@ static void vxworksReleaseFileId(struct vxworksFileId *pId){
**
** SQLite used to support LinuxThreads. But support for LinuxThreads
** was dropped beginning with version 3.7.0. SQLite will still work with
-** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
+** LinuxThreads provided that (1) there is no more than one connection
** per database file in the same process and (2) database connections
** do not move across threads.
*/
@@ -30899,7 +30899,7 @@ struct unixFileId {
/* We are told that some versions of Android contain a bug that
** sizes ino_t at only 32-bits instead of 64-bits. (See
** https://android-review.googlesource.com/#/c/115351/3/dist/sqlite3.c)
- ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
+ ** To work around this, always allocate 64-bits for the inode number.
** On small machines that only have 32-bit inodes, this wastes 4 bytes,
** but that should not be a big deal. */
/* WAS: ino_t ino; */
@@ -30952,7 +30952,7 @@ static unixInodeInfo *inodeList = 0;
** strerror_r().
**
** The first argument passed to the macro should be the error code that
-** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
+** will be returned to SQLite (e.g. SQLITE_IOERR_DELETE, SQLITE_CANTOPEN).
** The two subsequent arguments should be the name of the OS function that
** failed (e.g. "unlink", "open") and the associated file-system path,
** if any.
@@ -30970,7 +30970,7 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
/* If this is not a threadsafe build (SQLITE_THREADSAFE==0), then use
** the strerror() function to obtain the human-readable error message
** equivalent to errno. Otherwise, use strerror_r().
- */
+ */
#if SQLITE_THREADSAFE && defined(HAVE_STRERROR_R)
char aErr[80];
memset(aErr, 0, sizeof(aErr));
@@ -30978,18 +30978,18 @@ static int unixLogErrorAtLine(
/* If STRERROR_R_CHAR_P (set by autoconf scripts) or __USE_GNU is defined,
** assume that the system provides the GNU version of strerror_r() that
- ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
- ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
- ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
+ ** returns a pointer to a buffer containing the error message. That pointer
+ ** may point to aErr[], or it may point to some static storage somewhere.
+ ** Otherwise, assume that the system provides the POSIX version of
** strerror_r(), which always writes an error message into aErr[].
**
** If the code incorrectly assumes that it is the POSIX version that is
** available, the error message will often be an empty string. Not a
- ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
+ ** huge problem. Incorrectly concluding that the GNU version is available
** could lead to a segfault though.
*/
#if defined(STRERROR_R_CHAR_P) || defined(__USE_GNU)
- zErr =
+ zErr =
# endif
strerror_r(iErrno, aErr, sizeof(aErr)-1);
@@ -31040,7 +31040,7 @@ static void storeLastErrno(unixFile *pFile, int error){
/*
** Close all file descriptors accumuated in the unixInodeInfo->pUnused list.
-*/
+*/
static void closePendingFds(unixFile *pFile){
unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
UnixUnusedFd *p;
@@ -31188,7 +31188,7 @@ static int fileHasMoved(unixFile *pFile){
return 0;
return pFile->pInode!=0 &&
- (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
+ (osStat(pFile->zPath, &buf)!=0
|| (u64)buf.st_ino!=pFile->pInode->fileId.ino);
#endif
}
@@ -31269,7 +31269,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
}
}
#endif
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (unix)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
@@ -31278,7 +31278,7 @@ static int unixCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
}
/*
-** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is
+** Attempt to set a system-lock on the file pFile. The lock is
** described by pLock.
**
** If the pFile was opened read/write from unix-excl, then the only lock
@@ -31370,7 +31370,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
**
** A process may only obtain a RESERVED lock after it has a SHARED lock.
** A RESERVED lock is implemented by grabbing a write-lock on the
- ** 'reserved byte'.
+ ** 'reserved byte'.
**
** A process may only obtain a PENDING lock after it has obtained a
** SHARED lock. A PENDING lock is implemented by obtaining a write-lock
@@ -31384,7 +31384,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
** implemented by obtaining a write-lock on the entire 'shared byte
** range'. Since all other locks require a read-lock on one of the bytes
** within this range, this ensures that no other locks are held on the
- ** database.
+ ** database.
*/
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
@@ -31425,7 +31425,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
+ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
(pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -31436,7 +31436,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -31454,7 +31454,7 @@ static int unixLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
*/
lock.l_len = 1L;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
|| (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLockh, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (unix)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
return rc;
}
@@ -31588,11 +31588,11 @@ static void setPendingFd(unixFile *pFile){
**
** If the locking level of the file descriptor is already at or below
** the requested locking level, this routine is a no-op.
-**
+**
** If handleNFSUnlock is true, then on downgrading an EXCLUSIVE_LOCK to SHARED
** the byte range is divided into 2 parts and the first part is unlocked then
-** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
-** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
+** set to a read lock, then the other part is simply unlocked. This works
+** around a bug in BSD NFS lockd (also seen on MacOSX 10.3+) that fails to
** remove the write lock on a region when a read lock is set.
*/
static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
@@ -31630,7 +31630,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
/* downgrading to a shared lock on NFS involves clearing the write lock
** before establishing the readlock - to avoid a race condition we downgrade
- ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
+ ** the lock in 2 blocks, so that part of the range will be covered by a
** write lock until the rest is covered by a read lock:
** 1: [WWWWW]
** 2: [....W]
@@ -31646,7 +31646,7 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
if( handleNFSUnlock ){
int tErrno; /* Error code from system call errors */
off_t divSize = SHARED_SIZE - 1;
-
+
lock.l_type = F_UNLCK;
lock.l_whence = SEEK_SET;
lock.l_start = SHARED_FIRST;
@@ -31688,11 +31688,11 @@ static int posixUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock, int handleNFSUnlock){
lock.l_len = SHARED_SIZE;
if( unixFileLock(pFile, &lock) ){
/* In theory, the call to unixFileLock() cannot fail because another
- ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
+ ** process is holding an incompatible lock. If it does, this
** indicates that the other process is not following the locking
** protocol. If this happens, return SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK. Returning
- ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
- ** an assert to fail). */
+ ** SQLITE_BUSY would confuse the upper layer (in practice it causes
+ ** an assert to fail). */
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_RDLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
goto end_unlock;
@@ -31768,7 +31768,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd);
#endif
/*
-** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
+** This function performs the parts of the "close file" operation
** common to all locking schemes. It closes the directory and file
** handles, if they are valid, and sets all fields of the unixFile
** structure to 0.
@@ -31826,7 +31826,7 @@ static int unixClose(sqlite3_file *id){
if( ALWAYS(pFile->pInode) && pFile->pInode->nLock ){
/* If there are outstanding locks, do not actually close the file just
** yet because that would clear those locks. Instead, add the file
- ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
+ ** descriptor to pInode->pUnused list. It will be automatically closed
** when the last lock is cleared.
*/
setPendingFd(pFile);
@@ -31925,7 +31925,7 @@ static int dotlockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
reserved = osAccess((const char*)pFile->lockingContext, 0)==0;
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
@@ -31979,7 +31979,7 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
#endif
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
rc = osMkdir(zLockFile, 0777);
if( rc<0 ){
@@ -31994,8 +31994,8 @@ static int dotlockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
}
}
return rc;
- }
-
+ }
+
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return rc;
@@ -32019,7 +32019,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (dotlock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32032,7 +32032,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
pFile->eFileLock = SHARED_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* To fully unlock the database, delete the lock file */
assert( eFileLock==NO_LOCK );
rc = osRmdir(zLockFile);
@@ -32044,7 +32044,7 @@ static int dotlockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32091,7 +32091,7 @@ static int robust_flock(int fd, int op){
#else
# define robust_flock(a,b) flock(a,b)
#endif
-
+
/*
** This routine checks if there is a RESERVED lock held on the specified
@@ -32103,16 +32103,16 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
-
+
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
/* attempt to get the lock */
@@ -32123,7 +32123,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
if ( lrc ) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* unlock failed with an error */
- lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
+ lrc = SQLITE_IOERR_UNLOCK;
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
rc = lrc;
}
@@ -32131,7 +32131,7 @@ static int flockCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
int tErrno = errno;
reserved = 1;
/* someone else might have it reserved */
- lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
+ lrc = sqliteErrorFromPosixError(tErrno, SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc) ){
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
rc = lrc;
@@ -32185,15 +32185,15 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
assert( pFile );
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* grab an exclusive lock */
-
+
if (robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_EX | LOCK_NB)) {
int tErrno = errno;
/* didn't get, must be busy */
@@ -32205,7 +32205,7 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
/* got it, set the type and return ok */
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
}
- OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (flock)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
#ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
if( (rc & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR ){
@@ -32225,23 +32225,23 @@ static int flockLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
*/
static int flockUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (flock)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really, unlock. */
if( robust_flock(pFile->h, LOCK_UN) ){
#ifdef SQLITE_IGNORE_FLOCK_LOCK_ERRORS
@@ -32292,14 +32292,14 @@ static int semXCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut) {
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it. */
if( !reserved ){
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
@@ -32358,14 +32358,14 @@ static int semXLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
sem_t *pSem = pFile->pInode->pSem;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
+ /* if we already have a lock, it is exclusive.
** Just adjust level and punt on outta here. */
if (pFile->eFileLock > NO_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
rc = SQLITE_OK;
goto sem_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* lock semaphore now but bail out when already locked. */
if( sem_trywait(pSem)==-1 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -32395,18 +32395,18 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
OSTRACE(("UNLOCK %d %d was %d pid=%d (sem)\n", pFile->h, eFileLock,
pFile->eFileLock, osGetpid(0)));
assert( eFileLock<=SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* no-op if possible */
if( pFile->eFileLock==eFileLock ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* shared can just be set because we always have an exclusive */
if (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK) {
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
/* no, really unlock. */
if ( sem_post(pSem)==-1 ) {
int rc, tErrno = errno;
@@ -32414,7 +32414,7 @@ static int semXUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(rc) ){
storeLastErrno(pFile, tErrno);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
pFile->eFileLock = NO_LOCK;
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32479,7 +32479,7 @@ struct ByteRangeLockPB2
/*
** This is a utility for setting or clearing a bit-range lock on an
** AFP filesystem.
-**
+**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success, SQLITE_BUSY on failure.
*/
static int afpSetLock(
@@ -32491,14 +32491,14 @@ static int afpSetLock(
){
struct ByteRangeLockPB2 pb;
int err;
-
+
pb.unLockFlag = setLockFlag ? 0 : 1;
pb.startEndFlag = 0;
pb.offset = offset;
- pb.length = length;
+ pb.length = length;
pb.fd = pFile->h;
-
- OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
+
+ OSTRACE(("AFPSETLOCK [%s] for %d%s in range %llx:%llx\n",
(setLockFlag?"ON":"OFF"), pFile->h, (pb.fd==-1?"[testval-1]":""),
offset, length));
err = fsctl(path, afpfsByteRangeLock2FSCTL, &pb, 0);
@@ -32533,9 +32533,9 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
int reserved = 0;
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
afpLockingContext *context;
-
+
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR_CHECKRESERVEDLOCK; );
-
+
assert( pFile );
context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
if( context->reserved ){
@@ -32543,17 +32543,17 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
unixEnterMutex(); /* Because pFile->pInode is shared across threads */
-
+
/* Check if a thread in this process holds such a lock */
if( pFile->pInode->eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK ){
reserved = 1;
}
-
+
/* Otherwise see if some other process holds it.
*/
if( !reserved ){
/* lock the RESERVED byte */
- int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
+ int lrc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1,1);
if( SQLITE_OK==lrc ){
/* if we succeeded in taking the reserved lock, unlock it to restore
** the original state */
@@ -32566,10 +32566,10 @@ static int afpCheckReservedLock(sqlite3_file *id, int *pResOut){
rc=lrc;
}
}
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
OSTRACE(("TEST WR-LOCK %d %d %d (afp)\n", pFile->h, rc, reserved));
-
+
*pResOut = reserved;
return rc;
}
@@ -32603,7 +32603,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
unixInodeInfo *pInode = pFile->pInode;
afpLockingContext *context = (afpLockingContext *) pFile->lockingContext;
-
+
assert( pFile );
OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s was %s(%s,%d) pid=%d (afp)\n", pFile->h,
azFileLock(eFileLock), azFileLock(pFile->eFileLock),
@@ -32627,7 +32627,7 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
assert( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK || eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( eFileLock!=PENDING_LOCK );
assert( eFileLock!=RESERVED_LOCK || pFile->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
-
+
/* This mutex is needed because pFile->pInode is shared across threads
*/
unixEnterMutex();
@@ -32636,18 +32636,18 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
/* If some thread using this PID has a lock via a different unixFile*
** handle that precludes the requested lock, return BUSY.
*/
- if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
+ if( (pFile->eFileLock!=pInode->eFileLock &&
(pInode->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK || eFileLock>SHARED_LOCK))
){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* If a SHARED lock is requested, and some thread using this PID already
** has a SHARED or RESERVED lock, then increment reference counts and
** return SQLITE_OK.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK &&
(pInode->eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->eFileLock==RESERVED_LOCK) ){
assert( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK );
assert( pFile->eFileLock==0 );
@@ -32657,12 +32657,12 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
pInode->nLock++;
goto afp_end_lock;
}
-
+
/* A PENDING lock is needed before acquiring a SHARED lock and before
** acquiring an EXCLUSIVE lock. For the SHARED lock, the PENDING will
** be released.
*/
- if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
+ if( eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK
|| (eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK && pFile->eFileLocknShared==0 );
assert( pInode->eFileLock==0 );
-
+
mask = (sizeof(long)==8) ? LARGEST_INT64 : 0x7fffffff;
/* Now get the read-lock SHARED_LOCK */
/* note that the quality of the randomness doesn't matter that much */
- lk = random();
+ lk = random();
pInode->sharedByte = (lk & mask)%(SHARED_SIZE - 1);
- lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ lrc1 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST+pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1);
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ){
lrc1Errno = pFile->lastErrno;
}
/* Drop the temporary PENDING lock */
lrc2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
-
+
if( IS_LOCK_ERROR(lrc1) ) {
storeLastErrno(pFile, lrc1Errno);
rc = lrc1;
@@ -32730,34 +32730,34 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
}
if (!failed && eFileLock == EXCLUSIVE_LOCK) {
/* Acquire an EXCLUSIVE lock */
-
- /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
+
+ /* Remove the shared lock before trying the range. we'll need to
** reestablish the shared lock if we can't get the afpUnlock
*/
if( !(failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST +
pInode->sharedByte, 1, 0)) ){
int failed2 = SQLITE_OK;
/* now attemmpt to get the exclusive lock range */
- failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
+ failed = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST,
SHARED_SIZE, 1);
- if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
+ if( failed && (failed2 = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile,
SHARED_FIRST + pInode->sharedByte, 1, 1)) ){
/* Can't reestablish the shared lock. Sqlite can't deal, this is
** a critical I/O error
*/
- rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
+ rc = ((failed & SQLITE_IOERR) == SQLITE_IOERR) ? failed2 :
SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
goto afp_end_lock;
- }
+ }
}else{
- rc = failed;
+ rc = failed;
}
}
if( failed ){
rc = failed;
}
}
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
pInode->eFileLock = eFileLock;
@@ -32765,10 +32765,10 @@ static int afpLock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
pFile->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
pInode->eFileLock = PENDING_LOCK;
}
-
+
afp_end_lock:
unixLeaveMutex();
- OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
+ OSTRACE(("LOCK %d %s %s (afp)\n", pFile->h, azFileLock(eFileLock),
rc==SQLITE_OK ? "ok" : "failed"));
return rc;
}
@@ -32807,7 +32807,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
SimulateIOErrorBenign(1);
SimulateIOError( h=(-1) )
SimulateIOErrorBenign(0);
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* When reducing a lock such that other processes can start
** reading the database file again, make sure that the
@@ -32822,7 +32822,7 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
|| pFile->transCntrChng==1 );
pFile->inNormalWrite = 0;
#endif
-
+
if( pFile->eFileLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, SHARED_FIRST, SHARED_SIZE, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1) ){
@@ -32835,11 +32835,11 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=PENDING_LOCK ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, PENDING_BYTE, 1, 0);
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->eFileLock>=RESERVED_LOCK && context->reserved ){
rc = afpSetLock(context->dbPath, pFile, RESERVED_BYTE, 1, 0);
- if( !rc ){
- context->reserved = 0;
+ if( !rc ){
+ context->reserved = 0;
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eFileLock==SHARED_LOCK || pInode->nShared>1)){
@@ -32874,14 +32874,14 @@ static int afpUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock) {
}
}
}
-
+
unixLeaveMutex();
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ) pFile->eFileLock = eFileLock;
return rc;
}
/*
-** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
+** Close a file & cleanup AFP specific locking context
*/
static int afpClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -32933,7 +32933,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
/*
** The code above is the NFS lock implementation. The code is specific
** to MacOSX and does not work on other unix platforms. No alternative
-** is available.
+** is available.
**
********************* End of the NFS lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
@@ -32941,7 +32941,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
/******************************************************************************
**************** Non-locking sqlite3_file methods *****************************
**
-** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
+** The next division contains implementations for all methods of the
** sqlite3_file object other than the locking methods. The locking
** methods were defined in divisions above (one locking method per
** division). Those methods that are common to all locking modes
@@ -32949,7 +32949,7 @@ static int nfsUnlock(sqlite3_file *id, int eFileLock){
*/
/*
-** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
+** Seek to the offset passed as the second argument, then read cnt
** bytes into pBuf. Return the number of bytes actually read.
**
** NB: If you define USE_PREAD or USE_PREAD64, then it might also
@@ -33011,8 +33011,8 @@ static int seekAndRead(unixFile *id, sqlite3_int64 offset, void *pBuf, int cnt){
** wrong.
*/
static int unixRead(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ void *pBuf,
int amt,
sqlite3_int64 offset
){
@@ -33027,7 +33027,7 @@ static int unixRead(
#if 0
assert( pFile->pUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
#endif
@@ -33065,7 +33065,7 @@ static int unixRead(
/*
** Attempt to seek the file-descriptor passed as the first argument to
** absolute offset iOff, then attempt to write nBuf bytes of data from
-** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
+** pBuf to it. If an error occurs, return -1 and set *piErrno. Otherwise,
** return the actual number of bytes written (which may be less than
** nBuf).
*/
@@ -33125,10 +33125,10 @@ static int seekAndWrite(unixFile *id, i64 offset, const void *pBuf, int cnt){
** or some other error code on failure.
*/
static int unixWrite(
- sqlite3_file *id,
- const void *pBuf,
+ sqlite3_file *id,
+ const void *pBuf,
int amt,
- sqlite3_int64 offset
+ sqlite3_int64 offset
){
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
int wrote = 0;
@@ -33140,7 +33140,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
#if 0
assert( pFile->pUnused==0
|| offset>=PENDING_BYTE+512
- || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
+ || offset+amt<=PENDING_BYTE
);
#endif
@@ -33182,7 +33182,7 @@ static int unixWrite(
}
}
#endif
-
+
while( (wrote = seekAndWrite(pFile, offset, pBuf, amt))0 ){
amt -= wrote;
offset += wrote;
@@ -33248,8 +33248,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fullsync_count = 0;
**
** SQLite sets the dataOnly flag if the size of the file is unchanged.
** The idea behind dataOnly is that it should only write the file content
-** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
-** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
+** to disk, not the inode. We only set dataOnly if the file size is
+** unchanged since the file size is part of the inode. However,
** Ted Ts'o tells us that fdatasync() will also write the inode if the
** file size has changed. The only real difference between fdatasync()
** and fsync(), Ted tells us, is that fdatasync() will not flush the
@@ -33263,7 +33263,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
int rc;
/* The following "ifdef/elif/else/" block has the same structure as
- ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
+ ** the one below. It is replicated here solely to avoid cluttering
** up the real code with the UNUSED_PARAMETER() macros.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_NO_SYNC
@@ -33277,7 +33277,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(dataOnly);
#endif
- /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
+ /* Record the number of times that we do a normal fsync() and
** FULLSYNC. This is used during testing to verify that this procedure
** gets called with the correct arguments.
*/
@@ -33303,11 +33303,11 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
rc = 1;
}
/* If the FULLFSYNC failed, fall back to attempting an fsync().
- ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
+ ** It shouldn't be possible for fullfsync to fail on the local
** file system (on OSX), so failure indicates that FULLFSYNC
- ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
- ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
- ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
+ ** isn't supported for this file system. So, attempt an fsync
+ ** and (for now) ignore the overhead of a superfluous fcntl call.
+ ** It'd be better to detect fullfsync support once and avoid
** the fcntl call every time sync is called.
*/
if( rc ) rc = fsync(fd);
@@ -33317,7 +33317,7 @@ static int full_fsync(int fd, int fullSync, int dataOnly){
** so currently we default to the macro that redefines fdatasync to fsync
*/
rc = fsync(fd);
-#else
+#else
rc = fdatasync(fd);
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc==-1 && errno==ENOTSUP ){
@@ -33478,7 +33478,7 @@ static int unixTruncate(sqlite3_file *id, i64 nByte){
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
/* If the file was just truncated to a size smaller than the currently
** mapped region, reduce the effective mapping size as well. SQLite will
- ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
+ ** use read() and write() to access data beyond this point from now on.
*/
if( nBytemmapSize ){
pFile->mmapSize = nByte;
@@ -33524,8 +33524,8 @@ static int unixFileSize(sqlite3_file *id, i64 *pSize){
static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file*,int,void*);
#endif
-/*
-** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
+/*
+** This function is called to handle the SQLITE_FCNTL_SIZE_HINT
** file-control operation. Enlarge the database to nBytes in size
** (rounded up to the next chunk-size). If the database is already
** nBytes or larger, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -33534,7 +33534,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
if( pFile->szChunk>0 ){
i64 nSize; /* Required file size */
struct stat buf; /* Used to hold return values of fstat() */
-
+
if( osFstat(pFile->h, &buf) ){
return SQLITE_IOERR_FSTAT;
}
@@ -33543,8 +33543,8 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
if( nSize>(i64)buf.st_size ){
#if defined(HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE) && HAVE_POSIX_FALLOCATE
- /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
- ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
+ /* The code below is handling the return value of osFallocate()
+ ** correctly. posix_fallocate() is defined to "returns zero on success,
** or an error number on failure". See the manpage for details. */
int err;
do{
@@ -33552,7 +33552,7 @@ static int fcntlSizeHint(unixFile *pFile, i64 nByte){
}while( err==EINTR );
if( err ) return SQLITE_IOERR_WRITE;
#else
- /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
+ /* If the OS does not have posix_fallocate(), fake it. Write a
** single byte to the last byte in each block that falls entirely
** within the extended region. Then, if required, a single byte
** at offset (nSize-1), to set the size of the file correctly.
@@ -33710,7 +33710,7 @@ static int unixFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
** a database and its journal file) that the sector size will be the
** same for both.
*/
-#ifndef __QNXNTO__
+#ifndef __QNXNTO__
static int unixSectorSize(sqlite3_file *NotUsed){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
return SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE;
@@ -33727,7 +33727,7 @@ static int unixSectorSize(sqlite3_file *id){
unixFile *pFile = (unixFile*)id;
if( pFile->sectorSize == 0 ){
struct statvfs fsInfo;
-
+
/* Set defaults for non-supported filesystems */
pFile->sectorSize = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SECTOR_SIZE;
pFile->deviceCharacteristics = 0;
@@ -33828,7 +33828,7 @@ static int unixDeviceCharacteristics(sqlite3_file *id){
/*
** Return the system page size.
**
-** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
+** This function should not be called directly by other code in this file.
** Instead, it should be called via macro osGetpagesize().
*/
static int unixGetpagesize(void){
@@ -33846,7 +33846,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
/*
-** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
+** Object used to represent an shared memory buffer.
**
** When multiple threads all reference the same wal-index, each thread
** has its own unixShm object, but they all point to a single instance
@@ -33866,7 +33866,7 @@ static int unixGetpagesize(void){
** nRef
**
** The following fields are read-only after the object is created:
-**
+**
** fid
** zFilename
**
@@ -33993,7 +33993,7 @@ static int unixShmSystemLock(
}
#endif
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
@@ -34045,20 +34045,20 @@ static void unixShmPurge(unixFile *pFd){
}
/*
-** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
+** Open a shared-memory area associated with open database file pDbFd.
** This particular implementation uses mmapped files.
**
** The file used to implement shared-memory is in the same directory
** as the open database file and has the same name as the open database
** file with the "-shm" suffix added. For example, if the database file
** is "/home/user1/config.db" then the file that is created and mmapped
-** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
+** for shared memory will be called "/home/user1/config.db-shm".
**
** Another approach to is to use files in /dev/shm or /dev/tmp or an
** some other tmpfs mount. But if a file in a different directory
** from the database file is used, then differing access permissions
** or a chroot() might cause two different processes on the same
-** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
+** database to end up using different files for shared memory -
** meaning that their memory would not really be shared - resulting
** in database corruption. Nevertheless, this tmpfs file usage
** can be enabled at compile-time using -DSQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY="/dev/shm"
@@ -34127,7 +34127,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
memset(pShmNode, 0, sizeof(*pShmNode)+nShmFilename);
zShmFilename = pShmNode->zFilename = (char*)&pShmNode[1];
#ifdef SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY
- sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(nShmFilename, zShmFilename,
SQLITE_SHM_DIRECTORY "/sqlite-shm-%x-%x",
(u32)sStat.st_ino, (u32)sStat.st_dev);
#else
@@ -34162,9 +34162,9 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
** the original owner will not be able to connect.
*/
robustFchown(pShmNode->h, sStat.st_uid, sStat.st_gid);
-
+
/* Check to see if another process is holding the dead-man switch.
- ** If not, truncate the file to zero length.
+ ** If not, truncate the file to zero length.
*/
rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( unixShmSystemLock(pDbFd, F_WRLCK, UNIX_SHM_DMS, 1)==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -34192,7 +34192,7 @@ static int unixOpenSharedMemory(unixFile *pDbFd){
** the cover of the unixEnterMutex() mutex and the pointer from the
** new (struct unixShm) object to the pShmNode has been set. All that is
** left to do is to link the new object into the linked list starting
- ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex
+ ** at pShmNode->pFirst. This must be done while holding the pShmNode->mutex
** mutex.
*/
sqlite3_mutex_enter(pShmNode->mutex);
@@ -34210,22 +34210,22 @@ shm_open_err:
}
/*
-** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
-** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
-** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
+** This function is called to obtain a pointer to region iRegion of the
+** shared-memory associated with the database file fd. Shared-memory regions
+** are numbered starting from zero. Each shared-memory region is szRegion
** bytes in size.
**
** If an error occurs, an error code is returned and *pp is set to NULL.
**
** Otherwise, if the bExtend parameter is 0 and the requested shared-memory
** region has not been allocated (by any client, including one running in a
-** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
-** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
+** separate process), then *pp is set to NULL and SQLITE_OK returned. If
+** bExtend is non-zero and the requested shared-memory region has not yet
** been allocated, it is allocated by this function.
**
** If the shared-memory region has already been allocated or is allocated by
-** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
-** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
+** this call as described above, then it is mapped into this processes
+** address space (if it is not already), *pp is set to point to the mapped
** memory and SQLITE_OK returned.
*/
static int unixShmMap(
@@ -34275,7 +34275,7 @@ static int unixShmMap(
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_SHMSIZE;
goto shmpage_out;
}
-
+
if( sStat.st_sizeh>=0 ){
pMem = osMmap(0, nMap,
- pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
+ pShmNode->isReadonly ? PROT_READ : PROT_READ|PROT_WRITE,
MAP_SHARED, pShmNode->h, szRegion*(i64)pShmNode->nRegion
);
if( pMem==MAP_FAILED ){
@@ -34415,7 +34415,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
p->exclMask &= ~mask;
p->sharedMask &= ~mask;
- }
+ }
}else if( flags & SQLITE_SHM_SHARED ){
u16 allShared = 0; /* Union of locks held by connections other than "p" */
@@ -34454,7 +34454,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
break;
}
}
-
+
/* Get the exclusive locks at the system level. Then if successful
** also mark the local connection as being locked.
*/
@@ -34473,7 +34473,7 @@ static int unixShmLock(
}
/*
-** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
+** Implement a memory barrier or memory fence on shared memory.
**
** All loads and stores begun before the barrier must complete before
** any load or store begun after the barrier.
@@ -34488,7 +34488,7 @@ static void unixShmBarrier(
}
/*
-** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying
+** Close a connection to shared-memory. Delete the underlying
** storage if deleteFlag is true.
**
** If there is no shared memory associated with the connection then this
@@ -34561,7 +34561,7 @@ static void unixUnmapfile(unixFile *pFd){
}
/*
-** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
+** Attempt to set the size of the memory mapping maintained by file
** descriptor pFd to nNew bytes. Any existing mapping is discarded.
**
** If successful, this function sets the following variables:
@@ -34653,14 +34653,14 @@ static void unixRemapfile(
/*
** Memory map or remap the file opened by file-descriptor pFd (if the file
-** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
-** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
+** is already mapped, the existing mapping is replaced by the new). Or, if
+** there already exists a mapping for this file, and there are still
** outstanding xFetch() references to it, this function is a no-op.
**
-** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
-** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
+** If parameter nByte is non-negative, then it is the requested size of
+** the mapping to create. Otherwise, if nByte is less than zero, then the
** requested size is the size of the file on disk. The actual size of the
-** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
+** created mapping is either the requested size or the value configured
** using SQLITE_FCNTL_MMAP_LIMIT, whichever is smaller.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs (even if the mapping is not
@@ -34701,7 +34701,7 @@ static int unixMapfile(unixFile *pFd, i64 nMap){
** Finally, if an error does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final
** value of *pp is undefined in this case.
**
-** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
+** If this function does return a pointer, the caller must eventually
** release the reference by calling unixUnfetch().
*/
static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
@@ -34726,13 +34726,13 @@ static int unixFetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, int nAmt, void **pp){
}
/*
-** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
+** If the third argument is non-NULL, then this function releases a
** reference obtained by an earlier call to unixFetch(). The second
** argument passed to this function must be the same as the corresponding
-** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
+** argument that was passed to the unixFetch() invocation.
**
-** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
-** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
+** Or, if the third argument is NULL, then this function is being called
+** to inform the VFS layer that, according to POSIX, any existing mapping
** may now be invalid and should be unmapped.
*/
static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
@@ -34740,7 +34740,7 @@ static int unixUnfetch(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 iOff, void *p){
unixFile *pFd = (unixFile *)fd; /* The underlying database file */
UNUSED_PARAMETER(iOff);
- /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
+ /* If p==0 (unmap the entire file) then there must be no outstanding
** xFetch references. Or, if p!=0 (meaning it is an xFetch reference),
** then there must be at least one outstanding. */
assert( (p==0)==(pFd->nFetchOut==0) );
@@ -34948,8 +34948,8 @@ IOMETHODS(
#endif
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
-/*
-** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
+/*
+** This "finder" function attempts to determine the best locking strategy
** for the database file "filePath". It then returns the sqlite3_io_methods
** object that implements that strategy.
**
@@ -34991,8 +34991,8 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
}
/* Default case. Handles, amongst others, "nfs".
- ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
- ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
+ ** Test byte-range lock using fcntl(). If the call succeeds,
+ ** assume that the file-system supports POSIX style locks.
*/
lockInfo.l_len = 1;
lockInfo.l_start = 0;
@@ -35008,7 +35008,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *autolockIoFinderImpl(
return &dotlockIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const autolockIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = autolockIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
@@ -35044,7 +35044,7 @@ static const sqlite3_io_methods *vxworksIoFinderImpl(
return &semIoMethods;
}
}
-static const sqlite3_io_methods
+static const sqlite3_io_methods
*(*const vxworksIoFinder)(const char*,unixFile*) = vxworksIoFinderImpl;
#endif /* OS_VXWORKS */
@@ -35083,7 +35083,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
** include the special Apple locking styles.
*/
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
- assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/'
+ assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/'
|| pVfs->pAppData==(void*)&autolockIoFinder );
#else
assert( zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]=='/' );
@@ -35183,14 +35183,14 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
robust_close(pNew, h, __LINE__);
h = -1;
}
- unixLeaveMutex();
+ unixLeaveMutex();
}
}
#endif
else if( pLockingStyle == &dotlockIoMethods ){
/* Dotfile locking uses the file path so it needs to be included in
- ** the dotlockLockingContext
+ ** the dotlockLockingContext
*/
char *zLockFile;
int nFilename;
@@ -35228,7 +35228,7 @@ static int fillInUnixFile(
unixLeaveMutex();
}
#endif
-
+
storeLastErrno(pNew, 0);
#if OS_VXWORKS
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -35292,7 +35292,7 @@ static int unixGetTempname(int nBuf, char *zBuf){
/* It's odd to simulate an io-error here, but really this is just
** using the io-error infrastructure to test that SQLite handles this
- ** function failing.
+ ** function failing.
*/
zBuf[0] = 0;
SimulateIOError( return SQLITE_IOERR );
@@ -35321,7 +35321,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
#endif
/*
-** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
+** Search for an unused file descriptor that was opened on the database
** file (not a journal or master-journal file) identified by pathname
** zPath with SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags matching those passed as the second
** argument to this function.
@@ -35330,7 +35330,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile*, const char*);
** but the associated file descriptor could not be closed because some
** other file descriptor open on the same file is holding a file-lock.
** Refer to comments in the unixClose() function and the lengthy comment
-** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
+** describing "Posix Advisory Locking" at the start of this file for
** further details. Also, ticket #4018.
**
** If a suitable file descriptor is found, then it is returned. If no
@@ -35341,8 +35341,8 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
/* Do not search for an unused file descriptor on vxworks. Not because
** vxworks would not benefit from the change (it might, we're not sure),
- ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
- ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
+ ** but because no way to test it is currently available. It is better
+ ** not to risk breaking vxworks support for the sake of such an obscure
** feature. */
#if !OS_VXWORKS
struct stat sStat; /* Results of stat() call */
@@ -35379,7 +35379,7 @@ static UnixUnusedFd *findReusableFd(const char *zPath, int flags){
}
/*
-** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
+** Find the mode, uid and gid of file zFile.
*/
static int getFileMode(
const char *zFile, /* File name */
@@ -35403,16 +35403,16 @@ static int getFileMode(
** This function is called by unixOpen() to determine the unix permissions
** to create new files with. If no error occurs, then SQLITE_OK is returned
** and a value suitable for passing as the third argument to open(2) is
-** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
+** written to *pMode. If an IO error occurs, an SQLite error code is
** returned and the value of *pMode is not modified.
**
** In most cases, this routine sets *pMode to 0, which will become
** an indication to robust_open() to create the file using
** SQLITE_DEFAULT_FILE_PERMISSIONS adjusted by the umask.
-** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
-** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
-** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
-** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
+** But if the file being opened is a WAL or regular journal file, then
+** this function queries the file-system for the permissions on the
+** corresponding database file and sets *pMode to this value. Whenever
+** possible, WAL and journal files are created using the same permissions
** as the associated database file.
**
** If the SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES option is enabled, then the
@@ -35444,10 +35444,10 @@ static int findCreateFileMode(
** "-journalNN"
** "-walNN"
**
- ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
+ ** where NN is a decimal number. The NN naming schemes are
** used by the test_multiplex.c module.
*/
- nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1;
+ nDb = sqlite3Strlen30(zPath) - 1;
while( zPath[nDb]!='-' ){
#ifndef SQLITE_ENABLE_8_3_NAMES
/* In the normal case (8+3 filenames disabled) the journal filename
@@ -35520,7 +35520,7 @@ int chromium_sqlite3_fill_in_unix_sqlite3_file(sqlite3_vfs* pVfs,
/*
** Open the file zPath.
-**
+**
** Previously, the SQLite OS layer used three functions in place of this
** one:
**
@@ -35531,13 +35531,13 @@ int chromium_sqlite3_fill_in_unix_sqlite3_file(sqlite3_vfs* pVfs,
** These calls correspond to the following combinations of flags:
**
** ReadWrite() -> (READWRITE | CREATE)
-** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
+** ReadOnly() -> (READONLY)
** OpenExclusive() -> (READWRITE | CREATE | EXCLUSIVE)
**
** The old OpenExclusive() accepted a boolean argument - "delFlag". If
** true, the file was configured to be automatically deleted when the
-** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
-** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
+** file handle closed. To achieve the same effect using this new
+** interface, add the DELETEONCLOSE flag to those specified above for
** OpenExclusive().
*/
static int unixOpen(
@@ -35572,8 +35572,8 @@ static int unixOpen(
** is called the directory file descriptor will be fsync()ed and close()d.
*/
int syncDir = (isCreate && (
- eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
+ eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL
|| eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
));
@@ -35583,9 +35583,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
char zTmpname[MAX_PATHNAME+2];
const char *zName = zPath;
- /* Check the following statements are true:
+ /* Check the following statements are true:
**
- ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
+ ** (a) Exactly one of the READWRITE and READONLY flags must be set, and
** (b) if CREATE is set, then READWRITE must also be set, and
** (c) if EXCLUSIVE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
** (d) if DELETEONCLOSE is set, then CREATE must also be set.
@@ -35595,7 +35595,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
assert(isExclusive==0 || isCreate);
assert(isDelete==0 || isCreate);
- /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never
+ /* The main DB, main journal, WAL file and master journal are never
** automatically deleted. Nor are they ever temporary files. */
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB );
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL );
@@ -35603,9 +35603,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
assert( (!isDelete && zName) || eType!=SQLITE_OPEN_WAL );
/* Assert that the upper layer has set one of the "file-type" flags. */
- assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
- || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
+ assert( eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL
+ || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL
|| eType==SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB || eType==SQLITE_OPEN_WAL
);
@@ -35657,7 +35657,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
/* Determine the value of the flags parameter passed to POSIX function
** open(). These must be calculated even if open() is not called, as
- ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
+ ** they may be stored as part of the file handle and used by the
** 'conch file' locking functions later on. */
if( isReadonly ) openFlags |= O_RDONLY;
if( isReadWrite ) openFlags |= O_RDWR;
@@ -35729,7 +35729,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
p->openFlags = openFlags;
}
#endif
-
+
#if defined(__APPLE__) || SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
if( fstatfs(fd, &fsInfo) == -1 ){
storeLastErrno(p, errno);
@@ -35760,7 +35760,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
char *envforce = getenv("SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING");
int useProxy = 0;
- /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
+ /* SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING==1 means force always use proxy, 0 means
** never use proxy, NULL means use proxy for non-local files only. */
if( envforce!=NULL ){
useProxy = atoi(envforce)>0;
@@ -35772,9 +35772,9 @@ static int unixOpen(
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = proxyTransformUnixFile((unixFile*)pFile, ":auto:");
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
- ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
- ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
+ /* Use unixClose to clean up the resources added in fillInUnixFile
+ ** and clear all the structure's references. Specifically,
+ ** pFile->pMethods will be NULL so sqlite3OsClose will be a no-op
*/
unixClose(pFile);
return rc;
@@ -35784,7 +35784,7 @@ static int unixOpen(
}
}
#endif
-
+
/* Duplicated in chromium_sqlite3_fill_in_unix_sqlite3_file(). */
rc = fillInUnixFile(pVfs, fd, pFile, zPath, ctrlFlags);
@@ -35902,9 +35902,9 @@ static int mkFullPathname(
/*
** Turn a relative pathname into a full pathname. The relative path
** is stored as a nul-terminated string in the buffer pointed to by
-** zPath.
+** zPath.
**
-** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
+** zOut points to a buffer of at least sqlite3_vfs.mxPathname bytes
** (in this case, MAX_PATHNAME bytes). The full-path is written to
** this buffer before returning.
*/
@@ -36021,7 +36021,7 @@ static void unixDlError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBufOut){
unixLeaveMutex();
}
static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
- /*
+ /*
** GCC with -pedantic-errors says that C90 does not allow a void* to be
** cast into a pointer to a function. And yet the library dlsym() routine
** returns a void* which is really a pointer to a function. So how do we
@@ -36031,7 +36031,7 @@ static void (*unixDlSym(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, void *p, const char*zSym))(void){
** parameters void* and const char* and returning a pointer to a function.
** We initialize x by assigning it a pointer to the dlsym() function.
** (That assignment requires a cast.) Then we call the function that
- ** x points to.
+ ** x points to.
**
** This work-around is unlikely to work correctly on any system where
** you really cannot cast a function pointer into void*. But then, on the
@@ -36074,7 +36074,7 @@ static int unixRandomness(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int nBuf, char *zBuf){
** tests repeatable.
*/
memset(zBuf, 0, nBuf);
- randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
+ randomnessPid = osGetpid(0);
#if !defined(SQLITE_TEST) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_RANDOMNESS)
{
int fd, got;
@@ -36141,7 +36141,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_current_time = 0; /* Fake system time in seconds since 1
** epoch of noon in Greenwich on November 24, 4714 B.C according to the
** proleptic Gregorian calendar.
**
-** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
+** On success, return SQLITE_OK. Return SQLITE_ERROR if the time and date
** cannot be found.
*/
static int unixCurrentTimeInt64(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, sqlite3_int64 *piNow){
@@ -36248,7 +36248,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
** To address the performance and cache coherency issues, proxy file locking
** changes the way database access is controlled by limiting access to a
** single host at a time and moving file locks off of the database file
-** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
+** and onto a proxy file on the local file system.
**
**
** Using proxy locks
@@ -36274,19 +36274,19 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
** actual proxy file name is generated from the name and path of the
** database file. For example:
**
-** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
+** For database path "/Users/me/foo.db"
** The lock path will be "/sqliteplocks/_Users_me_foo.db:auto:")
**
** Once a lock proxy is configured for a database connection, it can not
** be removed, however it may be switched to a different proxy path via
** the above APIs (assuming the conch file is not being held by another
-** connection or process).
+** connection or process).
**
**
** How proxy locking works
** -----------------------
**
-** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
+** Proxy file locking relies primarily on two new supporting files:
**
** * conch file to limit access to the database file to a single host
** at a time
@@ -36313,11 +36313,11 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
** host (the conch ensures that they all use the same local lock file).
**
** Requesting the lock proxy does not immediately take the conch, it is
-** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
+** only taken when the first request to lock database file is made.
** This matches the semantics of the traditional locking behavior, where
** opening a connection to a database file does not take a lock on it.
-** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
-** the connection to the database is closed.
+** The shared lock and an open file descriptor are maintained until
+** the connection to the database is closed.
**
** The proxy file and the lock file are never deleted so they only need
** to be created the first time they are used.
@@ -36331,7 +36331,7 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
** automatically configured for proxy locking, lock files are
** named automatically using the same logic as
** PRAGMA lock_proxy_file=":auto:"
-**
+**
** SQLITE_PROXY_DEBUG
**
** Enables the logging of error messages during host id file
@@ -36346,8 +36346,8 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
**
** Permissions to use when creating a directory for storing the
** lock proxy files, only used when LOCKPROXYDIR is not set.
-**
-**
+**
+**
** As mentioned above, when compiled with SQLITE_PREFER_PROXY_LOCKING,
** setting the environment variable SQLITE_FORCE_PROXY_LOCKING to 1 will
** force proxy locking to be used for every database file opened, and 0
@@ -36357,12 +36357,12 @@ static int unixGetLastError(sqlite3_vfs *NotUsed, int NotUsed2, char *NotUsed3){
*/
/*
-** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
+** Proxy locking is only available on MacOSX
*/
#if defined(__APPLE__) && SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE
/*
-** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
+** The proxyLockingContext has the path and file structures for the remote
** and local proxy files in it
*/
typedef struct proxyLockingContext proxyLockingContext;
@@ -36378,10 +36378,10 @@ struct proxyLockingContext {
sqlite3_io_methods const *pOldMethod; /* Original I/O methods for close */
};
-/*
-** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
+/*
+** The proxy lock file path for the database at dbPath is written into lPath,
** which must point to valid, writable memory large enough for a maxLen length
-** file path.
+** file path.
*/
static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
int len;
@@ -36398,7 +36398,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
lPath, errno, osGetpid(0)));
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
- len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
+ len = strlcat(lPath, "sqliteplocks", maxLen);
}
# else
len = strlcpy(lPath, "/tmp/", maxLen);
@@ -36408,7 +36408,7 @@ static int proxyGetLockPath(const char *dbPath, char *lPath, size_t maxLen){
if( lPath[len-1]!='/' ){
len = strlcat(lPath, "/", maxLen);
}
-
+
/* transform the db path to a unique cache name */
dbLen = (int)strlen(dbPath);
for( i=0; i 0) ){
/* only mkdir if leaf dir != "." or "/" or ".." */
- if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
+ if( i-start>2 || (i-start==1 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start] != '/')
|| (i-start==2 && buf[start] != '.' && buf[start+1] != '.') ){
buf[i]='\0';
if( osMkdir(buf, SQLITE_DEFAULT_PROXYDIR_PERMISSIONS) ){
@@ -36513,13 +36513,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
switch (terrno) {
case EACCES:
return SQLITE_PERM;
- case EIO:
+ case EIO:
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK; /* even though it is the conch */
default:
return SQLITE_CANTOPEN_BKPT;
}
}
-
+
pNew = (unixFile *)sqlite3_malloc64(sizeof(*pNew));
if( pNew==NULL ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -36533,13 +36533,13 @@ static int proxyCreateUnixFile(
pUnused->fd = fd;
pUnused->flags = openFlags;
pNew->pUnused = pUnused;
-
+
rc = fillInUnixFile(&dummyVfs, fd, (sqlite3_file*)pNew, path, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
*ppFile = pNew;
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-end_create_proxy:
+end_create_proxy:
robust_close(pNew, fd, __LINE__);
sqlite3_free(pNew);
sqlite3_free(pUnused);
@@ -36558,7 +36558,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_hostid_num = 0;
extern int gethostuuid(uuid_t id, const struct timespec *wait);
#endif
-/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
+/* get the host ID via gethostuuid(), pHostID must point to PROXY_HOSTIDLEN
** bytes of writable memory.
*/
static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
@@ -36584,7 +36584,7 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
pHostID[0] = (char)(pHostID[0] + (char)(sqlite3_hostid_num & 0xFF));
}
#endif
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
@@ -36595,14 +36595,14 @@ static int proxyGetHostID(unsigned char *pHostID, int *pError){
#define PROXY_PATHINDEX (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN)
#define PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN (PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN+MAXPATHLEN)
-/*
-** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
+/*
+** Takes an open conch file, copies the contents to a new path and then moves
** it back. The newly created file's file descriptor is assigned to the
-** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
+** conch file structure and finally the original conch file descriptor is
** closed. Returns zero if successful.
*/
static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
char tPath[MAXPATHLEN];
char buf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
@@ -36616,7 +36616,7 @@ static int proxyBreakConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID){
/* create a new path by replace the trailing '-conch' with '-break' */
pathLen = strlcpy(tPath, cPath, MAXPATHLEN);
- if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
+ if( pathLen>MAXPATHLEN || pathLen<6 ||
(strlcpy(&tPath[pathLen-5], "break", 6) != 5) ){
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(errmsg),errmsg,"path error (len %d)",(int)pathLen);
goto end_breaklock;
@@ -36658,24 +36658,24 @@ end_breaklock:
return rc;
}
-/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
+/* Take the requested lock on the conch file and break a stale lock if the
** host id matches.
*/
static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int nTries = 0;
struct timespec conchModTime;
-
+
memset(&conchModTime, 0, sizeof(conchModTime));
do {
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xLock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, lockType);
nTries ++;
if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
/* If the lock failed (busy):
- * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
- * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
+ * 1st try: get the mod time of the conch, wait 0.5s and try again.
+ * 2nd try: fail if the mod time changed or host id is different, wait
* 10 sec and try again
* 3rd try: break the lock unless the mod time has changed.
*/
@@ -36684,20 +36684,20 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
storeLastErrno(pFile, errno);
return SQLITE_IOERR_LOCK;
}
-
+
if( nTries==1 ){
conchModTime = buf.st_mtimespec;
usleep(500000); /* wait 0.5 sec and try the lock again*/
- continue;
+ continue;
}
assert( nTries>1 );
- if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
+ if( conchModTime.tv_sec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_sec ||
conchModTime.tv_nsec != buf.st_mtimespec.tv_nsec ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
-
- if( nTries==2 ){
+
+ if( nTries==2 ){
char tBuf[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int len = osPread(conchFile->h, tBuf, PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN, 0);
if( len<0 ){
@@ -36714,9 +36714,9 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
usleep(10000000); /* wait 10 sec and try the lock again */
- continue;
+ continue;
}
-
+
assert( nTries==3 );
if( 0==proxyBreakConchLock(pFile, myHostID) ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -36729,19 +36729,19 @@ static int proxyConchLock(unixFile *pFile, uuid_t myHostID, int lockType){
}
}
} while( rc==SQLITE_BUSY && nTries<3 );
-
+
return rc;
}
-/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
-** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
-** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
-** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
+/* Takes the conch by taking a shared lock and read the contents conch, if
+** lockPath is non-NULL, the host ID and lock file path must match. A NULL
+** lockPath means that the lockPath in the conch file will be used if the
+** host IDs match, or a new lock path will be generated automatically
** and written to the conch file.
*/
static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
-
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
+
if( pCtx->conchHeld!=0 ){
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
@@ -36757,7 +36757,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
int readLen = 0;
int tryOldLockPath = 0;
int forceNewLockPath = 0;
-
+
OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
(pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
osGetpid(0)));
@@ -36778,21 +36778,21 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
storeLastErrno(pFile, conchFile->lastErrno);
rc = SQLITE_IOERR_READ;
goto end_takeconch;
- }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
+ }else if( readLen<=(PROXY_HEADERLEN+PROXY_HOSTIDLEN) ||
readBuf[0]!=(char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION ){
- /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
- ** conch file.
+ /* a short read or version format mismatch means we need to create a new
+ ** conch file.
*/
createConch = 1;
}
/* if the host id matches and the lock path already exists in the conch
- ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
- ** retry with a new auto-generated path
+ ** we'll try to use the path there, if we can't open that path, we'll
+ ** retry with a new auto-generated path
*/
do { /* in case we need to try again for an :auto: named lock file */
if( !createConch && !forceNewLockPath ){
- hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
+ hostIdMatch = !memcmp(&readBuf[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID,
PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
/* if the conch has data compare the contents */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
@@ -36801,7 +36801,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
*/
if( hostIdMatch ){
size_t pathLen = (readLen - PROXY_PATHINDEX);
-
+
if( pathLen>=MAXPATHLEN ){
pathLen=MAXPATHLEN-1;
}
@@ -36817,23 +36817,23 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
readLen-PROXY_PATHINDEX)
){
/* conch host and lock path match */
- goto end_takeconch;
+ goto end_takeconch;
}
}
-
+
/* if the conch isn't writable and doesn't match, we can't take it */
if( (conchFile->openFlags&O_RDWR) == 0 ){
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
goto end_takeconch;
}
-
+
/* either the conch didn't match or we need to create a new one */
if( !pCtx->lockProxyPath ){
proxyGetLockPath(pCtx->dbPath, lockPath, MAXPATHLEN);
tempLockPath = lockPath;
/* create a copy of the lock path _only_ if the conch is taken */
}
-
+
/* update conch with host and path (this will fail if other process
** has a shared lock already), if the host id matches, use the big
** stick.
@@ -36844,7 +36844,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
/* We are trying for an exclusive lock but another thread in this
** same process is still holding a shared lock. */
rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
- } else {
+ } else {
rc = proxyConchLock(pFile, myHostID, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
}
}else{
@@ -36853,7 +36853,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
char writeBuffer[PROXY_MAXCONCHLEN];
int writeSize = 0;
-
+
writeBuffer[0] = (char)PROXY_CONCHVERSION;
memcpy(&writeBuffer[PROXY_HEADERLEN], myHostID, PROXY_HOSTIDLEN);
if( pCtx->lockProxyPath!=NULL ){
@@ -36866,8 +36866,8 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
robust_ftruncate(conchFile->h, writeSize);
rc = unixWrite((sqlite3_file *)conchFile, writeBuffer, writeSize, 0);
full_fsync(conchFile->h,0,0);
- /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
- ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
+ /* If we created a new conch file (not just updated the contents of a
+ ** valid conch file), try to match the permissions of the database
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && createConch ){
struct stat buf;
@@ -36891,14 +36891,14 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
}
}else{
int code = errno;
- fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
+ fprintf(stderr, "STAT FAILED[%d] with %d %s\n",
err, code, strerror(code));
#endif
}
}
}
conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, SHARED_LOCK);
-
+
end_takeconch:
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY: CLOSE %d\n", pFile->h));
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pFile->openFlags ){
@@ -36921,7 +36921,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
rc = proxyCreateUnixFile(path, &pCtx->lockProxy, 1);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_NOMEM && tryOldLockPath ){
/* we couldn't create the proxy lock file with the old lock file path
- ** so try again via auto-naming
+ ** so try again via auto-naming
*/
forceNewLockPath = 1;
tryOldLockPath = 0;
@@ -36941,7 +36941,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
pCtx->conchHeld = 1;
-
+
if( pCtx->lockProxy->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
afpLockingContext *afpCtx;
afpCtx = (afpLockingContext *)pCtx->lockProxy->lockingContext;
@@ -36953,7 +36953,7 @@ static int proxyTakeConch(unixFile *pFile){
OSTRACE(("TAKECONCH %d %s\n", conchFile->h,
rc==SQLITE_OK?"ok":"failed"));
return rc;
- } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
+ } while (1); /* in case we need to retry the :auto: lock file -
** we should never get here except via the 'continue' call. */
}
}
@@ -36969,7 +36969,7 @@ static int proxyReleaseConch(unixFile *pFile){
pCtx = (proxyLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext;
conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
OSTRACE(("RELEASECONCH %d for %s pid=%d\n", conchFile->h,
- (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
+ (pCtx->lockProxyPath ? pCtx->lockProxyPath : ":auto:"),
osGetpid(0)));
if( pCtx->conchHeld>0 ){
rc = conchFile->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)conchFile, NO_LOCK);
@@ -36997,13 +36997,13 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
char *conchPath; /* buffer in which to construct conch name */
/* Allocate space for the conch filename and initialize the name to
- ** the name of the original database file. */
+ ** the name of the original database file. */
*pConchPath = conchPath = (char *)sqlite3_malloc64(len + 8);
if( conchPath==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
memcpy(conchPath, dbPath, len+1);
-
+
/* now insert a "." before the last / character */
for( i=(len-1); i>=0; i-- ){
if( conchPath[i]=='/' ){
@@ -37026,7 +37026,7 @@ static int proxyCreateConchPathname(char *dbPath, char **pConchPath){
/* Takes a fully configured proxy locking-style unix file and switches
-** the local lock file path
+** the local lock file path
*/
static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
proxyLockingContext *pCtx = (proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -37035,7 +37035,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
- }
+ }
/* nothing to do if the path is NULL, :auto: or matches the existing path */
if( !path || path[0]=='\0' || !strcmp(path, ":auto:") ||
@@ -37053,7 +37053,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
sqlite3_free(oldPath);
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, path);
}
-
+
return rc;
}
@@ -37067,7 +37067,7 @@ static int switchLockProxyPath(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
#if defined(__APPLE__)
if( pFile->pMethod == &afpIoMethods ){
- /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
+ /* afp style keeps a reference to the db path in the filePath field
** of the struct */
assert( (int)strlen((char*)pFile->lockingContext)<=MAXPATHLEN );
strlcpy(dbPath, ((afpLockingContext *)pFile->lockingContext)->dbPath,
@@ -37088,9 +37088,9 @@ static int proxyGetDbPathForUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, char *dbPath){
}
/*
-** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
+** Takes an already filled in unix file and alters it so all file locking
** will be performed on the local proxy lock file. The following fields
-** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
+** are preserved in the locking context so that they can be restored and
** the unix structure properly cleaned up at close time:
** ->lockingContext
** ->pMethod
@@ -37100,7 +37100,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
char dbPath[MAXPATHLEN+1]; /* Name of the database file */
char *lockPath=NULL;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( pFile->eFileLock!=NO_LOCK ){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
@@ -37110,7 +37110,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
}else{
lockPath=(char *)path;
}
-
+
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d for %s pid=%d\n", pFile->h,
(lockPath ? lockPath : ":auto:"), osGetpid(0)));
@@ -37144,7 +37144,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
}
- }
+ }
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && lockPath ){
pCtx->lockProxyPath = sqlite3DbStrDup(0, lockPath);
}
@@ -37156,7 +37156,7 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
}
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
+ /* all memory is allocated, proxys are created and assigned,
** switch the locking context and pMethod then return.
*/
pCtx->oldLockingContext = pFile->lockingContext;
@@ -37164,12 +37164,12 @@ static int proxyTransformUnixFile(unixFile *pFile, const char *path) {
pCtx->pOldMethod = pFile->pMethod;
pFile->pMethod = &proxyIoMethods;
}else{
- if( pCtx->conchFile ){
+ if( pCtx->conchFile ){
pCtx->conchFile->pMethod->xClose((sqlite3_file *)pCtx->conchFile);
sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFile);
}
sqlite3DbFree(0, pCtx->lockProxyPath);
- sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
+ sqlite3_free(pCtx->conchFilePath);
sqlite3_free(pCtx);
}
OSTRACE(("TRANSPROXY %d %s\n", pFile->h,
@@ -37207,7 +37207,7 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
if( isProxyStyle ){
/* turn off proxy locking - not supported. If support is added for
** switching proxy locking mode off then it will need to fail if
- ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
+ ** the journal mode is WAL mode.
*/
rc = SQLITE_ERROR /*SQLITE_PROTOCOL? SQLITE_MISUSE?*/;
}else{
@@ -37217,9 +37217,9 @@ static int proxyFileControl(sqlite3_file *id, int op, void *pArg){
}else{
const char *proxyPath = (const char *)pArg;
if( isProxyStyle ){
- proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
+ proxyLockingContext *pCtx =
(proxyLockingContext*)pFile->lockingContext;
- if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
+ if( !strcmp(pArg, ":auto:")
|| (pCtx->lockProxyPath &&
!strncmp(pCtx->lockProxyPath, proxyPath, MAXPATHLEN))
){
@@ -37344,7 +37344,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
unixFile *lockProxy = pCtx->lockProxy;
unixFile *conchFile = pCtx->conchFile;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( lockProxy ){
rc = lockProxy->pMethod->xUnlock((sqlite3_file*)lockProxy, NO_LOCK);
if( rc ) return rc;
@@ -37381,7 +37381,7 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
** The proxy locking style is intended for use with AFP filesystems.
** And since AFP is only supported on MacOSX, the proxy locking is also
** restricted to MacOSX.
-**
+**
**
******************* End of the proxy lock implementation **********************
******************************************************************************/
@@ -37399,8 +37399,8 @@ static int proxyClose(sqlite3_file *id) {
** necessarily been initialized when this routine is called, and so they
** should not be used.
*/
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
- /*
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
+ /*
** The following macro defines an initializer for an sqlite3_vfs object.
** The name of the VFS is NAME. The pAppData is a pointer to a pointer
** to the "finder" function. (pAppData is a pointer to a pointer because
@@ -37416,7 +37416,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
**
** Most finders simply return a pointer to a fixed sqlite3_io_methods
** object. But the "autolockIoFinder" available on MacOSX does a little
- ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
+ ** more than that; it looks at the filesystem type that hosts the
** database file and tries to choose an locking method appropriate for
** that filesystem time.
*/
@@ -37488,7 +37488,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
for(i=0; i<(sizeof(aVfs)/sizeof(sqlite3_vfs)); i++){
sqlite3_vfs_register(&aVfs[i], i==0);
}
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
@@ -37498,10 +37498,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_init(void){
** to release dynamically allocated objects. But not on unix.
** This routine is a no-op for unix.
*/
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
- return SQLITE_OK;
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}
-
+
#endif /* SQLITE_OS_UNIX */
/************** End of os_unix.c *********************************************/
@@ -37624,7 +37624,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_os_end(void){
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -43697,8 +43697,8 @@ void chromium_sqlite3_initialize_win_sqlite3_file(sqlite3_file* file, HANDLE han
** property. Usually only a few pages are meet either condition.
** So the bitmap is usually sparse and has low cardinality.
** But sometimes (for example when during a DROP of a large table) most
-** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
-** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
+** or all of the pages in a database can get journalled. In those cases,
+** the bitmap becomes dense with high cardinality. The algorithm needs
** to handle both cases well.
**
** The size of the bitmap is fixed when the object is created.
@@ -43719,13 +43719,13 @@ void chromium_sqlite3_initialize_win_sqlite3_file(sqlite3_file* file, HANDLE han
/* Size of the Bitvec structure in bytes. */
#define BITVEC_SZ 512
-/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
+/* Round the union size down to the nearest pointer boundary, since that's how
** it will be aligned within the Bitvec struct. */
#define BITVEC_USIZE \
(((BITVEC_SZ-(3*sizeof(u32)))/sizeof(Bitvec*))*sizeof(Bitvec*))
-/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
-** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
+/* Type of the array "element" for the bitmap representation.
+** Should be a power of 2, and ideally, evenly divide into BITVEC_USIZE.
** Setting this to the "natural word" size of your CPU may improve
** performance. */
#define BITVEC_TELEM u8
@@ -43738,12 +43738,12 @@ void chromium_sqlite3_initialize_win_sqlite3_file(sqlite3_file* file, HANDLE han
/* Number of u32 values in hash table. */
#define BITVEC_NINT (BITVEC_USIZE/sizeof(u32))
-/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
+/* Maximum number of entries in hash table before
** sub-dividing and re-hashing. */
#define BITVEC_MXHASH (BITVEC_NINT/2)
/* Hashing function for the aHash representation.
-** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
-** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
+** Empirical testing showed that the *37 multiplier
+** (an arbitrary prime)in the hash function provided
** no fewer collisions than the no-op *1. */
#define BITVEC_HASH(X) (((X)*1)%BITVEC_NINT)
@@ -43789,7 +43789,7 @@ struct Bitvec {
/*
** Create a new bitmap object able to handle bits between 0 and iSize,
-** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
+** inclusive. Return a pointer to the new object. Return NULL if
** malloc fails.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitvec *sqlite3BitvecCreate(u32 iSize){
@@ -44045,7 +44045,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BitvecBuiltinTest(int sz, int *aOp){
break;
}
case 3:
- case 4:
+ case 4:
default: {
nx = 2;
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(i), &i);
@@ -44125,7 +44125,7 @@ bitvec_end:
**
** The PCache.pSynced variable is used to optimize searching for a dirty
** page to eject from the cache mid-transaction. It is better to eject
-** a page that does not require a journal sync than one that does.
+** a page that does not require a journal sync than one that does.
** Therefore, pSynced is maintained to that it *almost* always points
** to either the oldest page in the pDirty/pDirtyTail list that has a
** clear PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag or to a page that is older than this one
@@ -44166,7 +44166,7 @@ struct PCache {
sqlite3_pcache_page *pLower;
PgHdr *pPg;
unsigned char *a;
-
+
if( sqlite3PcacheTrace<2 ) return;
if( pCache->pCache==0 ) return;
N = sqlite3PcachePagecount(pCache);
@@ -44258,12 +44258,12 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
if( addRemove & PCACHE_DIRTYLIST_REMOVE ){
assert( pPage->pDirtyNext || pPage==p->pDirtyTail );
assert( pPage->pDirtyPrev || pPage==p->pDirty );
-
+
/* Update the PCache1.pSynced variable if necessary. */
if( p->pSynced==pPage ){
p->pSynced = pPage->pDirtyPrev;
}
-
+
if( pPage->pDirtyNext ){
pPage->pDirtyNext->pDirtyPrev = pPage->pDirtyPrev;
}else{
@@ -44273,7 +44273,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
if( pPage->pDirtyPrev ){
pPage->pDirtyPrev->pDirtyNext = pPage->pDirtyNext;
}else{
- /* If there are now no dirty pages in the cache, set eCreate to 2.
+ /* If there are now no dirty pages in the cache, set eCreate to 2.
** This is an optimization that allows sqlite3PcacheFetch() to skip
** searching for a dirty page to eject from the cache when it might
** otherwise have to. */
@@ -44290,7 +44290,7 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
}
if( addRemove & PCACHE_DIRTYLIST_ADD ){
assert( pPage->pDirtyNext==0 && pPage->pDirtyPrev==0 && p->pDirty!=pPage );
-
+
pPage->pDirtyNext = p->pDirty;
if( pPage->pDirtyNext ){
assert( pPage->pDirtyNext->pDirtyPrev==0 );
@@ -44305,11 +44305,11 @@ static void pcacheManageDirtyList(PgHdr *pPage, u8 addRemove){
p->pDirty = pPage;
/* If pSynced is NULL and this page has a clear NEED_SYNC flag, set
- ** pSynced to point to it. Checking the NEED_SYNC flag is an
+ ** pSynced to point to it. Checking the NEED_SYNC flag is an
** optimization, as if pSynced points to a page with the NEED_SYNC
- ** flag set sqlite3PcacheFetchStress() searches through all newer
+ ** flag set sqlite3PcacheFetchStress() searches through all newer
** entries of the dirty-list for a page with NEED_SYNC clear anyway. */
- if( !p->pSynced
+ if( !p->pSynced
&& 0==(pPage->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
){
p->pSynced = pPage;
@@ -44349,7 +44349,7 @@ static int numberOfCachePages(PCache *p){
/*************************************************** General Interfaces ******
**
-** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these
+** Initialize and shutdown the page cache subsystem. Neither of these
** functions are threadsafe.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheInitialize(void){
@@ -44375,8 +44375,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSize(void){ return sizeof(PCache); }
/*
** Create a new PCache object. Storage space to hold the object
-** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer.
-** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by
+** has already been allocated and is passed in as the p pointer.
+** The caller discovers how much space needs to be allocated by
** calling sqlite3PcacheSize().
**
** szExtra is some extra space allocated for each page. The first
@@ -44488,7 +44488,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_pcache_page *sqlite3PcacheFetch(
/*
** If the sqlite3PcacheFetch() routine is unable to allocate a new
** page because no clean pages are available for reuse and the cache
-** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to
+** size limit has been reached, then this routine can be invoked to
** try harder to allocate a page. This routine might invoke the stress
** callback to spill dirty pages to the journal. It will then try to
** allocate the new page and will only fail to allocate a new page on
@@ -44505,17 +44505,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(
if( pCache->eCreate==2 ) return 0;
if( sqlite3PcachePagecount(pCache)>pCache->szSpill ){
- /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a
+ /* Find a dirty page to write-out and recycle. First try to find a
** page that does not require a journal-sync (one with PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
- ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other
+ ** cleared), but if that is not possible settle for any other
** unreferenced dirty page.
**
** If the LRU page in the dirty list that has a clear PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
** flag is currently referenced, then the following may leave pSynced
** set incorrectly (pointing to other than the LRU page with NEED_SYNC
** cleared). This is Ok, as pSynced is just an optimization. */
- for(pPg=pCache->pSynced;
- pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC));
+ for(pPg=pCache->pSynced;
+ pPg && (pPg->nRef || (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC));
pPg=pPg->pDirtyPrev
);
pCache->pSynced = pPg;
@@ -44525,7 +44525,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheFetchStress(
if( pPg ){
int rc;
#ifdef SQLITE_LOG_CACHE_SPILL
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_FULL,
"spill page %d making room for %d - cache used: %d/%d",
pPg->pgno, pgno,
sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache.xPagecount(pCache->pCache),
@@ -44715,7 +44715,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(PCache *pCache){
}
/*
-** Change the page number of page p to newPgno.
+** Change the page number of page p to newPgno.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheMove(PgHdr *p, Pgno newPgno){
PCache *pCache = p->pCache;
@@ -44778,7 +44778,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClose(PCache *pCache){
sqlite3GlobalConfig.pcache2.xDestroy(pCache->pCache);
}
-/*
+/*
** Discard the contents of the cache.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheClear(PCache *pCache){
@@ -44869,7 +44869,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE PgHdr *sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(PCache *pCache){
return pcacheSortDirtyList(pCache->pDirty);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the total number of references to all pages held by the cache.
**
** This is not the total number of pages referenced, but the sum of the
@@ -44886,7 +44886,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePageRefcount(PgHdr *p){
return p->nRef;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the total number of pages in the cache.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcachePagecount(PCache *pCache){
@@ -44928,7 +44928,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheSetSpillsize(PCache *p, int mxPage){
p->szSpill = mxPage;
}
res = numberOfCachePages(p);
- if( resszSpill ) res = p->szSpill;
+ if( resszSpill ) res = p->szSpill;
return res;
}
@@ -45039,7 +45039,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheIterateDirty(PCache *pCache, void (*xIter)(PgHd
**
** The third case is a chunk of heap memory (defaulting to 100 pages worth)
** that is allocated when the page cache is created. The size of the local
-** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
+** bulk allocation can be adjusted using
**
** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, (void*)0, 0, N).
**
@@ -45064,9 +45064,9 @@ typedef struct PgFreeslot PgFreeslot;
typedef struct PGroup PGroup;
/*
-** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
+** Each cache entry is represented by an instance of the following
** structure. Unless SQLITE_PCACHE_SEPARATE_HEADER is defined, a buffer of
-** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure
+** PgHdr1.pCache->szPage bytes is allocated directly before this structure
** in memory.
*/
struct PgHdr1 {
@@ -45081,7 +45081,7 @@ struct PgHdr1 {
PgHdr1 *pLruPrev; /* Previous in LRU list of unpinned pages */
};
-/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set
+/* Each page cache (or PCache) belongs to a PGroup. A PGroup is a set
** of one or more PCaches that are able to recycle each other's unpinned
** pages when they are under memory pressure. A PGroup is an instance of
** the following object.
@@ -45117,12 +45117,12 @@ struct PGroup {
** temporary or transient database) has a single page cache which
** is an instance of this object.
**
-** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
+** Pointers to structures of this type are cast and returned as
** opaque sqlite3_pcache* handles.
*/
struct PCache1 {
/* Cache configuration parameters. Page size (szPage) and the purgeable
- ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be
+ ** flag (bPurgeable) are set when the cache is created. nMax may be
** modified at any time by a call to the pcache1Cachesize() method.
** The PGroup mutex must be held when accessing nMax.
*/
@@ -45168,7 +45168,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
*/
int isInit; /* True if initialized */
int separateCache; /* Use a new PGroup for each PCache */
- int nInitPage; /* Initial bulk allocation size */
+ int nInitPage; /* Initial bulk allocation size */
int szSlot; /* Size of each free slot */
int nSlot; /* The number of pcache slots */
int nReserve; /* Try to keep nFreeSlot above this */
@@ -45209,7 +45209,7 @@ static SQLITE_WSD struct PCacheGlobal {
/*
-** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
+** This function is called during initialization if a static buffer is
** supplied to use for the page-cache by passing the SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE
** verb to sqlite3_config(). Parameter pBuf points to an allocation large
** enough to contain 'n' buffers of 'sz' bytes each.
@@ -45278,8 +45278,8 @@ static int pcache1InitBulk(PCache1 *pCache){
/*
** Malloc function used within this file to allocate space from the buffer
-** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
-** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
+** configured using sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE) option. If no
+** such buffer exists or there is no space left in it, this function falls
** back to sqlite3Malloc().
**
** Multiple threads can run this routine at the same time. Global variables
@@ -45385,7 +45385,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1AllocPage(PCache1 *pCache, int benignMalloc){
}else{
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_MEMORY_MANAGEMENT
/* The group mutex must be released before pcache1Alloc() is called. This
- ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
+ ** is because it might call sqlite3_release_memory(), which assumes that
** this mutex is not held. */
assert( pcache1.separateCache==0 );
assert( pCache->pGroup==&pcache1.grp );
@@ -45527,7 +45527,7 @@ static void pcache1ResizeHash(PCache1 *p){
}
/*
-** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
+** This function is used internally to remove the page pPage from the
** PGroup LRU list, if is part of it. If pPage is not part of the PGroup
** LRU list, then this function is a no-op.
**
@@ -45555,7 +45555,7 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1PinPage(PgHdr1 *pPage){
/*
-** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
+** Remove the page supplied as an argument from the hash table
** (PCache1.apHash structure) that it is currently stored in.
** Also free the page if freePage is true.
**
@@ -45598,8 +45598,8 @@ static void pcache1EnforceMaxPage(PCache1 *pCache){
}
/*
-** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
-** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
+** Discard all pages from cache pCache with a page number (key value)
+** greater than or equal to iLimit. Any pinned pages that meet this
** criteria are unpinned before they are discarded.
**
** The PCache mutex must be held when this function is called.
@@ -45631,7 +45631,7 @@ static void pcache1TruncateUnsafe(
PgHdr1 **pp;
PgHdr1 *pPage;
assert( hnHash );
- pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
+ pp = &pCache->apHash[h];
while( (pPage = *pp)!=0 ){
if( pPage->iKey>=iLimit ){
pCache->nPage--;
@@ -45672,7 +45672,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
**
** * Use a unified cache in single-threaded applications that have
** configured a start-time buffer for use as page-cache memory using
- ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
+ ** sqlite3_config(SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE, pBuf, sz, N) with non-NULL
** pBuf argument.
**
** * Otherwise use separate caches (mode-1)
@@ -45709,7 +45709,7 @@ static int pcache1Init(void *NotUsed){
/*
** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShutdown method.
-** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
+** Note that the static mutex allocated in xInit does
** not need to be freed.
*/
static void pcache1Shutdown(void *NotUsed){
@@ -45769,7 +45769,7 @@ static sqlite3_pcache *pcache1Create(int szPage, int szExtra, int bPurgeable){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xCachesize method.
**
** Configure the cache_size limit for a cache.
*/
@@ -45788,7 +45788,7 @@ static void pcache1Cachesize(sqlite3_pcache *p, int nMax){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xShrink method.
**
** Free up as much memory as possible.
*/
@@ -45807,7 +45807,7 @@ static void pcache1Shrink(sqlite3_pcache *p){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xPagecount method.
*/
static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
int n;
@@ -45828,8 +45828,8 @@ static int pcache1Pagecount(sqlite3_pcache *p){
** for these steps, the main pcache1Fetch() procedure can run faster.
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
- PCache1 *pCache,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ PCache1 *pCache,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
unsigned int nPinned;
@@ -45871,8 +45871,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
}
}
- /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
- ** attempt to allocate a new one.
+ /* Step 5. If a usable page buffer has still not been found,
+ ** attempt to allocate a new one.
*/
if( !pPage ){
pPage = pcache1AllocPage(pCache, createFlag==1);
@@ -45897,13 +45897,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xFetch method.
**
** Fetch a page by key value.
**
** Whether or not a new page may be allocated by this function depends on
** the value of the createFlag argument. 0 means do not allocate a new
-** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
+** page. 1 means allocate a new page if space is easily available. 2
** means to try really hard to allocate a new page.
**
** For a non-purgeable cache (a cache used as the storage for an in-memory
@@ -45914,7 +45914,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
** There are three different approaches to obtaining space for a page,
** depending on the value of parameter createFlag (which may be 0, 1 or 2).
**
-** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
+** 1. Regardless of the value of createFlag, the cache is searched for a
** copy of the requested page. If one is found, it is returned.
**
** 2. If createFlag==0 and the page is not already in the cache, NULL is
@@ -45928,13 +45928,13 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
** PCache1.nMax, or
**
** (b) the number of pages pinned by the cache is greater than
-** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
+** the sum of nMax for all purgeable caches, less the sum of
** nMin for all other purgeable caches, or
**
** 4. If none of the first three conditions apply and the cache is marked
** as purgeable, and if one of the following is true:
**
-** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
+** (a) The number of pages allocated for the cache is already
** PCache1.nMax, or
**
** (b) The number of pages allocated for all purgeable caches is
@@ -45946,7 +45946,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
**
** then attempt to recycle a page from the LRU list. If it is the right
** size, return the recycled buffer. Otherwise, free the buffer and
-** proceed to step 5.
+** proceed to step 5.
**
** 5. Otherwise, allocate and return a new page buffer.
**
@@ -45956,8 +45956,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchStage2(
** invokes the appropriate routine.
*/
static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -45986,8 +45986,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchNoMutex(
}
#if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX
static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
@@ -46001,8 +46001,8 @@ static PgHdr1 *pcache1FetchWithMutex(
}
#endif
static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- unsigned int iKey,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ unsigned int iKey,
int createFlag
){
#if PCACHE1_MIGHT_USE_GROUP_MUTEX || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -46032,18 +46032,18 @@ static sqlite3_pcache_page *pcache1Fetch(
** Mark a page as unpinned (eligible for asynchronous recycling).
*/
static void pcache1Unpin(
- sqlite3_pcache *p,
- sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
+ sqlite3_pcache *p,
+ sqlite3_pcache_page *pPg,
int reuseUnlikely
){
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
PGroup *pGroup = pCache->pGroup;
-
+
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
pcache1EnterMutex(pGroup);
- /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
+ /* It is an error to call this function if the page is already
** part of the PGroup LRU list.
*/
assert( pPage->pLruPrev==0 && pPage->pLruNext==0 );
@@ -46065,7 +46065,7 @@ static void pcache1Unpin(
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xRekey method.
*/
static void pcache1Rekey(
sqlite3_pcache *p,
@@ -46076,7 +46076,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
PCache1 *pCache = (PCache1 *)p;
PgHdr1 *pPage = (PgHdr1 *)pPg;
PgHdr1 **pp;
- unsigned int h;
+ unsigned int h;
assert( pPage->iKey==iOld );
assert( pPage->pCache==pCache );
@@ -46101,7 +46101,7 @@ static void pcache1Rekey(
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xTruncate method.
**
** Discard all unpinned pages in the cache with a page number equal to
** or greater than parameter iLimit. Any pinned pages with a page number
@@ -46118,7 +46118,7 @@ static void pcache1Truncate(sqlite3_pcache *p, unsigned int iLimit){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
+** Implementation of the sqlite3_pcache.xDestroy method.
**
** Destroy a cache allocated using pcache1Create().
*/
@@ -46184,7 +46184,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_mutex *sqlite3Pcache1Mutex(void){
** by the current thread may be sqlite3_free()ed.
**
** nReq is the number of bytes of memory required. Once this much has
-** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
+** been released, the function returns. The return value is the total number
** of bytes of memory released.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PcacheReleaseMemory(int nReq){
@@ -46275,7 +46275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats(
** extracts the least value from the RowSet.
**
** The INSERT primitive might allocate additional memory. Memory is
-** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
+** allocated in chunks so most INSERTs do no allocation. There is an
** upper bound on the size of allocated memory. No memory is freed
** until DESTROY.
**
@@ -46323,7 +46323,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PcacheStats(
** in the list, pLeft points to the tree, and v is unused. The
** RowSet.pForest value points to the head of this forest list.
*/
-struct RowSetEntry {
+struct RowSetEntry {
i64 v; /* ROWID value for this entry */
struct RowSetEntry *pRight; /* Right subtree (larger entries) or list */
struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree (smaller entries) */
@@ -46371,7 +46371,7 @@ struct RowSet {
**
** It must be the case that N is sufficient to make a Rowset. If not
** an assertion fault occurs.
-**
+**
** If N is larger than the minimum, use the surplus as an initial
** allocation of entries available to be filled.
*/
@@ -46471,7 +46471,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowSetInsert(RowSet *p, i64 rowid){
/*
** Merge two lists of RowSetEntry objects. Remove duplicates.
**
-** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
+** The input lists are connected via pRight pointers and are
** assumed to each already be in sorted order.
*/
static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
@@ -46508,7 +46508,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntryMerge(
/*
** Sort all elements on the list of RowSetEntry objects into order of
** increasing v.
-*/
+*/
static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetEntrySort(struct RowSetEntry *pIn){
unsigned int i;
struct RowSetEntry *pNext, *aBucket[40];
@@ -46581,7 +46581,7 @@ static struct RowSetEntry *rowSetNDeepTree(
struct RowSetEntry *pLeft; /* Left subtree */
if( *ppList==0 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
/* Prevent unnecessary deep recursion when we run out of entries */
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
if( iDepth>1 ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-TRUE*/
/* This branch causes a *balanced* tree to be generated. A valid tree
@@ -46751,7 +46751,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
**
*************************************************************************
** This is the implementation of the page cache subsystem or "pager".
-**
+**
** The pager is used to access a database disk file. It implements
** atomic commit and rollback through the use of a journal file that
** is separate from the database file. The pager also implements file
@@ -46774,8 +46774,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging
-** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to
+** This header file defines the interface to the write-ahead logging
+** system. Refer to the comments below and the header comment attached to
** the implementation of each function in log.c for further details.
*/
@@ -46814,8 +46814,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RowSetTest(RowSet *pRowSet, int iBatch, sqlite3_int64
#define WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA 4
-/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file.
-** There is one object of this type for each pager.
+/* Connection to a write-ahead log (WAL) file.
+** There is one object of this type for each pager.
*/
typedef struct Wal Wal;
@@ -46826,7 +46826,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalClose(Wal *pWal, sqlite3*, int sync_flags, int, u8
/* Set the limiting size of a WAL file. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalLimit(Wal*, i64);
-/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot. A
+/* Used by readers to open (lock) and close (unlock) a snapshot. A
** snapshot is like a read-transaction. It is the state of the database
** at an instant in time. sqlite3WalOpenSnapshot gets a read lock and
** preserves the current state even if the other threads or processes
@@ -46861,7 +46861,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalSavepointUndo(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData);
/* Write a frame or frames to the log. */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(Wal *pWal, int, PgHdr *, Pgno, int, int);
-/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */
+/* Copy pages from the log to the database file */
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
Wal *pWal, /* Write-ahead log connection */
sqlite3 *db, /* Check this handle's interrupt flag */
@@ -46889,7 +46889,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op);
/* Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal);
@@ -46929,60 +46929,60 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal);
**
** Definition: A page of the database file is said to be "overwriteable" if
** one or more of the following are true about the page:
-**
+**
** (a) The original content of the page as it was at the beginning of
** the transaction has been written into the rollback journal and
** synced.
-**
+**
** (b) The page was a freelist leaf page at the start of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (c) The page number is greater than the largest page that existed in
** the database file at the start of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (1) A page of the database file is never overwritten unless one of the
** following are true:
-**
+**
** (a) The page and all other pages on the same sector are overwriteable.
-**
+**
** (b) The atomic page write optimization is enabled, and the entire
** transaction other than the update of the transaction sequence
** number consists of a single page change.
-**
+**
** (2) The content of a page written into the rollback journal exactly matches
** both the content in the database when the rollback journal was written
** and the content in the database at the beginning of the current
** transaction.
-**
+**
** (3) Writes to the database file are an integer multiple of the page size
** in length and are aligned on a page boundary.
-**
+**
** (4) Reads from the database file are either aligned on a page boundary and
** an integer multiple of the page size in length or are taken from the
** first 100 bytes of the database file.
-**
+**
** (5) All writes to the database file are synced prior to the rollback journal
** being deleted, truncated, or zeroed.
-**
+**
** (6) If a master journal file is used, then all writes to the database file
** are synced prior to the master journal being deleted.
-**
+**
** Definition: Two databases (or the same database at two points it time)
** are said to be "logically equivalent" if they give the same answer to
** all queries. Note in particular the content of freelist leaf
** pages can be changed arbitrarily without affecting the logical equivalence
** of the database.
-**
+**
** (7) At any time, if any subset, including the empty set and the total set,
-** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
+** of the unsynced changes to a rollback journal are removed and the
** journal is rolled back, the resulting database file will be logically
** equivalent to the database file at the beginning of the transaction.
-**
+**
** (8) When a transaction is rolled back, the xTruncate method of the VFS
** is called to restore the database file to the same size it was at
** the beginning of the transaction. (In some VFSes, the xTruncate
** method is a no-op, but that does not change the fact the SQLite will
** invoke it.)
-**
+**
** (9) Whenever the database file is modified, at least one bit in the range
** of bytes from 24 through 39 inclusive will be changed prior to releasing
** the EXCLUSIVE lock, thus signaling other connections on the same
@@ -47015,7 +47015,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
/*
** The following two macros are used within the PAGERTRACE() macros above
-** to print out file-descriptors.
+** to print out file-descriptors.
**
** PAGERID() takes a pointer to a Pager struct as its argument. The
** associated file-descriptor is returned. FILEHANDLEID() takes an sqlite3_file
@@ -47036,7 +47036,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** | | |
** | V |
** |<-------WRITER_LOCKED------> ERROR
-** | | ^
+** | | ^
** | V |
** |<------WRITER_CACHEMOD-------->|
** | | |
@@ -47048,7 +47048,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
**
** List of state transitions and the C [function] that performs each:
-**
+**
** OPEN -> READER [sqlite3PagerSharedLock]
** READER -> OPEN [pager_unlock]
**
@@ -47060,7 +47060,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** WRITER_*** -> ERROR [pager_error]
** ERROR -> OPEN [pager_unlock]
-**
+**
**
** OPEN:
**
@@ -47074,9 +47074,9 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** READER:
**
-** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
+** In this state all the requirements for reading the database in
** rollback (non-WAL) mode are met. Unless the pager is (or recently
-** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
+** was) in exclusive-locking mode, a user-level read transaction is
** open. The database size is known in this state.
**
** A connection running with locking_mode=normal enters this state when
@@ -47086,28 +47086,28 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** this state even after the read-transaction is closed. The only way
** a locking_mode=exclusive connection can transition from READER to OPEN
** is via the ERROR state (see below).
-**
+**
** * A read transaction may be active (but a write-transaction cannot).
** * A SHARED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
+** * The dbSize variable may be trusted (even if a user-level read
** transaction is not active). The dbOrigSize and dbFileSize variables
** may not be trusted at this point.
** * If the database is a WAL database, then the WAL connection is open.
-** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
+** * Even if a read-transaction is not open, it is guaranteed that
** there is no hot-journal in the file-system.
**
** WRITER_LOCKED:
**
** The pager moves to this state from READER when a write-transaction
-** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
-** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
+** is first opened on the database. In WRITER_LOCKED state, all locks
+** required to start a write-transaction are held, but no actual
** modifications to the cache or database have taken place.
**
-** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
+** In rollback mode, a RESERVED or (if the transaction was opened with
** BEGIN EXCLUSIVE) EXCLUSIVE lock is obtained on the database file when
-** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
-** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
-** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
+** moving to this state, but the journal file is not written to or opened
+** to in this state. If the transaction is committed or rolled back while
+** in WRITER_LOCKED state, all that is required is to unlock the database
** file.
**
** IN WAL mode, WalBeginWriteTransaction() is called to lock the log file.
@@ -47115,7 +47115,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** is made to obtain an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file.
**
** * A write transaction is active.
-** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
+** * If the connection is open in rollback-mode, a RESERVED or greater
** lock is held on the database file.
** * If the connection is open in WAL-mode, a WAL write transaction
** is open (i.e. sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction() has been successfully
@@ -47134,7 +47134,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** * A write transaction is active.
** * A RESERVED or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
+** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
** to it, but the header has not been synced to disk.
** * The contents of the page cache have been modified.
**
@@ -47147,7 +47147,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** * A write transaction is active.
** * An EXCLUSIVE or greater lock is held on the database file.
-** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
+** * The journal file is open and the first header has been written
** and synced to disk.
** * The contents of the page cache have been modified (and possibly
** written to disk).
@@ -47159,8 +47159,8 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** A rollback-mode pager changes to WRITER_FINISHED state from WRITER_DBMOD
** state after the entire transaction has been successfully written into the
** database file. In this state the transaction may be committed simply
-** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
-** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
+** by finalizing the journal file. Once in WRITER_FINISHED state, it is
+** not possible to modify the database further. At this point, the upper
** layer must either commit or rollback the transaction.
**
** * A write transaction is active.
@@ -47168,19 +47168,19 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** * All writing and syncing of journal and database data has finished.
** If no error occurred, all that remains is to finalize the journal to
** commit the transaction. If an error did occur, the caller will need
-** to rollback the transaction.
+** to rollback the transaction.
**
** ERROR:
**
** The ERROR state is entered when an IO or disk-full error (including
-** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
-** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
+** SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM) occurs at a point in the code that makes it
+** difficult to be sure that the in-memory pager state (cache contents,
** db size etc.) are consistent with the contents of the file-system.
**
** Temporary pager files may enter the ERROR state, but in-memory pagers
** cannot.
**
-** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
+** For example, if an IO error occurs while performing a rollback,
** the contents of the page-cache may be left in an inconsistent state.
** At this point it would be dangerous to change back to READER state
** (as usually happens after a rollback). Any subsequent readers might
@@ -47190,13 +47190,13 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** instead of READER following such an error.
**
** Once it has entered the ERROR state, any attempt to use the pager
-** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
+** to read or write data returns an error. Eventually, once all
** outstanding transactions have been abandoned, the pager is able to
-** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
+** transition back to OPEN state, discarding the contents of the
** page-cache and any other in-memory state at the same time. Everything
** is reloaded from disk (and, if necessary, hot-journal rollback peformed)
** when a read-transaction is next opened on the pager (transitioning
-** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
+** the pager into READER state). At that point the system has recovered
** from the error.
**
** Specifically, the pager jumps into the ERROR state if:
@@ -47212,21 +47212,21 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** memory.
**
** In other cases, the error is returned to the b-tree layer. The b-tree
-** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
+** layer then attempts a rollback operation. If the error condition
** persists, the pager enters the ERROR state via condition (1) above.
**
** Condition (3) is necessary because it can be triggered by a read-only
** statement executed within a transaction. In this case, if the error
** code were simply returned to the user, the b-tree layer would not
** automatically attempt a rollback, as it assumes that an error in a
-** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
+** read-only statement cannot leave the pager in an internally inconsistent
** state.
**
** * The Pager.errCode variable is set to something other than SQLITE_OK.
** * There are one or more outstanding references to pages (after the
** last reference is dropped the pager should move back to OPEN state).
** * The pager is not an in-memory pager.
-**
+**
**
** Notes:
**
@@ -47236,7 +47236,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** * Normally, a connection open in exclusive mode is never in PAGER_OPEN
** state. There are two exceptions: immediately after exclusive-mode has
-** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
+** been turned on (and before any read or write transactions are
** executed), and when the pager is leaving the "error state".
**
** * See also: assert_pager_state().
@@ -47250,7 +47250,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
#define PAGER_ERROR 6
/*
-** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
+** The Pager.eLock variable is almost always set to one of the
** following locking-states, according to the lock currently held on
** the database file: NO_LOCK, SHARED_LOCK, RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
** This variable is kept up to date as locks are taken and released by
@@ -47265,20 +47265,20 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** to a less exclusive (lower) value than the lock that is actually held
** at the system level, but it is never set to a more exclusive value.
**
-** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
+** This is usually safe. If an xUnlock fails or appears to fail, there may
** be a few redundant xLock() calls or a lock may be held for longer than
** required, but nothing really goes wrong.
**
** The exception is when the database file is unlocked as the pager moves
-** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
+** from ERROR to OPEN state. At this point there may be a hot-journal file
** in the file-system that needs to be rolled back (as part of an OPEN->SHARED
** transition, by the same pager or any other). If the call to xUnlock()
** fails at this point and the pager is left holding an EXCLUSIVE lock, this
** can confuse the call to xCheckReservedLock() call made later as part
** of hot-journal detection.
**
-** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
-** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
+** xCheckReservedLock() is defined as returning true "if there is a RESERVED
+** lock held by this process or any others". So xCheckReservedLock may
** return true because the caller itself is holding an EXCLUSIVE lock (but
** doesn't know it because of a previous error in xUnlock). If this happens
** a hot-journal may be mistaken for a journal being created by an active
@@ -47289,12 +47289,12 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
** database in the ERROR state, Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK. It
** is only changed back to a real locking state after a successful call
** to xLock(EXCLUSIVE). Also, the code to do the OPEN->SHARED state transition
-** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
+** omits the check for a hot-journal if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK
** lock. Instead, it assumes a hot-journal exists and obtains an EXCLUSIVE
** lock on the database file before attempting to roll it back. See function
** PagerSharedLock() for more detail.
**
-** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
+** Pager.eLock may only be set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when the pager is in
** PAGER_OPEN state.
*/
#define UNKNOWN_LOCK (EXCLUSIVE_LOCK+1)
@@ -47314,7 +47314,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
#endif
/*
-** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
+** The maximum allowed sector size. 64KiB. If the xSectorsize() method
** returns a value larger than this, then MAX_SECTOR_SIZE is used instead.
** This could conceivably cause corruption following a power failure on
** such a system. This is currently an undocumented limit.
@@ -47330,7 +47330,7 @@ int sqlite3PagerTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
**
** When a savepoint is created, the PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset field is
** set to 0. If a journal-header is written into the main journal while
-** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
+** the savepoint is active, then iHdrOffset is set to the byte offset
** immediately following the last journal record written into the main
** journal before the journal-header. This is required during savepoint
** rollback (see pagerPlaybackSavepoint()).
@@ -47380,34 +47380,34 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
**
** changeCountDone
**
-** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
-** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
-** not updated more often than necessary.
+** This boolean variable is used to make sure that the change-counter
+** (the 4-byte header field at byte offset 24 of the database file) is
+** not updated more often than necessary.
**
-** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
+** It is set to true when the change-counter field is updated, which
** can only happen if an exclusive lock is held on the database file.
-** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
+** It is cleared (set to false) whenever an exclusive lock is
** relinquished on the database file. Each time a transaction is committed,
** The changeCountDone flag is inspected. If it is true, the work of
** updating the change-counter is omitted for the current transaction.
**
-** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
+** This mechanism means that when running in exclusive mode, a connection
** need only update the change-counter once, for the first transaction
** committed.
**
** setMaster
**
** When PagerCommitPhaseOne() is called to commit a transaction, it may
-** (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the
+** (or may not) specify a master-journal name to be written into the
** journal file before it is synced to disk.
**
-** Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects
-** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
+** Whether or not a journal file contains a master-journal pointer affects
+** the way in which the journal file is finalized after the transaction is
** committed or rolled back when running in "journal_mode=PERSIST" mode.
** If a journal file does not contain a master-journal pointer, it is
** finalized by overwriting the first journal header with zeroes. If
-** it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
-** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
+** it does contain a master-journal pointer the journal file is finalized
+** by truncating it to zero bytes, just as if the connection were
** running in "journal_mode=truncate" mode.
**
** Journal files that contain master journal pointers cannot be finalized
@@ -47433,12 +47433,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
** to allocate a new page to prevent the journal file from being written
** while it is being traversed by code in pager_playback(). The SPILLFLAG_OFF
** case is a user preference.
-**
+**
** If the SPILLFLAG_NOSYNC bit is set, writing to the database from
** pagerStress() is permitted, but syncing the journal file is not.
** This flag is set by sqlite3PagerWrite() when the file-system sector-size
** is larger than the database page-size in order to prevent a journal sync
-** from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
+** from happening in between the journalling of two pages on the same sector.
**
** subjInMemory
**
@@ -47446,16 +47446,16 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
** is opened as an in-memory journal file. If false, then in-memory
** sub-journals are only used for in-memory pager files.
**
-** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
+** This variable is updated by the upper layer each time a new
** write-transaction is opened.
**
** dbSize, dbOrigSize, dbFileSize
**
** Variable dbSize is set to the number of pages in the database file.
** It is valid in PAGER_READER and higher states (all states except for
-** OPEN and ERROR).
+** OPEN and ERROR).
**
-** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
+** dbSize is set based on the size of the database file, which may be
** larger than the size of the database (the value stored at offset
** 28 of the database header by the btree). If the size of the file
** is not an integer multiple of the page-size, the value stored in
@@ -47466,10 +47466,10 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
**
** During a write-transaction, if pages with page-numbers greater than
** dbSize are modified in the cache, dbSize is updated accordingly.
-** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
+** Similarly, if the database is truncated using PagerTruncateImage(),
** dbSize is updated.
**
-** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
+** Variables dbOrigSize and dbFileSize are valid in states
** PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED and higher. dbOrigSize is a copy of the dbSize
** variable at the start of the transaction. It is used during rollback,
** and to determine whether or not pages need to be journalled before
@@ -47478,12 +47478,12 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
** Throughout a write-transaction, dbFileSize contains the size of
** the file on disk in pages. It is set to a copy of dbSize when the
** write-transaction is first opened, and updated when VFS calls are made
-** to write or truncate the database file on disk.
+** to write or truncate the database file on disk.
**
-** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
-** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
-** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
-** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
+** The only reason the dbFileSize variable is required is to suppress
+** unnecessary calls to xTruncate() after committing a transaction. If,
+** when a transaction is committed, the dbFileSize variable indicates
+** that the database file is larger than the database image (Pager.dbSize),
** pager_truncate() is called. The pager_truncate() call uses xFilesize()
** to measure the database file on disk, and then truncates it if required.
** dbFileSize is not used when rolling back a transaction. In this case
@@ -47494,20 +47494,20 @@ struct PagerSavepoint {
** dbHintSize
**
** The dbHintSize variable is used to limit the number of calls made to
-** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
+** the VFS xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method.
**
** dbHintSize is set to a copy of the dbSize variable when a
** write-transaction is opened (at the same time as dbFileSize and
** dbOrigSize). If the xFileControl(FCNTL_SIZE_HINT) method is called,
** dbHintSize is increased to the number of pages that correspond to the
-** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
+** size-hint passed to the method call. See pager_write_pagelist() for
** details.
**
** errCode
**
** The Pager.errCode variable is only ever used in PAGER_ERROR state. It
-** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
-** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
+** is set to zero in all other states. In PAGER_ERROR state, Pager.errCode
+** is always set to SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the SQLITE_IOERR_XXX
** sub-codes.
*/
struct Pager {
@@ -47603,7 +47603,7 @@ struct Pager {
/*
** Indexes for use with Pager.aStat[]. The Pager.aStat[] array contains
-** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
+** the values accessed by passing SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT, CACHE_MISS
** or CACHE_WRITE to sqlite3_db_status().
*/
#define PAGER_STAT_HIT 0
@@ -47660,7 +47660,7 @@ static const unsigned char aJournalMagic[] = {
#define JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager) ((pPager->pageSize) + 8)
/*
-** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
+** The journal header size for this pager. This is usually the same
** size as a single disk sector. See also setSectorSize().
*/
#define JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) (pPager->sectorSize)
@@ -47729,7 +47729,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerUseWal(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
# define pagerBeginReadTransaction(z) SQLITE_OK
#endif
-#ifndef NDEBUG
+#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
** Usage:
**
@@ -47758,25 +47758,25 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
assert( p->tempFile==0 || p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
assert( p->tempFile==0 || pPager->changeCountDone );
- /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
+ /* If the useJournal flag is clear, the journal-mode must be "OFF".
** And if the journal-mode is "OFF", the journal file must not be open.
*/
assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || p->useJournal );
assert( p->journalMode!=PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF || !isOpen(p->jfd) );
- /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
- ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
- ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
- ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
- ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
- ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
+ /* Check that MEMDB implies noSync. And an in-memory journal. Since
+ ** this means an in-memory pager performs no IO at all, it cannot encounter
+ ** either SQLITE_IOERR or SQLITE_FULL during rollback or while finalizing
+ ** a journal file. (although the in-memory journal implementation may
+ ** return SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM while the journal file is being written). It
+ ** is therefore not possible for an in-memory pager to enter the ERROR
** state.
*/
if( MEMDB ){
assert( !isOpen(p->fd) );
assert( p->noSync );
- assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ assert( p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
);
assert( p->eState!=PAGER_ERROR && p->eState!=PAGER_OPEN );
assert( pagerUseWal(p)==0 );
@@ -47823,9 +47823,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
** to journal_mode=wal.
*/
assert( p->eLock>=RESERVED_LOCK );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
}
assert( pPager->dbOrigSize==pPager->dbFileSize );
@@ -47837,9 +47837,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
assert( p->eLock>=EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
assert( pPager->dbOrigSize<=pPager->dbHintSize );
break;
@@ -47848,9 +47848,9 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
assert( p->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
assert( pPager->errCode==SQLITE_OK );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
- assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(p->jfd)
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || p->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
break;
@@ -47868,7 +47868,7 @@ static int assert_pager_state(Pager *p){
}
#endif /* ifndef NDEBUG */
-#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
+#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/*
** Return a pointer to a human readable string in a static buffer
** containing the state of the Pager object passed as an argument. This
@@ -48016,7 +48016,7 @@ static int write32bits(sqlite3_file *fd, i64 offset, u32 val){
** succeeds, set the Pager.eLock variable to match the (attempted) new lock.
**
** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
+** called, do not modify it. See the comment above the #define of
** UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation of this.
*/
static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -48039,11 +48039,11 @@ static int pagerUnlockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
/*
** Lock the database file to level eLock, which must be either SHARED_LOCK,
** RESERVED_LOCK or EXCLUSIVE_LOCK. If the caller is successful, set the
-** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
+** Pager.eLock variable to the new locking state.
**
-** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
-** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
-** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
+** Except, if Pager.eLock is set to UNKNOWN_LOCK when this function is
+** called, do not modify it unless the new locking state is EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
+** See the comment above the #define of UNKNOWN_LOCK for an explanation
** of this.
*/
static int pagerLockDb(Pager *pPager, int eLock){
@@ -48148,8 +48148,8 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
/*
** When this is called the journal file for pager pPager must be open.
-** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the
-** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
+** This function attempts to read a master journal file name from the
+** end of the file and, if successful, copies it into memory supplied
** by the caller. See comments above writeMasterJournal() for the format
** used to store a master journal file name at the end of a journal file.
**
@@ -48165,7 +48165,7 @@ static void checkPage(PgHdr *pPg){
** nul-terminator byte is appended to the buffer following the master
** journal file name.
**
-** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present
+** If it is determined that no master journal file name is present
** zMaster[0] is set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** If an error occurs while reading from the journal file, an SQLite
@@ -48183,8 +48183,8 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pJrnl, &szJ))
|| szJ<16
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-16, &len))
- || len>=nMaster
- || len==0
+ || len>=nMaster
+ || len==0
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = read32bits(pJrnl, szJ-12, &cksum))
|| SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3OsRead(pJrnl, aMagic, 8, szJ-8))
|| memcmp(aMagic, aJournalMagic, 8)
@@ -48206,13 +48206,13 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
len = 0;
}
zMaster[len] = '\0';
-
+
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
-** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
-** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
+** Return the offset of the sector boundary at or immediately
+** following the value in pPager->journalOff, assuming a sector
** size of pPager->sectorSize bytes.
**
** i.e for a sector size of 512:
@@ -48223,7 +48223,7 @@ static int readMasterJournal(sqlite3_file *pJrnl, char *zMaster, u32 nMaster){
** 512 512
** 100 512
** 2000 2048
-**
+**
*/
static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
i64 offset = 0;
@@ -48245,12 +48245,12 @@ static i64 journalHdrOffset(Pager *pPager){
**
** If doTruncate is non-zero or the Pager.journalSizeLimit variable is
** set to 0, then truncate the journal file to zero bytes in size. Otherwise,
-** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
-** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
+** zero the 28-byte header at the start of the journal file. In either case,
+** if the pager is not in no-sync mode, sync the journal file immediately
** after writing or truncating it.
**
** If Pager.journalSizeLimit is set to a positive, non-zero value, and
-** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
+** following the truncation or zeroing described above the size of the
** journal file in bytes is larger than this value, then truncate the
** journal file to Pager.journalSizeLimit bytes. The journal file does
** not need to be synced following this operation.
@@ -48276,8 +48276,8 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY|pPager->syncFlags);
}
- /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
- ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
+ /* At this point the transaction is committed but the write lock
+ ** is still held on the file. If there is a size limit configured for
** the persistent journal and the journal file currently consumes more
** space than that limit allows for, truncate it now. There is no need
** to sync the file following this operation.
@@ -48305,7 +48305,7 @@ static int zeroJournalHdr(Pager *pPager, int doTruncate){
** - 4 bytes: Initial database page count.
** - 4 bytes: Sector size used by the process that wrote this journal.
** - 4 bytes: Database page size.
-**
+**
** Followed by (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes of unused space.
*/
static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
@@ -48321,8 +48321,8 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
nHeader = JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager);
}
- /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
- ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
+ /* If there are active savepoints and any of them were created
+ ** since the most recent journal header was written, update the
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset fields now.
*/
for(ii=0; iinSavepoint; ii++){
@@ -48333,10 +48333,10 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
pPager->journalHdr = pPager->journalOff = journalHdrOffset(pPager);
- /*
+ /*
** Write the nRec Field - the number of page records that follow this
** journal header. Normally, zero is written to this value at this time.
- ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
+ ** After the records are added to the journal (and the journal synced,
** if in full-sync mode), the zero is overwritten with the true number
** of records (see syncJournal()).
**
@@ -48355,7 +48355,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
*/
assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->noSync );
if( pPager->noSync || (pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY)
- || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
+ || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd)&SQLITE_IOCAP_SAFE_APPEND)
){
memcpy(zHeader, aJournalMagic, sizeof(aJournalMagic));
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)], 0xffffffff);
@@ -48363,7 +48363,7 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
memset(zHeader, 0, sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4);
}
- /* The random check-hash initializer */
+ /* The random check-hash initializer */
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(pPager->cksumInit), &pPager->cksumInit);
put32bits(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+4], pPager->cksumInit);
/* The initial database size */
@@ -48382,23 +48382,23 @@ static int writeJournalHdr(Pager *pPager){
memset(&zHeader[sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20], 0,
nHeader-(sizeof(aJournalMagic)+20));
- /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
- ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
- ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
+ /* In theory, it is only necessary to write the 28 bytes that the
+ ** journal header consumes to the journal file here. Then increment the
+ ** Pager.journalOff variable by JOURNAL_HDR_SZ so that the next
** record is written to the following sector (leaving a gap in the file
** that will be implicitly filled in by the OS).
**
- ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
+ ** However it has been discovered that on some systems this pattern can
** be significantly slower than contiguously writing data to the file,
- ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
+ ** even if that means explicitly writing data to the block of
** (JOURNAL_HDR_SZ - 28) bytes that will not be used. So that is what
- ** is done.
+ ** is done.
**
- ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
+ ** The loop is required here in case the sector-size is larger than the
** database page size. Since the zHeader buffer is only Pager.pageSize
** bytes in size, more than one call to sqlite3OsWrite() may be required
** to populate the entire journal header sector.
- */
+ */
for(nWrite=0; rc==SQLITE_OK&&nWritejournalHdr, nHeader))
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->jfd, zHeader, nHeader, pPager->journalOff);
@@ -48496,29 +48496,29 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
/* Check that the values read from the page-size and sector-size fields
** are within range. To be 'in range', both values need to be a power
- ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
+ ** of two greater than or equal to 512 or 32, and not greater than their
** respective compile time maximum limits.
*/
if( iPageSize<512 || iSectorSize<32
|| iPageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE || iSectorSize>MAX_SECTOR_SIZE
- || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
+ || ((iPageSize-1)&iPageSize)!=0 || ((iSectorSize-1)&iSectorSize)!=0
){
- /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
- ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
- ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
+ /* If the either the page-size or sector-size in the journal-header is
+ ** invalid, then the process that wrote the journal-header must have
+ ** crashed before the header was synced. In this case stop reading
** the journal file here.
*/
return SQLITE_DONE;
}
- /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
- ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
+ /* Update the page-size to match the value read from the journal.
+ ** Use a testcase() macro to make sure that malloc failure within
** PagerSetPagesize() is tested.
*/
rc = sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(pPager, &iPageSize, -1);
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
- /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
+ /* Update the assumed sector-size to match the value used by
** the process that created this journal. If this journal was
** created by a process other than this one, then this routine
** is being called from within pager_playback(). The local value
@@ -48548,7 +48548,7 @@ static int readJournalHdr(
** The master journal page checksum is the sum of the bytes in the master
** journal name, where each byte is interpreted as a signed 8-bit integer.
**
-** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
+** If zMaster is a NULL pointer (occurs for a single database transaction),
** this call is a no-op.
*/
static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
@@ -48561,8 +48561,8 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
assert( pPager->setMaster==0 );
assert( !pagerUseWal(pPager) );
- if( !zMaster
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ if( !zMaster
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
|| !isOpen(pPager->jfd)
){
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -48598,16 +48598,16 @@ static int writeMasterJournal(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
}
pPager->journalOff += (nMaster+20);
- /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
+ /* If the pager is in peristent-journal mode, then the physical
** journal-file may extend past the end of the master-journal name
- ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
+ ** and 8 bytes of magic data just written to the file. This is
** dangerous because the code to rollback a hot-journal file
- ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine
- ** whether or not the journal is hot.
+ ** will not be able to find the master-journal name to determine
+ ** whether or not the journal is hot.
**
- ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
+ ** Easiest thing to do in this scenario is to truncate the journal
** file to the required size.
- */
+ */
if( SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3OsFileSize(pPager->jfd, &jrnlSize))
&& jrnlSize>pPager->journalOff
){
@@ -48653,7 +48653,7 @@ static void releaseAllSavepoints(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
+** Set the bit number pgno in the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint
** bitvecs of all open savepoints. Return SQLITE_OK if successful
** or SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc failure occurs.
*/
@@ -48682,8 +48682,8 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
** not exhibit the UNDELETABLE_WHEN_OPEN property, the journal file is
** closed (if it is open).
**
-** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
-** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
+** If the pager is in ERROR state when this function is called, the
+** contents of the pager cache are discarded before switching back to
** the OPEN state. Regardless of whether the pager is in exclusive-mode
** or not, any journal file left in the file-system will be treated
** as a hot-journal and rolled back the next time a read-transaction
@@ -48691,9 +48691,9 @@ static int addToSavepointBitvecs(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
*/
static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
- assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
+ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_ERROR
);
sqlite3BitvecDestroy(pPager->pInJournal);
@@ -48771,17 +48771,17 @@ static void pager_unlock(Pager *pPager){
/*
** This function is called whenever an IOERR or FULL error that requires
** the pager to transition into the ERROR state may ahve occurred.
-** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
-** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
-** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
+** The first argument is a pointer to the pager structure, the second
+** the error-code about to be returned by a pager API function. The
+** value returned is a copy of the second argument to this function.
**
** If the second argument is SQLITE_FULL, SQLITE_IOERR or one of the
** IOERR sub-codes, the pager enters the ERROR state and the error code
** is stored in Pager.errCode. While the pager remains in the ERROR state,
** all major API calls on the Pager will immediately return Pager.errCode.
**
-** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
-** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
+** The ERROR state indicates that the contents of the pager-cache
+** cannot be trusted. This state can be cleared by completely discarding
** the contents of the pager-cache. If a transaction was active when
** the persistent error occurred, then the rollback journal may need
** to be replayed to restore the contents of the database file (as if
@@ -48829,27 +48829,27 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
}
/*
-** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
-** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
+** This routine ends a transaction. A transaction is usually ended by
+** either a COMMIT or a ROLLBACK operation. This routine may be called
** after rollback of a hot-journal, or if an error occurs while opening
** the journal file or writing the very first journal-header of a
** database transaction.
-**
+**
** This routine is never called in PAGER_ERROR state. If it is called
** in PAGER_NONE or PAGER_SHARED state and the lock held is less
** exclusive than a RESERVED lock, it is a no-op.
**
** Otherwise, any active savepoints are released.
**
-** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
-** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
+** If the journal file is open, then it is "finalized". Once a journal
+** file has been finalized it is not possible to use it to roll back a
** transaction. Nor will it be considered to be a hot-journal by this
** or any other database connection. Exactly how a journal is finalized
** depends on whether or not the pager is running in exclusive mode and
** the current journal-mode (Pager.journalMode value), as follows:
**
** journalMode==MEMORY
-** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
+** Journal file descriptor is simply closed. This destroys an
** in-memory journal.
**
** journalMode==TRUNCATE
@@ -48869,12 +48869,12 @@ static int pagerFlushOnCommit(Pager *pPager, int bCommit){
** journalMode==PERSIST is used instead.
**
** After the journal is finalized, the pager moves to PAGER_READER state.
-** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
+** If running in non-exclusive rollback mode, the lock on the file is
** downgraded to a SHARED_LOCK.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if no error occurs. If an error occurs during
** any of the IO operations to finalize the journal file or unlock the
-** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
+** database then the IO error code is returned to the user. If the
** operation to finalize the journal file fails, then the code still
** tries to unlock the database file if not in exclusive mode. If the
** unlock operation fails as well, then the first error code related
@@ -48893,9 +48893,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
** 1. After a successful hot-journal rollback, it is called with
** eState==PAGER_NONE and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK.
**
- ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
+ ** 2. If a connection with locking_mode=exclusive holding an EXCLUSIVE
** lock switches back to locking_mode=normal and then executes a
- ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
+ ** read-transaction, this function is called with eState==PAGER_READER
** and eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK when the read-transaction is closed.
*/
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -48941,9 +48941,9 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
*/
int bDelete = !pPager->tempFile;
assert( sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(pPager->jfd)==0 );
- assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
sqlite3OsClose(pPager->jfd);
if( bDelete ){
@@ -48976,8 +48976,8 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
}
if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
- /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
- ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
+ /* Drop the WAL write-lock, if any. Also, if the connection was in
+ ** locking_mode=exclusive mode but is no longer, drop the EXCLUSIVE
** lock held on the database file.
*/
rc2 = sqlite3WalEndWriteTransaction(pPager->pWal);
@@ -48985,7 +48985,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
}else if( rc==SQLITE_OK && bCommit && pPager->dbFileSize>pPager->dbSize ){
/* This branch is taken when committing a transaction in rollback-journal
** mode if the database file on disk is larger than the database image.
- ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
+ ** At this point the journal has been finalized and the transaction
** successfully committed, but the EXCLUSIVE lock is still held on the
** file. So it is safe to truncate the database file to its minimum
** required size. */
@@ -48998,7 +48998,7 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
if( rc==SQLITE_NOTFOUND ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
- if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
+ if( !pPager->exclusiveMode
&& (!pagerUseWal(pPager) || sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(pPager->pWal, 0))
){
rc2 = pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
@@ -49011,19 +49011,19 @@ static int pager_end_transaction(Pager *pPager, int hasMaster, int bCommit){
}
/*
-** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
-** database file.
+** Execute a rollback if a transaction is active and unlock the
+** database file.
**
-** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
+** If the pager has already entered the ERROR state, do not attempt
** the rollback at this time. Instead, pager_unlock() is called. The
** call to pager_unlock() will discard all in-memory pages, unlock
-** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
-** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
-** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
+** the database file and move the pager back to OPEN state. If this
+** means that there is a hot-journal left in the file-system, the next
+** connection to obtain a shared lock on the pager (which may be this one)
** will roll it back.
**
** If the pager has not already entered the ERROR state, but an IO or
-** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
+** malloc error occurs during a rollback, then this will itself cause
** the pager to enter the ERROR state. Which will be cleared by the
** call to pager_unlock(), as described above.
*/
@@ -49044,10 +49044,10 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
/*
** Parameter aData must point to a buffer of pPager->pageSize bytes
-** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
+** of data. Compute and return a checksum based ont the contents of the
** page of data and the current value of pPager->cksumInit.
**
-** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
+** This is not a real checksum. It is really just the sum of the
** random initial value (pPager->cksumInit) and every 200th byte
** of the page data, starting with byte offset (pPager->pageSize%200).
** Each byte is interpreted as an 8-bit unsigned integer.
@@ -49055,8 +49055,8 @@ static void pagerUnlockAndRollback(Pager *pPager){
** Changing the formula used to compute this checksum results in an
** incompatible journal file format.
**
-** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
-** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
+** If journal corruption occurs due to a power failure, the most likely
+** scenario is that one end or the other of the record will be changed.
** It is much less likely that the two ends of the journal record will be
** correct and the middle be corrupt. Thus, this "checksum" scheme,
** though fast and simple, catches the mostly likely kind of corruption.
@@ -49106,7 +49106,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerAlignReserve(Pager *pDest, Pager *pSrc){
** The page begins at offset *pOffset into the file. The *pOffset
** value is increased to the start of the next page in the journal.
**
-** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
+** The main rollback journal uses checksums - the statement journal does
** not.
**
** If the page number of the page record read from the (sub-)journal file
@@ -49126,7 +49126,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerAlignReserve(Pager *pDest, Pager *pSrc){
** is successfully read from the (sub-)journal file but appears to be
** corrupted, SQLITE_DONE is returned. Data is considered corrupted in
** two circumstances:
-**
+**
** * If the record page-number is illegal (0 or PAGER_MJ_PGNO), or
** * If the record is being rolled back from the main journal file
** and the checksum field does not match the record content.
@@ -49161,7 +49161,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
assert( aData ); /* Temp storage must have already been allocated */
assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)==0 || (!isMainJrnl && isSavepnt) );
- /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
+ /* Either the state is greater than PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD (a transaction
** or savepoint rollback done at the request of the caller) or this is
** a hot-journal rollback. If it is a hot-journal rollback, the pager
** is in state OPEN and holds an EXCLUSIVE lock. Hot-journal rollback
@@ -49228,7 +49228,7 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
** assert()able.
**
** If in WRITER_DBMOD, WRITER_FINISHED or OPEN state, then we update the
- ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
+ ** pager cache if it exists and the main file. The page is then marked
** not dirty. Since this code is only executed in PAGER_OPEN state for
** a hot-journal rollback, it is guaranteed that the page-cache is empty
** if the pager is in OPEN state.
@@ -49286,18 +49286,18 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
}else if( !isMainJrnl && pPg==0 ){
/* If this is a rollback of a savepoint and data was not written to
** the database and the page is not in-memory, there is a potential
- ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
- ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
- ** current.
+ ** problem. When the page is next fetched by the b-tree layer, it
+ ** will be read from the database file, which may or may not be
+ ** current.
**
** There are a couple of different ways this can happen. All are quite
- ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
+ ** obscure. When running in synchronous mode, this can only happen
** if the page is on the free-list at the start of the transaction, then
** populated, then moved using sqlite3PagerMovepage().
**
** The solution is to add an in-memory page to the cache containing
- ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
- ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
+ ** the data just read from the sub-journal. Mark the page as dirty
+ ** and if the pager requires a journal-sync, then mark the page as
** requiring a journal-sync before it is written.
*/
assert( isSavepnt );
@@ -49345,26 +49345,26 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
** This routine checks if it is possible to delete the master journal file,
** and does so if it is.
**
-** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
+** Argument zMaster may point to Pager.pTmpSpace. So that buffer is not
** available for use within this function.
**
-** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names
-** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
-** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
+** When a master journal file is created, it is populated with the names
+** of all of its child journals, one after another, formatted as utf-8
+** encoded text. The end of each child journal file is marked with a
** nul-terminator byte (0x00). i.e. the entire contents of a master journal
** file for a transaction involving two databases might be:
**
** "/home/bill/a.db-journal\x00/home/bill/b.db-journal\x00"
**
-** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
+** A master journal file may only be deleted once all of its child
** journals have been rolled back.
**
-** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into
+** This function reads the contents of the master-journal file into
** memory and loops through each of the child journal names. For
** each child journal, it checks if:
**
** * if the child journal exists, and if so
-** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal
+** * if the child journal contains a reference to master journal
** file zMaster
**
** If a child journal can be found that matches both of the criteria
@@ -49374,12 +49374,12 @@ static int pager_playback_one_page(
**
** If an IO error within this function, an error code is returned. This
** function allocates memory by calling sqlite3Malloc(). If an allocation
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. Otherwise, if no IO or malloc errors
** occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** TODO: This function allocates a single block of memory to load
** the entire contents of the master journal file. This could be
-** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
+** a couple of kilobytes or so - potentially larger than the page
** size.
*/
static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
@@ -49457,7 +49457,7 @@ static int pager_delmaster(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
}
zJournal += (sqlite3Strlen30(zJournal)+1);
}
-
+
sqlite3OsClose(pMaster);
rc = sqlite3OsDelete(pVfs, zMaster, 0);
@@ -49473,20 +49473,20 @@ delmaster_out:
/*
-** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
+** This function is used to change the actual size of the database
** file in the file-system. This only happens when committing a transaction,
** or rolling back a transaction (including rolling back a hot-journal).
**
** If the main database file is not open, or the pager is not in either
-** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
-** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
+** DBMOD or OPEN state, this function is a no-op. Otherwise, the size
+** of the file is changed to nPage pages (nPage*pPager->pageSize bytes).
** If the file on disk is currently larger than nPage pages, then use the VFS
** xTruncate() method to truncate it.
**
-** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
-** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
-** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
-** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
+** Or, it might be the case that the file on disk is smaller than
+** nPage pages. Some operating system implementations can get confused if
+** you try to truncate a file to some size that is larger than it
+** currently is, so detect this case and write a single zero byte to
** the end of the new file instead.
**
** If successful, return SQLITE_OK. If an IO error occurs while modifying
@@ -49496,9 +49496,9 @@ static int pager_truncate(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_ERROR );
assert( pPager->eState!=PAGER_READER );
-
- if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
- && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
+
+ if( isOpen(pPager->fd)
+ && (pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD || pPager->eState==PAGER_OPEN)
){
i64 currentSize, newSize;
int szPage = pPager->pageSize;
@@ -49542,8 +49542,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SectorSize(sqlite3_file *pFile){
/*
** Set the value of the Pager.sectorSize variable for the given
** pager based on the value returned by the xSectorSize method
-** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
-** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
+** of the open database file. The sector size will be used
+** to determine the size and alignment of journal header and
** master journal pointers within created journal files.
**
** For temporary files the effective sector size is always 512 bytes.
@@ -49566,7 +49566,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
assert( isOpen(pPager->fd) || pPager->tempFile );
if( pPager->tempFile
- || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
+ || (sqlite3OsDeviceCharacteristics(pPager->fd) &
SQLITE_IOCAP_POWERSAFE_OVERWRITE)!=0
){
/* Sector size doesn't matter for temporary files. Also, the file
@@ -49580,15 +49580,15 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
/*
** Playback the journal and thus restore the database file to
-** the state it was in before we started making changes.
+** the state it was in before we started making changes.
**
-** The journal file format is as follows:
+** The journal file format is as follows:
**
** (1) 8 byte prefix. A copy of aJournalMagic[].
** (2) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the number of valid page records
** in the journal. If this value is 0xffffffff, then compute the
** number of page records from the journal size.
-** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
+** (3) 4 byte big-endian integer which is the initial value for the
** sanity checksum.
** (4) 4 byte integer which is the number of pages to truncate the
** database to during a rollback.
@@ -49617,7 +49617,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
** from the file size. This value is used when the user selects the
** no-sync option for the journal. A power failure could lead to corruption
** in this case. But for things like temporary table (which will be
-** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
+** deleted when the power is restored) we don't care.
**
** If the file opened as the journal file is not a well-formed
** journal file then all pages up to the first corrupted page are rolled
@@ -49629,7 +49629,7 @@ static void setSectorSize(Pager *pPager){
** and an error code is returned.
**
** The isHot parameter indicates that we are trying to rollback a journal
-** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
+** that might be a hot journal. Or, it could be that the journal is
** preserved because of JOURNALMODE_PERSIST or JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE.
** If the journal really is hot, reset the pager cache prior rolling
** back any content. If the journal is merely persistent, no reset is
@@ -49679,9 +49679,9 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
pPager->journalOff = 0;
needPagerReset = isHot;
- /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
- ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
- ** occurs.
+ /* This loop terminates either when a readJournalHdr() or
+ ** pager_playback_one_page() call returns SQLITE_DONE or an IO error
+ ** occurs.
*/
while( 1 ){
/* Read the next journal header from the journal file. If there are
@@ -49690,7 +49690,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
** This indicates nothing more needs to be rolled back.
*/
rc = readJournalHdr(pPager, isHot, szJ, &nRec, &mxPg);
- if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
rc = SQLITE_OK;
}
@@ -49718,7 +49718,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
** chunk of the journal contains zero pages to be rolled back. But
** when doing a ROLLBACK and the nRec==0 chunk is the last chunk in
** the journal, it means that the journal might contain additional
- ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
+ ** pages that need to be rolled back and that the number of pages
** should be computed based on the journal file size.
*/
if( nRec==0 && !isHot &&
@@ -49737,7 +49737,7 @@ static int pager_playback(Pager *pPager, int isHot){
pPager->dbSize = mxPg;
}
- /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
+ /* Copy original pages out of the journal and back into the
** database file and/or page cache.
*/
for(u=0; upData. A shared lock or greater must be held on the database
** file before this function is called.
**
@@ -49921,15 +49921,15 @@ static void pager_write_changecounter(PgHdr *pPg){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
/*
-** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
+** This function is invoked once for each page that has already been
** written into the log file when a WAL transaction is rolled back.
-** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
+** Parameter iPg is the page number of said page. The pCtx argument
** is actually a pointer to the Pager structure.
**
** If page iPg is present in the cache, and has no outstanding references,
** it is discarded. Otherwise, if there are one or more outstanding
** references, the page content is reloaded from the database. If the
-** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
+** attempt to reload content from the database is required and fails,
** return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
@@ -49959,7 +49959,7 @@ static int pagerUndoCallback(void *pCtx, Pgno iPg){
** updated as data is copied out of the rollback journal and into the
** database. This is not generally possible with a WAL database, as
** rollback involves simply truncating the log file. Therefore, if one
- ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
+ ** or more frames have already been written to the log (and therefore
** also copied into the backup databases) as part of this transaction,
** the backups must be restarted.
*/
@@ -49976,7 +49976,7 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
PgHdr *pList; /* List of dirty pages to revert */
/* For all pages in the cache that are currently dirty or have already
- ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
+ ** been written (but not committed) to the log file, do one of the
** following:
**
** + Discard the cached page (if refcount==0), or
@@ -49998,11 +49998,11 @@ static int pagerRollbackWal(Pager *pPager){
** This function is a wrapper around sqlite3WalFrames(). As well as logging
** the contents of the list of pages headed by pList (connected by pDirty),
** this function notifies any active backup processes that the pages have
-** changed.
+** changed.
**
** The list of pages passed into this routine is always sorted by page number.
** Hence, if page 1 appears anywhere on the list, it will be the first page.
-*/
+*/
static int pagerWalFrames(
Pager *pPager, /* Pager object */
PgHdr *pList, /* List of frames to log */
@@ -50043,7 +50043,7 @@ static int pagerWalFrames(
pPager->aStat[PAGER_STAT_WRITE] += nList;
if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
- rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
+ rc = sqlite3WalFrames(pPager->pWal,
pPager->pageSize, pList, nTruncate, isCommit, pPager->walSyncFlags
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pPager->pBackup ){
@@ -50158,9 +50158,9 @@ static int pagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, Pgno *pnPage){
** Return SQLITE_OK or an error code.
**
** The caller must hold a SHARED lock on the database file to call this
-** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
-** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
-** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
+** function. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock on the db file is required to delete
+** a WAL on a none-empty database, this ensures there is no race condition
+** between the xAccess() below and an xDelete() being executed by some
** other connection.
*/
static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
@@ -50198,21 +50198,21 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
/*
** Playback savepoint pSavepoint. Or, if pSavepoint==NULL, then playback
-** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
-** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
+** the entire master journal file. The case pSavepoint==NULL occurs when
+** a ROLLBACK TO command is invoked on a SAVEPOINT that is a transaction
** savepoint.
**
-** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
+** When pSavepoint is not NULL (meaning a non-transaction savepoint is
** being rolled back), then the rollback consists of up to three stages,
** performed in the order specified:
**
** * Pages are played back from the main journal starting at byte
-** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
+** offset PagerSavepoint.iOffset and continuing to
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset, or to the end of the main journal
** file if PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is zero.
**
** * If PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset is not zero, then pages are played
-** back starting from the journal header immediately following
+** back starting from the journal header immediately following
** PagerSavepoint.iHdrOffset to the end of the main journal file.
**
** * Pages are then played back from the sub-journal file, starting
@@ -50228,7 +50228,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWalIfPresent(Pager *pPager){
** journal file. There is no need for a bitvec in this case.
**
** In either case, before playback commences the Pager.dbSize variable
-** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
+** is reset to the value that it held at the start of the savepoint
** (or transaction). No page with a page-number greater than this value
** is played back. If one is encountered it is simply skipped.
*/
@@ -50249,7 +50249,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
}
}
- /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
+ /* Set the database size back to the value it was before the savepoint
** being reverted was opened.
*/
pPager->dbSize = pSavepoint ? pSavepoint->nOrig : pPager->dbOrigSize;
@@ -50302,7 +50302,7 @@ static int pagerPlaybackSavepoint(Pager *pPager, PagerSavepoint *pSavepoint){
** test is related to ticket #2565. See the discussion in the
** pager_playback() function for additional information.
*/
- if( nJRec==0
+ if( nJRec==0
&& pPager->journalHdr+JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager)==pPager->journalOff
){
nJRec = (u32)((szJ - pPager->journalOff)/JOURNAL_PG_SZ(pPager));
@@ -50481,7 +50481,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetFlags(
/*
** The following global variable is incremented whenever the library
** attempts to open a temporary file. This information is used for
-** testing and analysis only.
+** testing and analysis only.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
@@ -50490,8 +50490,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_opentemp_count = 0;
/*
** Open a temporary file.
**
-** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
-** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
+** Write the file descriptor into *pFile. Return SQLITE_OK on success
+** or some other error code if we fail. The OS will automatically
** delete the temporary file when it is closed.
**
** The flags passed to the VFS layer xOpen() call are those specified
@@ -50523,9 +50523,9 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
/*
** Set the busy handler function.
**
-** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
+** The pager invokes the busy-handler if sqlite3OsLock() returns
** SQLITE_BUSY when trying to upgrade from no-lock to a SHARED lock,
-** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
+** or when trying to upgrade from a RESERVED lock to an EXCLUSIVE
** lock. It does *not* invoke the busy handler when upgrading from
** SHARED to RESERVED, or when upgrading from SHARED to EXCLUSIVE
** (which occurs during hot-journal rollback). Summary:
@@ -50537,7 +50537,7 @@ static int pagerOpentemp(
** SHARED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | No
** RESERVED_LOCK -> EXCLUSIVE_LOCK | Yes
**
-** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
+** If the busy-handler callback returns non-zero, the lock is
** retried. If it returns zero, then the SQLITE_BUSY error is
** returned to the caller of the pager API function.
*/
@@ -50558,16 +50558,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(
}
/*
-** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
+** Change the page size used by the Pager object. The new page size
** is passed in *pPageSize.
**
** If the pager is in the error state when this function is called, it
-** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
+** is a no-op. The value returned is the error state error code (i.e.
** one of SQLITE_IOERR, an SQLITE_IOERR_xxx sub-code or SQLITE_FULL).
**
** Otherwise, if all of the following are true:
**
-** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
+** * the new page size (value of *pPageSize) is valid (a power
** of two between 512 and SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, inclusive), and
**
** * there are no outstanding page references, and
@@ -50577,14 +50577,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(
**
** then the pager object page size is set to *pPageSize.
**
-** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
-** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
-** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
+** If the page size is changed, then this function uses sqlite3PagerMalloc()
+** to obtain a new Pager.pTmpSpace buffer. If this allocation attempt
+** fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and the page size remains unchanged.
** In all other cases, SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** If the page size is not changed, either because one of the enumerated
** conditions above is not true, the pager was in error state when this
-** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
+** function was called, or because the memory allocation attempt failed,
** then *pPageSize is set to the old, retained page size before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nReserve){
@@ -50594,7 +50594,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR
** function may be called from within PagerOpen(), before the state
** of the Pager object is internally consistent.
**
- ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
+ ** At one point this function returned an error if the pager was in
** PAGER_ERROR state. But since PAGER_ERROR state guarantees that
** there is at least one outstanding page reference, this function
** is a no-op for that case anyhow.
@@ -50603,8 +50603,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetPagesize(Pager *pPager, u32 *pPageSize, int nR
u32 pageSize = *pPageSize;
assert( pageSize==0 || (pageSize>=512 && pageSize<=SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE) );
if( (pPager->memDb==0 || pPager->dbSize==0)
- && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
- && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
+ && sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0
+ && pageSize && pageSize!=(u32)pPager->pageSize
){
char *pNew = NULL; /* New temp space */
i64 nByte = 0;
@@ -50655,7 +50655,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerTempSpace(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
+** Attempt to set the maximum database page count if mxPage is positive.
** Make no changes if mxPage is zero or negative. And never reduce the
** maximum page count below the current size of the database.
**
@@ -50696,11 +50696,11 @@ void enable_simulated_io_errors(void){
/*
** Read the first N bytes from the beginning of the file into memory
-** that pDest points to.
+** that pDest points to.
**
** If the pager was opened on a transient file (zFilename==""), or
** opened on a file less than N bytes in size, the output buffer is
-** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
+** zeroed and SQLITE_OK returned. The rationale for this is that this
** function is used to read database headers, and a new transient or
** zero sized database has a header than consists entirely of zeroes.
**
@@ -50733,7 +50733,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerReadFileheader(Pager *pPager, int N, unsigned cha
** This function may only be called when a read-transaction is open on
** the pager. It returns the total number of pages in the database.
**
-** However, if the file is between 1 and bytes in size, then
+** However, if the file is between 1 and bytes in size, then
** this is considered a 1 page file.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
@@ -50748,19 +50748,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerPagecount(Pager *pPager, int *pnPage){
** a similar or greater lock is already held, this function is a no-op
** (returning SQLITE_OK immediately).
**
-** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
-** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
-** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
+** Otherwise, attempt to obtain the lock using sqlite3OsLock(). Invoke
+** the busy callback if the lock is currently not available. Repeat
+** until the busy callback returns false or until the attempt to
** obtain the lock succeeds.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success and an error code if we cannot obtain
-** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
+** the lock. If the lock is obtained successfully, set the Pager.state
** variable to locktype before returning.
*/
static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
int rc; /* Return code */
- /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
+ /* Check that this is either a no-op (because the requested lock is
** already held), or one of the transitions that the busy-handler
** may be invoked during, according to the comment above
** sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler().
@@ -50777,10 +50777,10 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
}
/*
-** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
+** Function assertTruncateConstraint(pPager) checks that one of the
** following is true for all dirty pages currently in the page-cache:
**
-** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
+** a) The page number is less than or equal to the size of the
** current database image, in pages, OR
**
** b) if the page content were written at this time, it would not
@@ -50793,9 +50793,9 @@ static int pager_wait_on_lock(Pager *pPager, int locktype){
** the database file. If a savepoint transaction were rolled back after
** this happened, the correct behavior would be to restore the current
** content of the page. However, since this content is not present in either
-** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
+** the database file or the portion of the rollback journal and
** sub-journal rolled back the content could not be restored and the
-** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
+** database image would become corrupt. It is therefore fortunate that
** this circumstance cannot arise.
*/
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
@@ -50811,9 +50811,9 @@ static void assertTruncateConstraint(Pager *pPager){
#endif
/*
-** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
-** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
-** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
+** Truncate the in-memory database file image to nPage pages. This
+** function does not actually modify the database file on disk. It
+** just sets the internal state of the pager object so that the
** truncation will be done when the current transaction is committed.
**
** This function is only called right before committing a transaction.
@@ -50828,11 +50828,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
/* At one point the code here called assertTruncateConstraint() to
** ensure that all pages being truncated away by this operation are,
- ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
+ ** if one or more savepoints are open, present in the savepoint
** journal so that they can be restored if the savepoint is rolled
** back. This is no longer necessary as this function is now only
- ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
- ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
+ ** called right before committing a transaction. So although the
+ ** Pager object may still have open savepoints (Pager.nSavepoint!=0),
** they cannot be rolled back. So the assertTruncateConstraint() call
** is no longer correct. */
}
@@ -50844,12 +50844,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerTruncateImage(Pager *pPager, Pgno nPage){
** size of the journal file so that the pager_playback() routine knows
** that the entire journal file has been synced.
**
-** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
+** Syncing a hot-journal to disk before attempting to roll it back ensures
** that if a power-failure occurs during the rollback, the process that
** attempts rollback following system recovery sees the same journal
** content as this process.
**
-** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
+** If everything goes as planned, SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise,
** an SQLite error code.
*/
static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -50865,7 +50865,7 @@ static int pagerSyncHotJournal(Pager *pPager){
#if SQLITE_MAX_MMAP_SIZE>0
/*
-** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
+** Obtain a reference to a memory mapped page object for page number pgno.
** The new object will use the pointer pData, obtained from xFetch().
** If successful, set *ppPage to point to the new page reference
** and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code and set
@@ -50881,7 +50881,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
PgHdr **ppPage /* OUT: Acquired page object */
){
PgHdr *p; /* Memory mapped page to return */
-
+
if( pPager->pMmapFreelist ){
*ppPage = p = pPager->pMmapFreelist;
pPager->pMmapFreelist = p->pDirty;
@@ -50915,7 +50915,7 @@ static int pagerAcquireMapPage(
#endif
/*
-** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
+** Release a reference to page pPg. pPg must have been returned by an
** earlier call to pagerAcquireMapPage().
*/
static void pagerReleaseMapPage(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -50951,7 +50951,7 @@ static void pagerFreeMapHdrs(Pager *pPager){
** result in a coredump.
**
** This function always succeeds. If a transaction is active an attempt
-** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
+** is made to roll it back. If an error occurs during the rollback
** a hot journal may be left in the filesystem but no error is returned
** to the caller.
*/
@@ -50977,8 +50977,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerClose(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
pager_unlock(pPager);
}else{
/* If it is open, sync the journal file before calling UnlockAndRollback.
- ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
- ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
+ ** If this is not done, then an unsynced portion of the open journal
+ ** file may be played back into the database. If a power failure occurs
** while this is happening, the database could become corrupt.
**
** If an error occurs while trying to sync the journal, shift the pager
@@ -51034,7 +51034,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
** disk and can be restored in the event of a hot-journal rollback.
**
** If the Pager.noSync flag is set, then this function is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
+** Otherwise, the actions required depend on the journal-mode and the
** device characteristics of the file-system, as follows:
**
** * If the journal file is an in-memory journal file, no action need
@@ -51046,7 +51046,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
** been written following it. If the pager is operating in full-sync
** mode, then the journal file is synced before this field is updated.
**
-** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
+** * If the device does not support the SEQUENTIAL property, then
** journal file is synced.
**
** Or, in pseudo-code:
@@ -51055,11 +51055,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRef(DbPage *pPg){
** if( NOT SAFE_APPEND ){
** if( ) xSync();
**
-** }
+** }
** if( NOT SEQUENTIAL ) xSync();
** }
**
-** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
+** If successful, this routine clears the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag of every
** page currently held in memory before returning SQLITE_OK. If an IO
** error is encountered, then the IO error code is returned to the caller.
*/
@@ -51087,10 +51087,10 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
** mode, then the journal file may at this point actually be larger
** than Pager.journalOff bytes. If the next thing in the journal
** file happens to be a journal-header (written as part of the
- ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
- ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
- ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
- ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
+ ** previous connection's transaction), and a crash or power-failure
+ ** occurs after nRec is updated but before this connection writes
+ ** anything else to the journal file (or commits/rolls back its
+ ** transaction), then SQLite may become confused when doing the
** hot-journal rollback following recovery. It may roll back all
** of this connections data, then proceed to rolling back the old,
** out-of-date data that follows it. Database corruption.
@@ -51100,7 +51100,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
** byte to the start of it to prevent it from being recognized.
**
** Variable iNextHdrOffset is set to the offset at which this
- ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
+ ** problematic header will occur, if it exists. aMagic is used
** as a temporary buffer to inspect the first couple of bytes of
** the potential journal header.
*/
@@ -51127,7 +51127,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
** it as a candidate for rollback.
**
** This is not required if the persistent media supports the
- ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
+ ** SAFE_APPEND property. Because in this case it is not possible
** for garbage data to be appended to the file, the nRec field
** is populated with 0xFFFFFFFF when the journal header is written
** and never needs to be updated.
@@ -51147,7 +51147,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
if( 0==(iDc&SQLITE_IOCAP_SEQUENTIAL) ){
PAGERTRACE(("SYNC journal of %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
IOTRACE(("JSYNC %p\n", pPager))
- rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
+ rc = sqlite3OsSync(pPager->jfd, pPager->syncFlags|
(pPager->syncFlags==SQLITE_SYNC_FULL?SQLITE_SYNC_DATAONLY:0)
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -51164,8 +51164,8 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
}
}
- /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
- ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
+ /* Unless the pager is in noSync mode, the journal file was just
+ ** successfully synced. Either way, clear the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag on
** all pages.
*/
sqlite3PcacheClearSyncFlags(pPager->pPCache);
@@ -51185,9 +51185,9 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
** is called. Before writing anything to the database file, this lock
** is upgraded to an EXCLUSIVE lock. If the lock cannot be obtained,
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned and no data is written to the database file.
-**
+**
** If the pager is a temp-file pager and the actual file-system file
-** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
+** is not yet open, it is created and opened before any data is
** written out.
**
** Once the lock has been upgraded and, if necessary, the file opened,
@@ -51202,7 +51202,7 @@ static int syncJournal(Pager *pPager, int newHdr){
** in Pager.dbFileVers[] is updated to match the new value stored in
** the database file.
**
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
** occurs, an IO error code is returned. Or, if the EXCLUSIVE lock cannot
** be obtained, SQLITE_BUSY is returned.
*/
@@ -51228,7 +51228,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
** file size will be.
*/
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->fd) );
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK
&& pPager->dbHintSizedbSize
&& (pList->pDirty || pList->pgno>pPager->dbHintSize)
){
@@ -51250,7 +51250,7 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
*/
if( pgno<=pPager->dbSize && 0==(pList->flags&PGHDR_DONT_WRITE) ){
i64 offset = (pgno-1)*(i64)pPager->pageSize; /* Offset to write */
- char *pData; /* Data to write */
+ char *pData; /* Data to write */
assert( (pList->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
if( pList->pgno==1 ) pager_write_changecounter(pList);
@@ -51262,8 +51262,8 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
rc = sqlite3OsWrite(pPager->fd, pData, pPager->pageSize, offset);
/* If page 1 was just written, update Pager.dbFileVers to match
- ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
- ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
+ ** the value now stored in the database file. If writing this
+ ** page caused the database file to grow, update dbFileSize.
*/
if( pgno==1 ){
memcpy(&pPager->dbFileVers, &pData[24], sizeof(pPager->dbFileVers));
@@ -51291,18 +51291,18 @@ static int pager_write_pagelist(Pager *pPager, PgHdr *pList){
}
/*
-** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
+** Ensure that the sub-journal file is open. If it is already open, this
** function is a no-op.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
-** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if everything goes according to plan. An
+** SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned if a call to sqlite3OsOpen()
** fails.
*/
static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( !isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
- const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
- | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
+ const int flags = SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL | SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE
+ | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE | SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE
| SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE;
int nStmtSpill = sqlite3Config.nStmtSpill;
if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY || pPager->subjInMemory ){
@@ -51314,13 +51314,13 @@ static int openSubJournal(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
+** Append a record of the current state of page pPg to the sub-journal.
**
** If successful, set the bit corresponding to pPg->pgno in the bitvecs
** for all open savepoints before returning.
**
** This function returns SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, an IO
-** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
+** error code if the attempt to write to the sub-journal fails, or
** SQLITE_NOMEM if a malloc fails while setting a bit in a savepoint
** bitvec.
*/
@@ -51333,9 +51333,9 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){
assert( pPager->useJournal );
assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd) || pagerUseWal(pPager) );
assert( isOpen(pPager->sjfd) || pPager->nSubRec==0 );
- assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
- || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
- || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
+ assert( pagerUseWal(pPager)
+ || pageInJournal(pPager, pPg)
+ || pPg->pgno>pPager->dbOrigSize
);
rc = openSubJournal(pPager);
@@ -51345,7 +51345,7 @@ static int subjournalPage(PgHdr *pPg){
void *pData = pPg->pData;
i64 offset = (i64)pPager->nSubRec*(4+pPager->pageSize);
char *pData2;
-
+
CODEC2(pPager, pData, pPg->pgno, 7, return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT, pData2);
PAGERTRACE(("STMT-JOURNAL %d page %d\n", PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno));
rc = write32bits(pPager->sjfd, offset, pPg->pgno);
@@ -51373,14 +51373,14 @@ static int subjournalPageIfRequired(PgHdr *pPg){
** This function is called by the pcache layer when it has reached some
** soft memory limit. The first argument is a pointer to a Pager object
** (cast as a void*). The pager is always 'purgeable' (not an in-memory
-** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
+** database). The second argument is a reference to a page that is
** currently dirty but has no outstanding references. The page
-** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
+** is always associated with the Pager object passed as the first
** argument.
**
** The job of this function is to make pPg clean by writing its contents
** out to the database file, if possible. This may involve syncing the
-** journal file.
+** journal file.
**
** If successful, sqlite3PcacheMakeClean() is called on the page and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying to make the
@@ -51405,7 +51405,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
** a rollback or by user request, respectively.
**
** Spilling is also prohibited when in an error state since that could
- ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it
+ ** lead to database corruption. In the current implementation it
** is impossible for sqlite3PcacheFetch() to be called with createFlag==3
** while in the error state, hence it is impossible for this routine to
** be called in the error state. Nevertheless, we include a NEVER()
@@ -51425,19 +51425,19 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
pPg->pDirty = 0;
if( pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
/* Write a single frame for this page to the log. */
- rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
+ rc = subjournalPageIfRequired(pPg);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = pagerWalFrames(pPager, pPg, 0, 0);
}
}else{
-
+
/* Sync the journal file if required. */
- if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
+ if( pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
|| pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
){
rc = syncJournal(pPager, 1);
}
-
+
/* Write the contents of the page out to the database file. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
assert( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)==0 );
@@ -51451,7 +51451,7 @@ static int pagerStress(void *p, PgHdr *pPg){
sqlite3PcacheMakeClean(pPg);
}
- return pager_error(pPager, rc);
+ return pager_error(pPager, rc);
}
/*
@@ -51482,8 +51482,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
** The zFilename argument is the path to the database file to open.
** If zFilename is NULL then a randomly-named temporary file is created
** and used as the file to be cached. Temporary files are be deleted
-** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
-** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
+** automatically when they are closed. If zFilename is ":memory:" then
+** all information is held in cache. It is never written to disk.
** This can be used to implement an in-memory database.
**
** The nExtra parameter specifies the number of bytes of space allocated
@@ -51497,13 +51497,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerFlush(Pager *pPager){
** of the PAGER_* flags.
**
** The vfsFlags parameter is a bitmask to pass to the flags parameter
-** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
+** of the xOpen() method of the supplied VFS when opening files.
**
-** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
+** If the pager object is allocated and the specified file opened
** successfully, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppPager set to point to
** the new pager object. If an error occurs, *ppPager is set to NULL
** and error code returned. This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM
-** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
+** (sqlite3Malloc() is used to allocate memory), SQLITE_CANTOPEN or
** various SQLITE_IO_XXX errors.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
@@ -51586,7 +51586,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
}
/* Allocate memory for the Pager structure, PCache object, the
- ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
+ ** three file descriptors, the database file name and the journal
** file name. The layout in memory is as follows:
**
** Pager object (sizeof(Pager) bytes)
@@ -51601,7 +51601,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
ROUND8(sizeof(*pPager)) + /* Pager structure */
ROUND8(pcacheSize) + /* PCache object */
ROUND8(pVfs->szOsFile) + /* The main db file */
- journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */
+ journalFileSize * 2 + /* The two journal files */
nPathname + 1 + nUri + /* zFilename */
nPathname + 8 + 2 /* zJournal */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_WAL
@@ -51700,7 +51700,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpen(
** disk and uses an in-memory rollback journal.
**
** This branch also runs for files marked as immutable.
- */
+ */
act_like_temp_file:
tempFile = 1;
pPager->eState = PAGER_READER; /* Pretend we already have a lock */
@@ -51709,7 +51709,7 @@ act_like_temp_file:
readOnly = (vfsFlags&SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY);
}
- /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
+ /* The following call to PagerSetPagesize() serves to set the value of
** Pager.pageSize and to allocate the Pager.pTmpSpace buffer.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -51749,10 +51749,10 @@ act_like_temp_file:
/* pPager->state = PAGER_UNLOCK; */
/* pPager->errMask = 0; */
pPager->tempFile = (u8)tempFile;
- assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
+ assert( tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL
|| tempFile==PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE );
assert( PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE==1 );
- pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
+ pPager->exclusiveMode = (u8)tempFile;
pPager->changeCountDone = pPager->tempFile;
pPager->memDb = (u8)memDb;
pPager->readOnly = (u8)readOnly;
@@ -51823,7 +51823,7 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){
/*
** This function is called after transitioning from PAGER_UNLOCK to
** PAGER_SHARED state. It tests if there is a hot journal present in
-** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
+** the file-system for the given pager. A hot journal is one that
** needs to be played back. According to this function, a hot-journal
** file exists if the following criteria are met:
**
@@ -51842,10 +51842,10 @@ static int databaseIsUnmoved(Pager *pPager){
** at the end of the file. If there is, and that master journal file
** does not exist, then the journal file is not really hot. In this
** case this routine will return a false-positive. The pager_playback()
-** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
-** will not roll it back.
+** routine will discover that the journal file is not really hot and
+** will not roll it back.
**
-** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
+** If a hot-journal file is found to exist, *pExists is set to 1 and
** SQLITE_OK returned. If no hot-journal file is present, *pExists is
** set to 0 and SQLITE_OK returned. If an IO error occurs while trying
** to determine whether or not a hot-journal file exists, the IO error
@@ -51873,7 +51873,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
int locked = 0; /* True if some process holds a RESERVED lock */
/* Race condition here: Another process might have been holding the
- ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
+ ** the RESERVED lock and have a journal open at the sqlite3OsAccess()
** call above, but then delete the journal and drop the lock before
** we get to the following sqlite3OsCheckReservedLock() call. If that
** is the case, this routine might think there is a hot journal when
@@ -51906,7 +51906,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
/* The journal file exists and no other connection has a reserved
** or greater lock on the database file. Now check that there is
** at least one non-zero bytes at the start of the journal file.
- ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
+ ** If there is, then we consider this journal to be hot. If not,
** it can be ignored.
*/
if( !jrnlOpen ){
@@ -51956,7 +51956,7 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
** on the database file), then an attempt is made to obtain a
** SHARED lock on the database file. Immediately after obtaining
** the SHARED lock, the file-system is checked for a hot-journal,
-** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
+** which is played back if present. Following any hot-journal
** rollback, the contents of the cache are validated by checking
** the 'change-counter' field of the database file header and
** discarded if they are found to be invalid.
@@ -51967,8 +51967,8 @@ static int hasHotJournal(Pager *pPager, int *pExists){
** the contents of the page cache and rolling back any open journal
** file.
**
-** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
-** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
+** If everything is successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an IO error
+** occurs while locking the database, checking for a hot-journal file or
** rolling back a journal file, the IO error code is returned.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
@@ -51976,7 +51976,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
/* This routine is only called from b-tree and only when there are no
** outstanding pages. This implies that the pager state should either
- ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
+ ** be OPEN or READER. READER is only possible if the pager is or was in
** exclusive access mode. */
assert( sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0 );
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -52014,12 +52014,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
** important that a RESERVED lock is not obtained on the way to the
** EXCLUSIVE lock. If it were, another process might open the
** database file, detect the RESERVED lock, and conclude that the
- ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
+ ** database is safe to read while this process is still rolling the
** hot-journal back.
- **
+ **
** Because the intermediate RESERVED lock is not requested, any
- ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
- ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
+ ** other process attempting to access the database file will get to
+ ** this point in the code and fail to obtain its own EXCLUSIVE lock
** on the database file.
**
** Unless the pager is in locking_mode=exclusive mode, the lock is
@@ -52029,17 +52029,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
goto failed;
}
-
- /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
- ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
- ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
- ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
- ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
+
+ /* If it is not already open and the file exists on disk, open the
+ ** journal for read/write access. Write access is required because
+ ** in exclusive-access mode the file descriptor will be kept open
+ ** and possibly used for a transaction later on. Also, write-access
+ ** is usually required to finalize the journal in journal_mode=persist
** mode (and also for journal_mode=truncate on some systems).
**
- ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
- ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
- ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
+ ** If the journal does not exist, it usually means that some
+ ** other connection managed to get in and roll it back before
+ ** this connection obtained the exclusive lock above. Or, it
** may mean that the pager was in the error-state when this
** function was called and the journal file does not exist.
*/
@@ -52060,7 +52060,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
}
}
}
-
+
/* Playback and delete the journal. Drop the database write
** lock and reacquire the read lock. Purge the cache before
** playing back the hot-journal so that we don't end up with
@@ -52085,8 +52085,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
** or roll back a hot-journal while holding an EXCLUSIVE lock. The
** pager_unlock() routine will be called before returning to unlock
** the file. If the unlock attempt fails, then Pager.eLock must be
- ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
- ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
+ ** set to UNKNOWN_LOCK (see the comment above the #define for
+ ** UNKNOWN_LOCK above for an explanation).
**
** In order to get pager_unlock() to do this, set Pager.eState to
** PAGER_ERROR now. This is not actually counted as a transition
@@ -52094,7 +52094,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
** since we know that the same call to pager_unlock() will very
** shortly transition the pager object to the OPEN state. Calling
** assert_pager_state() would fail now, as it should not be possible
- ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
+ ** to be in ERROR state when there are zero outstanding page
** references.
*/
pager_error(pPager, rc);
@@ -52119,8 +52119,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
** a 32-bit counter that is incremented with each change. The
** other bytes change randomly with each file change when
** a codec is in use.
- **
- ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
+ **
+ ** There is a vanishingly small chance that a change will not be
** detected. The chance of an undetected change is so small that
** it can be neglected.
*/
@@ -52192,7 +52192,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSharedLock(Pager *pPager){
** Except, in locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE when there is nothing to in
** the rollback journal, the unlock is not performed and there is
** nothing to rollback, so this routine is a no-op.
-*/
+*/
static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
if( pPager->nMmapOut==0 && (sqlite3PcacheRefCount(pPager->pPCache)==0) ){
pagerUnlockAndRollback(pPager);
@@ -52201,7 +52201,7 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
/*
** The page getter methods each try to acquire a reference to a
-** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
+** page with page number pgno. If the requested reference is
** successfully obtained, it is copied to *ppPage and SQLITE_OK returned.
**
** There are different implementations of the getter method depending
@@ -52211,22 +52211,22 @@ static void pagerUnlockIfUnused(Pager *pPager){
** getPageError() -- Used if the pager is in an error state
** getPageMmap() -- Used if memory-mapped I/O is enabled
**
-** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
+** If the requested page is already in the cache, it is returned.
** Otherwise, a new page object is allocated and populated with data
** read from the database file. In some cases, the pcache module may
** choose not to allocate a new page object and may reuse an existing
** object with no outstanding references.
**
-** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
-** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
+** The extra data appended to a page is always initialized to zeros the
+** first time a page is loaded into memory. If the page requested is
** already in the cache when this function is called, then the extra
** data is left as it was when the page object was last used.
**
-** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
-** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
-** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
-** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
-** page is initialized to all zeros.
+** If the database image is smaller than the requested page or if
+** the flags parameter contains the PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT bit and the
+** requested page is not already stored in the cache, then no
+** actual disk read occurs. In this case the memory image of the
+** page is initialized to all zeros.
**
** If PAGER_GET_NOCONTENT is true, it means that we do not care about
** the contents of the page. This occurs in two scenarios:
@@ -52297,7 +52297,7 @@ static int getPageNormal(
return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
- /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
+ /* The pager cache has created a new page. Its content needs to
** be initialized. But first some error checks:
**
** (1) The maximum page number is 2^31
@@ -52318,9 +52318,9 @@ static int getPageNormal(
}
if( noContent ){
/* Failure to set the bits in the InJournal bit-vectors is benign.
- ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
- ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
- ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
+ ** It merely means that we might do some extra work to journal a
+ ** page that does not need to be journaled. Nevertheless, be sure
+ ** to test the case where a malloc error occurs while trying to set
** a bit in a bit vector.
*/
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
@@ -52375,7 +52375,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
/* It is acceptable to use a read-only (mmap) page for any page except
** page 1 if there is no write-transaction open or the ACQUIRE_READONLY
- ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
+ ** flag was specified by the caller. And so long as the db is not a
** temporary or in-memory database. */
const int bMmapOk = (pgno>1
&& (pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || (flags & PAGER_GET_READONLY))
@@ -52407,7 +52407,7 @@ static int getPageMMap(
}
if( bMmapOk && iFrame==0 ){
void *pData = 0;
- rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
+ rc = sqlite3OsFetch(pPager->fd,
(i64)(pgno-1) * pPager->pageSize, pPager->pageSize, &pData
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pData ){
@@ -52463,12 +52463,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerGet(
/*
** Acquire a page if it is already in the in-memory cache. Do
** not read the page from disk. Return a pointer to the page,
-** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
+** or 0 if the page is not in cache.
**
** See also sqlite3PagerGet(). The difference between this routine
** and sqlite3PagerGet() is that _get() will go to the disk and read
** in the page if the page is not already in cache. This routine
-** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
+** returns NULL if the page is not in cache or if a disk I/O error
** has ever happened.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE DbPage *sqlite3PagerLookup(Pager *pPager, Pgno pgno){
@@ -52507,24 +52507,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerUnref(DbPage *pPg){
/*
** This function is called at the start of every write transaction.
-** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
+** There must already be a RESERVED or EXCLUSIVE lock on the database
** file when this routine is called.
**
** Open the journal file for pager pPager and write a journal header
** to the start of it. If there are active savepoints, open the sub-journal
-** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
-** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
+** as well. This function is only used when the journal file is being
+** opened to write a rollback log for a transaction. It is not used
** when opening a hot journal file to roll it back.
**
** If the journal file is already open (as it may be in exclusive mode),
** then this function just writes a journal header to the start of the
-** already open file.
+** already open file.
**
** Whether or not the journal file is opened by this function, the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec structure is allocated.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful. Otherwise, return
+** SQLITE_NOMEM if the attempt to allocate Pager.pInJournal fails, or
** an IO error code if opening or writing the journal file fails.
*/
static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
@@ -52534,7 +52534,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED );
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
assert( pPager->pInJournal==0 );
-
+
/* If already in the error state, this function is a no-op. But on
** the other hand, this routine is never called if we are already in
** an error state. */
@@ -52545,7 +52545,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
if( pPager->pInJournal==0 ){
return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
-
+
/* Open the journal file if it is not already open. */
if( !isOpen(pPager->jfd) ){
if( pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY ){
@@ -52561,7 +52561,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL;
nSpill = jrnlBufferSize(pPager);
}
-
+
/* Verify that the database still has the same name as it did when
** it was originally opened. */
rc = databaseIsUnmoved(pPager);
@@ -52573,9 +52573,9 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
}
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || isOpen(pPager->jfd) );
}
-
-
- /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
+
+
+ /* Write the first journal header to the journal file and open
** the sub-journal if necessary.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -52600,12 +52600,12 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
+** Begin a write-transaction on the specified pager object. If a
** write-transaction has already been opened, this function is a no-op.
**
** If the exFlag argument is false, then acquire at least a RESERVED
** lock on the database file. If exFlag is true, then acquire at least
-** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
+** an EXCLUSIVE lock. If such a lock is already held, no locking
** functions need be called.
**
** If the subjInMemory argument is non-zero, then any sub-journal opened
@@ -52613,7 +52613,7 @@ static int pager_open_journal(Pager *pPager){
** has no effect if the sub-journal is already opened (as it may be when
** running in exclusive mode) or if the transaction does not require a
** sub-journal. If the subjInMemory argument is zero, then any required
-** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
+** sub-journal is implemented in-memory if pPager is an in-memory database,
** or using a temporary file otherwise.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory){
@@ -52661,9 +52661,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerBegin(Pager *pPager, int exFlag, int subjInMemory
**
** WAL mode sets Pager.eState to PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED or CACHEMOD
** when it has an open transaction, but never to DBMOD or FINISHED.
- ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
- ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
- ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
+ ** This is because in those states the code to roll back savepoint
+ ** transactions may copy data from the sub-journal into the database
+ ** file as well as into the page cache. Which would be incorrect in
** WAL mode.
*/
pPager->eState = PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED;
@@ -52717,11 +52717,11 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
rc = write32bits(pPager->jfd, iOff+pPager->pageSize+4, cksum);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
- IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
+ IOTRACE(("JOUT %p %d %lld %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno,
pPager->journalOff, pPager->pageSize));
PAGER_INCR(sqlite3_pager_writej_count);
PAGERTRACE(("JOURNAL %d page %d needSync=%d hash(%08x)\n",
- PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
+ PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno,
((pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0), pager_pagehash(pPg)));
pPager->journalOff += 8 + pPager->pageSize;
@@ -52736,9 +52736,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerAddPageToRollbackJournal(PgHdr *pPg){
}
/*
-** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
+** Mark a single data page as writeable. The page is written into the
** main journal or sub-journal as required. If the page is written into
-** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
+** one of the journals, the corresponding bit is set in the
** Pager.pInJournal bitvec and the PagerSavepoint.pInSavepoint bitvecs
** of any open savepoints as appropriate.
*/
@@ -52746,7 +52746,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
Pager *pPager = pPg->pPager;
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
+ /* This routine is not called unless a write-transaction has already
** been started. The journal file may or may not be open at this point.
** It is never called in the ERROR state.
*/
@@ -52763,7 +52763,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
** obtained the necessary locks to begin the write-transaction, but the
** rollback journal might not yet be open. Open it now if this is the case.
**
- ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
+ ** This is done before calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty() on the page.
** Otherwise, if it were done after calling sqlite3PcacheMakeDirty(), then
** an error might occur and the pager would end up in WRITER_LOCKED state
** with pages marked as dirty in the cache.
@@ -52808,7 +52808,7 @@ static int pager_write(PgHdr *pPg){
** PGHDR_WRITEABLE bit that indicates that the page can be safely modified.
*/
pPg->flags |= PGHDR_WRITEABLE;
-
+
/* If the statement journal is open and the page is not in it,
** then write the page into the statement journal.
*/
@@ -52892,7 +52892,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
}
}
- /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
+ /* If the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag is set for any of the nPage pages
** starting at pg1, then it needs to be set for all of them. Because
** writing to any of these nPage pages may damage the others, the
** journal file must contain sync()ed copies of all of them
@@ -52915,9 +52915,9 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerWriteLargeSector(PgHdr *pPg){
}
/*
-** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
-** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
-** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
+** Mark a data page as writeable. This routine must be called before
+** making changes to a page. The caller must check the return value
+** of this function and be careful not to change any page data unless
** this routine returns SQLITE_OK.
**
** The difference between this function and pager_write() is that this
@@ -52968,13 +52968,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIswriteable(DbPage *pPg){
** on the given page is unused. The pager marks the page as clean so
** that it does not get written to disk.
**
-** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
+** Tests show that this optimization can quadruple the speed of large
** DELETE operations.
**
** This optimization cannot be used with a temp-file, as the page may
** have been dirty at the start of the transaction. In that case, if
-** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
-** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
+** memory pressure forces page pPg out of the cache, the data does need
+** to be written out to disk so that it may be read back in if the
** current transaction is rolled back.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
@@ -52990,17 +52990,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
}
/*
-** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
-** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
+** This routine is called to increment the value of the database file
+** change-counter, stored as a 4-byte big-endian integer starting at
** byte offset 24 of the pager file. The secondary change counter at
** 92 is also updated, as is the SQLite version number at offset 96.
**
** But this only happens if the pPager->changeCountDone flag is false.
** To avoid excess churning of page 1, the update only happens once.
-** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
+** See also the pager_write_changecounter() routine that does an
** unconditional update of the change counters.
**
-** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
+** If the isDirectMode flag is zero, then this is done by calling
** sqlite3PagerWrite() on page 1, then modifying the contents of the
** page data. In this case the file will be updated when the current
** transaction is committed.
@@ -53008,7 +53008,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerDontWrite(PgHdr *pPg){
** The isDirectMode flag may only be non-zero if the library was compiled
** with the SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE macro defined. In this case,
** if isDirect is non-zero, then the database file is updated directly
-** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
+** by writing an updated version of page 1 using a call to the
** sqlite3OsWrite() function.
*/
static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
@@ -53047,7 +53047,7 @@ static int pager_incr_changecounter(Pager *pPager, int isDirectMode){
assert( pPgHdr==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
/* If page one was fetched successfully, and this function is not
- ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
+ ** operating in direct-mode, make page 1 writable. When not in
** direct mode, page 1 is always held in cache and hence the PagerGet()
** above is always successful - hence the ALWAYS on rc==SQLITE_OK.
*/
@@ -53111,22 +53111,22 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSync(Pager *pPager, const char *zMaster){
/*
** This function may only be called while a write-transaction is active in
-** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
-** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
+** rollback. If the connection is in WAL mode, this call is a no-op.
+** Otherwise, if the connection does not already have an EXCLUSIVE lock on
** the database file, an attempt is made to obtain one.
**
** If the EXCLUSIVE lock is already held or the attempt to obtain it is
** successful, or the connection is in WAL mode, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
+** Otherwise, either SQLITE_BUSY or an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is
** returned.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
int rc = pPager->errCode;
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
- || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+ assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_DBMOD
+ || pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
);
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
if( 0==pagerUseWal(pPager) ){
@@ -53146,12 +53146,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
**
** * The database file change-counter is updated,
** * the journal is synced (unless the atomic-write optimization is used),
-** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
+** * all dirty pages are written to the database file,
** * the database file is truncated (if required), and
-** * the database file synced.
+** * the database file synced.
**
-** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
-** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
+** The only thing that remains to commit the transaction is to finalize
+** (delete, truncate or zero the first part of) the journal file (or
** delete the master journal file if specified).
**
** Note that if zMaster==NULL, this does not overwrite a previous value
@@ -53182,7 +53182,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
/* Provide the ability to easily simulate an I/O error during testing */
if( sqlite3FaultSim(400) ) return SQLITE_IOERR;
- PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("DATABASE SYNC: File=%s zMaster=%s nSize=%d\n",
pPager->zFilename, zMaster, pPager->dbSize));
/* If no database changes have been made, return early. */
@@ -53217,11 +53217,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
}else{
/* The following block updates the change-counter. Exactly how it
** does this depends on whether or not the atomic-update optimization
- ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
- ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
+ ** was enabled at compile time, and if this transaction meets the
+ ** runtime criteria to use the operation:
**
** * The file-system supports the atomic-write property for
- ** blocks of size page-size, and
+ ** blocks of size page-size, and
** * This commit is not part of a multi-file transaction, and
** * Exactly one page has been modified and store in the journal file.
**
@@ -53231,7 +53231,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
** is not applicable to this transaction, call sqlite3JournalCreate()
** to make sure the journal file has actually been created, then call
** pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter in indirect
- ** mode.
+ ** mode.
**
** Otherwise, if the optimization is both enabled and applicable,
** then call pager_incr_changecounter() to update the change-counter
@@ -53240,19 +53240,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
PgHdr *pPg;
- assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ assert( isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
);
- if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
- && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
+ if( !zMaster && isOpen(pPager->jfd)
+ && pPager->journalOff==jrnlBufferSize(pPager)
&& pPager->dbSize>=pPager->dbOrigSize
&& (0==(pPg = sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache)) || 0==pPg->pDirty)
){
- /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
- ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
- ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
- ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
+ /* Update the db file change counter via the direct-write method. The
+ ** following call will modify the in-memory representation of page 1
+ ** to include the updated change counter and then write page 1
+ ** directly to the database file. Because of the atomic-write
** property of the host file-system, this is safe.
*/
rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 1);
@@ -53266,28 +53266,28 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
rc = pager_incr_changecounter(pPager, 0);
#endif
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-
- /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master
- ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
+
+ /* Write the master journal name into the journal file. If a master
+ ** journal file name has already been written to the journal file,
** or if zMaster is NULL (no master journal), then this call is a no-op.
*/
rc = writeMasterJournal(pPager, zMaster);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-
+
/* Sync the journal file and write all dirty pages to the database.
- ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
+ ** If the atomic-update optimization is being used, this sync will not
** create the journal file or perform any real IO.
**
** Because the change-counter page was just modified, unless the
** atomic-update optimization is used it is almost certain that the
** journal requires a sync here. However, in locking_mode=exclusive
- ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
+ ** on a system under memory pressure it is just possible that this is
** not the case. In this case it is likely enough that the redundant
- ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
+ ** xSync() call will be changed to a no-op by the OS anyhow.
*/
rc = syncJournal(pPager, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
-
+
rc = pager_write_pagelist(pPager,sqlite3PcacheDirtyList(pPager->pPCache));
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_BLOCKED );
@@ -53295,7 +53295,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
}
sqlite3PcacheCleanAll(pPager->pPCache);
- /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
+ /* If the file on disk is smaller than the database image, use
** pager_truncate to grow the file here. This can happen if the database
** image was extended as part of the current transaction and then the
** last page in the db image moved to the free-list. In this case the
@@ -53307,7 +53307,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseOne(
rc = pager_truncate(pPager, nNew);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto commit_phase_one_exit;
}
-
+
/* Finally, sync the database file. */
if( !noSync ){
rc = sqlite3PagerSync(pPager, zMaster);
@@ -53327,12 +53327,12 @@ commit_phase_one_exit:
/*
** When this function is called, the database file has been completely
** updated to reflect the changes made by the current transaction and
-** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
+** synced to disk. The journal file still exists in the file-system
** though, and if a failure occurs at this point it will eventually
** be used as a hot-journal and the current transaction rolled back.
**
-** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
-** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
+** This function finalizes the journal file, either by deleting,
+** truncating or partially zeroing it, so that it cannot be used
** for hot-journal rollback. Once this is done the transaction is
** irrevocably committed.
**
@@ -53357,15 +53357,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
** this transaction, the pager is running in exclusive-mode and is
** using persistent journals, then this function is a no-op.
**
- ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
+ ** The start of the journal file currently contains a single journal
** header with the nRec field set to 0. If such a journal is used as
** a hot-journal during hot-journal rollback, 0 changes will be made
- ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
+ ** to the database file. So there is no need to zero the journal
** header. Since the pager is in exclusive mode, there is no need
** to drop any locks either.
*/
- if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
- && pPager->exclusiveMode
+ if( pPager->eState==PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED
+ && pPager->exclusiveMode
&& pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
){
assert( pPager->journalOff==JOURNAL_HDR_SZ(pPager) || !pPager->journalOff );
@@ -53380,7 +53380,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
+** If a write transaction is open, then all changes made within the
** transaction are reverted and the current write-transaction is closed.
** The pager falls back to PAGER_READER state if successful, or PAGER_ERROR
** state if an error occurs.
@@ -53390,14 +53390,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCommitPhaseTwo(Pager *pPager){
**
** Otherwise, in rollback mode, this function performs two functions:
**
-** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
+** 1) It rolls back the journal file, restoring all database file and
** in-memory cache pages to the state they were in when the transaction
** was opened, and
**
** 2) It finalizes the journal file, so that it is not used for hot
** rollback at any point in the future.
**
-** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
+** Finalization of the journal file (task 2) is only performed if the
** rollback is successful.
**
** In WAL mode, all cache-entries containing data modified within the
@@ -53410,7 +53410,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
PAGERTRACE(("ROLLBACK %d\n", PAGERID(pPager)));
/* PagerRollback() is a no-op if called in READER or OPEN state. If
- ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
+ ** the pager is already in the ERROR state, the rollback is not
** attempted here. Instead, the error code is returned to the caller.
*/
assert( assert_pager_state(pPager) );
@@ -53426,7 +53426,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
int eState = pPager->eState;
rc = pager_end_transaction(pPager, 0, 0);
if( !MEMDB && eState>PAGER_WRITER_LOCKED ){
- /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
+ /* This can happen using journal_mode=off. Move the pager to the error
** state to indicate that the contents of the cache may not be trusted.
** Any active readers will get SQLITE_ABORT.
*/
@@ -53441,7 +53441,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerRollback(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->eState==PAGER_READER || rc!=SQLITE_OK );
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK || rc==SQLITE_FULL || rc==SQLITE_CORRUPT
- || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
+ || rc==SQLITE_NOMEM || (rc&0xFF)==SQLITE_IOERR
|| rc==SQLITE_CANTOPEN
);
@@ -53511,8 +53511,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int *sqlite3PagerStats(Pager *pPager){
/*
** Parameter eStat must be either SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_HIT or
** SQLITE_DBSTATUS_CACHE_MISS. Before returning, *pnVal is incremented by the
-** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
-** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
+** current cache hit or miss count, according to the value of eStat. If the
+** reset parameter is non-zero, the cache hit or miss count is zeroed before
** returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerCacheStat(Pager *pPager, int eStat, int reset, int *pnVal){
@@ -53545,7 +53545,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(Pager *pPager){
** to make up the difference. If the number of savepoints is already
** equal to nSavepoint, then this function is a no-op.
**
-** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
+** If a memory allocation fails, SQLITE_NOMEM is returned. If an error
** occurs while opening the sub-journal file, then an IO error code is
** returned. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
*/
@@ -53560,7 +53560,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int pagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
assert( nSavepoint>nCurrent && pPager->useJournal );
/* Grow the Pager.aSavepoint array using realloc(). Return SQLITE_NOMEM
- ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
+ ** if the allocation fails. Otherwise, zero the new portion in case a
** malloc failure occurs while populating it in the for(...) loop below.
*/
aNew = (PagerSavepoint *)sqlite3Realloc(
@@ -53608,7 +53608,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
/*
** This function is called to rollback or release (commit) a savepoint.
-** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
+** The savepoint to release or rollback need not be the most recently
** created savepoint.
**
** Parameter op is always either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE.
@@ -53616,29 +53616,29 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int nSavepoint){
** index iSavepoint. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then rollback all changes
** that have occurred since the specified savepoint was created.
**
-** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
+** The savepoint to rollback or release is identified by parameter
** iSavepoint. A value of 0 means to operate on the outermost savepoint
** (the first created). A value of (Pager.nSavepoint-1) means operate
** on the most recently created savepoint. If iSavepoint is greater than
** (Pager.nSavepoint-1), then this function is a no-op.
**
** If a negative value is passed to this function, then the current
-** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
+** transaction is rolled back. This is different to calling
** sqlite3PagerRollback() because this function does not terminate
-** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
-** contents of the database to its original state.
+** the transaction or unlock the database, it just restores the
+** contents of the database to its original state.
**
-** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
+** In any case, all savepoints with an index greater than iSavepoint
** are destroyed. If this is a release operation (op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE),
** then savepoint iSavepoint is also destroyed.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation fails,
-** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
+** or an IO error code if an IO error occurs while rolling back a
** savepoint. If no errors occur, SQLITE_OK is returned.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
int rc = pPager->errCode;
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
#endif
@@ -53651,7 +53651,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
int nNew; /* Number of remaining savepoints after this op. */
/* Figure out how many savepoints will still be active after this
- ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
+ ** operation. Store this value in nNew. Then free resources associated
** with any savepoints that are destroyed by this operation.
*/
nNew = iSavepoint + (( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ) ? 0 : 1);
@@ -53660,7 +53660,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
}
pPager->nSavepoint = nNew;
- /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate
+ /* If this is a release of the outermost savepoint, truncate
** the sub-journal to zero bytes in size. */
if( op==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
if( nNew==0 && isOpen(pPager->sjfd) ){
@@ -53682,14 +53682,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSavepoint(Pager *pPager, int op, int iSavepoint){
rc = pagerPlaybackSavepoint(pPager, pSavepoint);
assert(rc!=SQLITE_DONE);
}
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ZIPVFS
- /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
+ /* If the cache has been modified but the savepoint cannot be rolled
** back journal_mode=off, put the pager in the error state. This way,
** if the VFS used by this pager includes ZipVFS, the entire transaction
** can be rolled back at the ZipVFS level. */
- else if(
- pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ else if(
+ pPager->journalMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
&& pPager->eState>=PAGER_WRITER_CACHEMOD
){
pPager->errCode = SQLITE_ABORT;
@@ -53814,8 +53814,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerState(Pager *pPager){
** transaction is active).
**
** If the fourth argument, isCommit, is non-zero, then this page is being
-** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
-** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
+** moved as part of a database reorganization just before the transaction
+** is being committed. In this case, it is guaranteed that the database page
** pPg refers to will not be written to again within this transaction.
**
** This function may return SQLITE_NOMEM or an IO error code if an error
@@ -53843,7 +53843,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
}
/* If the page being moved is dirty and has not been saved by the latest
- ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
+ ** savepoint, then save the current contents of the page into the
** sub-journal now. This is required to handle the following scenario:
**
** BEGIN;
@@ -53866,7 +53866,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
return rc;
}
- PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
+ PAGERTRACE(("MOVE %d page %d (needSync=%d) moves to %d\n",
PAGERID(pPager), pPg->pgno, (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC)?1:0, pgno));
IOTRACE(("MOVE %p %d %d\n", pPager, pPg->pgno, pgno))
@@ -53874,7 +53874,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
** be written to, store pPg->pgno in local variable needSyncPgno.
**
** If the isCommit flag is set, there is no need to remember that
- ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
+ ** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pPg->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to it.
*/
if( (pPg->flags&PGHDR_NEED_SYNC) && !isCommit ){
@@ -53885,8 +53885,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
}
/* If the cache contains a page with page-number pgno, remove it
- ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
- ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
+ ** from its hash chain. Also, if the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC flag was set for
+ ** page pgno before the 'move' operation, it needs to be retained
** for the page moved there.
*/
pPg->flags &= ~PGHDR_NEED_SYNC;
@@ -53917,9 +53917,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
}
if( needSyncPgno ){
- /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
+ /* If needSyncPgno is non-zero, then the journal file needs to be
** sync()ed before any data is written to database file page needSyncPgno.
- ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
+ ** Currently, no such page exists in the page-cache and the
** "is journaled" bitvec flag has been set. This needs to be remedied by
** loading the page into the pager-cache and setting the PGHDR_NEED_SYNC
** flag.
@@ -53950,9 +53950,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerMovepage(Pager *pPager, DbPage *pPg, Pgno pgno, i
#endif
/*
-** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
-** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
-** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
+** The page handle passed as the first argument refers to a dirty page
+** with a page number other than iNew. This function changes the page's
+** page number to iNew and sets the value of the PgHdr.flags field to
** the value passed as the third parameter.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3PagerRekey(DbPage *pPg, Pgno iNew, u16 flags){
@@ -53970,7 +53970,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetData(DbPage *pPg){
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
+** Return a pointer to the Pager.nExtra bytes of "extra" space
** allocated along with the specified page.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
@@ -53979,7 +53979,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3PagerGetExtra(DbPage *pPg){
/*
** Get/set the locking-mode for this pager. Parameter eMode must be one
-** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
+** of PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_QUERY, PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_NORMAL or
** PAGER_LOCKINGMODE_EXCLUSIVE. If the parameter is not _QUERY, then
** the locking-mode is set to the value specified.
**
@@ -54034,8 +54034,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(Pager *pPager, int eMode){
assert( eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
- || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
- || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
+ || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
+ || eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
|| eMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY );
/* This routine is only called from the OP_JournalMode opcode, and
@@ -54220,7 +54220,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
rc = pagerLockDb(pPager, EXCLUSIVE_LOCK);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
+ /* If the attempt to grab the exclusive lock failed, release the
** pending lock that may have been obtained instead. */
pagerUnlockDb(pPager, SHARED_LOCK);
}
@@ -54229,7 +54229,7 @@ static int pagerExclusiveLock(Pager *pPager){
}
/*
-** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
+** Call sqlite3WalOpen() to open the WAL handle. If the pager is in
** exclusive-locking mode when this function is called, take an EXCLUSIVE
** lock on the database file and use heap-memory to store the wal-index
** in. Otherwise, use the normal shared-memory.
@@ -54240,8 +54240,8 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
assert( pPager->pWal==0 && pPager->tempFile==0 );
assert( pPager->eLock==SHARED_LOCK || pPager->eLock==EXCLUSIVE_LOCK );
- /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
- ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
+ /* If the pager is already in exclusive-mode, the WAL module will use
+ ** heap-memory for the wal-index instead of the VFS shared-memory
** implementation. Take the exclusive lock now, before opening the WAL
** file, to make sure this is safe.
*/
@@ -54249,7 +54249,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
rc = pagerExclusiveLock(pPager);
}
- /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
+ /* Open the connection to the log file. If this operation fails,
** (e.g. due to malloc() failure), return an error code.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -54271,7 +54271,7 @@ static int pagerOpenWal(Pager *pPager){
** If the pager passed as the first argument is open on a real database
** file (not a temp file or an in-memory database), and the WAL file
** is not already open, make an attempt to open it now. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs or the VFS used by the pager does
** not support the xShmXXX() methods, return an error code. *pbOpen is
** not modified in either case.
**
@@ -54313,7 +54313,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerOpenWal(
** This function is called to close the connection to the log file prior
** to switching from WAL to rollback mode.
**
-** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
+** Before closing the log file, this function attempts to take an
** EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file. If this cannot be obtained, an
** error (SQLITE_BUSY) is returned and the log connection is not closed.
** If successful, the EXCLUSIVE lock is not released before returning.
@@ -54339,7 +54339,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerCloseWal(Pager *pPager, sqlite3 *db){
rc = pagerOpenWal(pPager);
}
}
-
+
/* Checkpoint and close the log. Because an EXCLUSIVE lock is held on
** the database file, the log and log-summary files will be deleted.
*/
@@ -54371,7 +54371,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotGet(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot **ppS
/*
** If this is a WAL database, store a pointer to pSnapshot. Next time a
-** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
+** read transaction is opened, attempt to read from the snapshot it
** identifies. If this is not a WAL database, return an error.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot){
@@ -54385,7 +54385,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotOpen(Pager *pPager, sqlite3_snapshot *pSn
}
/*
-** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
+** If this is a WAL database, call sqlite3WalSnapshotRecover(). If this
** is not a WAL database, return an error.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerSnapshotRecover(Pager *pPager){
@@ -54430,7 +54430,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
**
*************************************************************************
**
-** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
+** This file contains the implementation of a write-ahead log (WAL) used in
** "journal_mode=WAL" mode.
**
** WRITE-AHEAD LOG (WAL) FILE FORMAT
@@ -54439,7 +54439,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** Each frame records the revised content of a single page from the
** database file. All changes to the database are recorded by writing
** frames into the WAL. Transactions commit when a frame is written that
-** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record
+** contains a commit marker. A single WAL can and usually does record
** multiple transactions. Periodically, the content of the WAL is
** transferred back into the database file in an operation called a
** "checkpoint".
@@ -54465,11 +54465,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
**
** Immediately following the wal-header are zero or more frames. Each
** frame consists of a 24-byte frame-header followed by a bytes
-** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
+** of page data. The frame-header is six big-endian 32-bit unsigned
** integer values, as follows:
**
** 0: Page number.
-** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
+** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
** after the commit. For all other records, zero.
** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the header)
** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the header)
@@ -54495,7 +54495,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** the checksum. The checksum is computed by interpreting the input as
** an even number of unsigned 32-bit integers: x[0] through x[N]. The
** algorithm used for the checksum is as follows:
-**
+**
** for i from 0 to n-1 step 2:
** s0 += x[i] + s1;
** s1 += x[i+1] + s0;
@@ -54503,7 +54503,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
**
** Note that s0 and s1 are both weighted checksums using fibonacci weights
** in reverse order (the largest fibonacci weight occurs on the first element
-** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit
+** of the sequence being summed.) The s1 value spans all 32-bit
** terms of the sequence whereas s0 omits the final term.
**
** On a checkpoint, the WAL is first VFS.xSync-ed, then valid content of the
@@ -54536,19 +54536,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** multiple concurrent readers to view different versions of the database
** content simultaneously.
**
-** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
+** The reader algorithm in the previous paragraphs works correctly, but
** because frames for page P can appear anywhere within the WAL, the
** reader has to scan the entire WAL looking for page P frames. If the
** WAL is large (multiple megabytes is typical) that scan can be slow,
** and read performance suffers. To overcome this problem, a separate
** data structure called the wal-index is maintained to expedite the
** search for frames of a particular page.
-**
+**
** WAL-INDEX FORMAT
**
** Conceptually, the wal-index is shared memory, though VFS implementations
** might choose to implement the wal-index using a mmapped file. Because
-** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
+** the wal-index is shared memory, SQLite does not support journal_mode=WAL
** on a network filesystem. All users of the database must be able to
** share memory.
**
@@ -54562,28 +54562,28 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** byte order of the host computer.
**
** The purpose of the wal-index is to answer this question quickly: Given
-** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
+** a page number P and a maximum frame index M, return the index of the
** last frame in the wal before frame M for page P in the WAL, or return
** NULL if there are no frames for page P in the WAL prior to M.
**
** The wal-index consists of a header region, followed by an one or
-** more index blocks.
+** more index blocks.
**
** The wal-index header contains the total number of frames within the WAL
** in the mxFrame field.
**
-** Each index block except for the first contains information on
+** Each index block except for the first contains information on
** HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames. The first index block contains information on
-** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
+** HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE frames. The values of HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE and
** HASHTABLE_NPAGE are selected so that together the wal-index header and
** first index block are the same size as all other index blocks in the
** wal-index.
**
** Each index block contains two sections, a page-mapping that contains the
-** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
+** database page number associated with each wal frame, and a hash-table
** that allows readers to query an index block for a specific page number.
** The page-mapping is an array of HASHTABLE_NPAGE (or HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE
-** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
+** for the first index block) 32-bit page numbers. The first entry in the
** first index-block contains the database page number corresponding to the
** first frame in the WAL file. The first entry in the second index block
** in the WAL file corresponds to the (HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE+1)th frame in
@@ -54604,8 +54604,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
**
** The hash table consists of HASHTABLE_NSLOT 16-bit unsigned integers.
** HASHTABLE_NSLOT = 2*HASHTABLE_NPAGE, and there is one entry in the
-** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
-** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions
+** hash table for each page number in the mapping section, so the hash
+** table is never more than half full. The expected number of collisions
** prior to finding a match is 1. Each entry of the hash table is an
** 1-based index of an entry in the mapping section of the same
** index block. Let K be the 1-based index of the largest entry in
@@ -54624,12 +54624,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** reached) until an unused hash slot is found. Let the first unused slot
** be at index iUnused. (iUnused might be less than iKey if there was
** wrap-around.) Because the hash table is never more than half full,
-** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let
+** the search is guaranteed to eventually hit an unused entry. Let
** iMax be the value between iKey and iUnused, closest to iUnused,
** where aHash[iMax]==P. If there is no iMax entry (if there exists
** no hash slot such that aHash[i]==p) then page P is not in the
** current index block. Otherwise the iMax-th mapping entry of the
-** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
+** current index block corresponds to the last entry that references
** page P.
**
** A hash search begins with the last index block and moves toward the
@@ -54654,7 +54654,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3PagerWalFramesize(Pager *pPager){
** if no values greater than K0 had ever been inserted into the hash table
** in the first place - which is what reader one wants. Meanwhile, the
** second reader using K1 will see additional values that were inserted
-** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.
+** later, which is exactly what reader two wants.
**
** When a rollback occurs, the value of K is decreased. Hash table entries
** that correspond to frames greater than the new K value are removed
@@ -54682,7 +54682,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalTrace = 0;
** values in the wal-header are correct and (b) the version field is not
** WAL_MAX_VERSION, recovery fails and SQLite returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
**
-** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
+** Similarly, if a client successfully reads a wal-index header (i.e. the
** checksum test is successful) and finds that the version field is not
** WALINDEX_MAX_VERSION, then no read-transaction is opened and SQLite
** returns SQLITE_CANTOPEN.
@@ -54720,7 +54720,7 @@ typedef struct WalCkptInfo WalCkptInfo;
**
** The szPage value can be any power of 2 between 512 and 32768, inclusive.
** Or it can be 1 to represent a 65536-byte page. The latter case was
-** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.
+** added in 3.7.1 when support for 64K pages was added.
*/
struct WalIndexHdr {
u32 iVersion; /* Wal-index version */
@@ -54762,7 +54762,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
** There is one entry in aReadMark[] for each reader lock. If a reader
** holds read-lock K, then the value in aReadMark[K] is no greater than
** the mxFrame for that reader. The value READMARK_NOT_USED (0xffffffff)
-** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is
+** for any aReadMark[] means that entry is unused. aReadMark[0] is
** a special case; its value is never used and it exists as a place-holder
** to avoid having to offset aReadMark[] indexs by one. Readers holding
** WAL_READ_LOCK(0) always ignore the entire WAL and read all content
@@ -54782,7 +54782,7 @@ struct WalIndexHdr {
** previous sentence is when nBackfill equals mxFrame (meaning that everything
** in the WAL has been backfilled into the database) then new readers
** will choose aReadMark[0] which has value 0 and hence such reader will
-** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
+** get all their all content directly from the database file and ignore
** the WAL.
**
** Writers normally append new frames to the end of the WAL. However,
@@ -54825,14 +54825,14 @@ struct WalCkptInfo {
** big-endian format in the first 4 bytes of a WAL file.
**
** If the LSB is set, then the checksums for each frame within the WAL
-** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
-** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
+** file are calculated by treating all data as an array of 32-bit
+** big-endian words. Otherwise, they are calculated by interpreting
** all data as 32-bit little-endian words.
*/
#define WAL_MAGIC 0x377f0682
/*
-** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
+** Return the offset of frame iFrame in the write-ahead log file,
** assuming a database page size of szPage bytes. The offset returned
** is to the start of the write-ahead log frame-header.
*/
@@ -54880,7 +54880,7 @@ struct Wal {
** Candidate values for Wal.exclusiveMode.
*/
#define WAL_NORMAL_MODE 0
-#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1
+#define WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE 1
#define WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE 2
/*
@@ -54899,7 +54899,7 @@ typedef u16 ht_slot;
/*
** This structure is used to implement an iterator that loops through
** all frames in the WAL in database page order. Where two or more frames
-** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
+** correspond to the same database page, the iterator visits only the
** frame most recently written to the WAL (in other words, the frame with
** the largest index).
**
@@ -54935,7 +54935,7 @@ struct WalIterator {
#define HASHTABLE_HASH_1 383 /* Should be prime */
#define HASHTABLE_NSLOT (HASHTABLE_NPAGE*2) /* Must be a power of 2 */
-/*
+/*
** The block of page numbers associated with the first hash-table in a
** wal-index is smaller than usual. This is so that there is a complete
** hash-table on each aligned 32KB page of the wal-index.
@@ -54980,7 +54980,7 @@ static int walIndexPage(Wal *pWal, int iPage, volatile u32 **ppPage){
pWal->apWiData[iPage] = (u32 volatile *)sqlite3MallocZero(WALINDEX_PGSZ);
if( !pWal->apWiData[iPage] ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}else{
- rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
+ rc = sqlite3OsShmMap(pWal->pDbFd, iPage, WALINDEX_PGSZ,
pWal->writeLock, (void volatile **)&pWal->apWiData[iPage]
);
if( rc==SQLITE_READONLY ){
@@ -55024,7 +55024,7 @@ static volatile WalIndexHdr *walIndexHdr(Wal *pWal){
)
/*
-** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
+** Generate or extend an 8 byte checksum based on the data in
** array aByte[] and the initial values of aIn[0] and aIn[1] (or
** initial values of 0 and 0 if aIn==NULL).
**
@@ -55096,11 +55096,11 @@ static void walIndexWriteHdr(Wal *pWal){
/*
** This function encodes a single frame header and writes it to a buffer
-** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
+** supplied by the caller. A frame-header is made up of a series of
** 4-byte big-endian integers, as follows:
**
** 0: Page number.
-** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
+** 4: For commit records, the size of the database image in pages
** after the commit. For all other records, zero.
** 8: Salt-1 (copied from the wal-header)
** 12: Salt-2 (copied from the wal-header)
@@ -55151,7 +55151,7 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
assert( WAL_FRAME_HDRSIZE==24 );
/* A frame is only valid if the salt values in the frame-header
- ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
+ ** match the salt values in the wal-header.
*/
if( memcmp(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aFrame[8], 8)!=0 ){
return 0;
@@ -55165,15 +55165,15 @@ static int walDecodeFrame(
}
/* A frame is only valid if a checksum of the WAL header,
- ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
- ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
+ ** all prior frams, the first 16 bytes of this frame-header,
+ ** and the frame-data matches the checksum in the last 8
** bytes of this frame-header.
*/
nativeCksum = (pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN);
walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aFrame, 8, aCksum, aCksum);
walChecksumBytes(nativeCksum, aData, pWal->szPage, aCksum, aCksum);
- if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
- || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
+ if( aCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[16])
+ || aCksum[1]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aFrame[20])
){
/* Checksum failed. */
return 0;
@@ -55208,7 +55208,7 @@ static const char *walLockName(int lockIdx){
}
}
#endif /*defined(SQLITE_TEST) || defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) */
-
+
/*
** Set or release locks on the WAL. Locks are either shared or exclusive.
@@ -55265,15 +55265,15 @@ static int walNextHash(int iPriorHash){
return (iPriorHash+1)&(HASHTABLE_NSLOT-1);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return pointers to the hash table and page number array stored on
** page iHash of the wal-index. The wal-index is broken into 32KB pages
** numbered starting from 0.
**
** Set output variable *paHash to point to the start of the hash table
-** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame
+** in the wal-index file. Set *piZero to one less than the frame
** number of the first frame indexed by this hash table. If a
-** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
+** slot in the hash table is set to N, it refers to frame number
** (*piZero+N) in the log.
**
** Finally, set *paPgno so that *paPgno[1] is the page number of the
@@ -55303,7 +55303,7 @@ static int walHashGet(
}else{
iZero = HASHTABLE_NPAGE_ONE + (iHash-1)*HASHTABLE_NPAGE;
}
-
+
*paPgno = &aPgno[-1];
*paHash = aHash;
*piZero = iZero;
@@ -55314,7 +55314,7 @@ static int walHashGet(
/*
** Return the number of the wal-index page that contains the hash-table
** and page-number array that contain entries corresponding to WAL frame
-** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
+** iFrame. The wal-index is broken up into 32KB pages. Wal-index pages
** are numbered starting from 0.
*/
static int walFramePage(u32 iFrame){
@@ -55366,7 +55366,7 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
if( pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 ) return;
- /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
+ /* Obtain pointers to the hash-table and page-number array containing
** the entry that corresponds to frame pWal->hdr.mxFrame. It is guaranteed
** that the page said hash-table and array reside on is already mapped.
*/
@@ -55384,9 +55384,9 @@ static void walCleanupHash(Wal *pWal){
aHash[i] = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* Zero the entries in the aPgno array that correspond to frames with
- ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
+ ** frame numbers greater than pWal->hdr.mxFrame.
*/
nByte = (int)((char *)aHash - (char *)&aPgno[iLimit+1]);
memset((void *)&aPgno[iLimit+1], 0, nByte);
@@ -55431,9 +55431,9 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
idx = iFrame - iZero;
assert( idx <= HASHTABLE_NSLOT/2 + 1 );
-
+
/* If this is the first entry to be added to this hash-table, zero the
- ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
+ ** entire hash table and aPgno[] array before proceeding.
*/
if( idx==1 ){
int nByte = (int)((u8 *)&aHash[HASHTABLE_NSLOT] - (u8 *)&aPgno[1]);
@@ -55442,8 +55442,8 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
/* If the entry in aPgno[] is already set, then the previous writer
** must have exited unexpectedly in the middle of a transaction (after
- ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
- ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
+ ** writing one or more dirty pages to the WAL to free up memory).
+ ** Remove the remnants of that writers uncommitted transaction from
** the hash-table before writing any new entries.
*/
if( aPgno[idx] ){
@@ -55493,7 +55493,7 @@ static int walIndexAppend(Wal *pWal, u32 iFrame, u32 iPage){
/*
-** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
+** Recover the wal-index by reading the write-ahead log file.
**
** This routine first tries to establish an exclusive lock on the
** wal-index to prevent other threads/processes from doing anything
@@ -55553,16 +55553,16 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
}
/* If the database page size is not a power of two, or is greater than
- ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
+ ** SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE, conclude that the WAL file contains no valid
** data. Similarly, if the 'magic' value is invalid, ignore the whole
** WAL file.
*/
magic = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[0]);
szPage = sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[8]);
- if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
- || szPage&(szPage-1)
- || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
- || szPage<512
+ if( (magic&0xFFFFFFFE)!=WAL_MAGIC
+ || szPage&(szPage-1)
+ || szPage>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+ || szPage<512
){
goto finished;
}
@@ -55572,7 +55572,7 @@ static int walIndexRecover(Wal *pWal){
memcpy(&pWal->hdr.aSalt, &aBuf[16], 8);
/* Verify that the WAL header checksum is correct */
- walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
+ walChecksumBytes(pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum==SQLITE_BIGENDIAN,
aBuf, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum
);
if( pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0]!=sqlite3Get4byte(&aBuf[24])
@@ -55636,7 +55636,7 @@ finished:
pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[1] = aFrameCksum[1];
walIndexWriteHdr(pWal);
- /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
+ /* Reset the checkpoint-header. This is safe because this thread is
** currently holding locks that exclude all other readers, writers and
** checkpointers.
*/
@@ -55681,8 +55681,8 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
}
}
-/*
-** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
+/*
+** Open a connection to the WAL file zWalName. The database file must
** already be opened on connection pDbFd. The buffer that zWalName points
** to must remain valid for the lifetime of the returned Wal* handle.
**
@@ -55692,7 +55692,7 @@ static void walIndexClose(Wal *pWal, int isDelete){
** were to do this just after this client opened one of these files, the
** system would be badly broken.
**
-** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
+** If the log file is successfully opened, SQLITE_OK is returned and
** *ppWal is set to point to a new WAL handle. If an error occurs,
** an SQLite error code is returned and *ppWal is left unmodified.
*/
@@ -55856,7 +55856,7 @@ static void walMerge(
ht_slot logpage;
Pgno dbpage;
- if( (iLeft=nRight || aContent[aLeft[iLeft]]aSegment[p->nSegment])[iZero];
iZero++;
-
+
for(j=0; jaReadMark[i];
if( mxSafeFrame>y ){
@@ -56282,8 +56282,8 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
}
/* If this is an SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_RESTART or TRUNCATE operation, and the
- ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
- ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
+ ** entire wal file has been copied into the database file, then block
+ ** until all readers have finished using the wal file. This ensures that
** the next process to write to the database restarts the wal file.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && eMode!=SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE ){
@@ -56307,7 +56307,7 @@ static int walCheckpoint(
** writer clients should see that the entire log file has been
** checkpointed and behave accordingly. This seems unsafe though,
** as it would leave the system in a state where the contents of
- ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
+ ** the wal-index header do not match the contents of the
** file-system. To avoid this, update the wal-index header to
** indicate that the log file contains zero valid frames. */
walRestartHdr(pWal, salt1);
@@ -56369,7 +56369,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalClose(
if( pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_NORMAL_MODE ){
pWal->exclusiveMode = WAL_EXCLUSIVE_MODE;
}
- rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
+ rc = sqlite3WalCheckpoint(pWal, db,
SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, 0, 0, sync_flags, nBuf, zBuf, 0, 0
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -56450,7 +56450,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
if( memcmp(&h1, &h2, sizeof(h1))!=0 ){
return 1; /* Dirty read */
- }
+ }
if( h1.isInit==0 ){
return 1; /* Malformed header - probably all zeros */
}
@@ -56480,7 +56480,7 @@ static int walIndexTryHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
** changed by this operation. If pWal->hdr is unchanged, set *pChanged
** to 0.
**
-** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
+** If the wal-index header is successfully read, return SQLITE_OK.
** Otherwise an SQLite error code.
*/
static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
@@ -56488,7 +56488,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
int badHdr; /* True if a header read failed */
volatile u32 *page0; /* Chunk of wal-index containing header */
- /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
+ /* Ensure that page 0 of the wal-index (the page that contains the
** wal-index header) is mapped. Return early if an error occurs here.
*/
assert( pChanged );
@@ -56500,7 +56500,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
/* If the first page of the wal-index has been mapped, try to read the
** wal-index header immediately, without holding any lock. This usually
- ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
+ ** works, but may fail if the wal-index header is corrupt or currently
** being modified by another thread or process.
*/
badHdr = (page0 ? walIndexTryHdr(pWal, pChanged) : 1);
@@ -56561,10 +56561,10 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
**
** The useWal parameter is true to force the use of the WAL and disable
** the case where the WAL is bypassed because it has been completely
-** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
-** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the
-** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
-** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be
+** checkpointed. If useWal==0 then this routine calls walIndexReadHdr()
+** to make a copy of the wal-index header into pWal->hdr. If the
+** wal-index header has changed, *pChanged is set to 1 (as an indication
+** to the caller that the local paget cache is obsolete and needs to be
** flushed.) When useWal==1, the wal-index header is assumed to already
** be loaded and the pChanged parameter is unused.
**
@@ -56579,7 +56579,7 @@ static int walIndexReadHdr(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
** bad luck when there is lots of contention for the wal-index, but that
** possibility is so small that it can be safely neglected, we believe.
**
-** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
+** On success, this routine obtains a read lock on
** WAL_READ_LOCK(pWal->readLock). The pWal->readLock integer is
** in the range 0 <= pWal->readLock < WAL_NREADER. If pWal->readLock==(-1)
** that means the Wal does not hold any read lock. The reader must not
@@ -56614,16 +56614,16 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
**
** Circumstances that cause a RETRY should only last for the briefest
** instances of time. No I/O or other system calls are done while the
- ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
+ ** locks are held, so the locks should not be held for very long. But
** if we are unlucky, another process that is holding a lock might get
- ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
+ ** paged out or take a page-fault that is time-consuming to resolve,
** during the few nanoseconds that it is holding the lock. In that case,
** it might take longer than normal for the lock to free.
**
** After 5 RETRYs, we begin calling sqlite3OsSleep(). The first few
** calls to sqlite3OsSleep() have a delay of 1 microsecond. Really this
** is more of a scheduler yield than an actual delay. But on the 10th
- ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
+ ** an subsequent retries, the delays start becoming longer and longer,
** so that on the 100th (and last) RETRY we delay for 323 milliseconds.
** The total delay time before giving up is less than 10 seconds.
*/
@@ -56651,9 +56651,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
if( pWal->apWiData[0]==0 ){
/* This branch is taken when the xShmMap() method returns SQLITE_BUSY.
** We assume this is a transient condition, so return WAL_RETRY. The
- ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
- ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
- ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
+ ** xShmMap() implementation used by the default unix and win32 VFS
+ ** modules may return SQLITE_BUSY due to a race condition in the
+ ** code that determines whether or not the shared-memory region
** must be zeroed before the requested page is returned.
*/
rc = WAL_RETRY;
@@ -56670,7 +56670,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
}
pInfo = walCkptInfo(pWal);
- if( !useWal && pInfo->nBackfill==pWal->hdr.mxFrame
+ if( !useWal && pInfo->nBackfill==pWal->hdr.mxFrame
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
&& (pWal->pSnapshot==0 || pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0
|| 0==memcmp(&pWal->hdr, pWal->pSnapshot, sizeof(WalIndexHdr)))
@@ -56690,7 +56690,7 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
** snapshot. Since holding READ_LOCK(0) prevents a checkpoint from
** happening, this is usually correct.
**
- ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
+ ** However, if frames have been appended to the log (or if the log
** is wrapped and written for that matter) before the READ_LOCK(0)
** is obtained, that is not necessarily true. A checkpointer may
** have started to backfill the appended frames but crashed before
@@ -56771,9 +56771,9 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
** to read any frames earlier than minFrame from the wal file - they
** can be safely read directly from the database file.
**
- ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
+ ** Because a ShmBarrier() call is made between taking the copy of
** nBackfill and checking that the wal-header in shared-memory still
- ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
+ ** matches the one cached in pWal->hdr, it is guaranteed that the
** checkpointer that set nBackfill was not working with a wal-index
** header newer than that cached in pWal->hdr. If it were, that could
** cause a problem. The checkpointer could omit to checkpoint
@@ -56801,15 +56801,15 @@ static int walTryBeginRead(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged, int useWal, int cnt){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
/*
-** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
+** Attempt to reduce the value of the WalCkptInfo.nBackfillAttempted
** variable so that older snapshots can be accessed. To do this, loop
-** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
+** through all wal frames from nBackfillAttempted to (nBackfill+1),
** comparing their content to the corresponding page with the database
** file, if any. Set nBackfillAttempted to the frame number of the
** first frame for which the wal file content matches the db file.
**
-** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
-** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
+** This is only really safe if the file-system is such that any page
+** writes made by earlier checkpointers were atomic operations, which
** is not always true. It is also possible that nBackfillAttempted
** may be left set to a value larger than expected, if a wal frame
** contains content that duplicate of an earlier version of the same
@@ -56932,14 +56932,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalBeginReadTransaction(Wal *pWal, int *pChanged){
assert( pWal->readLock>0 || pWal->hdr.mxFrame==0 );
assert( pInfo->aReadMark[pWal->readLock]<=pSnapshot->mxFrame );
- /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
+ /* It is possible that there is a checkpointer thread running
** concurrent with this code. If this is the case, it may be that the
- ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
- ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
- ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
+ ** checkpointer has already determined that it will checkpoint
+ ** snapshot X, where X is later in the wal file than pSnapshot, but
+ ** has not yet set the pInfo->nBackfillAttempted variable to indicate
** its intent. To avoid the race condition this leads to, ensure that
- ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
- ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted.
+ ** there is no checkpointer process by taking a shared CKPT lock
+ ** before checking pInfo->nBackfillAttempted.
**
** TODO: Does the aReadMark[] lock prevent a checkpointer from doing
** this already?
@@ -57012,8 +57012,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
/* If the "last page" field of the wal-index header snapshot is 0, then
** no data will be read from the wal under any circumstances. Return early
- ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
- ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
+ ** in this case as an optimization. Likewise, if pWal->readLock==0,
+ ** then the WAL is ignored by the reader so return early, as if the
** WAL were empty.
*/
if( iLast==0 || pWal->readLock==0 ){
@@ -57026,9 +57026,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
** hash table (each hash table indexes up to HASHTABLE_NPAGE frames).
**
** This code might run concurrently to the code in walIndexAppend()
- ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
- ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
- ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
+ ** that adds entries to the wal-index (and possibly to this hash
+ ** table). This means the value just read from the hash
+ ** slot (aHash[iKey]) may have been added before or after the
** current read transaction was opened. Values added after the
** read transaction was opened may have been written incorrectly -
** i.e. these slots may contain garbage data. However, we assume
@@ -57036,13 +57036,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFindFrame(
** opened remain unmodified.
**
** For the reasons above, the if(...) condition featured in the inner
- ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
+ ** loop of the following block is more stringent that would be required
** if we had exclusive access to the hash-table:
**
- ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
+ ** (aPgno[iFrame]==pgno):
** This condition filters out normal hash-table collisions.
**
- ** (iFrame<=iLast):
+ ** (iFrame<=iLast):
** This condition filters out entries that were added to the hash
** table after the current read-transaction had started.
*/
@@ -57116,7 +57116,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalReadFrame(
return sqlite3OsRead(pWal->pWalFd, pOut, (nOut>sz ? sz : nOut), iOffset);
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the size of the database in pages (or zero, if unknown).
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
@@ -57127,7 +57127,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Pgno sqlite3WalDbsize(Wal *pWal){
}
-/*
+/*
** This function starts a write transaction on the WAL.
**
** A read transaction must have already been started by a prior call
@@ -57205,18 +57205,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p
if( ALWAYS(pWal->writeLock) ){
Pgno iMax = pWal->hdr.mxFrame;
Pgno iFrame;
-
+
/* Restore the clients cache of the wal-index header to the state it
- ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
+ ** was in before the client began writing to the database.
*/
memcpy(&pWal->hdr, (void *)walIndexHdr(pWal), sizeof(WalIndexHdr));
- for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
- ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
+ for(iFrame=pWal->hdr.mxFrame+1;
+ ALWAYS(rc==SQLITE_OK) && iFrame<=iMax;
iFrame++
){
/* This call cannot fail. Unless the page for which the page number
- ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
+ ** is passed as the second argument is (a) in the cache and
** (b) has an outstanding reference, then xUndo is either a no-op
** (if (a) is false) or simply expels the page from the cache (if (b)
** is false).
@@ -57234,10 +57234,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalUndo(Wal *pWal, int (*xUndo)(void *, Pgno), void *p
return rc;
}
-/*
-** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
-** values. This function populates the array with values required to
-** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
+/*
+** Argument aWalData must point to an array of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32
+** values. This function populates the array with values required to
+** "rollback" the write position of the WAL handle back to the current
** point in the event of a savepoint rollback (via WalSavepointUndo()).
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
@@ -57248,7 +57248,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSavepoint(Wal *pWal, u32 *aWalData){
aWalData[3] = pWal->nCkpt;
}
-/*
+/*
** Move the write position of the WAL back to the point identified by
** the values in the aWalData[] array. aWalData must point to an array
** of WAL_SAVEPOINT_NDATA u32 values that has been previously populated
@@ -57454,7 +57454,7 @@ static int walRewriteChecksums(Wal *pWal, u32 iLast){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Write a set of frames to the log. The caller must hold the write-lock
** on the log file (obtained using sqlite3WalBeginWriteTransaction()).
*/
@@ -57521,7 +57521,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
walChecksumBytes(1, aWalHdr, WAL_HDRSIZE-2*4, 0, aCksum);
sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[24], aCksum[0]);
sqlite3Put4byte(&aWalHdr[28], aCksum[1]);
-
+
pWal->szPage = szPage;
pWal->hdr.bigEndCksum = SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
pWal->hdr.aFrameCksum[0] = aCksum[0];
@@ -57563,7 +57563,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
/* Check if this page has already been written into the wal file by
** the current transaction. If so, overwrite the existing frame and
- ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
+ ** set Wal.writeLock to WAL_WRITELOCK_RECKSUM - indicating that
** checksums must be recomputed when the transaction is committed. */
if( iFirst && (p->pDirty || isCommit==0) ){
u32 iWrite = 0;
@@ -57650,7 +57650,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
pWal->truncateOnCommit = 0;
}
- /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
+ /* Append data to the wal-index. It is not necessary to lock the
** wal-index to do this as the SQLITE_SHM_WRITE lock held on the wal-index
** guarantees that there are no other writers, and no data that may
** be in use by existing readers is being overwritten.
@@ -57688,7 +57688,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalFrames(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This routine is called to implement sqlite3_wal_checkpoint() and
** related interfaces.
**
@@ -57725,7 +57725,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
if( pWal->readOnly ) return SQLITE_READONLY;
WALTRACE(("WAL%p: checkpoint begins\n", pWal));
- /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
+ /* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-62028-47212 All calls obtain an exclusive
** "checkpoint" lock on the database file. */
rc = walLockExclusive(pWal, WAL_CKPT_LOCK, 1);
if( rc ){
@@ -57786,7 +57786,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCheckpoint(
}
if( isChanged ){
- /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
+ /* If a new wal-index header was loaded before the checkpoint was
** performed, then the pager-cache associated with pWal is now
** out of date. So zero the cached wal-index header to ensure that
** next time the pager opens a snapshot on this database it knows that
@@ -57829,7 +57829,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalCallback(Wal *pWal){
** operation must occur while the pager is still holding the exclusive
** lock on the main database file.
**
-** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
+** If op is one, then change from locking_mode=NORMAL into
** locking_mode=EXCLUSIVE. This means that the pWal->readLock must
** be released. Return 1 if the transition is made and 0 if the
** WAL is already in exclusive-locking mode - meaning that this
@@ -57846,8 +57846,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
assert( pWal->writeLock==0 );
assert( pWal->exclusiveMode!=WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE || op==-1 );
- /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
- ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
+ /* pWal->readLock is usually set, but might be -1 if there was a
+ ** prior error while attempting to acquire are read-lock. This cannot
** happen if the connection is actually in exclusive mode (as no xShmLock
** locks are taken in this case). Nor should the pager attempt to
** upgrade to exclusive-mode following such an error.
@@ -57878,10 +57878,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalExclusiveMode(Wal *pWal, int op){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return true if the argument is non-NULL and the WAL module is using
** heap-memory for the wal-index. Otherwise, if the argument is NULL or the
-** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
+** WAL module is using shared-memory, return false.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalHeapMemory(Wal *pWal){
return (pWal && pWal->exclusiveMode==WAL_HEAPMEMORY_MODE );
@@ -57920,7 +57920,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WalSnapshotOpen(Wal *pWal, sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapsho
pWal->pSnapshot = (WalIndexHdr*)pSnapshot;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return a +ve value if snapshot p1 is newer than p2. A -ve value if
** p1 is older than p2 and zero if p1 and p2 are the same snapshot.
*/
@@ -58010,16 +58010,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal){
** on Ptr(N) and its subpages have values greater than Key(N-1). And
** so forth.
**
-** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the
+** Finding a particular key requires reading O(log(M)) pages from the
** disk where M is the number of entries in the tree.
**
-** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate
+** In this implementation, a single file can hold one or more separate
** BTrees. Each BTree is identified by the index of its root page. The
** key and data for any entry are combined to form the "payload". A
** fixed amount of payload can be carried directly on the database
** page. If the payload is larger than the preset amount then surplus
** bytes are stored on overflow pages. The payload for an entry
-** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each
+** and the preceding pointer are combined to form a "Cell". Each
** page has a small header which contains the Ptr(N) pointer and other
** information such as the size of key and data.
**
@@ -58149,7 +58149,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_file *sqlite3WalFile(Wal *pWal){
** contiguous or in order, but cell pointers are contiguous and in order.
**
** Cell content makes use of variable length integers. A variable
-** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each
+** length integer is 1 to 9 bytes where the lower 7 bits of each
** byte are used. The integer consists of all bytes that have bit 8 set and
** the first byte with bit 8 clear. The most significant byte of the integer
** appears first. A variable-length integer may not be more than 9 bytes long.
@@ -58222,7 +58222,7 @@ typedef struct CellInfo CellInfo;
** -DSQLITE_FILE_HEADER="..." on the compiler command-line. The
** header must be exactly 16 bytes including the zero-terminator so
** the string itself should be 15 characters long. If you change
-** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read
+** the header, then your custom library will not be able to read
** databases generated by the standard tools and the standard tools
** will not be able to read databases created by your custom library.
*/
@@ -58285,7 +58285,7 @@ struct MemPage {
/*
** A linked list of the following structures is stored at BtShared.pLock.
-** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor
+** Locks are added (or upgraded from READ_LOCK to WRITE_LOCK) when a cursor
** is opened on the table with root page BtShared.iTable. Locks are removed
** from this list when a transaction is committed or rolled back, or when
** a btree handle is closed.
@@ -58309,7 +58309,7 @@ struct BtLock {
** see the internals of this structure and only deals with pointers to
** this structure.
**
-** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be
+** For some database files, the same underlying database cache might be
** shared between multiple connections. In that case, each connection
** has it own instance of this object. But each instance of this object
** points to the same BtShared object. The database cache and the
@@ -58317,7 +58317,7 @@ struct BtLock {
** the BtShared object.
**
** All fields in this structure are accessed under sqlite3.mutex.
-** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors
+** The pBt pointer itself may not be changed while there exists cursors
** in the referenced BtShared that point back to this Btree since those
** cursors have to go through this Btree to find their BtShared and
** they often do so without holding sqlite3.mutex.
@@ -58352,7 +58352,7 @@ struct Btree {
/*
** An instance of this object represents a single database file.
-**
+**
** A single database file can be in use at the same time by two
** or more database connections. When two or more connections are
** sharing the same database file, each connection has it own
@@ -58471,7 +58471,7 @@ struct CellInfo {
** particular database connection identified BtCursor.pBtree.db.
**
** Fields in this structure are accessed under the BtShared.mutex
-** found at self->pBt->mutex.
+** found at self->pBt->mutex.
**
** skipNext meaning:
** eState==SKIPNEXT && skipNext>0: Next sqlite3BtreeNext() is no-op.
@@ -58519,7 +58519,7 @@ struct BtCursor {
** Potential values for BtCursor.eState.
**
** CURSOR_INVALID:
-** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example)
+** Cursor does not point to a valid entry. This can happen (for example)
** because the table is empty or because BtreeCursorFirst() has not been
** called.
**
@@ -58532,9 +58532,9 @@ struct BtCursor {
** operation should be a no-op.
**
** CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK:
-** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been
+** The table that this cursor was opened on still exists, but has been
** modified since the cursor was last used. The cursor position is saved
-** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in
+** in variables BtCursor.pKey and BtCursor.nKey. When a cursor is in
** this state, restoreCursorPosition() can be called to attempt to
** seek the cursor to the saved position.
**
@@ -58551,13 +58551,13 @@ struct BtCursor {
#define CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK 3
#define CURSOR_FAULT 4
-/*
+/*
** The database page the PENDING_BYTE occupies. This page is never used.
*/
# define PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) PAGER_MJ_PGNO(pBt)
/*
-** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a
+** These macros define the location of the pointer-map entry for a
** database page. The first argument to each is the number of usable
** bytes on each page of the database (often 1024). The second is the
** page number to look up in the pointer map.
@@ -58592,10 +58592,10 @@ struct BtCursor {
** PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE: The database page is a root-page. The page-number is not
** used in this case.
**
-** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number
+** PTRMAP_FREEPAGE: The database page is an unused (free) page. The page-number
** is not used in this case.
**
-** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of
+** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: The database page is the first page in a list of
** overflow pages. The page number identifies the page that
** contains the cell with a pointer to this overflow page.
**
@@ -58617,13 +58617,13 @@ struct BtCursor {
*/
#define btreeIntegrity(p) \
assert( p->pBt->inTransaction!=TRANS_NONE || p->pBt->nTransaction==0 ); \
- assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans );
+ assert( p->pBt->inTransaction>=p->inTrans );
/*
** The ISAUTOVACUUM macro is used within balance_nonroot() to determine
** if the database supports auto-vacuum or not. Because it is used
-** within an expression that is an argument to another macro
+** within an expression that is an argument to another macro
** (sqliteMallocRaw), it is not possible to use conditional compilation.
** So, this macro is defined instead.
*/
@@ -58640,8 +58640,8 @@ struct BtCursor {
**
** The aRef[] array is allocated so that there is 1 bit for each page in
** the database. As the integrity-check proceeds, for each page used in
-** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to
-** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which
+** the database the corresponding bit is set. This allows integrity-check to
+** detect pages that are used twice and orphaned pages (both of which
** indicate corruption).
*/
typedef struct IntegrityCk IntegrityCk;
@@ -58957,10 +58957,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterAll(sqlite3 *db){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
/*
-** Enter a mutex on a Btree given a cursor owned by that Btree.
+** Enter a mutex on a Btree given a cursor owned by that Btree.
**
-** These entry points are used by incremental I/O only. Enter() is required
-** any time OMIT_SHARED_CACHE is not defined, regardless of whether or not
+** These entry points are used by incremental I/O only. Enter() is required
+** any time OMIT_SHARED_CACHE is not defined, regardless of whether or not
** the build is threadsafe. Leave() is only required by threadsafe builds.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeEnterCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -59030,7 +59030,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
#define BTALLOC_LE 2 /* Allocate any page <= the parameter */
/*
-** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
+** Macro IfNotOmitAV(x) returns (x) if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM is not
** defined, or 0 if it is. For example:
**
** bIncrVacuum = IfNotOmitAV(pBtShared->incrVacuum);
@@ -59045,7 +59045,7 @@ int sqlite3BtreeTrace=1; /* True to enable tracing */
/*
** A list of BtShared objects that are eligible for participation
** in shared cache. This variable has file scope during normal builds,
-** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
+** but the test harness needs to access it so we make it global for
** test builds.
**
** Access to this variable is protected by SQLITE_MUTEX_STATIC_MASTER.
@@ -59080,7 +59080,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){
** manipulate entries in the BtShared.pLock linked list used to store
** shared-cache table level locks. If the library is compiled with the
** shared-cache feature disabled, then there is only ever one user
- ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
+ ** of each BtShared structure and so this locking is not necessary.
** So define the lock related functions as no-ops.
*/
#define querySharedCacheTableLock(a,b,c) SQLITE_OK
@@ -59097,15 +59097,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_shared_cache(int enable){
/*
**** This function is only used as part of an assert() statement. ***
**
-** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
+** Check to see if pBtree holds the required locks to read or write to the
** table with root page iRoot. Return 1 if it does and 0 if not.
**
-** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
+** For example, when writing to a table with root-page iRoot via
** Btree connection pBtree:
**
** assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(pBtree, iRoot, 0, WRITE_LOCK) );
**
-** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
+** When writing to an index that resides in a sharable database, the
** caller should have first obtained a lock specifying the root page of
** the corresponding table. This makes things a bit more complicated,
** as this module treats each table as a separate structure. To determine
@@ -59127,7 +59127,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
BtLock *pLock;
/* If this database is not shareable, or if the client is reading
- ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
+ ** and has the read-uncommitted flag set, then no lock is required.
** Return true immediately.
*/
if( (pBtree->sharable==0)
@@ -59167,13 +59167,13 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
iTab = iRoot;
}
- /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
+ /* Search for the required lock. Either a write-lock on root-page iTab, a
** write-lock on the schema table, or (if the client is reading) a
** read-lock on iTab will suffice. Return 1 if any of these are found. */
for(pLock=pBtree->pBt->pLock; pLock; pLock=pLock->pNext){
- if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
+ if( pLock->pBtree==pBtree
&& (pLock->iTable==iTab || (pLock->eLock==WRITE_LOCK && pLock->iTable==1))
- && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
+ && pLock->eLock>=eLockType
){
return 1;
}
@@ -59206,7 +59206,7 @@ static int hasSharedCacheTableLock(
static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
BtCursor *p;
for(p=pBtree->pBt->pCursor; p; p=p->pNext){
- if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
+ if( p->pgnoRoot==iRoot
&& p->pBtree!=pBtree
&& 0==(p->pBtree->db->flags & SQLITE_ReadUncommitted)
){
@@ -59218,7 +59218,7 @@ static int hasReadConflicts(Btree *pBtree, Pgno iRoot){
#endif /* #ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG */
/*
-** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
+** Query to see if Btree handle p may obtain a lock of type eLock
** (READ_LOCK or WRITE_LOCK) on the table with root-page iTab. Return
** SQLITE_OK if the lock may be obtained (by calling
** setSharedCacheTableLock()), or SQLITE_LOCKED if not.
@@ -59231,14 +59231,14 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
assert( p->db!=0 );
assert( !(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted)||eLock==WRITE_LOCK||iTab==1 );
-
+
/* If requesting a write-lock, then the Btree must have an open write
- ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
+ ** transaction on this file. And, obviously, for this to be so there
** must be an open write transaction on the file itself.
*/
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || (p==pBt->pWriter && p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE) );
assert( eLock==READ_LOCK || pBt->inTransaction==TRANS_WRITE );
-
+
/* This routine is a no-op if the shared-cache is not enabled */
if( !p->sharable ){
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -59253,7 +59253,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
}
for(pIter=pBt->pLock; pIter; pIter=pIter->pNext){
- /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
+ /* The condition (pIter->eLock!=eLock) in the following if(...)
** statement is a simplification of:
**
** (eLock==WRITE_LOCK || pIter->eLock==WRITE_LOCK)
@@ -59280,7 +59280,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
/*
** Add a lock on the table with root-page iTable to the shared-btree used
-** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
+** by Btree handle p. Parameter eLock must be either READ_LOCK or
** WRITE_LOCK.
**
** This function assumes the following:
@@ -59292,7 +59292,7 @@ static int querySharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTab, u8 eLock){
** with the requested lock (i.e. querySharedCacheTableLock() has
** already been called and returned SQLITE_OK).
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the lock is added successfully. SQLITE_NOMEM
** is returned if a malloc attempt fails.
*/
static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
@@ -59306,11 +59306,11 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
/* A connection with the read-uncommitted flag set will never try to
** obtain a read-lock using this function. The only read-lock obtained
- ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master
+ ** by a connection in read-uncommitted mode is on the sqlite_master
** table, and that lock is obtained in BtreeBeginTrans(). */
assert( 0==(p->db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) || eLock==WRITE_LOCK );
- /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
+ /* This function should only be called on a sharable b-tree after it
** has been determined that no other b-tree holds a conflicting lock. */
assert( p->sharable );
assert( SQLITE_OK==querySharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, eLock) );
@@ -59355,7 +59355,7 @@ static int setSharedCacheTableLock(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, u8 eLock){
** Release all the table locks (locks obtained via calls to
** the setSharedCacheTableLock() procedure) held by Btree object p.
**
-** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
+** This function assumes that Btree p has an open read or write
** transaction. If it does not, then the BTS_PENDING flag
** may be incorrectly cleared.
*/
@@ -59387,7 +59387,7 @@ static void clearAllSharedCacheTableLocks(Btree *p){
pBt->pWriter = 0;
pBt->btsFlags &= ~(BTS_EXCLUSIVE|BTS_PENDING);
}else if( pBt->nTransaction==2 ){
- /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
+ /* This function is called when Btree p is concluding its
** transaction. If there currently exists a writer, and p is not
** that writer, then the number of locks held by connections other
** than the writer must be about to drop to zero. In this case
@@ -59431,7 +59431,7 @@ static int cursorHoldsMutex(BtCursor *p){
}
/* Verify that the cursor and the BtShared agree about what is the current
-** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
+** database connetion. This is important in shared-cache mode. If the database
** connection pointers get out-of-sync, it is possible for routines like
** btreeInitPage() to reference an stale connection pointer that references a
** a connection that has already closed. This routine is used inside assert()
@@ -59501,8 +59501,8 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
/*
-** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
-** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
+** Set bit pgno of the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. This is called
+** when a page that previously contained data becomes a free-list leaf
** page.
**
** The BtShared.pHasContent bitvec exists to work around an obscure
@@ -59528,7 +59528,7 @@ static void invalidateIncrblobCursors(
** may be lost. In the event of a rollback, it may not be possible
** to restore the database to its original configuration.
**
-** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
+** The solution is the BtShared.pHasContent bitvec. Whenever a page is
** moved to become a free-list leaf page, the corresponding bit is
** set in the bitvec. Whenever a leaf page is extracted from the free-list,
** optimization 2 above is omitted if the corresponding bit is already
@@ -59587,13 +59587,13 @@ static void btreeReleaseAllCursorPages(BtCursor *pCur){
** The cursor passed as the only argument must point to a valid entry
** when this function is called (i.e. have eState==CURSOR_VALID). This
** function saves the current cursor key in variables pCur->nKey and
-** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
+** pCur->pKey. SQLITE_OK is returned if successful or an SQLite error
** code otherwise.
**
** If the cursor is open on an intkey table, then the integer key
** (the rowid) is stored in pCur->nKey and pCur->pKey is left set to
-** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
-** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
+** NULL. If the cursor is open on a non-intkey table, then pCur->pKey is
+** set to point to a malloced buffer pCur->nKey bytes in size containing
** the key.
*/
static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -59626,11 +59626,11 @@ static int saveCursorKey(BtCursor *pCur){
}
/*
-** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
+** Save the current cursor position in the variables BtCursor.nKey
** and BtCursor.pKey. The cursor's state is set to CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK.
**
** The caller must ensure that the cursor is valid (has eState==CURSOR_VALID)
-** prior to calling this routine.
+** prior to calling this routine.
*/
static int saveCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
int rc;
@@ -59666,7 +59666,7 @@ static int SQLITE_NOINLINE saveCursorsOnList(BtCursor*,Pgno,BtCursor*);
** routine is called just before cursor pExcept is used to modify the
** table, for example in BtreeDelete() or BtreeInsert().
**
-** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
+** If there are two or more cursors on the same btree, then all such
** cursors should have their BTCF_Multiple flag set. The btreeCursor()
** routine enforces that rule. This routine only needs to be called in
** the uncommon case when pExpect has the BTCF_Multiple flag set.
@@ -59765,9 +59765,9 @@ moveto_done:
/*
** Restore the cursor to the position it was in (or as close to as possible)
-** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
+** when saveCursorPosition() was called. Note that this call deletes the
** saved position info stored by saveCursorPosition(), so there can be
-** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
+** at most one effective restoreCursorPosition() call after each
** saveCursorPosition().
*/
static int btreeRestoreCursorPosition(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -59816,7 +59816,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCursorHasMoved(BtCursor *pCur){
/*
** This routine restores a cursor back to its original position after it
** has been moved by some outside activity (such as a btree rebalance or
-** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).
+** a row having been deleted out from under the cursor).
**
** On success, the *pDifferentRow parameter is false if the cursor is left
** pointing at exactly the same row. *pDifferntRow is the row the cursor
@@ -59882,7 +59882,7 @@ static Pgno ptrmapPageno(BtShared *pBt, Pgno pgno){
if( pgno<2 ) return 0;
nPagesPerMapPage = (pBt->usableSize/5)+1;
iPtrMap = (pgno-2)/nPagesPerMapPage;
- ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
+ ret = (iPtrMap*nPagesPerMapPage) + 2;
if( ret==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt) ){
ret++;
}
@@ -60221,7 +60221,7 @@ static u16 cellSizePtr(MemPage *pPage, u8 *pCell){
}
pIter++;
if( pPage->intKey ){
- /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
+ /* pIter now points at the 64-bit integer key value, a variable length
** integer. The following block moves pIter to point at the first byte
** past the end of the key value. */
pEnd = &pIter[9];
@@ -60465,7 +60465,7 @@ static int allocateSpace(MemPage *pPage, int nByte, int *pIdx){
int top; /* First byte of cell content area */
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Integer return code */
int gap; /* First byte of gap between cell pointers and cell content */
-
+
assert( sqlite3PagerIswriteable(pPage->pDbPage) );
assert( pPage->pBt );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pPage->pBt->mutex) );
@@ -60573,7 +60573,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
memset(&data[iStart], 0, iSize);
}
- /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the
+ /* The list of freeblocks must be in ascending order. Find the
** spot on the list where iStart should be inserted.
*/
hdr = pPage->hdrOffset;
@@ -60590,7 +60590,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
}
if( iFreeBlk>iLast ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
assert( iFreeBlk>iPtr || iFreeBlk==0 );
-
+
/* At this point:
** iFreeBlk: First freeblock after iStart, or zero if none
** iPtr: The address of a pointer to iFreeBlk
@@ -60605,7 +60605,7 @@ static int freeSpace(MemPage *pPage, u16 iStart, u16 iSize){
iSize = iEnd - iStart;
iFreeBlk = get2byte(&data[iFreeBlk]);
}
-
+
/* If iPtr is another freeblock (that is, if iPtr is not the freelist
** pointer in the page header) then check to see if iStart should be
** coalesced onto the end of iPtr.
@@ -60704,7 +60704,7 @@ static int decodeFlags(MemPage *pPage, int flagByte){
** Initialize the auxiliary information for a disk block.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success. If we see that the page does
-** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
+** not contain a well-formed database page, then return
** SQLITE_CORRUPT. Note that a return of SQLITE_OK does not
** guarantee that the page is well-formed. It only shows that
** we failed to detect any corruption.
@@ -60764,10 +60764,10 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
assert( pPage->nCell>0 || top==usableSize || CORRUPT_DB );
/* A malformed database page might cause us to read past the end
- ** of page when parsing a cell.
+ ** of page when parsing a cell.
**
** The following block of code checks early to see if a cell extends
- ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be
+ ** past the end of a page boundary and causes SQLITE_CORRUPT to be
** returned if it does.
*/
iCellFirst = cellOffset + 2*pPage->nCell;
@@ -60791,7 +60791,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
}
}
if( !pPage->leaf ) iCellLast++;
- }
+ }
/* Compute the total free space on the page
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-23588-34450 The two-byte integer at offset 1 gives the
@@ -60805,7 +60805,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-55530-52930 In a well-formed b-tree page, there will
** always be at least one cell before the first freeblock.
*/
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
while( 1 ){
if( pc>iCellLast ){
@@ -60833,7 +60833,7 @@ static int btreeInitPage(MemPage *pPage){
** area, according to the page header, lies within the page.
*/
if( nFree>usableSize ){
- return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
+ return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
pPage->nFree = (u16)(nFree - iCellFirst);
pPage->isInit = 1;
@@ -60892,7 +60892,7 @@ static MemPage *btreePageFromDbPage(DbPage *pDbPage, Pgno pgno, BtShared *pBt){
pPage->hdrOffset = pgno==1 ? 100 : 0;
}
assert( pPage->aData==sqlite3PagerGetData(pDbPage) );
- return pPage;
+ return pPage;
}
/*
@@ -61100,11 +61100,11 @@ static int btreeInvokeBusyHandler(void *pArg){
/*
** Open a database file.
-**
+**
** zFilename is the name of the database file. If zFilename is NULL
** then an ephemeral database is created. The ephemeral database might
** be exclusively in memory, or it might use a disk-based memory cache.
-** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
+** Either way, the ephemeral database will be automatically deleted
** when sqlite3BtreeClose() is called.
**
** If zFilename is ":memory:" then an in-memory database is created
@@ -61137,7 +61137,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
/* True if opening an ephemeral, temporary database */
const int isTempDb = zFilename==0 || zFilename[0]==0;
- /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
+ /* Set the variable isMemdb to true for an in-memory database, or
** false for a file-based database.
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_MEMORYDB
@@ -61256,7 +61256,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
assert( sizeof(u32)==4 );
assert( sizeof(u16)==2 );
assert( sizeof(Pgno)==4 );
-
+
pBt = sqlite3MallocZero( sizeof(*pBt) );
if( pBt==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -61275,7 +61275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
pBt->db = db;
sqlite3PagerSetBusyhandler(pBt->pPager, btreeInvokeBusyHandler, pBt);
p->pBt = pBt;
-
+
pBt->pCursor = 0;
pBt->pPage1 = 0;
if( sqlite3PagerIsreadonly(pBt->pPager) ) pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_READ_ONLY;
@@ -61317,7 +61317,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeOpen(
if( rc ) goto btree_open_out;
pBt->usableSize = pBt->pageSize - nReserve;
assert( (pBt->pageSize & 7)==0 ); /* 8-byte alignment of pageSize */
-
+
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DISKIO)
/* Add the new BtShared object to the linked list sharable BtShareds.
*/
@@ -61446,7 +61446,7 @@ static int removeFromSharingList(BtShared *pBt){
}
/*
-** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
+** Make sure pBt->pTmpSpace points to an allocation of
** MX_CELL_SIZE(pBt) bytes with a 4-byte prefix for a left-child
** pointer.
*/
@@ -61461,7 +61461,7 @@ static void allocateTempSpace(BtShared *pBt){
** can mean that fillInCell() only initializes the first 2 or 3
** bytes of pTmpSpace, but that the first 4 bytes are copied from
** it into a database page. This is not actually a problem, but it
- ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized
+ ** does cause a valgrind error when the 1 or 2 bytes of unitialized
** data is passed to system call write(). So to avoid this error,
** zero the first 4 bytes of temp space here.
**
@@ -61514,7 +61514,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClose(Btree *p){
sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
/* If there are still other outstanding references to the shared-btree
- ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
+ ** structure, return now. The remainder of this procedure cleans
** up the shared-btree.
*/
assert( p->wantToLock==0 && p->locked==0 );
@@ -61620,7 +61620,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetPagerFlags(
/*
** Change the default pages size and the number of reserved bytes per page.
-** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
+** Or, if the page size has already been fixed, return SQLITE_READONLY
** without changing anything.
**
** The page size must be a power of 2 between 512 and 65536. If the page
@@ -61681,7 +61681,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetPageSize(Btree *p){
** held.
**
** This is useful in one special case in the backup API code where it is
-** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
+** known that the shared b-tree mutex is held, but the mutex on the
** database handle that owns *p is not. In this case if sqlite3BtreeEnter()
** were to be called, it might collide with some other operation on the
** database handle that owns *p, causing undefined behavior.
@@ -61739,7 +61739,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){
if( newFlag>=0 ){
p->pBt->btsFlags &= ~BTS_SECURE_DELETE;
if( newFlag ) p->pBt->btsFlags |= BTS_SECURE_DELETE;
- }
+ }
b = (p->pBt->btsFlags & BTS_SECURE_DELETE)!=0;
sqlite3BtreeLeave(p);
return b;
@@ -61748,7 +61748,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSecureDelete(Btree *p, int newFlag){
/*
** Change the 'auto-vacuum' property of the database. If the 'autoVacuum'
** parameter is non-zero, then auto-vacuum mode is enabled. If zero, it
-** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
+** is disabled. The default value for the auto-vacuum property is
** determined by the SQLITE_DEFAULT_AUTOVACUUM macro.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
@@ -61772,7 +61772,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(Btree *p, int autoVacuum){
}
/*
-** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
+** Return the value of the 'auto-vacuum' property. If auto-vacuum is
** enabled 1 is returned. Otherwise 0.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuum(Btree *p){
@@ -61839,7 +61839,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeGetAutoVacuumSlackPages(Btree *p){
** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. If the file is not a
** well-formed database file, then SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
** SQLITE_BUSY is returned if the database is locked. SQLITE_NOMEM
-** is returned if we run out of memory.
+** is returned if we run out of memory.
*/
static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
int rc; /* Result code from subfunctions */
@@ -61856,7 +61856,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
/* Do some checking to help insure the file we opened really is
- ** a valid database file.
+ ** a valid database file.
*/
nPage = nPageHeader = get4byte(28+(u8*)pPage1->aData);
sqlite3PagerPagecount(pBt->pPager, &nPageFile);
@@ -61891,7 +61891,7 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
}
/* If the write version is set to 2, this database should be accessed
- ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
+ ** in WAL mode. If the log is not already open, open it now. Then
** return SQLITE_OK and return without populating BtShared.pPage1.
** The caller detects this and calls this function again. This is
** required as the version of page 1 currently in the page1 buffer
@@ -61943,15 +61943,15 @@ static int lockBtree(BtShared *pBt){
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-25008-21688 The size of a page is a power of two
** between 512 and 65536 inclusive. */
if( ((pageSize-1)&pageSize)!=0
- || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
- || pageSize<=256
+ || pageSize>SQLITE_MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+ || pageSize<=256
){
goto page1_init_failed;
}
assert( (pageSize & 7)==0 );
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-59310-51205 The "reserved space" size in the 1-byte
** integer at offset 20 is the number of bytes of space at the end of
- ** each page to reserve for extensions.
+ ** each page to reserve for extensions.
**
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-37497-42412 The size of the reserved region is
** determined by the one-byte unsigned integer found at an offset of 20
@@ -62041,7 +62041,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
int r = 0;
for(pCur=pBt->pCursor; pCur; pCur=pCur->pNext){
if( (wrOnly==0 || (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_WriteFlag)!=0)
- && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
+ && pCur->eState!=CURSOR_FAULT ) r++;
}
return r;
}
@@ -62050,7 +62050,7 @@ static int countValidCursors(BtShared *pBt, int wrOnly){
/*
** If there are no outstanding cursors and we are not in the middle
** of a transaction but there is a read lock on the database, then
-** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
+** this routine unrefs the first page of the database file which
** has the effect of releasing the read lock.
**
** If there is a transaction in progress, this routine is a no-op.
@@ -62134,8 +62134,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
** upgraded to exclusive by calling this routine a second time - the
** exclusivity flag only works for a new transaction.
**
-** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
-** changes to the database. None of the following routines
+** A write-transaction must be started before attempting any
+** changes to the database. None of the following routines
** will work unless a transaction is started first:
**
** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable()
@@ -62149,7 +62149,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeNewDb(Btree *p){
** If an initial attempt to acquire the lock fails because of lock contention
** and the database was previously unlocked, then invoke the busy handler
** if there is one. But if there was previously a read-lock, do not
-** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
+** invoke the busy handler - just return SQLITE_BUSY. SQLITE_BUSY is
** returned when there is already a read-lock in order to avoid a deadlock.
**
** Suppose there are two processes A and B. A has a read lock and B has
@@ -62185,7 +62185,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
{
sqlite3 *pBlock = 0;
- /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
+ /* If another database handle has already opened a write transaction
** on this shared-btree structure and a second write transaction is
** requested, return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
@@ -62210,8 +62210,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
}
#endif
- /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
- ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
+ /* Any read-only or read-write transaction implies a read-lock on
+ ** page 1. So if some other shared-cache client already has a write-lock
** on page 1, the transaction cannot be opened. */
rc = querySharedCacheTableLock(p, MASTER_ROOT, READ_LOCK);
if( SQLITE_OK!=rc ) goto trans_begun;
@@ -62222,7 +62222,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
/* Call lockBtree() until either pBt->pPage1 is populated or
** lockBtree() returns something other than SQLITE_OK. lockBtree()
** may return SQLITE_OK but leave pBt->pPage1 set to 0 if after
- ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
+ ** reading page 1 it discovers that the page-size of the database
** file is not pBt->pageSize. In this case lockBtree() will update
** pBt->pageSize to the page-size of the file on disk.
*/
@@ -62238,7 +62238,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
}
}
}
-
+
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
}
@@ -62272,7 +62272,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(Btree *p, int wrflag){
/* If the db-size header field is incorrect (as it may be if an old
** client has been writing the database file), update it now. Doing
- ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
+ ** this sooner rather than later means the database size can safely
** re-read the database size from page 1 if a savepoint or transaction
** rollback occurs within the transaction.
*/
@@ -62343,7 +62343,7 @@ static int setChildPtrmaps(MemPage *pPage){
** that it points to iTo. Parameter eType describes the type of pointer to
** be modified, as follows:
**
-** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
+** PTRMAP_BTREE: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at a child
** page of pPage.
**
** PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1: pPage is a btree-page. The pointer points at an overflow
@@ -62391,9 +62391,9 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
}
}
}
-
+
if( i==nCell ){
- if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
+ if( eType!=PTRMAP_BTREE ||
get4byte(&pPage->aData[pPage->hdrOffset+8])!=iFrom ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
@@ -62405,11 +62405,11 @@ static int modifyPagePointer(MemPage *pPage, Pgno iFrom, Pgno iTo, u8 eType){
/*
-** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
+** Move the open database page pDbPage to location iFreePage in the
** database. The pDbPage reference remains valid.
**
** The isCommit flag indicates that there is no need to remember that
-** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
+** the journal needs to be sync()ed before database page pDbPage->pgno
** can be written to. The caller has already promised not to write to that
** page.
*/
@@ -62426,13 +62426,13 @@ static int relocatePage(
Pager *pPager = pBt->pPager;
int rc;
- assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
+ assert( eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW2 || eType==PTRMAP_OVERFLOW1 ||
eType==PTRMAP_BTREE || eType==PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
assert( pDbPage->pBt==pBt );
/* Move page iDbPage from its current location to page number iFreePage */
- TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n",
+ TRACE(("AUTOVACUUM: Moving %d to free page %d (ptr page %d type %d)\n",
iDbPage, iFreePage, iPtrPage, eType));
rc = sqlite3PagerMovepage(pPager, pDbPage->pDbPage, iFreePage, isCommit);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -62491,19 +62491,19 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(BtShared *, MemPage **, Pgno *, Pgno, u8);
/*
** Perform a single step of an incremental-vacuum. If successful, return
-** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
-** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
+** SQLITE_OK. If there is no work to do (and therefore no point in
+** calling this function again), return SQLITE_DONE. Or, if an error
** occurs, return some other error code.
**
-** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
+** More specifically, this function attempts to re-organize the database so
** that the last page of the file currently in use is no longer in use.
**
** Parameter nFin is the number of pages that this database would contain
** were this function called until it returns SQLITE_DONE.
**
-** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
-** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
-** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
+** If the bCommit parameter is non-zero, this function assumes that the
+** caller will keep calling incrVacuumStep() until it returns SQLITE_DONE
+** or an error. bCommit is passed true for an auto-vacuum-on-commit
** operation, or false for an incremental vacuum.
*/
static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
@@ -62534,7 +62534,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
if( bCommit==0 ){
/* Remove the page from the files free-list. This is not required
** if bCommit is non-zero. In that case, the free-list will be
- ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
+ ** truncated to zero after this function returns, so it doesn't
** matter if it still contains some garbage entries.
*/
Pgno iFreePg;
@@ -62578,7 +62578,7 @@ static int incrVacuumStep(BtShared *pBt, Pgno nFin, Pgno iLastPg, int bCommit){
releasePage(pFreePg);
}while( bCommit && iFreePg>nFin );
assert( iFreePginTrans = TRANS_READ;
}else{
- /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
- ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
+ /* If the handle had any kind of transaction open, decrement the
+ ** transaction count of the shared btree. If the transaction count
** reaches 0, set the shared state to TRANS_NONE. The unlockBtreeIfUnused()
** call below will unlock the pager. */
if( p->inTrans!=TRANS_NONE ){
@@ -62817,7 +62817,7 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
}
}
- /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
+ /* Set the current transaction state to TRANS_NONE and unlock the
** pager if this call closed the only read or write transaction. */
p->inTrans = TRANS_NONE;
unlockBtreeIfUnused(pBt);
@@ -62838,12 +62838,12 @@ static void btreeEndTransaction(Btree *p){
** the rollback journal (which causes the transaction to commit) and
** drop locks.
**
-** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
+** Normally, if an error occurs while the pager layer is attempting to
** finalize the underlying journal file, this function returns an error and
** the upper layer will attempt a rollback. However, if the second argument
-** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
-** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
-** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this
+** is non-zero then this b-tree transaction is part of a multi-file
+** transaction. In this case, the transaction has already been committed
+** (by deleting a master journal file) and the caller will ignore this
** functions return code. So, even if an error occurs in the pager layer,
** reset the b-tree objects internal state to indicate that the write
** transaction has been closed. This is quite safe, as the pager will have
@@ -62858,7 +62858,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(Btree *p, int bCleanup){
sqlite3BtreeEnter(p);
btreeIntegrity(p);
- /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
+ /* If the handle has a write-transaction open, commit the shared-btrees
** transaction and set the shared state to TRANS_READ.
*/
if( p->inTrans==TRANS_WRITE ){
@@ -62907,15 +62907,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCommit(Btree *p){
**
** This routine gets called when a rollback occurs. If the writeOnly
** flag is true, then only write-cursors need be tripped - read-only
-** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
-** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
+** cursors save their current positions so that they may continue
+** following the rollback. Or, if writeOnly is false, all cursors are
** tripped. In general, writeOnly is false if the transaction being
** rolled back modified the database schema. In this case b-tree root
** pages may be moved or deleted from the database altogether, making
** it unsafe for read cursors to continue.
**
-** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
-** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
+** If the writeOnly flag is true and an error is encountered while
+** saving the current position of a read-only cursor, all cursors,
** including all read-cursors are tripped.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or if an error occurs while
@@ -63017,8 +63017,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeRollback(Btree *p, int tripCode, int writeOnly){
/*
** Start a statement subtransaction. The subtransaction can be rolled
-** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
-** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
+** back independently of the main transaction. You must start a transaction
+** before starting a subtransaction. The subtransaction is ended automatically
** if the main transaction commits or rolls back.
**
** Statement subtransactions are used around individual SQL statements
@@ -63055,11 +63055,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(Btree *p, int iStatement){
/*
** The second argument to this function, op, is always SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK
** or SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. This function either releases or rolls back the
-** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
+** savepoint identified by parameter iSavepoint, depending on the value
** of op.
**
** Normally, iSavepoint is greater than or equal to zero. However, if op is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then iSavepoint may also be -1. In this case the
** contents of the entire transaction are rolled back. This is different
** from a normal transaction rollback, as no locks are released and the
** transaction remains open.
@@ -63123,10 +63123,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSavepoint(Btree *p, int op, int iSavepoint){
** is set. If FORDELETE is set, that is a hint to the implementation that
** this cursor will only be used to seek to and delete entries of an index
** as part of a larger DELETE statement. The FORDELETE hint is not used by
-** this implementation. But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
+** this implementation. But in a hypothetical alternative storage engine
** in which index entries are automatically deleted when corresponding table
** rows are deleted, the FORDELETE flag is a hint that all SEEK and DELETE
-** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
+** operations on this cursor can be no-ops and all READ operations can
** return a null row (2-bytes: 0x01 0x00).
**
** No checking is done to make sure that page iTable really is the
@@ -63147,14 +63147,14 @@ static int btreeCursor(
BtCursor *pX; /* Looping over other all cursors */
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(p) );
- assert( wrFlag==0
- || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
- || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
+ assert( wrFlag==0
+ || wrFlag==BTREE_WRCSR
+ || wrFlag==(BTREE_WRCSR|BTREE_FORDELETE)
);
- /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
- ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
- ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
+ /* The following assert statements verify that if this is a sharable
+ ** b-tree database, the connection is holding the required table locks,
+ ** and that no other connection has any open cursor that conflicts with
** this lock. */
assert( hasSharedCacheTableLock(p, iTable, pKeyInfo!=0, (wrFlag?2:1)) );
assert( wrFlag==0 || !hasReadConflicts(p, iTable) );
@@ -63349,15 +63349,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(BtCursor *pCur){
/*
** Given the page number of an overflow page in the database (parameter
-** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
+** ovfl), this function finds the page number of the next page in the
** linked list of overflow pages. If possible, it uses the auto-vacuum
-** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
+** pointer-map data instead of reading the content of page ovfl to do so.
**
** If an error occurs an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise:
**
-** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
-** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
-** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
+** The page number of the next overflow page in the linked list is
+** written to *pPgnoNext. If page ovfl is the last page in its linked
+** list, *pPgnoNext is set to zero.
**
** If ppPage is not NULL, and a reference to the MemPage object corresponding
** to page number pOvfl was obtained, then *ppPage is set to point to that
@@ -63381,9 +63381,9 @@ static int getOverflowPage(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* Try to find the next page in the overflow list using the
- ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
- ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
- ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
+ ** autovacuum pointer-map pages. Guess that the next page in
+ ** the overflow list is page number (ovfl+1). If that guess turns
+ ** out to be wrong, fall back to loading the data of page
** number ovfl to determine the next page number.
*/
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
@@ -63471,8 +63471,8 @@ static int copyPayload(
**
** If the current cursor entry uses one or more overflow pages
** this function may allocate space for and lazily populate
-** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
-** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
+** the overflow page-list cache array (BtCursor.aOverflow).
+** Subsequent calls use this cache to make seeking to the supplied offset
** more efficient.
**
** Once an overflow page-list cache has been allocated, it must be
@@ -63488,7 +63488,7 @@ static int accessPayload(
BtCursor *pCur, /* Cursor pointing to entry to read from */
u32 offset, /* Begin reading this far into payload */
u32 amt, /* Read this many bytes */
- unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
+ unsigned char *pBuf, /* Write the bytes into this buffer */
int eOp /* zero to read. non-zero to write. */
){
unsigned char *aPayload;
@@ -63613,12 +63613,12 @@ static int accessPayload(
#ifdef SQLITE_DIRECT_OVERFLOW_READ
/* If all the following are true:
**
- ** 1) this is a read operation, and
+ ** 1) this is a read operation, and
** 2) data is required from the start of this overflow page, and
** 3) there is no open write-transaction, and
** 4) the database is file-backed, and
** 5) the page is not in the WAL file
- ** 6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
+ ** 6) at least 4 bytes have already been read into the output buffer
**
** then data can be read directly from the database file into the
** output buffer, bypassing the page-cache altogether. This speeds
@@ -63725,7 +63725,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePayloadChecked(BtCursor *pCur, u32 offset, u32 am
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB */
/*
-** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
+** Return a pointer to payload information from the entry that the
** pCur cursor is pointing to. The pointer is to the beginning of
** the key if index btrees (pPage->intKey==0) and is the data for
** table btrees (pPage->intKey==1). The number of bytes of available
@@ -63811,7 +63811,7 @@ static int moveToChild(BtCursor *pCur, u32 newPgno){
#if SQLITE_DEBUG
/*
-** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
+** Page pParent is an internal (non-leaf) tree page. This function
** asserts that page number iChild is the left-child if the iIdx'th
** cell in page pParent. Or, if iIdx is equal to the total number of
** cells in pParent, that page number iChild is the right-child of
@@ -63828,7 +63828,7 @@ static void assertParentIndex(MemPage *pParent, int iIdx, Pgno iChild){
}
}
#else
-# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
+# define assertParentIndex(x,y,z)
#endif
/*
@@ -63845,8 +63845,8 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
assert( pCur->iPage>0 );
assert( pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage] );
assertParentIndex(
- pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
- pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1],
+ pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1],
pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->pgno
);
testcase( pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage-1] > pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage-1]->nCell );
@@ -63860,19 +63860,19 @@ static void moveToParent(BtCursor *pCur){
**
** If the table has a virtual root page, then the cursor is moved to point
** to the virtual root page instead of the actual root page. A table has a
-** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
+** virtual root page when the actual root page contains no cells and a
** single child page. This can only happen with the table rooted at page 1.
**
-** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
+** If the b-tree structure is empty, the cursor state is set to
** CURSOR_INVALID. Otherwise, the cursor is set to point to the first
** cell located on the root (or virtual root) page and the cursor state
** is set to CURSOR_VALID.
**
** If this function returns successfully, it may be assumed that the
-** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
+** page-header flags indicate that the [virtual] root-page is the expected
** kind of b-tree page (i.e. if when opening the cursor the caller did not
** specify a KeyInfo structure the flags byte is set to 0x05 or 0x0D,
-** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
+** indicating a table b-tree, or if the caller did specify a KeyInfo
** structure the flags byte is set to 0x02 or 0x0A, indicating an index
** b-tree).
*/
@@ -63920,19 +63920,19 @@ static int moveToRoot(BtCursor *pCur){
/* If pCur->pKeyInfo is not NULL, then the caller that opened this cursor
** expected to open it on an index b-tree. Otherwise, if pKeyInfo is
** NULL, the caller expects a table b-tree. If this is not the case,
- ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
+ ** return an SQLITE_CORRUPT error.
**
** Earlier versions of SQLite assumed that this test could not fail
** if the root page was already loaded when this function was called (i.e.
- ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
- ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
+ ** if pCur->iPage>=0). But this is not so if the database is corrupted
+ ** in such a way that page pRoot is linked into a second b-tree table
** (or the freelist). */
assert( pRoot->intKey==1 || pRoot->intKey==0 );
if( pRoot->isInit==0 || (pCur->pKeyInfo==0)!=pRoot->intKey ){
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
-skip_init:
+skip_init:
pCur->aiIdx[0] = 0;
pCur->info.nSize = 0;
pCur->curFlags &= ~(BTCF_AtLast|BTCF_ValidNKey|BTCF_ValidOvfl);
@@ -64032,14 +64032,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeFirst(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
int rc;
-
+
assert( cursorOwnsBtShared(pCur) );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCur->pBtree->db->mutex) );
/* If the cursor already points to the last entry, this is a no-op. */
if( CURSOR_VALID==pCur->eState && (pCur->curFlags & BTCF_AtLast)!=0 ){
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
+ /* This block serves to assert() that the cursor really does point
** to the last entry in the b-tree. */
int ii;
for(ii=0; iiiPage; ii++){
@@ -64065,16 +64065,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
}else{
pCur->curFlags &= ~BTCF_AtLast;
}
-
+
}
}
return rc;
}
-/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key
+/* Move the cursor so that it points to an entry near the key
** specified by pIdxKey or intKey. Return a success code.
**
-** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey
+** For INTKEY tables, the intKey parameter is used. pIdxKey
** must be NULL. For index tables, pIdxKey is used and intKey
** is ignored.
**
@@ -64084,7 +64084,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
** before or after the key.
**
** An integer is written into *pRes which is the result of
-** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
+** comparing the key with the entry to which the cursor is
** pointing. The meaning of the integer written into
** *pRes is as follows:
**
@@ -64099,7 +64099,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLast(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
** is larger than intKey/pIdxKey.
**
** For index tables, the pIdxKey->eqSeen field is set to 1 if there
-** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.
+** exists an entry in the table that exactly matches pIdxKey.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
BtCursor *pCur, /* The cursor to be moved */
@@ -64152,8 +64152,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
if( pIdxKey ){
xRecordCompare = sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(pIdxKey);
pIdxKey->errCode = 0;
- assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
- || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
+ assert( pIdxKey->default_rc==1
+ || pIdxKey->default_rc==0
|| pIdxKey->default_rc==-1
);
}else{
@@ -64234,9 +64234,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
/* The maximum supported page-size is 65536 bytes. This means that
** the maximum number of record bytes stored on an index B-Tree
** page is less than 16384 bytes and may be stored as a 2-byte
- ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
- ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
- ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
+ ** varint. This information is used to attempt to avoid parsing
+ ** the entire cell by checking for the cases where the record is
+ ** stored entirely within the b-tree page by inspecting the first
** 2 bytes of the cell.
*/
nCell = pCell[0];
@@ -64246,10 +64246,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
** b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+1==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[1], pIdxKey);
- }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
+ }else if( !(pCell[1] & 0x80)
&& (nCell = ((nCell&0x7f)<<7) + pCell[1])<=pPage->maxLocal
){
- /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
+ /* The record-size field is a 2 byte varint and the record
** fits entirely on the main b-tree page. */
testcase( pCell+nCell+2==pPage->aDataEnd );
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, (void*)&pCell[2], pIdxKey);
@@ -64257,10 +64257,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
/* The record flows over onto one or more overflow pages. In
** this case the whole cell needs to be parsed, a buffer allocated
** and accessPayload() used to retrieve the record into the
- ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
+ ** buffer before VdbeRecordCompare() can be called.
**
** If the record is corrupt, the xRecordCompare routine may read
- ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
+ ** up to two varints past the end of the buffer. An extra 18
** bytes of padding is allocated at the end of the buffer in
** case this happens. */
void *pCellKey;
@@ -64290,7 +64290,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(
c = xRecordCompare(nCell, pCellKey, pIdxKey);
sqlite3_free(pCellKey);
}
- assert(
+ assert(
(pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_CORRUPT || c==0)
&& (pIdxKey->errCode!=SQLITE_NOMEM || pCur->pBtree->db->mallocFailed)
);
@@ -64406,7 +64406,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int btreeNext(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
idx = ++pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage];
assert( pPage->isInit );
- /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx
+ /* If the database file is corrupt, it is possible for the value of idx
** to be invalid here. This can only occur if a second cursor modifies
** the page while cursor pCur is holding a reference to it. Which can
** only happen if the database is corrupt in such a way as to link the
@@ -64571,7 +64571,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePrevious(BtCursor *pCur, int *pRes){
** SQLITE_OK is returned on success. Any other return value indicates
** an error. *ppPage is set to NULL in the event of an error.
**
-** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
+** If the "nearby" parameter is not 0, then an effort is made to
** locate a page close to the page number "nearby". This can be used in an
** attempt to keep related pages close to each other in the database file,
** which in turn can make database access faster.
@@ -64613,7 +64613,7 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
Pgno iTrunk;
u8 searchList = 0; /* If the free-list must be searched for 'nearby' */
u32 nSearch = 0; /* Count of the number of search attempts */
-
+
/* If eMode==BTALLOC_EXACT and a query of the pointer-map
** shows that the page 'nearby' is somewhere on the free-list, then
** the entire-list will be searched for that page.
@@ -64676,8 +64676,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
** is the number of leaf page pointers to follow. */
k = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[4]);
if( k==0 && !searchList ){
- /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
- ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
+ /* The trunk has no leaves and the list is not being searched.
+ ** So extract the trunk page itself and use it as the newly
** allocated page */
assert( pPrevTrunk==0 );
rc = sqlite3PagerWrite(pTrunk->pDbPage);
@@ -64694,8 +64694,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
goto end_allocate_page;
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
- }else if( searchList
- && (nearby==iTrunk || (iTrunkaData[0], &pTrunk->aData[0], 4);
}
}else{
- /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
+ /* The trunk page is required by the caller but it contains
** pointers to free-list leaves. The first leaf becomes a trunk
** page in this case.
*/
MemPage *pNewTrunk;
Pgno iNewTrunk = get4byte(&pTrunk->aData[8]);
- if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
+ if( iNewTrunk>mxPage ){
rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
goto end_allocate_page;
}
@@ -64794,8 +64794,8 @@ static int allocateBtreePage(
goto end_allocate_page;
}
testcase( iPage==mxPage );
- if( !searchList
- || (iPage==nearby || (iPagepPage1; /* Local reference to page 1 */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page being freed. May be NULL. */
int rc; /* Return Code */
@@ -65008,7 +65008,7 @@ static int freePage2(BtShared *pBt, MemPage *pMemPage, Pgno iPage){
/* If control flows to this point, then it was not possible to add the
** the page being freed as a leaf page of the first trunk in the free-list.
- ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
+ ** Possibly because the free-list is empty, or possibly because the
** first trunk in the free-list is full. Either way, the page being freed
** will become the new first trunk page in the free-list.
*/
@@ -65066,15 +65066,15 @@ static int clearCell(
assert( pBt->usableSize > 4 );
ovflPageSize = pBt->usableSize - 4;
nOvfl = (pInfo->nPayload - pInfo->nLocal + ovflPageSize - 1)/ovflPageSize;
- assert( nOvfl>0 ||
+ assert( nOvfl>0 ||
(CORRUPT_DB && (pInfo->nPayload + ovflPageSize)btreePagecount(pBt) ){
- /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
- ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
+ /* 0 is not a legal page number and page 1 cannot be an
+ ** overflow page. Therefore if ovflPgno<2 or past the end of the
** file the database must be corrupt. */
return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
}
@@ -65086,11 +65086,11 @@ static int clearCell(
if( ( pOvfl || ((pOvfl = btreePageLookup(pBt, ovflPgno))!=0) )
&& sqlite3PagerPageRefcount(pOvfl->pDbPage)!=1
){
- /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
+ /* There is no reason any cursor should have an outstanding reference
** to an overflow page belonging to a cell that is being deleted/updated.
- ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
- ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
- ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
+ ** So if there exists more than one reference to this page, then it
+ ** must not really be an overflow page and the database must be corrupt.
+ ** It is helpful to detect this before calling freePage2(), as
** freePage2() may zero the page contents if secure-delete mode is
** enabled. If this 'overflow' page happens to be a page that the
** caller is iterating through or using in some other way, this
@@ -65162,7 +65162,7 @@ static int fillInCell(
pSrc = pX->pKey;
nHeader += putVarint32(&pCell[nHeader], nPayload);
}
-
+
/* Fill in the payload */
if( nPayload<=pPage->maxLocal ){
n = nHeader + nPayload;
@@ -65215,8 +65215,8 @@ static int fillInCell(
if( pBt->autoVacuum ){
do{
pgnoOvfl++;
- } while(
- PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
+ } while(
+ PTRMAP_ISPAGE(pBt, pgnoOvfl) || pgnoOvfl==PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(pBt)
);
}
#endif
@@ -65224,9 +65224,9 @@ static int fillInCell(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, and the second or subsequent
** overflow page is being allocated, add an entry to the pointer-map
- ** for that page now.
+ ** for that page now.
**
- ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
+ ** If this is the first overflow page, then write a partial entry
** to the pointer-map. If we write nothing to this pointer-map slot,
** then the optimistic overflow chain processing in clearCell()
** may misinterpret the uninitialized values and delete the
@@ -65348,8 +65348,8 @@ static void dropCell(MemPage *pPage, int idx, int sz, int *pRC){
** will not fit, then make a copy of the cell content into pTemp if
** pTemp is not null. Regardless of pTemp, allocate a new entry
** in pPage->apOvfl[] and make it point to the cell content (either
-** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
-** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
+** in pTemp or the original pCell) and also record its index.
+** Allocating a new entry in pPage->aCell[] implies that
** pPage->nOverflow is incremented.
**
** *pRC must be SQLITE_OK when this routine is called.
@@ -65490,16 +65490,16 @@ static u16 cachedCellSize(CellArray *p, int N){
}
/*
-** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
+** Array apCell[] contains pointers to nCell b-tree page cells. The
** szCell[] array contains the size in bytes of each cell. This function
** replaces the current contents of page pPg with the contents of the cell
** array.
**
** Some of the cells in apCell[] may currently be stored in pPg. This
-** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
+** function works around problems caused by this by making a copy of any
** such cells before overwriting the page data.
**
-** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
+** The MemPage.nFree field is invalidated by this function. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to set it correctly.
*/
static int rebuildPage(
@@ -65548,8 +65548,8 @@ static int rebuildPage(
/*
** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell
-** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function attempts to
-** add the cells stored in the array to page pPg. If it cannot (because
+** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function attempts to
+** add the cells stored in the array to page pPg. If it cannot (because
** the page needs to be defragmented before the cells will fit), non-zero
** is returned. Otherwise, if the cells are added successfully, zero is
** returned.
@@ -65560,7 +65560,7 @@ static int rebuildPage(
** cell in the array. It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure
** that it is safe to overwrite this part of the cell-pointer array.
**
-** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
+** When this function is called, *ppData points to the start of the
** content area on page pPg. If the size of the content area is extended,
** *ppData is updated to point to the new start of the content area
** before returning.
@@ -65609,9 +65609,9 @@ static int pageInsertArray(
}
/*
-** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell
+** Array apCell[] contains nCell pointers to b-tree cells. Array szCell
** contains the size in bytes of each such cell. This function adds the
-** space associated with each cell in the array that is currently stored
+** space associated with each cell in the array that is currently stored
** within the body of pPg to the pPg free-list. The cell-pointers and other
** fields of the page are not updated.
**
@@ -65821,7 +65821,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
/* This error condition is now caught prior to reaching this function */
if( NEVER(pPage->nCell==0) ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
- /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
+ /* Allocate a new page. This page will become the right-sibling of
** pPage. Make the parent page writable, so that the new divider cell
** may be inserted. If both these operations are successful, proceed.
*/
@@ -65842,7 +65842,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
pNew->nFree = pBt->usableSize - pNew->cellOffset - 2 - szCell;
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer map
- ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
+ ** with entries for the new page, and any pointer from the
** cell on the page to an overflow page. If either of these
** operations fails, the return code is set, but the contents
** of the parent page are still manipulated by thh code below.
@@ -65856,14 +65856,14 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
ptrmapPutOvflPtr(pNew, pCell, &rc);
}
}
-
+
/* Create a divider cell to insert into pParent. The divider cell
** consists of a 4-byte page number (the page number of pPage) and
** a variable length key value (which must be the same value as the
** largest key on pPage).
**
- ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
- ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
+ ** To find the largest key value on pPage, first find the right-most
+ ** cell on pPage. The first two fields of this cell are the
** record-length (a variable length integer at most 32-bits in size)
** and the key value (a variable length integer, may have any value).
** The first of the while(...) loops below skips over the record-length
@@ -65884,7 +65884,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
/* Set the right-child pointer of pParent to point to the new page. */
put4byte(&pParent->aData[pParent->hdrOffset+8], pgnoNew);
-
+
/* Release the reference to the new page. */
releasePage(pNew);
}
@@ -65896,7 +65896,7 @@ static int balance_quick(MemPage *pParent, MemPage *pPage, u8 *pSpace){
#if 0
/*
** This function does not contribute anything to the operation of SQLite.
-** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
+** it is sometimes activated temporarily while debugging code responsible
** for setting pointer-map entries.
*/
static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
@@ -65911,7 +65911,7 @@ static int ptrmapCheckPages(MemPage **apPage, int nPage){
for(j=0; jnCell; j++){
CellInfo info;
u8 *z;
-
+
z = findCell(pPage, j);
pPage->xParseCell(pPage, z, &info);
if( info.nLocalpgno==1) ? 100 : 0);
int rc;
int iData;
-
-
+
+
assert( pFrom->isInit );
assert( pFrom->nFree>=iToHdr );
assert( get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]) <= (int)pBt->usableSize );
-
+
/* Copy the b-tree node content from page pFrom to page pTo. */
iData = get2byte(&aFrom[iFromHdr+5]);
memcpy(&aTo[iData], &aFrom[iData], pBt->usableSize-iData);
memcpy(&aTo[iToHdr], &aFrom[iFromHdr], pFrom->cellOffset + 2*pFrom->nCell);
-
+
/* Reinitialize page pTo so that the contents of the MemPage structure
** match the new data. The initialization of pTo can actually fail under
- ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
+ ** fairly obscure circumstances, even though it is a copy of initialized
** page pFrom.
*/
pTo->isInit = 0;
@@ -65983,7 +65983,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
*pRC = rc;
return;
}
-
+
/* If this is an auto-vacuum database, update the pointer-map entries
** for any b-tree or overflow pages that pTo now contains the pointers to.
*/
@@ -65998,13 +65998,13 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
** (hereafter "the page") and up to 2 siblings so that all pages have about the
** same amount of free space. Usually a single sibling on either side of the
** page are used in the balancing, though both siblings might come from one
-** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
+** side if the page is the first or last child of its parent. If the page
** has fewer than 2 siblings (something which can only happen if the page
** is a root page or a child of a root page) then all available siblings
** participate in the balancing.
**
-** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
-** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
+** The number of siblings of the page might be increased or decreased by
+** one or two in an effort to keep pages nearly full but not over full.
**
** Note that when this routine is called, some of the cells on the page
** might not actually be stored in MemPage.aData[]. This can happen
@@ -66015,7 +66015,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
** inserted into or removed from the parent page (pParent). Doing so
** may cause the parent page to become overfull or underfull. If this
** happens, it is the responsibility of the caller to invoke the correct
-** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
+** balancing routine to fix this problem (see the balance() routine).
**
** If this routine fails for any reason, it might leave the database
** in a corrupted state. So if this routine fails, the database should
@@ -66030,7 +66030,7 @@ static void copyNodeContent(MemPage *pFrom, MemPage *pTo, int *pRC){
** of the page-size, the aOvflSpace[] buffer is guaranteed to be large
** enough for all overflow cells.
**
-** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
+** If aOvflSpace is set to a null pointer, this function returns
** SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
static int balance_nonroot(
@@ -66081,7 +66081,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
#endif
/* At this point pParent may have at most one overflow cell. And if
- ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
+ ** this overflow cell is present, it must be the cell with
** index iParentIdx. This scenario comes about when this function
** is called (indirectly) from sqlite3BtreeDelete().
*/
@@ -66092,11 +66092,11 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
- /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
- ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
- ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
+ /* Find the sibling pages to balance. Also locate the cells in pParent
+ ** that divide the siblings. An attempt is made to find NN siblings on
+ ** either side of pPage. More siblings are taken from one side, however,
** if there are fewer than NN siblings on the other side. If pParent
- ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
+ ** has NB or fewer children then all children of pParent are taken.
**
** This loop also drops the divider cells from the parent page. This
** way, the remainder of the function does not have to deal with any
@@ -66108,7 +66108,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
nxDiv = 0;
}else{
assert( bBulk==0 || bBulk==1 );
- if( iParentIdx==0 ){
+ if( iParentIdx==0 ){
nxDiv = 0;
}else if( iParentIdx==i ){
nxDiv = i-2+bBulk;
@@ -66148,7 +66148,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
** This is safe because dropping a cell only overwrites the first
** four bytes of it, and this function does not need the first
** four bytes of the divider cell. So the pointer is safe to use
- ** later on.
+ ** later on.
**
** But not if we are in secure-delete mode. In secure-delete mode,
** the dropCell() routine will overwrite the entire cell with zeroes.
@@ -66187,7 +66187,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-28375-38319 SQLite will never request a scratch buffer
** that is more than 6 times the database page size. */
assert( szScratch<=6*(int)pBt->pageSize );
- b.apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch );
+ b.apCell = sqlite3ScratchMalloc( szScratch );
if( b.apCell==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
goto balance_cleanup;
@@ -66309,7 +66309,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
** Figure out the number of pages needed to hold all b.nCell cells.
** Store this number in "k". Also compute szNew[] which is the total
** size of all cells on the i-th page and cntNew[] which is the index
- ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
+ ** in b.apCell[] of the cell that divides page i from page i+1.
** cntNew[k] should equal b.nCell.
**
** Values computed by this block:
@@ -66319,7 +66319,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
** cntNew[i]: Index in b.apCell[] and b.szCell[] for the first cell to
** the right of the i-th sibling page.
** usableSpace: Number of bytes of space available on each sibling.
- **
+ **
*/
usableSpace = pBt->usableSize - 12 + leafCorrection;
for(i=0; ipgno);
/* If the sibling pages are not leaves, ensure that the right-child pointer
- ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
+ ** of the right-most new sibling page is set to the value that was
** originally in the same field of the right-most old sibling page. */
if( (pageFlags & PTF_LEAF)==0 && nOld!=nNew ){
MemPage *pOld = (nNew>nOld ? apNew : apOld)[nOld-1];
memcpy(&apNew[nNew-1]->aData[8], &pOld->aData[8], 4);
}
- /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
+ /* Make any required updates to pointer map entries associated with
** cells stored on sibling pages following the balance operation. Pointer
** map entries associated with divider cells are set by the insertCell()
** routine. The associated pointer map entries are:
@@ -66541,9 +66541,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
** b) if the sibling pages are not leaves, the child page associated
** with the cell.
**
- ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
- ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
- ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
+ ** If the sibling pages are not leaves, then the pointer map entry
+ ** associated with the right-child of each sibling may also need to be
+ ** updated. This happens below, after the sibling pages have been
** populated, not here.
*/
if( ISAUTOVACUUM ){
@@ -66567,7 +66567,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
}
/* Cell pCell is destined for new sibling page pNew. Originally, it
- ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
+ ** was either part of sibling page iOld (possibly an overflow cell),
** or else the divider cell to the left of sibling page iOld. So,
** if sibling page iOld had the same page number as pNew, and if
** pCell really was a part of sibling page iOld (not a divider or
@@ -66603,9 +66603,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
if( !pNew->leaf ){
memcpy(&pNew->aData[8], pCell, 4);
}else if( leafData ){
- /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
- ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
- ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
+ /* If the tree is a leaf-data tree, and the siblings are leaves,
+ ** then there is no divider cell in b.apCell[]. Instead, the divider
+ ** cell consists of the integer key for the right-most cell of
** the sibling-page assembled above only.
*/
CellInfo info;
@@ -66618,9 +66618,9 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
pCell -= 4;
/* Obscure case for non-leaf-data trees: If the cell at pCell was
** previously stored on a leaf node, and its reported size was 4
- ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
+ ** bytes, then it may actually be smaller than this
** (see btreeParseCellPtr(), 4 bytes is the minimum size of
- ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
+ ** any cell). But it is important to pass the correct size to
** insertCell(), so reparse the cell now.
**
** This can only happen for b-trees used to evaluate "IN (SELECT ...)"
@@ -66712,8 +66712,8 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
** b-tree structure by one. This is described as the "balance-shallower"
** sub-algorithm in some documentation.
**
- ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
- ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
+ ** If this is an auto-vacuum database, the call to copyNodeContent()
+ ** sets all pointer-map entries corresponding to database image pages
** for which the pointer is stored within the content being copied.
**
** It is critical that the child page be defragmented before being
@@ -66724,7 +66724,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
assert( nNew==1 || CORRUPT_DB );
rc = defragmentPage(apNew[0]);
testcase( rc!=SQLITE_OK );
- assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
+ assert( apNew[0]->nFree ==
(get2byte(&apNew[0]->aData[5])-apNew[0]->cellOffset-apNew[0]->nCell*2)
|| rc!=SQLITE_OK
);
@@ -66753,7 +66753,7 @@ static int balance_nonroot(
#if 0
if( ISAUTOVACUUM && rc==SQLITE_OK && apNew[0]->isInit ){
/* The ptrmapCheckPages() contains assert() statements that verify that
- ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
+ ** all pointer map pages are set correctly. This is helpful while
** debugging. This is usually disabled because a corrupt database may
** cause an assert() statement to fail. */
ptrmapCheckPages(apNew, nNew);
@@ -66783,15 +66783,15 @@ balance_cleanup:
**
** A new child page is allocated and the contents of the current root
** page, including overflow cells, are copied into the child. The root
-** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
+** page is then overwritten to make it an empty page with the right-child
** pointer pointing to the new page.
**
-** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
+** Before returning, all pointer-map entries corresponding to pages
** that the new child-page now contains pointers to are updated. The
** entry corresponding to the new right-child pointer of the root
** page is also updated.
**
-** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
+** If successful, *ppChild is set to contain a reference to the child
** page and SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case the caller is required
** to call releasePage() on *ppChild exactly once. If an error occurs,
** an error code is returned and *ppChild is set to 0.
@@ -66805,7 +66805,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){
assert( pRoot->nOverflow>0 );
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pBt->mutex) );
- /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
+ /* Make pRoot, the root page of the b-tree, writable. Allocate a new
** page that will become the new right-child of pPage. Copy the contents
** of the node stored on pRoot into the new child page.
*/
@@ -66846,7 +66846,7 @@ static int balance_deeper(MemPage *pRoot, MemPage **ppChild){
/*
** The page that pCur currently points to has just been modified in
** some way. This function figures out if this modification means the
-** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
+** tree needs to be balanced, and if so calls the appropriate balancing
** routine. Balancing routines are:
**
** balance_quick()
@@ -66872,7 +66872,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
** balance_deeper() function to create a new child for the root-page
** and copy the current contents of the root-page to it. The
** next iteration of the do-loop will balance the child page.
- */
+ */
assert( balance_deeper_called==0 );
VVA_ONLY( balance_deeper_called++ );
rc = balance_deeper(pPage, &pCur->apPage[1]);
@@ -66903,17 +66903,17 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
/* Call balance_quick() to create a new sibling of pPage on which
** to store the overflow cell. balance_quick() inserts a new cell
** into pParent, which may cause pParent overflow. If this
- ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
+ ** happens, the next iteration of the do-loop will balance pParent
** use either balance_nonroot() or balance_deeper(). Until this
** happens, the overflow cell is stored in the aBalanceQuickSpace[]
- ** buffer.
+ ** buffer.
**
** The purpose of the following assert() is to check that only a
** single call to balance_quick() is made for each call to this
** function. If this were not verified, a subtle bug involving reuse
** of the aBalanceQuickSpace[] might sneak in.
*/
- assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
+ assert( balance_quick_called==0 );
VVA_ONLY( balance_quick_called++ );
rc = balance_quick(pParent, pPage, aBalanceQuickSpace);
}else
@@ -66924,15 +66924,15 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
** modifying the contents of pParent, which may cause pParent to
** become overfull or underfull. The next iteration of the do-loop
** will balance the parent page to correct this.
- **
+ **
** If the parent page becomes overfull, the overflow cell or cells
- ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
+ ** are stored in the pSpace buffer allocated immediately below.
** A subsequent iteration of the do-loop will deal with this by
** calling balance_nonroot() (balance_deeper() may be called first,
** but it doesn't deal with overflow cells - just moves them to a
- ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
+ ** different page). Once this subsequent call to balance_nonroot()
** has completed, it is safe to release the pSpace buffer used by
- ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
+ ** the previous call, as the overflow cell data will have been
** copied either into the body of a database page or into the new
** pSpace buffer passed to the latter call to balance_nonroot().
*/
@@ -66940,9 +66940,9 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
rc = balance_nonroot(pParent, iIdx, pSpace, iPage==1,
pCur->hints&BTREE_BULKLOAD);
if( pFree ){
- /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
+ /* If pFree is not NULL, it points to the pSpace buffer used
** by a previous call to balance_nonroot(). Its contents are
- ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
+ ** now stored either on real database pages or within the
** new pSpace buffer, so it may be safely freed here. */
sqlite3PageFree(pFree);
}
@@ -66982,7 +66982,7 @@ static int balance(BtCursor *pCur){
** hold the content of the row.
**
** For an index btree (used for indexes and WITHOUT ROWID tables), the
-** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey. The
+** key is an arbitrary byte sequence stored in pX.pKey,nKey. The
** pX.pData,nData,nZero fields must be zero.
**
** If the seekResult parameter is non-zero, then a successful call to
@@ -67040,8 +67040,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
**
** In some cases, the call to btreeMoveto() below is a no-op. For
** example, when inserting data into a table with auto-generated integer
- ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
- ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
+ ** keys, the VDBE layer invokes sqlite3BtreeLast() to figure out the
+ ** integer key to use. It then calls this function to actually insert the
** data into the intkey B-Tree. In this case btreeMoveto() recognizes
** that the cursor is already where it needs to be and returns without
** doing any work. To avoid thwarting these optimizations, it is important
@@ -67054,13 +67054,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
if( pCur->pKeyInfo==0 ){
assert( pX->pKey==0 );
- /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
+ /* If this is an insert into a table b-tree, invalidate any incrblob
** cursors open on the row being replaced */
invalidateIncrblobCursors(p, pX->nKey, 0);
- /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
+ /* If BTREE_SAVEPOSITION is set, the cursor must already be pointing
** to a row with the same key as the new entry being inserted. */
- assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 ||
+ assert( (flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION)==0 ||
((pCur->curFlags&BTCF_ValidNKey)!=0 && pX->nKey==pCur->info.nKey) );
/* If the cursor is currently on the last row and we are appending a
@@ -67144,7 +67144,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
assert( pPage->nOverflow==0 || rc==SQLITE_OK );
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || pPage->nCell>0 || pPage->nOverflow>0 );
- /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
+ /* If no error has occurred and pPage has an overflow cell, call balance()
** to redistribute the cells within the tree. Since balance() may move
** the cursor, zero the BtCursor.info.nSize and BTCF_ValidNKey
** variables.
@@ -67171,7 +67171,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeInsert(
rc = balance(pCur);
/* Must make sure nOverflow is reset to zero even if the balance()
- ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
+ ** fails. Internal data structure corruption will result otherwise.
** Also, set the cursor state to invalid. This stops saveCursorPosition()
** from trying to save the current position of the cursor. */
pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage]->nOverflow = 0;
@@ -67198,7 +67198,7 @@ end_insert:
}
/*
-** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
+** Delete the entry that the cursor is pointing to.
**
** If the BTREE_SAVEPOSITION bit of the flags parameter is zero, then
** the cursor is left pointing at an arbitrary location after the delete.
@@ -67216,12 +67216,12 @@ end_insert:
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
Btree *p = pCur->pBtree;
- BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
+ BtShared *pBt = p->pBt;
int rc; /* Return code */
MemPage *pPage; /* Page to delete cell from */
unsigned char *pCell; /* Pointer to cell to delete */
int iCellIdx; /* Index of cell to delete */
- int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
+ int iCellDepth; /* Depth of node containing pCell */
CellInfo info; /* Size of the cell being deleted */
int bSkipnext = 0; /* Leaf cursor in SKIPNEXT state */
u8 bPreserve = flags & BTREE_SAVEPOSITION; /* Keep cursor valid */
@@ -67244,14 +67244,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
/* If the bPreserve flag is set to true, then the cursor position must
** be preserved following this delete operation. If the current delete
** will cause a b-tree rebalance, then this is done by saving the cursor
- ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
- ** returning.
+ ** key and leaving the cursor in CURSOR_REQUIRESEEK state before
+ ** returning.
**
** Or, if the current delete will not cause a rebalance, then the cursor
** will be left in CURSOR_SKIPNEXT state pointing to the entry immediately
** before or after the deleted entry. In this case set bSkipnext to true. */
if( bPreserve ){
- if( !pPage->leaf
+ if( !pPage->leaf
|| (pPage->nFree+cellSizePtr(pPage,pCell)+2)>(int)(pBt->usableSize*2/3)
){
/* A b-tree rebalance will be required after deleting this entry.
@@ -67336,7 +67336,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDelete(BtCursor *pCur, u8 flags){
** on the leaf node first. If the balance proceeds far enough up the
** tree that we can be sure that any problem in the internal node has
** been corrected, so be it. Otherwise, after balancing the leaf node,
- ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
+ ** walk the cursor up the tree to the internal node and balance it as
** well. */
rc = balance(pCur);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCur->iPage>iCellDepth ){
@@ -67485,7 +67485,7 @@ static int btreeCreateTable(Btree *p, int *piTable, int createTabFlags){
}
}else{
pRoot = pPageMove;
- }
+ }
/* Update the pointer-map and meta-data with the new root-page number. */
ptrmapPut(pBt, pgnoRoot, PTRMAP_ROOTPAGE, 0, &rc);
@@ -67638,12 +67638,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeClearTableOfCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
** cursors on the table.
**
** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled and the page at iTable is not the last
-** root page in the database file, then the last root page
+** root page in the database file, then the last root page
** in the database file is moved into the slot formerly occupied by
** iTable and that last slot formerly occupied by the last root page
** is added to the freelist instead of iTable. In this say, all
** root pages are kept at the beginning of the database file, which
-** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
+** is necessary for AUTOVACUUM to work right. *piMoved is set to the
** page number that used to be the last root page in the file before
** the move. If no page gets moved, *piMoved is set to 0.
** The last root page is recorded in meta[3] and the value of
@@ -67678,7 +67678,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
if( iTable==maxRootPgno ){
/* If the table being dropped is the table with the largest root-page
- ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
+ ** number in the database, put the root page on the free list.
*/
freePage(pPage, &rc);
releasePage(pPage);
@@ -67687,7 +67687,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
}
}else{
/* The table being dropped does not have the largest root-page
- ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
+ ** number in the database. So move the page that does into the
** gap left by the deleted root-page.
*/
MemPage *pMove;
@@ -67729,7 +67729,7 @@ static int btreeDropTable(Btree *p, Pgno iTable, int *piMoved){
releasePage(pPage);
}
#endif
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
int rc;
@@ -67748,7 +67748,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeDropTable(Btree *p, int iTable, int *piMoved){
** is the number of free pages currently in the database. Meta[1]
** through meta[15] are available for use by higher layers. Meta[0]
** is read-only, the others are read/write.
-**
+**
** The schema layer numbers meta values differently. At the schema
** layer (and the SetCookie and ReadCookie opcodes) the number of
** free pages is not visible. So Cookie[0] is the same as Meta[1].
@@ -67819,7 +67819,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(Btree *p, int idx, u32 iMeta){
** The first argument, pCur, is a cursor opened on some b-tree. Count the
** number of entries in the b-tree and write the result to *pnEntry.
**
-** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
+** SQLITE_OK is returned if the operation is successfully executed.
** Otherwise, if an error is encountered (i.e. an IO error or database
** corruption) an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
@@ -67834,13 +67834,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
rc = moveToRoot(pCur);
/* Unless an error occurs, the following loop runs one iteration for each
- ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
+ ** page in the B-Tree structure (not including overflow pages).
*/
while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int iIdx; /* Index of child node in parent */
MemPage *pPage; /* Current page of the b-tree */
- /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
+ /* If this is a leaf page or the tree is not an int-key tree, then
** this page contains countable entries. Increment the entry counter
** accordingly.
*/
@@ -67849,7 +67849,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
nEntry += pPage->nCell;
}
- /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
+ /* pPage is a leaf node. This loop navigates the cursor so that it
** points to the first interior cell that it points to the parent of
** the next page in the tree that has not yet been visited. The
** pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage] value is set to the index of the parent cell
@@ -67873,7 +67873,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCount(BtCursor *pCur, i64 *pnEntry){
pPage = pCur->apPage[pCur->iPage];
}
- /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
+ /* Descend to the child node of the cell that the cursor currently
** points at. This is the right-child if (iIdx==pPage->nCell).
*/
iIdx = pCur->aiIdx[pCur->iPage];
@@ -67969,7 +67969,7 @@ static int checkRef(IntegrityCk *pCheck, Pgno iPage){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
/*
-** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
+** Check that the entry in the pointer-map for page iChild maps to
** page iParent, pointer type ptrType. If not, append an error message
** to pCheck.
*/
@@ -67992,7 +67992,7 @@ static void checkPtrmap(
if( ePtrmapType!=eType || iPtrmapParent!=iParent ){
checkAppendMsg(pCheck,
- "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)",
+ "Bad ptr map entry key=%d expected=(%d,%d) got=(%d,%d)",
iChild, eType, iParent, ePtrmapType, iPtrmapParent);
}
}
@@ -68090,7 +68090,7 @@ static void checkList(
** property.
**
** This heap is used for cell overlap and coverage testing. Each u32
-** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.
+** entry represents the span of a cell or freeblock on a btree page.
** The upper 16 bits are the index of the first byte of a range and the
** lower 16 bits are the index of the last byte of that range.
*/
@@ -68120,7 +68120,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
aHeap[j] = x;
i = j;
}
- return 1;
+ return 1;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
@@ -68128,7 +68128,7 @@ static int btreeHeapPull(u32 *aHeap, u32 *pOut){
** Do various sanity checks on a single page of a tree. Return
** the tree depth. Root pages return 0. Parents of root pages
** return 1, and so forth.
-**
+**
** These checks are done:
**
** 1. Make sure that cells and freeblocks do not overlap
@@ -68320,7 +68320,7 @@ static int checkTreePage(
**
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-20690-50594 The second field of the b-tree page header
** is the offset of the first freeblock, or zero if there are no
- ** freeblocks on the page.
+ ** freeblocks on the page.
*/
i = get2byte(&data[hdr+1]);
while( i>0 ){
@@ -68340,13 +68340,13 @@ static int checkTreePage(
assert( (u32)j<=usableSize-4 ); /* Enforced by btreeInitPage() */
i = j;
}
- /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
+ /* Analyze the min-heap looking for overlap between cells and/or
** freeblocks, and counting the number of untracked bytes in nFrag.
- **
+ **
** Each min-heap entry is of the form: (start_address<<16)|end_address.
** There is an implied first entry the covers the page header, the cell
** pointer index, and the gap between the cell pointer index and the start
- ** of cell content.
+ ** of cell content.
**
** The loop below pulls entries from the min-heap in order and compares
** the start_address against the previous end_address. If there is an
@@ -68485,11 +68485,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(
/* If the database supports auto-vacuum, make sure no tables contain
** references to pointer-map pages.
*/
- if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
+ if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)==0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)!=i || !pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Page %d is never used", i);
}
- if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
+ if( getPageReferenced(&sCheck, i)!=0 &&
(PTRMAP_PAGENO(pBt, i)==i && pBt->autoVacuum) ){
checkAppendMsg(&sCheck, "Pointer map page %d is referenced", i);
}
@@ -68551,7 +68551,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(Btree *p){
/*
** Run a checkpoint on the Btree passed as the first argument.
**
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED if this or any other connection has an open
** transaction on the shared-cache the argument Btree is connected to.
**
** Parameter eMode is one of SQLITE_CHECKPOINT_PASSIVE, FULL or RESTART.
@@ -68590,20 +68590,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeIsInBackup(Btree *p){
/*
** This function returns a pointer to a blob of memory associated with
** a single shared-btree. The memory is used by client code for its own
-** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
+** purposes (for example, to store a high-level schema associated with
** the shared-btree). The btree layer manages reference counting issues.
**
** The first time this is called on a shared-btree, nBytes bytes of memory
-** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
+** are allocated, zeroed, and returned to the caller. For each subsequent
** call the nBytes parameter is ignored and a pointer to the same blob
-** of memory returned.
+** of memory returned.
**
** If the nBytes parameter is 0 and the blob of memory has not yet been
** allocated, a null pointer is returned. If the blob has already been
** allocated, it is returned as normal.
**
-** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
-** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
+** Just before the shared-btree is closed, the function passed as the
+** xFree argument when the memory allocation was made is invoked on the
** blob of allocated memory. The xFree function should not call sqlite3_free()
** on the memory, the btree layer does that.
*/
@@ -68619,8 +68619,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3BtreeSchema(Btree *p, int nBytes, void(*xFree)(void
}
/*
-** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
-** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
+** Return SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE if another user of the same shared
+** btree as the argument handle holds an exclusive lock on the
** sqlite_master table. Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSchemaLocked(Btree *p){
@@ -68661,11 +68661,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeLockTable(Btree *p, int iTab, u8 isWriteLock){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INCRBLOB
/*
-** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
-** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
+** Argument pCsr must be a cursor opened for writing on an
+** INTKEY table currently pointing at a valid table entry.
** This function modifies the data stored as part of that entry.
**
-** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
+** Only the data content may only be modified, it is not possible to
** change the length of the data stored. If this function is called with
** parameters that attempt to write past the end of the existing data,
** no modifications are made and SQLITE_CORRUPT is returned.
@@ -68696,7 +68696,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void
VVA_ONLY(rc =) saveAllCursors(pCsr->pBt, pCsr->pgnoRoot, pCsr);
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
- /* Check some assumptions:
+ /* Check some assumptions:
** (a) the cursor is open for writing,
** (b) there is a read/write transaction open,
** (c) the connection holds a write-lock on the table (if required),
@@ -68715,7 +68715,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreePutData(BtCursor *pCsr, u32 offset, u32 amt, void
return accessPayload(pCsr, offset, amt, (unsigned char *)z, 1);
}
-/*
+/*
** Mark this cursor as an incremental blob cursor.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
@@ -68725,14 +68725,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BtreeIncrblobCursor(BtCursor *pCur){
#endif
/*
-** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
+** Set both the "read version" (single byte at byte offset 18) and
** "write version" (single byte at byte offset 19) fields in the database
** header to iVersion.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSetVersion(Btree *pBtree, int iVersion){
BtShared *pBt = pBtree->pBt;
int rc; /* Return code */
-
+
assert( iVersion==1 || iVersion==2 );
/* If setting the version fields to 1, do not automatically open the
@@ -68790,7 +68790,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeSharable(Btree *p){
/*
** Return the number of connections to the BtShared object accessed by
-** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
+** the Btree handle passed as the only argument. For private caches
** this is always 1. For shared caches it may be 1 or greater.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
@@ -68812,7 +68812,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeConnectionCount(Btree *p){
** May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
**
*************************************************************************
-** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX()
+** This file contains the implementation of the sqlite3_backup_XXX()
** API functions and the related features.
*/
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
@@ -68849,15 +68849,15 @@ struct sqlite3_backup {
** Once it has been created using backup_init(), a single sqlite3_backup
** structure may be accessed via two groups of thread-safe entry points:
**
-** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and
+** * Via the sqlite3_backup_XXX() API function backup_step() and
** backup_finish(). Both these functions obtain the source database
-** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared
+** handle mutex and the mutex associated with the source BtShared
** structure, in that order.
**
** * Via the BackupUpdate() and BackupRestart() functions, which are
** invoked by the pager layer to report various state changes in
** the page cache associated with the source database. The mutex
-** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always
+** associated with the source database BtShared structure will always
** be held when either of these functions are invoked.
**
** The other sqlite3_backup_XXX() API functions, backup_remaining() and
@@ -68878,8 +68878,8 @@ struct sqlite3_backup {
** in connection handle pDb. If such a database cannot be found, return
** a NULL pointer and write an error message to pErrorDb.
**
-** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this
-** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an
+** If the "temp" database is requested, it may need to be opened by this
+** function. If an error occurs while doing so, return 0 and write an
** error message to pErrorDb.
*/
static Btree *findBtree(sqlite3 *pErrorDb, sqlite3 *pDb, const char *zDb){
@@ -68922,7 +68922,7 @@ static int setDestPgsz(sqlite3_backup *p){
/*
** Check that there is no open read-transaction on the b-tree passed as the
** second argument. If there is not, return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, if there
-** is an open read-transaction, return SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error
+** is an open read-transaction, return SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error
** message in database handle db.
*/
static int checkReadTransaction(sqlite3 *db, Btree *p){
@@ -68992,13 +68992,13 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init(
p->iNext = 1;
p->isAttached = 0;
- if( 0==p->pSrc || 0==p->pDest
- || checkReadTransaction(pDestDb, p->pDest)!=SQLITE_OK
+ if( 0==p->pSrc || 0==p->pDest
+ || checkReadTransaction(pDestDb, p->pDest)!=SQLITE_OK
){
/* One (or both) of the named databases did not exist or an OOM
** error was hit. Or there is a transaction open on the destination
- ** database. The error has already been written into the pDestDb
- ** handle. All that is left to do here is free the sqlite3_backup
+ ** database. The error has already been written into the pDestDb
+ ** handle. All that is left to do here is free the sqlite3_backup
** structure. */
sqlite3_free(p);
p = 0;
@@ -69014,7 +69014,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_backup *sqlite3_backup_init(
}
/*
-** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is
+** Argument rc is an SQLite error code. Return true if this error is
** considered fatal if encountered during a backup operation. All errors
** are considered fatal except for SQLITE_BUSY and SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
@@ -69023,8 +69023,8 @@ static int isFatalError(int rc){
}
/*
-** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for
-** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the
+** Parameter zSrcData points to a buffer containing the data for
+** page iSrcPg from the source database. Copy this data into the
** destination database.
*/
static int backupOnePage(
@@ -69055,7 +69055,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
assert( zSrcData );
/* Catch the case where the destination is an in-memory database and the
- ** page sizes of the source and destination differ.
+ ** page sizes of the source and destination differ.
*/
if( nSrcPgsz!=nDestPgsz && sqlite3PagerIsMemdb(pDestPager) ){
rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
@@ -69081,7 +69081,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
}
#endif
- /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source
+ /* This loop runs once for each destination page spanned by the source
** page. For each iteration, variable iOff is set to the byte offset
** of the destination page.
*/
@@ -69100,7 +69100,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
** Then clear the Btree layer MemPage.isInit flag. Both this module
** and the pager code use this trick (clearing the first byte
** of the page 'extra' space to invalidate the Btree layers
- ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked
+ ** cached parse of the page). MemPage.isInit is marked
** "MUST BE FIRST" for this purpose.
*/
memcpy(zOut, zIn, nCopy);
@@ -69120,7 +69120,7 @@ static int backupOnePage(
** exactly iSize bytes. If pFile is not larger than iSize bytes, then
** this function is a no-op.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error
+** Return SQLITE_OK if everything is successful, or an SQLite error
** code if an error occurs.
*/
static int backupTruncateFile(sqlite3_file *pFile, i64 iSize){
@@ -69201,7 +69201,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
/* Lock the destination database, if it is not locked already. */
if( SQLITE_OK==rc && p->bDestLocked==0
- && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2))
+ && SQLITE_OK==(rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(p->pDest, 2))
){
p->bDestLocked = 1;
sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(p->pDest, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, &p->iDestSchema);
@@ -69215,7 +69215,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
if( SQLITE_OK==rc && destMode==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL && pgszSrc!=pgszDest ){
rc = SQLITE_READONLY;
}
-
+
/* Now that there is a read-lock on the source database, query the
** source pager for the number of pages in the database.
*/
@@ -69242,7 +69242,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
attachBackupObject(p);
}
}
-
+
/* Update the schema version field in the destination database. This
** is to make sure that the schema-version really does change in
** the case where the source and destination databases have the
@@ -69268,12 +69268,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
int nDestTruncate;
/* Set nDestTruncate to the final number of pages in the destination
** database. The complication here is that the destination page
- ** size may be different to the source page size.
+ ** size may be different to the source page size.
**
- ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size,
+ ** If the source page size is smaller than the destination page size,
** round up. In this case the call to sqlite3OsTruncate() below will
** fix the size of the file. However it is important to call
- ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the
+ ** sqlite3PagerTruncateImage() here so that any pages in the
** destination file that lie beyond the nDestTruncate page mark are
** journalled by PagerCommitPhaseOne() before they are destroyed
** by the file truncation.
@@ -69297,7 +69297,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
**
** * The destination may need to be truncated, and
**
- ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the
+ ** * Data stored on the pages immediately following the
** pending-byte page in the source database may need to be
** copied into the destination database.
*/
@@ -69309,7 +69309,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
i64 iEnd;
assert( pFile );
- assert( nDestTruncate==0
+ assert( nDestTruncate==0
|| (i64)nDestTruncate*(i64)pgszDest >= iSize || (
nDestTruncate==(int)(PENDING_BYTE_PAGE(p->pDest->pBt)-1)
&& iSize>=PENDING_BYTE && iSize<=PENDING_BYTE+pgszDest
@@ -69319,7 +69319,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
** database has been stored in the journal for pDestPager and the
** journal synced to disk. So at this point we may safely modify
** the database file in any way, knowing that if a power failure
- ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the
+ ** occurs, the original database will be reconstructed from the
** journal file. */
sqlite3PagerPagecount(pDestPager, &nDstPage);
for(iPg=nDestTruncate; rc==SQLITE_OK && iPg<=(Pgno)nDstPage; iPg++){
@@ -69339,8 +69339,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
/* Write the extra pages and truncate the database file as required */
iEnd = MIN(PENDING_BYTE + pgszDest, iSize);
for(
- iOff=PENDING_BYTE+pgszSrc;
- rc==SQLITE_OK && iOffpDest, 0))
@@ -69373,7 +69373,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
}
}
}
-
+
/* If bCloseTrans is true, then this function opened a read transaction
** on the source database. Close the read transaction here. There is
** no need to check the return values of the btree methods here, as
@@ -69385,7 +69385,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_step(sqlite3_backup *p, int nPage){
TESTONLY( rc2 |= ) sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(p->pSrc, 0);
assert( rc2==SQLITE_OK );
}
-
+
if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
@@ -69465,7 +69465,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_remaining(sqlite3_backup *p){
}
/*
-** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most
+** Return the total number of pages in the source database as of the most
** recent call to sqlite3_backup_step().
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){
@@ -69480,7 +69480,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_backup_pagecount(sqlite3_backup *p){
/*
** This function is called after the contents of page iPage of the
-** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been
+** source database have been modified. If page iPage has already been
** copied into the destination database, then the data written to the
** destination is now invalidated. The destination copy of iPage needs
** to be updated with the new data before the backup operation is
@@ -69523,7 +69523,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupUpdate(sqlite3_backup *pBackup, Pgno iPage, con
** Restart the backup process. This is called when the pager layer
** detects that the database has been modified by an external database
** connection. In this case there is no way of knowing which of the
-** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still
+** pages that have been copied into the destination database are still
** valid and which are not, so the entire process needs to be restarted.
**
** It is assumed that the mutex associated with the BtShared object
@@ -69543,8 +69543,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BackupRestart(sqlite3_backup *pBackup){
** Copy the complete content of pBtFrom into pBtTo. A transaction
** must be active for both files.
**
-** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything
-** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the
+** The size of file pTo may be reduced by this operation. If anything
+** goes wrong, the transaction on pTo is rolled back. If successful, the
** transaction is committed before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){
@@ -69580,9 +69580,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3BtreeCopyFile(Btree *pTo, Btree *pFrom){
/* 0x7FFFFFFF is the hard limit for the number of pages in a database
** file. By passing this as the number of pages to copy to
- ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes
+ ** sqlite3_backup_step(), we can guarantee that the copy finishes
** within a single call (unless an error occurs). The assert() statement
- ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE
+ ** checks this assumption - (p->rc) should be set to either SQLITE_DONE
** or an error code. */
sqlite3_backup_step(&b, 0x7FFFFFFF);
assert( b.rc!=SQLITE_OK );
@@ -69632,7 +69632,7 @@ copy_finished:
** this: assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(pMem) );
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){
- /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0.
+ /* If MEM_Dyn is set then Mem.xDel!=0.
** Mem.xDel is might not be initialized if MEM_Dyn is clear.
*/
assert( (p->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 || p->xDel!=0 );
@@ -69659,7 +69659,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(Mem *p){
** (4) A static string or blob
*/
if( (p->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob)) && p->n>0 ){
- assert(
+ assert(
((p->szMalloc>0 && p->z==p->zMalloc)? 1 : 0) +
((p->flags&MEM_Dyn)!=0 ? 1 : 0) +
((p->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 ? 1 : 0) +
@@ -69711,7 +69711,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(Mem *pMem, int desiredEnc){
}
/*
-** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least
+** Make sure pMem->z points to a writable allocation of at least
** min(n,32) bytes.
**
** If the bPreserve argument is true, then copy of the content of
@@ -69906,7 +69906,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(Mem *pMem, u8 enc, u8 bForce){
/* For a Real or Integer, use sqlite3_snprintf() to produce the UTF-8
** string representation of the value. Then, if the required encoding
** is UTF-16le or UTF-16be do a translation.
- **
+ **
** FIX ME: It would be better if sqlite3_snprintf() could do UTF-16.
*/
if( fg & MEM_Int ){
@@ -70262,7 +70262,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(Mem *pMem){
}
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueSetNull(sqlite3_value *p){
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p);
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull((Mem*)p);
}
/*
@@ -70363,7 +70363,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(Mem *p){
}
return n>p->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH];
}
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -70454,8 +70454,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMemMove(Mem *pTo, Mem *pFrom){
** Change the value of a Mem to be a string or a BLOB.
**
** The memory management strategy depends on the value of the xDel
-** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the
-** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the
+** parameter. If the value passed is SQLITE_TRANSIENT, then the
+** string is copied into a (possibly existing) buffer managed by the
** Mem structure. Otherwise, any existing buffer is freed and the
** pointer copied.
**
@@ -70598,7 +70598,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(
assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
assert( !VdbeMemDynamic(pMem) );
- /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert()
+ /* Note: the calls to BtreeKeyFetch() and DataFetch() below assert()
** that both the BtShared and database handle mutexes are held. */
assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
zData = (char *)sqlite3BtreePayloadFetch(pCur, &available);
@@ -70689,7 +70689,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3_value *sqlite3ValueNew(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to
+** Context object passed by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() through to
** valueNew(). See comments above valueNew() for details.
*/
struct ValueNewStat4Ctx {
@@ -70704,9 +70704,9 @@ struct ValueNewStat4Ctx {
** the second argument to this function is NULL, the object is allocated
** by calling sqlite3ValueNew().
**
-** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is
+** Otherwise, if the second argument is non-zero, then this function is
** being called indirectly by sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue(). If it has not
-** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that
+** already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord structure that
** that function will return to its caller here. Then return a pointer to
** an sqlite3_value within the UnpackedRecord.a[] array.
*/
@@ -70720,7 +70720,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
int nByte; /* Bytes of space to allocate */
int i; /* Counter variable */
int nCol = pIdx->nColumn; /* Number of index columns including rowid */
-
+
nByte = sizeof(Mem) * nCol + ROUND8(sizeof(UnpackedRecord));
pRec = (UnpackedRecord*)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, nByte);
if( pRec ){
@@ -70741,7 +70741,7 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
if( pRec==0 ) return 0;
p->ppRec[0] = pRec;
}
-
+
pRec->nField = p->iVal+1;
return &pRec->aMem[p->iVal];
}
@@ -70760,11 +70760,11 @@ static sqlite3_value *valueNew(sqlite3 *db, struct ValueNewStat4Ctx *p){
** * the SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL function flag is not set,
**
** then this routine attempts to invoke the SQL function. Assuming no
-** error occurs, output parameter (*ppVal) is set to point to a value
+** error occurs, output parameter (*ppVal) is set to point to a value
** object containing the result before returning SQLITE_OK.
**
** Affinity aff is applied to the result of the function before returning.
-** If the result is a text value, the sqlite3_value object uses encoding
+** If the result is a text value, the sqlite3_value object uses encoding
** enc.
**
** If the conditions above are not met, this function returns SQLITE_OK
@@ -70795,7 +70795,7 @@ static int valueFromFunction(
if( pList ) nVal = pList->nExpr;
pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(db, p->u.zToken, nVal, enc, 0);
assert( pFunc );
- if( (pFunc->funcFlags & (SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT|SQLITE_FUNC_SLOCHNG))==0
+ if( (pFunc->funcFlags & (SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT|SQLITE_FUNC_SLOCHNG))==0
|| (pFunc->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL)
){
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -70934,7 +70934,7 @@ static int valueFromExpr(
}
}else if( op==TK_UMINUS ) {
/* This branch happens for multiple negative signs. Ex: -(-5) */
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ValueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal)
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ValueFromExpr(db,pExpr->pLeft,enc,affinity,&pVal)
&& pVal!=0
){
sqlite3VdbeMemNumerify(pVal);
@@ -71012,7 +71012,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueFromExpr(
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
/*
** The implementation of the sqlite_record() function. This function accepts
-** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database
+** a single argument of any type. The return value is a formatted database
** record (a blob) containing the argument value.
**
** This is used to convert the value stored in the 'sample' column of the
@@ -71122,8 +71122,8 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr(
}
/*
-** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord
-** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored
+** This function is used to allocate and populate UnpackedRecord
+** structures intended to be compared against sample index keys stored
** in the sqlite_stat4 table.
**
** A single call to this function populates zero or more fields of the
@@ -71134,14 +71134,14 @@ static int stat4ValueFromExpr(
**
** * The expression is a bound variable, and this is a reprepare, or
**
-** * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value
+** * The sqlite3ValueFromExpr() function is able to extract a value
** from the expression (i.e. the expression is a literal value).
**
** Or, if pExpr is a TK_VECTOR, one field is populated for each of the
** vector components that match either of the two latter criteria listed
** above.
**
-** Before any value is appended to the record, the affinity of the
+** Before any value is appended to the record, the affinity of the
** corresponding column within index pIdx is applied to it. Before
** this function returns, output parameter *pnExtract is set to the
** number of values appended to the record.
@@ -71192,9 +71192,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue(
/*
** Attempt to extract a value from expression pExpr using the methods
-** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above.
+** as described for sqlite3Stat4ProbeSetValue() above.
**
-** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return
+** If successful, set *ppVal to point to a new value object and return
** SQLITE_OK. If no value can be extracted, but no other error occurs
** (e.g. OOM), return SQLITE_OK and set *ppVal to NULL. Or, if an error
** does occur, return an SQLite error code. The final value of *ppVal
@@ -71214,7 +71214,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4ValueFromExpr(
** the column value into *ppVal. If *ppVal is initially NULL then a new
** sqlite3_value object is allocated.
**
-** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for
+** If *ppVal is initially NULL then the caller is responsible for
** ensuring that the value written into *ppVal is eventually freed.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Stat4Column(
@@ -71338,7 +71338,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ValueBytes(sqlite3_value *pVal, u8 enc){
**
*************************************************************************
** This file contains code used for creating, destroying, and populating
-** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
+** a VDBE (or an "sqlite3_stmt" as it is known to the outside world.)
*/
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/* #include "vdbeInt.h" */
@@ -71416,13 +71416,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSwap(Vdbe *pA, Vdbe *pB){
}
/*
-** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
+** Resize the Vdbe.aOp array so that it is at least nOp elements larger
** than its current size. nOp is guaranteed to be less than or equal
** to 1024/sizeof(Op).
**
** If an out-of-memory error occurs while resizing the array, return
-** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain
-** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
+** SQLITE_NOMEM. In this case Vdbe.aOp and Parse.nOpAlloc remain
+** unchanged (this is so that any opcodes already allocated can be
** correctly deallocated along with the rest of the Vdbe).
*/
static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
@@ -71430,7 +71430,7 @@ static int growOpArray(Vdbe *v, int nOp){
Parse *p = v->pParse;
/* The SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS compile-time option is designed to force
- ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
+ ** more frequent reallocs and hence provide more opportunities for
** simulated OOM faults. SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS is generally used
** during testing only. With SQLITE_TEST_REALLOC_STRESS grow the op array
** by the minimum* amount required until the size reaches 512. Normal
@@ -71683,7 +71683,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(Vdbe *v){
int i = p->nLabel++;
assert( v->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_INIT );
if( (i & (i-1))==0 ){
- p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel,
+ p->aLabel = sqlite3DbReallocOrFree(p->db, p->aLabel,
(i*2+1)*sizeof(p->aLabel[0]));
}
if( p->aLabel ){
@@ -71726,19 +71726,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeReusable(Vdbe *p){
/*
** The following type and function are used to iterate through all opcodes
-** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
+** in a Vdbe main program and each of the sub-programs (triggers) it may
** invoke directly or indirectly. It should be used as follows:
**
** Op *pOp;
** VdbeOpIter sIter;
**
** memset(&sIter, 0, sizeof(sIter));
-** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
+** sIter.v = v; // v is of type Vdbe*
** while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter)) ){
** // Do something with pOp
** }
** sqlite3DbFree(v->db, sIter.apSub);
-**
+**
*/
typedef struct VdbeOpIter VdbeOpIter;
struct VdbeOpIter {
@@ -71771,7 +71771,7 @@ static Op *opIterNext(VdbeOpIter *p){
p->iSub++;
p->iAddr = 0;
}
-
+
if( pRet->p4type==P4_SUBPROGRAM ){
int nByte = (p->nSub+1)*sizeof(SubProgram*);
int j;
@@ -71825,8 +71825,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(Vdbe *v, int mayAbort){
while( (pOp = opIterNext(&sIter))!=0 ){
int opcode = pOp->opcode;
- if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
- || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
+ if( opcode==OP_Destroy || opcode==OP_VUpdate || opcode==OP_VRename
+ || ((opcode==OP_Halt || opcode==OP_HaltIfNull)
&& ((pOp->p1&0xff)==SQLITE_CONSTRAINT && pOp->p2==OE_Abort))
){
hasAbort = 1;
@@ -71995,12 +71995,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(Vdbe *p){
/*
** This function returns a pointer to the array of opcodes associated with
** the Vdbe passed as the first argument. It is the callers responsibility
-** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
+** to arrange for the returned array to be eventually freed using the
** vdbeFreeOpArray() function.
**
** Before returning, *pnOp is set to the number of entries in the returned
-** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
-** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
+** array. Also, *pnMaxArg is set to the larger of its current value and
+** the number of entries in the Vdbe.apArg[] array required to execute the
** returned program.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeTakeOpArray(Vdbe *p, int *pnOp, int *pnMaxArg){
@@ -72074,7 +72074,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE VdbeOp *sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeScanStatus(
Vdbe *p, /* VM to add scanstatus() to */
int addrExplain, /* Address of OP_Explain (or 0) */
- int addrLoop, /* Address of loop counter */
+ int addrLoop, /* Address of loop counter */
int addrVisit, /* Address of rows visited counter */
LogEst nEst, /* Estimated number of output rows */
const char *zName /* Name of table or index being scanned */
@@ -72193,8 +72193,8 @@ static void freeP4(sqlite3 *db, int p4type, void *p4){
/*
** Free the space allocated for aOp and any p4 values allocated for the
-** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
-** nOp entries.
+** opcodes contained within. If aOp is not NULL it is assumed to contain
+** nOp entries.
*/
static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
if( aOp ){
@@ -72203,7 +72203,7 @@ static void vdbeFreeOpArray(sqlite3 *db, Op *aOp, int nOp){
if( pOp->p4type ) freeP4(db, pOp->p4type, pOp->p4.p);
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
sqlite3DbFree(db, pOp->zComment);
-#endif
+#endif
}
}
sqlite3DbFree(db, aOp);
@@ -72256,7 +72256,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeDeletePriorOpcode(Vdbe *p, u8 op){
** the string is made into memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
** A value of n==0 means copy bytes of zP4 up to and including the
** first null byte. If n>0 then copy n+1 bytes of zP4.
-**
+**
** Other values of n (P4_STATIC, P4_COLLSEQ etc.) indicate that zP4 points
** to a string or structure that is guaranteed to exist for the lifetime of
** the Vdbe. In these cases we can just copy the pointer.
@@ -72317,7 +72317,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(Vdbe *p, int addr, const char *zP4, int
}
/*
-** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
+** Change the P4 operand of the most recently coded instruction
** to the value defined by the arguments. This is a high-speed
** version of sqlite3VdbeChangeP4().
**
@@ -72406,7 +72406,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetLineNumber(Vdbe *v, int iLine){
** routine, then a pointer to a dummy VdbeOp will be returned. That opcode
** is readable but not writable, though it is cast to a writable value.
** The return of a dummy opcode allows the call to continue functioning
-** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
+** after an OOM fault without having to check to see if the return from
** this routine is a valid pointer. But because the dummy.opcode is 0,
** dummy will never be written to. This is verified by code inspection and
** by running with Valgrind.
@@ -72748,13 +72748,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(Vdbe *p, int i){
**
** If SQLite is not threadsafe but does support shared-cache mode, then
** sqlite3BtreeEnter() is invoked to set the BtShared.db variables
-** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
+** of all of BtShared structures accessible via the database handle
** associated with the VM.
**
** If SQLite is not threadsafe and does not support shared-cache mode, this
** function is a no-op.
**
-** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
+** The p->btreeMask field is a bitmask of all btrees that the prepared
** statement p will ever use. Let N be the number of bits in p->btreeMask
** corresponding to btrees that use shared cache. Then the runtime of
** this routine is N*N. But as N is rarely more than 1, this should not
@@ -72820,7 +72820,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbePrintOp(FILE *pOut, int pc, Op *pOp){
/* NB: The sqlite3OpcodeName() function is implemented by code created
** by the mkopcodeh.awk and mkopcodec.awk scripts which extract the
** information from the vdbe.c source text */
- fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
+ fprintf(pOut, zFormat1, pc,
sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode), pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3, zP4, pOp->p5,
zCom
);
@@ -72861,15 +72861,15 @@ static void releaseMemArray(Mem *p, int N){
assert( sqlite3VdbeCheckMemInvariants(p) );
/* This block is really an inlined version of sqlite3VdbeMemRelease()
- ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
+ ** that takes advantage of the fact that the memory cell value is
** being set to NULL after releasing any dynamic resources.
**
- ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
- ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
- ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
+ ** The justification for duplicating code is that according to
+ ** callgrind, this causes a certain test case to hit the CPU 4.7
+ ** percent less (x86 linux, gcc version 4.1.2, -O6) than if
** sqlite3MemRelease() were called from here. With -O2, this jumps
- ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
- ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
+ ** to 6.6 percent. The test case is inserting 1000 rows into a table
+ ** with no indexes using a single prepared INSERT statement, bind()
** and reset(). Inserts are grouped into a transaction.
*/
testcase( p->flags & MEM_Agg );
@@ -73007,7 +73007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList(
pMem->flags = MEM_Int;
pMem->u.i = i; /* Program counter */
pMem++;
-
+
pMem->flags = MEM_Static|MEM_Str|MEM_Term;
pMem->z = (char*)sqlite3OpcodeName(pOp->opcode); /* Opcode */
assert( pMem->z!=0 );
@@ -73073,7 +73073,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeList(
sqlite3_snprintf(3, pMem->z, "%.2x", pOp->p5); /* P5 */
pMem->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
pMem++;
-
+
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_EXPLAIN_COMMENTS
if( sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize(pMem, 500) ){
assert( p->db->mallocFailed );
@@ -73232,11 +73232,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRewind(Vdbe *p){
** creating the virtual machine. This involves things such
** as allocating registers and initializing the program counter.
** After the VDBE has be prepped, it can be executed by one or more
-** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
+** calls to sqlite3VdbeExec().
**
** This function may be called exactly once on each virtual machine.
** After this routine is called the VM has been "packaged" and is ready
-** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to
+** to run. After this routine is called, further calls to
** sqlite3VdbeAddOp() functions are prohibited. This routine disconnects
** the Vdbe from the Parse object that helped generate it so that the
** the Vdbe becomes an independent entity and the Parse object can be
@@ -73268,7 +73268,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
nMem = pParse->nMem;
nCursor = pParse->nTab;
nArg = pParse->nMaxArg;
-
+
/* Each cursor uses a memory cell. The first cursor (cursor 0) can
** use aMem[0] which is not otherwise used by the VDBE program. Allocate
** space at the end of aMem[] for cursors 1 and greater.
@@ -73296,10 +73296,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
p->expired = 0;
/* Memory for registers, parameters, cursor, etc, is allocated in one or two
- ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
+ ** passes. On the first pass, we try to reuse unused memory at the
** end of the opcode array. If we are unable to satisfy all memory
** requirements by reusing the opcode array tail, then the second
- ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.
+ ** pass will fill in the remainder using a fresh memory allocation.
**
** This two-pass approach that reuses as much memory as possible from
** the leftover memory at the end of the opcode array. This can significantly
@@ -73341,7 +73341,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(
}
/*
-** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
+** Close a VDBE cursor and release all the resources that cursor
** happens to hold.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(Vdbe *p, VdbeCursor *pCx){
@@ -73423,7 +73423,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(VdbeFrame *pFrame){
/*
** Close all cursors.
**
-** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
+** Also release any dynamic memory held by the VM in the Vdbe.aMem memory
** cell array. This is necessary as the memory cell array may contain
** pointers to VdbeFrame objects, which may in turn contain pointers to
** open cursors.
@@ -73459,7 +73459,7 @@ static void Cleanup(Vdbe *p){
sqlite3 *db = p->db;
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
+ /* Execute assert() statements to ensure that the Vdbe.apCsr[] and
** Vdbe.aMem[] arrays have already been cleaned up. */
int i;
if( p->apCsr ) for(i=0; inCursor; i++) assert( p->apCsr[i]==0 );
@@ -73540,27 +73540,27 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
int needXcommit = 0;
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
- /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
- ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
+ /* With this option, sqlite3VtabSync() is defined to be simply
+ ** SQLITE_OK so p is not used.
*/
UNUSED_PARAMETER(p);
#endif
/* Before doing anything else, call the xSync() callback for any
** virtual module tables written in this transaction. This has to
- ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is
+ ** be done before determining whether a master journal file is
** required, as an xSync() callback may add an attached database
** to the transaction.
*/
rc = sqlite3VtabSync(db, p);
/* This loop determines (a) if the commit hook should be invoked and
- ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
- ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
+ ** (b) how many database files have open write transactions, not
+ ** including the temp database. (b) is important because if more than
** one database file has an open write transaction, a master journal
** file is required for an atomic commit.
- */
- for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && inDb; i++){
+ */
+ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && inDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) ){
/* Whether or not a database might need a master journal depends upon
@@ -73580,7 +73580,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pBt);
if( db->aDb[i].safety_level!=PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_OFF
&& aMJNeeded[sqlite3PagerGetJournalMode(pPager)]
- ){
+ ){
assert( i!=1 );
nTrans++;
}
@@ -73605,8 +73605,8 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
** master-journal.
**
** If the return value of sqlite3BtreeGetFilename() is a zero length
- ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
- ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
+ ** string, it means the main database is :memory: or a temp file. In
+ ** that case we do not support atomic multi-file commits, so use the
** simple case then too.
*/
if( 0==sqlite3Strlen30(sqlite3BtreeGetFilename(db->aDb[0].pBt))
@@ -73619,7 +73619,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
}
}
- /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
+ /* Do the commit only if all databases successfully complete phase 1.
** If one of the BtreeCommitPhaseOne() calls fails, this indicates an
** IO error while deleting or truncating a journal file. It is unlikely,
** but could happen. In this case abandon processing and return the error.
@@ -73677,7 +73677,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
}while( rc==SQLITE_OK && res );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
/* Open the master journal. */
- rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster,
+ rc = sqlite3OsOpenMalloc(pVfs, zMaster, &pMaster,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE|SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE|
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE|SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL, 0
);
@@ -73686,7 +73686,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
sqlite3DbFree(db, zMaster);
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Write the name of each database file in the transaction into the new
** master journal file. If an error occurs at this point close
** and delete the master journal file. All the individual journal files
@@ -73734,7 +73734,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
** in case the master journal file name was written into the journal
** file before the failure occurred.
*/
- for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && inDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && inDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseOne(pBt, zMaster);
@@ -73767,7 +73767,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
*/
disable_simulated_io_errors();
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- for(i=0; inDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; inDb; i++){
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
sqlite3BtreeCommitPhaseTwo(pBt, 1);
@@ -73783,7 +73783,7 @@ static int vdbeCommit(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** This routine checks that the sqlite3.nVdbeActive count variable
** matches the number of vdbe's in the list sqlite3.pVdbe that are
** currently active. An assertion fails if the two counts do not match.
@@ -73819,10 +73819,10 @@ static void checkActiveVdbeCnt(sqlite3 *db){
** If the Vdbe passed as the first argument opened a statement-transaction,
** close it now. Argument eOp must be either SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK or
** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE. If it is SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, then the statement
-** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
+** transaction is rolled back. If eOp is SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the
** statement transaction is committed.
**
-** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
+** If an IO error occurs, an SQLITE_IOERR_XXX error code is returned.
** Otherwise SQLITE_OK.
*/
static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
@@ -73835,7 +73835,7 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
assert( db->nStatement>0 );
assert( p->iStatement==(db->nStatement+db->nSavepoint) );
- for(i=0; inDb; i++){
+ for(i=0; inDb; i++){
int rc2 = SQLITE_OK;
Btree *pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt ){
@@ -73862,8 +73862,8 @@ static SQLITE_NOINLINE int vdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
}
}
- /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
- ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
+ /* If the statement transaction is being rolled back, also restore the
+ ** database handles deferred constraint counter to the value it had when
** the statement transaction was opened. */
if( eOp==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
db->nDeferredCons = p->nStmtDefCons;
@@ -73880,20 +73880,20 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement(Vdbe *p, int eOp){
/*
-** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
-** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
+** This function is called when a transaction opened by the database
+** handle associated with the VM passed as an argument is about to be
** committed. If there are outstanding deferred foreign key constraint
** violations, return SQLITE_ERROR. Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
**
-** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
+** If there are outstanding FK violations and this function returns
** SQLITE_ERROR, set the result of the VM to SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY
** and write an error message to it. Then return SQLITE_ERROR.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(Vdbe *p, int deferred){
sqlite3 *db = p->db;
- if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
- || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
+ if( (deferred && (db->nDeferredCons+db->nDeferredImmCons)>0)
+ || (!deferred && p->nFkConstraint>0)
){
p->rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
p->errorAction = OE_Abort;
@@ -73923,7 +73923,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
/* This function contains the logic that determines if a statement or
** transaction will be committed or rolled back as a result of the
- ** execution of this virtual machine.
+ ** execution of this virtual machine.
**
** If any of the following errors occur:
**
@@ -73961,16 +73961,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
isSpecialError = mrc==SQLITE_NOMEM || mrc==SQLITE_IOERR
|| mrc==SQLITE_INTERRUPT || mrc==SQLITE_FULL;
if( isSpecialError ){
- /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
- ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
- ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
+ /* If the query was read-only and the error code is SQLITE_INTERRUPT,
+ ** no rollback is necessary. Otherwise, at least a savepoint
+ ** transaction must be rolled back to restore the database to a
** consistent state.
**
** Even if the statement is read-only, it is important to perform
- ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
+ ** a statement or transaction rollback operation. If the error
** occurred while writing to the journal, sub-journal or database
** file as part of an effort to free up cache space (see function
- ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
+ ** pagerStress() in pager.c), the rollback is required to restore
** the pager to a consistent state.
*/
if( !p->readOnly || mrc!=SQLITE_INTERRUPT ){
@@ -73992,16 +73992,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 0);
}
-
- /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
- ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
+
+ /* If the auto-commit flag is set and this is the only active writer
+ ** VM, then we do either a commit or rollback of the current transaction.
**
- ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
- ** above has occurred.
+ ** Note: This block also runs if one of the special errors handled
+ ** above has occurred.
*/
- if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
- && db->autoCommit
- && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
+ if( !sqlite3VtabInSync(db)
+ && db->autoCommit
+ && db->nVdbeWrite==(p->readOnly==0)
){
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || (p->errorAction==OE_Fail && !isSpecialError) ){
rc = sqlite3VdbeCheckFk(p, 1);
@@ -74011,10 +74011,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
rc = SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY;
- }else{
- /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
+ }else{
+ /* The auto-commit flag is true, the vdbe program was successful
** or hit an 'OR FAIL' constraint and there are no deferred foreign
- ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
+ ** key constraints to hold up the transaction. This means a commit
** is required. */
rc = vdbeCommit(db, p);
}
@@ -74048,7 +74048,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
p->nChange = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* If eStatementOp is non-zero, then a statement transaction needs to
** be committed or rolled back. Call sqlite3VdbeCloseStatement() to
** do so. If this operation returns an error, and the current statement
@@ -74069,9 +74069,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
p->nChange = 0;
}
}
-
+
/* If this was an INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE and no statement transaction
- ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
+ ** has been rolled back, update the database connection change-counter.
*/
if( p->changeCntOn ){
if( eStatementOp!=SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK ){
@@ -74102,7 +74102,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeHalt(Vdbe *p){
}
/* If the auto-commit flag is set to true, then any locks that were held
- ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
+ ** by connection db have now been released. Call sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked()
** to invoke any required unlock-notify callbacks.
*/
if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -74124,7 +74124,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeResetStepResult(Vdbe *p){
/*
** Copy the error code and error message belonging to the VDBE passed
-** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
+** as the first argument to its database handle (so that they will be
** returned by calls to sqlite3_errcode() and sqlite3_errmsg()).
**
** This function does not clear the VDBE error code or message, just
@@ -74149,7 +74149,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeTransferError(Vdbe *p){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SQLLOG
/*
-** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
+** If an SQLITE_CONFIG_SQLLOG hook is registered and the VM has been run,
** invoke it.
*/
static void vdbeInvokeSqllog(Vdbe *v){
@@ -74254,7 +74254,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeReset(Vdbe *p){
p->magic = VDBE_MAGIC_RESET;
return p->rc & db->errMask;
}
-
+
/*
** Clean up and delete a VDBE after execution. Return an integer which is
** the result code. Write any error message text into *pzErrMsg.
@@ -74275,8 +74275,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeFinalize(Vdbe *p){
** the first argument.
**
** Or, if iOp is greater than or equal to zero, then the destructor is
-** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
-** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
+** only invoked for those auxiliary data pointers created by the user
+** function invoked by the OP_Function opcode at instruction iOp of
** VM pVdbe, and only then if:
**
** * the associated function parameter is the 32nd or later (counting
@@ -74547,7 +74547,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialType(Mem *pMem, int file_format, u32 *pLen){
** The sizes for serial types less than 128
*/
static const u8 sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[] = {
- /* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 */
+ /* 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 */
/* 0 */ 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 8, 0, 0,
/* 10 */ 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 3,
/* 20 */ 4, 4, 5, 5, 6, 6, 7, 7, 8, 8,
@@ -74570,19 +74570,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(u32 serial_type){
if( serial_type>=128 ){
return (serial_type-12)/2;
}else{
- assert( serial_type<12
+ assert( serial_type<12
|| sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type]==(serial_type - 12)/2 );
return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
}
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
assert( serial_type<128 );
- return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
+ return sqlite3SmallTypeSizes[serial_type];
}
/*
-** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
-** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
+** If we are on an architecture with mixed-endian floating
+** points (ex: ARM7) then swap the lower 4 bytes with the
** upper 4 bytes. Return the result.
**
** For most architectures, this is a no-op.
@@ -74604,7 +74604,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u8 sqlite3VdbeOneByteSerialTypeLen(u8 serial_type){
** (2007-08-30) Frank van Vugt has studied this problem closely
** and has send his findings to the SQLite developers. Frank
** writes that some Linux kernels offer floating point hardware
-** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
+** emulation that uses only 32-bit mantissas instead of a full
** 48-bits as required by the IEEE standard. (This is the
** CONFIG_FPE_FASTFPE option.) On such systems, floating point
** byte swapping becomes very complicated. To avoid problems,
@@ -74634,7 +74634,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){
#endif
/*
-** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into
+** Write the serialized data blob for the value stored in pMem into
** buf. It is assumed that the caller has allocated sufficient space.
** Return the number of bytes written.
**
@@ -74645,7 +74645,7 @@ static u64 floatSwap(u64 in){
** Return the number of bytes actually written into buf[]. The number
** of bytes in the zero-filled tail is included in the return value only
** if those bytes were zeroed in buf[].
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){
u32 len;
@@ -74699,7 +74699,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(u8 *buf, Mem *pMem, u32 serial_type){
** The few cases that require local variables are broken out into a separate
** routine so that in most cases the overhead of moving the stack pointer
** is avoided.
-*/
+*/
static u32 SQLITE_NOINLINE serialGet(
const unsigned char *buf, /* Buffer to deserialize from */
u32 serial_type, /* Serial type to deserialize */
@@ -74777,7 +74777,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-01849-26079 Value is a big-endian 32-bit
** twos-complement integer. */
pMem->u.i = FOUR_BYTE_INT(buf);
-#ifdef __HP_cc
+#ifdef __HP_cc
/* Work around a sign-extension bug in the HP compiler for HP/UX */
if( buf[0]&0x80 ) pMem->u.i |= 0xffffffff80000000LL;
#endif
@@ -74829,7 +74829,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3VdbeSerialGet(
** The space is either allocated using sqlite3DbMallocRaw() or from within
** the unaligned buffer passed via the second and third arguments (presumably
** stack space). If the former, then *ppFree is set to a pointer that should
-** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
+** be eventually freed by the caller using sqlite3DbFree(). Or, if the
** allocation comes from the pSpace/szSpace buffer, *ppFree is set to NULL
** before returning.
**
@@ -74851,10 +74851,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE UnpackedRecord *sqlite3VdbeAllocUnpackedRecord(
}
/*
-** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
+** Given the nKey-byte encoding of a record in pKey[], populate the
** UnpackedRecord structure indicated by the fourth argument with the
** contents of the decoded record.
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo, /* Information about the record format */
int nKey, /* Size of the binary record */
@@ -74862,7 +74862,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeRecordUnpack(
UnpackedRecord *p /* Populate this structure before returning. */
){
const unsigned char *aKey = (const unsigned char *)pKey;
- int d;
+ int d;
u32 idx; /* Offset in aKey[] to read from */
u16 u; /* Unsigned loop counter */
u32 szHdr;
@@ -74925,13 +74925,13 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
/* Compilers may complain that mem1.u.i is potentially uninitialized.
** We could initialize it, as shown here, to silence those complaints.
- ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
+ ** But in fact, mem1.u.i will never actually be used uninitialized, and doing
** the unnecessary initialization has a measurable negative performance
** impact, since this routine is a very high runner. And so, we choose
** to ignore the compiler warnings and leave this variable uninitialized.
*/
/* mem1.u.i = 0; // not needed, here to silence compiler warning */
-
+
idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
if( szHdr1>98307 ) return SQLITE_CORRUPT;
d1 = szHdr1;
@@ -74952,7 +74952,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareDebug(
** sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen() in the common case.
*/
if( d1+serial_type1+2>(u32)nKey1
- && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1
+ && d1+sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type1)>(u32)nKey1
){
break;
}
@@ -75008,7 +75008,7 @@ debugCompareEnd:
** incorrectly.
*/
static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
- int nKey, const void *pKey, /* The record to verify */
+ int nKey, const void *pKey, /* The record to verify */
const KeyInfo *pKeyInfo /* Compare size with this KeyInfo */
){
int nField = 0;
@@ -75034,7 +75034,7 @@ static void vdbeAssertFieldCountWithinLimits(
/*
** Both *pMem1 and *pMem2 contain string values. Compare the two values
** using the collation sequence pColl. As usual, return a negative , zero
-** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
+** or positive value if *pMem1 is less than, equal to or greater than
** *pMem2, respectively. Similar in spirit to "rc = (*pMem1) - (*pMem2);".
*/
static int vdbeCompareMemString(
@@ -75160,7 +75160,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
f2 = pMem2->flags;
combined_flags = f1|f2;
assert( (combined_flags & MEM_RowSet)==0 );
-
+
/* If one value is NULL, it is less than the other. If both values
** are NULL, return 0.
*/
@@ -75210,7 +75210,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
}
assert( pMem1->enc==pMem2->enc || pMem1->db->mallocFailed );
- assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
+ assert( pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF8 ||
pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16LE || pMem1->enc==SQLITE_UTF16BE );
/* The collation sequence must be defined at this point, even if
@@ -75225,7 +75225,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
/* If a NULL pointer was passed as the collate function, fall through
** to the blob case and use memcmp(). */
}
-
+
/* Both values must be blobs. Compare using memcmp(). */
return sqlite3BlobCompare(pMem1, pMem2);
}
@@ -75233,7 +75233,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MemCompare(const Mem *pMem1, const Mem *pMem2, const C
/*
** The first argument passed to this function is a serial-type that
-** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
+** corresponds to an integer - all values between 1 and 9 inclusive
** except 7. The second points to a buffer containing an integer value
** serialized according to serial_type. This function deserializes
** and returns the value.
@@ -75275,7 +75275,7 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
/*
** This function compares the two table rows or index records
** specified by {nKey1, pKey1} and pPKey2. It returns a negative, zero
-** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
+** or positive integer if key1 is less than, equal to or
** greater than key2. The {nKey1, pKey1} key must be a blob
** created by the OP_MakeRecord opcode of the VDBE. The pPKey2
** key must be a parsed key such as obtained from
@@ -75284,12 +75284,12 @@ static i64 vdbeRecordDecodeInt(u32 serial_type, const u8 *aKey){
** If argument bSkip is non-zero, it is assumed that the caller has already
** determined that the first fields of the keys are equal.
**
-** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
-** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
+** Key1 and Key2 do not have to contain the same number of fields. If all
+** fields that appear in both keys are equal, then pPKey2->default_rc is
** returned.
**
-** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
+** If database corruption is discovered, set pPKey2->errCode to
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT and return 0. If an OOM error is encountered,
** pPKey2->errCode is set to SQLITE_NOMEM and, if it is not NULL, the
** malloc-failed flag set on database handle (pPKey2->pKeyInfo->db).
*/
@@ -75321,7 +75321,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
}else{
idx1 = getVarint32(aKey1, szHdr1);
d1 = szHdr1;
- if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
+ if( d1>(unsigned)nKey1 ){
pPKey2->errCode = (u8)SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
return 0; /* Corruption */
}
@@ -75329,7 +75329,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
}
VVA_ONLY( mem1.szMalloc = 0; ) /* Only needed by assert() statements */
- assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField+pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nXField>=pPKey2->nField
+ assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField+pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nXField>=pPKey2->nField
|| CORRUPT_DB );
assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->aSortOrder!=0 );
assert( pPKey2->pKeyInfo->nField>0 );
@@ -75364,7 +75364,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
serial_type = aKey1[idx1];
if( serial_type>=10 ){
/* Serial types 12 or greater are strings and blobs (greater than
- ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
+ ** numbers). Types 10 and 11 are currently "reserved for future
** use", so it doesn't really matter what the results of comparing
** them to numberic values are. */
rc = +1;
@@ -75410,7 +75410,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
}else{
int nCmp = MIN(mem1.n, pRhs->n);
rc = memcmp(&aKey1[d1], pRhs->z, nCmp);
- if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
+ if( rc==0 ) rc = mem1.n - pRhs->n;
}
}
}
@@ -75472,8 +75472,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(
/* rc==0 here means that one or both of the keys ran out of fields and
** all the fields up to that point were equal. Return the default_rc
** value. */
- assert( CORRUPT_DB
- || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
+ assert( CORRUPT_DB
+ || vdbeRecordCompareDebug(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, pPKey2->default_rc)
|| pKeyInfo->db->mallocFailed
);
pPKey2->eqSeen = 1;
@@ -75488,8 +75488,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(
/*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
-** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is an integer, and (b) the
** size-of-header varint at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single
** byte (i.e. is less than 128).
**
@@ -75544,7 +75544,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
testcase( lhs<0 );
break;
}
- case 8:
+ case 8:
lhs = 0;
break;
case 9:
@@ -75552,11 +75552,11 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
break;
/* This case could be removed without changing the results of running
- ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
+ ** this code. Including it causes gcc to generate a faster switch
** statement (since the range of switch targets now starts at zero and
** is contiguous) but does not cause any duplicate code to be generated
- ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
- ** compilers might be similar. */
+ ** (as gcc is clever enough to combine the two like cases). Other
+ ** compilers might be similar. */
case 0: case 7:
return sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2);
@@ -75570,7 +75570,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
}else if( vr2;
}else if( pPKey2->nField>1 ){
- /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
+ /* The first fields of the two keys are equal. Compare the trailing
** fields. */
res = sqlite3VdbeRecordCompareWithSkip(nKey1, pKey1, pPKey2, 1);
}else{
@@ -75585,9 +75585,9 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareInt(
}
/*
-** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
+** This function is an optimized version of sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare()
** that (a) the first field of pPKey2 is a string, that (b) the first field
-** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
+** uses the collation sequence BINARY and (c) that the size-of-header varint
** at the start of (pKey1/nKey1) fits in a single byte.
*/
static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
@@ -75603,7 +75603,7 @@ static int vdbeRecordCompareString(
getVarint32(&aKey1[1], serial_type);
if( serial_type<12 ){
res = pPKey2->r1; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a number or a null */
- }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
+ }else if( !(serial_type & 0x01) ){
res = pPKey2->r2; /* (pKey1/nKey1) is a blob */
}else{
int nCmp;
@@ -75655,7 +75655,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE RecordCompare sqlite3VdbeFindCompare(UnpackedRecord *p){
/* varintRecordCompareInt() and varintRecordCompareString() both assume
** that the size-of-header varint that occurs at the start of each record
** fits in a single byte (i.e. is 127 or less). varintRecordCompareInt()
- ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
+ ** also assumes that it is safe to overread a buffer by at least the
** maximum possible legal header size plus 8 bytes. Because there is
** guaranteed to be at least 74 (but not 136) bytes of padding following each
** buffer passed to varintRecordCompareInt() this makes it convenient to
@@ -75708,7 +75708,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(sqlite3 *db, BtCursor *pCur, i64 *rowid){
/* Get the size of the index entry. Only indices entries of less
** than 2GiB are support - anything large must be database corruption.
** Any corruption is detected in sqlite3BtreeParseCellPtr(), though, so
- ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
+ ** this code can safely assume that nCellKey is 32-bits
*/
assert( sqlite3BtreeCursorIsValid(pCur) );
nCellKey = sqlite3BtreePayloadSize(pCur);
@@ -75771,7 +75771,7 @@ idx_rowid_corruption:
**
** pUnpacked is either created without a rowid or is truncated so that it
** omits the rowid at the end. The rowid at the end of the index entry
-** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
+** is ignored as well. Hence, this routine only compares the prefixes
** of the keys prior to the final rowid, not the entire key.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
@@ -75807,7 +75807,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(
/*
** This routine sets the value to be returned by subsequent calls to
-** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
+** sqlite3_changes() on the database handle 'db'.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(sqlite3 *db, int nChange){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
@@ -75849,7 +75849,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite3 *sqlite3VdbeDb(Vdbe *v){
/*
** Return a pointer to an sqlite3_value structure containing the value bound
-** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
+** parameter iVar of VM v. Except, if the value is an SQL NULL, return
** 0 instead. Unless it is NULL, apply affinity aff (one of the SQLITE_AFF_*
** constants) to the value before returning it.
**
@@ -75905,7 +75905,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabImportErrmsg(Vdbe *p, sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
/*
-** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
+** If the second argument is not NULL, release any allocations associated
** with the memory cells in the p->aMem[] array. Also free the UnpackedRecord
** structure itself, using sqlite3DbFree().
**
@@ -75959,7 +75959,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(
}
}
- assert( pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol
+ assert( pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol
|| (pCsr->nField==pTab->nCol+1 && op==SQLITE_DELETE && iReg==-1)
);
@@ -76285,7 +76285,7 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_value *sqlite3_value_dup(const sqlite3_value *pOrig){
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_value_free(sqlite3_value *pOld){
sqlite3ValueFree(pOld);
}
-
+
/**************************** sqlite3_result_ *******************************
** The following routines are used by user-defined functions to specify
@@ -76326,9 +76326,9 @@ static int invokeValueDestructor(
return SQLITE_TOOBIG;
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( n>=0 );
@@ -76336,8 +76336,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob(
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, 0, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_blob64(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
sqlite3_uint64 n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
@@ -76392,8 +76392,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_subtype(sqlite3_context *pCtx, unsigned int eSubt
pOut->flags |= MEM_Subtype;
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const char *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const char *z,
int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
@@ -76401,8 +76401,8 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text(
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF8, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const char *z,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const char *z,
sqlite3_uint64 n,
void (*xDel)(void *),
unsigned char enc
@@ -76418,27 +76418,27 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text64(
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16be(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
setResultStrOrError(pCtx, z, n, SQLITE_UTF16BE, xDel);
}
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_text16le(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- const void *z,
- int n,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ const void *z,
+ int n,
void (*xDel)(void *)
){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
@@ -76469,7 +76469,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_code(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int errCode){
if( pCtx->pVdbe ) pCtx->pVdbe->rcApp = errCode;
#endif
if( pCtx->pOut->flags & MEM_Null ){
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, sqlite3ErrStr(errCode), -1,
SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
}
@@ -76479,7 +76479,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_toobig(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(pCtx->pOut->db->mutex) );
pCtx->isError = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
pCtx->fErrorOrAux = 1;
- sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pCtx->pOut, "string or blob too big", -1,
SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
}
@@ -76493,7 +76493,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_result_error_nomem(sqlite3_context *pCtx){
}
/*
-** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
+** This function is called after a transaction has been committed. It
** invokes callbacks registered with sqlite3_wal_hook() as required.
*/
static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -76522,7 +76522,7 @@ static int doWalCallbacks(sqlite3 *db){
** statement is completely executed or an error occurs.
**
** This routine implements the bulk of the logic behind the sqlite_step()
-** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
+** API. The only thing omitted is the automatic recompile if a
** schema change has occurred. That detail is handled by the
** outer sqlite3_step() wrapper procedure.
*/
@@ -76536,15 +76536,15 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
** sqlite3_step() after any error or after SQLITE_DONE. But beginning
** with version 3.7.0, we changed this so that sqlite3_reset() would
** be called automatically instead of throwing the SQLITE_MISUSE error.
- ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
+ ** This "automatic-reset" change is not technically an incompatibility,
** since any application that receives an SQLITE_MISUSE is broken by
** definition.
**
** Nevertheless, some published applications that were originally written
- ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
+ ** for version 3.6.23 or earlier do in fact depend on SQLITE_MISUSE
** returns, and those were broken by the automatic-reset change. As a
** a work-around, the SQLITE_OMIT_AUTORESET compile-time restores the
- ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
+ ** legacy behavior of returning SQLITE_MISUSE for cases where the
** previous sqlite3_step() returned something other than a SQLITE_LOCKED
** or SQLITE_BUSY error.
*/
@@ -76580,7 +76580,7 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
db->u1.isInterrupted = 0;
}
- assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
+ assert( db->nVdbeWrite>0 || db->autoCommit==0
|| (db->nDeferredCons==0 && db->nDeferredImmCons==0)
);
@@ -76630,14 +76630,14 @@ static int sqlite3Step(Vdbe *p){
p->rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}
end_of_step:
- /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be
- ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy
+ /* At this point local variable rc holds the value that should be
+ ** returned if this statement was compiled using the legacy
** sqlite3_prepare() interface. According to the docs, this can only
- ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc
- ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize()
+ ** be one of the values in the first assert() below. Variable p->rc
+ ** contains the value that would be returned if sqlite3_finalize()
** were called on statement p.
*/
- assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
+ assert( rc==SQLITE_ROW || rc==SQLITE_DONE || rc==SQLITE_ERROR
|| (rc&0xff)==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_MISUSE
);
assert( (p->rc!=SQLITE_ROW && p->rc!=SQLITE_DONE) || p->rc==p->rcApp );
@@ -76645,7 +76645,7 @@ end_of_step:
/* If this statement was prepared using sqlite3_prepare_v2(), and an
** error has occurred, then return the error code in p->rc to the
** caller. Set the error code in the database handle to the same value.
- */
+ */
rc = sqlite3VdbeTransferError(p);
}
return (rc&db->errMask);
@@ -76679,15 +76679,15 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_step(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
assert( v->expired==0 );
}
if( rc2!=SQLITE_OK ){
- /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
- ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
- ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
+ /* This case occurs after failing to recompile an sql statement.
+ ** The error message from the SQL compiler has already been loaded
+ ** into the database handle. This block copies the error message
** from the database handle into the statement and sets the statement
- ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
+ ** program counter to 0 to ensure that when the statement is
** finalized or reset the parser error message is available via
** sqlite3_errmsg() and sqlite3_errcode().
*/
- const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
+ const char *zErr = (const char *)sqlite3_value_text(db->pErr);
sqlite3DbFree(db, v->zErrMsg);
if( !db->mallocFailed ){
v->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, zErr);
@@ -76835,9 +76835,9 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_get_auxdata(sqlite3_context *pCtx, int iArg){
** deleted by calling the delete function specified when it was set.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_set_auxdata(
- sqlite3_context *pCtx,
- int iArg,
- void *pAux,
+ sqlite3_context *pCtx,
+ int iArg,
+ void *pAux,
void (*xDelete)(void*)
){
AuxData *pAuxData;
@@ -76881,7 +76881,7 @@ failed:
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/*
-** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
+** Return the number of times the Step function of an aggregate has been
** called.
**
** This function is deprecated. Do not use it for new code. It is
@@ -76926,9 +76926,9 @@ static const Mem *columnNullValue(void){
** these assert()s from failing, when building with SQLITE_DEBUG defined
** using gcc, we force nullMem to be 8-byte aligned using the magical
** __attribute__((aligned(8))) macro. */
- static const Mem nullMem
+ static const Mem nullMem
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) && defined(__GNUC__)
- __attribute__((aligned(8)))
+ __attribute__((aligned(8)))
#endif
= {
/* .u = */ {0},
@@ -76974,9 +76974,9 @@ static Mem *columnMem(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
}
/*
-** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
+** This function is called after invoking an sqlite3_value_XXX function on a
** column value (i.e. a value returned by evaluating an SQL expression in the
-** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
+** select list of a SELECT statement) that may cause a malloc() failure. If
** malloc() has failed, the threads mallocFailed flag is cleared and the result
** code of statement pStmt set to SQLITE_NOMEM.
**
@@ -77015,8 +77015,8 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_blob(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i){
const void *val;
val = sqlite3_value_blob( columnMem(pStmt,i) );
/* Even though there is no encoding conversion, value_blob() might
- ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
- ** expression.
+ ** need to call malloc() to expand the result of a zeroblob()
+ ** expression.
*/
columnMallocFailure(pStmt);
return val;
@@ -77220,11 +77220,11 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_column_origin_name16(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int N){
/******************************* sqlite3_bind_ ***************************
-**
+**
** Routines used to attach values to wildcards in a compiled SQL statement.
*/
/*
-** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
+** Unbind the value bound to variable i in virtual machine p. This is the
** the same as binding a NULL value to the column. If the "i" parameter is
** out of range, then SQLITE_RANGE is returned. Othewise SQLITE_OK.
**
@@ -77243,7 +77243,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){
if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN || p->pc>=0 ){
sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_MISUSE);
sqlite3_mutex_leave(p->db->mutex);
- sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
+ sqlite3_log(SQLITE_MISUSE,
"bind on a busy prepared statement: [%s]", p->zSql);
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
@@ -77258,7 +77258,7 @@ static int vdbeUnbind(Vdbe *p, int i){
pVar->flags = MEM_Null;
sqlite3Error(p->db, SQLITE_OK);
- /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
+ /* If the bit corresponding to this variable in Vdbe.expmask is set, then
** binding a new value to this variable invalidates the current query plan.
**
** IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-48440-37595 If the specific value bound to host
@@ -77313,10 +77313,10 @@ static int bindText(
** Bind a blob value to an SQL statement variable.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -77325,10 +77325,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob(
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, 0);
}
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_blob64(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- sqlite3_uint64 nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ sqlite3_uint64 nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
assert( xDel!=SQLITE_DYNAMIC );
@@ -77380,20 +77380,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_pointer(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, void *pPtr){
}
return rc;
}
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const char *zData,
- int nData,
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text(
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const char *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF8);
}
-SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const char *zData,
- sqlite3_uint64 nData,
+SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64(
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const char *zData,
+ sqlite3_uint64 nData,
void (*xDel)(void*),
unsigned char enc
){
@@ -77407,10 +77407,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text64(
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_text16(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int i,
- const void *zData,
- int nData,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int i,
+ const void *zData,
+ int nData,
void (*xDel)(void*)
){
return bindText(pStmt, i, zData, nData, xDel, SQLITE_UTF16NATIVE);
@@ -77474,7 +77474,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_zeroblob64(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, int i, sqlite3_uint6
/*
** Return the number of wildcards that can be potentially bound to.
-** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
+** This routine is added to support DBD::SQLite.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_bind_parameter_count(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
Vdbe *p = (Vdbe*)pStmt;
@@ -77659,8 +77659,8 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_expanded_sql(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
** if successful, or a NULL pointer if an OOM error is encountered.
*/
static UnpackedRecord *vdbeUnpackRecord(
- KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
- int nKey,
+ KeyInfo *pKeyInfo,
+ int nKey,
const void *pKey
){
UnpackedRecord *pRet; /* Return value */
@@ -77750,7 +77750,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_preupdate_count(sqlite3 *db){
** only. It returns zero if the change that caused the callback was made
** immediately by a user SQL statement. Or, if the change was made by a
** trigger program, it returns the number of trigger programs currently
-** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
+** on the stack (1 for a top-level trigger, 2 for a trigger fired by a
** top-level trigger etc.).
**
** For the purposes of the previous paragraph, a foreign key CASCADE, SET NULL
@@ -77959,8 +77959,8 @@ static int findNextHostParameter(const char *zSql, int *pnToken){
/*
** This function returns a pointer to a nul-terminated string in memory
** obtained from sqlite3DbMalloc(). If sqlite3.nVdbeExec is 1, then the
-** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to
-** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1,
+** string contains a copy of zRawSql but with host parameters expanded to
+** their current bindings. Or, if sqlite3.nVdbeExec is greater than 1,
** then the returned string holds a copy of zRawSql with "-- " prepended
** to each line of text.
**
@@ -77998,7 +77998,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(
char zBase[100]; /* Initial working space */
db = p->db;
- sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, 0, zBase, sizeof(zBase),
+ sqlite3StrAccumInit(&out, 0, zBase, sizeof(zBase),
db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_LENGTH]);
if( db->nVdbeExec>1 ){
while( *zRawSql ){
@@ -78066,7 +78066,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char *sqlite3VdbeExpandSql(
nOut = SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT;
while( nOutn && (pVar->z[nOut]&0xc0)==0x80 ){ nOut++; }
}
-#endif
+#endif
sqlite3XPrintf(&out, "'%.*q'", nOut, pVar->z);
#ifdef SQLITE_TRACE_SIZE_LIMIT
if( nOutn ){
@@ -78248,7 +78248,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_found_count = 0;
static void vdbeTakeBranch(int iSrcLine, u8 I, u8 M){
if( iSrcLine<=2 && ALWAYS(iSrcLine>0) ){
M = iSrcLine;
- /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and
+ /* Assert the truth of VdbeCoverageAlwaysTaken() and
** VdbeCoverageNeverTaken() */
assert( (M & I)==I );
}else{
@@ -78297,7 +78297,7 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
u8 eCurType /* Type of the new cursor */
){
/* Find the memory cell that will be used to store the blob of memory
- ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
+ ** required for this VdbeCursor structure. It is convenient to use a
** vdbe memory cell to manage the memory allocation required for a
** VdbeCursor structure for the following reasons:
**
@@ -78318,8 +78318,8 @@ static VdbeCursor *allocateCursor(
int nByte;
VdbeCursor *pCx = 0;
- nByte =
- ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
+ nByte =
+ ROUND8(sizeof(VdbeCursor)) + 2*sizeof(u32)*nField +
(eCurType==CURTYPE_BTREE?sqlite3BtreeCursorSize():0);
assert( iCur>=0 && iCurnCursor );
@@ -78380,7 +78380,7 @@ static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec, int bTryForInt){
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
-** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
+** Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a
** floating-point representation if an integer representation
** is not possible. Note that the integer representation is
** always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
@@ -78410,7 +78410,7 @@ static void applyAffinity(
}else if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
/* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
- ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
+ ** representation. It would be harmless to repeat the conversion if
** there is already a string rep, but it is pointless to waste those
** CPU cycles. */
if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) ){ /*OPTIMIZATION-IF-FALSE*/
@@ -78439,12 +78439,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){
}
/*
-** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
+** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*,
** not the internal Mem* type.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(
- sqlite3_value *pVal,
- u8 affinity,
+ sqlite3_value *pVal,
+ u8 affinity,
u8 enc
){
applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
@@ -78470,7 +78470,7 @@ static u16 SQLITE_NOINLINE computeNumericType(Mem *pMem){
/*
** Return the numeric type for pMem, either MEM_Int or MEM_Real or both or
-** none.
+** none.
**
** Unlike applyNumericAffinity(), this routine does not modify pMem->flags.
** But it does set pMem->u.r and pMem->u.i appropriately.
@@ -78610,8 +78610,8 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
-/*
-** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
+/*
+** hwtime.h contains inline assembler code for implementing
** high-performance timing routines.
*/
/************** Include hwtime.h in the middle of vdbe.c *********************/
@@ -78669,7 +78669,7 @@ static void registerTrace(int iReg, Mem *p){
__asm__ __volatile__ ("rdtsc" : "=A" (val));
return val;
}
-
+
#elif (defined(__GNUC__) && defined(__ppc__))
__inline__ sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){
@@ -78711,9 +78711,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE sqlite_uint64 sqlite3Hwtime(void){ return ((sqlite_uint64)0); }
/*
** This function is only called from within an assert() expression. It
** checks that the sqlite3.nTransaction variable is correctly set to
-** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
+** the number of non-transaction savepoints currently in the
** linked list starting at sqlite3.pSavepoint.
-**
+**
** Usage:
**
** assert( checkSavepointCount(db) );
@@ -78753,7 +78753,7 @@ static Mem *out2Prerelease(Vdbe *p, VdbeOp *pOp){
/*
** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can.
-** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
+** This is the core of sqlite3_step().
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
Vdbe *p /* The VDBE */
@@ -78855,7 +78855,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, (int)(pOp - aOp), pOp);
}
#endif
-
+
/* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt. This only happens
** if we have a special test build.
@@ -78909,7 +78909,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
#if defined(SQLITE_DEBUG) || defined(VDBE_PROFILE)
pOrigOp = pOp;
#endif
-
+
switch( pOp->opcode ){
/*****************************************************************************
@@ -78950,7 +78950,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeExec(
/* Opcode: Goto * P2 * * *
**
** An unconditional jump to address P2.
-** The next instruction executed will be
+** The next instruction executed will be
** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
** the program.
**
@@ -78966,7 +78966,7 @@ jump_to_p2_and_check_for_interrupt:
/* Opcodes that are used as the bottom of a loop (OP_Next, OP_Prev,
** OP_VNext, OP_RowSetNext, or OP_SorterNext) all jump here upon
** completion. Check to see if sqlite3_interrupt() has been called
- ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
+ ** or if the progress callback needs to be invoked.
**
** This code uses unstructured "goto" statements and does not look clean.
** But that is not due to sloppy coding habits. The code is written this
@@ -78991,7 +78991,7 @@ check_for_interrupt:
}
}
#endif
-
+
break;
}
@@ -79123,7 +79123,7 @@ case OP_HaltIfNull: { /* in3 */
** whether or not to rollback the current transaction. Do not rollback
** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback. If P2==OE_Abort,
** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
-** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
+** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction.
**
** If P4 is not null then it is an error message string.
**
@@ -79155,7 +79155,7 @@ case OP_Halt: {
sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
pcx = sqlite3VdbeFrameRestore(pFrame);
if( pOp->p2==OE_Ignore ){
- /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
+ /* Instruction pcx is the OP_Program that invoked the sub-program
** currently being halted. If the p2 instruction of this OP_Halt
** instruction is set to OE_Ignore, then the sub-program is throwing
** an IGNORE exception. In this case jump to the address specified
@@ -79243,7 +79243,7 @@ case OP_Real: { /* same as TK_FLOAT, out2 */
/* Opcode: String8 * P2 * P4 *
** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4'
**
-** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
+** P4 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed
** into a String opcode before it is executed for the first time. During
** this transformation, the length of string P4 is computed and stored
** as the P1 parameter.
@@ -79278,7 +79278,7 @@ case OP_String8: { /* same as TK_STRING, out2 */
assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
/* Fall through to the next case, OP_String */
}
-
+
/* Opcode: String P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: r[P2]='P4' (len=P1)
**
@@ -79541,8 +79541,8 @@ case OP_ResultRow: {
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
- /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then
- ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows
+ /* If the SQLITE_CountRows flag is set in sqlite3.flags mask, then
+ ** DML statements invoke this opcode to return the number of rows
** modified to the user. This is the only way that a VM that
** opens a statement transaction may invoke this opcode.
**
@@ -79663,15 +79663,15 @@ case OP_Concat: { /* same as TK_CONCAT, in1, in2, out3 */
** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]/r[P1]
**
** Divide the value in register P1 by the value in register P2
-** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
-** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
+** and store the result in register P3 (P3=P2/P1). If the value in
+** register P1 is zero, then the result is NULL. If either input is
** NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
/* Opcode: Remainder P1 P2 P3 * *
** Synopsis: r[P3]=r[P2]%r[P1]
**
-** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
-** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
+** Compute the remainder after integer register P2 is divided by
+** register P1 and store the result in register P3.
** If the value in register P1 is zero the result is NULL.
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
*/
@@ -79795,7 +79795,7 @@ case OP_CollSeq: {
** successors. The result of the function is stored in register P3.
** Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
**
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -79812,7 +79812,7 @@ case OP_CollSeq: {
** from register P2 and successors. The result of the function is stored
** in register P3. Register P3 must not be one of the function inputs.
**
-** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
+** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
@@ -79982,7 +79982,7 @@ case OP_ShiftRight: { /* same as TK_RSHIFT, in1, in2, out3 */
/* Opcode: AddImm P1 P2 * * *
** Synopsis: r[P1]=r[P1]+P2
-**
+**
** Add the constant P2 to the value in register P1.
** The result is always an integer.
**
@@ -79997,7 +79997,7 @@ case OP_AddImm: { /* in1 */
}
/* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 * * *
-**
+**
** Force the value in register P1 to be an integer. If the value
** in P1 is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
** without data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
@@ -80045,7 +80045,7 @@ case OP_RealAffinity: { /* in1 */
** Synopsis: affinity(r[P1])
**
** Force the value in register P1 to be the type defined by P2.
-**
+**
**
** - TEXT
**
- BLOB
@@ -80081,14 +80081,14 @@ case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */
** store the result of comparison in register P2.
**
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause
** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
**
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values
** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -80127,18 +80127,18 @@ case OP_Cast: { /* in1 */
** the result of comparison (0 or 1 or NULL) into register P2.
**
** If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL bit of P5 is set and either reg(P1) or
-** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
+** reg(P3) is NULL then the take the jump. If the SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL
** bit is clear then fall through if either operand is NULL.
**
** The SQLITE_AFF_MASK portion of P5 must be an affinity character -
-** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
+** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made
** to coerce both inputs according to this affinity before the
** comparison is made. If the SQLITE_AFF_MASK is 0x00, then numeric
** affinity is used. Note that the affinity conversions are stored
** back into the input registers P1 and P3. So this opcode can cause
** persistent changes to registers P1 and P3.
**
-** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
+** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL,
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs then memcmp() is
** used to determine the results of the comparison. If both values
** are text, then the appropriate collating function specified in
@@ -80315,7 +80315,7 @@ compare_op:
**
** This opcode must immediately follow an OP_Lt or OP_Gt comparison operator.
** If result of an OP_Eq comparison on the same two operands
-** would have be NULL or false (0), then then jump to P2.
+** would have be NULL or false (0), then then jump to P2.
** If the result of an OP_Eq comparison on the two previous operands
** would have been true (1), then fall through.
*/
@@ -80335,7 +80335,7 @@ case OP_ElseNotEq: { /* same as TK_ESCAPE, jump */
** instruction. The permutation is stored in the P4 operand.
**
** The permutation is only valid until the next OP_Compare that has
-** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should
+** the OPFLAG_PERMUTE bit set in P5. Typically the OP_Permutation should
** occur immediately prior to the OP_Compare.
**
** The first integer in the P4 integer array is the length of the array
@@ -80499,7 +80499,7 @@ case OP_Or: { /* same as TK_OR, in1, in2, out3 */
** Synopsis: r[P2]= !r[P1]
**
** Interpret the value in register P1 as a boolean value. Store the
-** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
+** boolean complement in register P2. If the value in register P1 is
** NULL, then a NULL is stored in P2.
*/
case OP_Not: { /* same as TK_NOT, in1, out2 */
@@ -80599,7 +80599,7 @@ case OP_IsNull: { /* same as TK_ISNULL, jump, in1 */
/* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 * * *
** Synopsis: if r[P1]!=NULL goto P2
**
-** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
+** Jump to P2 if the value in register P1 is not NULL.
*/
case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
@@ -80616,7 +80616,7 @@ case OP_NotNull: { /* same as TK_NOTNULL, jump, in1 */
** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
** the MakeRecord instruction. (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
** information about the format of the data.) Extract the P2-th column
-** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1)
+** from this record. If there are less that (P2+1)
** values in the record, extract a NULL.
**
** The value extracted is stored in register P3.
@@ -80743,7 +80743,7 @@ case OP_Column: {
*/
if( pC->nHdrParsed<=p2 ){
/* If there is more header available for parsing in the record, try
- ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
+ ** to extract additional fields up through the p2+1-th field
*/
if( pC->iHdrOffsetaRow;
}
-
+
/* Fill in pC->aType[i] and aOffset[i] values through the p2-th field. */
op_column_read_header:
i = pC->nHdrParsed;
@@ -80939,13 +80939,13 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
** like this:
**
** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
- ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
+ ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 |
** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
**
** Data(0) is taken from register P1. Data(1) comes from register P1+1
** and so forth.
**
- ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
+ ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the
** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
** of the record to data0.
@@ -81034,7 +81034,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
goto too_big;
}
- /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
+ /* Make sure the output register has a buffer large enough to store
** the new record. The output register (pOp->p3) is not allowed to
** be one of the input registers (because the following call to
** sqlite3VdbeMemClearAndResize() could clobber the value before it is used).
@@ -81077,7 +81077,7 @@ case OP_MakeRecord: {
/* Opcode: Count P1 P2 * * *
** Synopsis: r[P2]=count()
**
-** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
+** Store the number of entries (an integer value) in the table or index
** opened by cursor P1 in register P2
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT
@@ -81117,7 +81117,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
zName = pOp->p4.z;
/* Assert that the p1 parameter is valid. Also that if there is no open
- ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
+ ** transaction, then there cannot be any savepoints.
*/
assert( db->pSavepoint==0 || db->autoCommit==0 );
assert( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN||p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE||p1==SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK );
@@ -81127,7 +81127,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
if( p1==SAVEPOINT_BEGIN ){
if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
- /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
+ /* A new savepoint cannot be created if there are active write
** statements (i.e. open read/write incremental blob handles).
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot open savepoint - SQL statements in progress");
@@ -81151,7 +81151,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
if( pNew ){
pNew->zName = (char *)&pNew[1];
memcpy(pNew->zName, zName, nName+1);
-
+
/* If there is no open transaction, then mark this as a special
** "transaction savepoint". */
if( db->autoCommit ){
@@ -81174,7 +81174,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
/* Find the named savepoint. If there is no such savepoint, then an
** an error is returned to the user. */
for(
- pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
+ pSavepoint = db->pSavepoint;
pSavepoint && sqlite3StrICmp(pSavepoint->zName, zName);
pSavepoint = pSavepoint->pNext
){
@@ -81184,7 +81184,7 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "no such savepoint: %s", zName);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}else if( db->nVdbeWrite>0 && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
- /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
+ /* It is not possible to release (commit) a savepoint if there are
** active write statements.
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot release savepoint - "
@@ -81193,8 +81193,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
}else{
/* Determine whether or not this is a transaction savepoint. If so,
- ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
- ** is committed.
+ ** and this is a RELEASE command, then the current transaction
+ ** is committed.
*/
int isTransaction = pSavepoint->pNext==0 && db->isTransactionSavepoint;
if( isTransaction && p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -81236,8 +81236,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
db->flags = (db->flags | SQLITE_InternChanges);
}
}
-
- /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
+
+ /* Regardless of whether this is a RELEASE or ROLLBACK, destroy all
** savepoints nested inside of the savepoint being operated on. */
while( db->pSavepoint!=pSavepoint ){
pTmp = db->pSavepoint;
@@ -81246,8 +81246,8 @@ case OP_Savepoint: {
db->nSavepoint--;
}
- /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
- ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
+ /* If it is a RELEASE, then destroy the savepoint being operated on
+ ** too. If it is a ROLLBACK TO, then set the number of deferred
** constraint violations present in the database to the value stored
** when the savepoint was created. */
if( p1==SAVEPOINT_RELEASE ){
@@ -81300,7 +81300,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
db->autoCommit = 1;
}else if( desiredAutoCommit && db->nVdbeWrite>0 ){
/* If this instruction implements a COMMIT and other VMs are writing
- ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
+ ** return an error indicating that the other VMs must complete first.
*/
sqlite3VdbeError(p, "cannot commit transaction - "
"SQL statements in progress");
@@ -81330,7 +81330,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
(!desiredAutoCommit)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
(iRollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
"cannot commit - no transaction is active"));
-
+
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
@@ -81341,7 +81341,7 @@ case OP_AutoCommit: {
**
** Begin a transaction on database P1 if a transaction is not already
** active.
-** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
+** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started, or if a
** read-transaction is already active, it is upgraded to a write-transaction.
** If P2 is zero, then a read-transaction is started.
**
@@ -81399,13 +81399,13 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
- if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal
- && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
+ if( pOp->p2 && p->usesStmtJournal
+ && (db->autoCommit==0 || db->nVdbeRead>1)
){
assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) );
if( p->iStatement==0 ){
assert( db->nStatement>=0 && db->nSavepoint>=0 );
- db->nStatement++;
+ db->nStatement++;
p->iStatement = db->nSavepoint + db->nStatement;
}
@@ -81435,7 +81435,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
if( pOp->p5 && (iMeta!=pOp->p3 || iGen!=pOp->p4.i) ){
sqlite3DbFree(db, p->zErrMsg);
p->zErrMsg = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "database schema has changed");
- /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
+ /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie
** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
** not reload the schema from the database file.
**
@@ -81445,7 +81445,7 @@ case OP_Transaction: {
** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
- ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
+ ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within
** a v-table method.
*/
if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
@@ -81493,8 +81493,8 @@ case OP_ReadCookie: { /* out2 */
**
** Write the integer value P3 into cookie number P2 of database P1.
** P2==1 is the schema version. P2==2 is the database format.
-** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
-** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
+** P2==3 is the recommended pager cache
+** size, and so forth. P1==0 is the main database file and P1==1 is the
** database file used to store temporary tables.
**
** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
@@ -81532,8 +81532,8 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
** Synopsis: root=P2 iDb=P3
**
** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
-** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
-** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
+** P2 in a database file. The database file is determined by P3.
+** P3==0 means the main database, P3==1 means the database used for
** temporary tables, and P3>1 means used the corresponding attached
** database. Give the new cursor an identifier of P1. The P1
** values need not be contiguous but all P1 values should be small integers.
@@ -81552,9 +81552,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
** SQLITE_BUSY error code.
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table.
**
** See also: OpenWrite, ReopenIdx
@@ -81581,9 +81581,9 @@ case OP_SetCookie: {
** root page.
**
** The P4 value may be either an integer (P4_INT32) or a pointer to
-** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
-** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
-** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
+** a KeyInfo structure (P4_KEYINFO). If it is a pointer to a KeyInfo
+** structure, then said structure defines the content and collating
+** sequence of the index being opened. Otherwise, if P4 is an integer
** value, it is set to the number of columns in the table, or to the
** largest index of any column of the table that is actually used.
**
@@ -81682,7 +81682,7 @@ case OP_OpenWrite:
/* Set the VdbeCursor.isTable variable. Previous versions of
** SQLite used to check if the root-page flags were sane at this point
** and report database corruption if they were not, but this check has
- ** since moved into the btree layer. */
+ ** since moved into the btree layer. */
pCur->isTable = pOp->p4type!=P4_KEYINFO;
open_cursor_set_hints:
@@ -81702,7 +81702,7 @@ open_cursor_set_hints:
** Synopsis: nColumn=P2
**
** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
-** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
+** The cursor is always opened read/write even if
** the main database is read-only. The ephemeral
** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
**
@@ -81724,12 +81724,12 @@ open_cursor_set_hints:
** by this opcode will be used for automatically created transient
** indices in joins.
*/
-case OP_OpenAutoindex:
+case OP_OpenAutoindex:
case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
VdbeCursor *pCx;
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo;
- static const int vfsFlags =
+ static const int vfsFlags =
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -81741,7 +81741,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
pCx->nullRow = 1;
pCx->isEphemeral = 1;
- rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBtx,
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeOpen(db->pVfs, 0, db, &pCx->pBtx,
BTREE_OMIT_JOURNAL | BTREE_SINGLE | pOp->p5, vfsFlags);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBtx, 1);
@@ -81755,7 +81755,7 @@ case OP_OpenEphemeral: {
if( (pCx->pKeyInfo = pKeyInfo = pOp->p4.pKeyInfo)!=0 ){
int pgno;
assert( pOp->p4type==P4_KEYINFO );
- rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBtx, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
+ rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBtx, &pgno, BTREE_BLOBKEY | pOp->p5);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 );
assert( pKeyInfo->db==db );
@@ -81823,7 +81823,7 @@ case OP_SequenceTest: {
**
** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
** row of data. The content of that one row is the content of memory
-** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
+** register P2. In other words, cursor P1 becomes an alias for the
** MEM_Blob content contained in register P2.
**
** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is used to hold a single
@@ -81883,13 +81883,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
/* Opcode: SeekGE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as the key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** greater than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** If the cursor P1 was opened using the OPFLAG_SEEKEQ flag, then this
@@ -81908,13 +81908,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
/* Opcode: SeekGT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
-** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that
+** is greater than the key value. If there are no records greater than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
@@ -81923,16 +81923,16 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
**
** See also: Found, NotFound, SeekLt, SeekGe, SeekLe
*/
-/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
+/* Opcode: SeekLT P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than the key value. If there are no records less than
** the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -81944,13 +81944,13 @@ case OP_ColumnsUsed: {
/* Opcode: SeekLE P1 P2 P3 P4 *
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
-** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
-** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
-** that are used as an unpacked index key.
+** If cursor P1 refers to an SQL table (B-Tree that uses integer keys),
+** use the value in register P3 as a key. If cursor P1 refers
+** to an SQL index, then P3 is the first in an array of P4 registers
+** that are used as an unpacked index key.
**
-** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
-** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
+** Reposition cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that
+** is less than or equal to the key value. If there are no records
** less than or equal to the key and P2 is not zero, then jump to P2.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in reverse order,
@@ -82041,7 +82041,7 @@ case OP_SeekGT: { /* jump, in3 */
assert( (OP_SeekLT & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekGE & 0x0001) );
if( (oc & 0x0001)==(OP_SeekLT & 0x0001) ) oc++;
}
- }
+ }
rc = sqlite3BtreeMovetoUnpacked(pC->uc.pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res);
pC->movetoTarget = iKey; /* Used by OP_Delete */
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -82156,9 +82156,9 @@ seek_not_found:
** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If
** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
** record.
-**
+**
** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4
-** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
+** is not the prefix of any entry in P1 then a jump is made to P2. If P1
** does contain an entry whose prefix matches the P3/P4 record then control
** falls through to the next instruction and P1 is left pointing at the
** matching entry.
@@ -82175,7 +82175,7 @@ seek_not_found:
** If P4==0 then register P3 holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord. If
** P4>0 then register P3 is the first of P4 registers that form an unpacked
** record.
-**
+**
** Cursor P1 is on an index btree. If the record identified by P3 and P4
** contains any NULL value, jump immediately to P2. If all terms of the
** record are not-NULL then a check is done to determine if any row in the
@@ -82277,9 +82277,9 @@ case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */
**
** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
** keys). If register P3 does not contain an integer or if P1 does not
-** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
+** contain a record with rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2.
** Or, if P2 is 0, raise an SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain
-** a record with rowid P3 then
+** a record with rowid P3 then
** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
@@ -82302,7 +82302,7 @@ case OP_Found: { /* jump, in3 */
** P1 is the index of a cursor open on an SQL table btree (with integer
** keys). P3 is an integer rowid. If P1 does not contain a record with
** rowid P3 then jump immediately to P2. Or, if P2 is 0, raise an
-** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
+** SQLITE_CORRUPT error. If P1 does contain a record with rowid P3 then
** leave the cursor pointing at that record and fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
@@ -82372,7 +82372,7 @@ case OP_NotExists: /* jump, in3 */
** Find the next available sequence number for cursor P1.
** Write the sequence number into register P2.
** The sequence number on the cursor is incremented after this
-** instruction.
+** instruction.
*/
case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1nCursor );
@@ -82392,9 +82392,9 @@ case OP_Sequence: { /* out2 */
** table that cursor P1 points to. The new record number is written
** written to register P2.
**
-** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
+** If P3>0 then P3 is a register in the root frame of this VDBE that holds
** the largest previously generated record number. No new record numbers are
-** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
+** allowed to be less than this value. When this value reaches its maximum,
** an SQLITE_FULL error is generated. The P3 register is updated with the '
** generated record number. This P3 mechanism is used to help implement the
** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
@@ -82542,8 +82542,8 @@ case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */
** is part of an INSERT operation. The difference is only important to
** the update hook.
**
-** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
-** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
+** Parameter P4 may point to a Table structure, or may be NULL. If it is
+** not NULL, then the update-hook (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked
** following a successful insert.
**
** (WARNING/TODO: If P1 is a pseudo-cursor and P2 is dynamically
@@ -82561,7 +82561,7 @@ case OP_NewRowid: { /* out2 */
** This works exactly like OP_Insert except that the key is the
** integer value P3, not the value of the integer stored in register P3.
*/
-case OP_Insert:
+case OP_Insert:
case OP_InsertInt: {
Mem *pData; /* MEM cell holding data for the record to be inserted */
Mem *pKey; /* MEM cell holding key for the record */
@@ -82608,7 +82608,7 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
/* Invoke the pre-update hook, if any */
- if( db->xPreUpdateCallback
+ if( db->xPreUpdateCallback
&& pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE
&& !(pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
){
@@ -82656,7 +82656,7 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
** the cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous
** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
** the next Next instruction will be a no-op. As a result, in this case
-** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
+** it is ok to delete a record from within a Next loop. If
** OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION bit of P5 is clear, then the cursor will be
** left in an undefined state.
**
@@ -82672,11 +82672,11 @@ case OP_InsertInt: {
** P1 must not be pseudo-table. It has to be a real table with
** multiple rows.
**
-** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
+** If P4 is not NULL then it points to a Table object. In this case either
** the update or pre-update hook, or both, may be invoked. The P1 cursor must
-** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
-** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
-** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
+** have been positioned using OP_NotFound prior to invoking this opcode in
+** this case. Specifically, if one is configured, the pre-update hook is
+** invoked if P4 is not NULL. The update-hook is invoked if one is configured,
** P4 is not NULL, and the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag is set in P2.
**
** If the OPFLAG_ISUPDATE flag is set in P2, then P3 contains the address
@@ -82710,7 +82710,7 @@ case OP_Delete: {
/* If the update-hook or pre-update-hook will be invoked, set zDb to
** the name of the db to pass as to it. Also set local pTab to a copy
** of p4.pTab. Finally, if p5 is true, indicating that this cursor was
- ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
+ ** last moved with OP_Next or OP_Prev, not Seek or NotFound, set
** VdbeCursor.movetoTarget to the current rowid. */
if( pOp->p4type==P4_TABLE && HAS_UPDATE_HOOK(db) ){
assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
@@ -82728,20 +82728,20 @@ case OP_Delete: {
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
/* Invoke the pre-update-hook if required. */
if( db->xPreUpdateCallback && pOp->p4.pTab ){
- assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
- || HasRowid(pTab)==0
- || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
+ assert( !(opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE)
+ || HasRowid(pTab)==0
+ || (aMem[pOp->p3].flags & MEM_Int)
);
sqlite3VdbePreUpdateHook(p, pC,
- (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
+ (opflags & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_DELETE,
zDb, pTab, pC->movetoTarget,
pOp->p3
);
}
if( opflags & OPFLAG_ISNOOP ) break;
#endif
-
- /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
+
+ /* Only flags that can be set are SAVEPOISTION and AUXDELETE */
assert( (pOp->p5 & ~(OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION|OPFLAG_AUXDELETE))==0 );
assert( OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION==BTREE_SAVEPOSITION );
assert( OPFLAG_AUXDELETE==BTREE_AUXDELETE );
@@ -82794,7 +82794,7 @@ case OP_ResetCount: {
** Synopsis: if key(P1)!=trim(r[P3],P4) goto P2
**
** P1 is a sorter cursor. This instruction compares a prefix of the
-** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
+** record blob in register P3 against a prefix of the entry that
** the sorter cursor currently points to. Only the first P4 fields
** of r[P3] and the sorter record are compared.
**
@@ -82852,10 +82852,10 @@ case OP_SorterData: {
/* Opcode: RowData P1 P2 P3 * *
** Synopsis: r[P2]=data
**
-** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
+** Write into register P2 the complete row content for the row at
** which cursor P1 is currently pointing.
-** There is no interpretation of the data.
-** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
+** There is no interpretation of the data.
+** It is just copied onto the P2 register exactly as
** it is found in the database file.
**
** If cursor P1 is an index, then the content is the key of the row.
@@ -82995,7 +82995,7 @@ case OP_NullRow: {
/* Opcode: Last P1 P2 P3 * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Prev instruction for P1
** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
@@ -83077,10 +83077,10 @@ case OP_Sort: { /* jump */
}
/* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 * * *
**
-** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
+** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1
** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
** If the table or index is empty, jump immediately to P2.
-** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
+** If the table or index is not empty, fall through to the following
** instruction.
**
** This opcode leaves the cursor configured to move in forward order,
@@ -83267,7 +83267,7 @@ next_tail:
** run faster by avoiding an unnecessary seek on cursor P1. However,
** the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT flag must only be set if there have been no prior
** seeks on the cursor or if the most recent seek used a key equivalent
-** to P2.
+** to P2.
**
** This instruction only works for indices. The equivalent instruction
** for tables is OP_Insert.
@@ -83303,7 +83303,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */
x.aMem = aMem + pOp->p3;
x.nMem = (u16)pOp->p4.i;
rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->uc.pCursor, &x,
- (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)),
+ (pOp->p5 & (OPFLAG_APPEND|OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION)),
((pOp->p5 & OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT) ? pC->seekResult : 0)
);
assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
@@ -83317,7 +83317,7 @@ case OP_IdxInsert: { /* in2 */
** Synopsis: key=r[P2@P3]
**
** The content of P3 registers starting at register P2 form
-** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
+** an unpacked index key. This opcode removes that entry from the
** index opened by cursor P1.
*/
case OP_IdxDelete: {
@@ -83364,8 +83364,8 @@ case OP_IdxDelete: {
**
** P4 may be an array of integers (type P4_INTARRAY) containing
** one entry for each column in the P3 table. If array entry a(i)
-** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
-** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
+** is non-zero, then reading column a(i)-1 from cursor P3 is
+** equivalent to performing the deferred seek and then reading column i
** from P1. This information is stored in P3 and used to redirect
** reads against P3 over to P1, thus possibly avoiding the need to
** seek and read cursor P3.
@@ -83436,9 +83436,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */
/* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
** fields at the end.
**
** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the key value
@@ -83447,9 +83447,9 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */
/* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
-** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
-** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY. Compare this key value against the index
+** that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID
** fields at the end.
**
** If the P1 index entry is greater than the key value
@@ -83458,7 +83458,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */
/* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against
** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -83469,7 +83469,7 @@ case OP_IdxRowid: { /* out2 */
/* Opcode: IdxLE P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
** Synopsis: key=r[P3@P4]
**
-** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
+** The P4 register values beginning with P3 form an unpacked index
** key that omits the PRIMARY KEY or ROWID. Compare this key value against
** the index that P1 is currently pointing to, ignoring the PRIMARY KEY or
** ROWID on the P1 index.
@@ -83536,8 +83536,8 @@ case OP_IdxGE: { /* jump */
** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all
** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database. The former
** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
-** is stored in register P2. If no page
-** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already
+** is stored in register P2. If no page
+** movement was required (because the table being dropped was already
** the last one in the database) then a zero is stored in register P2.
** If AUTOVACUUM is disabled then a zero is stored in register P2.
**
@@ -83586,8 +83586,8 @@ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */
** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
**
** If the P3 value is non-zero, then the table referred to must be an
-** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
-** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
+** intkey table (an SQL table, not an index). In this case the row change
+** count is incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
** If P3 is greater than zero, then the value stored in register P3 is
** also incremented by the number of rows in the table being cleared.
**
@@ -83595,7 +83595,7 @@ case OP_Destroy: { /* out2 */
*/
case OP_Clear: {
int nChange;
-
+
nChange = 0;
assert( p->readOnly==0 );
assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, pOp->p2) );
@@ -83624,7 +83624,7 @@ case OP_Clear: {
*/
case OP_ResetSorter: {
VdbeCursor *pC;
-
+
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1nCursor );
pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
assert( pC!=0 );
@@ -83691,7 +83691,7 @@ case OP_CreateTable: { /* out2 */
/* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 * * P4 *
**
** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1
-** that match the WHERE clause P4.
+** that match the WHERE clause P4.
**
** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine,
** then runs the new virtual machine. It is thus a re-entrant opcode.
@@ -83703,7 +83703,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
InitData initData;
/* Any prepared statement that invokes this opcode will hold mutexes
- ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking
+ ** on every btree. This is a prerequisite for invoking
** sqlite3InitCallback().
*/
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
@@ -83743,7 +83743,7 @@ case OP_ParseSchema: {
}
goto abort_due_to_error;
}
- break;
+ break;
}
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE)
@@ -83757,7 +83757,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1nDb );
rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, pOp->p1);
if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
- break;
+ break;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) */
@@ -83765,7 +83765,7 @@ case OP_LoadAnalysis: {
**
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
** the table named P4 in database P1. This is called after a table
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
** the internal representation of the
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
*/
@@ -83791,7 +83791,7 @@ case OP_DropIndex: {
**
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
** the trigger named P4 in database P1. This is called after a trigger
-** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
+** is dropped from disk (using the Destroy opcode) in order to keep
** the internal representation of the
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
*/
@@ -83810,7 +83810,7 @@ case OP_DropTrigger: {
**
** The register P3 contains the maximum number of allowed errors.
** At most reg(P3) errors will be reported.
-** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
+** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as reg(P1) errors are
** seen. Reg(P1) is updated with the number of errors remaining.
**
** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integers
@@ -83888,7 +83888,7 @@ case OP_RowSetRead: { /* jump, in1, out3 */
i64 val;
pIn1 = &aMem[pOp->p1];
- if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0
+ if( (pIn1->flags & MEM_RowSet)==0
|| sqlite3RowSetNext(pIn1->u.pRowSet, &val)==0
){
/* The boolean index is empty */
@@ -83962,13 +83962,13 @@ case OP_RowSetTest: { /* jump, in1, in3 */
/* Opcode: Program P1 P2 P3 P4 P5
**
-** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
+** Execute the trigger program passed as P4 (type P4_SUBPROGRAM).
**
-** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
-** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
-** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
-** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
-** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
+** P1 contains the address of the memory cell that contains the first memory
+** cell in an array of values used as arguments to the sub-program. P2
+** contains the address to jump to if the sub-program throws an IGNORE
+** exception using the RAISE() function. Register P3 contains the address
+** of a memory cell in this (the parent) VM that is used to allocate the
** memory required by the sub-vdbe at runtime.
**
** P4 is a pointer to the VM containing the trigger program.
@@ -83988,17 +83988,17 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */
pProgram = pOp->p4.pProgram;
pRt = &aMem[pOp->p3];
assert( pProgram->nOp>0 );
-
- /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
+
+ /* If the p5 flag is clear, then recursive invocation of triggers is
** disabled for backwards compatibility (p5 is set if this sub-program
** is really a trigger, not a foreign key action, and the flag set
** and cleared by the "PRAGMA recursive_triggers" command is clear).
- **
- ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
- ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
- ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
+ **
+ ** It is recursive invocation of triggers, at the SQL level, that is
+ ** disabled. In some cases a single trigger may generate more than one
+ ** SubProgram (if the trigger may be executed with more than one different
** ON CONFLICT algorithm). SubProgram structures associated with a
- ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
+ ** single trigger all have the same value for the SubProgram.token
** variable. */
if( pOp->p5 ){
t = pProgram->token;
@@ -84014,10 +84014,10 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */
/* Register pRt is used to store the memory required to save the state
** of the current program, and the memory required at runtime to execute
- ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
+ ** the trigger program. If this trigger has been fired before, then pRt
** is already allocated. Otherwise, it must be initialized. */
if( (pRt->flags&MEM_Frame)==0 ){
- /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
+ /* SubProgram.nMem is set to the number of memory cells used by the
** program stored in SubProgram.aOp. As well as these, one memory
** cell is required for each cursor used by the program. Set local
** variable nMem (and later, VdbeFrame.nChildMem) to this value.
@@ -84058,7 +84058,7 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */
}
}else{
pFrame = pRt->u.pFrame;
- assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
+ assert( pProgram->nMem+pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildMem
|| (pProgram->nCsr==0 && pProgram->nMem+1==pFrame->nChildMem) );
assert( pProgram->nCsr==pFrame->nChildCsr );
assert( (int)(pOp - aOp)==pFrame->pc );
@@ -84090,10 +84090,10 @@ case OP_Program: { /* jump */
/* Opcode: Param P1 P2 * * *
**
-** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
-** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
-** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
-** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
+** This opcode is only ever present in sub-programs called via the
+** OP_Program instruction. Copy a value currently stored in a memory
+** cell of the calling (parent) frame to cell P2 in the current frames
+** address space. This is used by trigger programs to access the new.*
** and old.* values.
**
** The address of the cell in the parent frame is determined by adding
@@ -84105,7 +84105,7 @@ case OP_Param: { /* out2 */
Mem *pIn;
pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
pFrame = p->pFrame;
- pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
+ pIn = &pFrame->aMem[pOp->p1 + pFrame->aOp[pFrame->pc].p1];
sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pOut, pIn, MEM_Ephem);
break;
}
@@ -84117,8 +84117,8 @@ case OP_Param: { /* out2 */
** Synopsis: fkctr[P1]+=P2
**
** Increment a "constraint counter" by P2 (P2 may be negative or positive).
-** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
-** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
+** If P1 is non-zero, the database constraint counter is incremented
+** (deferred foreign key constraints). Otherwise, if P1 is zero, the
** statement counter is incremented (immediate foreign key constraints).
*/
case OP_FkCounter: {
@@ -84136,7 +84136,7 @@ case OP_FkCounter: {
** Synopsis: if fkctr[P1]==0 goto P2
**
** This opcode tests if a foreign key constraint-counter is currently zero.
-** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
+** If so, jump to instruction P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next
** instruction.
**
** If P1 is non-zero, then the jump is taken if the database constraint-counter
@@ -84162,7 +84162,7 @@ case OP_FkIfZero: { /* jump */
**
** P1 is a register in the root frame of this VM (the root frame is
** different from the current frame if this instruction is being executed
-** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
+** within a sub-program). Set the value of register P1 to the maximum of
** its current value and the value in register P2.
**
** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
@@ -84222,7 +84222,7 @@ case OP_IfPos: { /* jump, in1 */
** and r[P2] is set to be the value of the LIMIT, r[P1].
**
** if r[P1] is zero or negative, that means there is no LIMIT
-** and r[P2] is set to -1.
+** and r[P2] is set to -1.
**
** Otherwise, r[P2] is set to the sum of r[P1] and r[P3].
*/
@@ -84254,7 +84254,7 @@ case OP_OffsetLimit: { /* in1, out2, in3 */
**
** Register P1 must contain an integer. If the content of register P1 is
** initially greater than zero, then decrement the value in register P1.
-** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
+** If it is non-zero (negative or positive) and then also jump to P2.
** If register P1 is initially zero, leave it unchanged and fall through.
*/
case OP_IfNotZero: { /* jump, in1 */
@@ -84447,9 +84447,9 @@ case OP_Checkpoint: {
}
for(i=0, pMem = &aMem[pOp->p3]; i<3; i++, pMem++){
sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pMem, (i64)aRes[i]);
- }
+ }
break;
-};
+};
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PRAGMA
@@ -84475,9 +84475,9 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */
pOut = out2Prerelease(p, pOp);
eNew = pOp->p3;
- assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
- || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
- || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
+ assert( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_DELETE
+ || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_TRUNCATE
+ || eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_PERSIST
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_MEMORY
|| eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
@@ -84496,7 +84496,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */
zFilename = sqlite3PagerFilename(pPager, 1);
/* Do not allow a transition to journal_mode=WAL for a database
- ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
+ ** in temporary storage or if the VFS does not support shared memory
*/
if( eNew==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL
&& (sqlite3Strlen30(zFilename)==0 /* Temp file */
@@ -84516,12 +84516,12 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */
);
goto abort_due_to_error;
}else{
-
+
if( eOld==PAGER_JOURNALMODE_WAL ){
/* If leaving WAL mode, close the log file. If successful, the call
- ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
- ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
- ** after a successful return.
+ ** to PagerCloseWal() checkpoints and deletes the write-ahead-log
+ ** file. An EXCLUSIVE lock may still be held on the database file
+ ** after a successful return.
*/
rc = sqlite3PagerCloseWal(pPager, db);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -84532,7 +84532,7 @@ case OP_JournalMode: { /* out2 */
** as an intermediate */
sqlite3PagerSetJournalMode(pPager, PAGER_JOURNALMODE_OFF);
}
-
+
/* Open a transaction on the database file. Regardless of the journal
** mode, this transaction always uses a rollback journal.
*/
@@ -84602,7 +84602,7 @@ case OP_IncrVacuum: { /* jump */
** is executed using sqlite3_step() it will either automatically
** reprepare itself (if it was originally created using sqlite3_prepare_v2())
** or it will fail with SQLITE_SCHEMA.
-**
+**
** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
** then only the currently executing statement is expired.
*/
@@ -84620,7 +84620,7 @@ case OP_Expire: {
** Synopsis: iDb=P1 root=P2 write=P3
**
** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
-** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
+** the shared-cache feature is enabled.
**
** P1 is the index of the database in sqlite3.aDb[] of the database
** on which the lock is acquired. A readlock is obtained if P3==0 or
@@ -84634,7 +84634,7 @@ case OP_Expire: {
case OP_TableLock: {
u8 isWriteLock = (u8)pOp->p3;
if( isWriteLock || 0==(db->flags&SQLITE_ReadUncommitted) ){
- int p1 = pOp->p1;
+ int p1 = pOp->p1;
assert( p1>=0 && p1nDb );
assert( DbMaskTest(p->btreeMask, p1) );
assert( isWriteLock==0 || isWriteLock==1 );
@@ -84654,7 +84654,7 @@ case OP_TableLock: {
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/* Opcode: VBegin * * * P4 *
**
-** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
+** P4 may be a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. If so, call the
** xBegin method for that table.
**
** Also, whether or not P4 is set, check that this is not being called from
@@ -84674,7 +84674,7 @@ case OP_VBegin: {
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/* Opcode: VCreate P1 P2 * * *
**
-** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
+** P2 is a register that holds the name of a virtual table in database
** P1. Call the xCreate method for that table.
*/
case OP_VCreate: {
@@ -84828,7 +84828,7 @@ case OP_VFilter: { /* jump */
** Synopsis: r[P3]=vcolumn(P2)
**
** Store the value of the P2-th column of
-** the row of the virtual-table that the
+** the row of the virtual-table that the
** P1 cursor is pointing to into register P3.
*/
case OP_VColumn: {
@@ -84894,7 +84894,7 @@ case OP_VNext: { /* jump */
/* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
- ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
+ ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that
** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
*/
@@ -84948,23 +84948,23 @@ case OP_VRename: {
**
** P4 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
-** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
-** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
+** are contiguous memory cells starting at P3 to pass to the xUpdate
+** invocation. The value in register (P3+P2-1) corresponds to the
** p2th element of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
**
** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to memory cell P3)
-** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
-** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
-** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
-** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
+** is the rowid of a row to delete. If argv[0] is NULL then no
+** deletion occurs. The argv[1] element is the rowid of the new
+** row. This can be NULL to have the virtual table select the new
+** rowid for itself. The subsequent elements in the array are
** the values of columns in the new row.
**
** If P2==1 then no insert is performed. argv[0] is the rowid of
** a row to delete.
**
** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
-** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
+** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid()
** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
**
** P5 is the error actions (OE_Replace, OE_Fail, OE_Ignore, etc) to
@@ -84979,7 +84979,7 @@ case OP_VUpdate: {
Mem **apArg;
Mem *pX;
- assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
+ assert( pOp->p2==1 || pOp->p5==OE_Fail || pOp->p5==OE_Rollback
|| pOp->p5==OE_Abort || pOp->p5==OE_Ignore || pOp->p5==OE_Replace
);
assert( p->readOnly==0 );
@@ -85230,7 +85230,7 @@ abort_due_to_error:
p->rc = rc;
sqlite3SystemError(db, rc);
testcase( sqlite3GlobalConfig.xLog!=0 );
- sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
+ sqlite3_log(rc, "statement aborts at %d: [%s] %s",
(int)(pOp - aOp), p->zSql, p->zErrMsg);
sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
if( rc==SQLITE_IOERR_NOMEM ) sqlite3OomFault(db);
@@ -85246,8 +85246,8 @@ vdbe_return:
testcase( nVmStep>0 );
p->aCounter[SQLITE_STMTSTATUS_VM_STEP] += (int)nVmStep;
sqlite3VdbeLeave(p);
- assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
- || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
+ assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nExtraDelete==0
+ || sqlite3_strlike("DELETE%",p->zSql,0)!=0
);
return rc;
@@ -85331,7 +85331,7 @@ struct Incrblob {
** sqlite3DbFree().
**
** If an error does occur, then the b-tree cursor is closed. All subsequent
-** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will
+** calls to sqlite3_blob_read(), blob_write() or blob_reopen() will
** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT.
*/
static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){
@@ -85339,7 +85339,7 @@ static int blobSeekToRow(Incrblob *p, sqlite3_int64 iRow, char **pzErr){
char *zErr = 0; /* Error message */
Vdbe *v = (Vdbe *)p->pStmt;
- /* Set the value of register r[1] in the SQL statement to integer iRow.
+ /* Set the value of register r[1] in the SQL statement to integer iRow.
** This is done directly as a performance optimization
*/
v->aMem[1].flags = MEM_Int;
@@ -85485,7 +85485,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
}
/* If the value is being opened for writing, check that the
- ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key.
+ ** column is not indexed, and that it is not part of a foreign key.
*/
if( wrFlag ){
const char *zFault = 0;
@@ -85494,7 +85494,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
/* Check that the column is not part of an FK child key definition. It
** is not necessary to check if it is part of a parent key, as parent
- ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this
+ ** key columns must be indexed. The check below will pick up this
** case. */
FKey *pFKey;
for(pFKey=pTab->pFKey; pFKey; pFKey=pFKey->pNextFrom){
@@ -85528,8 +85528,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
pBlob->pStmt = (sqlite3_stmt *)sqlite3VdbeCreate(pParse);
assert( pBlob->pStmt || db->mallocFailed );
if( pBlob->pStmt ){
-
- /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified
+
+ /* This VDBE program seeks a btree cursor to the identified
** db/table/row entry. The reason for using a vdbe program instead
** of writing code to use the b-tree layer directly is that the
** vdbe program will take advantage of the various transaction,
@@ -85537,11 +85537,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
**
** After seeking the cursor, the vdbe executes an OP_ResultRow.
** Code external to the Vdbe then "borrows" the b-tree cursor and
- ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and
+ ** uses it to implement the blob_read(), blob_write() and
** blob_bytes() functions.
**
** The sqlite3_blob_close() function finalizes the vdbe program,
- ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the
+ ** which closes the b-tree cursor and (possibly) commits the
** transaction.
*/
static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
@@ -85558,14 +85558,14 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
int iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
VdbeOp *aOp;
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, wrFlag,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Transaction, iDb, wrFlag,
pTab->pSchema->schema_cookie,
pTab->pSchema->iGeneration);
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, 1);
aOp = sqlite3VdbeAddOpList(v, ArraySize(openBlob), openBlob, iLn);
/* Make sure a mutex is held on the table to be accessed */
- sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
+ sqlite3VdbeUsesBtree(v, iDb);
if( db->mallocFailed==0 ){
assert( aOp!=0 );
@@ -85581,17 +85581,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
if( db->mallocFailed==0 ){
#endif
- /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2
+ /* Remove either the OP_OpenWrite or OpenRead. Set the P2
** parameter of the other to pTab->tnum. */
if( wrFlag ) aOp[1].opcode = OP_OpenWrite;
aOp[1].p2 = pTab->tnum;
- aOp[1].p3 = iDb;
+ aOp[1].p3 = iDb;
/* Configure the number of columns. Configure the cursor to
** think that the table has one more column than it really
** does. An OP_Column to retrieve this imaginary column will
** always return an SQL NULL. This is useful because it means
- ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type
+ ** we can invoke OP_Column to fill in the vdbe cursors type
** and offset cache without causing any IO.
*/
aOp[1].p4type = P4_INT32;
@@ -85604,7 +85604,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_open(
sqlite3VdbeMakeReady(v, pParse);
}
}
-
+
pBlob->iCol = iCol;
pBlob->db = db;
sqlite3BtreeLeaveAll(db);
@@ -85655,10 +85655,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_close(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){
** Perform a read or write operation on a blob
*/
static int blobReadWrite(
- sqlite3_blob *pBlob,
- void *z,
- int n,
- int iOffset,
+ sqlite3_blob *pBlob,
+ void *z,
+ int n,
+ int iOffset,
int (*xCall)(BtCursor*, u32, u32, void*)
){
int rc;
@@ -85688,14 +85688,14 @@ static int blobReadWrite(
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
if( xCall==sqlite3BtreePutData && db->xPreUpdateCallback ){
- /* If a pre-update hook is registered and this is a write cursor,
- ** invoke it here.
- **
+ /* If a pre-update hook is registered and this is a write cursor,
+ ** invoke it here.
+ **
** TODO: The preupdate-hook is passed SQLITE_DELETE, even though this
** operation should really be an SQLITE_UPDATE. This is probably
- ** incorrect, but is convenient because at this point the new.* values
- ** are not easily obtainable. And for the sessions module, an
- ** SQLITE_UPDATE where the PK columns do not change is handled in the
+ ** incorrect, but is convenient because at this point the new.* values
+ ** are not easily obtainable. And for the sessions module, an
+ ** SQLITE_UPDATE where the PK columns do not change is handled in the
** same way as an SQLITE_DELETE (the SQLITE_DELETE code is actually
** slightly more efficient). Since you cannot write to a PK column
** using the incremental-blob API, this works. For the sessions module
@@ -85755,8 +85755,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_bytes(sqlite3_blob *pBlob){
**
** If an error occurs, or if the specified row does not exist or does not
** contain a blob or text value, then an error code is returned and the
-** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all
-** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close())
+** database handle error code and message set. If this happens, then all
+** subsequent calls to sqlite3_blob_xxx() functions (except blob_close())
** immediately return SQLITE_ABORT.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
@@ -85850,7 +85850,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
** is like Close() followed by Init() only
** much faster.
**
-** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can
+** The interfaces above must be called in a particular order. Write() can
** only occur in between Init()/Reset() and Rewind(). Next(), Rowkey(), and
** Compare() can only occur in between Rewind() and Close()/Reset(). i.e.
**
@@ -85858,16 +85858,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
** for each record: Write()
** Rewind()
** Rowkey()/Compare()
-** Next()
+** Next()
** Close()
**
** Algorithm:
**
-** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
+** Records passed to the sorter via calls to Write() are initially held
** unsorted in main memory. Assuming the amount of memory used never exceeds
** a threshold, when Rewind() is called the set of records is sorted using
** an in-memory merge sort. In this case, no temporary files are required
-** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
+** and subsequent calls to Rowkey(), Next() and Compare() read records
** directly from main memory.
**
** If the amount of space used to store records in main memory exceeds the
@@ -85877,10 +85877,10 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
** of PMAs may be created by merging existing PMAs together - for example
** merging two or more level-0 PMAs together creates a level-1 PMA.
**
-** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
+** The threshold for the amount of main memory to use before flushing
** records to a PMA is roughly the same as the limit configured for the
-** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
-** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
+** page-cache of the main database. Specifically, the threshold is set to
+** the value returned by "PRAGMA main.page_size" multipled by
** that returned by "PRAGMA main.cache_size", in bytes.
**
** If the sorter is running in single-threaded mode, then all PMAs generated
@@ -85897,7 +85897,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
** than zero, and (b) worker threads have been enabled at runtime by calling
** "PRAGMA threads=N" with some value of N greater than 0.
**
-** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
+** When Rewind() is called, any data remaining in memory is flushed to a
** final PMA. So at this point the data is stored in some number of sorted
** PMAs within temporary files on disk.
**
@@ -85909,16 +85909,16 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
**
** Or, if running in multi-threaded mode, then a background thread is
** launched to merge the existing PMAs. Once the background thread has
-** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
+** merged T bytes of data into a single sorted PMA, the main thread
** begins reading keys from that PMA while the background thread proceeds
** with merging the next T bytes of data. And so on.
**
-** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
+** Parameter T is set to half the value of the memory threshold used
** by Write() above to determine when to create a new PMA.
**
-** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
-** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
-** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
+** If there are more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs in total when
+** Rewind() is called, then a hierarchy of incremental-merges is used.
+** First, T bytes of data from the first SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT PMAs on
** disk are merged together. Then T bytes of data from the second set, and
** so on, such that no operation ever merges more than SORTER_MAX_MERGE_COUNT
** PMAs at a time. This done is to improve locality.
@@ -85933,7 +85933,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_blob_reopen(sqlite3_blob *pBlob, sqlite3_int64 iRow){
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/* #include "vdbeInt.h" */
-/*
+/*
** If SQLITE_DEBUG_SORTER_THREADS is defined, this module outputs various
** messages to stderr that may be helpful in understanding the performance
** characteristics of the sorter in multi-threaded mode.
@@ -85962,7 +85962,7 @@ typedef struct SorterList SorterList; /* In-memory list of records */
typedef struct IncrMerger IncrMerger; /* Read & merge multiple PMAs */
/*
-** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
+** A container for a temp file handle and the current amount of data
** stored in the file.
*/
struct SorterFile {
@@ -86002,17 +86002,17 @@ struct SorterList {
** the MergeEngine.nTree variable.
**
** The final (N/2) elements of aTree[] contain the results of comparing
-** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
+** pairs of PMA keys together. Element i contains the result of
** comparing aReadr[2*i-N] and aReadr[2*i-N+1]. Whichever key is smaller, the
-** aTree element is set to the index of it.
+** aTree element is set to the index of it.
**
** For the purposes of this comparison, EOF is considered greater than any
** other key value. If the keys are equal (only possible with two EOF
** values), it doesn't matter which index is stored.
**
-** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
+** The (N/4) elements of aTree[] that precede the final (N/2) described
** above contains the index of the smallest of each block of 4 PmaReaders
-** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
+** And so on. So that aTree[1] contains the index of the PmaReader that
** currently points to the smallest key value. aTree[0] is unused.
**
** Example:
@@ -86028,7 +86028,7 @@ struct SorterList {
**
** aTree[] = { X, 5 0, 5 0, 3, 5, 6 }
**
-** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
+** The current element is "Apple" (the value of the key indicated by
** PmaReader 5). When the Next() operation is invoked, PmaReader 5 will
** be advanced to the next key in its segment. Say the next key is
** "Eggplant":
@@ -86069,8 +86069,8 @@ struct MergeEngine {
** each thread requries its own UnpackedRecord object to unpack records in
** as part of comparison operations.
**
-** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
-** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
+** Before a background thread is launched, variable bDone is set to 0. Then,
+** right before it exits, the thread itself sets bDone to 1. This is used for
** two purposes:
**
** 1. When flushing the contents of memory to a level-0 PMA on disk, to
@@ -86101,7 +86101,7 @@ struct SortSubtask {
/*
-** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
+** Main sorter structure. A single instance of this is allocated for each
** sorter cursor created by the VDBE.
**
** mxKeysize:
@@ -86157,21 +86157,21 @@ struct PmaReader {
};
/*
-** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
+** Normally, a PmaReader object iterates through an existing PMA stored
** within a temp file. However, if the PmaReader.pIncr variable points to
** an object of the following type, it may be used to iterate/merge through
** multiple PMAs simultaneously.
**
-** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
-** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
+** There are two types of IncrMerger object - single (bUseThread==0) and
+** multi-threaded (bUseThread==1).
**
-** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
-** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
-** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
-** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
-** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
-** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
-** sorted record data from pMerger.
+** A multi-threaded IncrMerger object uses two temporary files - aFile[0]
+** and aFile[1]. Neither file is allowed to grow to more than mxSz bytes in
+** size. When the IncrMerger is initialized, it reads enough data from
+** pMerger to populate aFile[0]. It then sets variables within the
+** corresponding PmaReader object to read from that file and kicks off
+** a background thread to populate aFile[1] with the next mxSz bytes of
+** sorted record data from pMerger.
**
** When the PmaReader reaches the end of aFile[0], it blocks until the
** background thread has finished populating aFile[1]. It then exchanges
@@ -86182,7 +86182,7 @@ struct PmaReader {
**
** A single-threaded IncrMerger does not open any temporary files of its
** own. Instead, it has exclusive access to mxSz bytes of space beginning
-** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
+** at offset iStartOff of file pTask->file2. And instead of using a
** background thread to prepare data for the PmaReader, with a single
** threaded IncrMerger the allocate part of pTask->file2 is "refilled" with
** keys from pMerger by the calling thread whenever the PmaReader runs out
@@ -86294,7 +86294,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
assert( p->aBuffer );
- /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
+ /* If there is no more data to be read from the buffer, read the next
** p->nBuffer bytes of data from the file into it. Or, if there are less
** than p->nBuffer bytes remaining in the PMA, read all remaining data. */
iBuf = p->iReadOff % p->nBuffer;
@@ -86315,11 +86315,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReadBlob(
assert( rc!=SQLITE_IOERR_SHORT_READ );
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
- nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
+ nAvail = p->nBuffer - iBuf;
if( nByte<=nAvail ){
/* The requested data is available in the in-memory buffer. In this
- ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
+ ** case there is no need to make a copy of the data, just return a
** pointer into the buffer to the caller. */
*ppOut = &p->aBuffer[iBuf];
p->iReadOff += nByte;
@@ -86398,7 +86398,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReadVarint(PmaReader *p, u64 *pnOut){
/*
** Attempt to memory map file pFile. If successful, set *pp to point to the
-** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
+** new mapping and return SQLITE_OK. If the mapping is not attempted
** (because the file is too large or the VFS layer is configured not to use
** mmap), return SQLITE_OK and set *pp to NULL.
**
@@ -86419,7 +86419,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterMapFile(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterFile *pFile, u8 **pp){
/*
** Attach PmaReader pReadr to file pFile (if it is not already attached to
-** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK
+** that file) and seek it to offset iOff within the file. Return SQLITE_OK
** if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
*/
static int vdbePmaReaderSeek(
@@ -86509,11 +86509,11 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderNext(PmaReader *pReadr){
/*
** Initialize PmaReader pReadr to scan through the PMA stored in file pFile
-** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
-** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
+** starting at offset iStart and ending at offset iEof-1. This function
+** leaves the PmaReader pointing to the first key in the PMA (or EOF if the
** PMA is empty).
**
-** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
+** If the pnByte parameter is NULL, then it is assumed that the file
** contains a single PMA, and that that PMA omits the initial length varint.
*/
static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
@@ -86546,7 +86546,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderInit(
/*
** A version of vdbeSorterCompare() that assumes that it has already been
-** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
+** determined that the first field of key1 is equal to the first field of
** key2.
*/
static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
@@ -86564,7 +86564,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareTail(
}
/*
-** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
+** Compare key1 (buffer pKey1, size nKey1 bytes) with key2 (buffer pKey2,
** size nKey2 bytes). Use (pTask->pKeyInfo) for the collation sequences
** used by the comparison. Return the result of the comparison.
**
@@ -86709,7 +86709,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCompareInt(
** is non-zero and the sorter is able to guarantee a stable sort, nField
** is used instead. This is used when sorting records for a CREATE INDEX
** statement. In this case, keys are always delivered to the sorter in
-** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
+** order of the primary key, which happens to be make up the final part
** of the records being sorted. So if the sort is stable, there is never
** any reason to compare PK fields and they can be ignored for a small
** performance boost.
@@ -86809,7 +86809,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterInit(
}
}
- if( (pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField)<13
+ if( (pKeyInfo->nField+pKeyInfo->nXField)<13
&& (pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==0 || pKeyInfo->aColl[0]==db->pDfltColl)
){
pSorter->typeMask = SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER | SORTER_TYPE_TEXT;
@@ -86833,7 +86833,7 @@ static void vdbeSorterRecordFree(sqlite3 *db, SorterRecord *pRecord){
}
/*
-** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
+** Free all resources owned by the object indicated by argument pTask. All
** fields of *pTask are zeroed before returning.
*/
static void vdbeSortSubtaskCleanup(sqlite3 *db, SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -86932,7 +86932,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterCreateThread(
}
/*
-** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
+** Join all outstanding threads launched by SorterWrite() to create
** level-0 PMAs.
*/
static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
@@ -86941,10 +86941,10 @@ static int vdbeSorterJoinAll(VdbeSorter *pSorter, int rcin){
/* This function is always called by the main user thread.
**
- ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
+ ** If this function is being called after SorterRewind() has been called,
** it is possible that thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread
** is currently attempt to join one of the other threads. To avoid a race
- ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
+ ** condition where this thread also attempts to join the same object, join
** thread pSorter->aTask[pSorter->nTask-1].pThread first. */
for(i=pSorter->nTask-1; i>=0; i--){
SortSubtask *pTask = &pSorter->aTask[i];
@@ -87116,8 +87116,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterOpenTempFile(
}
/*
-** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
-** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
+** If it has not already been allocated, allocate the UnpackedRecord
+** structure at pTask->pUnpacked. Return SQLITE_OK if successful (or
** if no allocation was required), or SQLITE_NOMEM otherwise.
*/
static int vdbeSortAllocUnpacked(SortSubtask *pTask){
@@ -87180,14 +87180,14 @@ static SorterCompare vdbeSorterGetCompare(VdbeSorter *p){
if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_INTEGER ){
return vdbeSorterCompareInt;
}else if( p->typeMask==SORTER_TYPE_TEXT ){
- return vdbeSorterCompareText;
+ return vdbeSorterCompareText;
}
return vdbeSorterCompare;
}
/*
-** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
-** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
+** Sort the linked list of records headed at pTask->pList. Return
+** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code (i.e. SQLITE_NOMEM) if
** an error occurs.
*/
static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -87237,8 +87237,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterSort(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
pList->pList = p;
sqlite3_free(aSlot);
- assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
- || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
+ assert( pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_OK
+ || pTask->pUnpacked->errCode==SQLITE_NOMEM
);
return pTask->pUnpacked->errCode;
}
@@ -87279,8 +87279,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
memcpy(&p->aBuffer[p->iBufEnd], &pData[nData-nRem], nCopy);
p->iBufEnd += nCopy;
if( p->iBufEnd==p->nBuffer ){
- p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
- &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
+ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+ &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
);
p->iBufStart = p->iBufEnd = 0;
@@ -87295,7 +87295,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
/*
** Flush any buffered data to disk and clean up the PMA-writer object.
** The results of using the PMA-writer after this call are undefined.
-** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
+** Return SQLITE_OK if flushing the buffered data succeeds or is not
** required. Otherwise, return an SQLite error code.
**
** Before returning, set *piEof to the offset immediately following the
@@ -87304,8 +87304,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteBlob(PmaWriter *p, u8 *pData, int nData){
static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
int rc;
if( p->eFWErr==0 && ALWAYS(p->aBuffer) && p->iBufEnd>p->iBufStart ){
- p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
- &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
+ p->eFWErr = sqlite3OsWrite(p->pFd,
+ &p->aBuffer[p->iBufStart], p->iBufEnd - p->iBufStart,
p->iWriteOff + p->iBufStart
);
}
@@ -87317,11 +87317,11 @@ static int vdbePmaWriterFinish(PmaWriter *p, i64 *piEof){
}
/*
-** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
+** Write value iVal encoded as a varint to the PMA. Return
** SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error occurs.
*/
static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
- int nByte;
+ int nByte;
u8 aByte[10];
nByte = sqlite3PutVarint(aByte, iVal);
vdbePmaWriteBlob(p, aByte, nByte);
@@ -87329,7 +87329,7 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
/*
** Write the current contents of in-memory linked-list pList to a level-0
-** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
+** PMA in the temp file belonging to sub-task pTask. Return SQLITE_OK if
** successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
**
** The format of a PMA is:
@@ -87337,8 +87337,8 @@ static void vdbePmaWriteVarint(PmaWriter *p, u64 iVal){
** * A varint. This varint contains the total number of bytes of content
** in the PMA (not including the varint itself).
**
-** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
-** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
+** * One or more records packed end-to-end in order of ascending keys.
+** Each record consists of a varint followed by a blob of data (the
** key). The varint is the number of bytes in the blob of data.
*/
static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
@@ -87347,7 +87347,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterListToPMA(SortSubtask *pTask, SorterList *pList){
PmaWriter writer; /* Object used to write to the file */
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
- /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
+ /* Set iSz to the expected size of file pTask->file after writing the PMA.
** This is used by an assert() statement at the end of this function. */
i64 iSz = pList->szPMA + sqlite3VarintLen(pList->szPMA) + pTask->file.iEof;
#endif
@@ -87500,7 +87500,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
SortSubtask *pTask = 0; /* Thread context used to create new PMA */
int nWorker = (pSorter->nTask-1);
- /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
+ /* Set the flag to indicate that at least one PMA has been written.
** Or will be, anyhow. */
pSorter->bUsePMA = 1;
@@ -87510,7 +87510,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterFlushPMA(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
** the background thread from a sub-tasks previous turn is still running,
** skip it. If the first (pSorter->nTask-1) sub-tasks are all still busy,
** fall back to using the final sub-task. The first (pSorter->nTask-1)
- ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final
+ ** sub-tasks are prefered as they use background threads - the final
** sub-task uses the main thread. */
for(i=0; iiPrev + i + 1) % nWorker;
@@ -87588,14 +87588,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterWrite(
** If using the single large allocation mode (pSorter->aMemory!=0), then
** flush the contents of memory to a new PMA if (a) at least one value is
** already in memory and (b) the new value will not fit in memory.
- **
+ **
** Or, if using separate allocations for each record, flush the contents
** of memory to a PMA if either of the following are true:
**
- ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
+ ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
** than (page-size * cache-size), or
**
- ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
+ ** * The total memory allocated for the in-memory list is greater
** than (page-size * 10) and sqlite3HeapNearlyFull() returns true.
*/
nReq = pVal->n + sizeof(SorterRecord);
@@ -87730,11 +87730,11 @@ static int vdbeIncrBgPopulate(IncrMerger *pIncr){
** aFile[0] such that the PmaReader should start rereading it from the
** beginning.
**
-** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
-** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
+** For single-threaded objects, this is accomplished by literally reading
+** keys from pIncr->pMerger and repopulating aFile[0].
**
-** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
-** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
+** For multi-threaded objects, all that is required is to wait until the
+** background thread is finished (if it is not already) and then swap
** aFile[0] and aFile[1] in place. If the contents of pMerger have not
** been exhausted, this function also launches a new background thread
** to populate the new aFile[1].
@@ -87874,7 +87874,7 @@ static void vdbeMergeEngineCompare(
#define INCRINIT_TASK 1
#define INCRINIT_ROOT 2
-/*
+/*
** Forward reference required as the vdbeIncrMergeInit() and
** vdbePmaReaderIncrInit() routines are called mutually recursively when
** building a merge tree.
@@ -87883,7 +87883,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
/*
** Initialize the MergeEngine object passed as the second argument. Once this
-** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
+** function returns, the first key of merged data may be read from the
** MergeEngine object in the usual fashion.
**
** If argument eMode is INCRINIT_ROOT, then it is assumed that any IncrMerge
@@ -87893,8 +87893,8 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode);
** required is to call vdbePmaReaderNext() on each PmaReader to point it at
** its first key.
**
-** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
-** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
+** Otherwise, if eMode is any value other than INCRINIT_ROOT, then use
+** vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() to initialize each PmaReader that feeds data
** to pMerger.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
@@ -87944,19 +87944,19 @@ static int vdbeMergeEngineInit(
** object at (pReadr->pIncr).
**
** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_NORMAL, then all PmaReaders
-** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
-** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
+** in the sub-tree headed by pReadr are also initialized. Data is then
+** loaded into the buffers belonging to pReadr and it is set to point to
** the first key in its range.
**
** If argument eMode is set to INCRINIT_TASK, then pReadr is guaranteed
** to be a multi-threaded PmaReader and this function is being called in a
-** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
+** background thread. In this case all PmaReaders in the sub-tree are
** initialized as for INCRINIT_NORMAL and the aFile[1] buffer belonging to
** pReadr is populated. However, pReadr itself is not set up to point
** to its first key. A call to vdbePmaReaderNext() is still required to do
-** that.
+** that.
**
-** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
+** The reason this function does not call vdbePmaReaderNext() immediately
** in the INCRINIT_TASK case is that vdbePmaReaderNext() assumes that it has
** to block on thread (pTask->thread) before accessing aFile[1]. But, since
** this entire function is being run by thread (pTask->thread), that will
@@ -88012,12 +88012,12 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pIncr->bUseThread ){
/* Use the current thread to populate aFile[1], even though this
** PmaReader is multi-threaded. If this is an INCRINIT_TASK object,
- ** then this function is already running in background thread
- ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
+ ** then this function is already running in background thread
+ ** pIncr->pTask->thread.
**
- ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
+ ** If this is the INCRINIT_ROOT object, then it is running in the
** main VDBE thread. But that is Ok, as that thread cannot return
- ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
+ ** control to the VDBE or proceed with anything useful until the
** first results are ready from this merger object anyway.
*/
assert( eMode==INCRINIT_ROOT || eMode==INCRINIT_TASK );
@@ -88034,7 +88034,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
#if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
/*
-** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
+** The main routine for vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() operations run in
** background threads.
*/
static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
@@ -88052,8 +88052,8 @@ static void *vdbePmaReaderBgIncrInit(void *pCtx){
** (if pReadr->pIncr==0), then this function is a no-op. Otherwise, it invokes
** the vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit() function with the parameters passed to
** this routine to initialize the incremental merge.
-**
-** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
+**
+** If the IncrMerger object is multi-threaded (IncrMerger.bUseThread==1),
** then a background thread is launched to call vdbePmaReaderIncrMergeInit().
** Or, if the IncrMerger is single threaded, the same function is called
** using the current thread.
@@ -88083,7 +88083,7 @@ static int vdbePmaReaderIncrInit(PmaReader *pReadr, int eMode){
** to NULL and return an SQLite error code.
**
** When this function is called, *piOffset is set to the offset of the
-** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
+** first PMA to read from pTask->file. Assuming no error occurs, it is
** set to the offset immediately following the last byte of the last
** PMA before returning. If an error does occur, then the final value of
** *piOffset is undefined.
@@ -88193,12 +88193,12 @@ static int vdbeSorterAddToTree(
/*
** This function is called as part of a SorterRewind() operation on a sorter
** that has already written two or more level-0 PMAs to one or more temp
-** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
+** files. It builds a tree of MergeEngine/IncrMerger/PmaReader objects that
** can be used to incrementally merge all PMAs on disk.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppOut set to point to the
** MergeEngine object at the root of the tree before returning. Or, if an
-** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
+** error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the final value
** of *ppOut is undefined.
*/
static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
@@ -88210,8 +88210,8 @@ static int vdbeSorterMergeTreeBuild(
int iTask;
#if SQLITE_MAX_WORKER_THREADS>0
- /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
- ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
+ /* If the sorter uses more than one task, then create the top-level
+ ** MergeEngine here. This MergeEngine will read data from exactly
** one PmaReader per sub-task. */
assert( pSorter->bUseThreads || pSorter->nTask==1 );
if( pSorter->nTask>1 ){
@@ -88320,7 +88320,7 @@ static int vdbeSorterSetupMerge(VdbeSorter *pSorter){
}
for(iTask=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && iTasknTask; iTask++){
/* Check that:
- **
+ **
** a) The incremental merge object is configured to use the
** right task, and
** b) If it is using task (nTask-1), it is configured to run
@@ -88383,7 +88383,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
return rc;
}
- /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
+ /* Write the current in-memory list to a PMA. When the VdbeSorterWrite()
** function flushes the contents of memory to disk, it immediately always
** creates a new list consisting of a single key immediately afterwards.
** So the list is never empty at this point. */
@@ -88395,7 +88395,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterRewind(const VdbeCursor *pCsr, int *pbEof){
vdbeSorterRewindDebug("rewind");
- /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
+ /* Assuming no errors have occurred, set up a merger structure to
** incrementally read and merge all remaining PMAs. */
assert( pSorter->pReader==0 );
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -88444,7 +88444,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VdbeSorterNext(sqlite3 *db, const VdbeCursor *pCsr, in
}
/*
-** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
+** Return a pointer to a buffer owned by the sorter that contains the
** current key.
*/
static void *vdbeSorterRowkey(
@@ -88653,7 +88653,7 @@ static int memjrnlRead(
assert( p->readpoint.iOffset==0 || p->readpoint.pChunk!=0 );
if( p->readpoint.iOffset!=iOfst || iOfst==0 ){
sqlite3_int64 iOff = 0;
- for(pChunk=p->pFirst;
+ for(pChunk=p->pFirst;
ALWAYS(pChunk) && (iOff+p->nChunkSize)<=iOfst;
pChunk=pChunk->pNext
){
@@ -88688,7 +88688,7 @@ static void memjrnlFreeChunks(MemJournal *p){
for(pIter=p->pFirst; pIter; pIter=pNext){
pNext = pIter->pNext;
sqlite3_free(pIter);
- }
+ }
p->pFirst = 0;
}
@@ -88760,7 +88760,7 @@ static int memjrnlWrite(
** access writes are not required. The only exception to this is when
** the in-memory journal is being used by a connection using the
** atomic-write optimization. In this case the first 28 bytes of the
- ** journal file may be written as part of committing the transaction. */
+ ** journal file may be written as part of committing the transaction. */
assert( iOfst==p->endpoint.iOffset || iOfst==0 );
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
if( iOfst==0 && p->pFirst ){
@@ -88810,7 +88810,7 @@ static int memjrnlWrite(
**
** If the journal file is already on disk, truncate it there. Or, if it
** is still in main memory but is being truncated to zero bytes in size,
-** ignore
+** ignore
*/
static int memjrnlTruncate(sqlite3_file *pJfd, sqlite_int64 size){
MemJournal *p = (MemJournal *)pJfd;
@@ -88837,8 +88837,8 @@ static int memjrnlClose(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
/*
** Sync the file.
**
-** If the real file has been created, call its xSync method. Otherwise,
-** syncing an in-memory journal is a no-op.
+** If the real file has been created, call its xSync method. Otherwise,
+** syncing an in-memory journal is a no-op.
*/
static int memjrnlSync(sqlite3_file *pJfd, int flags){
UNUSED_PARAMETER2(pJfd, flags);
@@ -88879,11 +88879,11 @@ static const struct sqlite3_io_methods MemJournalMethods = {
0 /* xUnfetch */
};
-/*
-** Open a journal file.
+/*
+** Open a journal file.
**
-** The behaviour of the journal file depends on the value of parameter
-** nSpill. If nSpill is 0, then the journal file is always create and
+** The behaviour of the journal file depends on the value of parameter
+** nSpill. If nSpill is 0, then the journal file is always create and
** accessed using the underlying VFS. If nSpill is less than zero, then
** all content is always stored in main-memory. Finally, if nSpill is a
** positive value, then the journal file is initially created in-memory
@@ -88933,9 +88933,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MemJournalOpen(sqlite3_file *pJfd){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ATOMIC_WRITE
/*
-** If the argument p points to a MemJournal structure that is not an
+** If the argument p points to a MemJournal structure that is not an
** in-memory-only journal file (i.e. is one that was opened with a +ve
-** nSpill parameter), and the underlying file has not yet been created,
+** nSpill parameter), and the underlying file has not yet been created,
** create it now.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalCreate(sqlite3_file *p){
@@ -88956,7 +88956,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JournalIsInMemory(sqlite3_file *p){
return p->pMethods==&MemJournalMethods;
}
-/*
+/*
** Return the number of bytes required to store a JournalFile that uses vfs
** pVfs to create the underlying on-disk files.
*/
@@ -89061,7 +89061,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectExpr(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
** Walk the parse trees associated with all subqueries in the
** FROM clause of SELECT statement p. Do not invoke the select
** callback on p, but do invoke it on each FROM clause subquery
-** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return
+** and on any subqueries further down in the tree. Return
** WRC_Abort or WRC_Continue;
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
@@ -89083,16 +89083,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalkSelectFrom(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
}
}
return WRC_Continue;
-}
+}
/*
** Call sqlite3WalkExpr() for every expression in Select statement p.
** Invoke sqlite3WalkSelect() for subqueries in the FROM clause and
-** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior.
+** on the compound select chain, p->pPrior.
**
** If it is not NULL, the xSelectCallback() callback is invoked before
** the walk of the expressions and FROM clause. The xSelectCallback2()
-** method, if it is not NULL, is invoked following the walk of the
+** method, if it is not NULL, is invoked following the walk of the
** expressions and FROM clause.
**
** Return WRC_Continue under normal conditions. Return WRC_Abort if
@@ -89214,7 +89214,7 @@ static void resolveAlias(
}
ExprSetProperty(pDup, EP_Alias);
- /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This
+ /* Before calling sqlite3ExprDelete(), set the EP_Static flag. This
** prevents ExprDelete() from deleting the Expr structure itself,
** allowing it to be repopulated by the memcpy() on the following line.
** The pExpr->u.zToken might point into memory that will be freed by the
@@ -89281,7 +89281,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3MatchSpanName(
/*
** Given the name of a column of the form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z, look up
-** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
+** that name in the set of source tables in pSrcList and make the pExpr
** expression node refer back to that source column. The following changes
** are made to pExpr:
**
@@ -89400,7 +89400,7 @@ static int lookupName(
for(j=0, pCol=pTab->aCol; jnCol; j++, pCol++){
if( sqlite3StrICmp(pCol->zName, zCol)==0 ){
/* If there has been exactly one prior match and this match
- ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a
+ ** is for the right-hand table of a NATURAL JOIN or is in a
** USING clause, then skip this match.
*/
if( cnt==1 ){
@@ -89428,7 +89428,7 @@ static int lookupName(
} /* if( pSrcList ) */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
- /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
+ /* If we have not already resolved the name, then maybe
** it is a new.* or old.* trigger argument reference
*/
if( zDb==0 && zTab!=0 && cntTab==0 && pParse->pTriggerTab!=0 ){
@@ -89444,7 +89444,7 @@ static int lookupName(
pTab = 0;
}
- if( pTab ){
+ if( pTab ){
int iCol;
pSchema = pTab->pSchema;
cntTab++;
@@ -89540,7 +89540,7 @@ static int lookupName(
assert( zTab==0 && zDb==0 );
goto lookupname_end;
}
- }
+ }
}
/* Advance to the next name context. The loop will exit when either
@@ -89729,7 +89729,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
SrcList *pSrcList = pNC->pSrcList;
struct SrcList_item *pItem;
assert( pSrcList && pSrcList->nSrc==1 );
- pItem = pSrcList->a;
+ pItem = pSrcList->a;
pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
pExpr->pTab = pItem->pTab;
pExpr->iTable = pItem->iCursor;
@@ -89745,7 +89745,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
case TK_ID: {
return lookupName(pParse, 0, 0, pExpr->u.zToken, pNC, pExpr);
}
-
+
/* A table name and column name: ID.ID
** Or a database, table and column: ID.ID.ID
*/
@@ -89818,7 +89818,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
** to likelihood(X,0.9375). */
/* TUNING: unlikely() probability is 0.0625. likely() is 0.9375 */
pExpr->iTable = pDef->zName[0]=='u' ? 8388608 : 125829120;
- }
+ }
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
{
@@ -89884,7 +89884,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
pNC->ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg;
}
/* FIX ME: Compute pExpr->affinity based on the expected return
- ** type of the function
+ ** type of the function
*/
return WRC_Prune;
}
@@ -89944,7 +89944,7 @@ static int resolveExprStep(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
testcase( pExpr->op==TK_BETWEEN );
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
}
- break;
+ break;
}
}
return (pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed) ? WRC_Abort : WRC_Continue;
@@ -90054,7 +90054,7 @@ static void resolveOutOfRangeError(
int i, /* The index (1-based) of the term out of range */
int mx /* Largest permissible value of i */
){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"%r %s BY term out of range - should be "
"between 1 and %d", i, zType, mx);
}
@@ -90291,7 +90291,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
ExprList *pGroupBy; /* The GROUP BY clause */
Select *pLeftmost; /* Left-most of SELECT of a compound */
sqlite3 *db; /* Database connection */
-
+
assert( p!=0 );
if( p->selFlags & SF_Resolved ){
@@ -90345,7 +90345,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
pSub->pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
p->pOrderBy = 0;
}
-
+
/* Recursively resolve names in all subqueries
*/
for(i=0; ipSrc->nSrc; i++){
@@ -90372,18 +90372,18 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
pItem->fg.isCorrelated = (nRef!=0);
}
}
-
+
/* Set up the local name-context to pass to sqlite3ResolveExprNames() to
** resolve the result-set expression list.
*/
sNC.ncFlags = NC_AllowAgg;
sNC.pSrcList = p->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pOuterNC;
-
+
/* Resolve names in the result set. */
if( sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, p->pEList) ) return WRC_Abort;
-
- /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
+
+ /* If there are no aggregate functions in the result-set, and no GROUP BY
** expression, do not allow aggregates in any of the other expressions.
*/
assert( (p->selFlags & SF_Aggregate)==0 );
@@ -90394,14 +90394,14 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
}else{
sNC.ncFlags &= ~NC_AllowAgg;
}
-
+
/* If a HAVING clause is present, then there must be a GROUP BY clause.
*/
if( p->pHaving && !pGroupBy ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a GROUP BY clause is required before HAVING");
return WRC_Abort;
}
-
+
/* Add the output column list to the name-context before parsing the
** other expressions in the SELECT statement. This is so that
** expressions in the WHERE clause (etc.) can refer to expressions by
@@ -90418,19 +90418,19 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
for(i=0; ipSrc->nSrc; i++){
struct SrcList_item *pItem = &p->pSrc->a[i];
if( pItem->fg.isTabFunc
- && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
+ && sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(&sNC, pItem->u1.pFuncArg)
){
return WRC_Abort;
}
}
/* The ORDER BY and GROUP BY clauses may not refer to terms in
- ** outer queries
+ ** outer queries
*/
sNC.pNext = 0;
sNC.ncFlags |= NC_AllowAgg;
- /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
+ /* If this is a converted compound query, move the ORDER BY clause from
** the sub-query back to the parent query. At this point each term
** within the ORDER BY clause has been transformed to an integer value.
** These integers will be replaced by copies of the corresponding result
@@ -90459,13 +90459,13 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
if( db->mallocFailed ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
-
- /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
+
+ /* Resolve the GROUP BY clause. At the same time, make sure
** the GROUP BY clause does not contain aggregate functions.
*/
if( pGroupBy ){
struct ExprList_item *pItem;
-
+
if( resolveOrderGroupBy(&sNC, p, pGroupBy, "GROUP") || db->mallocFailed ){
return WRC_Abort;
}
@@ -90507,7 +90507,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
** checking on function usage and set a flag if any aggregate functions
** are seen.
**
-** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
+** To resolve table columns references we look for nodes (or subtrees) of the
** form X.Y.Z or Y.Z or just Z where
**
** X: The name of a database. Ex: "main" or "temp" or
@@ -90539,7 +90539,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
**
** SELECT a+b AS x, c+d AS y FROM t1 ORDER BY a+b;
**
-** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
+** Function calls are checked to make sure that the function is
** defined and that the correct number of arguments are specified.
** If the function is an aggregate function, then the NC_HasAgg flag is
** set and the opcode is changed from TK_FUNCTION to TK_AGG_FUNCTION.
@@ -90549,7 +90549,7 @@ static int resolveSelectStep(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
** An error message is left in pParse if anything is amiss. The number
** if errors is returned.
*/
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
Expr *pExpr /* The expression to be analyzed. */
){
@@ -90594,7 +90594,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprNames(
** just like sqlite3ResolveExprNames() except that it works for an expression
** list rather than a single expression.
*/
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ResolveExprListNames(
NameContext *pNC, /* Namespace to resolve expressions in. */
ExprList *pList /* The expression list to be analyzed. */
){
@@ -90704,7 +90704,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3TableColumnAffinity(Table *pTab, int iCol){
** Return the 'affinity' of the expression pExpr if any.
**
** If pExpr is a column, a reference to a column via an 'AS' alias,
-** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
+** or a sub-select with a column as the return value, then the
** affinity of that column is returned. Otherwise, 0x00 is returned,
** indicating no affinity for the expression.
**
@@ -90790,7 +90790,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprSkipCollate(Expr *pExpr){
assert( pExpr->op==TK_COLLATE );
pExpr = pExpr->pLeft;
}
- }
+ }
return pExpr;
}
@@ -90856,7 +90856,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3ExprCollSeq(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
break;
}
}
- if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
+ if( sqlite3CheckCollSeq(pParse, pColl) ){
pColl = 0;
}
return pColl;
@@ -90952,8 +90952,8 @@ static u8 binaryCompareP5(Expr *pExpr1, Expr *pExpr2, int jumpIfNull){
** it is not considered.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(
- Parse *pParse,
- Expr *pLeft,
+ Parse *pParse,
+ Expr *pLeft,
Expr *pRight
){
CollSeq *pColl;
@@ -91009,7 +91009,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprIsVector(Expr *pExpr){
}
/*
-** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
+** If the expression passed as the only argument is of type TK_VECTOR
** return the number of expressions in the vector. Or, if the expression
** is a sub-select, return the number of columns in the sub-select. For
** any other type of expression, return 1.
@@ -91062,7 +91062,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3VectorFieldSubexpr(Expr *pVector, int i){
** sqlite3ExprCode() will generate all necessary code to compute
** the iField-th column of the vector expression pVector.
**
-** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).
+** It is ok for pVector to be a scalar (as long as iField==0).
** In that case, this routine works like sqlite3ExprDup().
**
** The caller owns the returned Expr object and is responsible for
@@ -91118,7 +91118,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprForVectorField(
/*
** If expression pExpr is of type TK_SELECT, generate code to evaluate
-** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
+** it. Return the register in which the result is stored (or, if the
** sub-select returns more than one column, the first in an array
** of registers in which the result is stored).
**
@@ -91140,10 +91140,10 @@ static int exprCodeSubselect(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
** the register number of a register that contains the value of
** element iField of the vector.
**
-** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
+** If pVector is a TK_SELECT expression, then code for it must have
** already been generated using the exprCodeSubselect() routine. In this
** case parameter regSelect should be the first in an array of registers
-** containing the results of the sub-select.
+** containing the results of the sub-select.
**
** If pVector is of type TK_VECTOR, then code for the requested field
** is generated. In this case (*pRegFree) may be set to the number of
@@ -91206,10 +91206,10 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "row value misused");
return;
}
- assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
- || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
- || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
- || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
+ assert( pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_NE
+ || pExpr->op==TK_IS || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_LT || pExpr->op==TK_GT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_LE || pExpr->op==TK_GE
);
assert( pExpr->op==op || (pExpr->op==TK_IS && op==TK_EQ)
|| (pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT && op==TK_NE) );
@@ -91225,7 +91225,7 @@ static void codeVectorCompare(
for(i=0; 1 /*Loop exits by "break"*/; i++){
int regFree1 = 0, regFree2 = 0;
- Expr *pL, *pR;
+ Expr *pL, *pR;
int r1, r2;
assert( i>=0 && i0 ) sqlite3ExprCachePush(pParse);
@@ -91273,7 +91273,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckHeight(Parse *pParse, int nHeight){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int mxHeight = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_EXPR_DEPTH];
if( nHeight>mxHeight ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)", mxHeight
);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -91319,10 +91319,10 @@ static void heightOfSelect(Select *p, int *pnHeight){
}
/*
-** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
-** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
+** Set the Expr.nHeight variable in the structure passed as an
+** argument. An expression with no children, Expr.pList or
** Expr.pSelect member has a height of 1. Any other expression
-** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
+** has a height equal to the maximum height of any other
** referenced Expr plus one.
**
** Also propagate EP_Propagate flags up from Expr.x.pList to Expr.flags,
@@ -91347,7 +91347,7 @@ static void exprSetHeight(Expr *p){
** leave an error in pParse.
**
** Also propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags.
+** Expr.flags.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
if( pParse->nErr ) return;
@@ -91367,7 +91367,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SelectExprHeight(Select *p){
#else /* ABOVE: Height enforcement enabled. BELOW: Height enforcement off */
/*
** Propagate all EP_Propagate flags from the Expr.x.pList into
-** Expr.flags.
+** Expr.flags.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprSetHeightAndFlags(Parse *pParse, Expr *p){
if( p && p->x.pList && !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_xIsSelect) ){
@@ -91437,7 +91437,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprAlloc(
}
#if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
pNew->nHeight = 1;
-#endif
+#endif
}
return pNew;
}
@@ -91606,7 +91606,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3ExprFunction(Parse *pParse, ExprList *pList, Token *
/*
** Assign a variable number to an expression that encodes a wildcard
-** in the original SQL statement.
+** in the original SQL statement.
**
** Wildcards consisting of a single "?" are assigned the next sequential
** variable number.
@@ -91720,7 +91720,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprDelete(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p){
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
+** Return the number of bytes allocated for the expression structure
** passed as the first argument. This is always one of EXPR_FULLSIZE,
** EXPR_REDUCEDSIZE or EXPR_TOKENONLYSIZE.
*/
@@ -91735,14 +91735,14 @@ static int exprStructSize(Expr *p){
** to store a copy of an expression or expression tree. They differ in
** how much of the tree is measured.
**
-** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
+** dupedExprStructSize() Size of only the Expr structure
** dupedExprNodeSize() Size of Expr + space for token
** dupedExprSize() Expr + token + subtree components
**
***************************************************************************
**
-** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
-** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
+** The dupedExprStructSize() function returns two values OR-ed together:
+** (1) the space required for a copy of the Expr structure only and
** (2) the EP_xxx flags that indicate what the structure size should be.
** The return values is always one of:
**
@@ -91773,7 +91773,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){
nSize = EXPR_FULLSIZE;
}else{
assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
- assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) );
+ assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_FromJoin) );
assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_MemToken) );
assert( !ExprHasProperty(p, EP_NoReduce) );
if( p->pLeft || p->x.pList ){
@@ -91787,7 +91787,7 @@ static int dupedExprStructSize(Expr *p, int flags){
}
/*
-** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
+** This function returns the space in bytes required to store the copy
** of the Expr structure and a copy of the Expr.u.zToken string (if that
** string is defined.)
*/
@@ -91800,16 +91800,16 @@ static int dupedExprNodeSize(Expr *p, int flags){
}
/*
-** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
+** Return the number of bytes required to create a duplicate of the
** expression passed as the first argument. The second argument is a
** mask containing EXPRDUP_XXX flags.
**
** The value returned includes space to create a copy of the Expr struct
** itself and the buffer referred to by Expr.u.zToken, if any.
**
-** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
-** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
-** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
+** If the EXPRDUP_REDUCE flag is set, then the return value includes
+** space to duplicate all Expr nodes in the tree formed by Expr.pLeft
+** and Expr.pRight variables (but not for any structures pointed to or
** descended from the Expr.x.pList or Expr.x.pSelect variables).
*/
static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){
@@ -91824,8 +91824,8 @@ static int dupedExprSize(Expr *p, int flags){
}
/*
-** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
-** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
+** This function is similar to sqlite3ExprDup(), except that if pzBuffer
+** is not NULL then *pzBuffer is assumed to point to a buffer large enough
** to store the copy of expression p, the copies of p->u.zToken
** (if applicable), and the copies of the p->pLeft and p->pRight expressions,
** if any. Before returning, *pzBuffer is set to the first byte past the
@@ -91871,7 +91871,7 @@ static Expr *exprDup(sqlite3 *db, Expr *p, int dupFlags, u8 **pzBuffer){
}else{
u32 nSize = (u32)exprStructSize(p);
memcpy(zAlloc, p, nSize);
- if( nSizemallocFailed flag set.
*/
@@ -91958,7 +91958,7 @@ static With *withDup(sqlite3 *db, With *p){
** without effecting the originals.
**
** The expression list, ID, and source lists return by sqlite3ExprListDup(),
-** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
+** sqlite3IdListDup(), and sqlite3SrcListDup() can not be further expanded
** by subsequent calls to sqlite*ListAppend() routines.
**
** Any tables that the SrcList might point to are not duplicated.
@@ -91987,15 +91987,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags)
if( pItem==0 ){
sqlite3DbFree(db, pNew);
return 0;
- }
+ }
pOldItem = p->a;
for(i=0; inExpr; i++, pItem++, pOldItem++){
Expr *pOldExpr = pOldItem->pExpr;
Expr *pNewExpr;
pItem->pExpr = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pOldExpr, flags);
- if( pOldExpr
+ if( pOldExpr
&& pOldExpr->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN
- && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
+ && (pNewExpr = pItem->pExpr)!=0
){
assert( pNewExpr->iColumn==0 || i>0 );
if( pNewExpr->iColumn==0 ){
@@ -92021,7 +92021,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListDup(sqlite3 *db, ExprList *p, int flags)
/*
** If cursors, triggers, views and subqueries are all omitted from
-** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
+** the build, then none of the following routines, except for
** sqlite3SelectDup(), can be called. sqlite3SelectDup() is sometimes
** called with a NULL argument.
*/
@@ -92054,7 +92054,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListDup(sqlite3 *db, SrcList *p, int flags){
}
pNewItem->pIBIndex = pOldItem->pIBIndex;
if( pNewItem->fg.isTabFunc ){
- pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
+ pNewItem->u1.pFuncArg =
sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pOldItem->u1.pFuncArg, flags);
}
pTab = pNewItem->pTab = pOldItem->pTab;
@@ -92176,7 +92176,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppend(
}
return pList;
-no_mem:
+no_mem:
/* Avoid leaking memory if malloc has failed. */
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pExpr);
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pList);
@@ -92209,8 +92209,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
if( NEVER(pColumns==0) ) goto vector_append_error;
if( pExpr==0 ) goto vector_append_error;
- /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
- ** the size of the RHS and LHS match. But if the RHS is a SELECT,
+ /* If the RHS is a vector, then we can immediately check to see that
+ ** the size of the RHS and LHS match. But if the RHS is a SELECT,
** wildcards ("*") in the result set of the SELECT must be expanded before
** we can do the size check, so defer the size check until code generation.
*/
@@ -92234,7 +92234,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE ExprList *sqlite3ExprListAppendVector(
if( pList && pList->a[iFirst].pExpr ){
Expr *pFirst = pList->a[iFirst].pExpr;
assert( pFirst->op==TK_SELECT_COLUMN );
-
+
/* Store the SELECT statement in pRight so it will be deleted when
** sqlite3ExprListDelete() is called */
pFirst->pRight = pExpr;
@@ -92389,7 +92389,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3ExprListFlags(const ExprList *pList){
** in a CREATE TABLE statement. The Walker.eCode value is 5 when parsing
** an existing schema and 4 when processing a new statement. A bound
** parameter raises an error for new statements, but is silently converted
-** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_master tables that
+** to NULL for existing schemas. This allows sqlite_master tables that
** contain a bound parameter because they were generated by older versions
** of SQLite to be parsed by newer versions of SQLite without raising a
** malformed schema error.
@@ -92567,7 +92567,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprIsInteger(Expr *p, int *pValue){
** Return FALSE if there is no chance that the expression can be NULL.
**
** If the expression might be NULL or if the expression is too complex
-** to tell return TRUE.
+** to tell return TRUE.
**
** This routine is used as an optimization, to skip OP_IsNull opcodes
** when we know that a value cannot be NULL. Hence, a false positive
@@ -92648,7 +92648,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsRowid(const char *z){
}
/*
-** pX is the RHS of an IN operator. If pX is a SELECT statement
+** pX is the RHS of an IN operator. If pX is a SELECT statement
** that can be simplified to a direct table access, then return
** a pointer to the SELECT statement. If pX is not a SELECT statement,
** or if the SELECT statement needs to be manifested into a transient
@@ -92715,7 +92715,7 @@ static void sqlite3SetHasNullFlag(Vdbe *v, int iCur, int regHasNull){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
+** The argument is an IN operator with a list (not a subquery) on the
** right-hand side. Return TRUE if that list is constant.
*/
static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
@@ -92775,9 +92775,9 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
** to be unique - either because it is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY or due to
** a UNIQUE constraint or index.
**
-** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
-** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
-** be used unless is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
+** When IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP is used (and the b-tree will be used
+** for fast set membership tests) then an epheremal table must
+** be used unless is a single INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column or an
** index can be found with the specified as its left-most.
**
** If the IN_INDEX_NOOP_OK and IN_INDEX_MEMBERSHIP are both set and
@@ -92789,7 +92789,7 @@ static int sqlite3InRhsIsConstant(Expr *pIn){
**
** When the b-tree is being used for membership tests, the calling function
** might need to know whether or not the RHS side of the IN operator
-** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
+** contains a NULL. If prRhsHasNull is not a NULL pointer and
** if there is any chance that the (...) might contain a NULL value at
** runtime, then a register is allocated and the register number written
** to *prRhsHasNull. If there is no chance that the (...) contains a
@@ -92828,9 +92828,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
assert( pX->op==TK_IN );
mustBeUnique = (inFlags & IN_INDEX_LOOP)!=0;
- /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
+ /* If the RHS of this IN(...) operator is a SELECT, and if it matters
** whether or not the SELECT result contains NULL values, check whether
- ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
+ ** or not NULL is actually possible (it may not be, for example, due
** to NOT NULL constraints in the schema). If no NULL values are possible,
** set prRhsHasNull to 0 before continuing. */
if( prRhsHasNull && (pX->flags & EP_xIsSelect) ){
@@ -92845,7 +92845,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
}
/* Check to see if an existing table or index can be used to
- ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
+ ** satisfy the query. This is preferable to generating a new
** ephemeral table. */
if( pParse->nErr==0 && (p = isCandidateForInOpt(pX))!=0 ){
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
@@ -92879,7 +92879,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
int affinity_ok = 1;
int i;
- /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
+ /* Check that the affinity that will be used to perform each
** comparison is the same as the affinity of each column in table
** on the RHS of the IN operator. If it not, it is not possible to
** use any index of the RHS table. */
@@ -92923,14 +92923,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
continue; /* This index is not unique over the IN RHS columns */
}
}
-
+
colUsed = 0; /* Columns of index used so far */
for(i=0; ipLeft, i);
Expr *pRhs = pEList->a[i].pExpr;
CollSeq *pReq = sqlite3BinaryCompareCollSeq(pParse, pLhs, pRhs);
int j;
-
+
assert( pReq!=0 || pRhs->iColumn==XN_ROWID || pParse->nErr );
for(j=0; jaiColumn[j]!=pRhs->iColumn ) continue;
@@ -92946,7 +92946,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
colUsed |= mCol;
if( aiMap ) aiMap[i] = j;
}
-
+
assert( i==nExpr || colUsed!=(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) );
if( colUsed==(MASKBIT(nExpr)-1) ){
/* If we reach this point, that means the index pIdx is usable */
@@ -92961,11 +92961,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
assert( IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC == IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC+1 );
eType = IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC + pIdx->aSortOrder[0];
-
+
if( prRhsHasNull ){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_USED_MASK
i64 mask = (1<nMem;
@@ -93027,8 +93027,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindInIndex(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
-** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
+** Argument pExpr is an (?, ?...) IN(...) expression. This
+** function allocates and returns a nul-terminated string containing
** the affinities to be used for each column of the comparison.
**
** It is the responsibility of the caller to ensure that the returned
@@ -93061,11 +93061,11 @@ static char *exprINAffinity(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
+** Load the Parse object passed as the first argument with an error
** message of the form:
**
** "sub-select returns N columns - expected M"
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpect){
const char *zFmt = "sub-select returns %d columns - expected %d";
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, zFmt, nActual, nExpect);
@@ -93074,7 +93074,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpec
/*
** Expression pExpr is a vector that has been used in a context where
-** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
+** it is not permitted. If pExpr is a sub-select vector, this routine
** loads the Parse object with a message of the form:
**
** "sub-select returns N columns - expected 1"
@@ -93082,7 +93082,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SubselectError(Parse *pParse, int nActual, int nExpec
** Or, if it is a regular scalar vector:
**
** "row value misused"
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VectorErrorMsg(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
if( pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
@@ -93167,13 +93167,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft; /* the LHS of the IN operator */
KeyInfo *pKeyInfo = 0; /* Key information */
int nVal; /* Size of vector pLeft */
-
+
nVal = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pLeft);
assert( !isRowid || nVal==1 );
/* Whether this is an 'x IN(SELECT...)' or an 'x IN()'
- ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is
- ** filled with index keys representing the results from the
+ ** expression it is handled the same way. An ephemeral table is
+ ** filled with index keys representing the results from the
** SELECT or the .
**
** If the 'x' expression is a column value, or the SELECT...
@@ -93185,7 +93185,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
** is used.
*/
pExpr->iTable = pParse->nTab++;
- addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
+ addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral,
pExpr->iTable, (isRowid?0:nVal));
pKeyInfo = isRowid ? 0 : sqlite3KeyInfoAlloc(pParse->db, nVal, 1);
@@ -93307,7 +93307,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
** If this is an EXISTS, write an integer 0 (not exists) or 1 (exists)
** into a register and return that register number.
**
- ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1". Any
+ ** In both cases, the query is augmented with "LIMIT 1". Any
** preexisting limit is discarded in place of the new LIMIT 1.
*/
Select *pSel; /* SELECT statement to encode */
@@ -93363,9 +93363,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CodeSubselect(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY
/*
-** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
-** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
-** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
+** Expr pIn is an IN(...) expression. This function checks that the
+** sub-select on the RHS of the IN() operator has the same number of
+** columns as the vector on the LHS. Or, if the RHS of the IN() is not
** a sub-query, that the LHS is a vector of size 1.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
@@ -93390,18 +93390,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCheckIN(Parse *pParse, Expr *pIn){
** x IN (SELECT ...)
** x IN (value, value, ...)
**
-** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression. The
+** The left-hand side (LHS) is a scalar or vector expression. The
** right-hand side (RHS) is an array of zero or more scalar values, or a
** subquery. If the RHS is a subquery, the number of result columns must
** match the number of columns in the vector on the LHS. If the RHS is
-** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
+** a list of values, the LHS must be a scalar.
**
** The IN operator is true if the LHS value is contained within the RHS.
-** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS. The
-** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
+** The result is false if the LHS is definitely not in the RHS. The
+** result is NULL if the presence of the LHS in the RHS cannot be
** determined due to NULLs.
**
-** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
+** This routine generates code that jumps to destIfFalse if the LHS is not
** contained within the RHS. If due to NULLs we cannot determine if the LHS
** is contained in the RHS then jump to destIfNull. If the LHS is contained
** within the RHS then fall through.
@@ -93430,7 +93430,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
int destStep6 = 0; /* Start of code for Step 6 */
int addrTruthOp; /* Address of opcode that determines the IN is true */
int destNotNull; /* Jump here if a comparison is not true in step 6 */
- int addrTop; /* Top of the step-6 loop */
+ int addrTop; /* Top of the step-6 loop */
pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
if( sqlite3ExprCheckIN(pParse, pExpr) ) return;
@@ -93442,7 +93442,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
if( pParse->db->mallocFailed ) goto sqlite3ExprCodeIN_oom_error;
/* Attempt to compute the RHS. After this step, if anything other than
- ** IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned, the table opened ith cursor pExpr->iTable
+ ** IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned, the table opened ith cursor pExpr->iTable
** contains the values that make up the RHS. If IN_INDEX_NOOP is returned,
** the RHS has not yet been coded. */
v = pParse->pVdbe;
@@ -93453,7 +93453,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
destIfFalse==destIfNull ? 0 : &rRhsHasNull, aiMap);
assert( pParse->nErr || nVector==1 || eType==IN_INDEX_EPH
- || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
+ || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_ASC || eType==IN_INDEX_INDEX_DESC
);
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
/* Confirm that aiMap[] contains nVector integer values between 0 and
@@ -93465,8 +93465,8 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
}
#endif
- /* Code the LHS, the from " IN (...)". If the LHS is a
- ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
+ /* Code the LHS, the from " IN (...)". If the LHS is a
+ ** vector, then it is stored in an array of nVector registers starting
** at r1.
**
** sqlite3FindInIndex() might have reordered the fields of the LHS vector
@@ -93584,7 +93584,7 @@ static void sqlite3ExprCodeIN(
}
/* Step 5. If we do not care about the difference between NULL and
- ** FALSE, then just return false.
+ ** FALSE, then just return false.
*/
if( destIfFalse==destIfNull ) sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, destIfFalse);
@@ -93646,7 +93646,7 @@ sqlite3ExprCodeIN_oom_error:
** Generate an instruction that will put the floating point
** value described by z[0..n-1] into register iMem.
**
-** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
+** The z[] string will probably not be zero-terminated. But the
** z[n] character is guaranteed to be something that does not look
** like the continuation of the number.
*/
@@ -93890,7 +93890,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(
/*
** Generate code that will extract the iColumn-th column from
-** table pTab and store the column value in a register.
+** table pTab and store the column value in a register.
**
** An effort is made to store the column value in register iReg. This
** is not garanteeed for GetColumn() - the result can be stored in
@@ -93918,12 +93918,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumn(
sqlite3ExprCachePinRegister(pParse, p->iReg);
return p->iReg;
}
- }
+ }
assert( v!=0 );
sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnOfTable(v, pTab, iTable, iColumn, iReg);
if( p5 ){
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, p5);
- }else{
+ }else{
sqlite3ExprCacheStore(pParse, iTable, iColumn, iReg);
}
return iReg;
@@ -94212,7 +94212,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
case TK_BITOR:
case TK_SLASH:
case TK_LSHIFT:
- case TK_RSHIFT:
+ case TK_RSHIFT:
case TK_CONCAT: {
assert( TK_AND==OP_And ); testcase( op==TK_AND );
assert( TK_OR==OP_Or ); testcase( op==TK_OR );
@@ -94363,7 +94363,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
char aff;
assert( nFarg==1 );
aff = sqlite3ExprAffinity(pFarg->a[0].pExpr);
- sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, target,
+ sqlite3VdbeLoadString(v, target,
aff ? azAff[aff-SQLITE_AFF_BLOB] : "none");
return target;
}
@@ -94400,7 +94400,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_LENGTH==OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_TYPEOF==OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG );
testcase( pDef->funcFlags & OPFLAG_LENGTHARG );
- pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
+ pFarg->a[0].pExpr->op2 =
pDef->funcFlags & (OPFLAG_LENGTHARG|OPFLAG_TYPEOFARG);
}
}
@@ -94421,7 +94421,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
** see if it is a column in a virtual table. This is done because
** the left operand of infix functions (the operand we want to
** control overloading) ends up as the second argument to the
- ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
+ ** function. The expression "A glob B" is equivalent to
** "glob(B,A). We want to use the A in "A glob B" to test
** for function overloading. But we use the B term in "glob(B,A)".
*/
@@ -94432,7 +94432,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
}
#endif
if( pDef->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_NEEDCOLL ){
- if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
+ if( !pColl ) pColl = db->pDfltColl;
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CollSeq, 0, 0, 0, (char *)pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Function0, constMask, r1, target,
@@ -94463,7 +94463,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
}
assert( pExpr->iTable==0 || pExpr->pLeft->op==TK_SELECT );
if( pExpr->iTable
- && pExpr->iTable!=(n = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))
+ && pExpr->iTable!=(n = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))
){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d columns assigned %d values",
pExpr->iTable, n);
@@ -94500,7 +94500,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
return target;
}
case TK_SPAN:
- case TK_COLLATE:
+ case TK_COLLATE:
case TK_UPLUS: {
return sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pExpr->pLeft, target);
}
@@ -94515,7 +94515,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
**
** The expression is implemented using an OP_Param opcode. The p1
** parameter is set to 0 for an old.rowid reference, or to (i+1)
- ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
+ ** to reference another column of the old.* pseudo-table, where
** i is the index of the column. For a new.rowid reference, p1 is
** set to (n+1), where n is the number of columns in each pseudo-table.
** For a reference to any other column in the new.* pseudo-table, p1
@@ -94529,7 +94529,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
**
** p1==0 -> old.rowid p1==3 -> new.rowid
** p1==1 -> old.a p1==4 -> new.a
- ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
+ ** p1==2 -> old.b p1==5 -> new.b
*/
Table *pTab = pExpr->pTab;
int p1 = pExpr->iTable * (pTab->nCol+1) + 1 + pExpr->iColumn;
@@ -94552,7 +94552,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
**
** EVIDENCE-OF: R-60985-57662 SQLite will convert the value back to
** floating point when extracting it from the record. */
- if( pExpr->iColumn>=0
+ if( pExpr->iColumn>=0
&& pTab->aCol[pExpr->iColumn].affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL
){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_RealAffinity, target);
@@ -94644,14 +94644,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
}else{
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Null, 0, target);
}
- assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0
+ assert( pParse->db->mallocFailed || pParse->nErr>0
|| pParse->iCacheLevel==iCacheLevel );
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endLabel);
break;
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
case TK_RAISE: {
- assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback
+ assert( pExpr->affinity==OE_Rollback
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Abort
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Fail
|| pExpr->affinity==OE_Ignore
@@ -94687,8 +94687,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int target)
** Factor out the code of the given expression to initialization time.
**
** If regDest>=0 then the result is always stored in that register and the
-** result is not reusable. If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
-** store the value whereever it wants. The register where the expression
+** result is not reusable. If regDest<0 then this routine is free to
+** store the value whereever it wants. The register where the expression
** is stored is returned. When regDest<0, two identical expressions will
** code to the same register.
*/
@@ -94810,7 +94810,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int ta
** and modify the expression so that the next time it is evaluated,
** the result is a copy of the cache register.
**
-** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple
+** This routine is used for expressions that are used multiple
** times. They are evaluated once and the results of the expression
** are reused.
*/
@@ -94893,7 +94893,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(
**
** x BETWEEN y AND z
**
-** The above is equivalent to
+** The above is equivalent to
**
** x>=y AND x<=z
**
@@ -95088,7 +95088,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprIfTrue(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int
}
}
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree1);
- sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
+ sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regFree2);
}
/*
@@ -95226,7 +95226,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ExprIfFalse(Parse *pParse, Expr *pExpr, int dest, int
}
#endif
default: {
- default_expr:
+ default_expr:
if( exprAlwaysFalse(pExpr) ){
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, dest);
}else if( exprAlwaysTrue(pExpr) ){
@@ -95318,7 +95318,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTab){
if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pA->x.pList, pB->x.pList, iTab) ) return 2;
if( ALWAYS((combinedFlags & EP_Reduced)==0) && pA->op!=TK_STRING ){
if( pA->iColumn!=pB->iColumn ) return 2;
- if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable
+ if( pA->iTable!=pB->iTable
&& (pA->iTable!=iTab || NEVER(pB->iTable>=0)) ) return 2;
}
}
@@ -95326,7 +95326,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCompare(Expr *pA, Expr *pB, int iTab){
}
/*
-** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical and
+** Compare two ExprList objects. Return 0 if they are identical and
** non-zero if they differ in any way.
**
** If any subelement of pB has Expr.iTable==(-1) then it is allowed
@@ -95405,7 +95405,7 @@ struct IdxCover {
};
/*
-** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
+** Check to see if there are references to columns in table
** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->iCur can be satisfied using the index
** pWalker->u.pIdxCover->pIdx.
*/
@@ -95449,7 +95449,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprCoveredByIndex(
/*
** An instance of the following structure is used by the tree walker
-** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an
+** to count references to table columns in the arguments of an
** aggregate function, in order to implement the
** sqlite3FunctionThisSrc() routine.
*/
@@ -95519,7 +95519,7 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
&i
);
return i;
-}
+}
/*
** Add a new element to the pAggInfo->aFunc[] array. Return the index of
@@ -95528,14 +95528,14 @@ static int addAggInfoColumn(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
static int addAggInfoFunc(sqlite3 *db, AggInfo *pInfo){
int i;
pInfo->aFunc = sqlite3ArrayAllocate(
- db,
+ db,
pInfo->aFunc,
sizeof(pInfo->aFunc[0]),
&pInfo->nFunc,
&i
);
return i;
-}
+}
/*
** This is the xExprCallback for a tree walker. It is used to
@@ -95563,7 +95563,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_TokenOnly|EP_Reduced) );
if( pExpr->iTable==pItem->iCursor ){
/* If we reach this point, it means that pExpr refers to a table
- ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.
+ ** that is in the FROM clause of the aggregate query.
**
** Make an entry for the column in pAggInfo->aCol[] if there
** is not an entry there already.
@@ -95577,7 +95577,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
}
}
if( (k>=pAggInfo->nColumn)
- && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0
+ && (k = addAggInfoColumn(pParse->db, pAggInfo))>=0
){
pCol = &pAggInfo->aCol[k];
pCol->pTab = pExpr->pTab;
@@ -95623,7 +95623,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
if( (pNC->ncFlags & NC_InAggFunc)==0
&& pWalker->walkerDepth==pExpr->op2
){
- /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
+ /* Check to see if pExpr is a duplicate of another aggregate
** function that is already in the pAggInfo structure
*/
struct AggInfo_func *pItem = pAggInfo->aFunc;
@@ -95644,7 +95644,7 @@ static int analyzeAggregate(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
pItem->iMem = ++pParse->nMem;
assert( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_IntValue) );
pItem->pFunc = sqlite3FindFunction(pParse->db,
- pExpr->u.zToken,
+ pExpr->u.zToken,
pExpr->x.pList ? pExpr->x.pList->nExpr : 0, enc, 0);
if( pExpr->flags & EP_Distinct ){
pItem->iDistinct = pParse->nTab++;
@@ -95827,9 +95827,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3NoTempsInRange(Parse *pParse, int iFirst, int iLast){
/*
-** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
+** This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TABLE or
-** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in
+** CREATE INDEX command. The second is a table name. The table name in
** the CREATE TABLE or CREATE INDEX statement is replaced with the third
** argument and the result returned. Examples:
**
@@ -95857,7 +95857,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc(
UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
- /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE
+ /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TABLE
** statement is that the table name is the first non-space token that
** is immediately followed by a TK_LP or TK_USING token.
*/
@@ -95891,7 +95891,7 @@ static void renameTableFunc(
/*
** This C function implements an SQL user function that is used by SQL code
** generated by the ALTER TABLE ... RENAME command to modify the definition
-** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
+** of any foreign key constraints that use the table being renamed as the
** parent table. It is passed three arguments:
**
** 1) The complete text of the CREATE TABLE statement being modified,
@@ -95936,7 +95936,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
if( zParent==0 ) break;
sqlite3Dequote(zParent);
if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp((const char *)zOld, zParent) ){
- char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"",
+ char *zOut = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%.*s\"%w\"",
(zOutput?zOutput:""), (int)(z-zInput), zInput, (const char *)zNew
);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
@@ -95947,7 +95947,7 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
}
}
- zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput),
+ zResult = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "%s%s", (zOutput?zOutput:""), zInput),
sqlite3_result_text(context, zResult, -1, SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
sqlite3DbFree(db, zOutput);
}
@@ -95955,9 +95955,9 @@ static void renameParentFunc(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
/* This function is used by SQL generated to implement the
-** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER
-** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE
-** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result
+** ALTER TABLE command. The first argument is the text of a CREATE TRIGGER
+** statement. The second is a table name. The table name in the CREATE
+** TRIGGER statement is replaced with the third argument and the result
** returned. This is analagous to renameTableFunc() above, except for CREATE
** TRIGGER, not CREATE INDEX and CREATE TABLE.
*/
@@ -95979,7 +95979,7 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc(
UNUSED_PARAMETER(NotUsed);
- /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER
+ /* The principle used to locate the table name in the CREATE TRIGGER
** statement is that the table name is the first token that is immediately
** preceded by either TK_ON or TK_DOT and immediately followed by one
** of TK_WHEN, TK_BEGIN or TK_FOR.
@@ -96006,12 +96006,12 @@ static void renameTriggerFunc(
assert( len>0 );
/* Variable 'dist' stores the number of tokens read since the most
- ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN
+ ** recent TK_DOT or TK_ON. This means that when a WHEN, FOR or BEGIN
** token is read and 'dist' equals 2, the condition stated above
** to be met.
**
** Note that ON cannot be a database, table or column name, so
- ** there is no need to worry about syntax like
+ ** there is no need to worry about syntax like
** "CREATE TRIGGER ... ON ON.ON BEGIN ..." etc.
*/
dist++;
@@ -96051,16 +96051,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFunctions(void){
**
** name= OR name= OR ...
**
-** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text
+** If argument zWhere is NULL, then a pointer string containing the text
** "name=" is returned, where is the quoted version
** of the string passed as argument zConstant. The returned buffer is
** allocated using sqlite3DbMalloc(). It is the responsibility of the
** caller to ensure that it is eventually freed.
**
-** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is
+** If argument zWhere is not NULL, then the string returned is
** " OR name=", where is the contents of zWhere.
** In this case zWhere is passed to sqlite3DbFree() before returning.
-**
+**
*/
static char *whereOrName(sqlite3 *db, char *zWhere, char *zConstant){
char *zNew;
@@ -96093,7 +96093,7 @@ static char *whereForeignKeys(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
/*
** Generate the text of a WHERE expression which can be used to select all
** temporary triggers on table pTab from the sqlite_temp_master table. If
-** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the
+** table pTab has no temporary triggers, or is itself stored in the
** temporary database, NULL is returned.
*/
static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
@@ -96101,9 +96101,9 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
char *zWhere = 0;
const Schema *pTempSchema = pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema; /* Temp db schema */
- /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is
+ /* If the table is not located in the temp-db (in which case NULL is
** returned, loop through the tables list of triggers. For each trigger
- ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE
+ ** that is not part of the temp-db schema, add a clause to the WHERE
** expression being built up in zWhere.
*/
if( pTab->pSchema!=pTempSchema ){
@@ -96127,7 +96127,7 @@ static char *whereTempTriggers(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
** pTab from the database, including triggers and temporary triggers.
** Argument zName is the name of the table in the database schema at
** the time the generated code is executed. This can be different from
-** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an
+** pTab->zName if this function is being called to code part of an
** "ALTER TABLE RENAME TO" statement.
*/
static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){
@@ -96162,8 +96162,8 @@ static void reloadTableSchema(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, const char *zName){
sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, iDb, zWhere);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
- /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp
- ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined.
+ /* Now, if the table is not stored in the temp database, reload any temp
+ ** triggers. Don't use IN(...) in case SQLITE_OMIT_SUBQUERY is defined.
*/
if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddParseSchemaOp(v, 1, zWhere);
@@ -96188,8 +96188,8 @@ static int isSystemTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){
}
/*
-** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
-** command.
+** Generate code to implement the "ALTER TABLE xxx RENAME TO yyy"
+** command.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
Parse *pParse, /* Parser context. */
@@ -96199,7 +96199,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
int iDb; /* Database that contains the table */
char *zDb; /* Name of database iDb */
Table *pTab; /* Table being renamed */
- char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
+ char *zName = 0; /* NULL-terminated version of pName */
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db; /* Database connection */
int nTabName; /* Number of UTF-8 characters in zTabName */
const char *zTabName; /* Original name of the table */
@@ -96210,7 +96210,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
VTable *pVTab = 0; /* Non-zero if this is a v-tab with an xRename() */
int savedDbFlags; /* Saved value of db->flags */
- savedDbFlags = db->flags;
+ savedDbFlags = db->flags;
if( NEVER(db->mallocFailed) ) goto exit_rename_table;
assert( pSrc->nSrc==1 );
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsAllMutexes(pParse->db) );
@@ -96229,7 +96229,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
** in database iDb. If so, this is an error.
*/
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, zName, zDb) || sqlite3FindIndex(db, zName, zDb) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"there is already another table or index with this name: %s", zName);
goto exit_rename_table;
}
@@ -96270,7 +96270,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
}
#endif
- /* Begin a transaction for database iDb.
+ /* Begin a transaction for database iDb.
** Then modify the schema cookie (since the ALTER TABLE modifies the
** schema). Open a statement transaction if the table is a virtual
** table.
@@ -96302,11 +96302,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER)
if( db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
- /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE
+ /* If foreign-key support is enabled, rewrite the CREATE TABLE
** statements corresponding to all child tables of foreign key constraints
** for which the renamed table is the parent table. */
if( (zWhere=whereForeignKeys(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_parent(sql, %Q, %Q) "
"WHERE %s;", zDb, MASTER_NAME, zTabName, zName, zWhere);
@@ -96332,8 +96332,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
"'sqlite_autoindex_' || %Q || substr(name,%d+18) "
"ELSE name END "
"WHERE tbl_name=%Q COLLATE nocase AND "
- "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
- zDb, MASTER_NAME, zName, zName, zName,
+ "(type='table' OR type='index' OR type='trigger');",
+ zDb, MASTER_NAME, zName, zName, zName,
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
zName,
#endif
@@ -96341,7 +96341,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
- /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
+ /* If the sqlite_sequence table exists in this database, then update
** it with the new table name.
*/
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_sequence", zDb) ){
@@ -96357,7 +96357,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterRenameTable(
** the temp database.
*/
if( (zWhere=whereTempTriggers(pParse, pTab))!=0 ){
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE sqlite_temp_master SET "
"sql = sqlite_rename_trigger(sql, %Q), "
"tbl_name = %Q "
@@ -96430,7 +96430,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
}
#endif
- /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
+ /* If the default value for the new column was specified with a
** literal NULL, then set pDflt to 0. This simplifies checking
** for an SQL NULL default below.
*/
@@ -96452,12 +96452,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
return;
}
if( (db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys) && pNew->pFKey && pDflt ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Cannot add a REFERENCES column with non-NULL default value");
return;
}
if( pCol->notNull && !pDflt ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Cannot add a NOT NULL column with default value NULL");
return;
}
@@ -96490,10 +96490,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
*zEnd-- = '\0';
}
db->flags |= SQLITE_PreferBuiltin;
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE \"%w\".%s SET "
"sql = substr(sql,1,%d) || ', ' || %Q || substr(sql,%d) "
- "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
+ "WHERE type = 'table' AND name = %Q",
zDb, MASTER_NAME, pNew->addColOffset, zCol, pNew->addColOffset+1,
zTab
);
@@ -96520,14 +96520,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pColDef){
/*
** This function is called by the parser after the table-name in
-** an "ALTER TABLE ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
+** an "ALTER TABLE ADD" statement is parsed. Argument
** pSrc is the full-name of the table being altered.
**
** This routine makes a (partial) copy of the Table structure
** for the table being altered and sets Parse.pNewTable to point
** to it. Routines called by the parser as the column definition
-** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
-** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
+** is parsed (i.e. sqlite3AddColumn()) add the new Column data to
+** the copy. The copy of the Table structure is deleted by tokenize.c
** after parsing is finished.
**
** Routine sqlite3AlterFinishAddColumn() will be called to complete
@@ -96665,7 +96665,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
** integer is the average number of rows in the index that have the same
** value in the first column of the index. The third integer is the average
** number of rows in the index that have the same value for the first two
-** columns. The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in
+** columns. The N-th integer (for N>1) is the average number of rows in
** the index which have the same value for the first N-1 columns. For
** a K-column index, there will be K+1 integers in the stat column. If
** the index is unique, then the last integer will be 1.
@@ -96675,7 +96675,7 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
** must be separated from the last integer by a single space. If the
** "unordered" keyword is present, then the query planner assumes that
** the index is unordered and will not use the index for a range query.
-**
+**
** If the sqlite_stat1.idx column is NULL, then the sqlite_stat1.stat
** column contains a single integer which is the (estimated) number of
** rows in the table identified by sqlite_stat1.tbl.
@@ -96733,9 +96733,9 @@ exit_begin_add_column:
** number of entries that are strictly less than the sample. The first
** integer in nLt contains the number of entries in the index where the
** left-most column is less than the left-most column of the sample.
-** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries
+** The K-th integer in the nLt entry is the number of index entries
** where the first K columns are less than the first K columns of the
-** sample. The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the
+** sample. The nDLt column is like nLt except that it contains the
** number of distinct entries in the index that are less than the
** sample.
**
@@ -96828,9 +96828,9 @@ static void openStatTable(
Table *pStat;
if( (pStat = sqlite3FindTable(db, zTab, pDb->zDbSName))==0 ){
if( aTable[i].zCols ){
- /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a
- ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage
- ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important
+ /* The sqlite_statN table does not exist. Create it. Note that a
+ ** side-effect of the CREATE TABLE statement is to leave the rootpage
+ ** of the new table in register pParse->regRoot. This is important
** because the OpenWrite opcode below will be needing it. */
sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.%s(%s)", pDb->zDbSName, zTab, aTable[i].zCols
@@ -96839,7 +96839,7 @@ static void openStatTable(
aCreateTbl[i] = OPFLAG_P2ISREG;
}
}else{
- /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries
+ /* The table already exists. If zWhere is not NULL, delete all entries
** associated with the table zWhere. If zWhere is NULL, delete the
** entire contents of the table. */
aRoot[i] = pStat->tnum;
@@ -96894,7 +96894,7 @@ struct Stat4Sample {
int iCol; /* If !isPSample, the reason for inclusion */
u32 iHash; /* Tiebreaker hash */
#endif
-};
+};
struct Stat4Accum {
tRowcnt nRow; /* Number of rows in the entire table */
tRowcnt nPSample; /* How often to do a periodic sample */
@@ -97002,7 +97002,7 @@ static void stat4Destructor(void *pOld){
** PRIMARY KEY of the table. The covering index that implements the
** original WITHOUT ROWID table as N==K as a special case.
**
-** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return
+** This routine allocates the Stat4Accum object in heap memory. The return
** value is a pointer to the Stat4Accum object. The datatype of the
** return value is BLOB, but it is really just a pointer to the Stat4Accum
** object.
@@ -97032,7 +97032,7 @@ static void statInit(
assert( nKeyCol>0 );
/* Allocate the space required for the Stat4Accum object */
- n = sizeof(*p)
+ n = sizeof(*p)
+ sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp /* Stat4Accum.anEq */
+ sizeof(tRowcnt)*nColUp /* Stat4Accum.anDLt */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
@@ -97065,7 +97065,7 @@ static void statInit(
p->nPSample = (tRowcnt)(sqlite3_value_int64(argv[2])/(mxSample/3+1) + 1);
p->current.anLt = &p->current.anEq[nColUp];
p->iPrn = 0x689e962d*(u32)nCol ^ 0xd0944565*(u32)sqlite3_value_int(argv[2]);
-
+
/* Set up the Stat4Accum.a[] and aBest[] arrays */
p->a = (struct Stat4Sample*)&p->current.anLt[nColUp];
p->aBest = &p->a[mxSample];
@@ -97076,7 +97076,7 @@ static void statInit(
p->a[i].anDLt = (tRowcnt *)pSpace; pSpace += (sizeof(tRowcnt) * nColUp);
}
assert( (pSpace - (u8*)p)==n );
-
+
for(i=0; iaBest[i].iCol = i;
}
@@ -97102,19 +97102,19 @@ static const FuncDef statInitFuncdef = {
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
/*
-** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for
-** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and
+** pNew and pOld are both candidate non-periodic samples selected for
+** the same column (pNew->iCol==pOld->iCol). Ignoring this column and
** considering only any trailing columns and the sample hash value, this
** function returns true if sample pNew is to be preferred over pOld.
** In other words, if we assume that the cardinalities of the selected
** column for pNew and pOld are equal, is pNew to be preferred over pOld.
**
** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of
-** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid.
+** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol+1] onwards are valid.
*/
static int sampleIsBetterPost(
- Stat4Accum *pAccum,
- Stat4Sample *pNew,
+ Stat4Accum *pAccum,
+ Stat4Sample *pNew,
Stat4Sample *pOld
){
int nCol = pAccum->nCol;
@@ -97134,11 +97134,11 @@ static int sampleIsBetterPost(
** Return true if pNew is to be preferred over pOld.
**
** This function assumes that for each argument sample, the contents of
-** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid.
+** the anEq[] array from pSample->anEq[pSample->iCol] onwards are valid.
*/
static int sampleIsBetter(
- Stat4Accum *pAccum,
- Stat4Sample *pNew,
+ Stat4Accum *pAccum,
+ Stat4Sample *pNew,
Stat4Sample *pOld
){
tRowcnt nEqNew = pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol];
@@ -97174,7 +97174,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){
Stat4Sample *pUpgrade = 0;
assert( pNew->anEq[pNew->iCol]>0 );
- /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column
+ /* This sample is being added because the prefix that ends in column
** iCol occurs many times in the table. However, if we have already
** added a sample that shares this prefix, there is no need to add
** this one. Instead, upgrade the priority of the highest priority
@@ -97218,7 +97218,7 @@ static void sampleInsert(Stat4Accum *p, Stat4Sample *pNew, int nEqZero){
** for the last sample in the p->a[] array. Otherwise, the samples would
** be out of order. */
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT4
- assert( p->nSample==0
+ assert( p->nSample==0
|| pNew->anLt[p->nCol-1] > p->a[p->nSample-1].anLt[p->nCol-1] );
#endif
@@ -97286,11 +97286,11 @@ static void samplePushPrevious(Stat4Accum *p, int iChng){
p->current.isPSample = 1;
sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0);
p->current.isPSample = 0;
- }else
+ }else
/* Or if it is a non-periodic sample. Add it in this case too. */
- if( p->nSamplemxSample
- || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin])
+ if( p->nSamplemxSample
+ || sampleIsBetter(p, &p->current, &p->a[p->iMin])
){
sampleInsert(p, &p->current, 0);
}
@@ -97434,9 +97434,9 @@ static void statGet(
/* STAT3 and STAT4 have a parameter on this routine. */
int eCall = sqlite3_value_int(argv[1]);
assert( argc==2 );
- assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ
+ assert( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 || eCall==STAT_GET_NEQ
|| eCall==STAT_GET_ROWID || eCall==STAT_GET_NLT
- || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT
+ || eCall==STAT_GET_NDLT
);
if( eCall==STAT_GET_STAT1 )
#else
@@ -97446,20 +97446,20 @@ static void statGet(
/* Return the value to store in the "stat" column of the sqlite_stat1
** table for this index.
**
- ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing
- ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of
- ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list
+ ** The value is a string composed of a list of integers describing
+ ** the index. The first integer in the list is the total number of
+ ** entries in the index. There is one additional integer in the list
** for each indexed column. This additional integer is an estimate of
** the number of rows matched by a stabbing query on the index using
** a key with the corresponding number of fields. In other words,
- ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is
+ ** if the index is on columns (a,b) and the sqlite_stat1 value is
** "100 10 2", then SQLite estimates that:
**
** * the index contains 100 rows,
** * "WHERE a=?" matches 10 rows, and
** * "WHERE a=? AND b=?" matches 2 rows.
**
- ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of
+ ** If D is the count of distinct values and K is the total number of
** rows, then each estimate is computed as:
**
** I = (K+D-1)/D
@@ -97509,7 +97509,7 @@ static void statGet(
case STAT_GET_NEQ: aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anEq; break;
case STAT_GET_NLT: aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anLt; break;
default: {
- aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt;
+ aCnt = p->a[p->iGet].anDLt;
p->iGet++;
break;
}
@@ -97621,7 +97621,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
}
#endif
- /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level.
+ /* Establish a read-lock on the table at the shared-cache level.
** Open a read-only cursor on the table. Also allocate a cursor number
** to use for scanning indexes (iIdxCur). No index cursor is opened at
** this time though. */
@@ -97687,9 +97687,9 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
** end_of_scan:
*/
- /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate
+ /* Make sure there are enough memory cells allocated to accommodate
** the regPrev array and a trailing rowid (the rowid slot is required
- ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of
+ ** when building a record to insert into the sample column of
** the sqlite_stat4 table. */
pParse->nMem = MAX(pParse->nMem, regPrev+nColTest);
@@ -97700,7 +97700,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
VdbeComment((v, "%s", pIdx->zName));
/* Invoke the stat_init() function. The arguments are:
- **
+ **
** (1) the number of columns in the index including the rowid
** (or for a WITHOUT ROWID table, the number of PK columns),
** (2) the number of columns in the key without the rowid/pk
@@ -97751,7 +97751,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
addrNextRow = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
if( nColTest==1 && pIdx->nKeyCol==1 && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) ){
/* For a single-column UNIQUE index, once we have found a non-NULL
- ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip
+ ** row, we know that all the rest will be distinct, so skip
** subsequent distinctness tests. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_NotNull, regPrev, endDistinctTest);
VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -97760,15 +97760,15 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
char *pColl = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pIdx->azColl[i]);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, i, regChng);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, iIdxCur, i, regTemp);
- aGotoChng[i] =
+ aGotoChng[i] =
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_Ne, regTemp, 0, regPrev+i, pColl, P4_COLLSEQ);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NULLEQ);
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Integer, nColTest, regChng);
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, endDistinctTest);
-
-
+
+
/*
** chng_addr_0:
** regPrev(0) = idx(0)
@@ -97784,7 +97784,7 @@ static void analyzeOneTable(
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, endDistinctTest);
sqlite3DbFree(db, aGotoChng);
}
-
+
/*
** chng_addr_N:
** regRowid = idx(rowid) // STAT34 only
@@ -98016,7 +98016,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Analyze(Parse *pParse, Token *pName1, Token *pName2){
}
sqlite3DbFree(db, z);
}
- }
+ }
}
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
if( v ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Expire);
@@ -98099,7 +98099,7 @@ static void decodeIntArray(
/*
** This callback is invoked once for each index when reading the
-** sqlite_stat1 table.
+** sqlite_stat1 table.
**
** argv[0] = name of the table
** argv[1] = name of the index (might be NULL)
@@ -98137,7 +98137,7 @@ static int analysisLoader(void *pData, int argc, char **argv, char **NotUsed){
tRowcnt *aiRowEst = 0;
int nCol = pIndex->nKeyCol+1;
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
- /* Index.aiRowEst may already be set here if there are duplicate
+ /* Index.aiRowEst may already be set here if there are duplicate
** sqlite_stat1 entries for this index. In that case just clobber
** the old data with the new instead of allocating a new array. */
if( pIndex->aiRowEst==0 ){
@@ -98189,7 +98189,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteIndexSamples(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
/*
** Populate the pIdx->aAvgEq[] array based on the samples currently
-** stored in pIdx->aSample[].
+** stored in pIdx->aSample[].
*/
static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){
if( pIdx ){
@@ -98225,12 +98225,12 @@ static void initAvgEq(Index *pIdx){
pIdx->nRowEst0 = nRow;
/* Set nSum to the number of distinct (iCol+1) field prefixes that
- ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of
- ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value
+ ** occur in the stat4 table for this index. Set sumEq to the sum of
+ ** the nEq values for column iCol for the same set (adding the value
** only once where there exist duplicate prefixes). */
for(i=0; inSample-1)
- || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol]
+ || aSample[i].anDLt[iCol]!=aSample[i+1].anDLt[iCol]
){
sumEq += aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
nSum100 += 100;
@@ -98264,7 +98264,7 @@ static Index *findIndexOrPrimaryKey(
}
/*
-** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table
+** Load the content from either the sqlite_stat4 or sqlite_stat3 table
** into the relevant Index.aSample[] arrays.
**
** Arguments zSql1 and zSql2 must point to SQL statements that return
@@ -98363,7 +98363,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl(
if( zIndex==0 ) continue;
pIdx = findIndexOrPrimaryKey(db, zIndex, zDb);
if( pIdx==0 ) continue;
- /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from
+ /* This next condition is true if data has already been loaded from
** the sqlite_stat4 table. In this case ignore stat3 data. */
nCol = pIdx->nSampleCol;
if( bStat3 && nCol>1 ) continue;
@@ -98399,7 +98399,7 @@ static int loadStatTbl(
}
/*
-** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into
+** Load content from the sqlite_stat4 and sqlite_stat3 tables into
** the Index.aSample[] arrays of all indices.
*/
static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
@@ -98408,7 +98408,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
assert( db->lookaside.bDisable );
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat4", zDb) ){
rc = loadStatTbl(db, 0,
- "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx",
+ "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4 GROUP BY idx",
"SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sample FROM %Q.sqlite_stat4",
zDb
);
@@ -98416,7 +98416,7 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat3", zDb) ){
rc = loadStatTbl(db, 1,
- "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx",
+ "SELECT idx,count(*) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3 GROUP BY idx",
"SELECT idx,neq,nlt,ndlt,sqlite_record(sample) FROM %Q.sqlite_stat3",
zDb
);
@@ -98433,11 +98433,11 @@ static int loadStat4(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
** Index.aSample[] arrays.
**
** If the sqlite_stat1 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR
-** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined
-** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is
+** is returned. In this case, even if SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined
+** during compilation and the sqlite_stat3/4 table is present, no data is
** read from it.
**
-** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the
+** If SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3/4 was defined during compilation and the
** sqlite_stat4 table is not present in the database, SQLITE_ERROR is
** returned. However, in this case, data is read from the sqlite_stat1
** table (if it is present) before returning.
@@ -98470,7 +98470,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AnalysisLoad(sqlite3 *db, int iDb){
sInfo.db = db;
sInfo.zDatabase = db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName;
if( sqlite3FindTable(db, "sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase)!=0 ){
- zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"SELECT tbl,idx,stat FROM %Q.sqlite_stat1", sInfo.zDatabase);
if( zSql==0 ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
@@ -98601,7 +98601,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
** * Specified database name already being used.
*/
if( db->nDb>=db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]+2 ){
- zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d",
+ zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "too many attached databases - max %d",
db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_ATTACHED]
);
goto attach_error;
@@ -98661,7 +98661,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
if( !aNew->pSchema ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
}else if( aNew->pSchema->file_format && aNew->pSchema->enc!=ENC(db) ){
- zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zErrDyn = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"attached databases must use the same text encoding as main database");
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
@@ -98696,7 +98696,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
zErrDyn = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, "Invalid key value");
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
break;
-
+
case SQLITE_TEXT:
case SQLITE_BLOB:
nKey = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[2]);
@@ -98716,7 +98716,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
#endif
/* If the file was opened successfully, read the schema for the new database.
- ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and
+ ** If this fails, or if opening the file failed, then close the file and
** remove the entry from the db->aDb[] array. i.e. put everything back the way
** we found it.
*/
@@ -98753,7 +98753,7 @@ static void attachFunc(
}
goto attach_error;
}
-
+
return;
attach_error:
@@ -98844,7 +98844,7 @@ static void codeAttach(
memset(&sName, 0, sizeof(NameContext));
sName.pParse = pParse;
- if(
+ if(
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pFilename)) ||
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pDbname)) ||
SQLITE_OK!=(rc = resolveAttachExpr(&sName, pKey))
@@ -98880,14 +98880,14 @@ static void codeAttach(
(char *)pFunc, P4_FUNCDEF);
assert( pFunc->nArg==-1 || (pFunc->nArg&0xff)==pFunc->nArg );
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, (u8)(pFunc->nArg));
-
+
/* Code an OP_Expire. For an ATTACH statement, set P1 to true (expire this
** statement only). For DETACH, set it to false (expire all existing
** statements).
*/
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Expire, (type==SQLITE_ATTACH));
}
-
+
attach_end:
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pFilename);
sqlite3ExprDelete(db, pDbname);
@@ -99232,10 +99232,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthReadCol(
/*
** The pExpr should be a TK_COLUMN expression. The table referred to
-** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.
+** is in pTabList or else it is the NEW or OLD table of a trigger.
** Check to see if it is OK to read this particular column.
**
-** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN
+** If the auth function returns SQLITE_IGNORE, change the TK_COLUMN
** instruction into a TK_NULL. If the auth function returns SQLITE_DENY,
** then generate an error.
*/
@@ -99338,7 +99338,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3AuthCheck(
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AuthContextPush(
Parse *pParse,
- AuthContext *pContext,
+ AuthContext *pContext,
const char *zContext
){
assert( pParse );
@@ -99401,7 +99401,7 @@ struct TableLock {
};
/*
-** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
+** Record the fact that we want to lock a table at run-time.
**
** The table to be locked has root page iTab and is found in database iDb.
** A read or a write lock can be taken depending on isWritelock.
@@ -99454,7 +99454,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableLock(
*/
static void codeTableLocks(Parse *pParse){
int i;
- Vdbe *pVdbe;
+ Vdbe *pVdbe;
pVdbe = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
assert( pVdbe!=0 ); /* sqlite3GetVdbe cannot fail: VDBE already allocated */
@@ -99509,7 +99509,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
** vdbe program
*/
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
- assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
+ assert( !pParse->isMultiWrite
|| sqlite3VdbeAssertMayAbort(v, pParse->mayAbort));
if( v ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Halt);
@@ -99531,7 +99531,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
** transaction on each used database and to verify the schema cookie
** on each used database.
*/
- if( db->mallocFailed==0
+ if( db->mallocFailed==0
&& (DbMaskNonZero(pParse->cookieMask) || pParse->pConstExpr)
){
int iDb, i;
@@ -99561,8 +99561,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishCoding(Parse *pParse){
pParse->nVtabLock = 0;
#endif
- /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
- ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
+ /* Once all the cookies have been verified and transactions opened,
+ ** obtain the required table-locks. This is a no-op unless the
** shared-cache feature is enabled.
*/
codeTableLocks(pParse);
@@ -99754,7 +99754,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTable(
** sqlite3FixSrcList() for details.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
u32 flags,
struct SrcList_item *p
){
@@ -99770,7 +99770,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Table *sqlite3LocateTableItem(
}
/*
-** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
+** Locate the in-memory structure that describes
** a particular index given the name of that index
** and the name of the database that contains the index.
** Return NULL if not found.
@@ -99952,10 +99952,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteColumnNames(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
**
** This routine just deletes the data structure. It does not unlink
** the table data structure from the hash table. But it does destroy
-** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
+** memory structures of the indices and foreign keys associated with
** the table.
**
-** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object
+** The db parameter is optional. It is needed if the Table object
** contains lookaside memory. (Table objects in the schema do not use
** lookaside memory, but some ephemeral Table objects do.) Or the
** db parameter can be used with db->pnBytesFreed to measure the memory
@@ -99977,7 +99977,7 @@ static void SQLITE_NOINLINE deleteTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTable){
assert( pIndex->pSchema==pTable->pSchema
|| (IsVirtual(pTable) && pIndex->idxType!=SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF) );
if( (db==0 || db->pnBytesFreed==0) && !IsVirtual(pTable) ){
- char *zName = pIndex->zName;
+ char *zName = pIndex->zName;
TESTONLY ( Index *pOld = ) sqlite3HashInsert(
&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash, zName, 0
);
@@ -100092,7 +100092,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDbName(sqlite3 *db, const char *zName){
/*
** The token *pName contains the name of a database (either "main" or
** "temp" or the name of an attached db). This routine returns the
-** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
+** index of the named database in db->aDb[], or -1 if the named db
** does not exist.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
@@ -100108,7 +100108,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FindDb(sqlite3 *db, Token *pName){
** pName1 and pName2. If the table name was fully qualified, for example:
**
** CREATE TABLE xxx.yyy (...);
-**
+**
** Then pName1 is set to "xxx" and pName2 "yyy". On the other hand if
** the table name is not fully qualified, i.e.:
**
@@ -100157,7 +100157,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3TwoPartName(
** is reserved for internal use.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CheckObjectName(Parse *pParse, const char *zName){
- if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0
+ if( !pParse->db->init.busy && pParse->nested==0
&& (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
&& 0==sqlite3StrNICmp(zName, "sqlite_", 7) ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "object name reserved for internal use: %s", zName);
@@ -100229,7 +100229,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
iDb = sqlite3TwoPartName(pParse, pName1, pName2, &pName);
if( iDb<0 ) return;
if( !OMIT_TEMPDB && isTemp && pName2->n>0 && iDb!=1 ){
- /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
+ /* If creating a temp table, the name may not be qualified. Unless
** the database name is "temp" anyway. */
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "temporary table name must be unqualified");
return;
@@ -100322,7 +100322,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
** the SQLITE_MASTER table. Note in particular that we must go ahead
** and allocate the record number for the table entry now. Before any
** PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE keywords are parsed. Those keywords will cause
- ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
+ ** indices to be created and the table record must come before the
** indices. Hence, the record number for the table must be allocated
** now.
*/
@@ -100340,7 +100340,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3StartTable(
}
#endif
- /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
+ /* If the file format and encoding in the database have not been set,
** set them now.
*/
reg1 = pParse->regRowid = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -100450,7 +100450,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddColumn(Parse *pParse, Token *pName, Token *pType){
memset(pCol, 0, sizeof(p->aCol[0]));
pCol->zName = z;
sqlite3ColumnPropertiesFromName(p, pCol);
-
+
if( pType->n==0 ){
/* If there is no type specified, columns have the default affinity
** 'BLOB'. */
@@ -100485,11 +100485,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddNotNull(Parse *pParse, int onError){
** Scan the column type name zType (length nType) and return the
** associated affinity type.
**
-** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
+** This routine does a case-independent search of zType for the
** substrings in the following table. If one of the substrings is
** found, the corresponding affinity is returned. If zType contains
-** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
-** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
+** more than one of the substrings, entries toward the top of
+** the table take priority. For example, if zType is 'BLOBINT',
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER is returned.
**
** Substring | Affinity
@@ -100610,7 +100610,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddDefaultValue(Parse *pParse, ExprSpan *pSpan){
/*
** Backwards Compatibility Hack:
-**
+**
** Historical versions of SQLite accepted strings as column names in
** indexes and PRIMARY KEY constraints and in UNIQUE constraints. Example:
**
@@ -100633,7 +100633,7 @@ static void sqlite3StringToId(Expr *p){
}
/*
-** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
+** Designate the PRIMARY KEY for the table. pList is a list of names
** of columns that form the primary key. If pList is NULL, then the
** most recently added column of the table is the primary key.
**
@@ -100663,7 +100663,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddPrimaryKey(
int nTerm;
if( pTab==0 ) goto primary_key_exit;
if( pTab->tabFlags & TF_HasPrimaryKey ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table \"%s\" has more than one primary key", pTab->zName);
goto primary_key_exit;
}
@@ -100761,7 +100761,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AddCollateType(Parse *pParse, Token *pToken){
Index *pIdx;
sqlite3DbFree(db, p->aCol[i].zColl);
p->aCol[i].zColl = zColl;
-
+
/* If the column is declared as " PRIMARY KEY COLLATE ",
** then an index may have been created on this column before the
** collation type was added. Correct this if it is the case.
@@ -100835,7 +100835,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ChangeCookie(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_SetCookie, iDb, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION,
db->aDb[iDb].pSchema->schema_cookie+1);
}
@@ -100856,13 +100856,13 @@ static int identLength(const char *z){
}
/*
-** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
+** The first parameter is a pointer to an output buffer. The second
** parameter is a pointer to an integer that contains the offset at
** which to write into the output buffer. This function copies the
** nul-terminated string pointed to by the third parameter, zSignedIdent,
** to the specified offset in the buffer and updates *pIdx to refer
** to the first byte after the last byte written before returning.
-**
+**
** If the string zSignedIdent consists entirely of alpha-numeric
** characters, does not begin with a digit and is not an SQL keyword,
** then it is copied to the output buffer exactly as it is. Otherwise,
@@ -100906,7 +100906,7 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
n += identLength(pCol->zName) + 5;
}
n += identLength(p->zName);
- if( n<50 ){
+ if( n<50 ){
zSep = "";
zSep2 = ",";
zEnd = ")";
@@ -100947,10 +100947,10 @@ static char *createTableStmt(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER );
testcase( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL );
-
+
zType = azType[pCol->affinity - SQLITE_AFF_BLOB];
len = sqlite3Strlen30(zType);
- assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB
+ assert( pCol->affinity==SQLITE_AFF_BLOB
|| pCol->affinity==sqlite3AffinityType(zType, 0) );
memcpy(&zStmt[k], zType, len);
k += len;
@@ -101078,13 +101078,13 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
}
/* Locate the PRIMARY KEY index. Or, if this table was originally
- ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
+ ** an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY table, create a new PRIMARY KEY index.
*/
if( pTab->iPKey>=0 ){
ExprList *pList;
Token ipkToken;
sqlite3TokenInit(&ipkToken, pTab->aCol[pTab->iPKey].zName);
- pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
+ pList = sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &ipkToken, 0));
if( pList==0 ) return;
pList->a[0].sortOrder = pParse->iPkSortOrder;
@@ -101189,7 +101189,7 @@ static void convertToWithoutRowidTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
** the sqlite_master table. We do not want to create it again.
**
** If the pSelect argument is not NULL, it means that this routine
-** was called to create a table generated from a
+** was called to create a table generated from a
** "CREATE TABLE ... AS SELECT ..." statement. The column names of
** the new table will match the result set of the SELECT.
*/
@@ -101277,7 +101277,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Close, 0);
- /*
+ /*
** Initialize zType for the new view or table.
*/
if( p->pSelect==0 ){
@@ -101355,12 +101355,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3EndTable(
Token *pEnd2 = tabOpts ? &pParse->sLastToken : pEnd;
n = (int)(pEnd2->z - pParse->sNameToken.z);
if( pEnd2->z[0]!=';' ) n += pEnd2->n;
- zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"CREATE %s %.*s", zType2, n, pParse->sNameToken.z
);
}
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all
** the information we've collected.
*/
@@ -101542,7 +101542,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
** Actually, the error above is now caught prior to reaching this point.
** But the following test is still important as it does come up
** in the following:
- **
+ **
** CREATE TABLE main.ex1(a);
** CREATE TEMP VIEW ex1 AS SELECT a FROM ex1;
** SELECT * FROM temp.ex1;
@@ -101583,9 +101583,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
** normally holds CHECK constraints on an ordinary table, but for
** a VIEW it holds the list of column names.
*/
- sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
+ sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(pParse, pTable->pCheck,
&pTable->nCol, &pTable->aCol);
- if( db->mallocFailed==0
+ if( db->mallocFailed==0
&& pParse->nErr==0
&& pTable->nCol==pSel->pEList->nExpr
){
@@ -101613,7 +101613,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ViewGetColumnNames(Parse *pParse, Table *pTable){
}
pTable->pSchema->schemaFlags |= DB_UnresetViews;
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW */
- return nErr;
+ return nErr;
}
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIEW) || !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE) */
@@ -101649,7 +101649,7 @@ static void sqliteViewResetAll(sqlite3 *db, int idx){
** on tables and/or indices that are the process of being deleted.
** If you are unlucky, one of those deleted indices or tables might
** have the same rootpage number as the real table or index that is
-** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
+** being moved. So we cannot stop searching after the first match
** because the first match might be for one of the deleted indices
** or tables and not the table/index that is actually being moved.
** We must continue looping until all tables and indices with
@@ -101686,7 +101686,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RootPageMoved(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, int iFrom, int iT
** Also write code to modify the sqlite_master table and internal schema
** if a root-page of another table is moved by the btree-layer whilst
** erasing iTable (this can happen with an auto-vacuum database).
-*/
+*/
static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
@@ -101703,7 +101703,7 @@ static void destroyRootPage(Parse *pParse, int iTable, int iDb){
** is in register NNN. See grammar rules associated with the TK_REGISTER
** token for additional information.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"UPDATE %Q.%s SET rootpage=%d WHERE #%d AND rootpage=#%d",
pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, MASTER_NAME, iTable, r1, r1);
#endif
@@ -101727,7 +101727,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
#else
/* If the database may be auto-vacuum capable (if SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
** is not defined), then it is important to call OP_Destroy on the
- ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
+ ** table and index root-pages in order, starting with the numerically
** largest root-page number. This guarantees that none of the root-pages
** to be destroyed is relocated by an earlier OP_Destroy. i.e. if the
** following were coded:
@@ -101737,7 +101737,7 @@ static void destroyTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
** OP_Destroy 5 0
**
** and root page 5 happened to be the largest root-page number in the
- ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
+ ** database, then root page 5 would be moved to page 4 by the
** "OP_Destroy 4 0" opcode. The subsequent "OP_Destroy 5 0" would hit
** a free-list page.
*/
@@ -101819,7 +101819,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in
*/
pTrigger = sqlite3TriggerList(pParse, pTab);
while( pTrigger ){
- assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
+ assert( pTrigger->pSchema==pTab->pSchema ||
pTrigger->pSchema==db->aDb[1].pSchema );
sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(pParse, pTrigger);
pTrigger = pTrigger->pNext;
@@ -101846,7 +101846,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeDropTable(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int iDb, in
** created in the temp database that refers to a table in another
** database.
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"DELETE FROM %Q.%s WHERE tbl_name=%Q and type!='trigger'",
pDb->zDbSName, MASTER_NAME, pTab->zName);
if( !isView && !IsVirtual(pTab) ){
@@ -101933,7 +101933,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, int isView,
}
}
#endif
- if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
+ if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
&& sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_stat", 11)!=0 ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "table %s may not be dropped", pTab->zName);
goto exit_drop_table;
@@ -102052,8 +102052,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
}
}
if( j>=p->nCol ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
- "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ "unknown column \"%s\" in foreign key definition",
pFromCol->a[i].zName);
goto fk_end;
}
@@ -102073,7 +102073,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateForeignKey(
pFKey->aAction[1] = (u8)((flags >> 8 ) & 0xff); /* ON UPDATE action */
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, p->pSchema) );
- pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
+ pNextTo = (FKey *)sqlite3HashInsert(&p->pSchema->fkeyHash,
pFKey->zTo, (void *)pFKey
);
if( pNextTo==pFKey ){
@@ -102178,7 +102178,7 @@ static void sqlite3RefillIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIndex, int memRootPage){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Next, iTab, addr1+1); VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
if( memRootPage<0 ) sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Clear, tnum, iDb);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_OpenWrite, iIdx, tnum, iDb,
(char *)pKey, P4_KEYINFO);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_BULKCSR|((memRootPage>=0)?OPFLAG_P2ISREG:0));
@@ -102242,8 +102242,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject(
}
/*
-** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
-** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
+** Create a new index for an SQL table. pName1.pName2 is the name of the index
+** and pTblList is the name of the table that is to be indexed. Both will
** be NULL for a primary key or an index that is created to satisfy a
** UNIQUE constraint. If pTable and pIndex are NULL, use pParse->pNewTable
** as the table to be indexed. pParse->pNewTable is a table that is
@@ -102251,7 +102251,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Index *sqlite3AllocateIndexObject(
**
** pList is a list of columns to be indexed. pList will be NULL if this
** is a primary key or unique-constraint on the most recent column added
-** to the table currently under construction.
+** to the table currently under construction.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
Parse *pParse, /* All information about this parse */
@@ -102298,7 +102298,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
*/
if( pTblName!=0 ){
- /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
+ /* Use the two-part index name to determine the database
** to search for the table. 'Fix' the table name to this db
** before looking up the table.
*/
@@ -102330,7 +102330,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
assert( db->mallocFailed==0 || pTab==0 );
if( pTab==0 ) goto exit_create_index;
if( iDb==1 && db->aDb[iDb].pSchema!=pTab->pSchema ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"cannot create a TEMP index on non-TEMP table \"%s\"",
pTab->zName);
goto exit_create_index;
@@ -102347,7 +102347,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
assert( pTab!=0 );
assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
- if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
+ if( sqlite3StrNICmp(pTab->zName, "sqlite_", 7)==0
&& db->init.busy==0
#if SQLITE_USER_AUTHENTICATION
&& sqlite3UserAuthTable(pTab->zName)==0
@@ -102371,7 +102371,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
/*
** Find the name of the index. Make sure there is not already another
- ** index or table with the same name.
+ ** index or table with the same name.
**
** Exception: If we are reading the names of permanent indices from the
** sqlite_master table (because some other process changed the schema) and
@@ -102464,8 +102464,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
}
}
- /*
- ** Allocate the index structure.
+ /*
+ ** Allocate the index structure.
*/
nName = sqlite3Strlen30(zName);
nExtraCol = pPk ? pPk->nKeyCol : 1;
@@ -102576,7 +102576,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
int x = pPk->aiColumn[j];
assert( x>=0 );
if( hasColumn(pIndex->aiColumn, pIndex->nKeyCol, x) ){
- pIndex->nColumn--;
+ pIndex->nColumn--;
}else{
pIndex->aiColumn[i] = x;
pIndex->azColl[i] = pPk->azColl[j];
@@ -102594,7 +102594,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
/* If this index contains every column of its table, then mark
** it as a covering index */
- assert( HasRowid(pTab)
+ assert( HasRowid(pTab)
|| pTab->iPKey<0 || sqlite3ColumnOfIndex(pIndex, pTab->iPKey)>=0 );
if( pTblName!=0 && pIndex->nColumn>=pTab->nCol ){
pIndex->isCovering = 1;
@@ -102649,13 +102649,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
if( pIdx->onError!=pIndex->onError ){
/* This constraint creates the same index as a previous
** constraint specified somewhere in the CREATE TABLE statement.
- ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
+ ** However the ON CONFLICT clauses are different. If both this
** constraint and the previous equivalent constraint have explicit
** ON CONFLICT clauses this is an error. Otherwise, use the
** explicitly specified behavior for the index.
*/
if( !(pIdx->onError==OE_Default || pIndex->onError==OE_Default) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"conflicting ON CONFLICT clauses specified", 0);
}
if( pIdx->onError==OE_Default ){
@@ -102669,14 +102669,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
}
/* Link the new Index structure to its table and to the other
- ** in-memory database structures.
+ ** in-memory database structures.
*/
assert( pParse->nErr==0 );
if( db->init.busy ){
Index *p;
assert( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB );
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, 0, pIndex->pSchema) );
- p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
+ p = sqlite3HashInsert(&pIndex->pSchema->idxHash,
pIndex->zName, pIndex);
if( p ){
assert( p==pIndex ); /* Malloc must have failed */
@@ -102713,9 +102713,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
sqlite3BeginWriteOperation(pParse, 1, iDb);
/* Create the rootpage for the index using CreateIndex. But before
- ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
- ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
- ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
+ ** doing so, code a Noop instruction and store its address in
+ ** Index.tnum. This is required in case this index is actually a
+ ** PRIMARY KEY and the table is actually a WITHOUT ROWID table. In
** that case the convertToWithoutRowidTable() routine will replace
** the Noop with a Goto to jump over the VDBE code generated below. */
pIndex->tnum = sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_Noop);
@@ -102738,7 +102738,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
/* Add an entry in sqlite_master for this index
*/
- sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
+ sqlite3NestedParse(pParse,
"INSERT INTO %Q.%s VALUES('index',%Q,%Q,#%d,%Q);",
db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, MASTER_NAME,
pIndex->zName,
@@ -102766,7 +102766,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CreateIndex(
** sure all indices labeled OE_Replace come after all those labeled
** OE_Ignore. This is necessary for the correct constraint check
** processing (in sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks()) as part of
- ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.
+ ** UPDATE and INSERT statements.
*/
if( db->init.busy || pTblName==0 ){
if( onError!=OE_Replace || pTab->pIndex==0
@@ -102818,7 +102818,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DefaultRowEst(Index *pIdx){
int nCopy = MIN(ArraySize(aVal), pIdx->nKeyCol);
int i;
- /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
+ /* Set the first entry (number of rows in the index) to the estimated
** number of rows in the table, or half the number of rows in the table
** for a partial index. But do not let the estimate drop below 10. */
a[0] = pIdx->pTable->nRowLogEst;
@@ -103079,7 +103079,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListEnlarge(
** database name prefix. Like this: "database.table". The pDatabase
** points to the table name and the pTable points to the database name.
** The SrcList.a[].zName field is filled with the table name which might
-** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
+** come from pTable (if pDatabase is NULL) or from pDatabase.
** SrcList.a[].zDatabase is filled with the database name from pTable,
** or with NULL if no database is specified.
**
@@ -103205,7 +103205,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm(
struct SrcList_item *pItem;
sqlite3 *db = pParse->db;
if( !p && (pOn || pUsing) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "a JOIN clause is required before %s",
(pOn ? "ON" : "USING")
);
goto append_from_error;
@@ -103233,7 +103233,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE SrcList *sqlite3SrcListAppendFromTerm(
}
/*
-** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
+** Add an INDEXED BY or NOT INDEXED clause to the most recently added
** element of the source-list passed as the second argument.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pIndexedBy){
@@ -103244,7 +103244,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(Parse *pParse, SrcList *p, Token *pI
assert( pItem->fg.isIndexedBy==0 );
assert( pItem->fg.isTabFunc==0 );
if( pIndexedBy->n==1 && !pIndexedBy->z ){
- /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
+ /* A "NOT INDEXED" clause was supplied. See parse.y
** construct "indexed_opt" for details. */
pItem->fg.notIndexed = 1;
}else{
@@ -103357,7 +103357,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RollbackTransaction(Parse *pParse){
/*
** This function is called by the parser when it parses a command to create,
-** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
+** release or rollback an SQL savepoint.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Savepoint(Parse *pParse, int op, Token *pName){
char *zName = sqlite3NameFromToken(pParse->db, pName);
@@ -103384,7 +103384,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(Parse *pParse){
if( db->aDb[1].pBt==0 && !pParse->explain ){
int rc;
Btree *pBt;
- static const int flags =
+ static const int flags =
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE |
SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
@@ -103430,7 +103430,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(Parse *pParse, int iDb){
}
/*
-** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
+** If argument zDb is NULL, then call sqlite3CodeVerifySchema() for each
** attached database. Otherwise, invoke it for the database named zDb only.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeVerifyNamedSchema(Parse *pParse, const char *zDb){
@@ -103476,9 +103476,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
pToplevel->isMultiWrite = 1;
}
-/*
+/*
** The code generator calls this routine if is discovers that it is
-** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
+** possible to abort a statement prior to completion. In order to
** perform this abort without corrupting the database, we need to make
** sure that the statement is protected by a statement transaction.
**
@@ -103487,7 +103487,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MultiWrite(Parse *pParse){
** such that the abort must occur after the multiwrite. This makes
** some statements involving the REPLACE conflict resolution algorithm
** go a little faster. But taking advantage of this time dependency
-** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
+** makes it more difficult to prove that the code is correct (in
** particular, it prevents us from writing an effective
** implementation of sqlite3AssertMayAbort()) and so we have chosen
** to take the safe route and skip the optimization.
@@ -103545,8 +103545,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
}
}
zErr = sqlite3StrAccumFinish(&errMsg);
- sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
- IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
+ sqlite3HaltConstraint(pParse,
+ IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_PRIMARYKEY
: SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_UNIQUE,
onError, zErr, P4_DYNAMIC, P5_ConstraintUnique);
}
@@ -103558,7 +103558,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3UniqueConstraint(
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RowidConstraint(
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */
int onError, /* Conflict resolution algorithm */
- Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
+ Table *pTab /* The table with the non-unique rowid */
){
char *zMsg;
int rc;
@@ -103737,9 +103737,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE KeyInfo *sqlite3KeyInfoOfIndex(Parse *pParse, Index *pIdx){
}
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
-/*
-** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
-** WITH clause.
+/*
+** This routine is invoked once per CTE by the parser while parsing a
+** WITH clause.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE With *sqlite3WithAdd(
Parse *pParse, /* Parsing context */
@@ -103808,7 +103808,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithDelete(sqlite3 *db, With *pWith){
/************** End of build.c ***********************************************/
/************** Begin file callback.c ****************************************/
/*
-** 2005 May 23
+** 2005 May 23
**
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code. In place of
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
@@ -103878,8 +103878,8 @@ static int synthCollSeq(sqlite3 *db, CollSeq *pColl){
** This function is responsible for invoking the collation factory callback
** or substituting a collation sequence of a different encoding when the
** requested collation sequence is not available in the desired encoding.
-**
-** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding
+**
+** If it is not NULL, then pColl must point to the database native encoding
** collation sequence with name zName, length nName.
**
** The return value is either the collation sequence to be used in database
@@ -103925,7 +103925,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3GetCollSeq(
** that have not been defined by sqlite3_create_collation() etc.
**
** If required, this routine calls the 'collation needed' callback to
-** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work,
+** request a definition of the collating sequence. If this doesn't work,
** an equivalent collating sequence that uses a text encoding different
** from the main database is substituted, if one is available.
*/
@@ -103980,7 +103980,7 @@ static CollSeq *findCollSeqEntry(
pColl[0].zName[nName] = 0;
pDel = sqlite3HashInsert(&db->aCollSeq, pColl[0].zName, pColl);
- /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will
+ /* If a malloc() failure occurred in sqlite3HashInsert(), it will
** return the pColl pointer to be deleted (because it wasn't added
** to the hash table).
*/
@@ -104038,7 +104038,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE CollSeq *sqlite3FindCollSeq(
** is also -1. In other words, we are searching for a function that
** takes a variable number of arguments.
**
-** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function
+** If nArg is -2 that means that we are searching for any function
** regardless of the number of arguments it uses, so return a positive
** match score for any
**
@@ -104130,8 +104130,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3InsertBuiltinFuncs(
}
}
}
-
-
+
+
/*
** Locate a user function given a name, a number of arguments and a flag
@@ -104192,7 +104192,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
** have fields overwritten with new information appropriate for the
** new function. But the FuncDefs for built-in functions are read-only.
** So we must not search for built-ins when creating a new function.
- */
+ */
if( !createFlag && (pBest==0 || (db->flags & SQLITE_PreferBuiltin)!=0) ){
bestScore = 0;
h = (sqlite3UpperToLower[(u8)zName[0]] + nName) % SQLITE_FUNC_HASH_SZ;
@@ -104211,7 +104211,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
** exact match for the name, number of arguments and encoding, then add a
** new entry to the hash table and return it.
*/
- if( createFlag && bestScorezName = (const char*)&pBest[1];
@@ -104236,7 +104236,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3FindFunction(
/*
** Free all resources held by the schema structure. The void* argument points
-** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the
+** at a Schema struct. This function does not call sqlite3DbFree(db, ) on the
** pointer itself, it just cleans up subsidiary resources (i.e. the contents
** of the schema hash tables).
**
@@ -104316,7 +104316,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Schema *sqlite3SchemaGet(sqlite3 *db, Btree *pBt){
** (as in the FROM clause of a SELECT statement) in this case it contains
** the name of a single table, as one might find in an INSERT, DELETE,
** or UPDATE statement. Look up that table in the symbol table and
-** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table
+** return a pointer. Set an error message and return NULL if the table
** name is not found or if any other error occurs.
**
** The following fields are initialized appropriate in pSrc:
@@ -104352,12 +104352,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsReadOnly(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, int viewOk){
** 1) It is a virtual table and no implementation of the xUpdate method
** has been provided, or
** 2) It is a system table (i.e. sqlite_master), this call is not
- ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
+ ** part of a nested parse and writable_schema pragma has not
** been specified.
**
** In either case leave an error message in pParse and return non-zero.
*/
- if( ( IsVirtual(pTab)
+ if( ( IsVirtual(pTab)
&& sqlite3GetVTable(pParse->db, pTab)->pMod->pModule->xUpdate==0 )
|| ( (pTab->tabFlags & TF_Readonly)!=0
&& (pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_WriteSchema)==0
@@ -104403,7 +104403,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3MaterializeView(
assert( pFrom->a[0].pOn==0 );
assert( pFrom->a[0].pUsing==0 );
}
- pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, 0,
+ pSel = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse, 0, pFrom, pWhere, 0, 0, 0,
SF_IncludeHidden, 0, 0);
sqlite3SelectDestInit(&dest, SRT_EphemTab, iCur);
sqlite3Select(pParse, pSel, &dest);
@@ -104452,11 +104452,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Expr *sqlite3LimitWhere(
return pWhere;
}
- /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
+ /* Generate a select expression tree to enforce the limit/offset
** term for the DELETE or UPDATE statement. For example:
** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** becomes:
- ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
+ ** DELETE FROM table_a WHERE rowid IN (
** SELECT rowid FROM table_a WHERE col1=1 ORDER BY col2 LIMIT 1 OFFSET 1
** );
*/
@@ -104537,7 +104537,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
int addrEphOpen = 0; /* Instruction to open the Ephemeral table */
int bComplex; /* True if there are triggers or FKs or
** subqueries in the WHERE clause */
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
int isView; /* True if attempting to delete from a view */
Trigger *pTrigger; /* List of table triggers, if required */
@@ -104585,7 +104585,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
}
iDb = sqlite3SchemaToIndex(db, pTab->pSchema);
assert( iDbnDb );
- rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
+ rcauth = sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_DELETE, pTab->zName, 0,
db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
assert( rcauth==SQLITE_OK || rcauth==SQLITE_DENY || rcauth==SQLITE_IGNORE );
if( rcauth==SQLITE_DENY ){
@@ -104646,7 +104646,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRUNCATE_OPTIMIZATION
/* Special case: A DELETE without a WHERE clause deletes everything.
** It is easier just to erase the whole table. Prior to version 3.6.5,
- ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
+ ** this optimization caused the row change count (the value returned by
** API function sqlite3_count_changes) to be set incorrectly. */
if( rcauth==SQLITE_OK
&& pWhere==0
@@ -104690,7 +104690,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
addrEphOpen = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_OpenEphemeral, iEphCur, nPk);
sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
}
-
+
/* Construct a query to find the rowid or primary key for every row
** to be deleted, based on the WHERE clause. Set variable eOnePass
** to indicate the strategy used to implement this delete:
@@ -104704,12 +104704,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
eOnePass = sqlite3WhereOkOnePass(pWInfo, aiCurOnePass);
assert( IsVirtual(pTab)==0 || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_MULTI );
assert( IsVirtual(pTab) || bComplex || eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF );
-
+
/* Keep track of the number of rows to be deleted */
if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, memCnt, 1);
}
-
+
/* Extract the rowid or primary key for the current row */
if( pPk ){
for(i=0; ipParse->nMem ) pParse->nMem = iKey;
}
-
+
if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
/* For ONEPASS, no need to store the rowid/primary-key. There is only
** one, so just keep it in its register(s) and fall through to the
@@ -104753,18 +104753,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_RowSetAdd, iRowSet, iKey);
}
}
-
- /* If this DELETE cannot use the ONEPASS strategy, this is the
+
+ /* If this DELETE cannot use the ONEPASS strategy, this is the
** end of the WHERE loop */
if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
addrBypass = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
}else{
sqlite3WhereEnd(pWInfo);
}
-
- /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
+
+ /* Unless this is a view, open cursors for the table we are
** deleting from and all its indices. If this is a view, then the
- ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
+ ** only effect this statement has is to fire the INSTEAD OF
** triggers.
*/
if( !isView ){
@@ -104779,7 +104779,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
assert( pPk || IsVirtual(pTab) || iIdxCur==iDataCur+1 );
if( eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ) sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, iAddrOnce);
}
-
+
/* Set up a loop over the rowids/primary-keys that were found in the
** where-clause loop above.
*/
@@ -104798,8 +104798,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
addrLoop = sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_RowSetRead, iRowSet, 0, iKey);
VdbeCoverage(v);
assert( nKey==1 );
- }
-
+ }
+
/* Delete the row */
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
if( IsVirtual(pTab) ){
@@ -104819,7 +104819,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(pParse, pTab, pTrigger, iDataCur, iIdxCur,
iKey, nKey, count, OE_Default, eOnePass, aiCurOnePass[1]);
}
-
+
/* End of the loop over all rowids/primary-keys. */
if( eOnePass!=ONEPASS_OFF ){
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrBypass);
@@ -104830,7 +104830,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
}else{
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, addrLoop);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrLoop);
- }
+ }
} /* End non-truncate path */
/* Update the sqlite_sequence table by storing the content of the
@@ -104841,7 +104841,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteFrom(
sqlite3AutoincrementEnd(pParse);
}
- /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
+ /* Return the number of rows that were deleted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
@@ -104896,7 +104896,7 @@ delete_from_cleanup:
** and nPk before reading from it.
**
** If eMode is ONEPASS_MULTI, then this call is being made as part
-** of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
+** of a ONEPASS delete that affects multiple rows. In this case, if
** iIdxNoSeek is a valid cursor number (>=0) and is not the same as
** iDataCur, then its position should be preserved following the delete
** operation. Or, if iIdxNoSeek is not a valid cursor number, the
@@ -104932,7 +104932,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
VdbeModuleComment((v, "BEGIN: GenRowDel(%d,%d,%d,%d)",
iDataCur, iIdxCur, iPk, (int)nPk));
- /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
+ /* Seek cursor iCur to the row to delete. If this row no longer exists
** (this can happen if a trigger program has already deleted it), do
** not attempt to delete it or fire any DELETE triggers. */
iLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
@@ -104942,7 +104942,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotExists);
VdbeCoverageIf(v, opSeek==OP_NotFound);
}
-
+
/* If there are any triggers to fire, allocate a range of registers to
** use for the old.* references in the triggers. */
if( sqlite3FkRequired(pParse, pTab, 0, 0) || pTrigger ){
@@ -104959,7 +104959,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
iOld = pParse->nMem+1;
pParse->nMem += (1 + pTab->nCol);
- /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
+ /* Populate the OLD.* pseudo-table register array. These values will be
** used by any BEFORE and AFTER triggers that exist. */
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Copy, iPk, iOld);
for(iCol=0; iColnCol; iCol++){
@@ -104972,11 +104972,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
/* Invoke BEFORE DELETE trigger programs. */
addrStart = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
- /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
+ /* If any BEFORE triggers were coded, then seek the cursor to the
** row to be deleted again. It may be that the BEFORE triggers moved
** the cursor or already deleted the row that the cursor was
** pointing to.
@@ -104993,21 +104993,21 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
}
/* Do FK processing. This call checks that any FK constraints that
- ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
+ ** refer to this table (i.e. constraints attached to other tables)
** are not violated by deleting this row. */
sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, iOld, 0, 0, 0);
}
/* Delete the index and table entries. Skip this step if pTab is really
** a view (in which case the only effect of the DELETE statement is to
- ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).
+ ** fire the INSTEAD OF triggers).
**
** If variable 'count' is non-zero, then this OP_Delete instruction should
** invoke the update-hook. The pre-update-hook, on the other hand should
** be invoked unless table pTab is a system table. The difference is that
- ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
+ ** the update-hook is not invoked for rows removed by REPLACE, but the
** pre-update-hook is.
- */
+ */
if( pTab->pSelect==0 ){
u8 p5 = 0;
sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur,0,iIdxNoSeek);
@@ -105027,16 +105027,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowDelete(
/* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
- ** to the row just deleted. */
+ ** to the row just deleted. */
sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, 0, iOld, 0, 0);
/* Invoke AFTER DELETE trigger programs. */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger,
TK_DELETE, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, iOld, onconf, iLabel
);
/* Jump here if the row had already been deleted before any BEFORE
- ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
+ ** trigger programs were invoked. Or if a trigger program throws a
** RAISE(IGNORE) exception. */
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, iLabel);
VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenRowDel()"));
@@ -105120,7 +105120,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateRowIndexDelete(
** its key into the same sequence of registers and if pPrior and pIdx share
** a column in common, then the register corresponding to that column already
** holds the correct value and the loading of that register is skipped.
-** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
+** This optimization is helpful when doing a DELETE or an INTEGRITY_CHECK
** on a table with multiple indices, and especially with the ROWID or
** PRIMARY KEY columns of the index.
*/
@@ -105144,7 +105144,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GenerateIndexKey(
*piPartIdxLabel = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
pParse->iSelfTab = iDataCur;
sqlite3ExprCachePush(pParse);
- sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
+ sqlite3ExprIfFalseDup(pParse, pIdx->pPartIdxWhere, *piPartIdxLabel,
SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
}else{
*piPartIdxLabel = 0;
@@ -105327,7 +105327,7 @@ static void lengthFunc(
** Implementation of the abs() function.
**
** IMP: R-23979-26855 The abs(X) function returns the absolute value of
-** the numeric argument X.
+** the numeric argument X.
*/
static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
assert( argc==1 );
@@ -105344,7 +105344,7 @@ static void absFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
return;
}
iVal = -iVal;
- }
+ }
sqlite3_result_int64(context, iVal);
break;
}
@@ -105668,7 +105668,7 @@ static void lowerFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
#define noopFunc versionFunc /* Substitute function - never called */
/*
-** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
+** Implementation of random(). Return a random integer.
*/
static void randomFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -105679,11 +105679,11 @@ static void randomFunc(
UNUSED_PARAMETER2(NotUsed, NotUsed2);
sqlite3_randomness(sizeof(r), &r);
if( r<0 ){
- /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
+ /* We need to prevent a random number of 0x8000000000000000
** (or -9223372036854775808) since when you do abs() of that
** number of you get the same value back again. To do this
** in a way that is testable, mask the sign bit off of negative
- ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
+ ** values, resulting in a positive value. Then take the
** 2s complement of that positive value. The end result can
** therefore be no less than -9223372036854775807.
*/
@@ -105721,8 +105721,8 @@ static void randomBlob(
** value is the same as the sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() API function.
*/
static void last_insert_rowid(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **NotUsed2
){
sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
@@ -105830,7 +105830,7 @@ static const struct compareInfo likeInfoAlt = { '%', '_', 0, 0 };
** it the last character in the list.
**
** Like matching rules:
-**
+**
** '%' Matches any sequence of zero or more characters
**
*** '_' Matches any one character
@@ -105853,7 +105853,7 @@ static int patternCompare(
u32 matchAll = pInfo->matchAll; /* "*" or "%" */
u8 noCase = pInfo->noCase; /* True if uppercase==lowercase */
const u8 *zEscaped = 0; /* One past the last escaped input char */
-
+
while( (c = Utf8Read(zPattern))!=0 ){
if( c==matchAll ){ /* Match "*" */
/* Skip over multiple "*" characters in the pattern. If there
@@ -106005,8 +106005,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_like_count = 0;
** the GLOB operator.
*/
static void likeFunc(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
const unsigned char *zA, *zB;
@@ -106048,7 +106048,7 @@ static void likeFunc(
const unsigned char *zEsc = sqlite3_value_text(argv[2]);
if( zEsc==0 ) return;
if( sqlite3Utf8CharLen((char*)zEsc, -1)!=1 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
return;
}
@@ -106152,8 +106152,8 @@ static void compileoptionusedFunc(
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS */
/*
-** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
-** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
+** Implementation of the sqlite_compileoption_get() function.
+** The result is a string that identifies the compiler options
** used to build SQLite.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_COMPILEOPTION_DIAGS
@@ -106177,7 +106177,7 @@ static void compileoptiongetFunc(
** digits. */
static const char hexdigits[] = {
'0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7',
- '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
+ '8', '9', 'A', 'B', 'C', 'D', 'E', 'F'
};
/*
@@ -106212,7 +106212,7 @@ static void quoteFunc(sqlite3_context *context, int argc, sqlite3_value **argv){
char const *zBlob = sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]);
int nBlob = sqlite3_value_bytes(argv[0]);
assert( zBlob==sqlite3_value_blob(argv[0]) ); /* No encoding change */
- zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4);
+ zText = (char *)contextMalloc(context, (2*(i64)nBlob)+4);
if( zText ){
int i;
for(i=0; in>0x7fffffff
|| p->n==sqlite3_aggregate_count(context) );
#endif
-}
+}
static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
CountCtx *p;
p = sqlite3_aggregate_context(context, 0);
@@ -106755,8 +106755,8 @@ static void countFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
** Routines to implement min() and max() aggregate functions.
*/
static void minmaxStep(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int NotUsed,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int NotUsed,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
Mem *pArg = (Mem *)argv[0];
@@ -106846,8 +106846,8 @@ static void groupConcatFinalize(sqlite3_context *context){
sqlite3_result_error_toobig(context);
}else if( pAccum->accError==STRACCUM_NOMEM ){
sqlite3_result_error_nomem(context);
- }else{
- sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1,
+ }else{
+ sqlite3_result_text(context, sqlite3StrAccumFinish(pAccum), -1,
sqlite3_free);
}
}
@@ -106891,10 +106891,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive)
}
sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 2, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "like", 3, SQLITE_UTF8, pInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
- sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8,
+ sqlite3CreateFunc(db, "glob", 2, SQLITE_UTF8,
(struct compareInfo*)&globInfo, likeFunc, 0, 0, 0);
setLikeOptFlag(db, "glob", SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE);
- setLikeOptFlag(db, "like",
+ setLikeOptFlag(db, "like",
caseSensitive ? (SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE | SQLITE_FUNC_CASE) : SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE);
}
@@ -106912,8 +106912,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterLikeFunctions(sqlite3 *db, int caseSensitive)
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsLikeFunction(sqlite3 *db, Expr *pExpr, int *pIsNocase, char *aWc){
FuncDef *pDef;
- if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION
- || !pExpr->x.pList
+ if( pExpr->op!=TK_FUNCTION
+ || !pExpr->x.pList
|| pExpr->x.pList->nExpr!=2
){
return 0;
@@ -107026,7 +107026,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
AGGREGATE(count, 1, 0, 0, countStep, countFinalize ),
AGGREGATE(group_concat, 1, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
AGGREGATE(group_concat, 2, 0, 0, groupConcatStep, groupConcatFinalize),
-
+
LIKEFUNC(glob, 2, &globInfo, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
#ifdef SQLITE_CASE_SENSITIVE_LIKE
LIKEFUNC(like, 2, &likeInfoAlt, SQLITE_FUNC_LIKE|SQLITE_FUNC_CASE),
@@ -107095,25 +107095,25 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** Foreign keys in SQLite come in two flavours: deferred and immediate.
** If an immediate foreign key constraint is violated,
** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT_FOREIGNKEY is returned and the current
-** statement transaction rolled back. If a
-** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken
-** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the
+** statement transaction rolled back. If a
+** deferred foreign key constraint is violated, no action is taken
+** immediately. However if the application attempts to commit the
** transaction before fixing the constraint violation, the attempt fails.
**
** Deferred constraints are implemented using a simple counter associated
-** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a
-** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed
+** with the database handle. The counter is set to zero each time a
+** database transaction is opened. Each time a statement is executed
** that causes a foreign key violation, the counter is incremented. Each
** time a statement is executed that removes an existing violation from
** the database, the counter is decremented. When the transaction is
** committed, the commit fails if the current value of the counter is
** greater than zero. This scheme has two big drawbacks:
**
-** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint,
+** * When a commit fails due to a deferred foreign key constraint,
** there is no way to tell which foreign constraint is not satisfied,
** or which row it is not satisfied for.
**
-** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the
+** * If the database contains foreign key violations when the
** transaction is opened, this may cause the mechanism to malfunction.
**
** Despite these problems, this approach is adopted as it seems simpler
@@ -107125,26 +107125,26 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** the parent table for a match. If none is found increment the
** constraint counter.
**
-** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table,
+** I.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table,
** search the child table for rows that correspond to the new
** row in the parent table. Decrement the counter for each row
** found (as the constraint is now satisfied).
**
** DELETE operations:
**
-** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table,
-** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the
-** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found,
+** D.1) For each FK for which the table is the child table,
+** search the parent table for a row that corresponds to the
+** deleted row in the child table. If such a row is not found,
** decrement the counter.
**
-** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search
-** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row
+** D.2) For each FK for which the table is the parent table, search
+** the child table for rows that correspond to the deleted row
** in the parent table. For each found increment the counter.
**
** UPDATE operations:
**
** An UPDATE command requires that all 4 steps above are taken, but only
-** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually
+** for FK constraints for which the affected columns are actually
** modified (values must be compared at runtime).
**
** Note that I.1 and D.1 are very similar operations, as are I.2 and D.2.
@@ -107153,10 +107153,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** For the purposes of immediate FK constraints, the OR REPLACE conflict
** resolution is considered to delete rows before the new row is inserted.
** If a delete caused by OR REPLACE violates an FK constraint, an exception
-** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new
+** is thrown, even if the FK constraint would be satisfied after the new
** row is inserted.
**
-** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference
+** Immediate constraints are usually handled similarly. The only difference
** is that the counter used is stored as part of each individual statement
** object (struct Vdbe). If, after the statement has run, its immediate
** constraint counter is greater than zero,
@@ -107167,7 +107167,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** INSERT violates a foreign key constraint. This is necessary as such
** an INSERT does not open a statement transaction.
**
-** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a
+** TODO: How should dropping a table be handled? How should renaming a
** table be handled?
**
**
@@ -107178,7 +107178,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** for those two operations needs to know whether or not the operation
** requires any FK processing and, if so, which columns of the original
** row are required by the FK processing VDBE code (i.e. if FKs were
-** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be
+** implemented using triggers, which of the old.* columns would be
** accessed). No information is required by the code-generator before
** coding an INSERT operation. The functions used by the UPDATE/DELETE
** generation code to query for this information are:
@@ -107215,13 +107215,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
/*
** A foreign key constraint requires that the key columns in the parent
** table are collectively subject to a UNIQUE or PRIMARY KEY constraint.
-** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey,
-** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns.
+** Given that pParent is the parent table for foreign key constraint pFKey,
+** search the schema for a unique index on the parent key columns.
+**
+** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY
+** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx
+** is set to point to the unique index.
**
-** If successful, zero is returned. If the parent key is an INTEGER PRIMARY
-** KEY column, then output variable *ppIdx is set to NULL. Otherwise, *ppIdx
-** is set to point to the unique index.
-**
** If the parent key consists of a single column (the foreign key constraint
** is not a composite foreign key), output variable *paiCol is set to NULL.
** Otherwise, it is set to point to an allocated array of size N, where
@@ -107244,8 +107244,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RegisterBuiltinFunctions(void){
** PRIMARY KEY, or
**
** 4) No parent key columns were provided explicitly as part of the
-** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table
-** consists of a different number of columns to the child key in
+** foreign key definition, and the PRIMARY KEY of the parent table
+** consists of a different number of columns to the child key in
** the child table.
**
** then non-zero is returned, and a "foreign key mismatch" error loaded
@@ -107269,9 +107269,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
assert( !paiCol || *paiCol==0 );
assert( pParse );
- /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it
- ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx
- ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early.
+ /* If this is a non-composite (single column) foreign key, check if it
+ ** maps to the INTEGER PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. If so, leave *ppIdx
+ ** and *paiCol set to zero and return early.
**
** Otherwise, for a composite foreign key (more than one column), allocate
** space for the aiCol array (returned via output parameter *paiCol).
@@ -107280,7 +107280,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
if( nCol==1 ){
/* The FK maps to the IPK if any of the following are true:
**
- ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly
+ ** 1) There is an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and the FK is implicitly
** mapped to the primary key of table pParent, or
** 2) The FK is explicitly mapped to a column declared as INTEGER
** PRIMARY KEY.
@@ -107297,14 +107297,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
}
for(pIdx=pParent->pIndex; pIdx; pIdx=pIdx->pNext){
- if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) && pIdx->pPartIdxWhere==0 ){
+ if( pIdx->nKeyCol==nCol && IsUniqueIndex(pIdx) && pIdx->pPartIdxWhere==0 ){
/* pIdx is a UNIQUE index (or a PRIMARY KEY) and has the right number
** of columns. If each indexed column corresponds to a foreign key
** column of pFKey, then this index is a winner. */
if( zKey==0 ){
- /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to
- ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be
+ /* If zKey is NULL, then this foreign key is implicitly mapped to
+ ** the PRIMARY KEY of table pParent. The PRIMARY KEY index may be
** identified by the test. */
if( IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ){
if( aiCol ){
@@ -107362,15 +107362,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
}
/*
-** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the
-** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed
+** This function is called when a row is inserted into or deleted from the
+** child table of foreign key constraint pFKey. If an SQL UPDATE is executed
** on the child table of pFKey, this function is invoked twice for each row
** affected - once to "delete" the old row, and then again to "insert" the
** new row.
**
** Each time it is called, this function generates VDBE code to locate the
-** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into
-** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no
+** row in the parent table that corresponds to the row being inserted into
+** or deleted from the child table. If the parent row can be found, no
** special action is taken. Otherwise, if the parent row can *not* be
** found in the parent table:
**
@@ -107384,7 +107384,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkLocateIndex(
**
** DELETE deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
**
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
** (fkey.c) as "I.1" and "D.1".
*/
static void fkLookupParent(
@@ -107407,8 +107407,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
** outstanding constraints to resolve. If there are not, there is no need
** to check if deleting this row resolves any outstanding violations.
**
- ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If
- ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to
+ ** Check if any of the key columns in the child table row are NULL. If
+ ** any are, then the constraint is considered satisfied. No need to
** search for a matching row in the parent table. */
if( nIncr<0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_FkIfZero, pFKey->isDeferred, iOk);
@@ -107425,8 +107425,8 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
** column of the parent table (table pTab). */
int iMustBeInt; /* Address of MustBeInt instruction */
int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-
- /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e.
+
+ /* Invoke MustBeInt to coerce the child key value to an integer (i.e.
** apply the affinity of the parent key). If this fails, then there
** is no matching parent key. Before using MustBeInt, make a copy of
** the value. Otherwise, the value inserted into the child key column
@@ -107434,7 +107434,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, aiCol[0]+1+regData, regTemp);
iMustBeInt = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_MustBeInt, regTemp, 0);
VdbeCoverage(v);
-
+
/* If the parent table is the same as the child table, and we are about
** to increment the constraint-counter (i.e. this is an INSERT operation),
** then check if the row being inserted matches itself. If so, do not
@@ -107443,7 +107443,7 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Eq, regData, iOk, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
}
-
+
sqlite3OpenTable(pParse, iCur, iDb, pTab, OP_OpenRead);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_NotExists, iCur, 0, regTemp); VdbeCoverage(v);
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, iOk);
@@ -107454,19 +107454,19 @@ static void fkLookupParent(
int nCol = pFKey->nCol;
int regTemp = sqlite3GetTempRange(pParse, nCol);
int regRec = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_OpenRead, iCur, pIdx->tnum, iDb);
sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pIdx);
for(i=0; idb,pIdx), nCol);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iCur, iOk, regRec, 0); VdbeCoverage(v);
-
+
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRec);
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regTemp, nCol);
}
}
if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(pParse->db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs)
- && !pParse->pToplevel
- && !pParse->isMultiWrite
+ && !pParse->pToplevel
+ && !pParse->isMultiWrite
){
/* Special case: If this is an INSERT statement that will insert exactly
** one row into the table, raise a constraint immediately instead of
@@ -107577,7 +107577,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn(
/*
** This function is called to generate code executed when a row is deleted
-** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is
+** from the parent table of foreign key constraint pFKey and, if pFKey is
** deferred, when a row is inserted into the same table. When generating
** code for an SQL UPDATE operation, this function may be called twice -
** once to "delete" the old row and once to "insert" the new row.
@@ -107604,7 +107604,7 @@ static Expr *exprTableColumn(
**
** INSERT deferred Decrement the "deferred constraint counter".
**
-** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
+** These operations are identified in the comment at the top of this file
** (fkey.c) as "I.2" and "D.2".
*/
static void fkScanChildren(
@@ -107647,7 +107647,7 @@ static void fkScanChildren(
Expr *pLeft; /* Value from parent table row */
Expr *pRight; /* Column ref to child table */
Expr *pEq; /* Expression (pLeft = pRight) */
- i16 iCol; /* Index of column in child table */
+ i16 iCol; /* Index of column in child table */
const char *zCol; /* Name of column in child table */
iCol = pIdx ? pIdx->aiColumn[i] : -1;
@@ -107737,7 +107737,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FKey *sqlite3FkReferences(Table *pTab){
}
/*
-** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the
+** The second argument is a Trigger structure allocated by the
** fkActionTrigger() routine. This function deletes the Trigger structure
** and all of its sub-components.
**
@@ -107765,7 +107765,7 @@ static void fkTriggerDelete(sqlite3 *dbMem, Trigger *p){
**
** (a) The table is the parent table of a FK constraint, or
** (b) The table is the child table of a deferred FK constraint and it is
-** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK
+** determined at runtime that there are outstanding deferred FK
** constraint violations in the database,
**
** then the equivalent of "DELETE FROM " is executed before dropping
@@ -107781,7 +107781,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
assert( v ); /* VDBE has already been allocated */
if( sqlite3FkReferences(pTab)==0 ){
/* Search for a deferred foreign key constraint for which this table
- ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without
+ ** is the child table. If one cannot be found, return without
** generating any VDBE code. If one can be found, then jump over
** the entire DELETE if there are no outstanding deferred constraints
** when this statement is run. */
@@ -107798,10 +107798,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse, sqlite3SrcListDup(db, pName, 0), 0);
pParse->disableTriggers = 0;
- /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint
+ /* If the DELETE has generated immediate foreign key constraint
** violations, halt the VDBE and return an error at this point, before
** any modifications to the schema are made. This is because statement
- ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes.
+ ** transactions are not able to rollback schema changes.
**
** If the SQLITE_DeferFKs flag is set, then this is not required, as
** the statement transaction will not be rolled back even if FK
@@ -107824,7 +107824,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDropTable(Parse *pParse, SrcList *pName, Table *pTa
/*
** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key
** for which pTab is the child table. An UPDATE statement against pTab
-** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
+** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array
** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element
** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement
@@ -107851,7 +107851,7 @@ static int fkChildIsModified(
/*
** The second argument points to an FKey object representing a foreign key
** for which pTab is the parent table. An UPDATE statement against pTab
-** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
+** is currently being processed. For each column of the table that is
** actually updated, the corresponding element in the aChange[] array
** is zero or greater (if a column is unmodified the corresponding element
** is set to -1). If the rowid column is modified by the UPDATE statement
@@ -107861,9 +107861,9 @@ static int fkChildIsModified(
** parent key for FK constraint *p are modified.
*/
static int fkParentIsModified(
- Table *pTab,
- FKey *p,
- int *aChange,
+ Table *pTab,
+ FKey *p,
+ int *aChange,
int bChngRowid
){
int i;
@@ -107904,7 +107904,7 @@ static int isSetNullAction(Parse *pParse, FKey *pFKey){
/*
** This function is called when inserting, deleting or updating a row of
-** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint
+** table pTab to generate VDBE code to perform foreign key constraint
** processing for the operation.
**
** For a DELETE operation, parameter regOld is passed the index of the
@@ -107920,11 +107920,11 @@ static int isSetNullAction(Parse *pParse, FKey *pFKey){
** For an UPDATE operation, this function is called twice. Once before
** the original record is deleted from the table using the calling convention
** described for DELETE. Then again after the original record is deleted
-** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention.
+** but before the new record is inserted using the INSERT convention.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
Parse *pParse, /* Parse context */
- Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */
+ Table *pTab, /* Row is being deleted from this table */
int regOld, /* Previous row data is stored here */
int regNew, /* New row data is stored here */
int *aChange, /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */
@@ -107956,16 +107956,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
int i;
int bIgnore = 0;
- if( aChange
+ if( aChange
&& sqlite3_stricmp(pTab->zName, pFKey->zTo)!=0
- && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0
+ && fkChildIsModified(pTab, pFKey, aChange, bChngRowid)==0
){
continue;
}
- /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index
- ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these
- ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return
+ /* Find the parent table of this foreign key. Also find a unique index
+ ** on the parent key columns in the parent table. If either of these
+ ** schema items cannot be located, set an error in pParse and return
** early. */
if( pParse->disableTriggers ){
pTo = sqlite3FindTable(db, pFKey->zTo, zDb);
@@ -108007,7 +108007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
}
assert( pIdx==0 || pIdx->aiColumn[i]>=0 );
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
- /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the
+ /* Request permission to read the parent key columns. If the
** authorization callback returns SQLITE_IGNORE, behave as if any
** values read from the parent table are NULL. */
if( db->xAuth ){
@@ -108019,24 +108019,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
#endif
}
- /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate
- ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns
+ /* Take a shared-cache advisory read-lock on the parent table. Allocate
+ ** a cursor to use to search the unique index on the parent key columns
** in the parent table. */
sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTo->tnum, 0, pTo->zName);
pParse->nTab++;
if( regOld!=0 ){
/* A row is being removed from the child table. Search for the parent.
- ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an
+ ** If the parent does not exist, removing the child row resolves an
** outstanding foreign key constraint violation. */
fkLookupParent(pParse, iDb, pTo, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regOld, -1, bIgnore);
}
if( regNew!=0 && !isSetNullAction(pParse, pFKey) ){
/* A row is being added to the child table. If a parent row cannot
- ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint.
+ ** be found, adding the child row has violated the FK constraint.
**
** If this operation is being performed as part of a trigger program
- ** that is actually a "SET NULL" action belonging to this very
+ ** that is actually a "SET NULL" action belonging to this very
** foreign key, then omit this scan altogether. As all child key
** values are guaranteed to be NULL, it is not possible for adding
** this row to cause an FK violation. */
@@ -108057,8 +108057,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
continue;
}
- if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs)
- && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite
+ if( !pFKey->isDeferred && !(db->flags & SQLITE_DeferFKs)
+ && !pParse->pToplevel && !pParse->isMultiWrite
){
assert( regOld==0 && regNew!=0 );
/* Inserting a single row into a parent table cannot cause (or fix)
@@ -108081,7 +108081,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
pItem->zName = pFKey->pFrom->zName;
pItem->pTab->nTabRef++;
pItem->iCursor = pParse->nTab++;
-
+
if( regNew!=0 ){
fkScanChildren(pParse, pSrc, pTab, pIdx, pFKey, aiCol, regNew, -1);
}
@@ -108100,10 +108100,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
**
** Note 2: At first glance it may seem like SQLite could simply omit
** all OP_FkCounter related scans when either CASCADE or SET NULL
- ** applies. The trouble starts if the CASCADE or SET NULL action
- ** trigger causes other triggers or action rules attached to the
+ ** applies. The trouble starts if the CASCADE or SET NULL action
+ ** trigger causes other triggers or action rules attached to the
** child table to fire. In these cases the fk constraint counters
- ** might be set incorrectly if any OP_FkCounter related scans are
+ ** might be set incorrectly if any OP_FkCounter related scans are
** omitted. */
if( !pFKey->isDeferred && eAction!=OE_Cascade && eAction!=OE_SetNull ){
sqlite3MayAbort(pParse);
@@ -108119,7 +108119,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkCheck(
#define COLUMN_MASK(x) (((x)>31) ? 0xffffffff : ((u32)1<<(x)))
/*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
** row contained in table pTab.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask(
@@ -108149,17 +108149,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE u32 sqlite3FkOldmask(
/*
-** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
+** This function is called before generating code to update or delete a
** row contained in table pTab. If the operation is a DELETE, then
** parameter aChange is passed a NULL value. For an UPDATE, aChange points
** to an array of size N, where N is the number of columns in table pTab.
-** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding
+** If the i'th column is not modified by the UPDATE, then the corresponding
** entry in the aChange[] array is set to -1. If the column is modified,
** the value is 0 or greater. Parameter chngRowid is set to true if the
** UPDATE statement modifies the rowid fields of the table.
**
** If any foreign key processing will be required, this function returns
-** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function
+** true. If there is no foreign key related processing, this function
** returns false.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
@@ -108170,8 +108170,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
){
if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
if( !aChange ){
- /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the
- ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any
+ /* A DELETE operation. Foreign key processing is required if the
+ ** table in question is either the child or parent table for any
** foreign key constraint. */
return (sqlite3FkReferences(pTab) || pTab->pFKey);
}else{
@@ -108194,7 +108194,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
}
/*
-** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being
+** This function is called when an UPDATE or DELETE operation is being
** compiled on table pTab, which is the parent table of foreign-key pFKey.
** If the current operation is an UPDATE, then the pChanges parameter is
** passed a pointer to the list of columns being modified. If it is a
@@ -108206,7 +108206,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
** returned (these actions require no special handling by the triggers
** sub-system, code for them is created by fkScanChildren()).
**
-** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in
+** For example, if pFKey is the foreign key and pTab is table "p" in
** the following schema:
**
** CREATE TABLE p(pk PRIMARY KEY);
@@ -108219,7 +108219,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FkRequired(
** END;
**
** The returned pointer is cached as part of the foreign key object. It
-** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by
+** is eventually freed along with the rest of the foreign key object by
** sqlite3FkDelete().
*/
static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
@@ -108275,7 +108275,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
** that the affinity and collation sequence associated with the
** parent table are used for the comparison. */
pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ,
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tOld, 0),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0)),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tFromCol, 0)
@@ -108289,20 +108289,20 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
*/
if( pChanges ){
pEq = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_IS,
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tOld, 0),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0)),
- sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tNew, 0),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0))
);
pWhen = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pWhen, pEq);
}
-
+
if( action!=OE_Restrict && (action!=OE_Cascade || pChanges) ){
Expr *pNew;
if( action==OE_Cascade ){
- pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
+ pNew = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_DOT,
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tNew, 0),
sqlite3ExprAlloc(db, TK_ID, &tToCol, 0));
}else if( action==OE_SetDflt ){
@@ -108326,7 +108326,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
if( action==OE_Restrict ){
Token tFrom;
- Expr *pRaise;
+ Expr *pRaise;
tFrom.z = zFrom;
tFrom.n = nFrom;
@@ -108334,7 +108334,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
if( pRaise ){
pRaise->affinity = OE_Abort;
}
- pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse,
+ pSelect = sqlite3SelectNew(pParse,
sqlite3ExprListAppend(pParse, 0, pRaise),
sqlite3SrcListAppend(db, 0, &tFrom, 0),
pWhere,
@@ -108346,7 +108346,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
/* Disable lookaside memory allocation */
db->lookaside.bDisable++;
- pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
+ pTrigger = (Trigger *)sqlite3DbMallocZero(db,
sizeof(Trigger) + /* struct Trigger */
sizeof(TriggerStep) + /* Single step in trigger program */
nFrom + 1 /* Space for pStep->zTarget */
@@ -108355,7 +108355,7 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
pStep = pTrigger->step_list = (TriggerStep *)&pTrigger[1];
pStep->zTarget = (char *)&pStep[1];
memcpy((char *)pStep->zTarget, zFrom, nFrom);
-
+
pStep->pWhere = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pWhere, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
pStep->pExprList = sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pList, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
pStep->pSelect = sqlite3SelectDup(db, pSelect, EXPRDUP_REDUCE);
@@ -108380,12 +108380,12 @@ static Trigger *fkActionTrigger(
switch( action ){
case OE_Restrict:
- pStep->op = TK_SELECT;
+ pStep->op = TK_SELECT;
break;
- case OE_Cascade:
- if( !pChanges ){
- pStep->op = TK_DELETE;
- break;
+ case OE_Cascade:
+ if( !pChanges ){
+ pStep->op = TK_DELETE;
+ break;
}
default:
pStep->op = TK_UPDATE;
@@ -108412,9 +108412,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkActions(
int *aChange, /* Array indicating UPDATEd columns (or 0) */
int bChngRowid /* True if rowid is UPDATEd */
){
- /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that
- ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK
- ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated
+ /* If foreign-key support is enabled, iterate through all FKs that
+ ** refer to table pTab. If there is an action associated with the FK
+ ** for this operation (either update or delete), invoke the associated
** trigger sub-program. */
if( pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_ForeignKeys ){
FKey *pFKey; /* Iterator variable */
@@ -108494,7 +108494,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FkDelete(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
/* #include "sqliteInt.h" */
/*
-** Generate code that will
+** Generate code that will
**
** (1) acquire a lock for table pTab then
** (2) open pTab as cursor iCur.
@@ -108513,7 +108513,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable(
assert( !IsVirtual(pTab) );
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pParse);
assert( opcode==OP_OpenWrite || opcode==OP_OpenRead );
- sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
+ sqlite3TableLock(pParse, iDb, pTab->tnum,
(opcode==OP_OpenWrite)?1:0, pTab->zName);
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, opcode, iCur, pTab->tnum, iDb, pTab->nCol);
@@ -108530,7 +108530,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3OpenTable(
/*
** Return a pointer to the column affinity string associated with index
-** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
+** pIdx. A column affinity string has one character for each column in
** the table, according to the affinity of the column:
**
** Character Column affinity
@@ -108582,7 +108582,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3IndexAffinityStr(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx){
}
pIdx->zColAff[n] = 0;
}
-
+
return pIdx->zColAff;
}
@@ -108637,9 +108637,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3TableAffinity(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int iReg){
/*
** Return non-zero if the table pTab in database iDb or any of its indices
-** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
-** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO SELECT ..." can
-** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
+** have been opened at any point in the VDBE program. This is used to see if
+** a statement of the form "INSERT INTO SELECT ..." can
+** run without using a temporary table for the results of the SELECT.
*/
static int readsTable(Parse *p, int iDb, Table *pTab){
Vdbe *v = sqlite3GetVdbe(p);
@@ -108730,7 +108730,7 @@ static int autoIncBegin(
/*
** This routine generates code that will initialize all of the
-** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
+** register used by the autoincrement tracker.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
AutoincInfo *p; /* Information about an AUTOINCREMENT */
@@ -108757,7 +108757,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoincrementBegin(Parse *pParse){
/* 6 */ {OP_Goto, 0, 9, 0},
/* 7 */ {OP_Next, 0, 2, 0},
/* 8 */ {OP_Integer, 0, 0, 0},
- /* 9 */ {OP_Close, 0, 0, 0}
+ /* 9 */ {OP_Close, 0, 0, 0}
};
VdbeOp *aOp;
pDb = &db->aDb[p->iDb];
@@ -109104,7 +109104,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
regData = regRowid+1;
/* If the INSERT statement included an IDLIST term, then make sure
- ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
+ ** all elements of the IDLIST really are columns of the table and
** remember the column indices.
**
** If the table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column and that column
@@ -109176,7 +109176,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
** the destination table (template 3).
**
** A temp table must be used if the table being updated is also one
- ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
+ ** of the tables being read by the SELECT statement. Also use a
** temp table in the case of row triggers.
*/
if( pTrigger || readsTable(pParse, iDb, pTab) ){
@@ -109212,7 +109212,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regTempRowid);
}
}else{
- /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
+ /* This is the case if the data for the INSERT is coming from a
** single-row VALUES clause
*/
NameContext sNC;
@@ -109231,7 +109231,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
}
/* If there is no IDLIST term but the table has an integer primary
- ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
+ ** key, the set the ipkColumn variable to the integer primary key
** column index in the original table definition.
*/
if( pColumn==0 && nColumn>0 ){
@@ -109245,7 +109245,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
nHidden += (IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[i]) ? 1 : 0);
}
if( pColumn==0 && nColumn && nColumn!=(pTab->nCol-nHidden) ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table %S has %d columns but %d values were supplied",
pTabList, 0, pTab->nCol-nHidden, nColumn);
goto insert_cleanup;
@@ -109254,7 +109254,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "%d values for %d columns", nColumn, pColumn->nId);
goto insert_cleanup;
}
-
+
/* Initialize the count of rows to be inserted
*/
if( db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows ){
@@ -109350,7 +109350,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
|| (pColumn==0 && IsOrdinaryHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[i])) ){
sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, regCols+i+1);
}else if( useTempTable ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1);
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, regCols+i+1);
}else{
assert( pSelect==0 ); /* Otherwise useTempTable is true */
sqlite3ExprCodeAndCache(pParse, pList->a[j].pExpr, regCols+i+1);
@@ -109368,7 +109368,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
}
/* Fire BEFORE or INSTEAD OF triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE,
pTab, regCols-pTab->nCol-1, onError, endOfLoop);
sqlite3ReleaseTempRange(pParse, regCols, pTab->nCol+1);
@@ -109452,7 +109452,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
if( j<0 || nColumn==0 || (pColumn && j>=pColumn->nId) ){
sqlite3ExprCodeFactorable(pParse, pTab->aCol[i].pDflt, iRegStore);
}else if( useTempTable ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore);
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Column, srcTab, j, iRegStore);
}else if( pSelect ){
if( regFromSelect!=regData ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_SCopy, regFromSelect+j, iRegStore);
@@ -109486,7 +109486,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
** constraints or (b) there are no triggers and this table is not a
** parent table in a foreign key constraint. It is safe to set the
** flag in the second case as if any REPLACE constraint is hit, an
- ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
+ ** OP_Delete or OP_IdxDelete instruction will be executed on each
** cursor that is disturbed. And these instructions both clear the
** VdbeCursor.seekResult variable, disabling the OPFLAG_USESEEKRESULT
** functionality. */
@@ -109507,7 +109507,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Insert(
if( pTrigger ){
/* Code AFTER triggers */
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_INSERT, 0, TRIGGER_AFTER,
pTab, regData-2-pTab->nCol, onError, endOfLoop);
}
@@ -109534,7 +109534,7 @@ insert_end:
}
/*
- ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
+ ** Return the number of rows inserted. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
@@ -109737,9 +109737,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
assert( v!=0 );
assert( pTab->pSelect==0 ); /* This table is not a VIEW */
nCol = pTab->nCol;
-
+
/* pPk is the PRIMARY KEY index for WITHOUT ROWID tables and NULL for
- ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the
+ ** normal rowid tables. nPkField is the number of key fields in the
** pPk index or 1 for a rowid table. In other words, nPkField is the
** number of fields in the true primary key of the table. */
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
@@ -109896,10 +109896,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
** the triggers and remove both the table and index b-tree entries.
**
** Otherwise, if there are no triggers or the recursive-triggers
- ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
- ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
- ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
- ** when it is inserted.
+ ** flag is not set, but the table has one or more indexes, call
+ ** GenerateRowIndexDelete(). This removes the index b-tree entries
+ ** only. The table b-tree entry will be replaced by the new entry
+ ** when it is inserted.
**
** If either GenerateRowDelete() or GenerateRowIndexDelete() is called,
** also invoke MultiWrite() to indicate that this VDBE may require
@@ -110007,7 +110007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MakeRecord, regIdx, pIdx->nColumn, aRegIdx[ix]);
VdbeComment((v, "for %s", pIdx->zName));
- /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
+ /* In an UPDATE operation, if this index is the PRIMARY KEY index
** of a WITHOUT ROWID table and there has been no change the
** primary key, then no collision is possible. The collision detection
** logic below can all be skipped. */
@@ -110018,7 +110018,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
/* Find out what action to take in case there is a uniqueness conflict */
onError = pIdx->onError;
- if( onError==OE_None ){
+ if( onError==OE_None ){
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrUniqueOk);
continue; /* pIdx is not a UNIQUE index */
}
@@ -110034,7 +110034,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
** (3) There are no secondary indexes on the table
** (4) No delete triggers need to be fired if there is a conflict
** (5) No FK constraint counters need to be updated if a conflict occurs.
- */
+ */
if( (ix==0 && pIdx->pNext==0) /* Condition 3 */
&& pPk==pIdx /* Condition 2 */
&& onError==OE_Replace /* Condition 1 */
@@ -110077,7 +110077,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
}
}
if( isUpdate ){
- /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
+ /* If currently processing the PRIMARY KEY of a WITHOUT ROWID
** table, only conflict if the new PRIMARY KEY values are actually
** different from the old.
**
@@ -110087,7 +110087,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
int addrJump = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)+pPk->nKeyCol;
int op = OP_Ne;
int regCmp = (IsPrimaryKeyIndex(pIdx) ? regIdx : regR);
-
+
for(i=0; inKeyCol; i++){
char *p4 = (char*)sqlite3LocateCollSeq(pParse, pPk->azColl[i]);
x = pPk->aiColumn[i];
@@ -110096,7 +110096,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
addrJump = addrUniqueOk;
op = OP_Eq;
}
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, op,
regOldData+1+x, addrJump, regCmp+i, p4, P4_COLLSEQ
);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, SQLITE_NOTNULL);
@@ -110142,7 +110142,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3GenerateConstraintChecks(
sqlite3VdbeGoto(v, ipkTop+1);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, ipkBottom);
}
-
+
*pbMayReplace = seenReplace;
VdbeModuleComment((v, "END: GenCnstCks(%d)", seenReplace));
}
@@ -110216,7 +110216,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CompleteInsertion(
pik_flags |= (update_flags & OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION);
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_PREUPDATE_HOOK
if( update_flags==0 ){
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_InsertInt,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_InsertInt,
iIdxCur+i, aRegIdx[i], 0, (char*)pTab, P4_TABLE
);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP5(v, OPFLAG_ISNOOP);
@@ -110396,7 +110396,7 @@ static int xferCompatibleIndex(Index *pDest, Index *pSrc){
**
** INSERT INTO tab1 SELECT * FROM tab2;
**
-** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.
+** The xfer optimization transfers raw records from tab2 over to tab1.
** Columns are not decoded and reassembled, which greatly improves
** performance. Raw index records are transferred in the same way.
**
@@ -110531,8 +110531,8 @@ static int xferOptimization(
Column *pDestCol = &pDest->aCol[i];
Column *pSrcCol = &pSrc->aCol[i];
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_HIDDEN_COLUMNS
- if( (db->flags & SQLITE_Vacuum)==0
- && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
+ if( (db->flags & SQLITE_Vacuum)==0
+ && (pDestCol->colFlags | pSrcCol->colFlags) & COLFLAG_HIDDEN
){
return 0; /* Neither table may have __hidden__ columns */
}
@@ -110550,7 +110550,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
if( i>0 ){
assert( pDestCol->pDflt==0 || pDestCol->pDflt->op==TK_SPAN );
assert( pSrcCol->pDflt==0 || pSrcCol->pDflt->op==TK_SPAN );
- if( (pDestCol->pDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->pDflt==0)
+ if( (pDestCol->pDflt==0)!=(pSrcCol->pDflt==0)
|| (pDestCol->pDflt && strcmp(pDestCol->pDflt->u.zToken,
pSrcCol->pDflt->u.zToken)!=0)
){
@@ -110577,7 +110577,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_FOREIGN_KEY
/* Disallow the transfer optimization if the destination table constains
** any foreign key constraints. This is more restrictive than necessary.
- ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
+ ** But the main beneficiary of the transfer optimization is the VACUUM
** command, and the VACUUM command disables foreign key constraints. So
** the extra complication to make this rule less restrictive is probably
** not worth the effort. Ticket [6284df89debdfa61db8073e062908af0c9b6118e]
@@ -110624,7 +110624,7 @@ static int xferOptimization(
** (If the destination is not initially empty, the rowid fields
** of index entries might need to change.)
**
- ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization
+ ** (2) The destination has a unique index. (The xfer optimization
** is unable to test uniqueness.)
**
** (3) onError is something other than OE_Abort and OE_Rollback.
@@ -110687,14 +110687,14 @@ static int xferOptimization(
/* This INSERT command is part of a VACUUM operation, which guarantees
** that the destination table is empty. If all indexed columns use
** collation sequence BINARY, then it can also be assumed that the
- ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
+ ** index will be populated by inserting keys in strictly sorted
** order. In this case, instead of seeking within the b-tree as part
** of every OP_IdxInsert opcode, an OP_Last is added before the
- ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
+ ** OP_IdxInsert to seek to the point within the b-tree where each key
** should be inserted. This is faster.
**
** If any of the indexed columns use a collation sequence other than
- ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
+ ** BINARY, this optimization is disabled. This is because the user
** might change the definition of a collation sequence and then run
** a VACUUM command. In that case keys may not be written in strictly
** sorted order. */
@@ -110807,7 +110807,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_exec(
rc = sqlite3_step(pStmt);
/* Invoke the callback function if required */
- if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc ||
+ if( xCallback && (SQLITE_ROW==rc ||
(SQLITE_DONE==rc && !callbackIsInit
&& db->flags&SQLITE_NullCallback)) ){
if( !callbackIsInit ){
@@ -110917,7 +110917,7 @@ exec_out:
** This header file defines the SQLite interface for use by
** shared libraries that want to be imported as extensions into
** an SQLite instance. Shared libraries that intend to be loaded
-** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of
+** as extensions by SQLite should #include this file instead of
** sqlite3.h.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE3EXT_H
@@ -111448,14 +111448,14 @@ typedef int (*sqlite3_loadext_entry)(
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_CORE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION) */
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_LOAD_EXTENSION)
- /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable
+ /* This case when the file really is being compiled as a loadable
** extension */
# define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1 const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api=0;
# define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v) sqlite3_api=v;
# define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3 \
extern const sqlite3_api_routines *sqlite3_api;
#else
- /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the
+ /* This case when the file is being statically linked into the
** application */
# define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1 /*no-op*/
# define SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT2(v) (void)v; /* unused parameter */
@@ -111745,8 +111745,8 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = {
sqlite3_memory_highwater,
sqlite3_memory_used,
#ifdef SQLITE_MUTEX_OMIT
- 0,
- 0,
+ 0,
+ 0,
0,
0,
0,
@@ -111881,7 +111881,7 @@ static const sqlite3_api_routines sqlite3Apis = {
**
** Return SQLITE_OK on success and SQLITE_ERROR if something goes wrong.
**
-** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with
+** If an error occurs and pzErrMsg is not 0, then fill *pzErrMsg with
** error message text. The calling function should free this memory
** by calling sqlite3DbFree(db, ).
*/
@@ -111905,7 +111905,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
/* Shared library endings to try if zFile cannot be loaded as written */
static const char *azEndings[] = {
#if SQLITE_OS_WIN
- "dll"
+ "dll"
#elif defined(__APPLE__)
"dylib"
#else
@@ -111945,7 +111945,7 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
if( pzErrMsg ){
*pzErrMsg = zErrmsg = sqlite3_malloc64(nMsg);
if( zErrmsg ){
- sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(nMsg, zErrmsg,
"unable to open shared library [%s]", zFile);
sqlite3OsDlError(pVfs, nMsg-1, zErrmsg);
}
@@ -111957,9 +111957,9 @@ static int sqlite3LoadExtension(
/* If no entry point was specified and the default legacy
** entry point name "sqlite3_extension_init" was not found, then
** construct an entry point name "sqlite3_X_init" where the X is
- ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic
+ ** replaced by the lowercase value of every ASCII alphabetic
** character in the filename after the last "/" upto the first ".",
- ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib".
+ ** and eliding the first three characters if they are "lib".
** Examples:
**
** /usr/local/lib/libExample5.4.3.so ==> sqlite3_example_init
@@ -112079,7 +112079,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_enable_load_extension(sqlite3 *db, int onoff){
*/
typedef struct sqlite3AutoExtList sqlite3AutoExtList;
static SQLITE_WSD struct sqlite3AutoExtList {
- u32 nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */
+ u32 nExt; /* Number of entries in aExt[] */
void (**aExt)(void); /* Pointers to the extension init functions */
} sqlite3Autoext = { 0, 0 };
@@ -112266,7 +112266,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoLoadExtensions(sqlite3 *db){
** that includes the PragType_XXXX macro definitions and the aPragmaName[]
** object. This ensures that the aPragmaName[] table is arranged in
** lexicographical order to facility a binary search of the pragma name.
-** Do not edit pragma.h directly. Edit and rerun the script in at
+** Do not edit pragma.h directly. Edit and rerun the script in at
** ../tool/mkpragmatab.tcl. */
/************** Include pragma.h in the middle of pragma.c *******************/
/************** Begin file pragma.h ******************************************/
@@ -112339,52 +112339,52 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3AutoLoadExtensions(sqlite3 *db){
static const char *const pragCName[] = {
/* 0 */ "cache_size", /* Used by: default_cache_size */
/* 1 */ "cid", /* Used by: table_info */
- /* 2 */ "name",
- /* 3 */ "type",
- /* 4 */ "notnull",
- /* 5 */ "dflt_value",
- /* 6 */ "pk",
+ /* 2 */ "name",
+ /* 3 */ "type",
+ /* 4 */ "notnull",
+ /* 5 */ "dflt_value",
+ /* 6 */ "pk",
/* 7 */ "table", /* Used by: stats */
- /* 8 */ "index",
- /* 9 */ "width",
- /* 10 */ "height",
+ /* 8 */ "index",
+ /* 9 */ "width",
+ /* 10 */ "height",
/* 11 */ "seqno", /* Used by: index_info */
- /* 12 */ "cid",
- /* 13 */ "name",
+ /* 12 */ "cid",
+ /* 13 */ "name",
/* 14 */ "seqno", /* Used by: index_xinfo */
- /* 15 */ "cid",
- /* 16 */ "name",
- /* 17 */ "desc",
- /* 18 */ "coll",
- /* 19 */ "key",
+ /* 15 */ "cid",
+ /* 16 */ "name",
+ /* 17 */ "desc",
+ /* 18 */ "coll",
+ /* 19 */ "key",
/* 20 */ "seq", /* Used by: index_list */
- /* 21 */ "name",
- /* 22 */ "unique",
- /* 23 */ "origin",
- /* 24 */ "partial",
+ /* 21 */ "name",
+ /* 22 */ "unique",
+ /* 23 */ "origin",
+ /* 24 */ "partial",
/* 25 */ "seq", /* Used by: database_list */
- /* 26 */ "name",
- /* 27 */ "file",
+ /* 26 */ "name",
+ /* 27 */ "file",
/* 28 */ "seq", /* Used by: collation_list */
- /* 29 */ "name",
+ /* 29 */ "name",
/* 30 */ "id", /* Used by: foreign_key_list */
- /* 31 */ "seq",
- /* 32 */ "table",
- /* 33 */ "from",
- /* 34 */ "to",
- /* 35 */ "on_update",
- /* 36 */ "on_delete",
- /* 37 */ "match",
+ /* 31 */ "seq",
+ /* 32 */ "table",
+ /* 33 */ "from",
+ /* 34 */ "to",
+ /* 35 */ "on_update",
+ /* 36 */ "on_delete",
+ /* 37 */ "match",
/* 38 */ "table", /* Used by: foreign_key_check */
- /* 39 */ "rowid",
- /* 40 */ "parent",
- /* 41 */ "fkid",
+ /* 39 */ "rowid",
+ /* 40 */ "parent",
+ /* 41 */ "fkid",
/* 42 */ "busy", /* Used by: wal_checkpoint */
- /* 43 */ "log",
+ /* 43 */ "log",
/* 44 */ "checkpointed",
/* 45 */ "timeout", /* Used by: busy_timeout */
/* 46 */ "database", /* Used by: lock_status */
- /* 47 */ "status",
+ /* 47 */ "status",
};
/* Definitions of all built-in pragmas */
@@ -112891,7 +112891,7 @@ static const PragmaName aPragmaName[] = {
/*
** Interpret the given string as a safety level. Return 0 for OFF,
-** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA. Return 1 for an empty or
+** 1 for ON or NORMAL, 2 for FULL, and 3 for EXTRA. Return 1 for an empty or
** unrecognized string argument. The FULL and EXTRA option is disallowed
** if the omitFull parameter it 1.
**
@@ -112950,7 +112950,7 @@ static int getLockingMode(const char *z){
/*
** Interpret the given string as an auto-vacuum mode value.
**
-** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
+** The following strings, "none", "full" and "incremental" are
** acceptable, as are their numeric equivalents: 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
*/
static int getAutoVacuum(const char *z){
@@ -113102,7 +113102,7 @@ static const char *actionName(u8 action){
case OE_SetDflt: zName = "SET DEFAULT"; break;
case OE_Cascade: zName = "CASCADE"; break;
case OE_Restrict: zName = "RESTRICT"; break;
- default: zName = "NO ACTION";
+ default: zName = "NO ACTION";
assert( action==OE_None ); break;
}
return zName;
@@ -113155,7 +113155,7 @@ static const PragmaName *pragmaLocate(const char *zName){
}
/*
-** Process a pragma statement.
+** Process a pragma statement.
**
** Pragmas are of this form:
**
@@ -113170,7 +113170,7 @@ static const PragmaName *pragmaLocate(const char *zName){
** id and pId2 is any empty string.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
- Parse *pParse,
+ Parse *pParse,
Token *pId1, /* First part of [schema.]id field */
Token *pId2, /* Second part of [schema.]id field, or NULL */
Token *pValue, /* Token for , or NULL */
@@ -113198,8 +113198,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
if( iDb<0 ) return;
pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
- /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
- ** pragma, make sure it is open.
+ /* If the temp database has been explicitly named as part of the
+ ** pragma, make sure it is open.
*/
if( iDb==1 && sqlite3OpenTempDatabase(pParse) ){
return;
@@ -113267,7 +113267,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
}
/* Register the result column names for pragmas that return results */
- if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
+ if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns)==0
&& ((pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1)==0 || zRight==0)
){
setPragmaResultColumnNames(v, pPragma);
@@ -113275,7 +113275,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
/* Jump to the appropriate pragma handler */
switch( pPragma->ePragTyp ){
-
+
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PAGER_PRAGMAS) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED)
/*
** PRAGMA [schema.]default_cache_size
@@ -113387,7 +113387,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
** PRAGMA [schema.]max_page_count=N
**
** The first form reports the current setting for the
- ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
+ ** maximum number of pages in the database file. The
** second form attempts to change this setting. Both
** forms return the current setting.
**
@@ -113406,7 +113406,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
if( sqlite3Tolower(zLeft[0])=='p' ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Pagecount, iDb, iReg);
}else{
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_MaxPgcnt, iDb, iReg,
sqlite3AbsInt32(sqlite3Atoi(zRight)));
}
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, iReg, 1);
@@ -113543,7 +113543,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
*/
rc = sqlite3BtreeSetAutoVacuum(pBt, eAuto);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (eAuto==1 || eAuto==2) ){
- /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
+ /* When setting the auto_vacuum mode to either "full" or
** "incremental", write the value of meta[6] in the database
** file. Before writing to meta[6], check that meta[3] indicates
** that this really is an auto-vacuum capable database.
@@ -113666,7 +113666,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
assert( sqlite3SchemaMutexHeld(db, iDb, 0) );
if( !zRight ){
returnSingleInt(v,
- (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
+ (db->flags & SQLITE_CacheSpill)==0 ? 0 :
sqlite3BtreeSetSpillSize(pDb->pBt,0));
}else{
int size = 1;
@@ -113840,7 +113840,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
Pager *pPager = sqlite3BtreePager(pDb->pBt);
char *proxy_file_path = NULL;
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
- sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ sqlite3OsFileControlHint(pFile, SQLITE_GET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
&proxy_file_path);
returnSingleText(v, proxy_file_path);
}else{
@@ -113848,10 +113848,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
sqlite3_file *pFile = sqlite3PagerFile(pPager);
int res;
if( zRight[0] ){
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
zRight);
} else {
- res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
+ res=sqlite3OsFileControl(pFile, SQLITE_SET_LOCKPROXYFILE,
NULL);
}
if( res!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -113861,8 +113861,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
}
break;
}
-#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
-
+#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_LOCKING_STYLE */
+
/*
** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous
** PRAGMA [schema.]synchronous=OFF|ON|NORMAL|FULL|EXTRA
@@ -113877,7 +113877,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
returnSingleInt(v, pDb->safety_level-1);
}else{
if( !db->autoCommit ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"Safety level may not be changed inside a transaction");
}else{
int iLevel = (getSafetyLevel(zRight,0,1)+1) & PAGER_SYNCHRONOUS_MASK;
@@ -113917,7 +113917,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
if( mask==SQLITE_DeferFKs ) db->nDeferredImmCons = 0;
}
- /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
+ /* Many of the flag-pragmas modify the code generated by the SQL
** compiler (eg. count_changes). So add an opcode to expire all
** compiled SQL statements after modifying a pragma value.
*/
@@ -114095,7 +114095,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
if( pTab ){
pFK = pTab->pFKey;
if( pFK ){
- int i = 0;
+ int i = 0;
pParse->nMem = 8;
sqlite3CodeVerifySchema(pParse, iDb);
while(pFK){
@@ -114257,7 +114257,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
#endif
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
- /* Pragma "quick_check" is reduced version of
+ /* Pragma "quick_check" is reduced version of
** integrity_check designed to detect most database corruption
** without most of the overhead of a full integrity-check.
*/
@@ -114465,7 +114465,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_ResultRow, 7, 1);
}
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_BTREECOUNT */
- }
+ }
}
{
static const int iLn = VDBE_OFFSET_LINENO(2);
@@ -114501,7 +114501,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
** encoding that will be used for the main database file if a new file
** is created. If an existing main database file is opened, then the
** default text encoding for the existing database is used.
- **
+ **
** In all cases new databases created using the ATTACH command are
** created to use the same default text encoding as the main database. If
** the main database has not been initialized and/or created when ATTACH
@@ -114539,9 +114539,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
** will be overwritten when the schema is next loaded. If it does not
** already exists, it will be created to use the new encoding value.
*/
- if(
- !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) ||
- DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty)
+ if(
+ !(DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_SchemaLoaded)) ||
+ DbHasProperty(db, 0, DB_Empty)
){
for(pEnc=&encnames[0]; pEnc->zName; pEnc++){
if( 0==sqlite3StrICmp(zRight, pEnc->zName) ){
@@ -114685,8 +114685,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
if( zRight ){
sqlite3_wal_autocheckpoint(db, sqlite3Atoi(zRight));
}
- returnSingleInt(v,
- db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
+ returnSingleInt(v,
+ db->xWalCallback==sqlite3WalDefaultHook ?
SQLITE_PTR_TO_INT(db->pWalArg) : 0);
}
break;
@@ -114779,7 +114779,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
if( pBt==0 || sqlite3BtreePager(pBt)==0 ){
zState = "closed";
- }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
+ }else if( sqlite3_file_control(db, i ? db->aDb[i].zDbSName : 0,
SQLITE_FCNTL_LOCKSTATE, &j)==SQLITE_OK ){
zState = azLockName[j];
}
@@ -114838,7 +114838,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Pragma(
/* The following block is a no-op unless SQLITE_DEBUG is defined. Its only
** purpose is to execute assert() statements to verify that if the
** PragFlg_NoColumns1 flag is set and the caller specified an argument
- ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
+ ** to the PRAGMA, the implementation has not added any OP_ResultRow
** instructions to the VM. */
if( (pPragma->mPragFlg & PragFlg_NoColumns1) && zRight ){
sqlite3VdbeVerifyNoResultRow(v);
@@ -114869,7 +114869,7 @@ struct PragmaVtabCursor {
char *azArg[2]; /* Value of the argument and schema */
};
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xConnect method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabConnect(
@@ -114932,7 +114932,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabConnect(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xDisconnect method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -115030,11 +115030,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xFilter method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabFilter(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
){
@@ -115085,11 +115085,11 @@ static int pragmaVtabEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
}
/* The xColumn method simply returns the corresponding column from
-** the PRAGMA.
+** the PRAGMA.
*/
static int pragmaVtabColumn(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
- sqlite3_context *ctx,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_context *ctx,
int i
){
PragmaVtabCursor *pCsr = (PragmaVtabCursor*)pVtabCursor;
@@ -115102,7 +115102,7 @@ static int pragmaVtabColumn(
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Pragma virtual table module xRowid method.
*/
static int pragmaVtabRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *p){
@@ -115342,7 +115342,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
}
/* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
- ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
+ ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
** will be closed before this function returns. */
sqlite3BtreeEnter(pDb->pBt);
if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pDb->pBt) ){
@@ -115447,7 +115447,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
assert( db->init.busy );
{
char *zSql;
- zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM \"%w\".%s ORDER BY rowid",
db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName, zMasterName);
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTHORIZATION
@@ -115475,7 +115475,7 @@ static int sqlite3InitOne(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, char **pzErrMsg){
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK || (db->flags&SQLITE_RecoveryMode)){
/* Black magic: If the SQLITE_RecoveryMode flag is set, then consider
- ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the
+ ** the schema loaded, even if errors occurred. In this situation the
** current sqlite3_prepare() operation will fail, but the following one
** will attempt to compile the supplied statement against whatever subset
** of the schema was loaded before the error occurred. The primary
@@ -115516,7 +115516,7 @@ error_out:
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){
int i, rc;
int commit_internal = !(db->flags&SQLITE_InternChanges);
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
assert( sqlite3BtreeHoldsMutex(db->aDb[0].pBt) );
assert( db->init.busy==0 );
@@ -115550,7 +115550,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Init(sqlite3 *db, char **pzErrMsg){
sqlite3CommitInternalChanges(db);
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
@@ -115591,7 +115591,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
if( pBt==0 ) continue;
/* If there is not already a read-only (or read-write) transaction opened
- ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
+ ** on the b-tree database, open one now. If a transaction is opened, it
** will be closed immediately after reading the meta-value. */
if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInReadTrans(pBt) ){
rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, 0);
@@ -115602,7 +115602,7 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
openedTransaction = 1;
}
- /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the
+ /* Read the schema cookie from the database. If it does not match the
** value stored as part of the in-memory schema representation,
** set Parse.rc to SQLITE_SCHEMA. */
sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, BTREE_SCHEMA_VERSION, (u32 *)&cookie);
@@ -115629,13 +115629,13 @@ static void schemaIsValid(Parse *pParse){
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3SchemaToIndex(sqlite3 *db, Schema *pSchema){
int i = -1000000;
- /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in
+ /* If pSchema is NULL, then return -1000000. This happens when code in
** expr.c is trying to resolve a reference to a transient table (i.e. one
- ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this
+ ** created by a sub-select). In this case the return value of this
** function should never be used.
**
** We return -1000000 instead of the more usual -1 simply because using
- ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much
+ ** -1000000 as the incorrect index into db->aDb[] is much
** more likely to cause a segfault than -1 (of course there are assert()
** statements too, but it never hurts to play the odds).
*/
@@ -115706,8 +115706,8 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare(
** This thread is currently holding mutexes on all Btrees (because
** of the sqlite3BtreeEnterAll() in sqlite3LockAndPrepare()) so it
** is not possible for another thread to start a new schema change
- ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold
- ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is
+ ** while this routine is running. Hence, we do not need to hold
+ ** locks on the schema, we just need to make sure nobody else is
** holding them.
**
** Note that setting READ_UNCOMMITTED overrides most lock detection,
@@ -115928,7 +115928,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare_v2(
** Compile the UTF-16 encoded SQL statement zSql into a statement handle.
*/
static int sqlite3Prepare16(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
int saveSqlFlag, /* True to save SQL text into the sqlite3_stmt */
@@ -115971,7 +115971,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16(
int chars_parsed = sqlite3Utf8CharLen(zSql8, (int)(zTail8-zSql8));
*pzTail = (u8 *)zSql + sqlite3Utf16ByteLen(zSql, chars_parsed);
}
- sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8);
+ sqlite3DbFree(db, zSql8);
rc = sqlite3ApiExit(db, rc);
sqlite3_mutex_leave(db->mutex);
return rc;
@@ -115986,7 +115986,7 @@ static int sqlite3Prepare16(
** occurs.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
@@ -115998,7 +115998,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16(
return rc;
}
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_prepare16_v2(
- sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
+ sqlite3 *db, /* Database handle. */
const void *zSql, /* UTF-16 encoded SQL statement. */
int nBytes, /* Length of zSql in bytes. */
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt, /* OUT: A pointer to the prepared statement */
@@ -116240,7 +116240,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p
for(i=0; i<3 && apAll[i]; i++){
p = apAll[i];
for(j=0; jn==aKeyword[j].nChar
+ if( p->n==aKeyword[j].nChar
&& sqlite3StrNICmp((char*)p->z, &zKeyText[aKeyword[j].i], p->n)==0 ){
jointype |= aKeyword[j].code;
break;
@@ -116262,9 +116262,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3JoinType(Parse *pParse, Token *pA, Token *pB, Token *p
sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "unknown or unsupported join type: "
"%T %T%s%T", pA, pB, zSp, pC);
jointype = JT_INNER;
- }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0
+ }else if( (jointype & JT_OUTER)!=0
&& (jointype & (JT_LEFT|JT_RIGHT))!=JT_LEFT ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"RIGHT and FULL OUTER JOINs are not currently supported");
jointype = JT_INNER;
}
@@ -116285,7 +116285,7 @@ static int columnIndex(Table *pTab, const char *zCol){
/*
** Search the first N tables in pSrc, from left to right, looking for a
-** table that has a column named zCol.
+** table that has a column named zCol.
**
** When found, set *piTab and *piCol to the table index and column index
** of the matching column and return TRUE.
@@ -116323,7 +116323,7 @@ static int tableAndColumnIndex(
**
** (tab1.col1 = tab2.col2)
**
-** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the
+** where tab1 is the iSrc'th table in SrcList pSrc and tab2 is the
** (iSrc+1)'th. Column col1 is column iColLeft of tab1, and col2 is
** column iColRight of tab2.
*/
@@ -116400,7 +116400,7 @@ static void setJoinExpr(Expr *p, int iTable){
}
setJoinExpr(p->pLeft, iTable);
p = p->pRight;
- }
+ }
}
/*
@@ -116474,7 +116474,7 @@ static int sqliteProcessJoin(Parse *pParse, Select *p){
}
/* Create extra terms on the WHERE clause for each column named
- ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
+ ** in the USING clause. Example: If the two tables to be joined are
** A and B and the USING clause names X, Y, and Z, then add this
** to the WHERE clause: A.X=B.X AND A.Y=B.Y AND A.Z=B.Z
** Report an error if any column mentioned in the USING clause is
@@ -116569,7 +116569,7 @@ static void pushOntoSorter(
pParse->nMem += pSort->nOBSat;
nKey = nExpr - pSort->nOBSat + bSeq;
if( bSeq ){
- addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
+ addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_IfNot, regBase+nExpr);
}else{
addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_SequenceTest, pSort->iECursor);
}
@@ -116683,7 +116683,7 @@ static void codeDistinct(
**
** If srcTab is negative, then the pEList expressions
** are evaluated in order to get the data for this row. If srcTab is
-** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and pEList is used only
+** zero or more, then data is pulled from srcTab and pEList is used only
** to get the number of columns and the collation sequence for each column.
*/
static void selectInnerLoop(
@@ -116761,8 +116761,8 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
}
if( pSort && hasDistinct==0 && eDest!=SRT_EphemTab && eDest!=SRT_Table ){
/* For each expression in pEList that is a copy of an expression in
- ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
- ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
+ ** the ORDER BY clause (pSort->pOrderBy), set the associated
+ ** iOrderByCol value to one more than the index of the ORDER BY
** expression within the sort-key that pushOntoSorter() will generate.
** This allows the pEList field to be omitted from the sorted record,
** saving space and CPU cycles. */
@@ -116774,7 +116774,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
}
}
regOrig = 0;
- assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
+ assert( eDest==SRT_Set || eDest==SRT_Mem
|| eDest==SRT_Coroutine || eDest==SRT_Output );
}
nResultCol = sqlite3ExprCodeExprList(pParse,pEList,regResult,0,ecelFlags);
@@ -116921,7 +116921,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
}else{
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
assert( sqlite3Strlen30(pDest->zAffSdst)==nResultCol );
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, regResult, nResultCol,
r1, pDest->zAffSdst, nResultCol);
sqlite3ExprCacheAffinityChange(pParse, regResult, nResultCol);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, iParm, r1, regResult, nResultCol);
@@ -116939,7 +116939,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
}
/* If this is a scalar select that is part of an expression, then
- ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
+ ** store the results in the appropriate memory cell or array of
** memory cells and break out of the scan loop.
*/
case SRT_Mem: {
@@ -116995,7 +116995,7 @@ static void selectInnerLoop(
/* If the destination is DistQueue, then cursor (iParm+1) is open
** on a second ephemeral index that holds all values every previously
** added to the queue. */
- addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
+ addrTest = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, iParm+1, 0,
regResult, nResultCol);
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
@@ -117197,7 +117197,7 @@ static void explainTempTable(Parse *pParse, const char *zUsage){
** where iSub1 and iSub2 are the integers passed as the corresponding
** function parameters, and op is the text representation of the parameter
** of the same name. The parameter "op" must be one of TK_UNION, TK_EXCEPT,
-** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is
+** TK_INTERSECT or TK_ALL. The first form is used if argument bUseTmp is
** false, or the second form if it is true.
*/
static void explainComposite(
@@ -117323,7 +117323,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
}
#endif
default: {
- assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
+ assert( eDest==SRT_Output || eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Output );
testcase( eDest==SRT_Coroutine );
if( eDest==SRT_Output ){
@@ -117366,14 +117366,14 @@ static void generateSortTail(
** original CREATE TABLE statement if the expression is a column. The
** declaration type for a ROWID field is INTEGER. Exactly when an expression
** is considered a column can be complex in the presence of subqueries. The
-** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
+** result-set expression in all of the following SELECT statements is
** considered a column by this function.
**
** SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl;
** SELECT (SELECT col FROM tbl);
** SELECT abc FROM (SELECT col AS abc FROM tbl);
-**
+**
** The declaration type for any expression other than a column is NULL.
**
** This routine has either 3 or 6 parameters depending on whether or not
@@ -117385,7 +117385,7 @@ static void generateSortTail(
# define columnType(A,B,C,D,E,F) columnTypeImpl(A,B,F)
#endif
static const char *columnTypeImpl(
- NameContext *pNC,
+ NameContext *pNC,
Expr *pExpr,
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
const char **pzOrigDb,
@@ -117431,19 +117431,19 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
if( pTab==0 ){
/* At one time, code such as "SELECT new.x" within a trigger would
** cause this condition to run. Since then, we have restructured how
- ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
+ ** trigger code is generated and so this condition is no longer
** possible. However, it can still be true for statements like
** the following:
**
** CREATE TABLE t1(col INTEGER);
** SELECT (SELECT t1.col) FROM FROM t1;
**
- ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
+ ** when columnType() is called on the expression "t1.col" in the
** sub-select. In this case, set the column type to NULL, even
** though it should really be "INTEGER".
**
** This is not a problem, as the column type of "t1.col" is never
- ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
+ ** used. When columnType() is called on the expression
** "(SELECT t1.col)", the correct type is returned (see the TK_SELECT
** branch below. */
break;
@@ -117457,7 +117457,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
*/
if( iCol>=0 && ALWAYS(iColpEList->nExpr) ){
/* If iCol is less than zero, then the expression requests the
- ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
+ ** rowid of the sub-select or view. This expression is legal (see
** test case misc2.2.2) - it always evaluates to NULL.
**
** The ALWAYS() is because iCol>=pS->pEList->nExpr will have been
@@ -117468,7 +117468,7 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol, &estWidth);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p,&zOrigDb,&zOrigTab,&zOrigCol, &estWidth);
}
}else if( pTab->pSchema ){
/* A real table */
@@ -117513,13 +117513,13 @@ static const char *columnTypeImpl(
sNC.pSrcList = pS->pSrc;
sNC.pNext = pNC;
sNC.pParse = pNC->pParse;
- zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, &estWidth);
+ zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, &estWidth);
break;
}
#endif
}
-#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
+#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_COLUMN_METADATA
if( pzOrigDb ){
assert( pzOrigTab && pzOrigCol );
*pzOrigDb = zOrigDb;
@@ -117555,7 +117555,7 @@ static void generateColumnTypes(
const char *zOrigCol = 0;
zType = columnType(&sNC, p, &zOrigDb, &zOrigTab, &zOrigCol, 0);
- /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
+ /* The vdbe must make its own copy of the column-type and other
** column specific strings, in case the schema is reset before this
** virtual machine is deleted.
*/
@@ -117623,7 +117623,7 @@ static void generateColumnNames(
zCol = pTab->aCol[iCol].zName;
}
if( !shortNames && !fullNames ){
- sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
+ sqlite3VdbeSetColName(v, i, COLNAME_NAME,
sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pEList->a[i].zSpan), SQLITE_DYNAMIC);
}else if( fullNames ){
char *zName = 0;
@@ -117747,7 +117747,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ColumnsFromExprList(
/*
** Add type and collation information to a column list based on
** a SELECT statement.
-**
+**
** The column list presumably came from selectColumnNamesFromExprList().
** The column list has only names, not types or collations. This
** routine goes through and adds the types and collations.
@@ -117860,9 +117860,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Vdbe *sqlite3GetVdbe(Parse *pParse){
** Compute the iLimit and iOffset fields of the SELECT based on the
** pLimit and pOffset expressions. pLimit and pOffset hold the expressions
** that appear in the original SQL statement after the LIMIT and OFFSET
-** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
-** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
-** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
+** keywords. Or NULL if those keywords are omitted. iLimit and iOffset
+** are the integer memory register numbers for counters used to compute
+** the limit and offset. If there is no limit and/or offset, then
** iLimit and iOffset are negative.
**
** This routine changes the values of iLimit and iOffset only if
@@ -117886,7 +117886,7 @@ static void computeLimitRegisters(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int iBreak){
int n;
if( p->iLimit ) return;
- /*
+ /*
** "LIMIT -1" always shows all rows. There is some
** controversy about what the correct behavior should be.
** The current implementation interprets "LIMIT 0" to mean
@@ -118014,7 +118014,7 @@ static KeyInfo *multiSelectOrderByKeyInfo(Parse *pParse, Select *p, int nExtra){
** inserted into the Queue table. The iDistinct table keeps a copy of all rows
** that have ever been inserted into Queue and causes duplicates to be
** discarded. If the operator is UNION ALL, then duplicates are allowed.
-**
+**
** If the query has an ORDER BY, then entries in the Queue table are kept in
** ORDER BY order and the first entry is extracted for each cycle. Without
** an ORDER BY, the Queue table is just a FIFO.
@@ -118215,7 +118215,7 @@ static int multiSelectValues(
**
** "p" points to the right-most of the two queries. the query on the
** left is p->pPrior. The left query could also be a compound query
-** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
+** in which case this routine will be called recursively.
**
** The results of the total query are to be written into a destination
** of type eDest with parameter iParm.
@@ -118349,7 +118349,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEstAdd(p->nSelectRow, pPrior->nSelectRow);
if( pPrior->pLimit
&& sqlite3ExprIsInteger(pPrior->pLimit, &nLimit)
- && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
+ && nLimit>0 && p->nSelectRow > sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit)
){
p->nSelectRow = sqlite3LogEst((u64)nLimit);
}
@@ -118540,7 +118540,7 @@ static int multiSelect(
explainComposite(pParse, p->op, iSub1, iSub2, p->op!=TK_ALL);
- /* Compute collating sequences used by
+ /* Compute collating sequences used by
** temporary tables needed to implement the compound select.
** Attach the KeyInfo structure to all temporary tables.
**
@@ -118646,7 +118646,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
addr = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
iContinue = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
- /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
+ /* Suppress duplicates for UNION, EXCEPT, and INTERSECT
*/
if( regPrev ){
int addr1, addr2;
@@ -118688,7 +118688,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
int r1;
testcase( pIn->nSdst>1 );
r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_MakeRecord, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst,
r1, pDest->zAffSdst, pIn->nSdst);
sqlite3ExprCacheAffinityChange(pParse, pIn->iSdst, pIn->nSdst);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_IdxInsert, pDest->iSDParm, r1,
@@ -118726,7 +118726,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
** SRT_Output. This routine is never called with any other
** destination other than the ones handled above or SRT_Output.
**
- ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
+ ** For SRT_Output, results are stored in a sequence of registers.
** Then the OP_ResultRow opcode is used to cause sqlite3_step() to
** return the next row of result.
*/
@@ -118784,7 +118784,7 @@ static int generateOutputSubroutine(
**
** EofB: Called when data is exhausted from selectB.
**
-** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
+** The implementation of the latter five subroutines depend on which
** is used:
**
**
@@ -118893,7 +118893,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
/* Patch up the ORDER BY clause
*/
- op = p->op;
+ op = p->op;
pPrior = p->pPrior;
assert( pPrior->pOrderBy==0 );
pOrderBy = p->pOrderBy;
@@ -118969,7 +118969,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
}
}
}
-
+
/* Separate the left and the right query from one another
*/
p->pPrior = 0;
@@ -119014,7 +119014,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
sqlite3VdbeEndCoroutine(v, regAddrA);
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addr1);
- /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
+ /* Generate a coroutine to evaluate the SELECT statement on
** the right - the "B" select
*/
addrSelectB = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v) + 1;
@@ -119023,7 +119023,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
savedLimit = p->iLimit;
savedOffset = p->iOffset;
p->iLimit = regLimitB;
- p->iOffset = 0;
+ p->iOffset = 0;
explainSetInteger(iSub2, pParse->iNextSelectId);
sqlite3Select(pParse, p, &destB);
p->iLimit = savedLimit;
@@ -119037,7 +119037,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
addrOutA = generateOutputSubroutine(pParse,
p, &destA, pDest, regOutA,
regPrev, pKeyDup, labelEnd);
-
+
/* Generate a subroutine that outputs the current row of the B
** select as the next output row of the compound select.
*/
@@ -119054,7 +119054,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
*/
if( op==TK_EXCEPT || op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofA_noB = addrEofA = labelEnd;
- }else{
+ }else{
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-A subroutine"));
addrEofA = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutB, addrOutB);
addrEofA_noB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrB, labelEnd);
@@ -119069,7 +119069,7 @@ static int multiSelectOrderBy(
if( op==TK_INTERSECT ){
addrEofB = addrEofA;
if( p->nSelectRow > pPrior->nSelectRow ) p->nSelectRow = pPrior->nSelectRow;
- }else{
+ }else{
VdbeNoopComment((v, "eof-B subroutine"));
addrEofB = sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Gosub, regOutA, addrOutA);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_Yield, regAddrA, labelEnd); VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -119157,13 +119157,13 @@ static void substSelect(Parse*, Select *, int, ExprList*, int);
/*
** Scan through the expression pExpr. Replace every reference to
** a column in table number iTable with a copy of the iColumn-th
-** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
+** entry in pEList. (But leave references to the ROWID column
** unchanged.)
**
** This routine is part of the flattening procedure. A subquery
** whose result set is defined by pEList appears as entry in the
** FROM clause of a SELECT such that the VDBE cursor assigned to that
-** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary
+** FORM clause entry is iTable. This routine make the necessary
** changes to pExpr so that it refers directly to the source table
** of the subquery rather the result set of the subquery.
*/
@@ -119270,7 +119270,7 @@ static void substSelect(
** SELECT x+y AS a FROM t1 WHERE z<100 AND a>5
**
** The code generated for this simplification gives the same result
-** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
+** but only has to scan the data once. And because indices might
** exist on the table t1, a complete scan of the data might be
** avoided.
**
@@ -119289,7 +119289,7 @@ static void substSelect(
** (4) The subquery is not DISTINCT.
**
** (**) At one point restrictions (4) and (5) defined a subset of DISTINCT
-** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
+** sub-queries that were excluded from this optimization. Restriction
** (4) has since been expanded to exclude all DISTINCT subqueries.
**
** (6) The subquery does not use aggregates or the outer query is not
@@ -119307,7 +119307,7 @@ static void substSelect(
**
** (**) Restriction (10) was removed from the code on 2005-02-05 but we
** accidently carried the comment forward until 2014-09-15. Original
-** text: "The subquery does not use aggregates or the outer query
+** text: "The subquery does not use aggregates or the outer query
** does not use LIMIT."
**
** (11) The subquery and the outer query do not both have ORDER BY clauses.
@@ -119325,10 +119325,10 @@ static void substSelect(
**
** (16) The outer query is not an aggregate or the subquery does
** not contain ORDER BY. (Ticket #2942) This used to not matter
-** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
+** until we introduced the group_concat() function.
**
-** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL
-** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and
+** (17) The sub-query is not a compound select, or it is a UNION ALL
+** compound clause made up entirely of non-aggregate queries, and
** the parent query:
**
** * is not itself part of a compound select,
@@ -119349,7 +119349,7 @@ static void substSelect(
** syntax error and return a detailed message.
**
** (18) If the sub-query is a compound select, then all terms of the
-** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to
+** ORDER by clause of the parent must be simple references to
** columns of the sub-query.
**
** (19) The subquery does not use LIMIT or the outer query does not
@@ -119371,7 +119371,7 @@ static void substSelect(
** parent to a compound query confuses the code that handles
** recursive queries in multiSelect().
**
-** (24) The subquery is not an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
+** (24) The subquery is not an aggregate that uses the built-in min() or
** or max() functions. (Without this restriction, a query like:
** "SELECT x FROM (SELECT max(y), x FROM t1)" would not necessarily
** return the value X for which Y was maximal.)
@@ -119428,7 +119428,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
return 0; /* Restriction (2b) */
}
}
-
+
pSubSrc = pSub->pSrc;
assert( pSubSrc );
/* Prior to version 3.1.2, when LIMIT and OFFSET had to be simple constants,
@@ -119467,7 +119467,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
}
/* OBSOLETE COMMENT 1:
- ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is
+ ** Restriction 3: If the subquery is a join, make sure the subquery is
** not used as the right operand of an outer join. Examples of why this
** is not allowed:
**
@@ -119520,7 +119520,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
assert( pSub->pSrc!=0 );
assert( pSub->pEList->nExpr==pSub1->pEList->nExpr );
if( (pSub1->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))!=0
- || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL)
+ || (pSub1->pPrior && pSub1->op!=TK_ALL)
|| pSub1->pSrc->nSrc<1
){
return 0;
@@ -119548,13 +119548,13 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
pParse->zAuthContext = zSavedAuthContext;
/* If the sub-query is a compound SELECT statement, then (by restrictions
- ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
+ ** 17 and 18 above) it must be a UNION ALL and the parent query must
** be of the form:
**
- ** SELECT FROM ()
+ ** SELECT FROM ()
**
** followed by any ORDER BY, LIMIT and/or OFFSET clauses. This block
- ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
+ ** creates N-1 copies of the parent query without any ORDER BY, LIMIT or
** OFFSET clauses and joins them to the left-hand-side of the original
** using UNION ALL operators. In this case N is the number of simple
** select statements in the compound sub-query.
@@ -119612,7 +119612,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
if( db->mallocFailed ) return 1;
}
- /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause
+ /* Begin flattening the iFrom-th entry of the FROM clause
** in the outer query.
*/
pSub = pSub1 = pSubitem->pSelect;
@@ -119711,10 +119711,10 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
memset(&pSubSrc->a[i], 0, sizeof(pSubSrc->a[i]));
}
pSrc->a[iFrom].fg.jointype = jointype;
-
- /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
+
+ /* Now begin substituting subquery result set expressions for
** references to the iParent in the outer query.
- **
+ **
** Example:
**
** SELECT a+5, b*10 FROM (SELECT x*3 AS a, y+10 AS b FROM t1) WHERE a>b;
@@ -119757,7 +119757,7 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
assert( pParent->pHaving==0 );
pParent->pHaving = pParent->pWhere;
pParent->pWhere = pWhere;
- pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db,
+ pParent->pHaving = sqlite3ExprAnd(db,
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pSub->pHaving, 0), pParent->pHaving
);
assert( pParent->pGroupBy==0 );
@@ -119766,12 +119766,12 @@ static int flattenSubquery(
pParent->pWhere = sqlite3ExprAnd(db, pWhere, pParent->pWhere);
}
substSelect(pParse, pParent, iParent, pSub->pEList, 0);
-
+
/* The flattened query is distinct if either the inner or the
- ** outer query is distinct.
+ ** outer query is distinct.
*/
pParent->selFlags |= pSub->selFlags & SF_Distinct;
-
+
/*
** SELECT ... FROM (SELECT ... LIMIT a OFFSET b) LIMIT x OFFSET y;
**
@@ -119886,7 +119886,7 @@ static int pushDownWhereTerms(
** * the argument to the aggregate function is a column value.
**
** If all of the above are true, then WHERE_ORDERBY_MIN or WHERE_ORDERBY_MAX
-** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the
+** is returned as appropriate. Also, *ppMinMax is set to point to the
** list of arguments passed to the aggregate before returning.
**
** Or, if the conditions above are not met, *ppMinMax is set to 0 and
@@ -119919,7 +119919,7 @@ static u8 minMaxQuery(AggInfo *pAggInfo, ExprList **ppMinMax){
/*
** The select statement passed as the first argument is an aggregate query.
-** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
+** The second argument is the associated aggregate-info object. This
** function tests if the SELECT is of the form:
**
** SELECT count(*) FROM
@@ -119934,7 +119934,7 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
assert( !p->pGroupBy );
- if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
+ if( p->pWhere || p->pEList->nExpr!=1
|| p->pSrc->nSrc!=1 || p->pSrc->a[0].pSelect
){
return 0;
@@ -119955,8 +119955,8 @@ static Table *isSimpleCount(Select *p, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
/*
** If the source-list item passed as an argument was augmented with an
** INDEXED BY clause, then try to locate the specified index. If there
-** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
-** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
+** was such a clause and the named index cannot be found, return
+** SQLITE_ERROR and leave an error in pParse. Otherwise, populate
** pFrom->pIndex and return SQLITE_OK.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){
@@ -119964,8 +119964,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF
Table *pTab = pFrom->pTab;
char *zIndexedBy = pFrom->u1.zIndexedBy;
Index *pIdx;
- for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
- pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
+ for(pIdx=pTab->pIndex;
+ pIdx && sqlite3StrICmp(pIdx->zName, zIndexedBy);
pIdx=pIdx->pNext
);
if( !pIdx ){
@@ -119978,7 +119978,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IndexedByLookup(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pF
return SQLITE_OK;
}
/*
-** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
+** Detect compound SELECT statements that use an ORDER BY clause with
** an alternative collating sequence.
**
** SELECT ... FROM t1 EXCEPT SELECT ... FROM t2 ORDER BY .. COLLATE ...
@@ -120063,9 +120063,9 @@ static int cannotBeFunction(Parse *pParse, struct SrcList_item *pFrom){
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
/*
-** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
-** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
-** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
+** Argument pWith (which may be NULL) points to a linked list of nested
+** WITH contexts, from inner to outermost. If the table identified by
+** FROM clause element pItem is really a common-table-expression (CTE)
** then return a pointer to the CTE definition for that table. Otherwise
** return NULL.
**
@@ -120100,7 +120100,7 @@ static struct Cte *searchWith(
** onto the top of the stack. If argument bFree is true, then this
** WITH clause will never be popped from the stack. In this case it
** should be freed along with the Parse object. In other cases, when
-** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
+** bFree==0, the With object will be freed along with the SELECT
** statement with which it is associated.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
@@ -120114,7 +120114,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
}
/*
-** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
+** This function checks if argument pFrom refers to a CTE declared by
** a WITH clause on the stack currently maintained by the parser. And,
** if currently processing a CTE expression, if it is a recursive
** reference to the current CTE.
@@ -120129,7 +120129,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WithPush(Parse *pParse, With *pWith, u8 bFree){
** parser and some error code other than SQLITE_OK returned.
*/
static int withExpand(
- Walker *pWalker,
+ Walker *pWalker,
struct SrcList_item *pFrom
){
Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
@@ -120178,8 +120178,8 @@ static int withExpand(
SrcList *pSrc = pFrom->pSelect->pSrc;
for(i=0; inSrc; i++){
struct SrcList_item *pItem = &pSrc->a[i];
- if( pItem->zDatabase==0
- && pItem->zName!=0
+ if( pItem->zDatabase==0
+ && pItem->zName!=0
&& 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pItem->zName, pCte->zName)
){
pItem->pTab = pTab;
@@ -120190,7 +120190,7 @@ static int withExpand(
}
}
- /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */
+ /* Only one recursive reference is permitted. */
if( pTab->nTabRef>2 ){
sqlite3ErrorMsg(
pParse, "multiple references to recursive table: %s", pCte->zName
@@ -120245,12 +120245,12 @@ static int withExpand(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CTE
/*
-** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
+** If the SELECT passed as the second argument has an associated WITH
** clause, pop it from the stack stored as part of the Parse object.
**
** This function is used as the xSelectCallback2() callback by
** sqlite3SelectExpand() when walking a SELECT tree to resolve table
-** names and other FROM clause elements.
+** names and other FROM clause elements.
*/
static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
Parse *pParse = pWalker->pParse;
@@ -120273,7 +120273,7 @@ static void selectPopWith(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
** (1) Make sure VDBE cursor numbers have been assigned to every
** element of the FROM clause.
**
-** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
+** (2) Fill in the pTabList->a[].pTab fields in the SrcList that
** defines FROM clause. When views appear in the FROM clause,
** fill pTabList->a[].pSelect with a copy of the SELECT statement
** that implements the view. A copy is made of the view's SELECT
@@ -120483,7 +120483,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
** bit set.
*/
if( (p->selFlags & SF_IncludeHidden)==0
- && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
+ && IsHiddenColumn(&pTab->aCol[j])
){
continue;
}
@@ -120493,7 +120493,7 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
if( (pFrom->fg.jointype & JT_NATURAL)!=0
&& tableAndColumnIndex(pTabList, i, zName, 0, 0)
){
- /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the
+ /* In a NATURAL join, omit the join columns from the
** table to the right of the join */
continue;
}
@@ -120565,8 +120565,8 @@ static int selectExpander(Walker *pWalker, Select *p){
**
** When this routine is the Walker.xExprCallback then expression trees
** are walked without any actions being taken at each node. Presumably,
-** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then
-** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every
+** when this routine is used for Walker.xExprCallback then
+** Walker.xSelectCallback is set to do something useful for every
** subquery in the parser tree.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ExprWalkNoop(Walker *NotUsed, Expr *NotUsed2){
@@ -120811,7 +120811,7 @@ static void updateAccumulator(Parse *pParse, AggInfo *pAggInfo){
}
/* Before populating the accumulator registers, clear the column cache.
- ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present
+ ** Otherwise, if any of the required column values are already present
** in registers, sqlite3ExprCode() may use OP_SCopy to copy the value
** to pC->iMem. But by the time the value is used, the original register
** may have been used, invalidating the underlying buffer holding the
@@ -120861,7 +120861,7 @@ static void explainSimpleCount(
#endif
/*
-** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
+** Generate code for the SELECT statement given in the p argument.
**
** The results are returned according to the SelectDest structure.
** See comments in sqliteInt.h for further information.
@@ -120918,7 +120918,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_DistQueue );
assert( p->pOrderBy==0 || pDest->eDest!=SRT_Queue );
if( IgnorableOrderby(pDest) ){
- assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
+ assert(pDest->eDest==SRT_Exists || pDest->eDest==SRT_Union ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_Except || pDest->eDest==SRT_Discard ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_Queue || pDest->eDest==SRT_DistFifo ||
pDest->eDest==SRT_DistQueue || pDest->eDest==SRT_Fifo);
@@ -121133,7 +121133,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
}
#endif
- /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
+ /* If the query is DISTINCT with an ORDER BY but is not an aggregate, and
** if the select-list is the same as the ORDER BY list, then this query
** can be rewritten as a GROUP BY. In other words, this:
**
@@ -121143,12 +121143,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
**
** SELECT xyz FROM ... GROUP BY xyz ORDER BY xyz
**
- ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
- ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
- ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
+ ** The second form is preferred as a single index (or temp-table) may be
+ ** used for both the ORDER BY and DISTINCT processing. As originally
+ ** written the query must use a temp-table for at least one of the ORDER
** BY and DISTINCT, and an index or separate temp-table for the other.
*/
- if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
+ if( (p->selFlags & (SF_Distinct|SF_Aggregate))==SF_Distinct
&& sqlite3ExprListCompare(sSort.pOrderBy, pEList, -1)==0
){
p->selFlags &= ~SF_Distinct;
@@ -121243,7 +121243,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
}
}
- /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
+ /* If sorting index that was created by a prior OP_OpenEphemeral
** instruction ended up not being needed, then change the OP_OpenEphemeral
** into an OP_Noop.
*/
@@ -121296,8 +121296,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
}
/* If there is both a GROUP BY and an ORDER BY clause and they are
- ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
- ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
+ ** identical, then it may be possible to disable the ORDER BY clause
+ ** on the grounds that the GROUP BY will cause elements to come out
** in the correct order. It also may not - the GROUP BY might use a
** database index that causes rows to be grouped together as required
** but not actually sorted. Either way, record the fact that the
@@ -121306,7 +121306,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
if( sqlite3ExprListCompare(pGroupBy, sSort.pOrderBy, -1)==0 ){
orderByGrp = 1;
}
-
+
/* Create a label to jump to when we want to abort the query */
addrEnd = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
@@ -121353,12 +121353,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
/* If there is a GROUP BY clause we might need a sorting index to
** implement it. Allocate that sorting index now. If it turns out
** that we do not need it after all, the OP_SorterOpen instruction
- ** will be converted into a Noop.
+ ** will be converted into a Noop.
*/
sAggInfo.sortingIdx = pParse->nTab++;
pKeyInfo = keyInfoFromExprList(pParse, pGroupBy, 0, sAggInfo.nColumn);
- addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
- sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn,
+ addrSortingIdx = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_SorterOpen,
+ sAggInfo.sortingIdx, sAggInfo.nSortingColumn,
0, (char*)pKeyInfo, P4_KEYINFO);
/* Initialize memory locations used by GROUP BY aggregate processing
@@ -121406,7 +121406,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
int nCol;
int nGroupBy;
- explainTempTable(pParse,
+ explainTempTable(pParse,
(sDistinct.isTnct && (p->selFlags&SF_Distinct)==0) ?
"DISTINCT" : "GROUP BY");
@@ -121428,7 +121428,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
struct AggInfo_col *pCol = &sAggInfo.aCol[i];
if( pCol->iSorterColumn>=j ){
int r1 = j + regBase;
- sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnToReg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ExprCodeGetColumnToReg(pParse,
pCol->pTab, pCol->iColumn, pCol->iTable, r1);
j++;
}
@@ -121454,9 +121454,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
** clause, cancel the ephemeral table open coded earlier.
**
** This is an optimization - the correct answer should result regardless.
- ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
+ ** Use the SQLITE_GroupByOrder flag with SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZER to
** disable this optimization for testing purposes. */
- if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
+ if( orderByGrp && OptimizationEnabled(db, SQLITE_GroupByOrder)
&& (groupBySort || sqlite3WhereIsSorted(pWInfo))
){
sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
@@ -121561,7 +121561,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrReset);
resetAccumulator(pParse, &sAggInfo);
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Return, regReset);
-
+
} /* endif pGroupBy. Begin aggregate queries without GROUP BY: */
else {
ExprList *pDel = 0;
@@ -121597,7 +121597,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
**
** (2013-10-03) Do not count the entries in a partial index.
**
- ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
+ ** In practice the KeyInfo structure will not be used. It is only
** passed to keep OP_OpenRead happy.
*/
if( !HasRowid(pTab) ) pBest = sqlite3PrimaryKeyIndex(pTab);
@@ -121632,11 +121632,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
** SELECT max(x) FROM ...
**
** If it is, then ask the code in where.c to attempt to sort results
- ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause.
+ ** as if there was an "ORDER ON x" or "ORDER ON x DESC" clause.
** If where.c is able to produce results sorted in this order, then
- ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the
- ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is
- ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum
+ ** add vdbe code to break out of the processing loop after the
+ ** first iteration (since the first iteration of the loop is
+ ** guaranteed to operate on the row with the minimum or maximum
** value of x, the only row required).
**
** A special flag must be passed to sqlite3WhereBegin() to slightly
@@ -121647,13 +121647,13 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
** for x.
**
** + The optimizer code in where.c (the thing that decides which
- ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on
+ ** index or indices to use) should place a different priority on
** satisfying the 'ORDER BY' clause than it does in other cases.
** Refer to code and comments in where.c for details.
*/
ExprList *pMinMax = 0;
u8 flag = WHERE_ORDERBY_NORMAL;
-
+
assert( p->pGroupBy==0 );
assert( flag==0 );
if( p->pHaving==0 ){
@@ -121670,7 +121670,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
pMinMax->a[0].pExpr->op = TK_COLUMN;
}
}
-
+
/* This case runs if the aggregate has no GROUP BY clause. The
** processing is much simpler since there is only a single row
** of output.
@@ -121694,12 +121694,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Select(
sSort.pOrderBy = 0;
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pParse, pHaving, addrEnd, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
- selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, -1, 0, 0,
+ selectInnerLoop(pParse, p, p->pEList, -1, 0, 0,
pDest, addrEnd, addrEnd);
sqlite3ExprListDelete(db, pDel);
}
sqlite3VdbeResolveLabel(v, addrEnd);
-
+
} /* endif aggregate query */
if( sDistinct.eTnctType==WHERE_DISTINCT_UNORDERED ){
@@ -121857,7 +121857,7 @@ malloc_failed:
** at the conclusion of the call.
**
** The result that is written to ***pazResult is held in memory obtained
-** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly.
+** from malloc(). But the caller cannot free this memory directly.
** Instead, the entire table should be passed to sqlite3_free_table() when
** the calling procedure is finished using it.
*/
@@ -121980,7 +121980,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTriggerStep(sqlite3 *db, TriggerStep *pTriggerS
}
/*
-** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to
+** Given table pTab, return a list of all the triggers attached to
** the table. The list is connected by Trigger.pNext pointers.
**
** All of the triggers on pTab that are in the same database as pTab
@@ -122007,7 +122007,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Trigger *sqlite3TriggerList(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab){
for(p=sqliteHashFirst(&pTmpSchema->trigHash); p; p=sqliteHashNext(p)){
Trigger *pTrig = (Trigger *)sqliteHashData(p);
if( pTrig->pTabSchema==pTab->pSchema
- && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName)
+ && 0==sqlite3StrICmp(pTrig->table, pTab->zName)
){
pTrig->pNext = (pList ? pList : pTab->pTrigger);
pList = pTrig;
@@ -122148,7 +122148,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3BeginTrigger(
** of triggers.
*/
if( pTab->pSelect && tr_tm!=TK_INSTEAD ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S",
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse, "cannot create %s trigger on view: %S",
(tr_tm == TK_BEFORE)?"BEFORE":"AFTER", pTableName, 0);
goto trigger_cleanup;
}
@@ -122237,8 +122237,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3FinishTrigger(
}
sqlite3TokenInit(&nameToken, pTrig->zName);
sqlite3FixInit(&sFix, pParse, iDb, "trigger", &nameToken);
- if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list)
- || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen)
+ if( sqlite3FixTriggerStep(&sFix, pTrig->step_list)
+ || sqlite3FixExpr(&sFix, pTrig->pWhen)
){
goto triggerfinish_cleanup;
}
@@ -122292,7 +122292,7 @@ triggerfinish_cleanup:
** a trigger step. Return a pointer to a TriggerStep structure.
**
** The parser calls this routine when it finds a SELECT statement in
-** body of a TRIGGER.
+** body of a TRIGGER.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerSelectStep(sqlite3 *db, Select *pSelect){
TriggerStep *pTriggerStep = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerStep));
@@ -122407,7 +122407,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE TriggerStep *sqlite3TriggerDeleteStep(
return pTriggerStep;
}
-/*
+/*
** Recursively delete a Trigger structure
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){
@@ -122421,7 +122421,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DeleteTrigger(sqlite3 *db, Trigger *pTrigger){
}
/*
-** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema.
+** This function is called to drop a trigger from the database schema.
**
** This may be called directly from the parser and therefore identifies
** the trigger by name. The sqlite3DropTriggerPtr() routine does the
@@ -122476,7 +122476,7 @@ static Table *tableOfTrigger(Trigger *pTrigger){
/*
-** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger.
+** Drop a trigger given a pointer to that trigger.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3DropTriggerPtr(Parse *pParse, Trigger *pTrigger){
Table *pTable;
@@ -122552,12 +122552,12 @@ static int checkColumnOverlap(IdList *pIdList, ExprList *pEList){
for(e=0; enExpr; e++){
if( sqlite3IdListIndex(pIdList, pEList->a[e].zName)>=0 ) return 1;
}
- return 0;
+ return 0;
}
/*
** Return a list of all triggers on table pTab if there exists at least
-** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is
+** one trigger that must be fired when an operation of type 'op' is
** performed on the table, and, if that operation is an UPDATE, if at
** least one of the columns in pChanges is being modified.
*/
@@ -122621,13 +122621,13 @@ static SrcList *targetSrcList(
}
/*
-** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single
+** Generate VDBE code for the statements inside the body of a single
** trigger.
*/
static int codeTriggerProgram(
Parse *pParse, /* The parser context */
TriggerStep *pStepList, /* List of statements inside the trigger body */
- int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */
+ int orconf /* Conflict algorithm. (OE_Abort, etc) */
){
TriggerStep *pStep;
Vdbe *v = pParse->pVdbe;
@@ -122655,25 +122655,25 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram(
switch( pStep->op ){
case TK_UPDATE: {
- sqlite3Update(pParse,
+ sqlite3Update(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
- sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
- sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0),
+ sqlite3ExprListDup(db, pStep->pExprList, 0),
+ sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0),
pParse->eOrconf
);
break;
}
case TK_INSERT: {
- sqlite3Insert(pParse,
+ sqlite3Insert(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
- sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0),
- sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList),
+ sqlite3SelectDup(db, pStep->pSelect, 0),
+ sqlite3IdListDup(db, pStep->pIdList),
pParse->eOrconf
);
break;
}
case TK_DELETE: {
- sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse,
+ sqlite3DeleteFrom(pParse,
targetSrcList(pParse, pStep),
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pStep->pWhere, 0)
);
@@ -122687,7 +122687,7 @@ static int codeTriggerProgram(
sqlite3SelectDelete(db, pSelect);
break;
}
- }
+ }
if( pStep->op!=TK_SELECT ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp0(v, OP_ResetCount);
}
@@ -122732,7 +122732,7 @@ static void transferParseError(Parse *pTo, Parse *pFrom){
}
/*
-** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program
+** Create and populate a new TriggerPrg object with a sub-program
** implementing trigger pTrigger with ON CONFLICT policy orconf.
*/
static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
@@ -122755,7 +122755,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
assert( pTop->pVdbe );
/* Allocate the TriggerPrg and SubProgram objects. To ensure that they
- ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg
+ ** are freed if an error occurs, link them into the Parse.pTriggerPrg
** list of the top-level Parse object sooner rather than later. */
pPrg = sqlite3DbMallocZero(db, sizeof(TriggerPrg));
if( !pPrg ) return 0;
@@ -122769,7 +122769,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
pPrg->aColmask[0] = 0xffffffff;
pPrg->aColmask[1] = 0xffffffff;
- /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the
+ /* Allocate and populate a new Parse context to use for coding the
** trigger sub-program. */
pSubParse = sqlite3StackAllocZero(db, sizeof(Parse));
if( !pSubParse ) return 0;
@@ -122784,7 +122784,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
v = sqlite3GetVdbe(pSubParse);
if( v ){
- VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)",
+ VdbeComment((v, "Start: %s.%s (%s %s%s%s ON %s)",
pTrigger->zName, onErrorText(orconf),
(pTrigger->tr_tm==TRIGGER_BEFORE ? "BEFORE" : "AFTER"),
(pTrigger->op==TK_UPDATE ? "UPDATE" : ""),
@@ -122793,18 +122793,18 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
pTab->zName
));
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
- sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1,
+ sqlite3VdbeChangeP4(v, -1,
sqlite3MPrintf(db, "-- TRIGGER %s", pTrigger->zName), P4_DYNAMIC
);
#endif
/* If one was specified, code the WHEN clause. If it evaluates to false
- ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the
+ ** (or NULL) the sub-vdbe is immediately halted by jumping to the
** OP_Halt inserted at the end of the program. */
if( pTrigger->pWhen ){
pWhen = sqlite3ExprDup(db, pTrigger->pWhen, 0);
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen)
- && db->mallocFailed==0
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3ResolveExprNames(&sNC, pWhen)
+ && db->mallocFailed==0
){
iEndTrigger = sqlite3VdbeMakeLabel(v);
sqlite3ExprIfFalse(pSubParse, pWhen, iEndTrigger, SQLITE_JUMPIFNULL);
@@ -122841,7 +122841,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *codeRowTrigger(
return pPrg;
}
-
+
/*
** Return a pointer to a TriggerPrg object containing the sub-program for
** trigger pTrigger with default ON CONFLICT algorithm orconf. If no such
@@ -122863,8 +122863,8 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger(
** process of being coded). If this is the case, then an entry with
** a matching TriggerPrg.pTrigger field will be present somewhere
** in the Parse.pTriggerPrg list. Search for such an entry. */
- for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg;
- pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf);
+ for(pPrg=pRoot->pTriggerPrg;
+ pPrg && (pPrg->pTrigger!=pTrigger || pPrg->orconf!=orconf);
pPrg=pPrg->pNext
);
@@ -122877,7 +122877,7 @@ static TriggerPrg *getRowTrigger(
}
/*
-** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on
+** Generate code for the trigger program associated with trigger p on
** table pTab. The reg, orconf and ignoreJump parameters passed to this
** function are the same as those described in the header function for
** sqlite3CodeRowTrigger()
@@ -122895,7 +122895,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
pPrg = getRowTrigger(pParse, p, pTab, orconf);
assert( pPrg || pParse->nErr || pParse->db->mallocFailed );
- /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program
+ /* Code the OP_Program opcode in the parent VDBE. P4 of the OP_Program
** is a pointer to the sub-vdbe containing the trigger program. */
if( pPrg ){
int bRecursive = (p->zName && 0==(pParse->db->flags&SQLITE_RecTriggers));
@@ -122924,7 +122924,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
** If there are no triggers that fire at the specified time for the specified
** operation on pTab, this function is a no-op.
**
-** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers
+** The reg argument is the address of the first in an array of registers
** that contain the values substituted for the new.* and old.* references
** in the trigger program. If N is the number of columns in table pTab
** (a copy of pTab->nCol), then registers are populated as follows:
@@ -122941,12 +122941,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(
** reg+N+N+1 NEW.* value of right-most column of pTab
**
** For ON DELETE triggers, the registers containing the NEW.* values will
-** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or
-** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway).
+** never be accessed by the trigger program, so they are not allocated or
+** populated by the caller (there is no data to populate them with anyway).
** Similarly, for ON INSERT triggers the values stored in the OLD.* registers
** are never accessed, and so are not allocated by the caller. So, for an
** ON INSERT trigger, the value passed to this function as parameter reg
-** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through
+** is not a readable register, although registers (reg+N) through
** (reg+N+N+1) are.
**
** Parameter orconf is the default conflict resolution algorithm for the
@@ -122978,12 +122978,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
** or else it must be a TEMP trigger. */
assert( p->pSchema!=0 );
assert( p->pTabSchema!=0 );
- assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema
+ assert( p->pSchema==p->pTabSchema
|| p->pSchema==pParse->db->aDb[1].pSchema );
/* Determine whether we should code this trigger */
- if( p->op==op
- && p->tr_tm==tr_tm
+ if( p->op==op
+ && p->tr_tm==tr_tm
&& checkColumnOverlap(p->pColumns, pChanges)
){
sqlite3CodeRowTriggerDirect(pParse, p, pTab, reg, orconf, ignoreJump);
@@ -122992,9 +122992,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
}
/*
-** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table.
-** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the
-** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information
+** Triggers may access values stored in the old.* or new.* pseudo-table.
+** This function returns a 32-bit bitmask indicating which columns of the
+** old.* or new.* tables actually are used by triggers. This information
** may be used by the caller, for example, to avoid having to load the entire
** old.* record into memory when executing an UPDATE or DELETE command.
**
@@ -123004,7 +123004,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(
** are more than 32 columns in the table, and at least one of the columns
** with an index greater than 32 may be accessed, 0xffffffff is returned.
**
-** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is
+** It is not possible to determine if the old.rowid or new.rowid column is
** accessed by triggers. The caller must always assume that it is.
**
** Parameter isNew must be either 1 or 0. If it is 0, then the mask returned
@@ -123081,10 +123081,10 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
/*
** The most recently coded instruction was an OP_Column to retrieve the
-** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the
+** i-th column of table pTab. This routine sets the P4 parameter of the
** OP_Column to the default value, if any.
**
-** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the
+** The default value of a column is specified by a DEFAULT clause in the
** column definition. This was either supplied by the user when the table
** was created, or added later to the table definition by an ALTER TABLE
** command. If the latter, then the row-records in the table btree on disk
@@ -123093,9 +123093,9 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
** If the former, then all row-records are guaranteed to include a value
** for the column and the P4 value is not required.
**
-** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have
+** Column definitions created by an ALTER TABLE command may only have
** literal default values specified: a number, null or a string. (If a more
-** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated
+** complicated default expression value was provided, it is evaluated
** when the ALTER TABLE is executed and one of the literal values written
** into the sqlite_master table.)
**
@@ -123105,8 +123105,8 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
** sqlite3_value objects.
**
** If parameter iReg is not negative, code an OP_RealAffinity instruction
-** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is
-** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save
+** on register iReg. This is used when an equivalent integer value is
+** stored in place of an 8-byte floating point value in order to save
** space.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){
@@ -123117,7 +123117,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ColumnDefault(Vdbe *v, Table *pTab, int i, int iReg){
Column *pCol = &pTab->aCol[i];
VdbeComment((v, "%s.%s", pTab->zName, pCol->zName));
assert( inCol );
- sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc,
+ sqlite3ValueFromExpr(sqlite3VdbeDb(v), pCol->pDflt, enc,
pCol->affinity, &pValue);
if( pValue ){
sqlite3VdbeAppendP4(v, pValue, P4_MEM);
@@ -123204,7 +123204,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
}
assert( pTabList->nSrc==1 );
- /* Locate the table which we want to update.
+ /* Locate the table which we want to update.
*/
pTab = sqlite3SrcListLookup(pParse, pTabList);
if( pTab==0 ) goto update_cleanup;
@@ -123250,7 +123250,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
pParse->nTab++;
}
- /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[].
+ /* Allocate space for aXRef[], aRegIdx[], and aToOpen[].
** Initialize aXRef[] and aToOpen[] to their default values.
*/
aXRef = sqlite3DbMallocRawNN(db, sizeof(int) * (pTab->nCol+nIdx) + nIdx+2 );
@@ -123319,7 +123319,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
assert( chngPk==0 || chngPk==1 );
chngKey = chngRowid + chngPk;
- /* The SET expressions are not actually used inside the WHERE loop.
+ /* The SET expressions are not actually used inside the WHERE loop.
** So reset the colUsed mask. Unless this is a virtual table. In that
** case, set all bits of the colUsed mask (to ensure that the virtual
** table implementation makes all columns available).
@@ -123347,7 +123347,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
reg = ++pParse->nMem;
pParse->nMem += pIdx->nColumn;
if( (onError==OE_Replace)
- || (onError==OE_Default && pIdx->onError==OE_Replace)
+ || (onError==OE_Default && pIdx->onError==OE_Replace)
){
bReplace = 1;
}
@@ -123359,7 +123359,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
aRegIdx[j] = reg;
}
if( bReplace ){
- /* If REPLACE conflict resolution might be invoked, open cursors on all
+ /* If REPLACE conflict resolution might be invoked, open cursors on all
** indexes in case they are needed to delete records. */
memset(aToOpen, 1, nIdx+1);
}
@@ -123436,7 +123436,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
sqlite3VdbeSetP4KeyInfo(pParse, pPk);
}
- /* Begin the database scan.
+ /* Begin the database scan.
**
** Do not consider a single-pass strategy for a multi-row update if
** there are any triggers or foreign keys to process, or rows may
@@ -123468,7 +123468,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
}
assert( iCur!=iDataCur || !HasRowid(pTab) );
}
-
+
if( HasRowid(pTab) ){
/* Read the rowid of the current row of the WHERE scan. In ONEPASS_OFF
** mode, write the rowid into the FIFO. In either of the one-pass modes,
@@ -123481,7 +123481,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
/* Read the PK of the current row into an array of registers. In
** ONEPASS_OFF mode, serialize the array into a record and store it in
** the ephemeral table. Or, in ONEPASS_SINGLE or MULTI mode, change
- ** the OP_OpenEphemeral instruction to a Noop (the ephemeral table
+ ** the OP_OpenEphemeral instruction to a Noop (the ephemeral table
** is not required) and leave the PK fields in the array of registers. */
for(i=0; iaiColumn[i]>=0 );
@@ -123563,7 +123563,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
** information is needed */
if( chngPk || hasFK || pTrigger ){
u32 oldmask = (hasFK ? sqlite3FkOldmask(pParse, pTab) : 0);
- oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse,
+ oldmask |= sqlite3TriggerColmask(pParse,
pTrigger, pChanges, 0, TRIGGER_BEFORE|TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, onError
);
for(i=0; inCol; i++){
@@ -123590,8 +123590,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
** If there are one or more BEFORE triggers, then do not populate the
** registers associated with columns that are (a) not modified by
** this UPDATE statement and (b) not accessed by new.* references. The
- ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from
- ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger
+ ** values for registers not modified by the UPDATE must be reloaded from
+ ** the database after the BEFORE triggers are fired anyway (as the trigger
** may have modified them). So not loading those that are not going to
** be used eliminates some redundant opcodes.
*/
@@ -123606,7 +123606,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
if( j>=0 ){
sqlite3ExprCode(pParse, pChanges->a[j].pExpr, regNew+i);
}else if( 0==(tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE) || i>31 || (newmask & MASKBIT32(i)) ){
- /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed
+ /* This branch loads the value of a column that will not be changed
** into a register. This is done if there are no BEFORE triggers, or
** if there are one or more BEFORE triggers that use this value via
** a new.* reference in a trigger program.
@@ -123625,11 +123625,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
*/
if( tmask&TRIGGER_BEFORE ){
sqlite3TableAffinity(v, pTab, regNew);
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
TRIGGER_BEFORE, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue);
/* The row-trigger may have deleted the row being updated. In this
- ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are
+ ** case, jump to the next row. No updates or AFTER triggers are
** required. This behavior - what happens when the row being updated
** is deleted or renamed by a BEFORE trigger - is left undefined in the
** documentation.
@@ -123642,9 +123642,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
VdbeCoverage(v);
}
- /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified
- ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for
- ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their
+ /* If it did not delete it, the row-trigger may still have modified
+ ** some of the columns of the row being updated. Load the values for
+ ** all columns not modified by the update statement into their
** registers in case this has happened.
*/
for(i=0; inCol; i++){
@@ -123683,7 +123683,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
** to process, delete the old record. Otherwise, add a noop OP_Delete
** to invoke the pre-update hook.
**
- ** That (regNew==regnewRowid+1) is true is also important for the
+ ** That (regNew==regnewRowid+1) is true is also important for the
** pre-update hook. If the caller invokes preupdate_new(), the returned
** value is copied from memory cell (regNewRowid+1+iCol), where iCol
** is the column index supplied by the user.
@@ -123713,29 +123713,29 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
if( hasFK ){
sqlite3FkCheck(pParse, pTab, 0, regNewRowid, aXRef, chngKey);
}
-
+
/* Insert the new index entries and the new record. */
sqlite3CompleteInsertion(
- pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx,
- OPFLAG_ISUPDATE | (eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ? OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION : 0),
+ pParse, pTab, iDataCur, iIdxCur, regNewRowid, aRegIdx,
+ OPFLAG_ISUPDATE | (eOnePass==ONEPASS_MULTI ? OPFLAG_SAVEPOSITION : 0),
0, 0
);
/* Do any ON CASCADE, SET NULL or SET DEFAULT operations required to
** handle rows (possibly in other tables) that refer via a foreign key
- ** to the row just updated. */
+ ** to the row just updated. */
if( hasFK ){
sqlite3FkActions(pParse, pTab, pChanges, regOldRowid, aXRef, chngKey);
}
}
- /* Increment the row counter
+ /* Increment the row counter
*/
if( (db->flags & SQLITE_CountRows) && !pParse->pTriggerTab){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp2(v, OP_AddImm, regRowCount, 1);
}
- sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
+ sqlite3CodeRowTrigger(pParse, pTrigger, TK_UPDATE, pChanges,
TRIGGER_AFTER, pTab, regOldRowid, onError, labelContinue);
/* Repeat the above with the next record to be updated, until
@@ -123763,7 +123763,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Update(
}
/*
- ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is
+ ** Return the number of rows that were changed. If this routine is
** generating code because of a call to sqlite3NestedParse(), do not
** invoke the callback function.
*/
@@ -123795,8 +123795,8 @@ update_cleanup:
/*
** Generate code for an UPDATE of a virtual table.
**
-** There are two possible strategies - the default and the special
-** "onepass" strategy. Onepass is only used if the virtual table
+** There are two possible strategies - the default and the special
+** "onepass" strategy. Onepass is only used if the virtual table
** implementation indicates that pWhere may match at most one row.
**
** The default strategy is to create an ephemeral table that contains
@@ -123894,7 +123894,7 @@ static void updateVirtualTable(
/* Begin scannning through the ephemeral table. */
addr = sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_Rewind, ephemTab); VdbeCoverage(v);
- /* Extract arguments from the current row of the ephemeral table and
+ /* Extract arguments from the current row of the ephemeral table and
** invoke the VUpdate method. */
for(i=0; iflags;
@@ -124190,7 +124190,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunVacuum(char **pzErrMsg, sqlite3 *db, int iDb){
);
if( rc ) goto end_of_vacuum;
- /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the
+ /* At this point, there is a write transaction open on both the
** vacuum database and the main database. Assuming no error occurs,
** both transactions are closed by this block - the main database
** transaction by sqlite3BtreeCopyFile() and the other by an explicit
@@ -124263,7 +124263,7 @@ end_of_vacuum:
}
/* This both clears the schemas and reduces the size of the db->aDb[]
- ** array. */
+ ** array. */
sqlite3ResetAllSchemasOfConnection(db);
return rc;
@@ -124292,7 +124292,7 @@ end_of_vacuum:
/*
** Before a virtual table xCreate() or xConnect() method is invoked, the
** sqlite3.pVtabCtx member variable is set to point to an instance of
-** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
+** this struct allocated on the stack. It is used by the implementation of
** the sqlite3_declare_vtab() and sqlite3_vtab_config() APIs, both of which
** are invoked only from within xCreate and xConnect methods.
*/
@@ -124399,7 +124399,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_module_v2(
/*
** Lock the virtual table so that it cannot be disconnected.
** Locks nest. Every lock should have a corresponding unlock.
-** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
+** If an unlock is omitted, resources leaks will occur.
**
** If a disconnect is attempted while a virtual table is locked,
** the disconnect is deferred until all locks have been removed.
@@ -124411,7 +124411,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabLock(VTable *pVTab){
/*
** pTab is a pointer to a Table structure representing a virtual-table.
-** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
+** Return a pointer to the VTable object used by connection db to access
** this virtual-table, if one has been created, or NULL otherwise.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE VTable *sqlite3GetVTable(sqlite3 *db, Table *pTab){
@@ -124445,7 +124445,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlock(VTable *pVTab){
/*
** Table p is a virtual table. This function moves all elements in the
** p->pVTable list to the sqlite3.pDisconnect lists of their associated
-** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
+** database connections to be disconnected at the next opportunity.
** Except, if argument db is not NULL, then the entry associated with
** connection db is left in the p->pVTable list.
*/
@@ -124454,8 +124454,8 @@ static VTable *vtabDisconnectAll(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
VTable *pVTable = p->pVTable;
p->pVTable = 0;
- /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
- ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
+ /* Assert that the mutex (if any) associated with the BtShared database
+ ** that contains table p is held by the caller. See header comments
** above function sqlite3VtabUnlockList() for an explanation of why
** this makes it safe to access the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of any
** database connection that may have an entry in the p->pVTable list.
@@ -124511,7 +124511,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
** Disconnect all the virtual table objects in the sqlite3.pDisconnect list.
**
** This function may only be called when the mutexes associated with all
-** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
+** shared b-tree databases opened using connection db are held by the
** caller. This is done to protect the sqlite3.pDisconnect list. The
** sqlite3.pDisconnect list is accessed only as follows:
**
@@ -124524,7 +124524,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabDisconnect(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
** or, if the virtual table is stored in a non-sharable database, then
** the database handle mutex is held.
**
-** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
+** As a result, a sqlite3.pDisconnect cannot be accessed simultaneously
** by multiple threads. It is thread-safe.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -124550,12 +124550,12 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabUnlockList(sqlite3 *db){
** record.
**
** Since it is a virtual-table, the Table structure contains a pointer
-** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
+** to the head of a linked list of VTable structures. Each VTable
** structure is associated with a single sqlite3* user of the schema.
-** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
-** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
+** The reference count of the VTable structure associated with database
+** connection db is decremented immediately (which may lead to the
** structure being xDisconnected and free). Any other VTable structures
-** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
+** in the list are moved to the sqlite3.pDisconnect list of the associated
** database connection.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabClear(sqlite3 *db, Table *p){
@@ -124633,7 +124633,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabBeginParse(
** The second call, to obtain permission to create the table, is made now.
*/
if( pTable->azModuleArg ){
- sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
+ sqlite3AuthCheck(pParse, SQLITE_CREATE_VTABLE, pTable->zName,
pTable->azModuleArg[0], pParse->db->aDb[iDb].zDbSName);
}
#endif
@@ -124665,7 +124665,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
addArgumentToVtab(pParse);
pParse->sArg.z = 0;
if( pTab->nModuleArg<1 ) return;
-
+
/* If the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement is being entered for the
** first time (in other words if the virtual table is actually being
** created now instead of just being read out of sqlite_master) then
@@ -124685,9 +124685,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabFinishParse(Parse *pParse, Token *pEnd){
}
zStmt = sqlite3MPrintf(db, "CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE %T", &pParse->sNameToken);
- /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
+ /* A slot for the record has already been allocated in the
** SQLITE_MASTER table. We just need to update that slot with all
- ** the information we've collected.
+ ** the information we've collected.
**
** The VM register number pParse->regRowid holds the rowid of an
** entry in the sqlite_master table tht was created for this vtab
@@ -124768,7 +124768,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabArgExtend(Parse *pParse, Token *p){
** to this procedure.
*/
static int vtabCallConstructor(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
Table *pTab,
Module *pMod,
int (*xConstruct)(sqlite3*,void*,int,const char*const*,sqlite3_vtab**,char**),
@@ -124787,7 +124787,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
/* Check that the virtual-table is not already being initialized */
for(pCtx=db->pVtabCtx; pCtx; pCtx=pCtx->pPrior){
if( pCtx->pTab==pTab ){
- *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
+ *pzErr = sqlite3MPrintf(db,
"vtable constructor called recursively: %s", pTab->zName
);
return SQLITE_LOCKED;
@@ -124846,7 +124846,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
int iCol;
u8 oooHidden = 0;
/* If everything went according to plan, link the new VTable structure
- ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the
+ ** into the linked list headed by pTab->pVTable. Then loop through the
** columns of the table to see if any of them contain the token "hidden".
** If so, set the Column COLFLAG_HIDDEN flag and remove the token from
** the type string. */
@@ -124891,7 +124891,7 @@ static int vtabCallConstructor(
/*
** This function is invoked by the parser to call the xConnect() method
-** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
+** of the virtual table pTab. If an error occurs, an error code is returned
** and an error left in pParse.
**
** This call is a no-op if table pTab is not a virtual table.
@@ -124960,7 +124960,7 @@ static void addToVTrans(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
/*
** This function is invoked by the vdbe to call the xCreate method
-** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
+** of the virtual table named zTab in database iDb.
**
** If an error occurs, *pzErr is set to point to an English language
** description of the error and an SQLITE_XXX error code is returned.
@@ -124979,8 +124979,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallCreate(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab,
zMod = pTab->azModuleArg[0];
pMod = (Module*)sqlite3HashFind(&db->aModule, zMod);
- /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
- ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
+ /* If the module has been registered and includes a Create method,
+ ** invoke it now. If the module has not been registered, return an
** error. Otherwise, do nothing.
*/
if( pMod==0 || pMod->pModule->xCreate==0 || pMod->pModule->xDestroy==0 ){
@@ -125036,8 +125036,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){
pParse->declareVtab = 1;
pParse->db = db;
pParse->nQueryLoop = 1;
-
- if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr)
+
+ if( SQLITE_OK==sqlite3RunParser(pParse, zCreateTable, &zErr)
&& pParse->pNewTable
&& !db->mallocFailed
&& !pParse->pNewTable->pSelect
@@ -125070,7 +125070,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_declare_vtab(sqlite3 *db, const char *zCreateTable){
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
pParse->declareVtab = 0;
-
+
if( pParse->pVdbe ){
sqlite3VdbeFinalize(pParse->pVdbe);
}
@@ -125128,7 +125128,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(sqlite3 *db, int iDb, const char *zTab
** called is identified by the second argument, "offset", which is
** the offset of the method to call in the sqlite3_module structure.
**
-** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
+** The array is cleared after invoking the callbacks.
*/
static void callFinaliser(sqlite3 *db, int offset){
int i;
@@ -125177,7 +125177,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSync(sqlite3 *db, Vdbe *p){
}
/*
-** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xRollback method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -125186,7 +125186,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabRollback(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
+** Invoke the xCommit method of all virtual tables in the
** sqlite3.aVTrans array. Then clear the array itself.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabCommit(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -125208,7 +125208,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
/* Special case: If db->aVTrans is NULL and db->nVTrans is greater
** than zero, then this function is being called from within a
- ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
+ ** virtual module xSync() callback. It is illegal to write to
** virtual module tables in this case, so return SQLITE_LOCKED.
*/
if( sqlite3VtabInSync(db) ){
@@ -125216,7 +125216,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
}
if( !pVTab ){
return SQLITE_OK;
- }
+ }
pModule = pVTab->pVtab->pModule;
if( pModule->xBegin ){
@@ -125229,7 +125229,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
}
}
- /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
+ /* Invoke the xBegin method. If successful, add the vtab to the
** sqlite3.aVTrans[] array. */
rc = growVTrans(db);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -125253,11 +125253,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabBegin(sqlite3 *db, VTable *pVTab){
** as the second argument to the virtual table method invoked.
**
** If op is SAVEPOINT_BEGIN, the xSavepoint method is invoked. If it is
-** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
+** SAVEPOINT_ROLLBACK, the xRollbackTo method. Otherwise, if op is
** SAVEPOINT_RELEASE, then the xRelease method of each virtual table with
** an open transaction is invoked.
**
-** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
+** If any virtual table method returns an error code other than SQLITE_OK,
** processing is abandoned and the error returned to the caller of this
** function immediately. If all calls to virtual table methods are successful,
** SQLITE_OK is returned.
@@ -125304,7 +125304,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3VtabSavepoint(sqlite3 *db, int op, int iSavepoint){
** This routine is used to allow virtual table implementations to
** overload MATCH, LIKE, GLOB, and REGEXP operators.
**
-** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
+** Return either the pDef argument (indicating no change) or a
** new FuncDef structure that is marked as ephemeral using the
** SQLITE_FUNC_EPHEM flag.
*/
@@ -125336,9 +125336,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE FuncDef *sqlite3VtabOverloadFunction(
assert( pVtab->pModule!=0 );
pMod = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
if( pMod->xFindFunction==0 ) return pDef;
-
+
/* Call the xFindFunction method on the virtual table implementation
- ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function
+ ** to see if the implementation wants to overload this function
*/
zLowerName = sqlite3DbStrDup(db, pDef->zName);
if( zLowerName ){
@@ -125449,7 +125449,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
Table *pTab = pMod->pEpoTab;
if( pTab!=0 ){
/* Mark the table as Ephemeral prior to deleting it, so that the
- ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
+ ** sqlite3DeleteTable() routine will know that it is not stored in
** the schema. */
pTab->tabFlags |= TF_Ephemeral;
sqlite3DeleteTable(db, pTab);
@@ -125465,8 +125465,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3VtabEponymousTableClear(sqlite3 *db, Module *pMod){
** within an xUpdate method.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
- static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
- SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
+ static const unsigned char aMap[] = {
+ SQLITE_ROLLBACK, SQLITE_ABORT, SQLITE_FAIL, SQLITE_IGNORE, SQLITE_REPLACE
};
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
if( !sqlite3SafetyCheckOk(db) ) return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
@@ -125478,7 +125478,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_vtab_on_conflict(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
+** Call from within the xCreate() or xConnect() methods to provide
** the SQLite core with additional information about the behavior
** of the virtual table being implemented.
*/
@@ -125688,7 +125688,7 @@ struct WhereLoop {
/* This object holds the prerequisites and the cost of running a
** subquery on one operand of an OR operator in the WHERE clause.
-** See WhereOrSet for additional information
+** See WhereOrSet for additional information
*/
struct WhereOrCost {
Bitmask prereq; /* Prerequisites */
@@ -125740,7 +125740,7 @@ struct WherePath {
** clause subexpression is separated from the others by AND operators,
** usually, or sometimes subexpressions separated by OR.
**
-** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
+** All WhereTerms are collected into a single WhereClause structure.
** The following identity holds:
**
** WhereTerm.pWC->a[WhereTerm.idx] == WhereTerm
@@ -125890,8 +125890,8 @@ struct WhereAndInfo {
** An instance of the following structure keeps track of a mapping
** between VDBE cursor numbers and bits of the bitmasks in WhereTerm.
**
-** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
-** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
+** The VDBE cursor numbers are small integers contained in
+** SrcList_item.iCursor and Expr.iTable fields. For any given WHERE
** clause, the cursor numbers might not begin with 0 and they might
** contain gaps in the numbering sequence. But we want to make maximum
** use of the bits in our bitmasks. This structure provides a mapping
@@ -126145,7 +126145,7 @@ static void explainAppendTerm(
}
/*
-** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
+** Argument pLevel describes a strategy for scanning table pTab. This
** function appends text to pStr that describes the subset of table
** rows scanned by the strategy in the form of an SQL expression.
**
@@ -126186,7 +126186,7 @@ static void explainIndexRange(StrAccum *pStr, WhereLoop *pLoop){
/*
** This function is a no-op unless currently processing an EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN
** command, or if either SQLITE_DEBUG or SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS was
-** defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain opcode
+** defined at compile-time. If it is not a no-op, a single OP_Explain opcode
** is added to the output to describe the table scan strategy in pLevel.
**
** If an OP_Explain opcode is added to the VM, its address is returned.
@@ -126297,11 +126297,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WhereExplainOneScan(
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STMT_SCANSTATUS
/*
** Configure the VM passed as the first argument with an
-** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
-** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
+** sqlite3_stmt_scanstatus() entry corresponding to the scan used to
+** implement level pLvl. Argument pSrclist is a pointer to the FROM
** clause that the scan reads data from.
**
-** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
+** If argument addrExplain is not 0, it must be the address of an
** OP_Explain instruction that describes the same loop.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
@@ -126357,7 +126357,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereAddScanStatus(
**
** Only the parent term was in the original WHERE clause. The child1
** and child2 terms were added by the LIKE optimization. If both of
-** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
+** the virtual child terms are valid, then testing of the parent can be
** skipped.
**
** Usually the parent term is marked as TERM_CODED. But if the parent
@@ -126388,7 +126388,7 @@ static void disableTerm(WhereLevel *pLevel, WhereTerm *pTerm){
/*
** Code an OP_Affinity opcode to apply the column affinity string zAff
-** to the n registers starting at base.
+** to the n registers starting at base.
**
** As an optimization, SQLITE_AFF_BLOB entries (which are no-ops) at the
** beginning and end of zAff are ignored. If all entries in zAff are
@@ -126425,7 +126425,7 @@ static void codeApplyAffinity(Parse *pParse, int base, int n, char *zAff){
}
/*
-** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
+** Expression pRight, which is the RHS of a comparison operation, is
** either a vector of n elements or, if n==1, a scalar expression.
** Before the comparison operation, affinity zAff is to be applied
** to the pRight values. This function modifies characters within the
@@ -126452,7 +126452,7 @@ static void updateRangeAffinityStr(
/*
** Generate code for a single equality term of the WHERE clause. An equality
-** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
+** term can be either X=expr or X IN (...). pTerm is the term to be
** coded.
**
** The current value for the constraint is left in a register, the index
@@ -126540,12 +126540,12 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
Expr *pLeft = pX->pLeft;
if( pSelect->pOrderBy ){
- /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
- ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
- ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
+ /* If the SELECT statement has an ORDER BY clause, zero the
+ ** iOrderByCol variables. These are set to non-zero when an
+ ** ORDER BY term exactly matches one of the terms of the
** result-set. Since the result-set of the SELECT statement may
- ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
- ** set correctly. Since setting them is just an optimization,
+ ** have been modified or reordered, these variables are no longer
+ ** set correctly. Since setting them is just an optimization,
** it's easiest just to zero them here. */
ExprList *pOrderBy = pSelect->pOrderBy;
for(i=0; inExpr; i++){
@@ -126637,7 +126637,7 @@ static int codeEqualityTerm(
** For example, consider table t1(a,b,c,d,e,f) with index i1(a,b,c).
** Suppose the WHERE clause is this: a==5 AND b IN (1,2,3) AND c>5 AND c<10
** The index has as many as three equality constraints, but in this
-** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
+** example, the third "c" value is an inequality. So only two
** constraints are coded. This routine will generate code to evaluate
** a==5 and b IN (1,2,3). The current values for a and b will be stored
** in consecutive registers and the index of the first register is returned.
@@ -126727,7 +126727,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
testcase( pIdx->aiColumn[j]==XN_EXPR );
VdbeComment((v, "%s", explainIndexColumnName(pIdx, j)));
}
- }
+ }
/* Evaluate the equality constraints
*/
@@ -126736,7 +126736,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
int r1;
pTerm = pLoop->aLTerm[j];
assert( pTerm!=0 );
- /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
+ /* The following testcase is true for indices with redundant columns.
** Ex: CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a,b,a); SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=0 AND b=0; */
testcase( (pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_CODED)!=0 );
testcase( pTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -126752,8 +126752,8 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
if( pTerm->eOperator & WO_IN ){
if( pTerm->pExpr->flags & EP_xIsSelect ){
/* No affinity ever needs to be (or should be) applied to a value
- ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
- ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
+ ** from the RHS of an "? IN (SELECT ...)" expression. The
+ ** sqlite3FindInIndex() routine has already ensured that the
** affinity of the comparison has been applied to the value. */
if( zAff ) zAff[j] = SQLITE_AFF_BLOB;
}
@@ -126780,7 +126780,7 @@ static int codeAllEqualityTerms(
#ifndef SQLITE_LIKE_DOESNT_MATCH_BLOBS
/*
** If the most recently coded instruction is a constant range constraint
-** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
+** (a string literal) that originated from the LIKE optimization, then
** set P3 and P5 on the OP_String opcode so that the string will be cast
** to a BLOB at appropriate times.
**
@@ -126805,7 +126805,7 @@ static void whereLikeOptimizationStringFixup(
assert( pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>0 );
pOp = sqlite3VdbeGetOp(v, -1);
assert( pOp!=0 );
- assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
+ assert( pOp->opcode==OP_String8
|| pTerm->pWC->pWInfo->pParse->db->mallocFailed );
pOp->p3 = (int)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr>>1); /* Register holding counter */
pOp->p5 = (u8)(pLevel->iLikeRepCntr&1); /* ASC or DESC */
@@ -126848,7 +126848,7 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
/*
** Test whether or not expression pExpr, which was part of a WHERE clause,
** should be included in the cursor-hint for a table that is on the rhs
-** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
+** of a LEFT JOIN. Set Walker.eCode to non-zero before returning if the
** expression is not suitable.
**
** An expression is unsuitable if it might evaluate to non NULL even if
@@ -126861,9 +126861,9 @@ static int codeCursorHintCheckExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
** CASE WHEN col THEN 0 ELSE 1 END
*/
static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
- if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
- || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
- || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
+ if( pExpr->op==TK_IS
+ || pExpr->op==TK_ISNULL || pExpr->op==TK_ISNOT
+ || pExpr->op==TK_NOTNULL || pExpr->op==TK_CASE
){
pWalker->eCode = 1;
}else if( pExpr->op==TK_FUNCTION ){
@@ -126884,10 +126884,10 @@ static int codeCursorHintIsOrFunction(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
** that accesses any table other than the one identified by
** CCurHint.iTabCur, then do the following:
**
-** 1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
+** 1) allocate a register and code an OP_Column instruction to read
** the specified column into the new register, and
**
-** 2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
+** 2) transform the expression node to a TK_REGISTER node that reads
** from the newly populated register.
**
** Also, if the node is a TK_COLUMN that does access the table idenified
@@ -126918,7 +126918,7 @@ static int codeCursorHintFixExpr(Walker *pWalker, Expr *pExpr){
** the parent context. Do not walk the function arguments in this case.
**
** todo: It should be possible to replace this node with a TK_REGISTER
- ** expression, as the result of the expression must be stored in a
+ ** expression, as the result of the expression must be stored in a
** register at this point. The same holds for TK_AGG_COLUMN nodes. */
rc = WRC_Prune;
}
@@ -126961,18 +126961,18 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
if( pTerm->wtFlags & (TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_CODED) ) continue;
if( pTerm->prereqAll & pLevel->notReady ) continue;
- /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
+ /* Any terms specified as part of the ON(...) clause for any LEFT
** JOIN for which the current table is not the rhs are omitted
- ** from the cursor-hint.
+ ** from the cursor-hint.
**
- ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
+ ** If this table is the rhs of a LEFT JOIN, "IS" or "IS NULL" terms
** that were specified as part of the WHERE clause must be excluded.
** This is to address the following:
**
** SELECT ... t1 LEFT JOIN t2 ON (t1.a=t2.b) WHERE t2.c IS NULL;
**
** Say there is a single row in t2 that matches (t1.a=t2.b), but its
- ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
+ ** t2.c values is not NULL. If the (t2.c IS NULL) constraint is
** pushed down to the cursor, this row is filtered out, causing
** SQLite to synthesize a row of NULL values. Which does match the
** WHERE clause, and so the query returns a row. Which is incorrect.
@@ -126985,7 +126985,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
*/
if( pTabItem->fg.jointype & JT_LEFT ){
Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
- if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin)
+ if( !ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin)
|| pExpr->iRightJoinTable!=pTabItem->iCursor
){
sWalker.eCode = 0;
@@ -127023,7 +127023,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
if( pExpr!=0 ){
sWalker.xExprCallback = codeCursorHintFixExpr;
sqlite3WalkExpr(&sWalker, pExpr);
- sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
+ sqlite3VdbeAddOp4(v, OP_CursorHint,
(sHint.pIdx ? sHint.iIdxCur : sHint.iTabCur), 0, 0,
(const char*)pExpr, P4_EXPR);
}
@@ -127035,7 +127035,7 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
/*
** Cursor iCur is open on an intkey b-tree (a table). Register iRowid contains
** a rowid value just read from cursor iIdxCur, open on index pIdx. This
-** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
+** function generates code to do a deferred seek of cursor iCur to the
** rowid stored in register iRowid.
**
** Normally, this is just:
@@ -127045,8 +127045,8 @@ static void codeCursorHint(
** However, if the scan currently being coded is a branch of an OR-loop and
** the statement currently being coded is a SELECT, then P3 of the OP_Seek
** is set to iIdxCur and P4 is set to point to an array of integers
-** containing one entry for each column of the table cursor iCur is open
-** on. For each table column, if the column is the i'th column of the
+** containing one entry for each column of the table cursor iCur is open
+** on. For each table column, if the column is the i'th column of the
** index, then the corresponding array entry is set to (i+1). If the column
** does not appear in the index at all, the array entry is set to 0.
*/
@@ -127061,7 +127061,7 @@ static void codeDeferredSeek(
assert( iIdxCur>0 );
assert( pIdx->aiColumn[pIdx->nColumn-1]==-1 );
-
+
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, OP_Seek, iIdxCur, 0, iCur);
if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)
&& DbMaskAllZero(sqlite3ParseToplevel(pParse)->writeMask)
@@ -127150,7 +127150,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
iCur = pTabItem->iCursor;
pLevel->notReady = notReady & ~sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, iCur);
bRev = (pWInfo->revMask>>iLevel)&1;
- omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
+ omitTable = (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)!=0
&& (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0;
VdbeModuleComment((v, "Begin WHERE-loop%d: %s",iLevel,pTabItem->pTab->zName));
@@ -127247,7 +127247,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
sqlite3VdbeAddOp3(v, pOp->opcode, pOp->p1, pOp->p2, pOp->p3);
}
- /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
+ /* Generate code that will continue to the next row if
** the IN constraint is not satisfied */
pCompare = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_EQ, 0, 0);
assert( pCompare!=0 || db->mallocFailed );
@@ -127325,7 +127325,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
int r1, rTemp; /* Registers for holding the start boundary */
int op; /* Cursor seek operation */
- /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
+ /* The following constant maps TK_xx codes into corresponding
** seek opcodes. It depends on a particular ordering of TK_xx
*/
const u8 aMoveOp[] = {
@@ -127374,8 +127374,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
testcase( pEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
memEndValue = ++pParse->nMem;
codeExprOrVector(pParse, pX->pRight, memEndValue, 1);
- if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
- && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
+ if( 0==sqlite3ExprIsVector(pX->pRight)
+ && (pX->op==TK_LT || pX->op==TK_GT)
){
testOp = bRev ? OP_Le : OP_Ge;
}else{
@@ -127404,14 +127404,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
}else if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED ){
/* Case 4: A scan using an index.
**
- ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
+ ** The WHERE clause may contain zero or more equality
** terms ("==" or "IN" operators) that refer to the N
** left-most columns of the index. It may also contain
** inequality constraints (>, <, >= or <=) on the indexed
- ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
+ ** column that immediately follows the N equalities. Only
** the right-most column can be an inequality - the rest must
- ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
- ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
+ ** use the "==" and "IN" operators. For example, if the
+ ** index is on (x,y,z), then the following clauses are all
** optimized:
**
** x=5
@@ -127432,7 +127432,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
** This case is also used when there are no WHERE clause
** constraints but an index is selected anyway, in order
** to force the output order to conform to an ORDER BY.
- */
+ */
static const u8 aStartOp[] = {
0,
0,
@@ -127472,8 +127472,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
iIdxCur = pLevel->iIdxCur;
assert( nEq>=pLoop->nSkip );
- /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that
- ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..."
+ /* If this loop satisfies a sort order (pOrderBy) request that
+ ** was passed to this function to implement a "SELECT min(x) ..."
** query, then the caller will only allow the loop to run for
** a single iteration. This means that the first row returned
** should not have a NULL value stored in 'x'. If column 'x' is
@@ -127492,15 +127492,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
nExtraReg = 1;
}
- /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
- ** of the range.
+ /* Find any inequality constraint terms for the start and end
+ ** of the range.
*/
j = nEq;
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_BTM_LIMIT ){
pRangeStart = pLoop->aLTerm[j++];
nExtraReg = MAX(nExtraReg, pLoop->u.btree.nBtm);
/* Like optimization range constraints always occur in pairs */
- assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
+ assert( (pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_LIKEOPT)==0 ||
(pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT)!=0 );
}
if( pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_TOP_LIMIT ){
@@ -127533,7 +127533,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
assert( pRangeEnd==0 || (pRangeEnd->wtFlags & TERM_VNULL)==0 );
/* If we are doing a reverse order scan on an ascending index, or
- ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
+ ** a forward order scan on a descending index, interchange the
** start and end terms (pRangeStart and pRangeEnd).
*/
if( (nEqnKeyCol && bRev==(pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]==SQLITE_SO_ASC))
@@ -127578,7 +127578,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
}
if( zStartAff ){
updateRangeAffinityStr(pRight, nBtm, &zStartAff[nEq]);
- }
+ }
nConstraint += nBtm;
testcase( pRangeStart->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
if( sqlite3ExprIsVector(pRight)==0 ){
@@ -127666,7 +127666,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
/* pIdx is a covering index. No need to access the main table. */
}else if( HasRowid(pIdx->pTable) ){
if( (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_TABLE) || (
- (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_UNIQ_TABLE)
+ (pWInfo->wctrlFlags & WHERE_SEEK_UNIQ_TABLE)
&& (pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_SINGLE)
)){
iRowidReg = ++pParse->nMem;
@@ -127796,15 +127796,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
pOrTab = pWInfo->pTabList;
}
- /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
+ /* Initialize the rowset register to contain NULL. An SQL NULL is
** equivalent to an empty rowset. Or, create an ephemeral index
** capable of holding primary keys in the case of a WITHOUT ROWID.
**
- ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
+ ** Also initialize regReturn to contain the address of the instruction
** immediately following the OP_Return at the bottom of the loop. This
** is required in a few obscure LEFT JOIN cases where control jumps
- ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
- ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
+ ** over the top of the loop into the body of it. In this case the
+ ** correct response for the end-of-loop code (the OP_Return) is to
** fall through to the next instruction, just as an OP_Next does if
** called on an uninitialized cursor.
*/
@@ -127829,7 +127829,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
**
** Actually, each subexpression is converted to "xN AND w" where w is
** the "interesting" terms of z - terms that did not originate in the
- ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
+ ** ON or USING clause of a LEFT JOIN, and terms that are usable as
** indices.
**
** This optimization also only applies if the (x1 OR x2 OR ...) term
@@ -127915,9 +127915,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
**
** Use some of the same optimizations as OP_RowSetTest: If iSet
** is zero, assume that the key cannot already be present in
- ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
- ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
- ** be tested for. */
+ ** the temp table. And if iSet is -1, assume that there is no
+ ** need to insert the key into the temp table, as it will never
+ ** be tested for. */
if( iSet ){
jmp1 = sqlite3VdbeAddOp4Int(v, OP_Found, regRowset, 0, r, nPk);
VdbeCoverage(v);
@@ -127956,8 +127956,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
** If the call to sqlite3WhereBegin() above resulted in a scan that
** uses an index, and this is either the first OR-connected term
** processed or the index is the same as that used by all previous
- ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
- ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
+ ** terms, set pCov to the candidate covering index. Otherwise, set
+ ** pCov to NULL to indicate that no candidate covering index will
** be available.
*/
pSubLoop = pSubWInfo->a[0].pWLoop;
@@ -128091,7 +128091,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereCodeOneLoopStart(
}
/* For a LEFT OUTER JOIN, generate code that will record the fact that
- ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
+ ** at least one row of the right table has matched the left table.
*/
if( pLevel->iLeftJoin ){
pLevel->addrFirst = sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v);
@@ -128233,7 +128233,7 @@ static int allowedOp(int op){
** collating sequence, then COLLATE operators are adjusted to ensure
** that the collating sequence does not change. For example:
** "Y collate NOCASE op X" becomes "X op Y" because any collation sequence on
-** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence
+** the left hand side of a comparison overrides any collation sequence
** attached to the right. For the same reason the EP_Collate flag
** is not commuted.
*/
@@ -128332,8 +128332,8 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
#endif
pList = pExpr->x.pList;
pLeft = pList->a[1].pExpr;
- if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
- || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
+ if( pLeft->op!=TK_COLUMN
+ || sqlite3ExprAffinity(pLeft)!=SQLITE_AFF_TEXT
|| IsVirtual(pLeft->pTab) /* Value might be numeric */
){
/* IMP: R-02065-49465 The left-hand side of the LIKE or GLOB operator must
@@ -128376,7 +128376,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
** function, then no OP_Variable will be added to the program.
** This causes problems for the sqlite3_bind_parameter_name()
** API. To work around them, add a dummy OP_Variable here.
- */
+ */
int r1 = sqlite3GetTempReg(pParse);
sqlite3ExprCodeTarget(pParse, pRight, r1);
sqlite3VdbeChangeP3(v, sqlite3VdbeCurrentAddr(v)-1, 0);
@@ -128401,7 +128401,7 @@ static int isLikeOrGlob(
**
** column OP expr
**
-** where OP is one of MATCH, GLOB, LIKE or REGEXP and "column" is a
+** where OP is one of MATCH, GLOB, LIKE or REGEXP and "column" is a
** column of a virtual table.
**
** If it is then return TRUE. If not, return FALSE.
@@ -128497,7 +128497,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereNthSubterm(WhereTerm *pTerm, int N){
**
** The following is NOT generated:
**
-** xy --> x!=y
+** xy --> x!=y
*/
static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
SrcList *pSrc, /* the FROM clause */
@@ -128594,10 +128594,10 @@ static void whereCombineDisjuncts(
** WhereTerm.u.pOrInfo->indexable |= the cursor number for table T
**
** A subterm is "indexable" if it is of the form
-** "T.C " where C is any column of table T and
+** "T.C " where C is any column of table T and
** is one of "=", "<", "<=", ">", ">=", "IS NULL", or "IN".
** A subterm is also indexable if it is an AND of two or more
-** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
+** subsubterms at least one of which is indexable. Indexable AND
** subterms have their eOperator set to WO_AND and they have
** u.pAndInfo set to a dynamically allocated WhereAndTerm object.
**
@@ -128688,8 +128688,8 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
if( !db->mallocFailed ){
for(j=0, pAndTerm=pAndWC->a; jnTerm; j++, pAndTerm++){
assert( pAndTerm->pExpr );
- if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
- || pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_MATCH
+ if( allowedOp(pAndTerm->pExpr->op)
+ || pAndTerm->eOperator==WO_MATCH
){
b |= sqlite3WhereGetMask(&pWInfo->sMaskSet, pAndTerm->leftCursor);
}
@@ -128785,7 +128785,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
pOrTerm->leftCursor))==0 ){
/* This term must be of the form t1.a==t2.b where t2 is in the
** chngToIN set but t1 is not. This term will be either preceded
- ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
+ ** or follwed by an inverted copy (t2.b==t1.a). Skip this term
** and use its inversion. */
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_COPIED );
testcase( pOrTerm->wtFlags & TERM_VIRTUAL );
@@ -128833,7 +128833,7 @@ static void exprAnalyzeOrTerm(
}
/* At this point, okToChngToIN is true if original pTerm satisfies
- ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
+ ** case 1. In that case, construct a new virtual term that is
** pTerm converted into an IN operator.
*/
if( okToChngToIN ){
@@ -128962,8 +128962,8 @@ static int exprMightBeIndexed(
int i;
int iCur;
- /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
- ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
+ /* If this expression is a vector to the left or right of a
+ ** inequality constraint (>, <, >= or <=), perform the processing
** on the first element of the vector. */
assert( TK_GT+1==TK_LE && TK_GT+2==TK_LT && TK_GT+3==TK_GE );
assert( TK_ISeOperator = operatorMask(op) & opMask;
}
if( op==TK_IS ) pTerm->wtFlags |= TERM_IS;
- if( pRight
+ if( pRight
&& exprMightBeIndexed(pSrc, op, pTerm->prereqRight, pRight, &iCur,&iColumn)
){
WhereTerm *pNew;
@@ -129154,7 +129154,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
for(i=0; i<2; i++){
Expr *pNewExpr;
int idxNew;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, ops[i],
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pExpr->pLeft, 0),
sqlite3ExprDup(db, pList->a[i].pExpr, 0));
transferJoinMarkings(pNewExpr, pExpr);
@@ -129192,7 +129192,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
** bound is made all lowercase so that the bounds also work when comparing
** BLOBs.
*/
- if( pWC->op==TK_AND
+ if( pWC->op==TK_AND
&& isLikeOrGlob(pParse, pExpr, &pStr1, &isComplete, &noCase)
){
Expr *pLeft; /* LHS of LIKE/GLOB operator */
@@ -129228,7 +129228,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
if( noCase ){
/* The point is to increment the last character before the first
** wildcard. But if we increment '@', that will push it into the
- ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
+ ** alphabetic range where case conversions will mess up the
** inequality. To avoid this, make sure to also run the full
** LIKE on all candidate expressions by clearing the isComplete flag
*/
@@ -129281,7 +129281,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
prereqColumn = sqlite3WhereExprUsage(pMaskSet, pLeft);
if( (prereqExpr & prereqColumn)==0 ){
Expr *pNewExpr;
- pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
+ pNewExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_MATCH,
0, sqlite3ExprDup(db, pRight, 0));
idxNew = whereClauseInsert(pWC, pNewExpr, TERM_VIRTUAL|TERM_DYNAMIC);
testcase( idxNew==0 );
@@ -129306,11 +129306,11 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
**
** This is only required if at least one side of the comparison operation
** is not a sub-select. */
- if( pWC->op==TK_AND
+ if( pWC->op==TK_AND
&& (pExpr->op==TK_EQ || pExpr->op==TK_IS)
&& (nLeft = sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pLeft))>1
&& sqlite3ExprVectorSize(pExpr->pRight)==nLeft
- && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
+ && ( (pExpr->pLeft->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0
|| (pExpr->pRight->flags & EP_xIsSelect)==0)
){
int i;
@@ -129332,7 +129332,7 @@ static void exprAnalyze(
/* If there is a vector IN term - e.g. "(a, b) IN (SELECT ...)" - create
** a virtual term for each vector component. The expression object
- ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
+ ** used by each such virtual term is pExpr (the full vector IN(...)
** expression). The WhereTerm.iField variable identifies the index within
** the vector on the LHS that the virtual term represents.
**
@@ -129506,7 +129506,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Bitmask sqlite3WhereExprListUsage(WhereMaskSet *pMaskSet, ExprLis
/*
-** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
+** Call exprAnalyze on all terms in a WHERE clause.
**
** Note that exprAnalyze() might add new virtual terms onto the
** end of the WHERE clause. We do not want to analyze these new
@@ -129525,7 +129525,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereExprAnalyze(
/*
** For table-valued-functions, transform the function arguments into
-** new WHERE clause terms.
+** new WHERE clause terms.
**
** Each function argument translates into an equality constraint against
** a HIDDEN column in the table.
@@ -129652,7 +129652,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WhereBreakLabel(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
** operate directly on the rowis returned by a WHERE clause. Return
** ONEPASS_SINGLE (1) if the statement can operation directly because only
** a single row is to be changed. Return ONEPASS_MULTI (2) if the one-pass
-** optimization can be used on multiple
+** optimization can be used on multiple
**
** If the ONEPASS optimization is used (if this routine returns true)
** then also write the indices of open cursors used by ONEPASS
@@ -129900,7 +129900,7 @@ static WhereTerm *whereScanInit(
** if pIdx!=0 and is one of the WO_xx operator codes specified by
** the op parameter. Return a pointer to the term. Return 0 if not found.
**
-** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.
+** If pIdx!=0 then it must be one of the indexes of table iCur.
** Search for terms matching the iColumn-th column of pIdx
** rather than the iColumn-th column of table iCur.
**
@@ -130013,17 +130013,17 @@ static int isDistinctRedundant(
){
Table *pTab;
Index *pIdx;
- int i;
+ int i;
int iBase;
/* If there is more than one table or sub-select in the FROM clause of
- ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
+ ** this query, then it will not be possible to show that the DISTINCT
** clause is redundant. */
if( pTabList->nSrc!=1 ) return 0;
iBase = pTabList->a[0].iCursor;
pTab = pTabList->a[0].pTab;
- /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
+ /* If any of the expressions is an IPK column on table iBase, then return
** true. Note: The (p->iTable==iBase) part of this test may be false if the
** current SELECT is a correlated sub-query.
*/
@@ -130074,7 +130074,7 @@ static LogEst estLog(LogEst N){
** Convert OP_Column opcodes to OP_Copy in previously generated code.
**
** This routine runs over generated VDBE code and translates OP_Column
-** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
+** opcodes into OP_Copy when the table is being accessed via co-routine
** instead of via table lookup.
**
** If the bIncrRowid parameter is 0, then any OP_Rowid instructions on
@@ -130378,7 +130378,7 @@ static void constructAutomaticIndex(
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrTop);
sqlite3ReleaseTempReg(pParse, regRecord);
sqlite3ExprCachePop(pParse);
-
+
/* Jump here when skipping the initialization */
sqlite3VdbeJumpHere(v, addrInit);
@@ -130389,7 +130389,7 @@ end_auto_index_create:
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
/*
-** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
+** Allocate and populate an sqlite3_index_info structure. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to eventually release the structure
** by passing the pointer returned by this function to sqlite3_free().
*/
@@ -130427,7 +130427,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
nTerm++;
}
- /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
+ /* If the ORDER BY clause contains only columns in the current
** virtual table then allocate space for the aOrderBy part of
** the sqlite3_index_info structure.
*/
@@ -130500,7 +130500,7 @@ static sqlite3_index_info *allocateIndexInfo(
assert( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_IN|WO_EQ|WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE|WO_MATCH) );
if( op & (WO_LT|WO_LE|WO_GT|WO_GE)
- && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
+ && sqlite3ExprIsVector(pTerm->pExpr->pRight)
){
if( i<16 ) mNoOmit |= (1 << i);
if( op==WO_LT ) pIdxCons[j].op = WO_LE;
@@ -130558,7 +130558,7 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){
** Search for "xBestIndex malfunction" below */
for(i=0; inConstraint; i++){
if( !p->aConstraint[i].usable && p->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex>0 ){
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"table %s: xBestIndex returned an invalid plan", pTab->zName);
}
}
@@ -130579,8 +130579,8 @@ static int vtabBestIndex(Parse *pParse, Table *pTab, sqlite3_index_info *p){
** Return the index of the sample that is the smallest sample that
** is greater than or equal to pRec. Note that this index is not an index
** into the aSample[] array - it is an index into a virtual set of samples
-** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
-** pRec.
+** based on the contents of aSample[] and the number of fields in record
+** pRec.
*/
static int whereKeyStats(
Parse *pParse, /* Database connection */
@@ -130616,38 +130616,38 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
** consider prefixes of those samples. For example, if the set of samples
** in aSample is:
**
- ** aSample[0] = (a, 5)
- ** aSample[1] = (a, 10)
- ** aSample[2] = (b, 5)
- ** aSample[3] = (c, 100)
+ ** aSample[0] = (a, 5)
+ ** aSample[1] = (a, 10)
+ ** aSample[2] = (b, 5)
+ ** aSample[3] = (c, 100)
** aSample[4] = (c, 105)
**
- ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
- ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
+ ** Then the search space should ideally be the samples above and the
+ ** unique prefixes [a], [b] and [c]. But since that is hard to organize,
** the code actually searches this set:
**
- ** 0: (a)
- ** 1: (a, 5)
- ** 2: (a, 10)
- ** 3: (a, 10)
- ** 4: (b)
- ** 5: (b, 5)
- ** 6: (c)
- ** 7: (c, 100)
+ ** 0: (a)
+ ** 1: (a, 5)
+ ** 2: (a, 10)
+ ** 3: (a, 10)
+ ** 4: (b)
+ ** 5: (b, 5)
+ ** 6: (c)
+ ** 7: (c, 100)
** 8: (c, 105)
** 9: (c, 105)
**
** For each sample in the aSample[] array, N samples are present in the
- ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
+ ** effective sample array. In the above, samples 0 and 1 are based on
** sample aSample[0]. Samples 2 and 3 on aSample[1] etc.
**
** Often, sample i of each block of N effective samples has (i+1) fields.
** Except, each sample may be extended to ensure that it is greater than or
- ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
- ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
- ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
- ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
- ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
+ ** equal to the previous sample in the array. For example, in the above,
+ ** sample 2 is the first sample of a block of N samples, so at first it
+ ** appears that it should be 1 field in size. However, that would make it
+ ** smaller than sample 1, so the binary search would not work. As a result,
+ ** it is extended to two fields. The duplicates that this creates do not
** cause any problems.
*/
nField = pRec->nField;
@@ -130661,7 +130661,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
iSamp = iTest / nField;
if( iSamp>0 ){
/* The proposed effective sample is a prefix of sample aSample[iSamp].
- ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
+ ** Specifically, the shortest prefix of at least (1 + iTest%nField)
** fields that is greater than the previous effective sample. */
for(n=(iTest % nField) + 1; nnSample );
assert( iCol==nField-1 );
pRec->nField = nField;
- assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
- || pParse->db->mallocFailed
+ assert( 0==sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)
+ || pParse->db->mallocFailed
);
}else{
/* Unless i==pIdx->nSample, indicating that pRec is larger than
@@ -130705,7 +130705,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
** (iCol+1) field prefix of sample i. */
assert( i<=pIdx->nSample && i>=0 );
pRec->nField = iCol+1;
- assert( i==pIdx->nSample
+ assert( i==pIdx->nSample
|| sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare(aSample[i].n, aSample[i].p, pRec)>0
|| pParse->db->mallocFailed );
@@ -130733,7 +130733,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
aStat[0] = aSample[i].anLt[iCol];
aStat[1] = aSample[i].anEq[iCol];
}else{
- /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
+ /* At this point, the (iCol+1) field prefix of aSample[i] is the first
** sample that is greater than pRec. Or, if i==pIdx->nSample then pRec
** is larger than all samples in the array. */
tRowcnt iUpper, iGap;
@@ -130765,7 +130765,7 @@ static int whereKeyStats(
/*
** If it is not NULL, pTerm is a term that provides an upper or lower
-** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
+** bound on a range scan. Without considering pTerm, it is estimated
** that the scan will visit nNew rows. This function returns the number
** estimated to be visited after taking pTerm into account.
**
@@ -130802,18 +130802,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCo
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
-/*
+/*
** This function is called to estimate the number of rows visited by a
** range-scan on a skip-scan index. For example:
**
** CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(a, b, c);
** SELECT * FROM t1 WHERE a=? AND c BETWEEN ? AND ?;
**
-** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
-** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
+** Value pLoop->nOut is currently set to the estimated number of rows
+** visited for scanning (a=? AND b=?). This function reduces that estimate
** by some factor to account for the (c BETWEEN ? AND ?) expression based
-** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple
-** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
+** on the stat4 data for the index. this scan will be peformed multiple
+** times (once for each (a,b) combination that matches a=?) is dealt with
** by the caller.
**
** It does this by scanning through all stat4 samples, comparing values
@@ -130834,7 +130834,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE char sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(sqlite3 *db, Index *pIdx, int iCo
** estimate of the number of rows delivered remains unchanged), *pbDone
** is left as is.
**
-** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
+** If an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned. Otherwise,
** SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
@@ -130852,7 +130852,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
u8 aff = sqlite3IndexColumnAffinity(db, p, nEq);
CollSeq *pColl;
-
+
sqlite3_value *p1 = 0; /* Value extracted from pLower */
sqlite3_value *p2 = 0; /* Value extracted from pUpper */
sqlite3_value *pVal = 0; /* Value extracted from record */
@@ -130884,7 +130884,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
nDiff = (nUpper - nLower);
if( nDiff<=0 ) nDiff = 1;
- /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
+ /* If there is both an upper and lower bound specified, and the
** comparisons indicate that they are close together, use the fallback
** method (assume that the scan visits 1/64 of the rows) for estimating
** the number of rows visited. Otherwise, estimate the number of rows
@@ -130931,7 +130931,7 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
**
** ... FROM t1 WHERE a = ? AND b > ? AND b < ? ...
**
-** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
+** then nEq is set to 1 (as the range restricted column, b, is the second
** left-most column of the index). Or, if the query is:
**
** ... FROM t1 WHERE a > ? AND a < ? ...
@@ -130939,13 +130939,13 @@ static int whereRangeSkipScanEst(
** then nEq is set to 0.
**
** When this function is called, *pnOut is set to the sqlite3LogEst() of the
-** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
-** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
+** number of rows that the index scan is expected to visit without
+** considering the range constraints. If nEq is 0, then *pnOut is the number of
** rows in the index. Assuming no error occurs, *pnOut is adjusted (reduced)
** to account for the range constraints pLower and pUpper.
-**
+**
** In the absence of sqlite_stat4 ANALYZE data, or if such data cannot be
-** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
+** used, a single range inequality reduces the search space by a factor of 4.
** and a pair of constraints (x>? AND xu.btree.nBtm;
int nTop = pLoop->u.btree.nTop;
- /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
+ /* Variable iLower will be set to the estimate of the number of rows in
** the index that are less than the lower bound of the range query. The
** lower bound being the concatenation of $P and $L, where $P is the
** key-prefix formed by the nEq values matched against the nEq left-most
@@ -130980,7 +130980,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
** Or, if pLower is NULL or $L cannot be extracted from it (because it
** is not a simple variable or literal value), the lower bound of the
** range is $P. Due to a quirk in the way whereKeyStats() works, even
- ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
+ ** if $L is available, whereKeyStats() is called for both ($P) and
** ($P:$L) and the larger of the two returned values is used.
**
** Similarly, iUpper is to be set to the estimate of the number of rows
@@ -131004,7 +131004,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
iLower = 0;
iUpper = p->nRowEst0;
}else{
- /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
+ /* Note: this call could be optimized away - since the same values must
** have been requested when testing key $P in whereEqualScanEst(). */
whereKeyStats(pParse, p, pRec, 0, a);
iLower = a[0];
@@ -131092,7 +131092,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
** reduced by an additional 75%. This means that, by default, an open-ended
** range query (e.g. col > ?) is assumed to match 1/4 of the rows in the
** index. While a closed range (e.g. col BETWEEN ? AND ?) is estimated to
- ** match 1/64 of the index. */
+ ** match 1/64 of the index. */
if( pLower && pLower->truthProb>0 && pUpper && pUpper->truthProb>0 ){
nNew -= 20;
}
@@ -131119,7 +131119,7 @@ static int whereRangeScanEst(
** for that index. When pExpr==NULL that means the constraint is
** "x IS NULL" instead of "x=VALUE".
**
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
** non-zero.
**
@@ -131170,7 +131170,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
WHERETRACE(0x10,("equality scan regions %s(%d): %d\n",
p->zName, nEq-1, (int)a[1]));
*pnRow = a[1];
-
+
return rc;
}
#endif /* SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4 */
@@ -131183,7 +131183,7 @@ static int whereEqualScanEst(
**
** WHERE x IN (1,2,3,4)
**
-** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
+** Write the estimated row count into *pnRow and return SQLITE_OK.
** If unable to make an estimate, leave *pnRow unchanged and return
** non-zero.
**
@@ -131243,7 +131243,7 @@ static void whereTermPrint(WhereTerm *pTerm, int iTerm){
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left={%d:%d}",
pTerm->leftCursor, pTerm->u.leftColumn);
}else if( (pTerm->eOperator & WO_OR)!=0 && pTerm->u.pOrInfo!=0 ){
- sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%lld",
+ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"indexable=0x%lld",
pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable);
}else{
sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(zLeft),zLeft,"left=%d", pTerm->leftCursor);
@@ -131440,7 +131440,7 @@ static void whereInfoFree(sqlite3 *db, WhereInfo *pWInfo){
** by Y.
**
** If X is a proper subset of Y then Y is a better choice and ought
-** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost
+** to have a lower cost. This routine returns TRUE when that cost
** relationship is inverted and needs to be adjusted. The third rule
** was added because if X uses skip-scan less than Y it still might
** deserve a lower cost even if it is a proper subset of Y.
@@ -131488,7 +131488,7 @@ static void whereLoopAdjustCost(const WhereLoop *p, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
if( p->iTab!=pTemplate->iTab ) continue;
if( (p->wsFlags & WHERE_INDEXED)==0 ) continue;
if( whereLoopCheaperProperSubset(p, pTemplate) ){
- /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
+ /* Adjust pTemplate cost downward so that it is cheaper than its
** subset p. */
WHERETRACE(0x80,("subset cost adjustment %d,%d to %d,%d\n",
pTemplate->rRun, pTemplate->nOut, p->rRun, p->nOut-1));
@@ -131533,7 +131533,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
/* In the current implementation, the rSetup value is either zero
** or the cost of building an automatic index (NlogN) and the NlogN
** is the same for compatible WhereLoops. */
- assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
+ assert( p->rSetup==0 || pTemplate->rSetup==0
|| p->rSetup==pTemplate->rSetup );
/* whereLoopAddBtree() always generates and inserts the automatic index
@@ -131598,7 +131598,7 @@ static WhereLoop **whereLoopFindLesser(
**
** When accumulating multiple loops (when pBuilder->pOrSet is NULL) we
** still might overwrite similar loops with the new template if the
-** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following
+** new template is better. Loops may be overwritten if the following
** conditions are met:
**
** (1) They have the same iTab.
@@ -131647,7 +131647,7 @@ static int whereLoopInsert(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder, WhereLoop *pTemplate){
whereLoopPrint(pTemplate, pBuilder->pWC);
}
#endif
- return SQLITE_OK;
+ return SQLITE_OK;
}else{
p = *ppPrev;
}
@@ -131778,7 +131778,7 @@ static void whereLoopOutputAdjust(
if( pLoop->nOut > nRow-iReduce ) pLoop->nOut = nRow - iReduce;
}
-/*
+/*
** Term pTerm is a vector range comparison operation. The first comparison
** in the vector can be optimized using column nEq of the index. This
** function returns the total number of vector elements that can be used
@@ -131807,7 +131807,7 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
nCmp = MIN(nCmp, (pIdx->nColumn - nEq));
for(i=1; iop!=TK_COLUMN
- || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
- || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
+ if( pLhs->op!=TK_COLUMN
+ || pLhs->iTable!=iCur
+ || pLhs->iColumn!=pIdx->aiColumn[i+nEq]
|| pIdx->aSortOrder[i+nEq]!=pIdx->aSortOrder[nEq]
){
break;
@@ -131855,12 +131855,12 @@ static int whereRangeVectorLen(
#endif
/*
-** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
+** We have so far matched pBuilder->pNew->u.btree.nEq terms of the
** index pIndex. Try to match one more.
**
-** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
-** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
-** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
+** When this function is called, pBuilder->pNew->nOut contains the
+** number of rows expected to be visited by filtering using the nEq
+** terms only. If it is modified, this value is restored before this
** function returns.
**
** If pProbe->tnum==0, that means pIndex is a fake index used for the
@@ -131963,9 +131963,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
pNew->prereq = (saved_prereq | pTerm->prereqRight) & ~pNew->maskSelf;
assert( nInMul==0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
- || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_NULL)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_COLUMN_IN)!=0
+ || (pNew->wsFlags & WHERE_SKIPSCAN)!=0
);
if( eOp & WO_IN ){
@@ -131994,7 +131994,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
int iCol = pProbe->aiColumn[saved_nEq];
pNew->wsFlags |= WHERE_COLUMN_EQ;
assert( saved_nEq==pNew->u.btree.nEq );
- if( iCol==XN_ROWID
+ if( iCol==XN_ROWID
|| (iCol>0 && nInMul==0 && saved_nEq==pProbe->nKeyCol-1)
){
if( iCol>=0 && pProbe->uniqNotNull==0 ){
@@ -132041,7 +132041,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
/* At this point pNew->nOut is set to the number of rows expected to
** be visited by the index scan before considering term pTerm, or the
- ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
+ ** values of nIn and nInMul. In other words, assuming that all
** "x IN(...)" terms are replaced with "x = ?". This block updates
** the value of pNew->nOut to account for pTerm (but not nIn/nInMul). */
assert( pNew->nOut==saved_nOut );
@@ -132062,8 +132062,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
}else{
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_STAT3_OR_STAT4
tRowcnt nOut = 0;
- if( nInMul==0
- && pProbe->nSample
+ if( nInMul==0
+ && pProbe->nSample
&& pNew->u.btree.nEq<=pProbe->nSampleCol
&& ((eOp & WO_IN)==0 || !ExprHasProperty(pTerm->pExpr, EP_xIsSelect))
){
@@ -132089,8 +132089,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
{
pNew->nOut += (pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq] - pProbe->aiRowLogEst[nEq-1]);
if( eOp & WO_ISNULL ){
- /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
- ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
+ /* TUNING: If there is no likelihood() value, assume that a
+ ** "col IS NULL" expression matches twice as many rows
** as (col=?). */
pNew->nOut += 10;
}
@@ -132142,12 +132142,12 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtreeIndex(
/* Consider using a skip-scan if there are no WHERE clause constraints
** available for the left-most terms of the index, and if the average
- ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
+ ** number of repeats in the left-most terms is at least 18.
**
** The magic number 18 is selected on the basis that scanning 17 rows
** is almost always quicker than an index seek (even though if the index
** contains fewer than 2^17 rows we assume otherwise in other parts of
- ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
+ ** the code). And, even if it is not, it should not be too much slower.
** On the other hand, the extra seeks could end up being significantly
** more expensive. */
assert( 42==sqlite3LogEst(18) );
@@ -132247,7 +132247,7 @@ static int whereUsablePartialIndex(int iTab, WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pWhere){
}
for(i=0, pTerm=pWC->a; inTerm; i++, pTerm++){
Expr *pExpr = pTerm->pExpr;
- if( sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pExpr, pWhere, iTab)
+ if( sqlite3ExprImpliesExpr(pExpr, pWhere, iTab)
&& (!ExprHasProperty(pExpr, EP_FromJoin) || pExpr->iRightJoinTable==iTab)
){
return 1;
@@ -132270,18 +132270,18 @@ static int whereUsablePartialIndex(int iTab, WhereClause *pWC, Expr *pWhere){
** cost = nRow * K // scan of covering index
** cost = nRow * (K+3.0) // scan of non-covering index
**
-** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
+** where K is a value between 1.1 and 3.0 set based on the relative
** estimated average size of the index and table records.
**
** For an index scan, where nVisit is the number of index rows visited
-** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
+** by the scan, and nSeek is the number of seek operations required on
** the index b-tree:
**
** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + K * nVisit) // covering index
** cost = nSeek * (log(nRow) + (K+3.0) * nVisit) // non-covering index
**
-** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
-** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
+** Normally, nSeek is 1. nSeek values greater than 1 come about if the
+** WHERE clause includes "x IN (....)" terms used in place of "x=?". Or when
** implicit "x IN (SELECT x FROM tbl)" terms are added for skip-scans.
**
** The estimated values (nRow, nVisit, nSeek) often contain a large amount
@@ -132311,7 +132311,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
LogEst rLogSize; /* Logarithm of the number of rows in the table */
WhereClause *pWC; /* The parsed WHERE clause */
Table *pTab; /* Table being queried */
-
+
pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
pTabList = pWInfo->pTabList;
@@ -132489,7 +132489,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddBtree(
if( pTerm->eOperator & (WO_EQ|WO_IS) ) nLookup -= 19;
}
}
-
+
pNew->rRun = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pNew->rRun, nLookup);
}
ApplyCostMultiplier(pNew->rRun, pTab->costMult);
@@ -132560,13 +132560,13 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
*pbIn = 0;
pNew->prereq = mPrereq;
- /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
+ /* Set the usable flag on the subset of constraints identified by
** arguments mUsable and mExclude. */
pIdxCons = *(struct sqlite3_index_constraint**)&pIdxInfo->aConstraint;
for(i=0; ia[pIdxCons->iTermOffset];
pIdxCons->usable = 0;
- if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
+ if( (pTerm->prereqRight & mUsable)==pTerm->prereqRight
&& (pTerm->eOperator & mExclude)==0
){
pIdxCons->usable = 1;
@@ -132674,8 +132674,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
** entries that occur before the virtual table in the FROM clause and are
** separated from it by at least one LEFT or CROSS JOIN. Similarly, the
** mUnusable mask contains all FROM clause entries that occur after the
-** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
-** CROSS JOIN.
+** virtual table and are separated from it by at least one LEFT or
+** CROSS JOIN.
**
** For example, if the query were:
**
@@ -132683,9 +132683,9 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtualOne(
**
** then mPrereq corresponds to (t1, t2) and mUnusable to (t5, t6).
**
-** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
-** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
-** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
+** All the tables in mPrereq must be scanned before the current virtual
+** table. So any terms for which all prerequisites are satisfied by
+** mPrereq may be specified as "usable" in all calls to xBestIndex.
** Conversely, all tables in mUnusable must be scanned after the current
** virtual table, so any terms for which the prerequisites overlap with
** mUnusable should always be configured as "not-usable" for xBestIndex.
@@ -132714,7 +132714,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
pSrc = &pWInfo->pTabList->a[pNew->iTab];
assert( IsVirtual(pSrc->pTab) );
- p = allocateIndexInfo(pParse, pWC, mUnusable, pSrc, pBuilder->pOrderBy,
+ p = allocateIndexInfo(pParse, pWC, mUnusable, pSrc, pBuilder->pOrderBy,
&mNoOmit);
if( p==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM_BKPT;
pNew->rSetup = 0;
@@ -132733,7 +132733,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
/* If the call to xBestIndex() with all terms enabled produced a plan
** that does not require any source tables (IOW: a plan with mBest==0),
- ** then there is no point in making any further calls to xBestIndex()
+ ** then there is no point in making any further calls to xBestIndex()
** since they will all return the same result (if the xBestIndex()
** implementation is sane). */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && (mBest = (pNew->prereq & ~mPrereq))!=0 ){
@@ -132756,7 +132756,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
}
}
- /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
+ /* Call xBestIndex once for each distinct value of (prereqRight & ~mPrereq)
** in the set of terms that apply to the current virtual table. */
while( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int i;
@@ -132812,8 +132812,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddVirtual(
** btrees or virtual tables.
*/
static int whereLoopAddOr(
- WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
- Bitmask mPrereq,
+ WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder,
+ Bitmask mPrereq,
Bitmask mUnusable
){
WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -132826,7 +132826,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
WhereLoopBuilder sSubBuild;
WhereOrSet sSum, sCur;
struct SrcList_item *pItem;
-
+
pWC = pBuilder->pWC;
pWCEnd = pWC->a + pWC->nTerm;
pNew = pBuilder->pNew;
@@ -132836,14 +132836,14 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
for(pTerm=pWC->a; pTermeOperator & WO_OR)!=0
- && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
+ && (pTerm->u.pOrInfo->indexable & pNew->maskSelf)!=0
){
WhereClause * const pOrWC = &pTerm->u.pOrInfo->wc;
WhereTerm * const pOrWCEnd = &pOrWC->a[pOrWC->nTerm];
WhereTerm *pOrTerm;
int once = 1;
int i, j;
-
+
sSubBuild = *pBuilder;
sSubBuild.pOrderBy = 0;
sSubBuild.pOrSet = &sCur;
@@ -132864,7 +132864,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
}
sCur.n = 0;
#ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
- WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
+ WHERETRACE(0x200, ("OR-term %d of %p has %d subterms:\n",
(int)(pOrTerm-pOrWC->a), pTerm, sSubBuild.pWC->nTerm));
if( sqlite3WhereTrace & 0x400 ){
sqlite3WhereClausePrint(sSubBuild.pWC);
@@ -132911,8 +132911,8 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
/* TUNING: Currently sSum.a[i].rRun is set to the sum of the costs
** of all sub-scans required by the OR-scan. However, due to rounding
** errors, it may be that the cost of the OR-scan is equal to its
- ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
- ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
+ ** most expensive sub-scan. Add the smallest possible penalty
+ ** (equivalent to multiplying the cost by 1.07) to ensure that
** this does not happen. Otherwise, for WHERE clauses such as the
** following where there is an index on "y":
**
@@ -132932,7 +132932,7 @@ static int whereLoopAddOr(
}
/*
-** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
+** Add all WhereLoop objects for all tables
*/
static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
WhereInfo *pWInfo = pBuilder->pWInfo;
@@ -132989,17 +132989,17 @@ static int whereLoopAddAll(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
** Examine a WherePath (with the addition of the extra WhereLoop of the 5th
** parameters) to see if it outputs rows in the requested ORDER BY
** (or GROUP BY) without requiring a separate sort operation. Return N:
-**
+**
** N>0: N terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
** N==0: No terms of the ORDER BY clause are satisfied
-** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.
+** N<0: Unknown yet how many terms of ORDER BY might be satisfied.
**
** Note that processing for WHERE_GROUPBY and WHERE_DISTINCTBY is not as
** strict. With GROUP BY and DISTINCT the only requirement is that
** equivalent rows appear immediately adjacent to one another. GROUP BY
** and DISTINCT do not require rows to appear in any particular order as long
** as equivalent rows are grouped together. Thus for GROUP BY and DISTINCT
-** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the
+** the pOrderBy terms can be matched in any order. With ORDER BY, the
** pOrderBy terms must be matched in strict left-to-right order.
*/
static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
@@ -133049,7 +133049,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
** row of the WhereLoop. Every one-row WhereLoop is automatically
** order-distinct. A WhereLoop that has no columns in the ORDER BY clause
** is not order-distinct. To be order-distinct is not quite the same as being
- ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
+ ** UNIQUE since a UNIQUE column or index can have multiple rows that
** are NULL and NULL values are equivalent for the purpose of order-distinct.
** To be order-distinct, the columns must be UNIQUE and NOT NULL.
**
@@ -133098,7 +133098,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
~ready, eqOpMask, 0);
if( pTerm==0 ) continue;
if( pTerm->eOperator==WO_IN ){
- /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
+ /* IN terms are only valid for sorting in the ORDER BY LIMIT
** optimization, and then only if they are actually used
** by the query plan */
assert( wctrlFlags & WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT );
@@ -133143,16 +133143,16 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
for(j=0; j=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
+ assert( j>=pLoop->u.btree.nEq
|| (pLoop->aLTerm[j]==0)==(jnSkip)
);
if( ju.btree.nEq && j>=pLoop->nSkip ){
u16 eOp = pLoop->aLTerm[j]->eOperator;
/* Skip over == and IS and ISNULL terms. (Also skip IN terms when
- ** doing WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT processing).
+ ** doing WHERE_ORDERBY_LIMIT processing).
**
- ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
+ ** If the current term is a column of an ((?,?) IN (SELECT...))
** expression for which the SELECT returns more than one column,
** check that it is the only column used by this loop. Otherwise,
** if it is one of two or more, none of the columns can be
@@ -133162,7 +133162,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
testcase( isOrderDistinct );
isOrderDistinct = 0;
}
- continue;
+ continue;
}else if( ALWAYS(eOp & WO_IN) ){
/* ALWAYS() justification: eOp is an equality operator due to the
** ju.btree.nEq constraint above. Any equality other
@@ -133203,7 +133203,7 @@ static i8 wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(
}
/* Find the ORDER BY term that corresponds to the j-th column
- ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
+ ** of the index and mark that ORDER BY term off
*/
isMatch = 0;
for(i=0; bOnce && i0 ? -1 : nOrderBy;
}
@@ -133488,7 +133488,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
assert( 10==sqlite3LogEst(2) );
continue;
}
- /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
+ /* At this point, pWLoop is a candidate to be the next loop.
** Compute its cost */
rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(pWLoop->rSetup,pWLoop->rRun + pFrom->nRow);
rUnsorted = sqlite3LogEstAdd(rUnsorted, pFrom->rUnsorted);
@@ -133511,7 +133511,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
WHERETRACE(0x002,
("---- sort cost=%-3d (%d/%d) increases cost %3d to %-3d\n",
- aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
+ aSortCost[isOrdered], (nOrderBy-isOrdered), nOrderBy,
rUnsorted, rCost));
}else{
rCost = rUnsorted;
@@ -133620,8 +133620,8 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
mxCost = aTo[0].rCost;
mxUnsorted = aTo[0].nRow;
for(jj=1, pTo=&aTo[1]; jjrCost>mxCost
- || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
+ if( pTo->rCost>mxCost
+ || (pTo->rCost==mxCost && pTo->rUnsorted>mxUnsorted)
){
mxCost = pTo->rCost;
mxUnsorted = pTo->rUnsorted;
@@ -133660,7 +133660,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
sqlite3DbFree(db, pSpace);
return SQLITE_ERROR;
}
-
+
/* Find the lowest cost path. pFrom will be left pointing to that path */
pFrom = aFrom;
for(ii=1; iinOBSat = 0;
if( nLoop>0 ){
u32 wsFlags = pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1]->wsFlags;
- if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
+ if( (wsFlags & WHERE_ONEROW)==0
&& (wsFlags&(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN))!=(WHERE_IPK|WHERE_COLUMN_IN)
){
Bitmask m = 0;
@@ -133718,7 +133718,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
&& pWInfo->nOBSat==pWInfo->pOrderBy->nExpr && nLoop>0
){
Bitmask revMask = 0;
- int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
+ int nOrder = wherePathSatisfiesOrderBy(pWInfo, pWInfo->pOrderBy,
pFrom, 0, nLoop-1, pFrom->aLoop[nLoop-1], &revMask
);
assert( pWInfo->sorted==0 );
@@ -133745,7 +133745,7 @@ static int wherePathSolver(WhereInfo *pWInfo, LogEst nRowEst){
** times for the common case.
**
** Return non-zero on success, if this query can be handled by this
-** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the
+** no-frills query planner. Return zero if this query needs the
** general-purpose query planner.
*/
static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
@@ -133785,8 +133785,8 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
int opMask;
assert( pLoop->aLTermSpace==pLoop->aLTerm );
if( !IsUniqueIndex(pIdx)
- || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
- || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
+ || pIdx->pPartIdxWhere!=0
+ || pIdx->nKeyCol>ArraySize(pLoop->aLTermSpace)
) continue;
opMask = pIdx->uniqNotNull ? (WO_EQ|WO_IS) : WO_EQ;
for(j=0; jnKeyCol; j++){
@@ -133906,7 +133906,7 @@ static int whereShortCut(WhereLoopBuilder *pBuilder){
** if there is one. If there is no ORDER BY clause or if this routine
** is called from an UPDATE or DELETE statement, then pOrderBy is NULL.
**
-** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If
+** The iIdxCur parameter is the cursor number of an index. If
** WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE is set, iIdxCur is the cursor number of an index
** to use for OR clause processing. The WHERE clause should use this
** specific cursor. If WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED is set, then iIdxCur is
@@ -133939,8 +133939,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
u8 bFordelete = 0; /* OPFLAG_FORDELETE or zero, as appropriate */
assert( (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_MULTIROW)==0 || (
- (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
- && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
+ (wctrlFlags & WHERE_ONEPASS_DESIRED)!=0
+ && (wctrlFlags & WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE)==0
));
/* Only one of WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE or WHERE_USE_LIMIT */
@@ -133963,7 +133963,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
}
/* The number of tables in the FROM clause is limited by the number of
- ** bits in a Bitmask
+ ** bits in a Bitmask
*/
testcase( pTabList->nSrc==BMS );
if( pTabList->nSrc>BMS ){
@@ -133971,7 +133971,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
return 0;
}
- /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
+ /* This function normally generates a nested loop for all tables in
** pTabList. But if the WHERE_OR_SUBCLAUSE flag is set, then we should
** only generate code for the first table in pTabList and assume that
** any cursors associated with subsequent tables are uninitialized.
@@ -134002,7 +134002,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
pWInfo->wctrlFlags = wctrlFlags;
pWInfo->iLimit = iAuxArg;
pWInfo->savedNQueryLoop = pParse->nQueryLoop;
- memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
+ memset(&pWInfo->nOBSat, 0,
offsetof(WhereInfo,sWC) - offsetof(WhereInfo,nOBSat));
memset(&pWInfo->a[0], 0, sizeof(WhereLoop)+nTabList*sizeof(WhereLevel));
assert( pWInfo->eOnePass==ONEPASS_OFF ); /* ONEPASS defaults to OFF */
@@ -134022,7 +134022,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
initMaskSet(pMaskSet);
sqlite3WhereClauseInit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWInfo);
sqlite3WhereSplit(&pWInfo->sWC, pWhere, TK_AND);
-
+
/* Special case: a WHERE clause that is constant. Evaluate the
** expression and either jump over all of the code or fall thru.
*/
@@ -134100,7 +134100,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
if( nTabList!=1 || whereShortCut(&sWLB)==0 ){
rc = whereLoopAddAll(&sWLB);
if( rc ) goto whereBeginError;
-
+
#ifdef WHERETRACE_ENABLED
if( sqlite3WhereTrace ){ /* Display all of the WhereLoop objects */
WhereLoop *p;
@@ -134113,7 +134113,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE WhereInfo *sqlite3WhereBegin(
}
}
#endif
-
+
wherePathSolver(pWInfo, 0);
if( db->mallocFailed ) goto whereBeginError;
if( pWInfo->pOrderBy ){
@@ -134373,7 +134373,7 @@ whereBeginError:
}
/*
-** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
+** Generate the end of the WHERE loop. See comments on
** sqlite3WhereBegin() for additional information.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
@@ -134438,8 +134438,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
if( (ws & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 ){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pTabList->a[i].iCursor);
}
- if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
- || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCovidx)
+ if( (ws & WHERE_INDEXED)
+ || ((ws & WHERE_MULTI_OR) && pLevel->u.pCovidx)
){
sqlite3VdbeAddOp1(v, OP_NullRow, pLevel->iIdxCur);
}
@@ -134483,7 +134483,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
** from the index instead of from the table where possible. In some cases
** this optimization prevents the table from ever being read, which can
** yield a significant performance boost.
- **
+ **
** Calls to the code generator in between sqlite3WhereBegin and
** sqlite3WhereEnd will have created code that references the table
** directly. This loop scans all that code looking for opcodes
@@ -134517,7 +134517,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3WhereEnd(WhereInfo *pWInfo){
pOp->p2 = x;
pOp->p1 = pLevel->iIdxCur;
}
- assert( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || x>=0
+ assert( (pLoop->wsFlags & WHERE_IDX_ONLY)==0 || x>=0
|| pWInfo->eOnePass );
}else if( pOp->opcode==OP_Rowid ){
pOp->p1 = pLevel->iIdxCur;
@@ -134644,7 +134644,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
pLoop->pNext = pNext;
pLoop->selFlags |= SF_Compound;
}
- if( (p->selFlags & SF_MultiValue)==0 &&
+ if( (p->selFlags & SF_MultiValue)==0 &&
(mxSelect = pParse->db->aLimit[SQLITE_LIMIT_COMPOUND_SELECT])>0 &&
cnt>mxSelect
){
@@ -134682,7 +134682,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
}
#if SQLITE_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH>0
p->nHeight = 1;
-#endif
+#endif
}
pOut->pExpr = p;
pOut->zStart = t.z;
@@ -134721,7 +134721,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
){
pOperand->pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, op, pOperand->pExpr, 0);
pOperand->zEnd = &pPostOp->z[pPostOp->n];
- }
+ }
/* A routine to convert a binary TK_IS or TK_ISNOT expression into a
** unary TK_ISNULL or TK_NOTNULL expression. */
@@ -134800,7 +134800,7 @@ static void disableLookaside(Parse *pParse){
** the minor type might be the name of the identifier.
** Each non-terminal can have a different minor type.
** Terminal symbols all have the same minor type, though.
-** This macros defines the minor type for terminal
+** This macros defines the minor type for terminal
** symbols.
** YYMINORTYPE is the data type used for all minor types.
** This is typically a union of many types, one of
@@ -134885,7 +134885,7 @@ typedef union {
/* Next are the tables used to determine what action to take based on the
** current state and lookahead token. These tables are used to implement
** functions that take a state number and lookahead value and return an
-** action integer.
+** action integer.
**
** Suppose the action integer is N. Then the action is determined as
** follows
@@ -135398,9 +135398,9 @@ static const YYACTIONTYPE yy_default[] = {
};
/********** End of lemon-generated parsing tables *****************************/
-/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.
+/* The next table maps tokens (terminal symbols) into fallback tokens.
** If a construct like the following:
-**
+**
** %fallback ID X Y Z.
**
** appears in the grammar, then ID becomes a fallback token for X, Y,
@@ -135566,10 +135566,10 @@ static char *yyTracePrompt = 0;
#endif /* NDEBUG */
#ifndef NDEBUG
-/*
+/*
** Turn parser tracing on by giving a stream to which to write the trace
** and a prompt to preface each trace message. Tracing is turned off
-** by making either argument NULL
+** by making either argument NULL
**
** Inputs:
**
@@ -135594,7 +135594,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserTrace(FILE *TraceFILE, char *zTracePrompt){
#ifndef NDEBUG
/* For tracing shifts, the names of all terminals and nonterminals
** are required. The following table supplies these names */
-static const char *const yyTokenName[] = {
+static const char *const yyTokenName[] = {
"$", "SEMI", "EXPLAIN", "QUERY",
"PLAN", "BEGIN", "TRANSACTION", "DEFERRED",
"IMMEDIATE", "EXCLUSIVE", "COMMIT", "END",
@@ -136030,7 +136030,7 @@ static int yyGrowStack(yyParser *p){
#endif
p->yystksz = newSize;
}
- return pNew==0;
+ return pNew==0;
}
#endif
@@ -136068,7 +136068,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserInit(void *yypParser){
}
#ifndef sqlite3Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/*
+/*
** This function allocates a new parser.
** The only argument is a pointer to a function which works like
** malloc.
@@ -136092,7 +136092,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void *sqlite3ParserAlloc(void *(*mallocProc)(YYMALLOCARGTYPE)){
/* The following function deletes the "minor type" or semantic value
** associated with a symbol. The symbol can be either a terminal
** or nonterminal. "yymajor" is the symbol code, and "yypminor" is
-** a pointer to the value to be deleted. The code used to do the
+** a pointer to the value to be deleted. The code used to do the
** deletions is derived from the %destructor and/or %token_destructor
** directives of the input grammar.
*/
@@ -136106,7 +136106,7 @@ static void yy_destructor(
/* Here is inserted the actions which take place when a
** terminal or non-terminal is destroyed. This can happen
** when the symbol is popped from the stack during a
- ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
+ ** reduce or during error processing or when a parser is
** being destroyed before it is finished parsing.
**
** Note: during a reduce, the only symbols destroyed are those
@@ -136225,7 +136225,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ParserFinalize(void *p){
}
#ifndef sqlite3Parser_ENGINEALWAYSONSTACK
-/*
+/*
** Deallocate and destroy a parser. Destructors are called for
** all stack elements before shutting the parser down.
**
@@ -136265,7 +136265,7 @@ static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
){
int i;
int stateno = pParser->yytos->stateno;
-
+
if( stateno>=YY_MIN_REDUCE ) return stateno;
assert( stateno <= YY_SHIFT_COUNT );
do{
@@ -136291,7 +136291,7 @@ static unsigned int yy_find_shift_action(
#ifdef YYWILDCARD
{
int j = i - iLookAhead + YYWILDCARD;
- if(
+ if(
#if YY_SHIFT_MIN+YYWILDCARD<0
j>=0 &&
#endif
@@ -136406,7 +136406,7 @@ static void yy_shift(
assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack) );
}
#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
+#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH] ){
yypParser->yytos--;
yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
@@ -136806,7 +136806,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
assert( yypParser->yyhwm == (int)(yypParser->yytos - yypParser->yystack));
}
#endif
-#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
+#if YYSTACKDEPTH>0
if( yypParser->yytos>=&yypParser->yystack[YYSTACKDEPTH-1] ){
yyStackOverflow(yypParser);
return;
@@ -137384,7 +137384,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
{
sqlite3WithPush(pParse, yymsp[-7].minor.yy285, 1);
sqlite3SrcListIndexedBy(pParse, yymsp[-4].minor.yy185, &yymsp[-3].minor.yy0);
- sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,"set list");
+ sqlite3ExprListCheckLength(pParse,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,"set list");
sqlite3Update(pParse,yymsp[-4].minor.yy185,yymsp[-1].minor.yy148,yymsp[0].minor.yy72,yymsp[-5].minor.yy194);
}
break;
@@ -137631,7 +137631,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
yymsp[-4].minor.yy190.pExpr->x.pList = pList;
}else{
sqlite3ExprListDelete(pParse->db, pList);
- }
+ }
exprNot(pParse, yymsp[-3].minor.yy194, &yymsp[-4].minor.yy190);
yymsp[-4].minor.yy190.zEnd = yymsp[0].minor.yy190.zEnd;
}
@@ -137763,7 +137763,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
break;
case 208: /* cmd ::= createkw uniqueflag INDEX ifnotexists nm dbnm ON nm LP sortlist RP where_opt */
{
- sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0,
+ sqlite3CreateIndex(pParse, &yymsp[-7].minor.yy0, &yymsp[-6].minor.yy0,
sqlite3SrcListAppend(pParse->db,0,&yymsp[-4].minor.yy0,0), yymsp[-2].minor.yy148, yymsp[-10].minor.yy194,
&yymsp[-11].minor.yy0, yymsp[0].minor.yy72, SQLITE_SO_ASC, yymsp[-8].minor.yy194, SQLITE_IDXTYPE_APPDEF);
}
@@ -137858,7 +137858,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
}
break;
case 239: /* trigger_cmd_list ::= trigger_cmd SEMI */
-{
+{
assert( yymsp[-1].minor.yy145!=0 );
yymsp[-1].minor.yy145->pLast = yymsp[-1].minor.yy145;
}
@@ -137866,7 +137866,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
case 240: /* trnm ::= nm DOT nm */
{
yymsp[-2].minor.yy0 = yymsp[0].minor.yy0;
- sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
+ sqlite3ErrorMsg(pParse,
"qualified table names are not allowed on INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE "
"statements within triggers");
}
@@ -137900,7 +137900,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
case 247: /* expr ::= RAISE LP IGNORE RP */
{
spanSet(&yymsp[-3].minor.yy190,&yymsp[-3].minor.yy0,&yymsp[0].minor.yy0); /*A-overwrites-X*/
- yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0);
+ yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3PExpr(pParse, TK_RAISE, 0, 0);
if( yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr ){
yymsp[-3].minor.yy190.pExpr->affinity = OE_Ignore;
}
@@ -137909,7 +137909,7 @@ static void yy_reduce(
case 248: /* expr ::= RAISE LP raisetype COMMA nm RP */
{
spanSet(&yymsp[-5].minor.yy190,&yymsp[-5].minor.yy0,&yymsp[0].minor.yy0); /*A-overwrites-X*/
- yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_RAISE, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0, 1);
+ yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr = sqlite3ExprAlloc(pParse->db, TK_RAISE, &yymsp[-1].minor.yy0, 1);
if( yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr ) {
yymsp[-5].minor.yy190.pExpr->affinity = (char)yymsp[-3].minor.yy194;
}
@@ -138219,7 +138219,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser(
#ifdef YYERRORSYMBOL
/* A syntax error has occurred.
** The response to an error depends upon whether or not the
- ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
+ ** grammar defines an error token "ERROR".
**
** This is what we do if the grammar does define ERROR:
**
@@ -138282,7 +138282,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Parser(
yy_syntax_error(yypParser,yymajor, yyminor);
yy_destructor(yypParser,(YYCODETYPE)yymajor,&yyminorunion);
yymajor = YYNOCODE;
-
+
#else /* YYERRORSYMBOL is not defined */
/* This is what we do if the grammar does not define ERROR:
**
@@ -138428,7 +138428,7 @@ static const unsigned char aiClass[] = {
** lower-case ASCII equivalent. On ASCII machines, this is just
** an upper-to-lower case map. On EBCDIC machines we also need
** to adjust the encoding. The mapping is only valid for alphabetics
-** which are the only characters for which this feature is used.
+** which are the only characters for which this feature is used.
**
** Used by keywordhash.h
*/
@@ -138460,7 +138460,7 @@ const unsigned char ebcdicToAscii[] = {
/*
** The sqlite3KeywordCode function looks up an identifier to determine if
-** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is
+** it is a keyword. If it is a keyword, the token code of that keyword is
** returned. If the input is not a keyword, TK_ID is returned.
**
** The implementation of this routine was generated by a program,
@@ -138766,14 +138766,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3KeywordCode(const unsigned char *z, int n){
** IdChar(X) will be true. Otherwise it is false.
**
** For ASCII, any character with the high-order bit set is
-** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters,
+** allowed in an identifier. For 7-bit characters,
** sqlite3IsIdChar[X] must be 1.
**
** For EBCDIC, the rules are more complex but have the same
** end result.
**
** Ticket #1066. the SQL standard does not allow '$' in the
-** middle of identifiers. But many SQL implementations do.
+** middle of identifiers. But many SQL implementations do.
** SQLite will allow '$' in identifiers for compatibility.
** But the feature is undocumented.
*/
@@ -138806,7 +138806,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IsIdChar(u8 c){ return IdChar(c); }
/*
-** Return the length (in bytes) of the token that begins at z[0].
+** Return the length (in bytes) of the token that begins at z[0].
** Store the token type in *tokenType before returning.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
@@ -138984,7 +138984,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
*tokenType = TK_FLOAT;
}
if( (z[i]=='e' || z[i]=='E') &&
- ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1])
+ ( sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+1])
|| ((z[i+1]=='+' || z[i+1]=='-') && sqlite3Isdigit(z[i+2]))
)
){
@@ -139085,7 +139085,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3GetToken(const unsigned char *z, int *tokenType){
/*
** Run the parser on the given SQL string. The parser structure is
** passed in. An SQLITE_ status code is returned. If an error occurs
-** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into
+** then an and attempt is made to write an error message into
** memory obtained from sqlite3_malloc() and to make *pzErrMsg point to that
** error message.
*/
@@ -139206,7 +139206,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RunParser(Parse *pParse, const char *zSql, char **pzEr
#endif
if( !IN_DECLARE_VTAB ){
- /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table
+ /* If the pParse->declareVtab flag is set, do not delete any table
** structure built up in pParse->pNewTable. The calling code (see vtab.c)
** will take responsibility for freeing the Table structure.
*/
@@ -139300,7 +139300,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE const char sqlite3IsEbcdicIdChar[];
** (2) NORMAL We are in the middle of statement which ends with a single
** semicolon.
**
-** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of
+** (3) EXPLAIN The keyword EXPLAIN has been seen at the beginning of
** a statement.
**
** (4) CREATE The keyword CREATE has been seen at the beginning of a
@@ -139652,19 +139652,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts5Init(sqlite3*);
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
/* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-46656-45156 The sqlite3_version[] string constant
-** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro.
+** contains the text of SQLITE_VERSION macro.
*/
SQLITE_API const char sqlite3_version[] = SQLITE_VERSION;
#endif
/* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-53536-42575 The sqlite3_libversion() function returns
-** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
+** a pointer to the to the sqlite3_version[] string constant.
*/
SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_libversion(void){ return sqlite3_version; }
/* IMPLEMENTATION-OF: R-63124-39300 The sqlite3_sourceid() function returns a
** pointer to a string constant whose value is the same as the
-** SQLITE_SOURCE_ID C preprocessor macro.
+** SQLITE_SOURCE_ID C preprocessor macro.
*/
SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_sourceid(void){ return SQLITE_SOURCE_ID; }
@@ -139720,13 +139720,13 @@ SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_temp_directory = 0;
SQLITE_API char *sqlite3_data_directory = 0;
/*
-** Initialize SQLite.
+** Initialize SQLite.
**
** This routine must be called to initialize the memory allocation,
** VFS, and mutex subsystems prior to doing any serious work with
** SQLite. But as long as you do not compile with SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINIT
** this routine will be called automatically by key routines such as
-** sqlite3_open().
+** sqlite3_open().
**
** This routine is a no-op except on its very first call for the process,
** or for the first call after a call to sqlite3_shutdown.
@@ -139776,7 +139776,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){
*/
if( sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit ) return SQLITE_OK;
- /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
+ /* Make sure the mutex subsystem is initialized. If unable to
** initialize the mutex subsystem, return early with the error.
** If the system is so sick that we are unable to allocate a mutex,
** there is not much SQLite is going to be able to do.
@@ -139853,7 +139853,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_initialize(void){
rc = sqlite3OsInit();
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
+ sqlite3PCacheBufferSetup( sqlite3GlobalConfig.pPage,
sqlite3GlobalConfig.szPage, sqlite3GlobalConfig.nPage);
sqlite3GlobalConfig.isInit = 1;
#ifdef SQLITE_EXTRA_INIT
@@ -140076,7 +140076,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
** a single parameter which is a pointer to an integer and writes into
** that integer the number of extra bytes per page required for each page
** in SQLITE_CONFIG_PAGECACHE. */
- *va_arg(ap, int*) =
+ *va_arg(ap, int*) =
sqlite3HeaderSizeBtree() +
sqlite3HeaderSizePcache() +
sqlite3HeaderSizePcache1();
@@ -140163,7 +140163,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
sqlite3GlobalConfig.nLookaside = va_arg(ap, int);
break;
}
-
+
/* Record a pointer to the logger function and its first argument.
** The default is NULL. Logging is disabled if the function pointer is
** NULL.
@@ -140267,7 +140267,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_config(int op, ...){
/*
** Set up the lookaside buffers for a database connection.
-** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
+** Return SQLITE_OK on success.
** If lookaside is already active, return SQLITE_BUSY.
**
** The sz parameter is the number of bytes in each lookaside slot.
@@ -140283,7 +140283,7 @@ static int setupLookaside(sqlite3 *db, void *pBuf, int sz, int cnt){
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
/* Free any existing lookaside buffer for this handle before
- ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
+ ** allocating a new one so we don't have to have space for
** both at the same time.
*/
if( db->lookaside.bMalloced ){
@@ -140504,7 +140504,7 @@ static int binCollFunc(
}
/*
-** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
+** Another built-in collating sequence: NOCASE.
**
** This collating sequence is intended to be used for "case independent
** comparison". SQLite's knowledge of upper and lower case equivalents
@@ -140631,7 +140631,7 @@ static void disconnectAllVtab(sqlite3 *db){
/*
** Return TRUE if database connection db has unfinalized prepared
-** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.
+** statements or unfinished sqlite3_backup objects.
*/
static int connectionIsBusy(sqlite3 *db){
int j;
@@ -140820,7 +140820,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3LeaveMutexAndCloseZombie(sqlite3 *db){
/* The temp-database schema is allocated differently from the other schema
** objects (using sqliteMalloc() directly, instead of sqlite3BtreeSchema()).
** So it needs to be freed here. Todo: Why not roll the temp schema into
- ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
+ ** the same sqliteMalloc() as the one that allocates the database
** structure?
*/
sqlite3DbFree(db, db->aDb[1].pSchema);
@@ -140848,7 +140848,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3RollbackAll(sqlite3 *db, int tripCode){
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
sqlite3BeginBenignMalloc();
- /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
+ /* Obtain all b-tree mutexes before making any calls to BtreeRollback().
** This is important in case the transaction being rolled back has
** modified the database schema. If the b-tree mutexes are not taken
** here, then another shared-cache connection might sneak in between
@@ -141107,7 +141107,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3InvokeBusyHandler(BusyHandler *p){
}else{
p->nBusy++;
}
- return rc;
+ return rc;
}
/*
@@ -141138,9 +141138,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_busy_handler(
** be invoked every nOps opcodes.
*/
SQLITE_API void sqlite3_progress_handler(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
int nOps,
- int (*xProgress)(void*),
+ int (*xProgress)(void*),
void *pArg
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -141199,7 +141199,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3_interrupt(sqlite3 *db){
** This function is exactly the same as sqlite3_create_function(), except
** that it is designed to be called by internal code. The difference is
** that if a malloc() fails in sqlite3_create_function(), an error code
-** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
+** is returned and the mallocFailed flag cleared.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
sqlite3 *db,
@@ -141218,7 +141218,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
if( zFunctionName==0 ||
- (xSFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) ||
+ (xSFunc && (xFinal || xStep)) ||
(!xSFunc && (xFinal && !xStep)) ||
(!xSFunc && (!xFinal && xStep)) ||
(nArg<-1 || nArg>SQLITE_MAX_FUNCTION_ARG) ||
@@ -141229,7 +141229,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
assert( SQLITE_FUNC_CONSTANT==SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC );
extraFlags = enc & SQLITE_DETERMINISTIC;
enc &= (SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK|SQLITE_ANY);
-
+
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
** to one of SQLITE_UTF16LE or SQLITE_UTF16BE using the
@@ -141256,7 +141256,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
#else
enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
#endif
-
+
/* Check if an existing function is being overridden or deleted. If so,
** and there are active VMs, then return SQLITE_BUSY. If a function
** is being overridden/deleted but there are no active VMs, allow the
@@ -141265,7 +141265,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3CreateFunc(
p = sqlite3FindFunction(db, zFunctionName, nArg, (u8)enc, 0);
if( p && (p->funcFlags & SQLITE_FUNC_ENCMASK)==enc && p->nArg==nArg ){
if( db->nVdbeActive ){
- sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify user-function due to active statements");
assert( !db->mallocFailed );
return SQLITE_BUSY;
@@ -141390,7 +141390,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_function16(
**
** If the function already exists as a regular global function, then
** this routine is a no-op. If the function does not exist, then create
-** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
+** a new one that always throws a run-time error.
**
** When virtual tables intend to provide an overloaded function, they
** should call this routine to make sure the global function exists.
@@ -141422,7 +141422,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_overload_function(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRACE
/*
** Register a trace function. The pArg from the previously registered trace
-** is returned.
+** is returned.
**
** A NULL trace function means that no tracing is executes. A non-NULL
** trace is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the start of each
@@ -141473,8 +141473,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_trace_v2(
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_DEPRECATED
/*
-** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
-** profile function is returned.
+** Register a profile function. The pArg from the previously registered
+** profile function is returned.
**
** A NULL profile function means that no profiling is executes. A non-NULL
** profile is a pointer to a function that is invoked at the conclusion of
@@ -141606,7 +141606,7 @@ SQLITE_API void *sqlite3_preupdate_hook(
** Invoke sqlite3_wal_checkpoint if the number of frames in the log file
** is greater than sqlite3.pWalArg cast to an integer (the value configured by
** wal_autocheckpoint()).
-*/
+*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3WalDefaultHook(
void *pClientData, /* Argument */
sqlite3 *db, /* Connection */
@@ -141740,7 +141740,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint_v2(
/*
** Checkpoint database zDb. If zDb is NULL, or if the buffer zDb points
-** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
+** to contains a zero-length string, all attached databases are
** checkpointed.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
@@ -141754,9 +141754,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_wal_checkpoint(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDb){
** Run a checkpoint on database iDb. This is a no-op if database iDb is
** not currently open in WAL mode.
**
-** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
-** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
-** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
+** If a transaction is open on the database being checkpointed, this
+** function returns SQLITE_LOCKED and a checkpoint is not attempted. If
+** an error occurs while running the checkpoint, an SQLite error code is
** returned (i.e. SQLITE_IOERR). Otherwise, SQLITE_OK.
**
** The mutex on database handle db should be held by the caller. The mutex
@@ -141867,11 +141867,11 @@ SQLITE_API const void *sqlite3_errmsg16(sqlite3 *db){
'o', 'u', 't', ' ', 'o', 'f', ' ', 'm', 'e', 'm', 'o', 'r', 'y', 0
};
static const u16 misuse[] = {
- 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ',
- 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ',
- 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ',
- 'o', 'u', 't', ' ',
- 'o', 'f', ' ',
+ 'l', 'i', 'b', 'r', 'a', 'r', 'y', ' ',
+ 'r', 'o', 'u', 't', 'i', 'n', 'e', ' ',
+ 'c', 'a', 'l', 'l', 'e', 'd', ' ',
+ 'o', 'u', 't', ' ',
+ 'o', 'f', ' ',
's', 'e', 'q', 'u', 'e', 'n', 'c', 'e', 0
};
@@ -141927,7 +141927,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_extended_errcode(sqlite3 *db){
}
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_system_errno(sqlite3 *db){
return db ? db->iSysErrno : 0;
-}
+}
/*
** Return a string that describes the kind of error specified in the
@@ -141944,7 +141944,7 @@ SQLITE_API const char *sqlite3_errstr(int rc){
*/
static int createCollation(
sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
+ const char *zName,
u8 enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
@@ -141952,7 +141952,7 @@ static int createCollation(
){
CollSeq *pColl;
int enc2;
-
+
assert( sqlite3_mutex_held(db->mutex) );
/* If SQLITE_UTF16 is specified as the encoding type, transform this
@@ -141969,14 +141969,14 @@ static int createCollation(
return SQLITE_MISUSE_BKPT;
}
- /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
+ /* Check if this call is removing or replacing an existing collation
** sequence. If so, and there are active VMs, return busy. If there
** are no active VMs, invalidate any pre-compiled statements.
*/
pColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, (u8)enc2, zName, 0);
if( pColl && pColl->xCmp ){
if( db->nVdbeActive ){
- sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
+ sqlite3ErrorWithMsg(db, SQLITE_BUSY,
"unable to delete/modify collation sequence due to active statements");
return SQLITE_BUSY;
}
@@ -141987,7 +141987,7 @@ static int createCollation(
** then any copies made by synthCollSeq() need to be invalidated.
** Also, collation destructor - CollSeq.xDel() - function may need
** to be called.
- */
+ */
if( (pColl->enc & ~SQLITE_UTF16_ALIGNED)==enc2 ){
CollSeq *aColl = sqlite3HashFind(&db->aCollSeq, zName);
int j;
@@ -142136,17 +142136,17 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_limit(sqlite3 *db, int limitId, int newLimit){
** query parameter. The second argument contains the URI (or non-URI filename)
** itself. When this function is called the *pFlags variable should contain
** the default flags to open the database handle with. The value stored in
-** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
+** *pFlags may be updated before returning if the URI filename contains
** "cache=xxx" or "mode=xxx" query parameters.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. In this case *ppVfs is set to point to
** the VFS that should be used to open the database file. *pzFile is set to
-** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the
+** point to a buffer containing the name of the file to open. It is the
** responsibility of the caller to eventually call sqlite3_free() to release
** this buffer.
**
** If an error occurs, then an SQLite error code is returned and *pzErrMsg
-** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
+** may be set to point to a buffer containing an English language error
** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually release
** this buffer by calling sqlite3_free().
*/
@@ -142154,7 +142154,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
const char *zDefaultVfs, /* VFS to use if no "vfs=xxx" query option */
const char *zUri, /* Nul-terminated URI to parse */
unsigned int *pFlags, /* IN/OUT: SQLITE_OPEN_XXX flags */
- sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */
+ sqlite3_vfs **ppVfs, /* OUT: VFS to use */
char **pzFile, /* OUT: Filename component of URI */
char **pzErrMsg /* OUT: Error message (if rc!=SQLITE_OK) */
){
@@ -142177,7 +142177,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
int iOut = 0; /* Output character index */
u64 nByte = nUri+2; /* Bytes of space to allocate */
- /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
+ /* Make sure the SQLITE_OPEN_URI flag is set to indicate to the VFS xOpen
** method that there may be extra parameters following the file-name. */
flags |= SQLITE_OPEN_URI;
@@ -142192,7 +142192,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
/* The following condition causes URIs with five leading / characters
** like file://///host/path to be converted into UNCs like //host/path.
** The correct URI for that UNC has only two or four leading / characters
- ** file://host/path or file:////host/path. But 5 leading slashes is a
+ ** file://host/path or file:////host/path. But 5 leading slashes is a
** common error, we are told, so we handle it as a special case. */
if( strncmp(zUri+7, "///", 3)==0 ){ iIn++; }
}else if( strncmp(zUri+5, "//localhost/", 12)==0 ){
@@ -142204,7 +142204,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
iIn = 7;
while( zUri[iIn] && zUri[iIn]!='/' ) iIn++;
if( iIn!=7 && (iIn!=16 || memcmp("localhost", &zUri[7], 9)) ){
- *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
+ *pzErrMsg = sqlite3_mprintf("invalid uri authority: %.*s",
iIn-7, &zUri[7]);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
goto parse_uri_out;
@@ -142212,8 +142212,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
}
#endif
- /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
- ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
+ /* Copy the filename and any query parameters into the zFile buffer.
+ ** Decode %HH escape codes along the way.
**
** Within this loop, variable eState may be set to 0, 1 or 2, depending
** on the parsing context. As follows:
@@ -142225,9 +142225,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
eState = 0;
while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#' ){
iIn++;
- if( c=='%'
- && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
- && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
+ if( c=='%'
+ && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn])
+ && sqlite3Isxdigit(zUri[iIn+1])
){
int octet = (sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]) << 4);
octet += sqlite3HexToInt(zUri[iIn++]);
@@ -142239,7 +142239,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
** case we ignore all text in the remainder of the path, name or
** value currently being parsed. So ignore the current character
** and skip to the next "?", "=" or "&", as appropriate. */
- while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
+ while( (c = zUri[iIn])!=0 && c!='#'
&& (eState!=0 || c!='?')
&& (eState!=1 || (c!='=' && c!='&'))
&& (eState!=2 || c!='&')
@@ -142277,7 +142277,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
zFile[iOut++] = '\0';
- /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
+ /* Check if there were any options specified that should be interpreted
** here. Options that are interpreted here include "vfs" and those that
** correspond to flags that may be passed to the sqlite3_open_v2()
** method. */
@@ -142313,7 +142313,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
if( nOpt==4 && memcmp("mode", zOpt, 4)==0 ){
static struct OpenMode aOpenMode[] = {
{ "ro", SQLITE_OPEN_READONLY },
- { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
+ { "rw", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE },
{ "rwc", SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE },
{ "memory", SQLITE_OPEN_MEMORY },
{ 0, 0 }
@@ -142383,7 +142383,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3ParseUri(
/*
** This routine does the work of opening a database on behalf of
-** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
+** sqlite3_open() and sqlite3_open16(). The database filename "zFilename"
** is UTF-8 encoded.
*/
static int openDatabase(
@@ -142407,7 +142407,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
if( rc ) return rc;
#endif
- /* Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.
+ /* Only allow sensible combinations of bits in the flags argument.
** Throw an error if any non-sense combination is used. If we
** do not block illegal combinations here, it could trigger
** assert() statements in deeper layers. Sensible combinations
@@ -142454,11 +142454,11 @@ static int openDatabase(
flags &= ~( SQLITE_OPEN_DELETEONCLOSE |
SQLITE_OPEN_EXCLUSIVE |
SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
- SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
- SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TRANSIENT_DB |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_MAIN_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_TEMP_JOURNAL |
+ SQLITE_OPEN_SUBJOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_MASTER_JOURNAL |
SQLITE_OPEN_NOMUTEX |
SQLITE_OPEN_FULLMUTEX |
@@ -142540,7 +142540,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
goto opendb_out;
}
/* EVIDENCE-OF: R-08308-17224 The default collating function for all
- ** strings is BINARY.
+ ** strings is BINARY.
*/
db->pDfltColl = sqlite3FindCollSeq(db, SQLITE_UTF8, sqlite3StrBINARY, 0);
assert( db->pDfltColl!=0 );
@@ -142572,7 +142572,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
db->aDb[1].pSchema = sqlite3SchemaGet(db, 0);
/* The default safety_level for the main database is FULL; for the temp
- ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.
+ ** database it is OFF. This matches the pager layer defaults.
*/
db->aDb[0].zDbSName = "main";
db->aDb[0].safety_level = SQLITE_DEFAULT_SYNCHRONOUS+1;
@@ -142594,7 +142594,7 @@ static int openDatabase(
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS5
/* Register any built-in FTS5 module before loading the automatic
- ** extensions. This allows automatic extensions to register FTS5
+ ** extensions. This allows automatic extensions to register FTS5
** tokenizers and auxiliary functions. */
if( !db->mallocFailed && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = sqlite3Fts5Init(db);
@@ -142727,8 +142727,8 @@ opendb_out:
** Open a new database handle.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open(
- const char *zFilename,
- sqlite3 **ppDb
+ const char *zFilename,
+ sqlite3 **ppDb
){
return openDatabase(zFilename, ppDb,
SQLITE_OPEN_READWRITE | SQLITE_OPEN_CREATE, 0);
@@ -142747,7 +142747,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open_v2(
** Open a new database handle.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16(
- const void *zFilename,
+ const void *zFilename,
sqlite3 **ppDb
){
char const *zFilename8; /* zFilename encoded in UTF-8 instead of UTF-16 */
@@ -142786,9 +142786,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_open16(
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
@@ -142799,9 +142799,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation(
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
- sqlite3* db,
- const char *zName,
- int enc,
+ sqlite3* db,
+ const char *zName,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*),
void(*xDel)(void*)
@@ -142824,9 +142824,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation_v2(
** Register a new collation sequence with the database handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
- sqlite3* db,
+ sqlite3* db,
const void *zName,
- int enc,
+ int enc,
void* pCtx,
int(*xCompare)(void*,int,const void*,int,const void*)
){
@@ -142854,8 +142854,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_create_collation16(
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const char*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -142875,8 +142875,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed(
** db. Replace any previously installed collation sequence factory.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_collation_needed16(
- sqlite3 *db,
- void *pCollNeededArg,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ void *pCollNeededArg,
void(*xCollNeeded16)(void*,sqlite3*,int eTextRep,const void*)
){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_API_ARMOR
@@ -143040,13 +143040,13 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_table_column_metadata(
/* The following block stores the meta information that will be returned
** to the caller in local variables zDataType, zCollSeq, notnull, primarykey
** and autoinc. At this point there are two possibilities:
- **
- ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
- ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
**
- ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
+ ** 1. The specified column name was rowid", "oid" or "_rowid_"
+ ** and there is no explicitly declared IPK column.
+ **
+ ** 2. The table is not a view and the column name identified an
** explicitly declared column. Copy meta information from *pCol.
- */
+ */
if( pCol ){
zDataType = sqlite3ColumnType(pCol,0);
zCollSeq = pCol->zColl;
@@ -143096,7 +143096,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_sleep(int ms){
pVfs = sqlite3_vfs_find(0);
if( pVfs==0 ) return 0;
- /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
+ /* This function works in milliseconds, but the underlying OsSleep()
** API uses microseconds. Hence the 1000's.
*/
rc = (sqlite3OsSleep(pVfs, 1000*ms)/1000);
@@ -143236,7 +143236,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
/*
** sqlite3_test_control(BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS, xBegin, xEnd)
**
- ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
+ ** Register hooks to call to indicate which malloc() failures
** are benign.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BENIGN_MALLOC_HOOKS: {
@@ -143297,7 +143297,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
** This action provides a run-time test to see how the ALWAYS and
** NEVER macros were defined at compile-time.
**
- ** The return value is ALWAYS(X).
+ ** The return value is ALWAYS(X).
**
** The recommended test is X==2. If the return value is 2, that means
** ALWAYS() and NEVER() are both no-op pass-through macros, which is the
@@ -143334,7 +143334,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
** 10 little-endian, determined at run-time
** 432101 big-endian, determined at compile-time
** 123410 little-endian, determined at compile-time
- */
+ */
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_BYTEORDER: {
rc = SQLITE_BYTEORDER*100 + SQLITE_LITTLEENDIAN*10 + SQLITE_BIGENDIAN;
break;
@@ -143356,7 +143356,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_OPTIMIZATIONS, sqlite3 *db, int N)
**
- ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
+ ** Enable or disable various optimizations for testing purposes. The
** argument N is a bitmask of optimizations to be disabled. For normal
** operation N should be 0. The idea is that a test program (like the
** SQL Logic Test or SLT test module) can run the same SQL multiple times
@@ -143374,7 +143374,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
**
** If zWord is a keyword recognized by the parser, then return the
** number of keywords. Or if zWord is not a keyword, return 0.
- **
+ **
** This test feature is only available in the amalgamation since
** the SQLITE_N_KEYWORD macro is not defined in this file if SQLite
** is built using separate source files.
@@ -143385,12 +143385,12 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
rc = (sqlite3KeywordCode((u8*)zWord, n)!=TK_ID) ? SQLITE_N_KEYWORD : 0;
break;
}
-#endif
+#endif
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_SCRATCHMALLOC, sz, &pNew, pFree);
**
- ** Pass pFree into sqlite3ScratchFree().
- ** If sz>0 then allocate a scratch buffer into pNew.
+ ** Pass pFree into sqlite3ScratchFree().
+ ** If sz>0 then allocate a scratch buffer into pNew.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_SCRATCHMALLOC: {
void *pFree, **ppNew;
@@ -143439,7 +143439,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
/* sqlite3_test_control(SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE, xCallback, ptr);
**
- ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
+ ** Set the VDBE coverage callback function to xCallback with context
** pointer ptr.
*/
case SQLITE_TESTCTRL_VDBE_COVERAGE: {
@@ -143504,7 +143504,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_test_control(int op, ...){
/*
** This is a utility routine, useful to VFS implementations, that checks
-** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
+** to see if a database file was a URI that contained a specific query
** parameter, and if so obtains the value of the query parameter.
**
** The zFilename argument is the filename pointer passed into the xOpen()
@@ -143592,11 +143592,11 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_db_readonly(sqlite3 *db, const char *zDbName){
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_SNAPSHOT
/*
-** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
+** Obtain a snapshot handle for the snapshot of database zDb currently
** being read by handle db.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
const char *zDb,
sqlite3_snapshot **ppSnapshot
){
@@ -143632,8 +143632,8 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_get(
** Open a read-transaction on the snapshot idendified by pSnapshot.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_snapshot_open(
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zDb,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zDb,
sqlite3_snapshot *pSnapshot
){
int rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -143750,13 +143750,13 @@ static sqlite3 *SQLITE_WSD sqlite3BlockedList = 0;
#ifndef NDEBUG
/*
-** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following
+** This function is a complex assert() that verifies the following
** properties of the blocked connections list:
**
-** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either
+** 1) Each entry in the list has a non-NULL value for either
** pUnlockConnection or pBlockingConnection, or both.
**
-** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for
+** 2) All entries in the list that share a common value for
** xUnlockNotify are grouped together.
**
** 3) If the argument db is not NULL, then none of the entries in the
@@ -143808,8 +143808,8 @@ static void addToBlockedList(sqlite3 *db){
sqlite3 **pp;
assertMutexHeld();
for(
- pp=&sqlite3BlockedList;
- *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify;
+ pp=&sqlite3BlockedList;
+ *pp && (*pp)->xUnlockNotify!=db->xUnlockNotify;
pp=&(*pp)->pNextBlocked
);
db->pNextBlocked = *pp;
@@ -143871,9 +143871,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
db->xUnlockNotify = 0;
db->pUnlockArg = 0;
}else if( 0==db->pBlockingConnection ){
- /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a
+ /* The blocking transaction has been concluded. Or there never was a
** blocking transaction. In either case, invoke the notify callback
- ** immediately.
+ ** immediately.
*/
xNotify(&pArg, 1);
}else{
@@ -143899,7 +143899,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_unlock_notify(
}
/*
-** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement
+** This function is called while stepping or preparing a statement
** associated with connection db. The operation will return SQLITE_LOCKED
** to the user because it requires a lock that will not be available
** until connection pBlocker concludes its current transaction.
@@ -143915,7 +143915,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionBlocked(sqlite3 *db, sqlite3 *pBlocker){
/*
** This function is called when
-** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held
+** the transaction opened by database db has just finished. Locks held
** by database connection db have been released.
**
** This function loops through each entry in the blocked connections
@@ -143975,7 +143975,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
}else{
/* This occurs when the array of context pointers that need to
** be passed to the unlock-notify callback is larger than the
- ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to
+ ** aStatic[] array allocated on the stack and the attempt to
** allocate a larger array from the heap has failed.
**
** This is a difficult situation to handle. Returning an error
@@ -143983,17 +143983,17 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
** is returned the transaction on connection db will still be
** closed and the unlock-notify callbacks on blocked connections
** will go unissued. This might cause the application to wait
- ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never
+ ** indefinitely for an unlock-notify callback that will never
** arrive.
**
** Instead, invoke the unlock-notify callback with the context
** array already accumulated. We can then clear the array and
- ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without
+ ** begin accumulating any further context pointers without
** requiring any dynamic allocation. This is sub-optimal because
** it means that instead of one callback with a large array of
** context pointers the application will receive two or more
** callbacks with smaller arrays of context pointers, which will
- ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple
+ ** reduce the applications ability to prioritize multiple
** connections. But it is the best that can be done under the
** circumstances.
*/
@@ -144028,7 +144028,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionUnlocked(sqlite3 *db){
}
/*
-** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is
+** This is called when the database connection passed as an argument is
** being closed. The connection is removed from the blocked list.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -144105,7 +144105,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
** A doclist (document list) holds a docid-sorted list of hits for a
** given term. Doclists hold docids and associated token positions.
** A docid is the unique integer identifier for a single document.
-** A position is the index of a word within the document. The first
+** A position is the index of a word within the document. The first
** word of the document has a position of 0.
**
** FTS3 used to optionally store character offsets using a compile-time
@@ -144130,7 +144130,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
**
** Here, array { X } means zero or more occurrences of X, adjacent in
** memory. A "position" is an index of a token in the token stream
-** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur
+** generated by the tokenizer. Note that POS_END and POS_COLUMN occur
** in the same logical place as the position element, and act as sentinals
** ending a position list array. POS_END is 0. POS_COLUMN is 1.
** The positions numbers are not stored literally but rather as two more
@@ -144154,7 +144154,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
** a document record consists of a docid followed by a position-list and
** a doclist consists of one or more document records.
**
-** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an
+** A bare doclist omits the position information, becoming an
** array of varint-encoded docids.
**
**** Segment leaf nodes ****
@@ -144351,7 +144351,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
#ifndef _FTSINT_H
#define _FTSINT_H
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
@@ -144374,7 +144374,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3ConnectionClosed(sqlite3 *db){
/* If not building as part of the core, include sqlite3ext.h. */
#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
-/* # include "sqlite3ext.h" */
+/* # include "sqlite3ext.h" */
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
#endif
@@ -144418,7 +144418,7 @@ SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT3
** When an fts3 table is created, it passes any arguments passed to
** the tokenizer clause of the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE statement to the
** sqlite3_tokenizer_module.xCreate() function of the requested tokenizer
-** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
+** implementation. The xCreate() function in turn returns an
** sqlite3_tokenizer structure representing the specific tokenizer to
** be used for the fts3 table (customized by the tokenizer clause arguments).
**
@@ -144450,7 +144450,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
** then argc is set to 2, and the argv[] array contains pointers
** to the strings "arg1" and "arg2".
**
- ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
+ ** This method should return either SQLITE_OK (0), or an SQLite error
** code. If SQLITE_OK is returned, then *ppTokenizer should be set
** to point at the newly created tokenizer structure. The generic
** sqlite3_tokenizer.pModule variable should not be initialized by
@@ -144471,7 +144471,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
/*
** Create a tokenizer cursor to tokenize an input buffer. The caller
** is responsible for ensuring that the input buffer remains valid
- ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
+ ** until the cursor is closed (using the xClose() method).
*/
int (*xOpen)(
sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer, /* Tokenizer object */
@@ -144480,7 +144480,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
);
/*
- ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
+ ** Destroy an existing tokenizer cursor. The fts3 module calls this
** method exactly once for each successful call to xOpen().
*/
int (*xClose)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCursor);
@@ -144491,7 +144491,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
** "OUT" variables identified below, or SQLITE_DONE to indicate that
** the end of the buffer has been reached, or an SQLite error code.
**
- ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
+ ** *ppToken should be set to point at a buffer containing the
** normalized version of the token (i.e. after any case-folding and/or
** stemming has been performed). *pnBytes should be set to the length
** of this buffer in bytes. The input text that generated the token is
@@ -144503,7 +144503,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
**
** The buffer *ppToken is set to point at is managed by the tokenizer
** implementation. It is only required to be valid until the next call
- ** to xNext() or xClose().
+ ** to xNext() or xClose().
*/
/* TODO(shess) current implementation requires pInput to be
** nul-terminated. This should either be fixed, or pInput/nBytes
@@ -144521,7 +144521,7 @@ struct sqlite3_tokenizer_module {
** Methods below this point are only available if iVersion>=1.
*/
- /*
+ /*
** Configure the language id of a tokenizer cursor.
*/
int (*xLanguageid)(sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pCsr, int iLangid);
@@ -144590,7 +144590,7 @@ struct Fts3Hash {
} *ht;
};
-/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
+/* Each element in the hash table is an instance of the following
** structure. All elements are stored on a single doubly-linked list.
**
** Again, this structure is intended to be opaque, but it can't really
@@ -144609,10 +144609,10 @@ struct Fts3HashElem {
** (including the null-terminator, if any). Case
** is respected in comparisons.
**
-** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
+** FTS3_HASH_BINARY pKey points to binary data nKey bytes long.
** memcmp() is used to compare keys.
**
-** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
+** A copy of the key is made if the copyKey parameter to fts3HashInit is 1.
*/
#define FTS3_HASH_STRING 1
#define FTS3_HASH_BINARY 2
@@ -144665,7 +144665,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
/*
** This constant determines the maximum depth of an FTS expression tree
-** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform
+** that the library will create and use. FTS uses recursion to perform
** various operations on the query tree, so the disadvantage of a large
** limit is that it may allow very large queries to use large amounts
** of stack space (perhaps causing a stack overflow).
@@ -144683,11 +144683,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
#define FTS3_MERGE_COUNT 16
/*
-** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
+** This is the maximum amount of data (in bytes) to store in the
** Fts3Table.pendingTerms hash table. Normally, the hash table is
** populated as documents are inserted/updated/deleted in a transaction
** and used to create a new segment when the transaction is committed.
-** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
+** However if this limit is reached midway through a transaction, a new
** segment is created and the hash table cleared immediately.
*/
#define FTS3_MAX_PENDING_DATA (1*1024*1024)
@@ -144716,7 +144716,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
/*
** FTS4 virtual tables may maintain multiple indexes - one index of all terms
** in the document set and zero or more prefix indexes. All indexes are stored
-** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables.
+** as one or more b+-trees in the %_segments and %_segdir tables.
**
** It is possible to determine which index a b+-tree belongs to based on the
** value stored in the "%_segdir.level" column. Given this value L, the index
@@ -144724,8 +144724,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
** level values between 0 and 1023 (inclusive) belong to index 0, all levels
** between 1024 and 2047 to index 1, and so on.
**
-** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In
-** theory though this may happen, but only after at least
+** It is considered impossible for an index to use more than 1024 levels. In
+** theory though this may happen, but only after at least
** (FTS3_MERGE_COUNT^1024) separate flushes of the pending-terms tables.
*/
#define FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL 1024
@@ -144743,11 +144743,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(const Fts3Hash *, const voi
** Terminator values for position-lists and column-lists.
*/
#define POS_COLUMN (1) /* Column-list terminator */
-#define POS_END (0) /* Position-list terminator */
+#define POS_END (0) /* Position-list terminator */
/*
** This section provides definitions to allow the
-** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
+** FTS3 extension to be compiled outside of the
** amalgamation.
*/
#ifndef SQLITE_AMALGAMATION
@@ -144785,7 +144785,7 @@ typedef sqlite3_int64 i64; /* 8-byte signed integer */
/*
** Activate assert() only if SQLITE_TEST is enabled.
*/
-#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
+#if !defined(NDEBUG) && !defined(SQLITE_DEBUG)
# define NDEBUG 1
#endif
@@ -144844,8 +144844,8 @@ struct Fts3Table {
int nAutoincrmerge; /* Value configured by 'automerge' */
u32 nLeafAdd; /* Number of leaf blocks added this trans */
- /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
- ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
+ /* Precompiled statements used by the implementation. Each of these
+ ** statements is run and reset within a single virtual table API call.
*/
sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[40];
sqlite3_stmt *pSeekStmt; /* Cache for fts3CursorSeekStmt() */
@@ -144863,8 +144863,8 @@ struct Fts3Table {
char *zSegmentsTbl; /* Name of %_segments table */
sqlite3_blob *pSegments; /* Blob handle open on %_segments table */
- /*
- ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index
+ /*
+ ** The following array of hash tables is used to buffer pending index
** updates during transactions. All pending updates buffered at any one
** time must share a common language-id (see the FTS4 langid= feature).
** The current language id is stored in variable iPrevLangid.
@@ -144874,10 +144874,10 @@ struct Fts3Table {
** terms that appear in the document set. Each subsequent index in aIndex[]
** is an index of prefixes of a specific length.
**
- ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the
+ ** Variable nPendingData contains an estimate the memory consumed by the
** pending data structures, including hash table overhead, but not including
** malloc overhead. When nPendingData exceeds nMaxPendingData, all hash
- ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most
+ ** tables are flushed to disk. Variable iPrevDocid is the docid of the most
** recently inserted record.
*/
int nIndex; /* Size of aIndex[] */
@@ -144950,10 +144950,10 @@ struct Fts3Cursor {
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE ex1 USING fts3(a,b,c,d);
** SELECT docid FROM ex1 WHERE b MATCH 'one two three';
-**
+**
** Because the LHS of the MATCH operator is 2nd column "b",
** Fts3Cursor.eSearch will be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+1. (+0 for a,
-** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
+** +1 for b, +2 for c, +3 for d.) If the LHS of MATCH were "ex1"
** indicating that all columns should be searched,
** then eSearch would be set to FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH+4.
*/
@@ -145012,8 +145012,8 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
char *pOrPoslist;
i64 iOrDocid;
- /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing
- ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase.
+ /* Variables below this point are populated by fts3_expr.c when parsing
+ ** a MATCH expression. Everything above is part of the evaluation phase.
*/
int nToken; /* Number of tokens in the phrase */
int iColumn; /* Index of column this phrase must match */
@@ -145023,10 +145023,10 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
/*
** A tree of these objects forms the RHS of a MATCH operator.
**
-** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist
-** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results
-** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial
-** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this
+** If Fts3Expr.eType is FTSQUERY_PHRASE and isLoaded is true, then aDoclist
+** points to a malloced buffer, size nDoclist bytes, containing the results
+** of this phrase query in FTS3 doclist format. As usual, the initial
+** "Length" field found in doclists stored on disk is omitted from this
** buffer.
**
** Variable aMI is used only for FTSQUERY_NEAR nodes to store the global
@@ -145038,7 +145038,7 @@ struct Fts3Phrase {
** aMI[iCol*3 + 1] = Number of occurrences
** aMI[iCol*3 + 2] = Number of rows containing at least one instance
**
-** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed
+** The aMI array is allocated using sqlite3_malloc(). It should be freed
** when the expression node is.
*/
struct Fts3Expr {
@@ -145062,7 +145062,7 @@ struct Fts3Expr {
/*
** Candidate values for Fts3Query.eType. Note that the order of the first
-** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
+** four values is in order of precedence when parsing expressions. For
** example, the following:
**
** "a OR b AND c NOT d NEAR e"
@@ -145119,7 +145119,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, Ft
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(Fts3MultiSegReader *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(Fts3Table *,
int, int, int, const char *, int, int, int, Fts3MultiSegReader *);
/* Flags allowed as part of the 4th argument to SegmentReaderIterate() */
@@ -145183,7 +145183,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc);
/* fts3_tokenizer.c */
SQLITE_PRIVATE const char *sqlite3Fts3NextToken(const char *, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(sqlite3 *, Fts3Hash *, const char *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *,
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(Fts3Hash *pHash, const char *,
sqlite3_tokenizer **, char **
);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(char);
@@ -145219,7 +145219,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart(
Fts3Table*, Fts3MultiSegReader*, int, const char*, int);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(
Fts3Table *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, sqlite3_int64 *, char **, int *);
-SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **);
+SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3Expr *, int iCol, char **);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(Fts3Cursor *, Fts3MultiSegReader *, int *);
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr);
@@ -145252,7 +145252,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(int);
/* #include */
/* #include "fts3.h" */
-#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
+#ifndef SQLITE_CORE
/* # include "sqlite3ext.h" */
SQLITE_EXTENSION_INIT1
#endif
@@ -145269,7 +145269,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Never(int b) { assert( !b ); return b; }
# endif
#endif
-/*
+/*
** Write a 64-bit variable-length integer to memory starting at p[0].
** The length of data written will be between 1 and FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes.
** The number of bytes written is returned.
@@ -145293,7 +145293,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PutVarint(char *p, sqlite_int64 v){
v = (*ptr++); \
if( (v & mask2)==0 ){ var = v; return ret; }
-/*
+/*
** Read a 64-bit variable-length integer from memory starting at p[0].
** Return the number of bytes read, or 0 on error.
** The value is stored in *v.
@@ -145376,7 +145376,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Dequote(char *z){
int iOut = 0; /* Index of next byte to write to output */
/* If the first byte was a '[', then the close-quote character is a ']' */
- if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';
+ if( quote=='[' ) quote = ']';
while( z[iIn] ){
if( z[iIn]==quote ){
@@ -145412,14 +145412,14 @@ static void fts3GetDeltaVarint(char **pp, sqlite3_int64 *pVal){
** varint is part of.
*/
static void fts3GetReverseVarint(
- char **pp,
- char *pStart,
+ char **pp,
+ char *pStart,
sqlite3_int64 *pVal
){
sqlite3_int64 iVal;
char *p;
- /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are
+ /* Pointer p now points at the first byte past the varint we are
** interested in. So, unless the doclist is corrupt, the 0x80 bit is
** clear on character p[-1]. */
for(p = (*pp)-2; p>=pStart && *p&0x80; p--);
@@ -145527,7 +145527,7 @@ static int fts3DestroyMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
** passed as the first argument. This is done as part of the xConnect()
** and xCreate() methods.
**
-** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
+** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc
** before returning.
*/
@@ -145550,7 +145550,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
/* Create the whole "CREATE TABLE" statement to pass to SQLite */
zSql = sqlite3_mprintf(
- "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)",
+ "CREATE TABLE x(%s %Q HIDDEN, docid HIDDEN, %Q HIDDEN)",
zCols, p->zName, zLanguageid
);
if( !zCols || !zSql ){
@@ -145569,7 +145569,7 @@ static void fts3DeclareVtab(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
** Create the %_stat table if it does not already exist.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3CreateStatTable(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
- fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db,
+ fts3DbExec(pRc, p->db,
"CREATE TABLE IF NOT EXISTS %Q.'%q_stat'"
"(id INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, value BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
@@ -145605,9 +145605,9 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
zContentCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z, langid", zContentCols, zLanguageid);
}
if( zContentCols==0 ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
-
+
/* Create the content table */
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_content'(%s)",
p->zDb, p->zName, zContentCols
);
@@ -145615,11 +145615,11 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
}
/* Create other tables */
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segments'(blockid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, block BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
);
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_segdir'("
"level INTEGER,"
"idx INTEGER,"
@@ -145632,7 +145632,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
p->zDb, p->zName
);
if( p->bHasDocsize ){
- fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
+ fts3DbExec(&rc, db,
"CREATE TABLE %Q.'%q_docsize'(docid INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, size BLOB);",
p->zDb, p->zName
);
@@ -145647,7 +145647,7 @@ static int fts3CreateTables(Fts3Table *p){
/*
** Store the current database page-size in bytes in p->nPgsz.
**
-** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
+** If *pRc is non-zero when this function is called, it is a no-op.
** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is stored in *pRc
** before returning.
*/
@@ -145656,7 +145656,7 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
int rc; /* Return code */
char *zSql; /* SQL text "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" */
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt; /* Compiled "PRAGMA %Q.page_size" statement */
-
+
zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA %Q.page_size", p->zDb);
if( !zSql ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
@@ -145682,11 +145682,11 @@ static void fts3DatabasePageSize(int *pRc, Fts3Table *p){
**
** =
**
-** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The
+** There may not be whitespace surrounding the "=" character. The
** term may be quoted, but the may not.
*/
static int fts3IsSpecialColumn(
- const char *z,
+ const char *z,
int *pnKey,
char **pzValue
){
@@ -145763,7 +145763,7 @@ static char *fts3QuoteId(char const *zInput){
}
/*
-** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that
+** Return a list of comma separated SQL expressions and a FROM clause that
** could be used in a SELECT statement such as the following:
**
** SELECT FROM %_content AS x ...
@@ -145814,7 +145814,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, ", x.%Q", p->zLanguageid);
}
}
- fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x",
+ fts3Appendf(pRc, &zRet, " FROM '%q'.'%q%s' AS x",
p->zDb,
(p->zContentTbl ? p->zContentTbl : p->zName),
(p->zContentTbl ? "" : "_content")
@@ -145829,7 +145829,7 @@ static char *fts3ReadExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
**
** If argument zFunc is not NULL, then all but the first question mark
** is preceded by zFunc and an open bracket, and followed by a closed
-** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three
+** bracket. For example, if zFunc is "zip" and the FTS3 table has three
** user-defined text columns, the following string is returned:
**
** "?, zip(?), zip(?), zip(?)"
@@ -145866,11 +145866,11 @@ static char *fts3WriteExprList(Fts3Table *p, const char *zFunc, int *pRc){
/*
** This function interprets the string at (*pp) as a non-negative integer
-** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then
+** value. It reads the integer and sets *pnOut to the value read, then
** sets *pp to point to the byte immediately following the last byte of
** the integer value.
**
-** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value.
+** Only decimal digits ('0'..'9') may be part of an integer value.
**
** If *pp does not being with a decimal digit SQLITE_ERROR is returned and
** the output value undefined. Otherwise SQLITE_OK is returned.
@@ -145991,7 +145991,7 @@ static int fts3ContentColumns(
char **pzErr /* OUT: error message */
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
- char *zSql; /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */
+ char *zSql; /* "SELECT *" statement on zTbl */
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Compiled version of zSql */
zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT * FROM %Q.%Q", zDb, zTbl);
@@ -146133,9 +146133,9 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
char *zVal;
/* Check if this is a tokenizer specification */
- if( !pTokenizer
+ if( !pTokenizer
&& strlen(z)>8
- && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8)
+ && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(z, "tokenize", 8)
&& 0==sqlite3Fts3IsIdChar(z[8])
){
rc = sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(pHash, &z[9], &pTokenizer, pzErr);
@@ -146199,8 +146199,8 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
break;
case 4: /* ORDER */
- if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3))
- && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4))
+ if( (strlen(zVal)!=3 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "asc", 3))
+ && (strlen(zVal)!=4 || sqlite3_strnicmp(zVal, "desc", 4))
){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unrecognized order: %s", zVal);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -146246,17 +146246,17 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
** TABLE statement, use all columns from the content table.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zContent ){
- sqlite3_free(zCompress);
- sqlite3_free(zUncompress);
+ sqlite3_free(zCompress);
+ sqlite3_free(zUncompress);
zCompress = 0;
zUncompress = 0;
if( nCol==0 ){
- sqlite3_free((void*)aCol);
+ sqlite3_free((void*)aCol);
aCol = 0;
rc = fts3ContentColumns(db, argv[1], zContent,&aCol,&nCol,&nString,pzErr);
/* If a languageid= option was specified, remove the language id
- ** column from the aCol[] array. */
+ ** column from the aCol[] array. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && zLanguageid ){
int j;
for(j=0; jazColumn[iCol], zNot, n)
+ && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp(p->azColumn[iCol], zNot, n)
){
p->abNotindexed[iCol] = 1;
sqlite3_free(zNot);
@@ -146384,7 +146384,7 @@ static int fts3InitVtab(
p->zWriteExprlist = fts3WriteExprList(p, zCompress, &rc);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto fts3_init_out;
- /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the
+ /* If this is an xCreate call, create the underlying tables in the
** database. TODO: For xConnect(), it could verify that said tables exist.
*/
if( isCreate ){
@@ -146480,11 +146480,11 @@ static void fts3SetUniqueFlag(sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
#endif
}
-/*
+/*
** Implementation of the xBestIndex method for FTS3 tables. There
** are three possible strategies, in order of preference:
**
-** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid.
+** 1. Direct lookup by rowid or docid.
** 2. Full-text search using a MATCH operator on a non-docid column.
** 3. Linear scan of %_content table.
*/
@@ -146499,7 +146499,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
int iIdx;
/* By default use a full table scan. This is an expensive option,
- ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient
+ ** so search through the constraints to see if a more efficient
** strategy is possible.
*/
pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLSCAN_SEARCH;
@@ -146535,12 +146535,12 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
**
** If there is more than one MATCH constraint available, use the first
** one encountered. If there is both a MATCH constraint and a direct
- ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even
+ ** rowid/docid lookup, prefer the MATCH strategy. This is done even
** though the rowid/docid lookup is faster than a MATCH query, selecting
- ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested
+ ** it would lead to an "unable to use function MATCH in the requested
** context" error.
*/
- if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH
+ if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH
&& pCons->iColumn>=0 && pCons->iColumn<=p->nColumn
){
pInfo->idxNum = FTS3_FULLTEXT_SEARCH + pCons->iColumn;
@@ -146549,7 +146549,7 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
}
/* Equality constraint on the langid column */
- if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
+ if( pCons->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
&& pCons->iColumn==p->nColumn + 2
){
iLangidCons = i;
@@ -146577,22 +146577,22 @@ static int fts3BestIndexMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_index_info *pInfo){
if( iCons>=0 ){
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].argvIndex = iIdx++;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iCons].omit = 1;
- }
+ }
if( iLangidCons>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_LANGID;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iLangidCons].argvIndex = iIdx++;
- }
+ }
if( iDocidGe>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_GE;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidGe].argvIndex = iIdx++;
- }
+ }
if( iDocidLe>=0 ){
pInfo->idxNum |= FTS3_HAVE_DOCID_LE;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[iDocidLe].argvIndex = iIdx++;
- }
+ }
/* Regardless of the strategy selected, FTS can deliver rows in rowid (or
- ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible.
+ ** docid) order. Both ascending and descending are possible.
*/
if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1 ){
struct sqlite3_index_orderby *pOrder = &pInfo->aOrderBy[0];
@@ -146619,7 +146619,7 @@ static int fts3OpenMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCsr){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
/* Allocate a buffer large enough for an Fts3Cursor structure. If the
- ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise,
+ ** allocation succeeds, zero it and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise,
** if the allocation fails, return SQLITE_NOMEM.
*/
*ppCsr = pCsr = (sqlite3_vtab_cursor *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(Fts3Cursor));
@@ -146698,7 +146698,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeekStmt(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
/*
** Position the pCsr->pStmt statement so that it is on the row
** of the %_content table that contains the last match. Return
-** SQLITE_OK on success.
+** SQLITE_OK on success.
*/
static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -146730,7 +146730,7 @@ static int fts3CursorSeek(sqlite3_context *pContext, Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
/*
** This function is used to process a single interior node when searching
-** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this
+** a b-tree for a term or term prefix. The node data is passed to this
** function via the zNode/nNode parameters. The term to search for is
** passed in zTerm/nTerm.
**
@@ -146759,9 +146759,9 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
int isFirstTerm = 1; /* True when processing first term on page */
sqlite3_int64 iChild; /* Block id of child node to descend to */
- /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every
+ /* Skip over the 'height' varint that occurs at the start of every
** interior node. Then load the blockid of the left-child of the b-tree
- ** node into variable iChild.
+ ** node into variable iChild.
**
** Even if the data structure on disk is corrupted, this (reading two
** varints from the buffer) does not risk an overread. If zNode is a
@@ -146777,13 +146777,13 @@ static int fts3ScanInteriorNode(
if( zCsr>zEnd ){
return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
}
-
+
while( zCsrpos(*pp1) && pos(*pp2)-pos(*pp1)<=nToken). i.e.
** when the *pp1 token appears before the *pp2 token, but not more than nToken
@@ -147181,11 +147181,11 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
assert( isSaveLeft==0 || isExact==0 );
assert( p!=0 && *p1!=0 && *p2!=0 );
- if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){
+ if( *p1==POS_COLUMN ){
p1++;
p1 += fts3GetVarint32(p1, &iCol1);
}
- if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){
+ if( *p2==POS_COLUMN ){
p2++;
p2 += fts3GetVarint32(p2, &iCol2);
}
@@ -147208,8 +147208,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
fts3GetDeltaVarint(&p2, &iPos2); iPos2 -= 2;
while( 1 ){
- if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken
- || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken)
+ if( iPos2==iPos1+nToken
+ || (isExact==0 && iPos2>iPos1 && iPos2<=iPos1+nToken)
){
sqlite3_int64 iSave;
iSave = isSaveLeft ? iPos1 : iPos2;
@@ -147244,8 +147244,8 @@ static int fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(
/* Advance pointer p1 or p2 (whichever corresponds to the smaller of
** iCol1 and iCol2) so that it points to either the 0x00 that marks the
- ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next
- ** column-number in the position list.
+ ** end of the position list, or the 0x01 that precedes the next
+ ** column-number in the position list.
*/
else if( iCol1bDescIdx,
+ int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx,
pTS->aaOutput[i], pTS->anOutput[i], aOut, nOut, &aNew, &nNew
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -147702,15 +147702,15 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
){
if( pTS->aaOutput[0]==0 ){
/* If this is the first term selected, copy the doclist to the output
- ** buffer using memcpy().
+ ** buffer using memcpy().
**
- ** Add FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes of unused space to the end of the
+ ** Add FTS3_VARINT_MAX bytes of unused space to the end of the
** allocation. This is so as to ensure that the buffer is big enough
** to hold the current doclist AND'd with any other doclist. If the
** doclists are stored in order=ASC order, this padding would not be
** required (since the size of [doclistA AND doclistB] is always less
** than or equal to the size of [doclistA] in that case). But this is
- ** not true for order=DESC. For example, a doclist containing (1, -1)
+ ** not true for order=DESC. For example, a doclist containing (1, -1)
** may be smaller than (-1), as in the first example the -1 may be stored
** as a single-byte delta, whereas in the second it must be stored as a
** FTS3_VARINT_MAX byte varint.
@@ -147739,7 +147739,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
char *aNew;
int nNew;
- int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge,
+ int rc = fts3DoclistOrMerge(p->bDescIdx, aMerge, nMerge,
pTS->aaOutput[iOut], pTS->anOutput[iOut], &aNew, &nNew
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -147750,7 +147750,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
if( aMerge!=aDoclist ) sqlite3_free(aMerge);
sqlite3_free(pTS->aaOutput[iOut]);
pTS->aaOutput[iOut] = 0;
-
+
aMerge = aNew;
nMerge = nNew;
if( (iOut+1)==SizeofArray(pTS->aaOutput) ){
@@ -147767,7 +147767,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelectMerge(
** Append SegReader object pNew to the end of the pCsr->apSegment[] array.
*/
static int fts3SegReaderCursorAppend(
- Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr,
+ Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr,
Fts3SegReader *pNew
){
if( (pCsr->nSegment%16)==0 ){
@@ -147806,10 +147806,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement to iterate through segments */
int rc2; /* Result of sqlite3_reset() */
- /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader
+ /* If iLevel is less than 0 and this is not a scan, include a seg-reader
** for the pending-terms. If this is a scan, then this call must be being
** made by an fts4aux module, not an FTS table. In this case calling
- ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by
+ ** Fts3SegReaderPending might segfault, as the data structures used by
** fts4aux are not completely populated. So it's easiest to filter these
** calls out here. */
if( iLevel<0 && p->aIndex ){
@@ -147843,10 +147843,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
if( isPrefix==0 && isScan==0 ) iLeavesEndBlock = iStartBlock;
}
-
- rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1,
+
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderNew(pCsr->nSegment+1,
(isPrefix==0 && isScan==0),
- iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock,
+ iStartBlock, iLeavesEndBlock,
iEndBlock, zRoot, nRoot, &pSeg
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
@@ -147862,7 +147862,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderCursor(
}
/*
-** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a
+** Set up a cursor object for iterating through a full-text index or a
** single level therein.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(
@@ -147878,7 +147878,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(
){
assert( iIndex>=0 && iIndexnIndex );
assert( iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL
- || iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING
+ || iLevel==FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING
|| iLevel>=0
);
assert( iLevelnIndex; i++){
if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm ){
bFound = 1;
- rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 0, 0, pSegcsr
);
pSegcsr->bLookup = 1;
@@ -147952,7 +147952,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor(
for(i=1; bFound==0 && inIndex; i++){
if( p->aIndex[i].nPrefix==nTerm+1 ){
bFound = 1;
- rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, 1, 0, pSegcsr
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -147965,7 +147965,7 @@ static int fts3TermSegReaderCursor(
}
if( bFound==0 ){
- rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderCursor(p, pCsr->iLangid,
0, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_ALL, zTerm, nTerm, isPrefix, 0, pSegcsr
);
pSegcsr->bLookup = !isPrefix;
@@ -148013,7 +148013,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect(
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart(p, pSegcsr, &filter);
while( SQLITE_OK==rc
- && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr))
+ && SQLITE_ROW==(rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, pSegcsr))
){
rc = fts3TermSelectMerge(p, &tsc, pSegcsr->aDoclist, pSegcsr->nDoclist);
}
@@ -148042,7 +148042,7 @@ static int fts3TermSelect(
**
** If the isPoslist argument is true, then it is assumed that the doclist
** contains a position-list following each docid. Otherwise, it is assumed
-** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded
+** that the doclist is simply a list of docids stored as delta encoded
** varints.
*/
static int fts3DoclistCountDocids(char *aList, int nList){
@@ -148197,7 +148197,7 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
assert( p->base.zErrMsg==0 );
rc = sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(p->pTokenizer, pCsr->iLangid,
- p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr,
+ p->azColumn, p->bFts4, p->nColumn, iCol, zQuery, -1, &pCsr->pExpr,
&p->base.zErrMsg
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -148224,7 +148224,7 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
(pCsr->bDesc ? "DESC" : "ASC")
);
}else{
- zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s ORDER BY rowid %s",
+ zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s ORDER BY rowid %s",
p->zReadExprlist, (pCsr->bDesc ? "DESC" : "ASC")
);
}
@@ -148245,15 +148245,15 @@ static int fts3FilterMethod(
return fts3NextMethod(pCursor);
}
-/*
-** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
+/*
+** This is the xEof method of the virtual table. SQLite calls this
** routine to find out if it has reached the end of a result set.
*/
static int fts3EofMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
return ((Fts3Cursor *)pCursor)->isEof;
}
-/*
+/*
** This is the xRowid method. The SQLite core calls this routine to
** retrieve the rowid for the current row of the result set. fts3
** exposes %_content.docid as the rowid for the virtual table. The
@@ -148265,7 +148265,7 @@ static int fts3RowidMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** This is the xColumn method, called by SQLite to request a value from
** the row that the supplied cursor currently points to.
**
@@ -148289,7 +148289,7 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod(
assert( iCol>=0 && iCol<=p->nColumn+2 );
if( iCol==p->nColumn+1 ){
- /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an
+ /* This call is a request for the "docid" column. Since "docid" is an
** alias for "rowid", use the xRowid() method to obtain the value.
*/
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, pCsr->iPrevId);
@@ -148300,7 +148300,7 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod(
}else if( iCol==p->nColumn+2 && pCsr->pExpr ){
sqlite3_result_int64(pCtx, pCsr->iLangid);
}else{
- /* The requested column is either a user column (one that contains
+ /* The requested column is either a user column (one that contains
** indexed data), or the language-id column. */
rc = fts3CursorSeek(0, pCsr);
@@ -148321,8 +148321,8 @@ static int fts3ColumnMethod(
return rc;
}
-/*
-** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
+/*
+** This function is the implementation of the xUpdate callback used by
** FTS3 virtual tables. It is invoked by SQLite each time a row is to be
** inserted, updated or deleted.
*/
@@ -148357,7 +148357,7 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
**
** Of course, updating the input segments also involves deleting a bunch
** of blocks from the segments table. But this is not considered overhead
- ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input
+ ** as it would also be required by a crisis-merge that used the same input
** segments.
*/
const u32 nMinMerge = 64; /* Minimum amount of incr-merge work to do */
@@ -148365,8 +148365,8 @@ static int fts3SyncMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table*)pVtab;
int rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p);
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK
- && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16)
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK
+ && p->nLeafAdd>(nMinMerge/16)
&& p->nAutoincrmerge && p->nAutoincrmerge!=0xff
){
int mxLevel = 0; /* Maximum relative level value in db */
@@ -148410,7 +148410,7 @@ static int fts3SetHasStat(Fts3Table *p){
}
/*
-** Implementation of xBegin() method.
+** Implementation of xBegin() method.
*/
static int fts3BeginMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table*)pVtab;
@@ -148466,17 +148466,17 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){
/* Skip backwards passed any trailing 0x00 bytes added by NearTrim() */
while( p>pStart && (c=*p--)==0 );
- /* Search backwards for a varint with value zero (the end of the previous
+ /* Search backwards for a varint with value zero (the end of the previous
** poslist). This is an 0x00 byte preceded by some byte that does not
** have the 0x80 bit set. */
- while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){
- c = *p--;
+ while( p>pStart && (*p & 0x80) | c ){
+ c = *p--;
}
assert( p==pStart || c==0 );
/* At this point p points to that preceding byte without the 0x80 bit
** set. So to find the start of the poslist, skip forward 2 bytes then
- ** over a varint.
+ ** over a varint.
**
** Normally. The other case is that p==pStart and the poslist to return
** is the first in the doclist. In this case do not skip forward 2 bytes.
@@ -148497,7 +148497,7 @@ static void fts3ReversePoslist(char *pStart, char **ppPoslist){
** offsets() and optimize() SQL functions.
**
** If the value passed as the third argument is a blob of size
-** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the
+** sizeof(Fts3Cursor*), then the blob contents are copied to the
** output variable *ppCsr and SQLITE_OK is returned. Otherwise, an error
** message is written to context pContext and SQLITE_ERROR returned. The
** string passed via zFunc is used as part of the error message.
@@ -148540,7 +148540,7 @@ static void fts3SnippetFunc(
assert( nVal>=1 );
if( nVal>6 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(pContext,
+ sqlite3_result_error(pContext,
"wrong number of arguments to function snippet()", -1);
return;
}
@@ -148582,8 +148582,8 @@ static void fts3OffsetsFunc(
}
}
-/*
-** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This
+/*
+** Implementation of the special optimize() function for FTS3. This
** function merges all segments in the database to a single segment.
** Example usage is:
**
@@ -148692,10 +148692,10 @@ static int fts3RenameMethod(
/* At this point it must be known if the %_stat table exists or not.
** So bHasStat may not be 2. */
rc = fts3SetHasStat(p);
-
+
/* As it happens, the pending terms table is always empty here. This is
- ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction
- ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method
+ ** because an "ALTER TABLE RENAME TABLE" statement inside a transaction
+ ** always opens a savepoint transaction. And the xSavepoint() method
** flushes the pending terms table. But leave the (no-op) call to
** PendingTermsFlush() in in case that changes.
*/
@@ -148819,7 +148819,7 @@ static void hashDestroy(void *p){
}
/*
-** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are
+** The fts3 built-in tokenizers - "simple", "porter" and "icu"- are
** implemented in files fts3_tokenizer1.c, fts3_porter.c and fts3_icu.c
** respectively. The following three forward declarations are for functions
** declared in these files used to retrieve the respective implementations.
@@ -148883,10 +148883,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
/* Load the built-in tokenizers into the hash table */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "simple", 7, (void *)pSimple)
- || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter)
+ || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "porter", 7, (void *)pPorter)
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS3_UNICODE
- || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode)
+ || sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "unicode61", 10, (void *)pUnicode)
#endif
#ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_ICU
|| (pIcu && sqlite3Fts3HashInsert(pHash, "icu", 4, (void *)pIcu))
@@ -148902,11 +148902,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
}
#endif
- /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload
+ /* Create the virtual table wrapper around the hash-table and overload
** the two scalar functions. If this is successful, register the
** module with sqlite.
*/
- if( SQLITE_OK==rc
+ if( SQLITE_OK==rc
#if CHROMIUM_FTS3_CHANGES && !SQLITE_TEST
/* fts3_tokenizer() disabled for security reasons. */
#else
@@ -148948,7 +148948,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
/*
** Allocate an Fts3MultiSegReader for each token in the expression headed
-** by pExpr.
+** by pExpr.
**
** An Fts3SegReader object is a cursor that can seek or scan a range of
** entries within a single segment b-tree. An Fts3MultiSegReader uses multiple
@@ -148958,7 +148958,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Init(sqlite3 *db){
** If the allocated Fts3MultiSegReader just seeks to a single entry in a
** segment b-tree (if the term is not a prefix or it is a prefix for which
** there exists prefix b-tree of the right length) then it may be traversed
-** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory
+** and merged incrementally. Otherwise, it has to be merged into an in-memory
** doclist and then traversed.
*/
static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders(
@@ -148975,7 +148975,7 @@ static void fts3EvalAllocateReaders(
*pnToken += nToken;
for(i=0; ipPhrase->aToken[i];
- int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr,
+ int rc = fts3TermSegReaderCursor(pCsr,
pToken->z, pToken->n, pToken->isPrefix, &pToken->pSegcsr
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -149180,7 +149180,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
sqlite3_free(aPoslist);
return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
-
+
pPhrase->doclist.pList = aOut;
if( fts3PoslistPhraseMerge(&aOut, nDistance, 0, 1, &p1, &p2) ){
pPhrase->doclist.bFreeList = 1;
@@ -149204,7 +149204,7 @@ static int fts3EvalDeferredPhrase(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
#define MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS 4
/*
-** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query
+** This function is called for each Fts3Phrase in a full-text query
** expression to initialize the mechanism for returning rows. Once this
** function has been called successfully on an Fts3Phrase, it may be
** used with fts3EvalPhraseNext() to iterate through the matching docids.
@@ -149222,12 +149222,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){
/* Determine if doclists may be loaded from disk incrementally. This is
** possible if the bOptOk argument is true, the FTS doclists will be
- ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of
+ ** scanned in forward order, and the phrase consists of
** MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS or fewer tokens, none of which are are "^first"
** tokens or prefix tokens that cannot use a prefix-index. */
int bHaveIncr = 0;
- int bIncrOk = (bOptOk
- && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx
+ int bIncrOk = (bOptOk
+ && pCsr->bDesc==pTab->bDescIdx
&& p->nToken<=MAX_INCR_PHRASE_TOKENS && p->nToken>0
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
&& pTab->bNoIncrDoclist==0
@@ -149263,12 +149263,12 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseStart(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int bOptOk, Fts3Phrase *p){
}
/*
-** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start)
+** This function is used to iterate backwards (from the end to start)
** through doclists. It is used by this module to iterate through phrase
** doclists in reverse and by the fts3_write.c module to iterate through
** pending-terms lists when writing to databases with "order=desc".
**
-** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or
+** The doclist may be sorted in ascending (parameter bDescIdx==0) or
** descending (parameter bDescIdx==1) order of docid. Regardless, this
** function iterates from the end of the doclist to the beginning.
*/
@@ -149348,7 +149348,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3DoclistNext(
p += sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(p, piDocid);
}else{
fts3PoslistCopy(0, &p);
- while( p<&aDoclist[nDoclist] && *p==0 ) p++;
+ while( p<&aDoclist[nDoclist] && *p==0 ) p++;
if( p>=&aDoclist[nDoclist] ){
*pbEof = 1;
}else{
@@ -149372,7 +149372,7 @@ static void fts3EvalDlPhraseNext(
){
char *pIter; /* Used to iterate through aAll */
char *pEnd = &pDL->aAll[pDL->nAll]; /* 1 byte past end of aAll */
-
+
if( pDL->pNextDocid ){
pIter = pDL->pNextDocid;
}else{
@@ -149420,12 +149420,12 @@ struct TokenDoclist {
};
/*
-** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a
+** Token pToken is an incrementally loaded token that is part of a
** multi-token phrase. Advance it to the next matching document in the
** database and populate output variable *p with the details of the new
** entry. Or, if the iterator has reached EOF, set *pbEof to true.
**
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
** SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int incrPhraseTokenNext(
@@ -149466,18 +149466,18 @@ static int incrPhraseTokenNext(
/*
** The phrase iterator passed as the second argument:
**
-** * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and
+** * features at least one token that uses an incremental doclist, and
**
** * does not contain any deferred tokens.
**
** Advance it to the next matching documnent in the database and populate
-** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields.
+** the Fts3Doclist.pList and nList fields.
**
** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to
** 1 before returning. Otherwise, if no error occurs and the iterator is
** successfully advanced, *pbEof is set to 0.
**
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
** SQLITE_OK.
*/
static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
@@ -149495,7 +149495,7 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
assert( p->bIncr==1 );
if( p->nToken==1 && p->bIncr ){
- rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr,
+ rc = sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrNext(pTab, p->aToken[0].pSegcsr,
&pDL->iDocid, &pDL->pList, &pDL->nList
);
if( pDL->pList==0 ) bEof = 1;
@@ -149525,8 +149525,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
/* Keep advancing iterators until they all point to the same document */
for(i=0; inToken; i++){
- while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0
- && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0
+ while( rc==SQLITE_OK && bEof==0
+ && a[i].bIgnore==0 && DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)<0
){
rc = incrPhraseTokenNext(pTab, p, i, &a[i], &bEof);
if( DOCID_CMP(a[i].iDocid, iMax)>0 ){
@@ -149572,8 +149572,8 @@ static int fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(
}
/*
-** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid.
-** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
+** Attempt to move the phrase iterator to point to the next matching docid.
+** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. Otherwise, return
** SQLITE_OK.
**
** If there is no "next" entry and no error occurs, then *pbEof is set to
@@ -149592,7 +149592,7 @@ static int fts3EvalPhraseNext(
if( p->bIncr ){
rc = fts3EvalIncrPhraseNext(pCsr, p, pbEof);
}else if( pCsr->bDesc!=pTab->bDescIdx && pDL->nAll ){
- sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll,
+ sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(pTab->bDescIdx, pDL->aAll, pDL->nAll,
&pDL->pNextDocid, &pDL->iDocid, &pDL->nList, pbEof
);
pDL->pList = pDL->pNextDocid;
@@ -149652,7 +149652,7 @@ static void fts3EvalStartReaders(
** Tokens are divided into AND/NEAR clusters. All tokens in a cluster belong
** to phrases that are connected only by AND and NEAR operators (not OR or
** NOT). When determining tokens to defer, each AND/NEAR cluster is considered
-** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in
+** separately. The root of a tokens AND/NEAR cluster is stored in
** Fts3TokenAndCost.pRoot.
*/
typedef struct Fts3TokenAndCost Fts3TokenAndCost;
@@ -149720,7 +149720,7 @@ static void fts3EvalTokenCosts(
** write this value to *pnPage and return SQLITE_OK. Otherwise, return
** an SQLite error code.
**
-** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating
+** The average document size in pages is calculated by first calculating
** determining the average size in bytes, B. If B is less than the amount
** of data that will fit on a single leaf page of an intkey table in
** this database, then the average docsize is 1. Otherwise, it is 1 plus
@@ -149729,10 +149729,10 @@ static void fts3EvalTokenCosts(
static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
if( pCsr->nRowAvg==0 ){
/* The average document size, which is required to calculate the cost
- ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required
+ ** of each doclist, has not yet been determined. Read the required
** data from the %_stat table to calculate it.
**
- ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3
+ ** Entry 0 of the %_stat table is a blob containing (nCol+1) FTS3
** varints, where nCol is the number of columns in the FTS3 table.
** The first varint is the number of documents currently stored in
** the table. The following nCol varints contain the total amount of
@@ -149764,7 +149764,7 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
pCsr->nDoc = nDoc;
pCsr->nRowAvg = (int)(((nByte / nDoc) + p->nPgsz) / p->nPgsz);
- assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 );
+ assert( pCsr->nRowAvg>0 );
rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
@@ -149774,11 +149774,11 @@ static int fts3EvalAverageDocsize(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pnPage){
}
/*
-** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be
+** This function is called to select the tokens (if any) that will be
** deferred. The array aTC[] has already been populated when this is
** called.
**
-** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the
+** This function is called once for each AND/NEAR cluster in the
** expression. Each invocation determines which tokens to defer within
** the cluster with root node pRoot. See comments above the definition
** of struct Fts3TokenAndCost for more details.
@@ -149828,8 +149828,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || nDocSize>0 );
- /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order
- ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer
+ /* Iterate through all tokens in this AND/NEAR cluster, in ascending order
+ ** of the number of overflow pages that will be loaded by the pager layer
** to retrieve the entire doclist for the token from the full-text index.
** Load the doclists for tokens that are either:
**
@@ -149840,7 +149840,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
**
** After each token doclist is loaded, merge it with the others from the
** same phrase and count the number of documents that the merged doclist
- ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in
+ ** contains. Set variable "nMinEst" to the smallest number of documents in
** any phrase doclist for which 1 or more token doclists have been loaded.
** Let nOther be the number of other phrases for which it is certain that
** one or more tokens will not be deferred.
@@ -149856,8 +149856,8 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
/* Set pTC to point to the cheapest remaining token. */
for(iTC=0; iTCnOvfl)
+ if( aTC[iTC].pToken && aTC[iTC].pRoot==pRoot
+ && (!pTC || aTC[iTC].nOvflnOvfl)
){
pTC = &aTC[iTC];
}
@@ -149866,7 +149866,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
if( ii && pTC->nOvfl>=((nMinEst+(nLoad4/4)-1)/(nLoad4/4))*nDocSize ){
/* The number of overflow pages to load for this (and therefore all
- ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages
+ ** subsequent) tokens is greater than the estimated number of pages
** that will be loaded if all subsequent tokens are deferred.
*/
Fts3PhraseToken *pToken = pTC->pToken;
@@ -149875,7 +149875,7 @@ static int fts3EvalSelectDeferred(
pToken->pSegcsr = 0;
}else{
/* Set nLoad4 to the value of (4^nOther) for the next iteration of the
- ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from
+ ** for-loop. Except, limit the value to 2^24 to prevent it from
** overflowing the 32-bit integer it is stored in. */
if( ii<12 ) nLoad4 = nLoad4*4;
@@ -149997,7 +149997,7 @@ static void fts3EvalInvalidatePoslist(Fts3Phrase *pPhrase){
** close to a position in the *paPoslist position list are removed. If this
** leaves 0 positions, zero is returned. Otherwise, non-zero.
**
-** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit
+** Before returning, *paPoslist is set to point to the position lsit
** associated with pPhrase. And *pnToken is set to the number of tokens in
** pPhrase.
*/
@@ -150011,8 +150011,8 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim(
int nParam1 = nNear + pPhrase->nToken;
int nParam2 = nNear + *pnToken;
int nNew;
- char *p2;
- char *pOut;
+ char *p2;
+ char *pOut;
int res;
assert( pPhrase->doclist.pList );
@@ -150059,19 +150059,19 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTrim(
**
** 1. Deferred tokens are not taken into account. If a phrase consists
** entirely of deferred tokens, it is assumed to match every row in
-** the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all.
+** the db. In this case the position-list is not populated at all.
**
** Or, if a phrase contains one or more deferred tokens and one or
-** more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the
+** more non-deferred tokens, then the expression is advanced to the
** next possible match, considering only non-deferred tokens. In other
** words, if the phrase is "A B C", and "B" is deferred, the expression
-** is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C",
+** is advanced to the next row that contains an instance of "A * C",
** where "*" may match any single token. The position list in this case
** is populated as for "A * C" before returning.
**
-** 2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is
+** 2. NEAR is treated as AND. If the expression is "x NEAR y", it is
** advanced to point to the next row that matches "x AND y".
-**
+**
** See sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred() for details on testing if a row is
** really a match, taking into account deferred tokens and NEAR operators.
*/
@@ -150138,7 +150138,7 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
}
break;
}
-
+
case FTSQUERY_OR: {
Fts3Expr *pLeft = pExpr->pLeft;
Fts3Expr *pRight = pExpr->pRight;
@@ -150178,9 +150178,9 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pLeft, pRc);
if( pLeft->bEof==0 ){
- while( !*pRc
- && !pRight->bEof
- && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0
+ while( !*pRc
+ && !pRight->bEof
+ && DOCID_CMP(pLeft->iDocid, pRight->iDocid)>0
){
fts3EvalNextRow(pCsr, pRight, pRc);
}
@@ -150205,14 +150205,14 @@ static void fts3EvalNextRow(
** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK, or if pExpr is not the root node of a NEAR
** cluster, then this function returns 1 immediately.
**
-** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR
-** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists
-** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression.
+** Otherwise, it checks if the current row really does match the NEAR
+** expression, using the data currently stored in the position lists
+** (Fts3Expr->pPhrase.doclist.pList/nList) for each phrase in the expression.
**
** If the current row is a match, the position list associated with each
** phrase in the NEAR expression is edited in place to contain only those
** phrase instances sufficiently close to their peers to satisfy all NEAR
-** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not
+** constraints. In this case it returns 1. If the NEAR expression does not
** match the current row, 0 is returned. The position lists may or may not
** be edited if 0 is returned.
*/
@@ -150235,16 +150235,16 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){
** | |
** "w" "x"
**
- ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The
+ ** The right-hand child of a NEAR node is always a phrase. The
** left-hand child may be either a phrase or a NEAR node. There are
** no exceptions to this - it's the way the parser in fts3_expr.c works.
*/
- if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK
- && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+ if( *pRc==SQLITE_OK
+ && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
&& pExpr->bEof==0
&& (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR)
){
- Fts3Expr *p;
+ Fts3Expr *p;
int nTmp = 0; /* Bytes of temp space */
char *aTmp; /* Temp space for PoslistNearMerge() */
@@ -150294,12 +150294,12 @@ static int fts3EvalNearTest(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int *pRc){
/*
** This function is a helper function for sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred().
** Assuming no error occurs or has occurred, It returns non-zero if the
-** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr
+** expression passed as the second argument matches the row that pCsr
** currently points to, or zero if it does not.
**
** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op.
-** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to
-** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is
+** If an error occurs during execution of this function, *pRc is set to
+** the appropriate SQLite error code. In this case the returned value is
** undefined.
*/
static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
@@ -150318,10 +150318,10 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
&& fts3EvalNearTest(pExpr, pRc)
);
- /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for
+ /* If the NEAR expression does not match any rows, zero the doclist for
** all phrases involved in the NEAR. This is because the snippet(),
- ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize
- ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries.
+ ** offsets() and matchinfo() functions are not supposed to recognize
+ ** any instances of phrases that are part of unmatched NEAR queries.
** For example if this expression:
**
** ... MATCH 'a OR (b NEAR c)'
@@ -150333,8 +150333,8 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
** then any snippet() should ony highlight the "a" term, not the "b"
** (as "b" is part of a non-matching NEAR clause).
*/
- if( bHit==0
- && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+ if( bHit==0
+ && pExpr->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
&& (pExpr->pParent==0 || pExpr->pParent->eType!=FTSQUERY_NEAR)
){
Fts3Expr *p;
@@ -150366,7 +150366,7 @@ static int fts3EvalTestExpr(
default: {
#ifndef SQLITE_DISABLE_FTS4_DEFERRED
- if( pCsr->pDeferred
+ if( pCsr->pDeferred
&& (pExpr->iDocid==pCsr->iPrevId || pExpr->bDeferred)
){
Fts3Phrase *pPhrase = pExpr->pPhrase;
@@ -150422,7 +150422,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, int *pRc){
** memory and scan it to determine the position list for each deferred
** token. Then, see if this row is really a match, considering deferred
** tokens and NEAR operators (neither of which were taken into account
- ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()).
+ ** earlier, by fts3EvalNextRow()).
*/
if( pCsr->pDeferred ){
rc = fts3CursorSeek(0, pCsr);
@@ -150477,7 +150477,7 @@ static int fts3EvalNext(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
/*
** Restart interation for expression pExpr so that the next call to
-** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental
+** fts3EvalNext() visits the first row. Do not allow incremental
** loading or merging of phrase doclists for this iteration.
**
** If *pRc is other than SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is
@@ -150520,11 +150520,11 @@ static void fts3EvalRestart(
}
/*
-** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the
+** After allocating the Fts3Expr.aMI[] array for each phrase in the
** expression rooted at pExpr, the cursor iterates through all rows matched
** by pExpr, calling this function for each row. This function increments
** the values in Fts3Expr.aMI[] according to the position-list currently
-** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase
+** found in Fts3Expr.pPhrase->doclist.pList for each of the phrase
** expression nodes.
*/
static void fts3EvalUpdateCounts(Fts3Expr *pExpr){
@@ -150619,9 +150619,9 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
pCsr->isRequireSeek = 1;
pCsr->isMatchinfoNeeded = 1;
pCsr->iPrevId = pRoot->iDocid;
- }while( pCsr->isEof==0
- && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
- && sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(pCsr, &rc)
+ }while( pCsr->isEof==0
+ && pRoot->eType==FTSQUERY_NEAR
+ && sqlite3Fts3EvalTestDeferred(pCsr, &rc)
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pCsr->isEof==0 ){
@@ -150636,7 +150636,7 @@ static int fts3EvalGatherStats(
pRoot->bEof = bEof;
}else{
/* Caution: pRoot may iterate through docids in ascending or descending
- ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the
+ ** order. For this reason, even though it seems more defensive, the
** do loop can not be written:
**
** do {...} while( pRoot->iDocid=0 && iColnColumn );
@@ -150760,8 +150760,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
Fts3Expr *pNear; /* Most senior NEAR ancestor (or pExpr) */
int bMatch;
- /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not,
- ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid
+ /* Check if this phrase descends from an OR expression node. If not,
+ ** return NULL. Otherwise, the entry that corresponds to docid
** pCsr->iPrevId may lie earlier in the doclist buffer. Or, if the
** tree that the node is part of has been marked as EOF, but the node
** itself is not EOF, then it may point to an earlier entry. */
@@ -150809,7 +150809,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
(pIter >= (pPh->doclist.aAll + pPh->doclist.nAll));
while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)<0 ) && bEof==0 ){
sqlite3Fts3DoclistNext(
- bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
+ bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
&pIter, &iDocid, &bEof
);
}
@@ -150818,7 +150818,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3EvalPhrasePoslist(
while( (pIter==0 || DOCID_CMP(iDocid, pCsr->iPrevId)>0 ) && bEof==0 ){
int dummy;
sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(
- bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
+ bDescDoclist, pPh->doclist.aAll, pPh->doclist.nAll,
&pIter, &iDocid, &dummy, &bEof
);
}
@@ -150894,7 +150894,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Corrupt(){
__declspec(dllexport)
#endif
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_init(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
char **pzErrMsg,
const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
){
@@ -150988,11 +150988,11 @@ static int fts3auxConnectMethod(
*/
if( argc!=4 && argc!=5 ) goto bad_args;
- zDb = argv[1];
+ zDb = argv[1];
nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
if( argc==5 ){
if( nDb==4 && 0==sqlite3_strnicmp("temp", zDb, 4) ){
- zDb = argv[3];
+ zDb = argv[3];
nDb = (int)strlen(zDb);
zFts3 = argv[4];
}else{
@@ -151056,7 +151056,7 @@ static int fts3auxDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
*/
static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod(
- sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
+ sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
){
int i;
@@ -151069,14 +151069,14 @@ static int fts3auxBestIndexMethod(
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
/* This vtab delivers always results in "ORDER BY term ASC" order. */
- if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1
- && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0
+ if( pInfo->nOrderBy==1
+ && pInfo->aOrderBy[0].iColumn==0
&& pInfo->aOrderBy[0].desc==0
){
pInfo->orderByConsumed = 1;
}
- /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column.
+ /* Search for equality and range constraints on the "term" column.
** And equality constraints on the hidden "languageid" column. */
for(i=0; inConstraint; i++){
if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable ){
@@ -151157,11 +151157,11 @@ static int fts3auxCloseMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
static int fts3auxGrowStatArray(Fts3auxCursor *pCsr, int nSize){
if( nSize>pCsr->nStat ){
struct Fts3auxColstats *aNew;
- aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat,
+ aNew = (struct Fts3auxColstats *)sqlite3_realloc(pCsr->aStat,
sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * nSize
);
if( aNew==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
- memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0,
+ memset(&aNew[pCsr->nStat], 0,
sizeof(struct Fts3auxColstats) * (nSize - pCsr->nStat)
);
pCsr->aStat = aNew;
@@ -151221,8 +151221,8 @@ static int fts3auxNextMethod(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pCursor){
/* State 1. In this state we are expecting either a 1, indicating
** that the following integer will be a column number, or the
- ** start of a position list for column 0.
- **
+ ** start of a position list for column 0.
+ **
** The only difference between state 1 and state 2 is that if the
** integer encountered in state 1 is not 0 or 1, then we need to
** increment the column 0 "nDoc" count for this term.
@@ -151335,7 +151335,7 @@ static int fts3auxFilterMethod(
pCsr->nStop = sqlite3_value_bytes(apVal[iLe]);
if( pCsr->zStop==0 ) return SQLITE_NOMEM;
}
-
+
if( iLangid>=0 ){
iLangVal = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[iLangid]);
@@ -151473,15 +151473,15 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
******************************************************************************
**
** This module contains code that implements a parser for fts3 query strings
-** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported
+** (the right-hand argument to the MATCH operator). Because the supported
** syntax is relatively simple, the whole tokenizer/parser system is
-** hand-coded.
+** hand-coded.
*/
/* #include "fts3Int.h" */
#if !defined(SQLITE_CORE) || defined(SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3)
/*
-** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been
+** By default, this module parses the legacy syntax that has been
** traditionally used by fts3. Or, if SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
** is defined, then it uses the new syntax. The differences between
** the new and the old syntaxes are:
@@ -151490,7 +151490,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
**
** b) The new syntax supports the AND and NOT operators. The old does not.
**
-** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not
+** c) The old syntax supports the "-" token qualifier. This is not
** supported by the new syntax (it is replaced by the NOT operator).
**
** d) When using the old syntax, the OR operator has a greater precedence
@@ -151499,7 +151499,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
**
** If compiled with SQLITE_TEST defined, then this module exports the
** symbol "int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses". Setting this variable
-** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to
+** to zero causes the module to use the old syntax. If it is set to
** non-zero the new syntax is activated. This is so both syntaxes can
** be tested using a single build of testfixture.
**
@@ -151528,7 +151528,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitAux(sqlite3 *db){
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0;
#else
-# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
+# ifdef SQLITE_ENABLE_FTS3_PARENTHESIS
# define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 1
# else
# define sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses 0
@@ -151546,7 +151546,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses = 0;
/*
** isNot:
** This variable is used by function getNextNode(). When getNextNode() is
-** called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a
+** called, it sets ParseContext.isNot to true if the 'next node' is a
** FTSQUERY_PHRASE with a unary "-" attached to it. i.e. "mysql" in the
** FTS3 query "sqlite -mysql". Otherwise, ParseContext.isNot is set to
** zero.
@@ -151565,7 +151565,7 @@ struct ParseContext {
};
/*
-** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function.
+** This function is equivalent to the standard isspace() function.
**
** The standard isspace() can be awkward to use safely, because although it
** is defined to accept an argument of type int, its behavior when passed
@@ -151581,7 +151581,7 @@ static int fts3isspace(char c){
/*
** Allocate nByte bytes of memory using sqlite3_malloc(). If successful,
-** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful,
+** zero the memory before returning a pointer to it. If unsuccessful,
** return NULL.
*/
static void *fts3MallocZero(int nByte){
@@ -151629,7 +151629,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParse(ParseContext *, const char *, int, Fts3Expr **, int *);
** structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE containing a phrase consisting of this
** single token and set *ppExpr to point to it. If the end of the buffer is
** reached before a token is found, set *ppExpr to zero. It is the
-** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated
+** responsibility of the caller to eventually deallocate the allocated
** Fts3Expr structure (if any) by passing it to sqlite3_free().
**
** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or SQLITE_NOMEM if a memory allocation
@@ -151683,8 +151683,8 @@ static int getNextToken(
}
while( 1 ){
- if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
- && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-'
+ if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
+ && iStart>0 && z[iStart-1]=='-'
){
pParse->isNot = 1;
iStart--;
@@ -151704,7 +151704,7 @@ static int getNextToken(
pModule->xClose(pCursor);
}
-
+
*ppExpr = pRet;
return rc;
}
@@ -151726,7 +151726,7 @@ static void *fts3ReallocOrFree(void *pOrig, int nNew){
** Buffer zInput, length nInput, contains the contents of a quoted string
** that appeared as part of an fts3 query expression. Neither quote character
** is included in the buffer. This function attempts to tokenize the entire
-** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE
+** input buffer and create an Fts3Expr structure of type FTSQUERY_PHRASE
** containing the results.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and *ppExpr set to point at the
@@ -151751,7 +151751,7 @@ static int getNextString(
int nToken = 0;
/* The final Fts3Expr data structure, including the Fts3Phrase,
- ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single
+ ** Fts3PhraseToken structures token buffers are all stored as a single
** allocation so that the expression can be freed with a single call to
** sqlite3_free(). Setting this up requires a two pass approach.
**
@@ -151760,7 +151760,7 @@ static int getNextString(
** to assemble data in two dynamic buffers:
**
** Buffer p: Points to the Fts3Expr structure, followed by the Fts3Phrase
- ** structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken
+ ** structure, followed by the array of Fts3PhraseToken
** structures. This pass only populates the Fts3PhraseToken array.
**
** Buffer zTemp: Contains copies of all tokens.
@@ -151845,7 +151845,7 @@ no_mem:
}
/*
-** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr
+** The output variable *ppExpr is populated with an allocated Fts3Expr
** structure, or set to 0 if the end of the input buffer is reached.
**
** Returns an SQLite error code. SQLITE_OK if everything works, SQLITE_NOMEM
@@ -151881,7 +151881,7 @@ static int getNextNode(
pParse->isNot = 0;
/* Skip over any whitespace before checking for a keyword, an open or
- ** close bracket, or a quoted string.
+ ** close bracket, or a quoted string.
*/
while( nInput>0 && fts3isspace(*zInput) ){
nInput--;
@@ -151917,10 +151917,10 @@ static int getNextNode(
/* At this point this is probably a keyword. But for that to be true,
** the next byte must contain either whitespace, an open or close
- ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF.
+ ** parenthesis, a quote character, or EOF.
*/
cNext = zInput[nKey];
- if( fts3isspace(cNext)
+ if( fts3isspace(cNext)
|| cNext=='"' || cNext=='(' || cNext==')' || cNext==0
){
pRet = (Fts3Expr *)fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
@@ -151970,15 +151970,15 @@ static int getNextNode(
}
}
- /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or
+ /* If control flows to this point, this must be a regular token, or
** the end of the input. Read a regular token using the sqlite3_tokenizer
** interface. Before doing so, figure out if there is an explicit
- ** column specifier for the token.
+ ** column specifier for the token.
**
** TODO: Strangely, it is not possible to associate a column specifier
** with a quoted phrase, only with a single token. Not sure if this was
** an implementation artifact or an intentional decision when fts3 was
- ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the
+ ** first implemented. Whichever it was, this module duplicates the
** limitation.
*/
iCol = pParse->iDefaultCol;
@@ -151986,8 +151986,8 @@ static int getNextNode(
for(ii=0; iinCol; ii++){
const char *zStr = pParse->azCol[ii];
int nStr = (int)strlen(zStr);
- if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':'
- && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0
+ if( nInput>nStr && zInput[nStr]==':'
+ && sqlite3_strnicmp(zStr, zInput, nStr)==0
){
iCol = ii;
iColLen = (int)((zInput - z) + nStr + 1);
@@ -152032,7 +152032,7 @@ static int opPrecedence(Fts3Expr *p){
}
/*
-** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query
+** Argument ppHead contains a pointer to the current head of a query
** expression tree being parsed. pPrev is the expression node most recently
** inserted into the tree. This function adds pNew, which is always a binary
** operator node, into the expression tree based on the relative precedence
@@ -152062,7 +152062,7 @@ static void insertBinaryOperator(
/*
** Parse the fts3 query expression found in buffer z, length n. This function
-** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched
+** returns either when the end of the buffer is reached or an unmatched
** closing bracket - ')' - is encountered.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned, *ppExpr is set to point to the
@@ -152094,8 +152094,8 @@ static int fts3ExprParse(
if( p ){
int isPhrase;
- if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
- && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot
+ if( !sqlite3_fts3_enable_parentheses
+ && p->eType==FTSQUERY_PHRASE && pParse->isNot
){
/* Create an implicit NOT operator. */
Fts3Expr *pNot = fts3MallocZero(sizeof(Fts3Expr));
@@ -152216,13 +152216,13 @@ exprparse_out:
}
/*
-** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed
+** Return SQLITE_ERROR if the maximum depth of the expression tree passed
** as the only argument is more than nMaxDepth.
*/
static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( p ){
- if( nMaxDepth<0 ){
+ if( nMaxDepth<0 ){
rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
}else{
rc = fts3ExprCheckDepth(p->pLeft, nMaxDepth-1);
@@ -152237,12 +152237,12 @@ static int fts3ExprCheckDepth(Fts3Expr *p, int nMaxDepth){
/*
** This function attempts to transform the expression tree at (*pp) to
** an equivalent but more balanced form. The tree is modified in place.
-** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the
-** new root expression node.
+** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and (*pp) set to point to the
+** new root expression node.
**
** nMaxDepth is the maximum allowable depth of the balanced sub-tree.
**
-** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and
+** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and
** expression (*pp) freed.
*/
static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
@@ -152357,7 +152357,7 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
}
pRoot = p;
}else{
- /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array
+ /* An error occurred. Delete the contents of the apLeaf[] array
** and pFree list. Everything else is cleaned up by the call to
** sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(pRoot) below. */
Fts3Expr *pDel;
@@ -152399,7 +152399,7 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
}
}
}
-
+
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(pRoot);
pRoot = 0;
@@ -152413,9 +152413,9 @@ static int fts3ExprBalance(Fts3Expr **pp, int nMaxDepth){
** differences:
**
** 1. It does not do expression rebalancing.
-** 2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the
+** 2. It does not check that the expression does not exceed the
** maximum allowable depth.
-** 3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an
+** 3. Even if it fails, *ppExpr may still be set to point to an
** expression tree. It should be deleted using sqlite3Fts3ExprFree()
** in this case.
*/
@@ -152454,7 +152454,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && sParse.nNest ){
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
}
-
+
return rc;
}
@@ -152473,7 +152473,7 @@ static int fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
** The first parameter, pTokenizer, is passed the fts3 tokenizer module to
** use to normalize query tokens while parsing the expression. The azCol[]
** array, which is assumed to contain nCol entries, should contain the names
-** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right.
+** of each column in the target fts3 table, in order from left to right.
** Column names must be nul-terminated strings.
**
** The iDefaultCol parameter should be passed the index of the table column
@@ -152496,7 +152496,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(
int rc = fts3ExprParseUnbalanced(
pTokenizer, iLangid, azCol, bFts4, nCol, iDefaultCol, z, n, ppExpr
);
-
+
/* Rebalance the expression. And check that its depth does not exceed
** SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && *ppExpr ){
@@ -152511,7 +152511,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprParse(
*ppExpr = 0;
if( rc==SQLITE_TOOBIG ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr,
- "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)",
+ "FTS expression tree is too large (maximum depth %d)",
SQLITE_FTS3_MAX_EXPR_DEPTH
);
rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
@@ -152574,8 +152574,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3ExprFree(Fts3Expr *pDel){
** Function to query the hash-table of tokenizers (see README.tokenizers).
*/
static int queryTestTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
@@ -152601,11 +152601,11 @@ static int queryTestTokenizer(
/*
** Return a pointer to a buffer containing a text representation of the
** expression passed as the first argument. The buffer is obtained from
-** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use
+** sqlite3_malloc(). It is the responsibility of the caller to use
** sqlite3_free() to release the memory. If an OOM condition is encountered,
** NULL is returned.
**
-** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to
+** If the second argument is not NULL, then its contents are prepended to
** the returned expression text and then freed using sqlite3_free().
*/
static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
@@ -152619,7 +152619,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf(
"%zPHRASE %d 0", zBuf, pPhrase->iColumn);
for(i=0; zBuf && inToken; i++){
- zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf,
+ zBuf = sqlite3_mprintf("%z %.*s%s", zBuf,
pPhrase->aToken[i].n, pPhrase->aToken[i].z,
(pPhrase->aToken[i].isPrefix?"+":"")
);
@@ -152652,7 +152652,7 @@ static char *exprToString(Fts3Expr *pExpr, char *zBuf){
}
/*
-** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the
+** This is the implementation of a scalar SQL function used to test the
** expression parser. It should be called as follows:
**
** fts3_exprtest(, , , ...);
@@ -152683,7 +152683,7 @@ static void fts3ExprTest(
sqlite3 *db = sqlite3_context_db_handle(context);
if( argc<3 ){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"Usage: fts3_exprtest(tokenizer, expr, col1, ...", -1
);
return;
@@ -152752,15 +152752,15 @@ exprtest_out:
}
/*
-** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest()
-** with database connection db.
+** Register the query expression parser test function fts3_exprtest()
+** with database connection db.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3ExprInitTestInterface(sqlite3* db){
int rc = sqlite3_create_function(
db, "fts3_exprtest", -1, SQLITE_UTF8, 0, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0
);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance",
+ rc = sqlite3_create_function(db, "fts3_exprtest_rebalance",
-1, SQLITE_UTF8, (void *)1, fts3ExprTest, 0, 0
);
}
@@ -152824,8 +152824,8 @@ static void fts3HashFree(void *p){
** fields of the Hash structure.
**
** "pNew" is a pointer to the hash table that is to be initialized.
-** keyClass is one of the constants
-** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
+** keyClass is one of the constants
+** FTS3_HASH_BINARY or FTS3_HASH_STRING. The value of keyClass
** determines what kind of key the hash table will use. "copyKey" is
** true if the hash table should make its own private copy of keys and
** false if it should just use the supplied pointer.
@@ -152902,7 +152902,7 @@ static int fts3BinCompare(const void *pKey1, int n1, const void *pKey2, int n2){
/*
** Return a pointer to the appropriate hash function given the key class.
**
-** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
+** The C syntax in this function definition may be unfamilar to some
** programmers, so we provide the following additional explanation:
**
** The name of the function is "ftsHashFunction". The function takes a
@@ -152962,7 +152962,7 @@ static void fts3HashInsertElement(
/* Resize the hash table so that it cantains "new_size" buckets.
-** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
+** "new_size" must be a power of 2. The hash table might fail
** to resize if sqliteMalloc() fails.
**
** Return non-zero if a memory allocation error occurs.
@@ -153007,7 +153007,7 @@ static Fts3HashElem *fts3FindElementByHash(
count = pEntry->count;
xCompare = ftsCompareFunction(pH->keyClass);
while( count-- && elem ){
- if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
+ if( (*xCompare)(elem->pKey,elem->nKey,pKey,nKey)==0 ){
return elem;
}
elem = elem->next;
@@ -153026,7 +153026,7 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash(
){
struct _fts3ht *pEntry;
if( elem->prev ){
- elem->prev->next = elem->next;
+ elem->prev->next = elem->next;
}else{
pH->first = elem->next;
}
@@ -153054,8 +153054,8 @@ static void fts3RemoveElementByHash(
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
- const Fts3Hash *pH,
- const void *pKey,
+ const Fts3Hash *pH,
+ const void *pKey,
int nKey
){
int h; /* A hash on key */
@@ -153069,7 +153069,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE Fts3HashElem *sqlite3Fts3HashFindElem(
return fts3FindElementByHash(pH,pKey,nKey, h & (pH->htsize-1));
}
-/*
+/*
** Attempt to locate an element of the hash table pH with a key
** that matches pKey,nKey. Return the data for this element if it is
** found, or NULL if there is no match.
@@ -153243,7 +153243,7 @@ static int porterDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is zInput[0..nInput-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int porterOpen(
@@ -153296,7 +153296,7 @@ static const char cType[] = {
/*
** isConsonant() and isVowel() determine if their first character in
** the string they point to is a consonant or a vowel, according
-** to Porter ruls.
+** to Porter ruls.
**
** A consonate is any letter other than 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', or 'u'.
** 'Y' is a consonant unless it follows another consonant,
@@ -153416,11 +153416,11 @@ static int star_oh(const char *z){
/*
** If the word ends with zFrom and xCond() is true for the stem
-** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
+** of the word that preceeds the zFrom ending, then change the
** ending to zTo.
**
** The input word *pz and zFrom are both in reverse order. zTo
-** is in normal order.
+** is in normal order.
**
** Return TRUE if zFrom matches. Return FALSE if zFrom does not
** match. Not that TRUE is returned even if xCond() fails and
@@ -153489,9 +153489,9 @@ static void copy_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
** word contains digits, 3 bytes are taken from the beginning and
** 3 bytes from the end. For long words without digits, 10 bytes
** are taken from each end. US-ASCII case folding still applies.
-**
-** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
-** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
+**
+** If the input word contains not digits but does characters not
+** in [a-zA-Z] then no stemming is attempted and this routine just
** copies the input into the input into the output with US-ASCII
** case folding.
**
@@ -153536,11 +153536,11 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
}
}
- /* Step 1b */
+ /* Step 1b */
z2 = z;
if( stem(&z, "dee", "ee", m_gt_0) ){
/* Do nothing. The work was all in the test */
- }else if(
+ }else if(
(stem(&z, "gni", "", hasVowel) || stem(&z, "de", "", hasVowel))
&& z!=z2
){
@@ -153579,7 +153579,7 @@ static void porter_stemmer(const char *zIn, int nIn, char *zOut, int *pnOut){
stem(&z, "igol", "log", m_gt_0);
break;
case 'l':
- if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0)
+ if( !stem(&z, "ilb", "ble", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "illa", "al", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "iltne", "ent", m_gt_0)
&& !stem(&z, "ile", "e", m_gt_0)
@@ -153867,7 +153867,7 @@ static int fts3TokenizerEnabled(sqlite3_context *context){
}
/*
-** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
+** Implementation of the SQL scalar function for accessing the underlying
** hash table. This function may be called as follows:
**
** SELECT ();
@@ -154037,7 +154037,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3Fts3ErrMsg(pzErr, "unknown tokenizer");
}else{
- (*ppTok)->pModule = m;
+ (*ppTok)->pModule = m;
}
sqlite3_free((void *)aArg);
}
@@ -154057,7 +154057,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
/* #include */
/*
-** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
+** Implementation of a special SQL scalar function for testing tokenizers
** designed to be used in concert with the Tcl testing framework. This
** function must be called with two or more arguments:
**
@@ -154069,9 +154069,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
**
** The return value is a string that may be interpreted as a Tcl
** list. For each token in the , three elements are
-** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
+** added to the returned list. The first is the token position, the
** second is the token text (folded, stemmed, etc.) and the third is the
-** substring of associated with the token. For example,
+** substring of associated with the token. For example,
** using the built-in "simple" tokenizer:
**
** SELECT fts_tokenizer_test('simple', 'I don't see how');
@@ -154079,7 +154079,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTokenizer(
** will return the string:
**
** "{0 i I 1 dont don't 2 see see 3 how how}"
-**
+**
*/
static void testFunc(
sqlite3_context *context,
@@ -154174,8 +154174,8 @@ finish:
static
int registerTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module *p
){
int rc;
@@ -154197,8 +154197,8 @@ int registerTokenizer(
static
int queryTokenizer(
- sqlite3 *db,
- char *zName,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ char *zName,
const sqlite3_tokenizer_module **pp
){
int rc;
@@ -154281,23 +154281,23 @@ static void intTestFunc(
/*
** Set up SQL objects in database db used to access the contents of
** the hash table pointed to by argument pHash. The hash table must
-** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy
+** been initialized to use string keys, and to take a private copy
** of the key when a value is inserted. i.e. by a call similar to:
**
** sqlite3Fts3HashInit(pHash, FTS3_HASH_STRING, 1);
**
** This function adds a scalar function (see header comment above
** fts3TokenizerFunc() in this file for details) and, if ENABLE_TABLE is
-** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
-** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
+** defined at compilation time, a temporary virtual table (see header
+** comment above struct HashTableVtab) to the database schema. Both
** provide read/write access to the contents of *pHash.
**
** The third argument to this function, zName, is used as the name
** of both the scalar and, if created, the virtual table.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitHashTable(
- sqlite3 *db,
- Fts3Hash *pHash,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ Fts3Hash *pHash,
const char *zName
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -154451,7 +154451,7 @@ static int simpleDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int simpleOpen(
@@ -154606,8 +154606,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SimpleTokenizerModule(
**
** input =
**
-** The virtual table module tokenizes this , using the FTS3
-** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
+** The virtual table module tokenizes this , using the FTS3
+** tokenizer specified by the arguments to the CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE
** statement and returns one row for each token in the result. With
** fields set as follows:
**
@@ -154676,7 +154676,7 @@ static int fts3tokQueryTokenizer(
/*
** The second argument, argv[], is an array of pointers to nul-terminated
-** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a
+** strings. This function makes a copy of the array and strings into a
** single block of memory. It then dequotes any of the strings that appear
** to be quoted.
**
@@ -154732,7 +154732,7 @@ static int fts3tokDequoteArray(
** and xCreate are identical operations.
**
** argv[0]: module name
-** argv[1]: database name
+** argv[1]: database name
** argv[2]: table name
** argv[3]: first argument (tokenizer name)
*/
@@ -154812,16 +154812,16 @@ static int fts3tokDisconnectMethod(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
** xBestIndex - Analyze a WHERE and ORDER BY clause.
*/
static int fts3tokBestIndexMethod(
- sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
+ sqlite3_vtab *pVTab,
sqlite3_index_info *pInfo
){
int i;
UNUSED_PARAMETER(pVTab);
for(i=0; inConstraint; i++){
- if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable
- && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0
- && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
+ if( pInfo->aConstraint[i].usable
+ && pInfo->aConstraint[i].iColumn==0
+ && pInfo->aConstraint[i].op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
){
pInfo->idxNum = 1;
pInfo->aConstraintUsage[i].argvIndex = 1;
@@ -155051,7 +155051,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
** This file is part of the SQLite FTS3 extension module. Specifically,
** this file contains code to insert, update and delete rows from FTS3
** tables. It also contains code to merge FTS3 b-tree segments. Some
-** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query
+** of the sub-routines used to merge segments are also used by the query
** code in fts3.c.
*/
@@ -155067,7 +155067,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
/*
** When full-text index nodes are loaded from disk, the buffer that they
-** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end
+** are loaded into has the following number of bytes of padding at the end
** of it. i.e. if a full-text index node is 900 bytes in size, then a buffer
** of 920 bytes is allocated for it.
**
@@ -155084,10 +155084,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3InitTok(sqlite3 *db, Fts3Hash *pHash){
** method before retrieving all query results (as may happen, for example,
** if a query has a LIMIT clause).
**
-** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD
+** Incremental loading is used for b-tree nodes FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD
** bytes and larger. Nodes are loaded in chunks of FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE bytes.
-** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values
-** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful
+** The code is written so that the hard lower-limit for each of these values
+** is 1. Clearly such small values would be inefficient, but can be useful
** for testing purposes.
**
** If this module is built with SQLITE_TEST defined, these constants may
@@ -155100,7 +155100,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4;
# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE test_fts3_node_chunksize
# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold
#else
-# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024)
+# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE (4*1024)
# define FTS3_NODE_CHUNK_THRESHOLD (FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE*4)
#endif
@@ -155114,7 +155114,7 @@ int test_fts3_node_chunk_threshold = (4*1024)*4;
/*
** If FTS_LOG_MERGES is defined, call sqlite3_log() to report each automatic
-** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for
+** and incremental merge operation that takes place. This is used for
** debugging FTS only, it should not usually be turned on in production
** systems.
*/
@@ -155200,7 +155200,7 @@ struct Fts3SegReader {
char *aDoclist; /* Pointer to doclist of current entry */
int nDoclist; /* Size of doclist in current entry */
- /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate
+ /* The following variables are used by fts3SegReaderNextDocid() to iterate
** through the current doclist (aDoclist/nDoclist).
*/
char *pOffsetList;
@@ -155245,11 +155245,11 @@ struct SegmentWriter {
** fts3NodeFree()
**
** When a b+tree is written to the database (either as a result of a merge
-** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the
+** or the pending-terms table being flushed), leaves are written into the
** database file as soon as they are completely populated. The interior of
** the tree is assembled in memory and written out only once all leaves have
** been populated and stored. This is Ok, as the b+-tree fanout is usually
-** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively
+** very large, meaning that the interior of the tree consumes relatively
** little memory.
*/
struct SegmentNode {
@@ -155270,7 +155270,7 @@ struct SegmentNode {
*/
#define SQL_DELETE_CONTENT 0
#define SQL_IS_EMPTY 1
-#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2
+#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_CONTENT 2
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGMENTS 3
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_SEGDIR 4
#define SQL_DELETE_ALL_DOCSIZE 5
@@ -155318,7 +155318,7 @@ struct SegmentNode {
** Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned and *pp is set to 0.
**
** If argument apVal is not NULL, then it must point to an array with
-** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound
+** at least as many entries as the requested statement has bound
** parameters. The values are bound to the statements parameters before
** returning.
*/
@@ -155342,7 +155342,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
/* 10 */ "SELECT coalesce((SELECT max(blockid) FROM %Q.'%q_segments') + 1, 1)",
/* 11 */ "REPLACE INTO %Q.'%q_segdir' VALUES(?,?,?,?,?,?)",
- /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
+ /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
/* 12 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
"FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? ORDER BY idx ASC",
/* 13 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
@@ -155376,7 +155376,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
" ORDER BY (level %% 1024) ASC LIMIT 1",
/* Estimate the upper limit on the number of leaf nodes in a new segment
-** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See
+** created by merging the oldest :2 segments from absolute level :1. See
** function sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge() for details. */
/* 29 */ "SELECT 2 * total(1 + leaves_end_block - start_block) "
" FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx < ?",
@@ -155391,7 +155391,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
/* 31 */ "UPDATE %Q.'%q_segdir' SET idx = ? WHERE level=? AND idx=?",
/* SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR
-** Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute
+** Read a single entry from the %_segdir table. The entry from absolute
** level :1 with index value :2. */
/* 32 */ "SELECT idx, start_block, leaves_end_block, end_block, root "
"FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level = ? AND idx = ?",
@@ -155415,7 +155415,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
** Return the largest relative level in the FTS index or indexes. */
/* 36 */ "SELECT max( level %% 1024 ) FROM %Q.'%q_segdir'",
- /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
+ /* Return segments in order from oldest to newest.*/
/* 37 */ "SELECT level, idx, end_block "
"FROM %Q.'%q_segdir' WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? "
"ORDER BY level DESC, idx ASC",
@@ -155431,7 +155431,7 @@ static int fts3SqlStmt(
assert( SizeofArray(azSql)==SizeofArray(p->aStmt) );
assert( eStmt=0 );
-
+
pStmt = p->aStmt[eStmt];
if( !pStmt ){
char *zSql;
@@ -155534,7 +155534,7 @@ static void fts3SqlExec(
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
int rc;
if( *pRC ) return;
- rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal);
+ rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, eStmt, &pStmt, apVal);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_step(pStmt);
rc = sqlite3_reset(pStmt);
@@ -155544,22 +155544,22 @@ static void fts3SqlExec(
/*
-** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive
-** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before
+** This function ensures that the caller has obtained an exclusive
+** shared-cache table-lock on the %_segdir table. This is required before
** writing data to the fts3 table. If this lock is not acquired first, then
** the caller may end up attempting to take this lock as part of committing
-** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or
+** a transaction, causing SQLite to return SQLITE_LOCKED or
** LOCKED_SHAREDCACHEto a COMMIT command.
**
-** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when
-** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back.
-** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE.
-** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly
+** It is best to avoid this because if FTS3 returns any error when
+** committing a transaction, the whole transaction will be rolled back.
+** And this is not what users expect when they get SQLITE_LOCKED_SHAREDCACHE.
+** It can still happen if the user locks the underlying tables directly
** instead of accessing them via FTS.
*/
static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
-
+
if( p->nPendingData==0 ){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
@@ -155576,7 +155576,7 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
/*
** FTS maintains a separate indexes for each language-id (a 32-bit integer).
** Within each language id, a separate index is maintained to store the
-** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS
+** document terms, and each configured prefix size (configured the FTS
** "prefix=" option). And each index consists of multiple levels ("relative
** levels").
**
@@ -155586,14 +155586,14 @@ static int fts3Writelock(Fts3Table *p){
** separate component values into the single 64-bit integer value that
** can be used to query the %_segdir table.
**
-** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024
+** Specifically, each language-id/index combination is allocated 1024
** 64-bit integer level values ("absolute levels"). The main terms index
** for language-id 0 is allocate values 0-1023. The first prefix index
** (if any) for language-id 0 is allocated values 1024-2047. And so on.
** Language 1 indexes are allocated immediately following language 0.
**
** So, for a system with nPrefix prefix indexes configured, the block of
-** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index
+** absolute levels that corresponds to language-id iLangid and index
** iIndex starts at absolute level ((iLangid * (nPrefix+1) + iIndex) * 1024).
*/
static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel(
@@ -155614,7 +155614,7 @@ static sqlite3_int64 getAbsoluteLevel(
/*
** Set *ppStmt to a statement handle that may be used to iterate through
** all rows in the %_segdir table, from oldest to newest. If successful,
-** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement,
+** return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs while preparing the statement,
** return an SQLite error code.
**
** There is only ever one instance of this SQL statement compiled for
@@ -155645,16 +155645,16 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3AllSegdirs(
if( iLevel<0 ){
/* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level BETWEEN ? AND ? ORDER BY ..." */
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL_RANGE, &pStmt, 0);
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
- sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
+ sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
);
}
}else{
/* "SELECT * FROM %_segdir WHERE level = ? ORDER BY ..." */
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
- if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
+ if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex,iLevel));
}
}
@@ -155798,7 +155798,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAddOne(
}
if( fts3PendingListAppend(&pList, p->iPrevDocid, iCol, iPos, &rc) ){
if( pList==fts3HashInsert(pHash, zToken, nToken, pList) ){
- /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only
+ /* Malloc failed while inserting the new entry. This can only
** happen if there was no previous entry for this token.
*/
assert( 0==fts3HashFind(pHash, zToken, nToken) );
@@ -155844,7 +155844,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
assert( pTokenizer && pModule );
/* If the user has inserted a NULL value, this function may be called with
- ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and
+ ** zText==0. In this case, add zero token entries to the hash table and
** return early. */
if( zText==0 ){
*pnWord = 0;
@@ -155875,8 +155875,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
rc = fts3PendingTermsAddOne(
p, iCol, iPos, &p->aIndex[0].hPending, zToken, nToken
);
-
- /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too
+
+ /* Add the term to each of the prefix indexes that it is not too
** short for. */
for(i=1; rc==SQLITE_OK && inIndex; i++){
struct Fts3Index *pIndex = &p->aIndex[i];
@@ -155892,8 +155892,8 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsAdd(
return (rc==SQLITE_DONE ? SQLITE_OK : rc);
}
-/*
-** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to
+/*
+** Calling this function indicates that subsequent calls to
** fts3PendingTermsAdd() are to add term/position-list pairs for the
** contents of the document with docid iDocid.
*/
@@ -155912,10 +155912,10 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid(
** buffer was half empty, that would let the less frequent terms
** generate longer doclists.
*/
- if( iDocidiPrevDocid
+ if( iDocidiPrevDocid
|| (iDocid==p->iPrevDocid && p->bPrevDelete==0)
|| p->iPrevLangid!=iLangid
- || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData
+ || p->nPendingData>p->nMaxPendingData
){
int rc = sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(p);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -155927,7 +155927,7 @@ static int fts3PendingTermsDocid(
}
/*
-** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables.
+** Discard the contents of the pending-terms hash tables.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){
int i;
@@ -155952,9 +155952,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsClear(Fts3Table *p){
** fts3InsertData(). Parameter iDocid is the docid of the new row.
*/
static int fts3InsertTerms(
- Fts3Table *p,
- int iLangid,
- sqlite3_value **apVal,
+ Fts3Table *p,
+ int iLangid,
+ sqlite3_value **apVal,
u32 *aSz
){
int i; /* Iterator variable */
@@ -156017,7 +156017,7 @@ static int fts3InsertData(
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_CONTENT_INSERT, &pContentInsert, &apVal[1]);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && p->zLanguageid ){
rc = sqlite3_bind_int(
- pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2,
+ pContentInsert, p->nColumn+2,
sqlite3_value_int(apVal[p->nColumn+4])
);
}
@@ -156044,8 +156044,8 @@ static int fts3InsertData(
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
- /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the
- ** new docid value.
+ /* Execute the statement to insert the record. Set *piDocid to the
+ ** new docid value.
*/
sqlite3_step(pContentInsert);
rc = sqlite3_reset(pContentInsert);
@@ -156095,7 +156095,7 @@ static int langidFromSelect(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_stmt *pSelect){
** (an integer) of a row about to be deleted. Remove all terms from the
** full-text index.
*/
-static void fts3DeleteTerms(
+static void fts3DeleteTerms(
int *pRC, /* Result code */
Fts3Table *p, /* The FTS table to delete from */
sqlite3_value *pRowid, /* The docid to be deleted */
@@ -156142,7 +156142,7 @@ static void fts3DeleteTerms(
*/
static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int);
-/*
+/*
** This function allocates a new level iLevel index in the segdir table.
** Usually, indexes are allocated within a level sequentially starting
** with 0, so the allocated index is one greater than the value returned
@@ -156151,17 +156151,17 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(Fts3Table *, int, int, int);
** SELECT max(idx) FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iLevel
**
** However, if there are already FTS3_MERGE_COUNT indexes at the requested
-** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the
+** level, they are merged into a single level (iLevel+1) segment and the
** allocated index is 0.
**
** If successful, *piIdx is set to the allocated index slot and SQLITE_OK
** returned. Otherwise, an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx(
- Fts3Table *p,
+ Fts3Table *p,
int iLangid, /* Language id */
int iIndex, /* Index for p->aIndex */
- int iLevel,
+ int iLevel,
int *piIdx
){
int rc; /* Return Code */
@@ -156209,7 +156209,7 @@ static int fts3AllocateSegdirIdx(
** This function reads data from a single row of the %_segments table. The
** specific row is identified by the iBlockid parameter. If paBlob is not
** NULL, then a buffer is allocated using sqlite3_malloc() and populated
-** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the
+** with the contents of the blob stored in the "block" column of the
** identified table row is. Whether or not paBlob is NULL, *pnBlob is set
** to the size of the blob in bytes before returning.
**
@@ -156286,14 +156286,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegmentsClose(Fts3Table *p){
sqlite3_blob_close(p->pSegments);
p->pSegments = 0;
}
-
+
static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
int nRead; /* Number of bytes to read */
int rc; /* Return code */
nRead = MIN(pReader->nNode - pReader->nPopulate, FTS3_NODE_CHUNKSIZE);
rc = sqlite3_blob_read(
- pReader->pBlob,
+ pReader->pBlob,
&pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate],
nRead,
pReader->nPopulate
@@ -156313,10 +156313,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderIncrRead(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
static int fts3SegReaderRequire(Fts3SegReader *pReader, char *pFrom, int nByte){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
- assert( !pReader->pBlob
+ assert( !pReader->pBlob
|| (pFrom>=pReader->aNode && pFrom<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode])
);
- while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK
+ while( pReader->pBlob && rc==SQLITE_OK
&& (pFrom - pReader->aNode + nByte)>pReader->nPopulate
){
rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader);
@@ -156342,7 +156342,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSetEof(Fts3SegReader *pSeg){
** SQLITE_DONE. Otherwise, an SQLite error code.
*/
static int fts3SegReaderNext(
- Fts3Table *p,
+ Fts3Table *p,
Fts3SegReader *pReader,
int bIncr
){
@@ -156382,7 +156382,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
fts3SegReaderSetEof(pReader);
- /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf
+ /* If iCurrentBlock>=iLeafEndBlock, this is an EOF condition. All leaf
** blocks have already been traversed. */
assert( pReader->iCurrentBlock<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock );
if( pReader->iCurrentBlock>=pReader->iLeafEndBlock ){
@@ -156390,7 +156390,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
}
rc = sqlite3Fts3ReadBlock(
- p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode,
+ p, ++pReader->iCurrentBlock, &pReader->aNode, &pReader->nNode,
(bIncr ? &pReader->nPopulate : 0)
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -156406,13 +156406,13 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
rc = fts3SegReaderRequire(pReader, pNext, FTS3_VARINT_MAX*2);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
-
- /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is
+
+ /* Because of the FTS3_NODE_PADDING bytes of padding, the following is
** safe (no risk of overread) even if the node data is corrupted. */
pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nPrefix);
pNext += fts3GetVarint32(pNext, &nSuffix);
- if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0
- || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
+ if( nPrefix<0 || nSuffix<=0
+ || &pNext[nSuffix]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
){
return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
}
@@ -156438,10 +156438,10 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNext(
pReader->pOffsetList = 0;
/* Check that the doclist does not appear to extend past the end of the
- ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either
+ ** b-tree node. And that the final byte of the doclist is 0x00. If either
** of these statements is untrue, then the data structure is corrupt.
*/
- if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
+ if( &pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist]>&pReader->aNode[pReader->nNode]
|| (pReader->nPopulate==0 && pReader->aDoclist[pReader->nDoclist-1])
){
return FTS_CORRUPT_VTAB;
@@ -156462,7 +156462,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){
pReader->iDocid = 0;
pReader->nOffsetList = 0;
sqlite3Fts3DoclistPrev(0,
- pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList,
+ pReader->aDoclist, pReader->nDoclist, &pReader->pOffsetList,
&pReader->iDocid, &pReader->nOffsetList, &bEof
);
}else{
@@ -156478,8 +156478,8 @@ static int fts3SegReaderFirstDocid(Fts3Table *pTab, Fts3SegReader *pReader){
/*
** Advance the SegReader to point to the next docid in the doclist
** associated with the current term.
-**
-** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then
+**
+** If arguments ppOffsetList and pnOffsetList are not NULL, then
** *ppOffsetList is set to point to the first column-offset list
** in the doclist entry (i.e. immediately past the docid varint).
** *pnOffsetList is set to the length of the set of column-offset
@@ -156522,22 +156522,22 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid(
** following block advances it to point one byte past the end of
** the same offset list. */
while( 1 ){
-
+
/* The following line of code (and the "p++" below the while() loop) is
- ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired
+ ** normally all that is required to move pointer p to the desired
** position. The exception is if this node is being loaded from disk
** incrementally and pointer "p" now points to the first byte past
** the populated part of pReader->aNode[].
*/
while( *p | c ) c = *p++ & 0x80;
assert( *p==0 );
-
+
if( pReader->pBlob==0 || p<&pReader->aNode[pReader->nPopulate] ) break;
rc = fts3SegReaderIncrRead(pReader);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
}
p++;
-
+
/* If required, populate the output variables with a pointer to and the
** size of the previous offset-list.
*/
@@ -156548,7 +156548,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderNextDocid(
/* List may have been edited in place by fts3EvalNearTrim() */
while( pnSegment; ii++){
Fts3SegReader *pReader = pMsr->apSegment[ii];
- if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader)
- && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader)
+ if( !fts3SegReaderIsPending(pReader)
+ && !fts3SegReaderIsRootOnly(pReader)
){
sqlite3_int64 jj;
for(jj=pReader->iStartBlock; jj<=pReader->iLeafEndBlock; jj++){
@@ -156609,7 +156609,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrOvfl(
}
/*
-** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the
+** Free all allocations associated with the iterator passed as the
** second argument.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFree(Fts3SegReader *pReader){
@@ -156763,7 +156763,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending(
}else{
/* The query is a simple term lookup that matches at most one term in
- ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup.
+ ** the index. All that is required is a straight hash-lookup.
**
** Because the stack address of pE may be accessed via the aElem pointer
** below, the "Fts3HashElem *pE" must be declared so that it is valid
@@ -156797,7 +156797,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderPending(
}
/*
-** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures.
+** Compare the entries pointed to by two Fts3SegReader structures.
** Comparison is as follows:
**
** 1) EOF is greater than not EOF.
@@ -156868,7 +156868,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderDoclistCmpRev(Fts3SegReader *pLhs, Fts3SegReader *pRhs){
/*
** Compare the term that the Fts3SegReader object passed as the first argument
-** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm.
+** points to with the term specified by arguments zTerm and nTerm.
**
** If the pSeg iterator is already at EOF, return 0. Otherwise, return
** -ve if the pSeg term is less than zTerm/nTerm, 0 if the two terms are
@@ -156929,7 +156929,7 @@ static void fts3SegReaderSort(
#endif
}
-/*
+/*
** Insert a record into the %_segments table.
*/
static int fts3WriteSegment(
@@ -156970,7 +156970,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, int *pnMax){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Insert a record into the %_segdir table.
*/
static int fts3WriteSegdir(
@@ -157007,7 +157007,7 @@ static int fts3WriteSegdir(
/*
** Return the size of the common prefix (if any) shared by zPrev and
-** zNext, in bytes. For example,
+** zNext, in bytes. For example,
**
** fts3PrefixCompress("abc", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 3
** fts3PrefixCompress("abX", 3, "abcdef", 6) // returns 2
@@ -157031,7 +157031,7 @@ static int fts3PrefixCompress(
*/
static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */
- SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */
+ SegmentNode **ppTree, /* IN/OUT: SegmentNode handle */
int isCopyTerm, /* True if zTerm/nTerm is transient */
const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
int nTerm /* Size of term in bytes */
@@ -157040,7 +157040,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
int rc;
SegmentNode *pNew;
- /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if
+ /* First try to append the term to the current node. Return early if
** this is possible.
*/
if( pTree ){
@@ -157060,8 +157060,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
** and the static node buffer (p->nNodeSize bytes) is not large
** enough. Use a separately malloced buffer instead This wastes
** p->nNodeSize bytes, but since this scenario only comes about when
- ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB,
- ** this is not expected to be a serious problem.
+ ** the database contain two terms that share a prefix of almost 2KB,
+ ** this is not expected to be a serious problem.
*/
assert( pTree->aData==(char *)&pTree[1] );
pTree->aData = (char *)sqlite3_malloc(nReq);
@@ -157105,7 +157105,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
** If this is the first node in the tree, the term is added to it.
**
** Otherwise, the term is not added to the new node, it is left empty for
- ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree
+ ** now. Instead, the term is inserted into the parent of pTree. If pTree
** has no parent, one is created here.
*/
pNew = (SegmentNode *)sqlite3_malloc(sizeof(SegmentNode) + p->nNodeSize);
@@ -157130,7 +157130,7 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
pTree->zMalloc = 0;
}else{
pNew->pLeftmost = pNew;
- rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm);
+ rc = fts3NodeAddTerm(p, &pNew, isCopyTerm, zTerm, nTerm);
}
*ppTree = pNew;
@@ -157141,8 +157141,8 @@ static int fts3NodeAddTerm(
** Helper function for fts3NodeWrite().
*/
static int fts3TreeFinishNode(
- SegmentNode *pTree,
- int iHeight,
+ SegmentNode *pTree,
+ int iHeight,
sqlite3_int64 iLeftChild
){
int nStart;
@@ -157155,15 +157155,15 @@ static int fts3TreeFinishNode(
/*
** Write the buffer for the segment node pTree and all of its peers to the
-** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of
-** pTree and its peers to the database.
+** database. Then call this function recursively to write the parent of
+** pTree and its peers to the database.
**
** Except, if pTree is a root node, do not write it to the database. Instead,
** set output variables *paRoot and *pnRoot to contain the root node.
**
** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and output variable *piLast is
** set to the largest blockid written to the database (or zero if no
-** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is
+** blocks were written to the db). Otherwise, an SQLite error code is
** returned.
*/
static int fts3NodeWrite(
@@ -157191,7 +157191,7 @@ static int fts3NodeWrite(
for(pIter=pTree->pLeftmost; pIter && rc==SQLITE_OK; pIter=pIter->pRight){
int nStart = fts3TreeFinishNode(pIter, iHeight, iNextLeaf);
int nWrite = pIter->nData - nStart;
-
+
rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, iNextFree, &pIter->aData[nStart], nWrite);
iNextFree++;
iNextLeaf += (pIter->nEntry+1);
@@ -157237,7 +157237,7 @@ static void fts3NodeFree(SegmentNode *pTree){
*/
static int fts3SegWriterAdd(
Fts3Table *p, /* Virtual table handle */
- SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */
+ SegmentWriter **ppWriter, /* IN/OUT: SegmentWriter handle */
int isCopyTerm, /* True if buffer zTerm must be copied */
const char *zTerm, /* Pointer to buffer containing term */
int nTerm, /* Size of term in bytes */
@@ -157397,12 +157397,12 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush(
pWriter->iFirst, pWriter->iFree, &iLast, &zRoot, &nRoot);
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
+ rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
pWriter->iFirst, iLastLeaf, iLast, pWriter->nLeafData, zRoot, nRoot);
}
}else{
/* The entire tree fits on the root node. Write it to the segdir table. */
- rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
+ rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p, iLevel, iIdx,
0, 0, 0, pWriter->nLeafData, pWriter->aData, pWriter->nData);
}
p->nLeafAdd++;
@@ -157410,7 +157410,7 @@ static int fts3SegWriterFlush(
}
/*
-** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the
+** Release all memory held by the SegmentWriter object passed as the
** first argument.
*/
static void fts3SegWriterFree(SegmentWriter *pWriter){
@@ -157460,9 +157460,9 @@ static int fts3IsEmpty(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pRowid, int *pisEmpty){
** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if not.
*/
static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel(
- Fts3Table *p,
+ Fts3Table *p,
int iLangid,
- int iIndex,
+ int iIndex,
sqlite3_int64 *pnMax
){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt;
@@ -157478,7 +157478,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMaxLevel(
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
- sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
+ sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
);
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pStmt) ){
@@ -157507,7 +157507,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentIsMaxLevel(Fts3Table *p, i64 iAbsLevel, int *pbMax){
int rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_SELECT_SEGDIR_MAX_LEVEL, &pStmt, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 1, iAbsLevel+1);
- sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
+ sqlite3_bind_int64(pStmt, 2,
((iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL)+1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL
);
@@ -157545,9 +157545,9 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegment(
** This function is used after merging multiple segments into a single large
** segment to delete the old, now redundant, segment b-trees. Specifically,
** it:
-**
-** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with
-** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third
+**
+** 1) Deletes all %_segments entries for the segments associated with
+** each of the SegReader objects in the array passed as the third
** argument, and
**
** 2) deletes all %_segdir entries with level iLevel, or all %_segdir
@@ -157579,7 +157579,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir(
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_DELETE_SEGDIR_RANGE, &pDelete, 0);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 1, getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, 0));
- sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2,
+ sqlite3_bind_int64(pDelete, 2,
getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL-1)
);
}
@@ -157601,7 +157601,7 @@ static int fts3DeleteSegdir(
}
/*
-** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains
+** When this function is called, buffer *ppList (size *pnList bytes) contains
** a position list that may (or may not) feature multiple columns. This
** function adjusts the pointer *ppList and the length *pnList so that they
** identify the subset of the position list that corresponds to column iCol.
@@ -157628,7 +157628,7 @@ static void fts3ColumnFilter(
while( 1 ){
char c = 0;
while( ppOffsetList
&& apSegment[j]->iDocid==iDocid
@@ -157751,7 +157751,7 @@ static int fts3SegReaderStart(
int i;
int nSeg = pCsr->nSegment;
- /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search
+ /* If the Fts3SegFilter defines a specific term (or term prefix) to search
** for, then advance each segment iterator until it points to a term of
** equal or greater value than the specified term. This prevents many
** unnecessary merge/sort operations for the case where single segment
@@ -157835,7 +157835,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrStart(
** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStart()
** sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep()
**
-** then the entire doclist for the term is available in
+** then the entire doclist for the term is available in
** MultiSegReader.aDoclist/nDoclist.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3MsrIncrRestart(Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr){
@@ -157883,9 +157883,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
do {
int nMerge;
int i;
-
+
/* Advance the first pCsr->nAdvance entries in the apSegment[] array
- ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again.
+ ** forward. Then sort the list in order of current term again.
*/
for(i=0; inAdvance; i++){
Fts3SegReader *pSeg = apSegment[i];
@@ -157907,34 +157907,34 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
pCsr->zTerm = apSegment[0]->zTerm;
/* If this is a prefix-search, and if the term that apSegment[0] points
- ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all
+ ** to does not share a suffix with pFilter->zTerm/nTerm, then all
** required callbacks have been made. In this case exit early.
**
** Similarly, if this is a search for an exact match, and the first term
** of segment apSegment[0] is not a match, exit early.
*/
if( pFilter->zTerm && !isScan ){
- if( pCsr->nTermnTerm
+ if( pCsr->nTermnTerm
|| (!isPrefix && pCsr->nTerm>pFilter->nTerm)
- || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm)
+ || memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, pFilter->zTerm, pFilter->nTerm)
){
break;
}
}
nMerge = 1;
- while( nMergeaNode
- && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm
+ && apSegment[nMerge]->nTerm==pCsr->nTerm
&& 0==memcmp(pCsr->zTerm, apSegment[nMerge]->zTerm, pCsr->nTerm)
){
nMerge++;
}
assert( isIgnoreEmpty || (isRequirePos && !isColFilter) );
- if( nMerge==1
- && !isIgnoreEmpty
- && !isFirst
+ if( nMerge==1
+ && !isIgnoreEmpty
+ && !isFirst
&& (p->bDescIdx==0 || fts3SegReaderIsPending(apSegment[0])==0)
){
pCsr->nDoclist = apSegment[0]->nDoclist;
@@ -157979,7 +157979,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
if( !isIgnoreEmpty || nList>0 ){
- /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged
+ /* Calculate the 'docid' delta value to write into the merged
** doclist. */
sqlite3_int64 iDelta;
if( p->bDescIdx && nDoclist>0 ){
@@ -158004,7 +158004,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(
if( isFirst ){
char *a = &pCsr->aBuffer[nDoclist];
int nWrite;
-
+
nWrite = sqlite3Fts3FirstFilter(iDelta, pList, nList, a);
if( nWrite ){
iPrev = iDocid;
@@ -158054,18 +158054,18 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3SegReaderFinish(
}
/*
-** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT
-** statement passed as the first argument.
+** Decode the "end_block" field, selected by column iCol of the SELECT
+** statement passed as the first argument.
**
** The "end_block" field may contain either an integer, or a text field
-** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated
-** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock
-** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second,
+** containing the text representation of two non-negative integers separated
+** by one or more space (0x20) characters. In the first case, set *piEndBlock
+** to the integer value and *pnByte to zero before returning. In the second,
** set *piEndBlock to the first value and *pnByte to the second.
*/
static void fts3ReadEndBlockField(
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
- int iCol,
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt,
+ int iCol,
i64 *piEndBlock,
i64 *pnByte
){
@@ -158111,10 +158111,10 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
i64 iLast = (iAbsLevel/FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL + 1) * FTS3_SEGDIR_MAXLEVEL - 1;
i64 nLimit = (nByte*3)/2;
- /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to
+ /* Loop through all entries in the %_segdir table corresponding to
** segments in this index on levels greater than iAbsLevel. If there is
- ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all
- ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be
+ ** at least one such segment, and it is possible to determine that all
+ ** such segments are smaller than nLimit bytes in size, they will be
** promoted to level iAbsLevel. */
sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 1, iAbsLevel+1);
sqlite3_bind_int64(pRange, 2, iLast);
@@ -158122,7 +158122,7 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
i64 nSize = 0, dummy;
fts3ReadEndBlockField(pRange, 2, &dummy, &nSize);
if( nSize<=0 || nSize>nLimit ){
- /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not
+ /* If nSize==0, then the %_segdir.end_block field does not not
** contain a size value. This happens if it was written by an
** old version of FTS. In this case it is not possible to determine
** the size of the segment, and so segment promotion does not
@@ -158188,18 +158188,18 @@ static int fts3PromoteSegments(
}
/*
-** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single
+** Merge all level iLevel segments in the database into a single
** iLevel+1 segment. Or, if iLevel<0, merge all segments into a
-** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level
+** single segment with a level equal to the numerically largest level
** currently present in the database.
**
** If this function is called with iLevel<0, but there is only one
-** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately.
-** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs,
+** segment in the database, SQLITE_DONE is returned immediately.
+** Otherwise, if successful, SQLITE_OK is returned. If an error occurs,
** an SQLite error code is returned.
*/
static int fts3SegmentMerge(
- Fts3Table *p,
+ Fts3Table *p,
int iLangid, /* Language id to merge */
int iIndex, /* Index in p->aIndex[] to merge */
int iLevel /* Level to merge */
@@ -158243,7 +158243,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
}else{
/* This call is to merge all segments at level iLevel. find the next
** available segment index at level iLevel+1. The call to
- ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to
+ ** fts3AllocateSegdirIdx() will merge the segments at level iLevel+1 to
** a single iLevel+2 segment if necessary. */
assert( FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING==-1 );
iNewLevel = getAbsoluteLevel(p, iLangid, iIndex, iLevel+1);
@@ -158264,7 +158264,7 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
while( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
rc = sqlite3Fts3SegReaderStep(p, &csr);
if( rc!=SQLITE_ROW ) break;
- rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1,
+ rc = fts3SegWriterAdd(p, &pWriter, 1,
csr.zTerm, csr.nTerm, csr.aDoclist, csr.nDoclist);
}
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto finished;
@@ -158292,13 +158292,13 @@ static int fts3SegmentMerge(
}
-/*
-** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments.
+/*
+** Flush the contents of pendingTerms to level 0 segments.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3PendingTermsFlush(Fts3Table *p){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int i;
-
+
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && inIndex; i++){
rc = fts3SegmentMerge(p, p->iPrevLangid, i, FTS3_SEGCURSOR_PENDING);
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ) rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -158400,7 +158400,7 @@ static void fts3InsertDocsize(
/*
** Record 0 of the %_stat table contains a blob consisting of N varints,
** where N is the number of user defined columns in the fts3 table plus
-** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the
+** two. If nCol is the number of user defined columns, then values of the
** varints are set as follows:
**
** Varint 0: Total number of rows in the table.
@@ -158484,7 +158484,7 @@ static void fts3UpdateDocTotals(
}
/*
-** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each
+** Merge the entire database so that there is one segment for each
** iIndex/iLangid combination.
*/
static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){
@@ -158523,7 +158523,7 @@ static int fts3DoOptimize(Fts3Table *p, int bReturnDone){
**
** INSERT INTO () VALUES('rebuild');
**
-** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one
+** The entire FTS index is discarded and rebuilt. If the table is one
** created using the content=xxx option, then the new index is based on
** the current contents of the xxx table. Otherwise, it is rebuilt based
** on the contents of the %_content table.
@@ -158603,9 +158603,9 @@ static int fts3DoRebuild(Fts3Table *p){
/*
-** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an
+** This function opens a cursor used to read the input data for an
** incremental merge operation. Specifically, it opens a cursor to scan
-** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute
+** the oldest nSeg segments (idx=0 through idx=(nSeg-1)) in absolute
** level iAbsLevel.
*/
static int fts3IncrmergeCsr(
@@ -158615,7 +158615,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeCsr(
Fts3MultiSegReader *pCsr /* Cursor object to populate */
){
int rc; /* Return Code */
- sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */
+ sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0; /* Statement used to read %_segdir entry */
int nByte; /* Bytes allocated at pCsr->apSegment[] */
/* Allocate space for the Fts3MultiSegReader.aCsr[] array */
@@ -158670,7 +158670,7 @@ struct Blob {
};
/*
-** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree
+** This structure is used to build up buffers containing segment b-tree
** nodes (blocks).
*/
struct NodeWriter {
@@ -158739,12 +158739,12 @@ static void blobGrowBuffer(Blob *pBlob, int nMin, int *pRc){
/*
** Attempt to advance the node-reader object passed as the first argument to
-** the next entry on the node.
+** the next entry on the node.
**
-** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible).
+** Return an error code if an error occurs (SQLITE_NOMEM is possible).
** Otherwise return SQLITE_OK. If there is no next entry on the node
** (e.g. because the current entry is the last) set NodeReader->aNode to
-** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output
+** NULL to indicate EOF. Otherwise, populate the NodeReader structure output
** variables for the new entry.
*/
static int nodeReaderNext(NodeReader *p){
@@ -158792,7 +158792,7 @@ static void nodeReaderRelease(NodeReader *p){
/*
** Initialize a node-reader object to read the node in buffer aNode/nNode.
**
-** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to
+** If successful, SQLITE_OK is returned and the NodeReader object set to
** point to the first entry on the node (if any). Otherwise, an SQLite
** error code is returned.
*/
@@ -158841,7 +158841,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
int nSpace;
/* Figure out how much space the key will consume if it is written to
- ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression,
+ ** the current node of layer iLayer. Due to the prefix compression,
** the space required changes depending on which node the key is to
** be added to. */
nPrefix = fts3PrefixCompress(pNode->key.a, pNode->key.n, zTerm, nTerm);
@@ -158849,9 +158849,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
nSpace = sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nPrefix);
nSpace += sqlite3Fts3VarintLen(nSuffix) + nSuffix;
- if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){
+ if( pNode->key.n==0 || (pNode->block.n + nSpace)<=p->nNodeSize ){
/* If the current node of layer iLayer contains zero keys, or if adding
- ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize
+ ** the key to it will not cause it to grow to larger than nNodeSize
** bytes in size, write the key here. */
Blob *pBlk = &pNode->block;
@@ -158907,12 +158907,12 @@ static int fts3IncrmergePush(
** A node header is a single 0x00 byte for a leaf node, or a height varint
** followed by the left-hand-child varint for an internal node.
**
-** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a
+** The term to be appended is passed via arguments zTerm/nTerm. For a
** leaf node, the doclist is passed as aDoclist/nDoclist. For an internal
** node, both aDoclist and nDoclist must be passed 0.
**
** If the size of the value in blob pPrev is zero, then this is the first
-** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the
+** term written to the node. Otherwise, pPrev contains a copy of the
** previous term. Before this function returns, it is updated to contain a
** copy of zTerm/nTerm.
**
@@ -158929,7 +158929,7 @@ static int fts3AppendToNode(
const char *zTerm, /* New term to write */
int nTerm, /* Size of zTerm in bytes */
const char *aDoclist, /* Doclist (or NULL) to write */
- int nDoclist /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */
+ int nDoclist /* Size of aDoclist in bytes */
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK; /* Return code */
int bFirst = (pPrev->n==0); /* True if this is the first term written */
@@ -159003,7 +159003,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeAppend(
rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pLeaf->iBlock, pLeaf->block.a, pLeaf->block.n);
pWriter->nWork++;
- /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the
+ /* Add the current term to the parent node. The term added to the
** parent must:
**
** a) be greater than the largest term on the leaf node just written
@@ -159068,7 +159068,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
NodeWriter *pRoot; /* NodeWriter for root node */
int rc = *pRc; /* Error code */
- /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment
+ /* Set iRoot to the index in pWriter->aNodeWriter[] of the output segment
** root node. If the segment fits entirely on a single leaf node, iRoot
** will be set to 0. If the root node is the parent of the leaves, iRoot
** will be 1. And so on. */
@@ -159086,17 +159086,17 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
/* The entire output segment fits on a single node. Normally, this means
** the node would be stored as a blob in the "root" column of the %_segdir
- ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that
- ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the
- ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated.
- ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle
+ ** table. However, this is not permitted in this case. The problem is that
+ ** space has already been reserved in the %_segments table, and so the
+ ** start_block and end_block fields of the %_segdir table must be populated.
+ ** And, by design or by accident, released versions of FTS cannot handle
** segments that fit entirely on the root node with start_block!=0.
**
- ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a
+ ** Instead, create a synthetic root node that contains nothing but a
** pointer to the single content node. So that the segment consists of a
** single leaf and a single interior (root) node.
**
- ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments
+ ** Todo: Better might be to defer allocating space in the %_segments
** table until we are sure it is needed.
*/
if( iRoot==0 ){
@@ -159124,7 +159124,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeRelease(
/* Write the %_segdir record. */
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p,
+ rc = fts3WriteSegdir(p,
pWriter->iAbsLevel+1, /* level */
pWriter->iIdx, /* idx */
pWriter->iStart, /* start_block */
@@ -159163,11 +159163,11 @@ static int fts3TermCmp(
/*
-** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is
+** Query to see if the entry in the %_segments table with blockid iEnd is
** NULL. If no error occurs and the entry is NULL, set *pbRes 1 before
-** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0.
+** returning. Otherwise, set *pbRes to 0.
**
-** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite
+** Or, if an error occurs while querying the database, return an SQLite
** error code. The final value of *pbRes is undefined in this case.
**
** This is used to test if a segment is an "appendable" segment. If it
@@ -159185,14 +159185,14 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){
if( SQLITE_ROW==sqlite3_step(pCheck) ) bRes = 1;
rc = sqlite3_reset(pCheck);
}
-
+
*pbRes = bRes;
return rc;
}
/*
** This function is called when initializing an incremental-merge operation.
-** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level
+** It checks if the existing segment with index value iIdx at absolute level
** (iAbsLevel+1) can be appended to by the incremental merge. If it can, the
** merge-writer object *pWriter is initialized to write to it.
**
@@ -159201,7 +159201,7 @@ static int fts3IsAppendable(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_int64 iEnd, int *pbRes){
** * It was initially created as an appendable segment (with all required
** space pre-allocated), and
**
-** * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is
+** * The first key read from the input (arguments zKey and nKey) is
** greater than the largest key currently stored in the potential
** output segment.
*/
@@ -159331,13 +159331,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeLoad(
/*
** Determine the largest segment index value that exists within absolute
** level iAbsLevel+1. If no error occurs, set *piIdx to this value plus
-** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all
+** one before returning SQLITE_OK. Or, if there are no segments at all
** within level iAbsLevel, set *piIdx to zero.
**
** If an error occurs, return an SQLite error code. The final value of
** *piIdx is undefined in this case.
*/
-static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
+static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
Fts3Table *p, /* FTS Table handle */
sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel, /* Absolute index of input segments */
int *piIdx /* OUT: Next free index at iAbsLevel+1 */
@@ -159356,7 +159356,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Allocate an appendable output segment on absolute level iAbsLevel+1
** with idx value iIdx.
**
@@ -159370,7 +159370,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
** When an appendable segment is allocated, it is estimated that the
** maximum number of leaf blocks that may be required is the sum of the
** number of leaf blocks consumed by the input segments, plus the number
-** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack
+** of input segments, multiplied by two. This value is stored in stack
** variable nLeafEst.
**
** A total of 16*nLeafEst blocks are allocated when an appendable segment
@@ -159379,10 +159379,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeOutputIdx(
** of interior nodes that are parents of the leaf nodes start at block
** (start_block + (1 + end_block - start_block) / 16). And so on.
**
-** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the
+** In the actual code below, the value "16" is replaced with the
** pre-processor macro FTS_MAX_APPENDABLE_HEIGHT.
*/
-static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
+static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
Fts3Table *p, /* Fts3 table handle */
sqlite3_int64 iAbsLevel, /* Absolute level of input segments */
int iIdx, /* Index of new output segment */
@@ -159420,7 +159420,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
/* Insert the marker in the %_segments table to make sure nobody tries
- ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify
+ ** to steal the space just allocated. This is also used to identify
** appendable segments. */
rc = fts3WriteSegment(p, pWriter->iEnd, 0, 0);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) return rc;
@@ -159437,13 +159437,13 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeWriter(
}
/*
-** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the
+** Remove an entry from the %_segdir table. This involves running the
** following two statements:
**
** DELETE FROM %_segdir WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx = :iIdx
** UPDATE %_segdir SET idx = idx - 1 WHERE level = :iAbsLevel AND idx > :iIdx
**
-** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE
+** The DELETE statement removes the specific %_segdir level. The UPDATE
** statement ensures that the remaining segments have contiguously allocated
** idx values.
*/
@@ -159565,8 +159565,8 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode(
pNew->n = 0;
/* Populate new node buffer */
- for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode);
- rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode;
+ for(rc = nodeReaderInit(&reader, aNode, nNode);
+ rc==SQLITE_OK && reader.aNode;
rc = nodeReaderNext(&reader)
){
if( pNew->n==0 ){
@@ -159593,7 +159593,7 @@ static int fts3TruncateNode(
}
/*
-** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute
+** Remove all terms smaller than zTerm/nTerm from segment iIdx in absolute
** level iAbsLevel. This may involve deleting entries from the %_segments
** table, and modifying existing entries in both the %_segments and %_segdir
** tables.
@@ -159716,9 +159716,9 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeChomp(
}
*pnRem = 0;
}else{
- /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this
+ /* The incremental merge did not copy all the data from this
** segment to the upper level. The segment is modified in place
- ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */
+ ** so that it contains no keys smaller than zTerm/nTerm. */
const char *zTerm = pSeg->zTerm;
int nTerm = pSeg->nTerm;
rc = fts3TruncateSegment(p, iAbsLevel, pSeg->iIdx, zTerm, nTerm);
@@ -159753,7 +159753,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintStore(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){
}
/*
-** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one
+** Load an incr-merge hint from the database. The incr-merge hint, if one
** exists, is stored in the rowid==1 row of the %_stat table.
**
** If successful, populate blob *pHint with the value read from the %_stat
@@ -159790,7 +159790,7 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintLoad(Fts3Table *p, Blob *pHint){
/*
** If *pRc is not SQLITE_OK when this function is called, it is a no-op.
** Otherwise, append an entry to the hint stored in blob *pHint. Each entry
-** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments
+** consists of two varints, the absolute level number of the input segments
** and the number of input segments.
**
** If successful, leave *pRc set to SQLITE_OK and return. If an error occurs,
@@ -159811,7 +159811,7 @@ static void fts3IncrmergeHintPush(
/*
** Read the last entry (most recently pushed) from the hint blob *pHint
-** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and
+** and then remove the entry. Write the two values read to *piAbsLevel and
** *pnInput before returning.
**
** If no error occurs, return SQLITE_OK. If the hint blob in *pHint does
@@ -159837,10 +159837,10 @@ static int fts3IncrmergeHintPop(Blob *pHint, i64 *piAbsLevel, int *pnInput){
/*
** Attempt an incremental merge that writes nMerge leaf blocks.
**
-** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments
-** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest
-** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains
-** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to
+** Incremental merges happen nMin segments at a time. The segments
+** to be merged are the nMin oldest segments (the ones with the smallest
+** values for the _segdir.idx field) in the highest level that contains
+** at least nMin segments. Multiple merges might occur in an attempt to
** write the quota of nMerge leaf blocks.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
@@ -159871,7 +159871,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
/* Search the %_segdir table for the absolute level with the smallest
** relative level number that contains at least nMin segments, if any.
** If one is found, set iAbsLevel to the absolute level number and
- ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found,
+ ** nSeg to nMin. If no level with at least nMin segments can be found,
** set nSeg to -1.
*/
rc = fts3SqlStmt(p, SQL_FIND_MERGE_LEVEL, &pFindLevel, 0);
@@ -159887,7 +159887,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
/* If the hint read from the %_stat table is not empty, check if the
** last entry in it specifies a relative level smaller than or equal
- ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this
+ ** to the level identified by the block above (if any). If so, this
** iteration of the loop will work on merging at the hinted level.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && hint.n ){
@@ -159913,11 +159913,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Incrmerge(Fts3Table *p, int nMerge, int nMin){
** Exit early in this case. */
if( nSeg<0 ) break;
- /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg
- ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using
+ /* Open a cursor to iterate through the contents of the oldest nSeg
+ ** indexes of absolute level iAbsLevel. If this cursor is opened using
** the 'hint' parameters, it is possible that there are less than nSeg
** segments available in level iAbsLevel. In this case, no work is
- ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop
+ ** done on iAbsLevel - fall through to the next iteration of the loop
** to start work on some other level. */
memset(pWriter, 0, nAlloc);
pFilter->flags = FTS3_SEGMENT_REQUIRE_POS;
@@ -160184,7 +160184,7 @@ static u64 fts3ChecksumIndex(
** to true and return SQLITE_OK. Or if the contents do not match, set *pbOk
** to false before returning.
**
-** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error
+** If an error occurs (e.g. an OOM or IO error), return an SQLite error
** code. The final value of *pbOk is undefined in this case.
*/
static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
@@ -160215,7 +160215,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = p->pTokenizer->pModule;
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
char *zSql;
-
+
zSql = sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT %s" , p->zReadExprlist);
if( !zSql ){
rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
@@ -160275,7 +160275,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
** the FTS index are correct, return SQLITE_OK. Or, if the contents of the
** FTS index are incorrect, return SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB.
**
-** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite
+** Or, if an error (e.g. an OOM or IO error) occurs, return an SQLite
** error code.
**
** The integrity-check works as follows. For each token and indexed token
@@ -160284,7 +160284,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
**
** + The index number (0 for the main index, 1 for the first prefix
** index etc.),
-** + The token (or token prefix) text itself,
+** + The token (or token prefix) text itself,
** + The language-id of the row it appears in,
** + The docid of the row it appears in,
** + The column it appears in, and
@@ -160295,7 +160295,7 @@ static int fts3IntegrityCheck(Fts3Table *p, int *pbOk){
**
** The integrity-check code calculates the same checksum in two ways:
**
-** 1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and
+** 1. By scanning the contents of the FTS index, and
** 2. By scanning and tokenizing the content table.
**
** If the two checksums are identical, the integrity-check is deemed to have
@@ -160316,7 +160316,7 @@ static int fts3DoIntegrityCheck(
**
** "INSERT INTO tbl(tbl) VALUES()"
**
-** Argument pVal contains the result of . Currently the only
+** Argument pVal contains the result of . Currently the only
** meaningful value to insert is the text 'optimize'.
*/
static int fts3SpecialInsert(Fts3Table *p, sqlite3_value *pVal){
@@ -160368,7 +160368,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
}
/*
-** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to
+** Free all entries in the pCsr->pDeffered list. Entries are added to
** this list using sqlite3Fts3DeferToken().
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3FreeDeferredTokens(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
@@ -160396,14 +160396,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
int i; /* Used to iterate through table columns */
sqlite3_int64 iDocid; /* Docid of the row pCsr points to */
Fts3DeferredToken *pDef; /* Used to iterate through deferred tokens */
-
+
Fts3Table *p = (Fts3Table *)pCsr->base.pVtab;
sqlite3_tokenizer *pT = p->pTokenizer;
sqlite3_tokenizer_module const *pModule = pT->pModule;
-
+
assert( pCsr->isRequireSeek==0 );
iDocid = sqlite3_column_int64(pCsr->pStmt, 0);
-
+
for(i=0; inColumn && rc==SQLITE_OK; i++){
if( p->abNotindexed[i]==0 ){
const char *zText = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, i+1);
@@ -160444,8 +160444,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3CacheDeferredDoclists(Fts3Cursor *pCsr){
}
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(
- Fts3DeferredToken *p,
- char **ppData,
+ Fts3DeferredToken *p,
+ char **ppData,
int *pnData
){
char *pRet;
@@ -160465,7 +160465,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferredTokenList(
nSkip = sqlite3Fts3GetVarint(p->pList->aData, &dummy);
*pnData = p->pList->nData - nSkip;
*ppData = pRet;
-
+
memcpy(pRet, &p->pList->aData[nSkip], *pnData);
return SQLITE_OK;
}
@@ -160485,7 +160485,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(
}
memset(pDeferred, 0, sizeof(*pDeferred));
pDeferred->pToken = pToken;
- pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred;
+ pDeferred->pNext = pCsr->pDeferred;
pDeferred->iCol = iCol;
pCsr->pDeferred = pDeferred;
@@ -160502,8 +160502,8 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3DeferToken(
** of subsiduary data structures accordingly.
*/
static int fts3DeleteByRowid(
- Fts3Table *p,
- sqlite3_value *pRowid,
+ Fts3Table *p,
+ sqlite3_value *pRowid,
int *pnChng, /* IN/OUT: Decrement if row is deleted */
u32 *aSzDel
){
@@ -160541,14 +160541,14 @@ static int fts3DeleteByRowid(
** This function does the work for the xUpdate method of FTS3 virtual
** tables. The schema of the virtual table being:
**
-** CREATE TABLE (
+** CREATE TABLE (
** ,
-** HIDDEN,
-** docid HIDDEN,
+** HIDDEN,
+** docid HIDDEN,
** HIDDEN
** );
**
-**
+**
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, /* FTS3 vtab object */
@@ -160569,7 +160569,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
assert( p->bHasStat==0 || p->bHasStat==1 );
assert( p->pSegments==0 );
- assert(
+ assert(
nArg==1 /* DELETE operations */
|| nArg==(2 + p->nColumn + 3) /* INSERT or UPDATE operations */
);
@@ -160578,9 +160578,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
**
** INSERT INTO xyz(xyz) VALUES('command');
*/
- if( nArg>1
- && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL
- && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL
+ if( nArg>1
+ && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL
+ && sqlite3_value_type(apVal[p->nColumn+2])!=SQLITE_NULL
){
rc = fts3SpecialInsert(p, apVal[p->nColumn+2]);
goto update_out;
@@ -160619,24 +160619,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
pNewRowid = apVal[1];
}
- if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && (
+ if( sqlite3_value_type(pNewRowid)!=SQLITE_NULL && (
sqlite3_value_type(apVal[0])==SQLITE_NULL
|| sqlite3_value_int64(apVal[0])!=sqlite3_value_int64(pNewRowid)
)){
/* The new rowid is not NULL (in this case the rowid will be
- ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and
+ ** automatically assigned and there is no chance of a conflict), and
** the statement is either an INSERT or an UPDATE that modifies the
** rowid column. So if the conflict mode is REPLACE, then delete any
- ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid.
+ ** existing row with rowid=pNewRowid.
**
- ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into
+ ** Or, if the conflict mode is not REPLACE, insert the new record into
** the %_content table. If we hit the duplicate rowid constraint (or any
** other error) while doing so, return immediately.
**
** This branch may also run if pNewRowid contains a value that cannot
- ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual
+ ** be losslessly converted to an integer. In this case, the eventual
** call to fts3InsertData() (either just below or further on in this
- ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is
+ ** function) will return SQLITE_MISMATCH. If fts3DeleteByRowid is
** invoked, it will delete zero rows (since no row will have
** docid=$pNewRowid if $pNewRowid is not an integer value).
*/
@@ -160658,7 +160658,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
rc = fts3DeleteByRowid(p, apVal[0], &nChng, aSzDel);
isRemove = 1;
}
-
+
/* If this is an INSERT or UPDATE operation, insert the new record. */
if( nArg>1 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
int iLangid = sqlite3_value_int(apVal[2 + p->nColumn + 2]);
@@ -160691,10 +160691,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3UpdateMethod(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Flush any data in the pending-terms hash table to disk. If successful,
-** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if
-** there was any data to flush) into a single segment.
+** merge all segments in the database (including the new segment, if
+** there was any data to flush) into a single segment.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){
int rc;
@@ -160750,7 +160750,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3Fts3Optimize(Fts3Table *p){
#define FTS3_MATCHINFO_LHITS_BM 'b' /* nCol*nPhrase values */
/*
-** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo().
+** The default value for the second argument to matchinfo().
*/
#define FTS3_MATCHINFO_DEFAULT "pcx"
@@ -160767,7 +160767,7 @@ struct LoadDoclistCtx {
};
/*
-** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the
+** The following types are used as part of the implementation of the
** fts3BestSnippet() routine.
*/
typedef struct SnippetIter SnippetIter;
@@ -160800,7 +160800,7 @@ struct SnippetFragment {
};
/*
-** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while
+** This type is used as an fts3ExprIterate() context object while
** accumulating the data returned by the matchinfo() function.
*/
typedef struct MatchInfo MatchInfo;
@@ -160869,8 +160869,8 @@ static MatchinfoBuffer *fts3MIBufferNew(int nElem, const char *zMatchinfo){
static void fts3MIBufferFree(void *p){
MatchinfoBuffer *pBuf = (MatchinfoBuffer*)((u8*)p - ((u32*)p)[-1]);
- assert( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1]
- || (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[pBuf->nElem+2]
+ assert( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1]
+ || (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[pBuf->nElem+2]
);
if( (u32*)p==&pBuf->aMatchinfo[1] ){
pBuf->aRef[1] = 0;
@@ -160926,7 +160926,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3MIBufferFree(MatchinfoBuffer *p){
}
}
-/*
+/*
** End of MatchinfoBuffer code.
*************************************************************************/
@@ -160987,7 +160987,7 @@ static int fts3ExprIterate2(
** are part of a sub-tree that is the right-hand-side of a NOT operator.
** For each phrase node found, the supplied callback function is invoked.
**
-** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK,
+** If the callback function returns anything other than SQLITE_OK,
** the iteration is abandoned and the error code returned immediately.
** Otherwise, SQLITE_OK is returned after a callback has been made for
** all eligible phrase nodes.
@@ -161022,11 +161022,11 @@ static int fts3ExprLoadDoclistsCb(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
/*
** Load the doclists for each phrase in the query associated with FTS3 cursor
-** pCsr.
+** pCsr.
**
-** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable
-** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or
-** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If
+** If pnPhrase is not NULL, then *pnPhrase is set to the number of matchable
+** phrases in the expression (all phrases except those directly or
+** indirectly descended from the right-hand-side of a NOT operator). If
** pnToken is not NULL, then it is set to the number of tokens in all
** matchable phrases of the expression.
*/
@@ -161056,7 +161056,7 @@ static int fts3ExprPhraseCount(Fts3Expr *pExpr){
}
/*
-** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two
+** Advance the position list iterator specified by the first two
** arguments so that it points to the first element with a value greater
** than or equal to parameter iNext.
*/
@@ -161125,7 +161125,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetNextCandidate(SnippetIter *pIter){
}
/*
-** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet
+** Retrieve information about the current candidate snippet of snippet
** iterator pIter.
*/
static void fts3SnippetDetails(
@@ -161201,7 +161201,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
pPhrase->iTail = iFirst;
}else{
assert( rc!=SQLITE_OK || (
- pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0
+ pPhrase->pList==0 && pPhrase->pHead==0 && pPhrase->pTail==0
));
}
@@ -161209,14 +161209,14 @@ static int fts3SnippetFindPositions(Fts3Expr *pExpr, int iPhrase, void *ctx){
}
/*
-** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens
+** Select the fragment of text consisting of nFragment contiguous tokens
** from column iCol that represent the "best" snippet. The best snippet
** is the snippet with the highest score, where scores are calculated
** by adding:
**
** (a) +1 point for each occurrence of a matchable phrase in the snippet.
**
-** (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in
+** (b) +1000 points for the first occurrence of each matchable phrase in
** the snippet for which the corresponding mCovered bit is not set.
**
** The selected snippet parameters are stored in structure *pFragment before
@@ -161277,7 +161277,7 @@ static int fts3BestSnippet(
}
}
- /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in
+ /* Loop through all candidate snippets. Store the best snippet in
** *pFragment. Store its associated 'score' in iBestScore.
*/
pFragment->iCol = iCol;
@@ -161349,8 +161349,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend(
**
** ........X.....X
**
-** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the
-** document so that there are approximately the same number of
+** This function "shifts" the beginning of the snippet forward in the
+** document so that there are approximately the same number of
** non-highlighted terms to the right of the final highlighted term as there
** are to the left of the first highlighted term. For example, to this:
**
@@ -161358,8 +161358,8 @@ static int fts3StringAppend(
**
** This is done as part of extracting the snippet text, not when selecting
** the snippet. Snippet selection is done based on doclists only, so there
-** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document
-** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term.
+** is no way for fts3BestSnippet() to know whether or not the document
+** actually contains terms that follow the final highlighted term.
*/
static int fts3SnippetShift(
Fts3Table *pTab, /* FTS3 table snippet comes from */
@@ -161448,7 +161448,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
int iCol = pFragment->iCol+1; /* Query column to extract text from */
sqlite3_tokenizer_module *pMod; /* Tokenizer module methods object */
sqlite3_tokenizer_cursor *pC; /* Tokenizer cursor open on zDoc/nDoc */
-
+
zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol);
if( zDoc==0 ){
if( sqlite3_column_type(pCsr->pStmt, iCol)!=SQLITE_NULL ){
@@ -161488,7 +161488,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
/* Special case - the last token of the snippet is also the last token
** of the column. Append any punctuation that occurred between the end
- ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output.
+ ** of the previous token and the end of the document to the output.
** Then break out of the loop. */
rc = fts3StringAppend(pOut, &zDoc[iEnd], -1);
}
@@ -161505,7 +161505,7 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
/* Now that the shift has been done, check if the initial "..." are
** required. They are required if (a) this is not the first fragment,
- ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column.
+ ** or (b) this fragment does not begin at position 0 of its column.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
if( iPos>0 || iFragment>0 ){
@@ -161541,8 +161541,8 @@ static int fts3SnippetText(
/*
-** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a
-** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single
+** This function is used to count the entries in a column-list (a
+** delta-encoded list of term offsets within a single column of a single
** row). When this function is called, *ppCollist should point to the
** beginning of the first varint in the column-list (the varint that
** contains the position of the first matching term in the column data).
@@ -161624,11 +161624,11 @@ static void fts3ExprLHitGather(
/*
** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "global" matchinfo stats
-** for a single query.
+** for a single query.
**
** fts3ExprIterate() callback to load the 'global' elements of a
-** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements
-** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the
+** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS matchinfo array. The global stats are those elements
+** of the matchinfo array that are constant for all rows returned by the
** current query.
**
** Argument pCtx is actually a pointer to a struct of type MatchInfo. This
@@ -161644,7 +161644,7 @@ static void fts3ExprLHitGather(
** at least one instance of phrase iPhrase.
**
** If the phrase pExpr consists entirely of deferred tokens, then all X and
-** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the
+** Y values are set to nDoc, where nDoc is the number of documents in the
** file system. This is done because the full-text index doclist is required
** to calculate these values properly, and the full-text index doclist is
** not available for deferred tokens.
@@ -161662,7 +161662,7 @@ static int fts3ExprGlobalHitsCb(
/*
** fts3ExprIterate() callback used to collect the "local" part of the
-** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the
+** FTS3_MATCHINFO_HITS array. The local stats are those elements of the
** array that are different for each row returned by the query.
*/
static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb(
@@ -161689,7 +161689,7 @@ static int fts3ExprLocalHitsCb(
}
static int fts3MatchinfoCheck(
- Fts3Table *pTab,
+ Fts3Table *pTab,
char cArg,
char **pzErr
){
@@ -161714,8 +161714,8 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSize(MatchInfo *pInfo, char cArg){
switch( cArg ){
case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC:
- case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE:
- case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL:
+ case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE:
+ case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL:
nVal = 1;
break;
@@ -161769,7 +161769,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoSelectDoctotal(
}
/*
-** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while
+** An instance of the following structure is used to store state while
** iterating through a multi-column position-list corresponding to the
** hits for a single phrase on a single row in order to calculate the
** values for a matchinfo() FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS request.
@@ -161782,7 +161782,7 @@ struct LcsIterator {
int iPos; /* Current position */
};
-/*
+/*
** If LcsIterator.iCol is set to the following value, the iterator has
** finished iterating through all offsets for all columns.
*/
@@ -161819,16 +161819,16 @@ static int fts3LcsIteratorAdvance(LcsIterator *pIter){
pIter->pRead = pRead;
return rc;
}
-
+
/*
-** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag.
+** This function implements the FTS3_MATCHINFO_LCS matchinfo() flag.
**
** If the call is successful, the longest-common-substring lengths for each
-** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[]
+** column are written into the first nCol elements of the pInfo->aMatchinfo[]
** array before returning. SQLITE_OK is returned in this case.
**
** Otherwise, if an error occurs, an SQLite error code is returned and the
-** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is
+** data written to the first nCol elements of pInfo->aMatchinfo[] is
** undefined.
*/
static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
@@ -161900,7 +161900,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
/*
** Populate the buffer pInfo->aMatchinfo[] with an array of integers to
-** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the
+** be returned by the matchinfo() function. Argument zArg contains the
** format string passed as the second argument to matchinfo (or the
** default value "pcx" if no second argument was specified). The format
** string has already been validated and the pInfo->aMatchinfo[] array
@@ -161911,7 +161911,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoLcs(Fts3Cursor *pCsr, MatchInfo *pInfo){
** rows (i.e. FTS3_MATCHINFO_NPHRASE, NCOL, NDOC, AVGLENGTH and part of HITS)
** have already been populated.
**
-** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error
+** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code if an error
** occurs. If a value other than SQLITE_OK is returned, the state the
** pInfo->aMatchinfo[] buffer is left in is undefined.
*/
@@ -161936,7 +161936,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NCOL:
if( bGlobal ) pInfo->aMatchinfo[0] = pInfo->nCol;
break;
-
+
case FTS3_MATCHINFO_NDOC:
if( bGlobal ){
sqlite3_int64 nDoc = 0;
@@ -161945,7 +161945,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
}
break;
- case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH:
+ case FTS3_MATCHINFO_AVGLENGTH:
if( bGlobal ){
sqlite3_int64 nDoc; /* Number of rows in table */
const char *a; /* Aggregate column length array */
@@ -162024,7 +162024,7 @@ static int fts3MatchinfoValues(
/*
-** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The
+** Populate pCsr->aMatchinfo[] with data for the current row. The
** 'matchinfo' data is an array of 32-bit unsigned integers (C type u32).
*/
static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
@@ -162044,8 +162044,8 @@ static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
sInfo.pCursor = pCsr;
sInfo.nCol = pTab->nColumn;
- /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the
- ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard
+ /* If there is cached matchinfo() data, but the format string for the
+ ** cache does not match the format string for this request, discard
** the cached data. */
if( pCsr->pMIBuffer && strcmp(pCsr->pMIBuffer->zMatchinfo, zArg) ){
sqlite3Fts3MIBufferFree(pCsr->pMIBuffer);
@@ -162053,7 +162053,7 @@ static void fts3GetMatchinfo(
}
/* If Fts3Cursor.pMIBuffer is NULL, then this is the first time the
- ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case
+ ** matchinfo function has been called for this query. In this case
** allocate the array used to accumulate the matchinfo data and
** initialize those elements that are constant for every row.
*/
@@ -162128,7 +162128,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet(
/* The returned text includes up to four fragments of text extracted from
** the data in the current row. The first iteration of the for(...) loop
- ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in
+ ** below attempts to locate a single fragment of text nToken tokens in
** size that contains at least one instance of all phrases in the query
** expression that appear in the current row. If such a fragment of text
** cannot be found, the second iteration of the loop attempts to locate
@@ -162195,7 +162195,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Snippet(
assert( nFToken>0 );
for(i=0; iiPrevId;
sCtx.pCsr = pCsr;
- /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to
+ /* Loop through the table columns, appending offset information to
** string-buffer res for each column.
*/
for(iCol=0; iColnColumn; iCol++){
@@ -162306,7 +162306,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
const char *zDoc;
int nDoc;
- /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is
+ /* Initialize the contents of sCtx.aTerm[] for column iCol. There is
** no way that this operation can fail, so the return code from
** fts3ExprIterate() can be discarded.
*/
@@ -162314,11 +162314,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
sCtx.iTerm = 0;
(void)fts3ExprIterate(pCsr->pExpr, fts3ExprTermOffsetInit, (void*)&sCtx);
- /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored
+ /* Retreive the text stored in column iCol. If an SQL NULL is stored
** in column iCol, jump immediately to the next iteration of the loop.
** If an OOM occurs while retrieving the data (this can happen if SQLite
- ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM
- ** to the caller.
+ ** needs to transform the data from utf-16 to utf-8), return SQLITE_NOMEM
+ ** to the caller.
*/
zDoc = (const char *)sqlite3_column_text(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
nDoc = sqlite3_column_bytes(pCsr->pStmt, iCol+1);
@@ -162365,7 +162365,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3Offsets(
}
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
char aBuffer[64];
- sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer,
+ sqlite3_snprintf(sizeof(aBuffer), aBuffer,
"%d %d %d %d ", iCol, pTerm-sCtx.aTerm, iStart, iEnd-iStart
);
rc = fts3StringAppend(&res, aBuffer, -1);
@@ -162546,7 +162546,7 @@ static int unicodeDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
**
** For each codepoint in the zIn/nIn string, this function checks if the
** sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() function already returns the desired result.
-** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the
+** If so, no action is taken. Otherwise, the codepoint is added to the
** unicode_tokenizer.aiException[] array. For the purposes of tokenization,
** the return value of sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum() is inverted for all
** codepoints in the aiException[] array.
@@ -162572,8 +162572,8 @@ static int unicodeAddExceptions(
while( zaInput[pCsr->nInput];
/* Scan past any delimiter characters before the start of the next token.
- ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of
+ ** Return SQLITE_DONE early if this takes us all the way to the end of
** the input. */
while( z=zTerm ) break;
READ_UTF8(z, zTerm, iCode);
- }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode)
+ }while( unicodeIsAlnum(p, iCode)
|| sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsdiacritic(iCode)
);
@@ -162801,7 +162801,7 @@ static int unicodeNext(
}
/*
-** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module
+** Set *ppModule to a pointer to the sqlite3_tokenizer_module
** structure for the unicode tokenizer.
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3UnicodeTokenizer(sqlite3_tokenizer_module const **ppModule){
@@ -162856,11 +162856,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){
** range of unicode codepoints that are not either letters or numbers (i.e.
** codepoints for which this function should return 0).
**
- ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
+ ** The most significant 22 bits in each 32-bit value contain the first
** codepoint in the range. The least significant 10 bits are used to store
- ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
- ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
- ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
+ ** the size of the range (always at least 1). In other words, the value
+ ** ((C<<22) + N) represents a range of N codepoints starting with codepoint
+ ** C. It is not possible to represent a range larger than 1023 codepoints
** using this format.
*/
static const unsigned int aEntry[] = {
@@ -162985,30 +162985,30 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeIsalnum(int c){
*/
static int remove_diacritic(int c){
unsigned short aDia[] = {
- 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995,
- 2024, 2040, 2060, 2110, 2168, 2206, 2264, 2286,
- 2344, 2383, 2472, 2488, 2516, 2596, 2668, 2732,
- 2782, 2842, 2894, 2954, 2984, 3000, 3028, 3336,
- 3456, 3696, 3712, 3728, 3744, 3896, 3912, 3928,
- 3968, 4008, 4040, 4106, 4138, 4170, 4202, 4234,
- 4266, 4296, 4312, 4344, 4408, 4424, 4472, 4504,
- 6148, 6198, 6264, 6280, 6360, 6429, 6505, 6529,
- 61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726,
- 61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122,
- 62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536,
- 62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730,
- 62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390,
+ 0, 1797, 1848, 1859, 1891, 1928, 1940, 1995,
+ 2024, 2040, 2060, 2110, 2168, 2206, 2264, 2286,
+ 2344, 2383, 2472, 2488, 2516, 2596, 2668, 2732,
+ 2782, 2842, 2894, 2954, 2984, 3000, 3028, 3336,
+ 3456, 3696, 3712, 3728, 3744, 3896, 3912, 3928,
+ 3968, 4008, 4040, 4106, 4138, 4170, 4202, 4234,
+ 4266, 4296, 4312, 4344, 4408, 4424, 4472, 4504,
+ 6148, 6198, 6264, 6280, 6360, 6429, 6505, 6529,
+ 61448, 61468, 61534, 61592, 61642, 61688, 61704, 61726,
+ 61784, 61800, 61836, 61880, 61914, 61948, 61998, 62122,
+ 62154, 62200, 62218, 62302, 62364, 62442, 62478, 62536,
+ 62554, 62584, 62604, 62640, 62648, 62656, 62664, 62730,
+ 62924, 63050, 63082, 63274, 63390,
};
char aChar[] = {
- '\0', 'a', 'c', 'e', 'i', 'n', 'o', 'u', 'y', 'y', 'a', 'c',
- 'd', 'e', 'e', 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k', 'l', 'n', 'o', 'r',
- 's', 't', 'u', 'u', 'w', 'y', 'z', 'o', 'u', 'a', 'i', 'o',
- 'u', 'g', 'k', 'o', 'j', 'g', 'n', 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', 'r',
- 'u', 's', 't', 'h', 'a', 'e', 'o', 'y', '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0',
- '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a', 'b', 'd', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g', 'h',
- 'h', 'i', 'k', 'l', 'l', 'm', 'n', 'p', 'r', 'r', 's', 't',
- 'u', 'v', 'w', 'w', 'x', 'y', 'z', 'h', 't', 'w', 'y', 'a',
- 'e', 'i', 'o', 'u', 'y',
+ '\0', 'a', 'c', 'e', 'i', 'n', 'o', 'u', 'y', 'y', 'a', 'c',
+ 'd', 'e', 'e', 'g', 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k', 'l', 'n', 'o', 'r',
+ 's', 't', 'u', 'u', 'w', 'y', 'z', 'o', 'u', 'a', 'i', 'o',
+ 'u', 'g', 'k', 'o', 'j', 'g', 'n', 'a', 'e', 'i', 'o', 'r',
+ 'u', 's', 't', 'h', 'a', 'e', 'o', 'y', '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0',
+ '\0', '\0', '\0', '\0', 'a', 'b', 'd', 'd', 'e', 'f', 'g', 'h',
+ 'h', 'i', 'k', 'l', 'l', 'm', 'n', 'p', 'r', 'r', 's', 't',
+ 'u', 'v', 'w', 'w', 'x', 'y', 'z', 'h', 't', 'w', 'y', 'a',
+ 'e', 'i', 'o', 'u', 'y',
};
unsigned int key = (((unsigned int)c)<<3) | 0x00000007;
@@ -163129,19 +163129,19 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
{42802, 1, 62}, {42873, 1, 4}, {42877, 76, 1},
{42878, 1, 10}, {42891, 0, 1}, {42893, 74, 1},
{42896, 1, 4}, {42912, 1, 10}, {42922, 72, 1},
- {65313, 14, 26},
+ {65313, 14, 26},
};
static const unsigned short aiOff[] = {
- 1, 2, 8, 15, 16, 26, 28, 32,
- 37, 38, 40, 48, 63, 64, 69, 71,
- 79, 80, 116, 202, 203, 205, 206, 207,
- 209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 217, 218, 219,
- 775, 7264, 10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721,
- 54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274,
- 57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406,
- 65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462,
- 65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511,
- 65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529,
+ 1, 2, 8, 15, 16, 26, 28, 32,
+ 37, 38, 40, 48, 63, 64, 69, 71,
+ 79, 80, 116, 202, 203, 205, 206, 207,
+ 209, 210, 211, 213, 214, 217, 218, 219,
+ 775, 7264, 10792, 10795, 23228, 23256, 30204, 54721,
+ 54753, 54754, 54756, 54787, 54793, 54809, 57153, 57274,
+ 57921, 58019, 58363, 61722, 65268, 65341, 65373, 65406,
+ 65408, 65410, 65415, 65424, 65436, 65439, 65450, 65462,
+ 65472, 65476, 65478, 65480, 65482, 65488, 65506, 65511,
+ 65514, 65521, 65527, 65528, 65529,
};
int ret = c;
@@ -163178,7 +163178,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
if( bRemoveDiacritic ) ret = remove_diacritic(ret);
}
-
+
else if( c>=66560 && c<66600 ){
ret = c + 40;
}
@@ -163209,7 +163209,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
** Database Format of R-Tree Tables
** --------------------------------
**
-** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three
+** The data structure for a single virtual r-tree table is stored in three
** native SQLite tables declared as follows. In each case, the '%' character
** in the table name is replaced with the user-supplied name of the r-tree
** table.
@@ -163234,7 +163234,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3FtsUnicodeFold(int c, int bRemoveDiacritic){
** of the node contain the tree depth as a big-endian integer.
** For non-root nodes, the first 2 bytes are left unused.
**
-** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently
+** 2. The next 2 bytes contain the number of entries currently
** stored in the node.
**
** 3. The remainder of the node contains the node entries. Each entry
@@ -163286,7 +163286,7 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint;
#define RTREE_MAX_DIMENSIONS 5
/* Size of hash table Rtree.aHash. This hash table is not expected to
-** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is
+** ever contain very many entries, so a fixed number of buckets is
** used.
*/
#define HASHSIZE 97
@@ -163295,13 +163295,13 @@ typedef struct RtreeSearchPoint RtreeSearchPoint;
** the number of rows in the virtual table to calculate the costs of
** various strategies. If possible, this estimate is loaded from the
** sqlite_stat1 table (with RTREE_MIN_ROWEST as a hard-coded minimum).
-** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use
+** Otherwise, if no sqlite_stat1 entry is available, use
** RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST.
*/
#define RTREE_DEFAULT_ROWEST 1048576
#define RTREE_MIN_ROWEST 100
-/*
+/*
** An rtree virtual-table object.
*/
struct Rtree {
@@ -163315,14 +163315,14 @@ struct Rtree {
u8 inWrTrans; /* True if inside write transaction */
int iDepth; /* Current depth of the r-tree structure */
char *zDb; /* Name of database containing r-tree table */
- char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */
+ char *zName; /* Name of r-tree table */
u32 nBusy; /* Current number of users of this structure */
i64 nRowEst; /* Estimated number of rows in this table */
u32 nCursor; /* Number of open cursors */
/* List of nodes removed during a CondenseTree operation. List is
** linked together via the pointer normally used for hash chains -
- ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree
+ ** RtreeNode.pNext. RtreeNode.iNode stores the depth of the sub-tree
** headed by the node (leaf nodes have RtreeNode.iNode==0).
*/
RtreeNode *pDeleted;
@@ -163345,7 +163345,7 @@ struct Rtree {
sqlite3_stmt *pWriteParent;
sqlite3_stmt *pDeleteParent;
- RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */
+ RtreeNode *aHash[HASHSIZE]; /* Hash table of in-memory nodes. */
};
/* Possible values for Rtree.eCoordType: */
@@ -163385,7 +163385,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
};
/*
-** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the
+** The minimum number of cells allowed for a node is a third of the
** maximum. In Gutman's notation:
**
** m = M/3
@@ -163400,7 +163400,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
/*
** The smallest possible node-size is (512-64)==448 bytes. And the largest
** supported cell size is 48 bytes (8 byte rowid + ten 4 byte coordinates).
-** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since
+** Therefore all non-root nodes must contain at least 3 entries. Since
** 2^40 is greater than 2^64, an r-tree structure always has a depth of
** 40 or less.
*/
@@ -163414,7 +163414,7 @@ struct RtreeSearchPoint {
*/
#define RTREE_CACHE_SZ 5
-/*
+/*
** An rtree cursor object.
*/
struct RtreeCursor {
@@ -163486,7 +163486,7 @@ struct RtreeConstraint {
#define RTREE_QUERY 0x47 /* G: New-style sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() */
-/*
+/*
** An rtree structure node.
*/
struct RtreeNode {
@@ -163501,7 +163501,7 @@ struct RtreeNode {
/* Return the number of cells in a node */
#define NCELL(pNode) readInt16(&(pNode)->zData[2])
-/*
+/*
** A single cell from a node, deserialized
*/
struct RtreeCell {
@@ -163516,11 +163516,11 @@ struct RtreeCell {
** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback() and which appear on the right of MATCH
** operators in order to constrain a search.
**
-** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions. Exactly one of
+** xGeom and xQueryFunc are the callback functions. Exactly one of
** xGeom and xQueryFunc fields is non-NULL, depending on whether the
** SQL function was created using sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback() or
** sqlite3_rtree_query_callback().
-**
+**
** This object is deleted automatically by the destructor mechanism in
** sqlite3_create_function_v2().
*/
@@ -163635,9 +163635,9 @@ static void readCoord(u8 *p, RtreeCoord *pCoord){
pCoord->u = *(u32*)p;
#else
pCoord->u = (
- (((u32)p[0]) << 24) +
- (((u32)p[1]) << 16) +
- (((u32)p[2]) << 8) +
+ (((u32)p[0]) << 24) +
+ (((u32)p[1]) << 16) +
+ (((u32)p[2]) << 8) +
(((u32)p[3]) << 0)
);
#endif
@@ -163657,13 +163657,13 @@ static i64 readInt64(u8 *p){
return x;
#else
return (
- (((i64)p[0]) << 56) +
- (((i64)p[1]) << 48) +
- (((i64)p[2]) << 40) +
- (((i64)p[3]) << 32) +
- (((i64)p[4]) << 24) +
- (((i64)p[5]) << 16) +
- (((i64)p[6]) << 8) +
+ (((i64)p[0]) << 56) +
+ (((i64)p[1]) << 48) +
+ (((i64)p[2]) << 40) +
+ (((i64)p[3]) << 32) +
+ (((i64)p[4]) << 24) +
+ (((i64)p[5]) << 16) +
+ (((i64)p[6]) << 8) +
(((i64)p[7]) << 0)
);
#endif
@@ -163893,7 +163893,7 @@ static int nodeAcquire(
}
/* If no error has occurred so far, check if the "number of entries"
- ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to
+ ** field on the node is too large. If so, set the return code to
** SQLITE_CORRUPT_VTAB.
*/
if( pNode && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -164083,7 +164083,7 @@ static int rtreeInit(
sqlite3 *, void *, int, const char *const*, sqlite3_vtab **, char **, int
);
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xCreate method.
*/
static int rtreeCreate(
@@ -164096,7 +164096,7 @@ static int rtreeCreate(
return rtreeInit(db, pAux, argc, argv, ppVtab, pzErr, 1);
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xConnect method.
*/
static int rtreeConnect(
@@ -164138,7 +164138,7 @@ static void rtreeRelease(Rtree *pRtree){
}
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xDisconnect method.
*/
static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -164146,7 +164146,7 @@ static int rtreeDisconnect(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xDestroy method.
*/
static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
@@ -164156,7 +164156,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_node';"
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_rowid';"
"DROP TABLE '%q'.'%q_parent';",
- pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
+ pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName,
pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName
);
@@ -164174,7 +164174,7 @@ static int rtreeDestroy(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xOpen method.
*/
static int rtreeOpen(sqlite3_vtab *pVTab, sqlite3_vtab_cursor **ppCursor){
@@ -164213,7 +164213,7 @@ static void freeCursorConstraints(RtreeCursor *pCsr){
}
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xClose method.
*/
static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
@@ -164233,7 +164233,7 @@ static int rtreeClose(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
/*
** Rtree virtual table module xEof method.
**
-** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid
+** Return non-zero if the cursor does not currently point to a valid
** record (i.e if the scan has finished), or zero otherwise.
*/
static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
@@ -164289,7 +164289,7 @@ static int rtreeEof(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur){
/*
** Check the RTree node or entry given by pCellData and p against the MATCH
-** constraint pConstraint.
+** constraint pConstraint.
*/
static int rtreeCallbackConstraint(
RtreeConstraint *pConstraint, /* The constraint to test */
@@ -164362,7 +164362,7 @@ static int rtreeCallbackConstraint(
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Check the internal RTree node given by pCellData against constraint p.
** If this constraint cannot be satisfied by any child within the node,
** set *peWithin to NOT_WITHIN.
@@ -164380,7 +164380,7 @@ static void rtreeNonleafConstraint(
*/
pCellData += 8 + 4*(p->iCoord&0xfe);
- assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
+ assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
|| p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ );
assert( ((((char*)pCellData) - (char*)0)&3)==0 ); /* 4-byte aligned */
switch( p->op ){
@@ -164420,7 +164420,7 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint(
){
RtreeDValue xN; /* Coordinate value converted to a double */
- assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
+ assert(p->op==RTREE_LE || p->op==RTREE_LT || p->op==RTREE_GE
|| p->op==RTREE_GT || p->op==RTREE_EQ );
pCellData += 8 + p->iCoord*4;
assert( ((((char*)pCellData) - (char*)0)&3)==0 ); /* 4-byte aligned */
@@ -164436,12 +164436,12 @@ static void rtreeLeafConstraint(
}
/*
-** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit
+** One of the cells in node pNode is guaranteed to have a 64-bit
** integer value equal to iRowid. Return the index of this cell.
*/
static int nodeRowidIndex(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
i64 iRowid,
int *piIndex
){
@@ -164582,7 +164582,7 @@ static RtreeSearchPoint *rtreeSearchPointNew(
pFirst = rtreeSearchPointFirst(pCur);
pCur->anQueue[iLevel]++;
if( pFirst==0
- || pFirst->rScore>rScore
+ || pFirst->rScore>rScore
|| (pFirst->rScore==rScore && pFirst->iLevel>iLevel)
){
if( pCur->bPoint ){
@@ -164755,7 +164755,7 @@ static int rtreeStepToLeaf(RtreeCursor *pCur){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xNext method.
*/
static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
@@ -164769,7 +164769,7 @@ static int rtreeNext(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xRowid method.
*/
static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
@@ -164783,7 +164783,7 @@ static int rtreeRowid(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor, sqlite_int64 *pRowid){
return rc;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xColumn method.
*/
static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){
@@ -164813,8 +164813,8 @@ static int rtreeColumn(sqlite3_vtab_cursor *cur, sqlite3_context *ctx, int i){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
-** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with
+/*
+** Use nodeAcquire() to obtain the leaf node containing the record with
** rowid iRowid. If successful, set *ppLeaf to point to the node and
** return SQLITE_OK. If there is no such record in the table, set
** *ppLeaf to 0 and return SQLITE_OK. If an error occurs, set *ppLeaf
@@ -164889,11 +164889,11 @@ static int deserializeGeometry(sqlite3_value *pValue, RtreeConstraint *pCons){
return SQLITE_OK;
}
-/*
+/*
** Rtree virtual table module xFilter method.
*/
static int rtreeFilter(
- sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
+ sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor,
int idxNum, const char *idxStr,
int argc, sqlite3_value **argv
){
@@ -164933,8 +164933,8 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
pCsr->atEOF = 1;
}
}else{
- /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array
- ** with the configured constraints.
+ /* Normal case - r-tree scan. Set up the RtreeCursor.aConstraint array
+ ** with the configured constraints.
*/
rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && argc>0 ){
@@ -164995,7 +164995,7 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
/*
** Rtree virtual table module xBestIndex method. There are three
-** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to
+** table scan strategies to choose from (in order from most to
** least desirable):
**
** idxNum idxStr Strategy
@@ -165005,8 +165005,8 @@ static int rtreeFilter(
** ------------------------------------------------
**
** If strategy 1 is used, then idxStr is not meaningful. If strategy
-** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each
-** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to
+** 2 is used, idxStr is formatted to contain 2 bytes for each
+** constraint used. The first two bytes of idxStr correspond to
** the constraint in sqlite3_index_info.aConstraintUsage[] with
** (argvIndex==1) etc.
**
@@ -165052,8 +165052,8 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
for(ii=0; iinConstraint && iIdx<(int)(sizeof(zIdxStr)-1); ii++){
struct sqlite3_index_constraint *p = &pIdxInfo->aConstraint[ii];
- if( bMatch==0 && p->usable
- && p->iColumn==0 && p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
+ if( bMatch==0 && p->usable
+ && p->iColumn==0 && p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_EQ
){
/* We have an equality constraint on the rowid. Use strategy 1. */
int jj;
@@ -165066,11 +165066,11 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
pIdxInfo->aConstraintUsage[jj].omit = 1;
/* This strategy involves a two rowid lookups on an B-Tree structures
- ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be
- ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which
+ ** and then a linear search of an R-Tree node. This should be
+ ** considered almost as quick as a direct rowid lookup (for which
** sqlite uses an internal cost of 0.0). It is expected to return
** a single row.
- */
+ */
pIdxInfo->estimatedCost = 30.0;
pIdxInfo->estimatedRows = 1;
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -165086,7 +165086,7 @@ static int rtreeBestIndex(sqlite3_vtab *tab, sqlite3_index_info *pIdxInfo){
case SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_GE: op = RTREE_GE; break;
default:
assert( p->op==SQLITE_INDEX_CONSTRAINT_MATCH );
- op = RTREE_MATCH;
+ op = RTREE_MATCH;
break;
}
zIdxStr[iIdx++] = op;
@@ -165182,8 +165182,8 @@ static int cellContains(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p1, RtreeCell *p2){
for(ii=0; iinDim2; ii+=2){
RtreeCoord *a1 = &p1->aCoord[ii];
RtreeCoord *a2 = &p2->aCoord[ii];
- if( (!isInt && (a2[0].fa1[1].f))
- || ( isInt && (a2[0].ia1[1].i))
+ if( (!isInt && (a2[0].fa1[1].f))
+ || ( isInt && (a2[0].ia1[1].i))
){
return 0;
}
@@ -165204,9 +165204,9 @@ static RtreeDValue cellGrowth(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeCell *p, RtreeCell *pCell){
}
static RtreeDValue cellOverlap(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeCell *p,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeCell *p,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
int nCell
){
int ii;
@@ -165315,7 +165315,7 @@ static int AdjustTree(
cellUnion(pRtree, &cell, pCell);
nodeOverwriteCell(pRtree, pParent, &cell, iCell);
}
-
+
p = pParent;
}
return SQLITE_OK;
@@ -165346,7 +165346,7 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int);
/*
** Arguments aIdx, aDistance and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
** in aIdx according to the indexed values in aDistance. For
** example, assuming the inputs:
@@ -165362,9 +165362,9 @@ static int rtreeInsertCell(Rtree *, RtreeNode *, RtreeCell *, int);
** sorting algorithm.
*/
static void SortByDistance(
- int *aIdx,
- int nIdx,
- RtreeDValue *aDistance,
+ int *aIdx,
+ int nIdx,
+ RtreeDValue *aDistance,
int *aSpare
){
if( nIdx>1 ){
@@ -165418,7 +165418,7 @@ static void SortByDistance(
/*
** Arguments aIdx, aCell and aSpare all point to arrays of size
-** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
+** nIdx. The aIdx array contains the set of integers from 0 to
** (nIdx-1) in no particular order. This function sorts the values
** in aIdx according to dimension iDim of the cells in aCell. The
** minimum value of dimension iDim is considered first, the
@@ -165429,10 +165429,10 @@ static void SortByDistance(
*/
static void SortByDimension(
Rtree *pRtree,
- int *aIdx,
- int nIdx,
- int iDim,
- RtreeCell *aCell,
+ int *aIdx,
+ int nIdx,
+ int iDim,
+ RtreeCell *aCell,
int *aSpare
){
if( nIdx>1 ){
@@ -165529,8 +165529,8 @@ static int splitNodeStartree(
int nLeft;
for(
- nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree);
- nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree));
+ nLeft=RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree);
+ nLeft<=(nCell-RTREE_MINCELLS(pRtree));
nLeft++
){
RtreeCell left;
@@ -165585,9 +165585,9 @@ static int splitNodeStartree(
static int updateMapping(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- i64 iRowid,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ i64 iRowid,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
int iHeight
){
int (*xSetMapping)(Rtree *, sqlite3_int64, sqlite3_int64);
@@ -165623,7 +165623,7 @@ static int SplitNode(
RtreeCell leftbbox;
RtreeCell rightbbox;
- /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and
+ /* Allocate an array and populate it with a copy of pCell and
** all cells from node pLeft. Then zero the original node.
*/
aCell = sqlite3_malloc((sizeof(RtreeCell)+sizeof(int))*(nCell+1));
@@ -165740,14 +165740,14 @@ splitnode_out:
}
/*
-** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is
+** If node pLeaf is not the root of the r-tree and its pParent pointer is
** still NULL, load all ancestor nodes of pLeaf into memory and populate
** the pLeaf->pParent chain all the way up to the root node.
**
** This operation is required when a row is deleted (or updated - an update
** is implemented as a delete followed by an insert). SQLite provides the
** rowid of the row to delete, which can be used to find the leaf on which
-** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this
+** the entry resides (argument pLeaf). Once the leaf is located, this
** function is called to determine its ancestry.
*/
static int fixLeafParent(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pLeaf){
@@ -165818,7 +165818,7 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){
if( SQLITE_OK!=(rc = sqlite3_reset(pRtree->pDeleteParent)) ){
return rc;
}
-
+
/* Remove the node from the in-memory hash table and link it into
** the Rtree.pDeleted list. Its contents will be re-inserted later on.
*/
@@ -165833,9 +165833,9 @@ static int removeNode(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iHeight){
static int fixBoundingBox(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode){
RtreeNode *pParent = pNode->pParent;
- int rc = SQLITE_OK;
+ int rc = SQLITE_OK;
if( pParent ){
- int ii;
+ int ii;
int nCell = NCELL(pNode);
RtreeCell box; /* Bounding box for pNode */
nodeGetCell(pRtree, pNode, 0, &box);
@@ -165890,9 +165890,9 @@ static int deleteCell(Rtree *pRtree, RtreeNode *pNode, int iCell, int iHeight){
}
static int Reinsert(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- RtreeNode *pNode,
- RtreeCell *pCell,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ RtreeNode *pNode,
+ RtreeCell *pCell,
int iHeight
){
int *aOrder;
@@ -165946,7 +165946,7 @@ static int Reinsert(
for(ii=0; iinDim; iDim++){
- RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) -
+ RtreeDValue coord = (DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2+1]) -
DCOORD(aCell[ii].aCoord[iDim*2]));
aDistance[ii] += (coord-aCenterCoord[iDim])*(coord-aCenterCoord[iDim]);
}
@@ -165991,7 +165991,7 @@ static int Reinsert(
}
/*
-** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a
+** Insert cell pCell into node pNode. Node pNode is the head of a
** subtree iHeight high (leaf nodes have iHeight==0).
*/
static int rtreeInsertCell(
@@ -166081,8 +166081,8 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){
/* Obtain a reference to the root node to initialize Rtree.iDepth */
rc = nodeAcquire(pRtree, 1, 0, &pRoot);
- /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry
- ** about to be deleted.
+ /* Obtain a reference to the leaf node that contains the entry
+ ** about to be deleted.
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
rc = findLeafNode(pRtree, iDelete, &pLeaf, 0);
@@ -166109,11 +166109,11 @@ static int rtreeDeleteRowid(Rtree *pRtree, sqlite3_int64 iDelete){
}
/* Check if the root node now has exactly one child. If so, remove
- ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and
+ ** it, schedule the contents of the child for reinsertion and
** reduce the tree height by one.
**
** This is equivalent to copying the contents of the child into
- ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform
+ ** the root node (the operation that Gutman's paper says to perform
** in this scenario).
*/
if( rc==SQLITE_OK && pRtree->iDepth>0 && NCELL(pRoot)==1 ){
@@ -166182,8 +166182,8 @@ static RtreeValue rtreeValueUp(sqlite3_value *v){
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_RTREE_INT_ONLY) */
/*
-** A constraint has failed while inserting a row into an rtree table.
-** Assuming no OOM error occurs, this function sets the error message
+** A constraint has failed while inserting a row into an rtree table.
+** Assuming no OOM error occurs, this function sets the error message
** (at pRtree->base.zErrMsg) to an appropriate value and returns
** SQLITE_CONSTRAINT.
**
@@ -166196,7 +166196,7 @@ static RtreeValue rtreeValueUp(sqlite3_value *v){
*/
static int rtreeConstraintError(Rtree *pRtree, int iCol){
sqlite3_stmt *pStmt = 0;
- char *zSql;
+ char *zSql;
int rc;
assert( iCol==0 || iCol%2 );
@@ -166233,9 +166233,9 @@ static int rtreeConstraintError(Rtree *pRtree, int iCol){
** The xUpdate method for rtree module virtual tables.
*/
static int rtreeUpdate(
- sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,
- int nData,
- sqlite3_value **azData,
+ sqlite3_vtab *pVtab,
+ int nData,
+ sqlite3_value **azData,
sqlite_int64 *pRowid
){
Rtree *pRtree = (Rtree *)pVtab;
@@ -166295,7 +166295,7 @@ static int rtreeUpdate(
}
}
- /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in
+ /* If a rowid value was supplied, check if it is already present in
** the table. If so, the constraint has failed. */
if( sqlite3_value_type(azData[2])!=SQLITE_NULL ){
cell.iRowid = sqlite3_value_int64(azData[2]);
@@ -166391,8 +166391,8 @@ static int rtreeRename(sqlite3_vtab *pVtab, const char *zNewName){
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_node' RENAME TO \"%w_node\";"
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_parent' RENAME TO \"%w_parent\";"
"ALTER TABLE %Q.'%q_rowid' RENAME TO \"%w_rowid\";"
- , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
- , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
+ , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
+ , pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
, pRtree->zDb, pRtree->zName, zNewName
);
if( zSql ){
@@ -166474,10 +166474,10 @@ static sqlite3_module rtreeModule = {
};
static int rtreeSqlInit(
- Rtree *pRtree,
- sqlite3 *db,
- const char *zDb,
- const char *zPrefix,
+ Rtree *pRtree,
+ sqlite3 *db,
+ const char *zDb,
+ const char *zPrefix,
int isCreate
){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
@@ -166535,7 +166535,7 @@ static int rtreeSqlInit(
for(i=0; i*2 coordinates.
*/
static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
@@ -166776,7 +166776,7 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
zText = sqlite3_mprintf("{%s}", zCell);
}
}
-
+
sqlite3_result_text(ctx, zText, -1, sqlite3_free);
}
@@ -166791,10 +166791,10 @@ static void rtreenode(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
*/
static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
UNUSED_PARAMETER(nArg);
- if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB
+ if( sqlite3_value_type(apArg[0])!=SQLITE_BLOB
|| sqlite3_value_bytes(apArg[0])<2
){
- sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1);
+ sqlite3_result_error(ctx, "Invalid argument to rtreedepth()", -1);
}else{
u8 *zBlob = (u8 *)sqlite3_value_blob(apArg[0]);
sqlite3_result_int(ctx, readInt16(zBlob));
@@ -166803,7 +166803,7 @@ static void rtreedepth(sqlite3_context *ctx, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
/*
** Register the r-tree module with database handle db. This creates the
-** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar
+** virtual table module "rtree" and the debugging/analysis scalar
** function "rtreenode".
*/
SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3RtreeInit(sqlite3 *db){
@@ -166922,7 +166922,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_geometry_callback(
pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = 0;
pGeomCtx->xDestructor = 0;
pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext;
- return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
+ return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zGeom, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
(void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback
);
}
@@ -166947,7 +166947,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_query_callback(
pGeomCtx->xQueryFunc = xQueryFunc;
pGeomCtx->xDestructor = xDestructor;
pGeomCtx->pContext = pContext;
- return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
+ return sqlite3_create_function_v2(db, zQueryFunc, -1, SQLITE_ANY,
(void *)pGeomCtx, geomCallback, 0, 0, rtreeFreeCallback
);
}
@@ -166983,9 +166983,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init(
*************************************************************************
** $Id: icu.c,v 1.7 2007/12/13 21:54:11 drh Exp $
**
-** This file implements an integration between the ICU library
-** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library
-** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses
+** This file implements an integration between the ICU library
+** ("International Components for Unicode", an open-source library
+** for handling unicode data) and SQLite. The integration uses
** ICU to provide the following to SQLite:
**
** * An implementation of the SQL regexp() function (and hence REGEXP
@@ -166996,7 +166996,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3_rtree_init(
**
** * Integration of ICU and SQLite collation sequences.
**
-** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to
+** * An implementation of the LIKE operator that uses ICU to
** provide case-independent matching.
*/
@@ -167066,7 +167066,7 @@ static const unsigned char icuUtf8Trans1[] = {
/*
** Compare two UTF-8 strings for equality where the first string is
-** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and
+** a "LIKE" expression. Return true (1) if they are the same and
** false (0) if they are different.
*/
static int icuLikeCompare(
@@ -167098,7 +167098,7 @@ static int icuLikeCompare(
uint8_t c;
/* Skip any MATCH_ALL or MATCH_ONE characters that follow a
- ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the
+ ** MATCH_ALL. For each MATCH_ONE, skip one character in the
** test string.
*/
while( (c=*zPattern) == MATCH_ALL || c == MATCH_ONE ){
@@ -167151,15 +167151,15 @@ static int icuLikeCompare(
**
** A LIKE B
**
-** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E,
+** is implemented as like(B, A). If there is an escape character E,
**
** A LIKE B ESCAPE E
**
** is mapped to like(B, A, E).
*/
static void icuLikeFunc(
- sqlite3_context *context,
- int argc,
+ sqlite3_context *context,
+ int argc,
sqlite3_value **argv
){
const unsigned char *zA = sqlite3_value_text(argv[0]);
@@ -167185,7 +167185,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc(
if( zE==0 ) return;
U8_NEXT(zE, i, nE, uEsc);
if( i!=nE){
- sqlite3_result_error(context,
+ sqlite3_result_error(context,
"ESCAPE expression must be a single character", -1);
return;
}
@@ -167200,7 +167200,7 @@ static void icuLikeFunc(
** This function is called when an ICU function called from within
** the implementation of an SQL scalar function returns an error.
**
-** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is
+** The scalar function context passed as the first argument is
** loaded with an error message based on the following two args.
*/
static void icuFunctionError(
@@ -167226,7 +167226,7 @@ static void icuRegexpDelete(void *p){
/*
** Implementation of SQLite REGEXP operator. This scalar function takes
** two arguments. The first is a regular expression pattern to compile
-** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either
+** the second is a string to match against that pattern. If either
** argument is an SQL NULL, then NULL Is returned. Otherwise, the result
** is 1 if the string matches the pattern, or 0 otherwise.
**
@@ -167250,8 +167250,8 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
(void)nArg; /* Unused parameter */
- /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL,
- ** then the result is also NULL.
+ /* If the left hand side of the regexp operator is NULL,
+ ** then the result is also NULL.
*/
if( !zString ){
return;
@@ -167289,7 +167289,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
}
/* Set the text that the regular expression operates on to a NULL
- ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than
+ ** pointer. This is not really necessary, but it is tidier than
** leaving the regular expression object configured with an invalid
** pointer after this function returns.
*/
@@ -167300,7 +167300,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
}
/*
-** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and
+** Implementations of scalar functions for case mapping - upper() and
** lower(). Function upper() converts its input to upper-case (ABC).
** Function lower() converts to lower-case (abc).
**
@@ -167308,7 +167308,7 @@ static void icuRegexpFunc(sqlite3_context *p, int nArg, sqlite3_value **apArg){
** "language specific". Refer to ICU documentation for the differences
** between the two.
**
-** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar
+** To utilise "general" case mapping, the upper() or lower() scalar
** functions are invoked with one argument:
**
** upper('ABC') -> 'abc'
@@ -167414,7 +167414,7 @@ static int icuCollationColl(
/*
** Implementation of the scalar function icu_load_collation().
**
-** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation
+** This scalar function is used to add ICU collation based collation
** types to an SQLite database connection. It is intended to be called
** as follows:
**
@@ -167425,8 +167425,8 @@ static int icuCollationColl(
** collation sequence to create.
*/
static void icuLoadCollation(
- sqlite3_context *p,
- int nArg,
+ sqlite3_context *p,
+ int nArg,
sqlite3_value **apArg
){
sqlite3 *db = (sqlite3 *)sqlite3_user_data(p);
@@ -167452,7 +167452,7 @@ static void icuLoadCollation(
}
assert(p);
- rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator,
+ rc = sqlite3_create_collation_v2(db, zName, SQLITE_UTF16, (void *)pUCollator,
icuCollationColl, icuCollationDel
);
if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -167488,11 +167488,11 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db){
int rc = SQLITE_OK;
int i;
-
+
for(i=0; rc==SQLITE_OK && i<(int)(sizeof(scalars)/sizeof(scalars[0])); i++){
const struct IcuScalar *p = &scalars[i];
rc = sqlite3_create_function(
- db, p->zName, p->nArg, p->enc,
+ db, p->zName, p->nArg, p->enc,
p->iContext ? (void*)db : (void*)0,
p->xFunc, 0, 0
);
@@ -167506,7 +167506,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE int sqlite3IcuInit(sqlite3 *db){
__declspec(dllexport)
#endif
SQLITE_API int sqlite3_icu_init(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
char **pzErrMsg,
const sqlite3_api_routines *pApi
){
@@ -167609,7 +167609,7 @@ static int icuDestroy(sqlite3_tokenizer *pTokenizer){
/*
** Prepare to begin tokenizing a particular string. The input
** string to be tokenized is pInput[0..nBytes-1]. A cursor
-** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
+** used to incrementally tokenize this string is returned in
** *ppCursor.
*/
static int icuOpen(
@@ -167651,7 +167651,7 @@ static int icuOpen(
pCsr->aOffset = (int *)&pCsr->aChar[(nChar+3)&~3];
pCsr->aOffset[iOut] = iInput;
- U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
+ U8_NEXT(zInput, iInput, nInput, c);
while( c>0 ){
int isError = 0;
c = u_foldCase(c, opt);
@@ -167797,7 +167797,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
*************************************************************************
**
**
-** OVERVIEW
+** OVERVIEW
**
** The RBU extension requires that the RBU update be packaged as an
** SQLite database. The tables it expects to find are described in
@@ -167805,34 +167805,34 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** that the user wishes to write to, a corresponding data_xyz table is
** created in the RBU database and populated with one row for each row to
** update, insert or delete from the target table.
-**
+**
** The update proceeds in three stages:
-**
+**
** 1) The database is updated. The modified database pages are written
** to a *-oal file. A *-oal file is just like a *-wal file, except
** that it is named "-oal" instead of "-wal".
** Because regular SQLite clients do not look for file named
** "-oal", they go on using the original database in
** rollback mode while the *-oal file is being generated.
-**
+**
** During this stage RBU does not update the database by writing
** directly to the target tables. Instead it creates "imposter"
** tables using the SQLITE_TESTCTRL_IMPOSTER interface that it uses
** to update each b-tree individually. All updates required by each
** b-tree are completed before moving on to the next, and all
** updates are done in sorted key order.
-**
+**
** 2) The "-oal" file is moved to the equivalent "-wal"
** location using a call to rename(2). Before doing this the RBU
** module takes an EXCLUSIVE lock on the database file, ensuring
** that there are no other active readers.
-**
+**
** Once the EXCLUSIVE lock is released, any other database readers
** detect the new *-wal file and read the database in wal mode. At
** this point they see the new version of the database - including
** the updates made as part of the RBU update.
-**
-** 3) The new *-wal file is checkpointed. This proceeds in the same way
+**
+** 3) The new *-wal file is checkpointed. This proceeds in the same way
** as a regular database checkpoint, except that a single frame is
** checkpointed each time sqlite3rbu_step() is called. If the RBU
** handle is closed before the entire *-wal file is checkpointed,
@@ -167841,7 +167841,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** the future.
**
** POTENTIAL PROBLEMS
-**
+**
** The rename() call might not be portable. And RBU is not currently
** syncing the directory after renaming the file.
**
@@ -167863,7 +167863,7 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** fields are collected. This means we're probably writing a lot more
** data to disk when saving the state of an ongoing update to the RBU
** update database than is strictly necessary.
-**
+**
*/
/* #include */
@@ -167887,42 +167887,42 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
**
*************************************************************************
**
-** This file contains the public interface for the RBU extension.
+** This file contains the public interface for the RBU extension.
*/
/*
** SUMMARY
**
-** Writing a transaction containing a large number of operations on
+** Writing a transaction containing a large number of operations on
** b-tree indexes that are collectively larger than the available cache
-** memory can be very inefficient.
+** memory can be very inefficient.
**
** The problem is that in order to update a b-tree, the leaf page (at least)
** containing the entry being inserted or deleted must be modified. If the
-** working set of leaves is larger than the available cache memory, then a
-** single leaf that is modified more than once as part of the transaction
+** working set of leaves is larger than the available cache memory, then a
+** single leaf that is modified more than once as part of the transaction
** may be loaded from or written to the persistent media multiple times.
** Additionally, because the index updates are likely to be applied in
-** random order, access to pages within the database is also likely to be in
+** random order, access to pages within the database is also likely to be in
** random order, which is itself quite inefficient.
**
** One way to improve the situation is to sort the operations on each index
** by index key before applying them to the b-tree. This leads to an IO
** pattern that resembles a single linear scan through the index b-tree,
-** and all but guarantees each modified leaf page is loaded and stored
+** and all but guarantees each modified leaf page is loaded and stored
** exactly once. SQLite uses this trick to improve the performance of
** CREATE INDEX commands. This extension allows it to be used to improve
** the performance of large transactions on existing databases.
**
-** Additionally, this extension allows the work involved in writing the
-** large transaction to be broken down into sub-transactions performed
-** sequentially by separate processes. This is useful if the system cannot
-** guarantee that a single update process will run for long enough to apply
-** the entire update, for example because the update is being applied on a
-** mobile device that is frequently rebooted. Even after the writer process
+** Additionally, this extension allows the work involved in writing the
+** large transaction to be broken down into sub-transactions performed
+** sequentially by separate processes. This is useful if the system cannot
+** guarantee that a single update process will run for long enough to apply
+** the entire update, for example because the update is being applied on a
+** mobile device that is frequently rebooted. Even after the writer process
** has committed one or more sub-transactions, other database clients continue
-** to read from the original database snapshot. In other words, partially
-** applied transactions are not visible to other clients.
+** to read from the original database snapshot. In other words, partially
+** applied transactions are not visible to other clients.
**
** "RBU" stands for "Resumable Bulk Update". As in a large database update
** transmitted via a wireless network to a mobile device. A transaction
@@ -167938,9 +167938,9 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
**
** * INSERT statements may not use any default values.
**
-** * UPDATE and DELETE statements must identify their target rows by
+** * UPDATE and DELETE statements must identify their target rows by
** non-NULL PRIMARY KEY values. Rows with NULL values stored in PRIMARY
-** KEY fields may not be updated or deleted. If the table being written
+** KEY fields may not be updated or deleted. If the table being written
** has no PRIMARY KEY, affected rows must be identified by rowid.
**
** * UPDATE statements may not modify PRIMARY KEY columns.
@@ -167957,10 +167957,10 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** PREPARATION
**
** An "RBU update" is stored as a separate SQLite database. A database
-** containing an RBU update is an "RBU database". For each table in the
+** containing an RBU update is an "RBU database". For each table in the
** target database to be updated, the RBU database should contain a table
** named "data_" containing the same set of columns as the
-** target table, and one more - "rbu_control". The data_% table should
+** target table, and one more - "rbu_control". The data_% table should
** have no PRIMARY KEY or UNIQUE constraints, but each column should have
** the same type as the corresponding column in the target database.
** The "rbu_control" column should have no type at all. For example, if
@@ -167975,22 +167975,22 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** The order of the columns in the data_% table does not matter.
**
** Instead of a regular table, the RBU database may also contain virtual
-** tables or view named using the data_ naming scheme.
+** tables or view named using the data_ naming scheme.
**
-** Instead of the plain data_ naming scheme, RBU database tables
+** Instead of the plain data_ naming scheme, RBU database tables
** may also be named data_, where is any sequence
** of zero or more numeric characters (0-9). This can be significant because
-** tables within the RBU database are always processed in order sorted by
+** tables within the RBU database are always processed in order sorted by
** name. By judicious selection of the portion of the names
** of the RBU tables the user can therefore control the order in which they
** are processed. This can be useful, for example, to ensure that "external
** content" FTS4 tables are updated before their underlying content tables.
**
** If the target database table is a virtual table or a table that has no
-** PRIMARY KEY declaration, the data_% table must also contain a column
-** named "rbu_rowid". This column is mapped to the tables implicit primary
-** key column - "rowid". Virtual tables for which the "rowid" column does
-** not function like a primary key value cannot be updated using RBU. For
+** PRIMARY KEY declaration, the data_% table must also contain a column
+** named "rbu_rowid". This column is mapped to the tables implicit primary
+** key column - "rowid". Virtual tables for which the "rowid" column does
+** not function like a primary key value cannot be updated using RBU. For
** example, if the target db contains either of the following:
**
** CREATE VIRTUAL TABLE x1 USING fts3(a, b);
@@ -168013,35 +168013,35 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** CREATE TABLE data_ft1(a, b, langid, rbu_rowid, rbu_control);
** CREATE TABLE data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control);
**
-** For each row to INSERT into the target database as part of the RBU
+** For each row to INSERT into the target database as part of the RBU
** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain integer value 0. The
-** other columns should be set to the values that make up the new record
-** to insert.
+** other columns should be set to the values that make up the new record
+** to insert.
**
-** If the target database table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, it is not
-** possible to insert a NULL value into the IPK column. Attempting to
+** If the target database table has an INTEGER PRIMARY KEY, it is not
+** possible to insert a NULL value into the IPK column. Attempting to
** do so results in an SQLITE_MISMATCH error.
**
-** For each row to DELETE from the target database as part of the RBU
+** For each row to DELETE from the target database as part of the RBU
** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain integer value 1. The
** real primary key values of the row to delete should be stored in the
** corresponding columns of the data_% table. The values stored in the
** other columns are not used.
**
-** For each row to UPDATE from the target database as part of the RBU
+** For each row to UPDATE from the target database as part of the RBU
** update, the corresponding data_% table should contain a single record
** with the "rbu_control" column set to contain a value of type text.
-** The real primary key values identifying the row to update should be
+** The real primary key values identifying the row to update should be
** stored in the corresponding columns of the data_% table row, as should
-** the new values of all columns being update. The text value in the
+** the new values of all columns being update. The text value in the
** "rbu_control" column must contain the same number of characters as
** there are columns in the target database table, and must consist entirely
-** of 'x' and '.' characters (or in some special cases 'd' - see below). For
+** of 'x' and '.' characters (or in some special cases 'd' - see below). For
** each column that is being updated, the corresponding character is set to
** 'x'. For those that remain as they are, the corresponding character of the
-** rbu_control value should be set to '.'. For example, given the tables
+** rbu_control value should be set to '.'. For example, given the tables
** above, the update statement:
**
** UPDATE t1 SET c = 'usa' WHERE a = 4;
@@ -168055,30 +168055,30 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** target table with the value stored in the corresponding data_% column, the
** user-defined SQL function "rbu_delta()" is invoked and the result stored in
** the target table column. rbu_delta() is invoked with two arguments - the
-** original value currently stored in the target table column and the
+** original value currently stored in the target table column and the
** value specified in the data_xxx table.
**
** For example, this row:
**
** INSERT INTO data_t1(a, b, c, rbu_control) VALUES(4, NULL, 'usa', '..d');
**
-** is similar to an UPDATE statement such as:
+** is similar to an UPDATE statement such as:
**
** UPDATE t1 SET c = rbu_delta(c, 'usa') WHERE a = 4;
**
-** Finally, if an 'f' character appears in place of a 'd' or 's' in an
+** Finally, if an 'f' character appears in place of a 'd' or 's' in an
** ota_control string, the contents of the data_xxx table column is assumed
** to be a "fossil delta" - a patch to be applied to a blob value in the
** format used by the fossil source-code management system. In this case
-** the existing value within the target database table must be of type BLOB.
+** the existing value within the target database table must be of type BLOB.
** It is replaced by the result of applying the specified fossil delta to
** itself.
**
** If the target database table is a virtual table or a table with no PRIMARY
-** KEY, the rbu_control value should not include a character corresponding
+** KEY, the rbu_control value should not include a character corresponding
** to the rbu_rowid value. For example, this:
**
-** INSERT INTO data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control)
+** INSERT INTO data_ft1(a, b, rbu_rowid, rbu_control)
** VALUES(NULL, 'usa', 12, '.x');
**
** causes a result similar to:
@@ -168088,14 +168088,14 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
** The data_xxx tables themselves should have no PRIMARY KEY declarations.
** However, RBU is more efficient if reading the rows in from each data_xxx
** table in "rowid" order is roughly the same as reading them sorted by
-** the PRIMARY KEY of the corresponding target database table. In other
-** words, rows should be sorted using the destination table PRIMARY KEY
+** the PRIMARY KEY of the corresponding target database table. In other
+** words, rows should be sorted using the destination table PRIMARY KEY
** fields before they are inserted into the data_xxx tables.
**
** USAGE
**
-** The API declared below allows an application to apply an RBU update
-** stored on disk to an existing target database. Essentially, the
+** The API declared below allows an application to apply an RBU update
+** stored on disk to an existing target database. Essentially, the
** application:
**
** 1) Opens an RBU handle using the sqlite3rbu_open() function.
@@ -168106,24 +168106,24 @@ SQLITE_PRIVATE void sqlite3Fts3IcuTokenizerModule(
**
** 3) Calls the sqlite3rbu_step() function one or more times on
** the new handle. Each call to sqlite3rbu_step() performs a single
-** b-tree operation, so thousands of calls may be required to apply
+** b-tree operation, so thousands of calls may be required to apply
** a complete update.
**
** 4) Calls sqlite3rbu_close() to close the RBU update handle. If
** sqlite3rbu_step() has been called enough times to completely
** apply the update to the target database, then the RBU database
-** is marked as fully applied. Otherwise, the state of the RBU
-** update application is saved in the RBU database for later
+** is marked as fully applied. Otherwise, the state of the RBU
+** update application is saved in the RBU database for later
** resumption.
**
** See comments below for more detail on APIs.
**
** If an update is only partially applied to the target database by the
-** time sqlite3rbu_close() is called, various state information is saved
+** time sqlite3rbu_close() is called, various state information is saved
** within the RBU database. This allows subsequent processes to automatically
** resume the RBU update from where it left off.
**
-** To remove all RBU extension state information, returning an RBU database
+** To remove all RBU extension state information, returning an RBU database
** to its original contents, it is sufficient to drop all tables that begin
** with the prefix "rbu_"
**
@@ -168159,21 +168159,21 @@ typedef struct sqlite3rbu sqlite3rbu;
** the path to the RBU database. Each call to this function must be matched
** by a call to sqlite3rbu_close(). When opening the databases, RBU passes
** the SQLITE_CONFIG_URI flag to sqlite3_open_v2(). So if either zTarget
-** or zRbu begin with "file:", it will be interpreted as an SQLite
+** or zRbu begin with "file:", it will be interpreted as an SQLite
** database URI, not a regular file name.
**
-** If the zState argument is passed a NULL value, the RBU extension stores
-** the current state of the update (how many rows have been updated, which
+** If the zState argument is passed a NULL value, the RBU extension stores
+** the current state of the update (how many rows have been updated, which
** indexes are yet to be updated etc.) within the RBU database itself. This
** can be convenient, as it means that the RBU application does not need to
-** organize removing a separate state file after the update is concluded.
-** Or, if zState is non-NULL, it must be a path to a database file in which
+** organize removing a separate state file after the update is concluded.
+** Or, if zState is non-NULL, it must be a path to a database file in which
** the RBU extension can store the state of the update.
**
** When resuming an RBU update, the zState argument must be passed the same
** value as when the RBU update was started.
**
-** Once the RBU update is finished, the RBU extension does not
+** Once the RBU update is finished, the RBU extension does not
** automatically remove any zState database file, even if it created it.
**
** By default, RBU uses the default VFS to access the files on disk. To
@@ -168186,7 +168186,7 @@ typedef struct sqlite3rbu sqlite3rbu;
** the zipvfs_create_vfs() API below for details on using RBU with zipvfs.
*/
SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
- const char *zTarget,
+ const char *zTarget,
const char *zRbu,
const char *zState
);
@@ -168196,13 +168196,13 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
** An RBU vacuum is similar to SQLite's built-in VACUUM command, except
** that it can be suspended and resumed like an RBU update.
**
-** The second argument to this function identifies a database in which
-** to store the state of the RBU vacuum operation if it is suspended. The
+** The second argument to this function identifies a database in which
+** to store the state of the RBU vacuum operation if it is suspended. The
** first time sqlite3rbu_vacuum() is called, to start an RBU vacuum
** operation, the state database should either not exist or be empty
-** (contain no tables). If an RBU vacuum is suspended by calling
+** (contain no tables). If an RBU vacuum is suspended by calling
** sqlite3rbu_close() on the RBU handle before sqlite3rbu_step() has
-** returned SQLITE_DONE, the vacuum state is stored in the state database.
+** returned SQLITE_DONE, the vacuum state is stored in the state database.
** The vacuum can be resumed by calling this function to open a new RBU
** handle specifying the same target and state databases.
**
@@ -168216,21 +168216,21 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_open(
** is completed, even if it created it. However, if the call to
** sqlite3rbu_close() returns any value other than SQLITE_OK, the contents
** of the state tables within the state database are zeroed. This way,
-** the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum() opens a handle that starts a
+** the next call to sqlite3rbu_vacuum() opens a handle that starts a
** new RBU vacuum operation.
**
** As with sqlite3rbu_open(), Zipvfs users should rever to the comment
-** describing the sqlite3rbu_create_vfs() API function below for
-** a description of the complications associated with using RBU with
+** describing the sqlite3rbu_create_vfs() API function below for
+** a description of the complications associated with using RBU with
** zipvfs databases.
*/
SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
- const char *zTarget,
+ const char *zTarget,
const char *zState
);
/*
-** Internally, each RBU connection uses a separate SQLite database
+** Internally, each RBU connection uses a separate SQLite database
** connection to access the target and rbu update databases. This
** API allows the application direct access to these database handles.
**
@@ -168241,10 +168241,10 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
** following scenarios:
**
** * If any target tables are virtual tables, it may be necessary to
-** call sqlite3_create_module() on the target database handle to
+** call sqlite3_create_module() on the target database handle to
** register the required virtual table implementations.
**
-** * If the data_xxx tables in the RBU source database are virtual
+** * If the data_xxx tables in the RBU source database are virtual
** tables, the application may need to call sqlite3_create_module() on
** the rbu update db handle to any required virtual table
** implementations.
@@ -168263,12 +168263,12 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3rbu *sqlite3rbu_vacuum(
SQLITE_API sqlite3 *sqlite3rbu_db(sqlite3rbu*, int bRbu);
/*
-** Do some work towards applying the RBU update to the target db.
+** Do some work towards applying the RBU update to the target db.
**
-** Return SQLITE_DONE if the update has been completely applied, or
+** Return SQLITE_DONE if the update has been completely applied, or
** SQLITE_OK if no error occurs but there remains work to do to apply
-** the RBU update. If an error does occur, some other error code is
-** returned.
+** the RBU update. If an error does occur, some other error code is
+** returned.
**
** Once a call to sqlite3rbu_step() has returned a value other than
** SQLITE_OK, all subsequent calls on the same RBU handle are no-ops
@@ -168281,7 +168281,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
**
** If a power failure or application crash occurs during an update, following
** system recovery RBU may resume the update from the point at which the state
-** was last saved. In other words, from the most recent successful call to
+** was last saved. In other words, from the most recent successful call to
** sqlite3rbu_close() or this function.
**
** SQLITE_OK is returned if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise.
@@ -168289,7 +168289,7 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_step(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
/*
-** Close an RBU handle.
+** Close an RBU handle.
**
** If the RBU update has been completely applied, mark the RBU database
** as fully applied. Otherwise, assuming no error has occurred, save the
@@ -168299,24 +168299,24 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_savestate(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
** or sqlite3rbu_open() call, or if one occurs within this function, an
** SQLite error code is returned. Additionally, *pzErrmsg may be set to
** point to a buffer containing a utf-8 formatted English language error
-** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free any
+** message. It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free any
** such buffer using sqlite3_free().
**
** Otherwise, if no error occurs, this function returns SQLITE_OK if the
-** update has been partially applied, or SQLITE_DONE if it has been
+** update has been partially applied, or SQLITE_DONE if it has been
** completely applied.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_close(sqlite3rbu *pRbu, char **pzErrmsg);
/*
-** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or
+** Return the total number of key-value operations (inserts, deletes or
** updates) that have been performed on the target database since the
** current RBU update was started.
*/
SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_progress(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
/*
-** Obtain permyriadage (permyriadage is to 10000 as percentage is to 100)
+** Obtain permyriadage (permyriadage is to 10000 as percentage is to 100)
** progress indications for the two stages of an RBU update. This API may
** be useful for driving GUI progress indicators and similar.
**
@@ -168329,16 +168329,16 @@ SQLITE_API sqlite3_int64 sqlite3rbu_progress(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
** The update is visible to non-RBU clients during stage 2. During stage 1
** non-RBU reader clients may see the original database.
**
-** If this API is called during stage 2 of the update, output variable
+** If this API is called during stage 2 of the update, output variable
** (*pnOne) is set to 10000 to indicate that stage 1 has finished and (*pnTwo)
** to a value between 0 and 10000 to indicate the permyriadage progress of
-** stage 2. A value of 5000 indicates that stage 2 is half finished,
+** stage 2. A value of 5000 indicates that stage 2 is half finished,
** 9000 indicates that it is 90% finished, and so on.
**
-** If this API is called during stage 1 of the update, output variable
+** If this API is called during stage 1 of the update, output variable
** (*pnTwo) is set to 0 to indicate that stage 2 has not yet started. The
-** value to which (*pnOne) is set depends on whether or not the RBU
-** database contains an "rbu_count" table. The rbu_count table, if it
+** value to which (*pnOne) is set depends on whether or not the RBU
+** database contains an "rbu_count" table. The rbu_count table, if it
** exists, must contain the same columns as the following:
**
** CREATE TABLE rbu_count(tbl TEXT PRIMARY KEY, cnt INTEGER) WITHOUT ROWID;
@@ -168397,20 +168397,20 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_state(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
/*
** Create an RBU VFS named zName that accesses the underlying file-system
-** via existing VFS zParent. Or, if the zParent parameter is passed NULL,
+** via existing VFS zParent. Or, if the zParent parameter is passed NULL,
** then the new RBU VFS uses the default system VFS to access the file-system.
-** The new object is registered as a non-default VFS with SQLite before
+** The new object is registered as a non-default VFS with SQLite before
** returning.
**
** Part of the RBU implementation uses a custom VFS object. Usually, this
-** object is created and deleted automatically by RBU.
+** object is created and deleted automatically by RBU.
**
** The exception is for applications that also use zipvfs. In this case,
** the custom VFS must be explicitly created by the user before the RBU
** handle is opened. The RBU VFS should be installed so that the zipvfs
-** VFS uses the RBU VFS, which in turn uses any other VFS layers in use
+** VFS uses the RBU VFS, which in turn uses any other VFS layers in use
** (for example multiplexor) to access the file-system. For example,
-** to assemble an RBU enabled VFS stack that uses both zipvfs and
+** to assemble an RBU enabled VFS stack that uses both zipvfs and
** multiplexor (error checking omitted):
**
** // Create a VFS named "multiplex" (not the default).
@@ -168432,9 +168432,9 @@ SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_state(sqlite3rbu *pRbu);
** may be used by RBU clients. Attempting to use RBU with a zipvfs VFS stack
** that does not include the RBU layer results in an error.
**
-** The overhead of adding the "rbu" VFS to the system is negligible for
-** non-RBU users. There is no harm in an application accessing the
-** file-system via "rbu" all the time, even if it only uses RBU functionality
+** The overhead of adding the "rbu" VFS to the system is negligible for
+** non-RBU users. There is no harm in an application accessing the
+** file-system via "rbu" all the time, even if it only uses RBU functionality
** occasionally.
*/
SQLITE_API int sqlite3rbu_create_vfs(const char *zName, const char *zParent);
@@ -168480,17 +168480,17 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3rbu_destroy_vfs(const char *zName);
** RBU_STATE_STAGE:
** May be set to integer values 1, 2, 4 or 5. As follows:
** 1: the *-rbu file is currently under construction.
-** 2: the *-rbu file has been constructed, but not yet moved
+** 2: the *-rbu file has been constructed, but not yet moved
** to the *-wal path.
** 4: the checkpoint is underway.
** 5: the rbu update has been checkpointed.
**
** RBU_STATE_TBL:
-** Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the table
+** Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the table
** currently being written.
**
** RBU_STATE_IDX:
-** Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the index
+** Only valid if STAGE==1. The target database name of the index
** currently being written, or NULL if the main table is currently being
** updated.
**
@@ -168510,7 +168510,7 @@ SQLITE_API void sqlite3rbu_destroy_vfs(const char *zName);
** be continued if this happens).
**
** RBU_STATE_COOKIE:
-** Valid if STAGE==1. The current change-counter cookie value in the
+** Valid if STAGE==1. The current change-counter cookie value in the
** target db file.
**
** RBU_STATE_OALSZ:
@@ -168587,7 +168587,7 @@ struct RbuUpdateStmt {
** the target database that require updating. For each such table, the
** iterator visits, in order:
**
-** * the table itself,
+** * the table itself,
** * each index of the table (zero or more points to visit), and
** * a special "cleanup table" state.
**
@@ -168596,7 +168596,7 @@ struct RbuUpdateStmt {
** it points to an array of flags nTblCol elements in size. The flag is
** set for each column that is either a part of the PK or a part of an
** index. Or clear otherwise.
-**
+**
*/
struct RbuObjIter {
sqlite3_stmt *pTblIter; /* Iterate through tables */
@@ -168675,7 +168675,7 @@ struct RbuFrame {
**
** nPhaseOneStep:
** If the RBU database contains an rbu_count table, this value is set to
-** a running estimate of the number of b-tree operations required to
+** a running estimate of the number of b-tree operations required to
** finish populating the *-oal file. This allows the sqlite3_bp_progress()
** API to calculate the permyriadage progress of populating the *-oal file
** using the formula:
@@ -168695,7 +168695,7 @@ struct RbuFrame {
**
** * the RBU update contains any UPDATE operations. If the PK specified
** for an UPDATE operation does not exist in the target table, then
-** no b-tree operations are required on index b-trees. Or if the
+** no b-tree operations are required on index b-trees. Or if the
** specified PK does exist, then (nIndex*2) such operations are
** required (one delete and one insert on each index b-tree).
**
@@ -169034,7 +169034,7 @@ static void rbuFossilDeltaFunc(
/*
** Prepare the SQL statement in buffer zSql against database handle db.
** If successful, set *ppStmt to point to the new statement and return
-** SQLITE_OK.
+** SQLITE_OK.
**
** Otherwise, if an error does occur, set *ppStmt to NULL and return
** an SQLite error code. Additionally, set output variable *pzErrmsg to
@@ -169042,7 +169042,7 @@ static void rbuFossilDeltaFunc(
** of the caller to (eventually) free this buffer using sqlite3_free().
*/
static int prepareAndCollectError(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,
char **pzErrmsg,
const char *zSql
@@ -169074,9 +169074,9 @@ static int resetAndCollectError(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, char **pzErrmsg){
/*
** Unless it is NULL, argument zSql points to a buffer allocated using
** sqlite3_malloc containing an SQL statement. This function prepares the SQL
-** statement against database db and frees the buffer. If statement
-** compilation is successful, *ppStmt is set to point to the new statement
-** handle and SQLITE_OK is returned.
+** statement against database db and frees the buffer. If statement
+** compilation is successful, *ppStmt is set to point to the new statement
+** handle and SQLITE_OK is returned.
**
** Otherwise, if an error occurs, *ppStmt is set to NULL and an error code
** returned. In this case, *pzErrmsg may also be set to point to an error
@@ -169087,7 +169087,7 @@ static int resetAndCollectError(sqlite3_stmt *pStmt, char **pzErrmsg){
** In this case SQLITE_NOMEM is returned and *ppStmt set to NULL.
*/
static int prepareFreeAndCollectError(
- sqlite3 *db,
+ sqlite3 *db,
sqlite3_stmt **ppStmt,
char **pzErrmsg,
char *zSql
@@ -169142,7 +169142,7 @@ static void rbuObjIterClearStatements(RbuObjIter *pIter){
sqlite3_free(pUp);
pUp = pTmp;
}
-
+
pIter->pSelect = 0;
pIter->pInsert = 0;
pIter->pDelete = 0;
@@ -169166,16 +169166,16 @@ static void rbuObjIterFinalize(RbuObjIter *pIter){
/*
** Advance the iterator to the next position.
**
-** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
-** pointing to the next entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
-** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
+** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
+** pointing to the next entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
+** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
** error code is returned.
*/
static int rbuObjIterNext(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
int rc = p->rc;
if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- /* Free any SQLite statements used while processing the previous object */
+ /* Free any SQLite statements used while processing the previous object */
rbuObjIterClearStatements(pIter);
if( pIter->zIdx==0 ){
rc = sqlite3_exec(p->dbMain,
@@ -169234,7 +169234,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterNext(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
** The implementation of the rbu_target_name() SQL function. This function
** accepts one or two arguments. The first argument is the name of a table -
** the name of a table in the RBU database. The second, if it is present, is 1
-** for a view or 0 for a table.
+** for a view or 0 for a table.
**
** For a non-vacuum RBU handle, if the table name matches the pattern:
**
@@ -169281,16 +169281,16 @@ static void rbuTargetNameFunc(
/*
** Initialize the iterator structure passed as the second argument.
**
-** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
-** pointing to the first entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
-** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
+** If no error occurs, SQLITE_OK is returned and the iterator is left
+** pointing to the first entry. Otherwise, an error code and message is
+** left in the RBU handle passed as the first argument. A copy of the
** error code is returned.
*/
static int rbuObjIterFirst(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
int rc;
memset(pIter, 0, sizeof(RbuObjIter));
- rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pIter->pTblIter, &p->zErrmsg,
+ rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pIter->pTblIter, &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf(
"SELECT rbu_target_name(name, type='view') AS target, name "
"FROM sqlite_master "
@@ -169318,7 +169318,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterFirst(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
**
** If an error has already occurred (p->rc is already set to something other
** than SQLITE_OK), then this function returns NULL without modifying the
-** stored error code. In this case it still calls sqlite3_free() on any
+** stored error code. In this case it still calls sqlite3_free() on any
** printf() parameters associated with %z conversions.
*/
static char *rbuMPrintf(sqlite3rbu *p, const char *zFmt, ...){
@@ -169364,12 +169364,12 @@ static int rbuMPrintfExec(sqlite3rbu *p, sqlite3 *db, const char *zFmt, ...){
}
/*
-** Attempt to allocate and return a pointer to a zeroed block of nByte
-** bytes.
+** Attempt to allocate and return a pointer to a zeroed block of nByte
+** bytes.
**
-** If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) occurs, return NULL and leave an
-** error code in the rbu handle passed as the first argument. Or, if an
-** error has already occurred when this function is called, return NULL
+** If an error (i.e. an OOM condition) occurs, return NULL and leave an
+** error code in the rbu handle passed as the first argument. Or, if an
+** error has already occurred when this function is called, return NULL
** immediately without attempting the allocation or modifying the stored
** error code.
*/
@@ -169465,7 +169465,7 @@ static void rbuFinalize(sqlite3rbu *p, sqlite3_stmt *pStmt){
** RBU_PK_VTAB: Table is a virtual table.
**
** Argument *piPk is also of type (int*), and also points to an output
-** parameter. Unless the table has an external primary key index
+** parameter. Unless the table has an external primary key index
** (i.e. unless *peType is set to 3), then *piPk is set to zero. Or,
** if the table does have an external primary key index, then *piPk
** is set to the root page number of the primary key index before
@@ -169500,7 +169500,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
/*
** 0) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q AND IsVirtual(%Q)
** 1) PRAGMA index_list = ?
- ** 2) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q
+ ** 2) SELECT count(*) FROM sqlite_master where name=%Q
** 3) PRAGMA table_info = ?
*/
sqlite3_stmt *aStmt[4] = {0, 0, 0, 0};
@@ -169509,7 +169509,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
*piPk = 0;
assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK );
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[0], &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[0], &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf(
"SELECT (sql LIKE 'create virtual%%'), rootpage"
" FROM sqlite_master"
@@ -169525,7 +169525,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
}
*piTnum = sqlite3_column_int(aStmt[0], 1);
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[1], &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[1], &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA index_list=%Q",zTab)
);
if( p->rc ) goto rbuTableType_end;
@@ -169533,7 +169533,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
const u8 *zOrig = sqlite3_column_text(aStmt[1], 3);
const u8 *zIdx = sqlite3_column_text(aStmt[1], 1);
if( zOrig && zIdx && zOrig[0]=='p' ){
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[2], &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[2], &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf(
"SELECT rootpage FROM sqlite_master WHERE name = %Q", zIdx
));
@@ -169549,7 +169549,7 @@ static void rbuTableType(
}
}
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[3], &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &aStmt[3], &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA table_info=%Q",zTab)
);
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -169618,7 +169618,7 @@ static void rbuObjIterCacheIndexedCols(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
** the table (not index) that the iterator currently points to.
**
** Return SQLITE_OK if successful, or an SQLite error code otherwise. If
-** an error does occur, an error code and error message are also left in
+** an error does occur, an error code and error message are also left in
** the RBU handle.
*/
static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
@@ -169640,7 +169640,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
if( p->rc ) return p->rc;
if( pIter->zIdx==0 ) pIter->iTnum = iTnum;
- assert( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK
+ assert( pIter->eType==RBU_PK_NONE || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_IPK
|| pIter->eType==RBU_PK_EXTERNAL || pIter->eType==RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID
|| pIter->eType==RBU_PK_VTAB
);
@@ -169648,7 +169648,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
/* Populate the azTblCol[] and nTblCol variables based on the columns
** of the input table. Ignore any input table columns that begin with
** "rbu_". */
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbRbu, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf("SELECT * FROM '%q'", pIter->zDataTbl)
);
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
@@ -169684,7 +169684,7 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
** present in the input table. Populate the abTblPk[], azTblType[] and
** aiTblOrder[] arrays at the same time. */
if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
- p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
+ p->rc = prepareFreeAndCollectError(p->dbMain, &pStmt, &p->zErrmsg,
sqlite3_mprintf("PRAGMA table_info(%Q)", pIter->zTbl)
);
}
@@ -169726,8 +169726,8 @@ static int rbuObjIterCacheTableInfo(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
}
/*
-** This function constructs and returns a pointer to a nul-terminated
-** string containing some SQL clause or list based on one or more of the
+** This function constructs and returns a pointer to a nul-terminated
+** string containing some SQL clause or list based on one or more of the
** column names currently stored in the pIter->azTblCol[] array.
*/
static char *rbuObjIterGetCollist(
@@ -169746,23 +169746,23 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetCollist(
}
/*
-** This function is used to create a SELECT list (the list of SQL
-** expressions that follows a SELECT keyword) for a SELECT statement
-** used to read from an data_xxx or rbu_tmp_xxx table while updating the
-** index object currently indicated by the iterator object passed as the
-** second argument. A "PRAGMA index_xinfo = " statement is used
+** This function is used to create a SELECT list (the list of SQL
+** expressions that follows a SELECT keyword) for a SELECT statement
+** used to read from an data_xxx or rbu_tmp_xxx table while updating the
+** index object currently indicated by the iterator object passed as the
+** second argument. A "PRAGMA index_xinfo = " statement is used
** to obtain the required information.
**
** If the index is of the following form:
**
** CREATE INDEX i1 ON t1(c, b COLLATE nocase);
**
-** and "t1" is a table with an explicit INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column
+** and "t1" is a table with an explicit INTEGER PRIMARY KEY column
** "ipk", the returned string is:
**
** "`c` COLLATE 'BINARY', `b` COLLATE 'NOCASE', `ipk` COLLATE 'BINARY'"
**
-** As well as the returned string, three other malloc'd strings are
+** As well as the returned string, three other malloc'd strings are
** returned via output parameters. As follows:
**
** pzImposterCols: ...
@@ -169824,11 +169824,11 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetIndexCols(
zRet = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"%w\" COLLATE %Q", zRet, zCom, zCol, zCollate);
if( pIter->bUnique==0 || sqlite3_column_int(pXInfo, 5) ){
const char *zOrder = (bDesc ? " DESC" : "");
- zImpPK = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\"%s",
+ zImpPK = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\"%s",
zImpPK, zCom, nBind, zCol, zOrder
);
}
- zImpCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\" %s COLLATE %Q",
+ zImpCols = sqlite3_mprintf("%z%s\"rbu_imp_%d%w\" %s COLLATE %Q",
zImpCols, zCom, nBind, zCol, zType, zCollate
);
zWhere = sqlite3_mprintf(
@@ -169874,7 +169874,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetIndexCols(
** the text ", old._rowid_" to the returned value.
*/
static char *rbuObjIterGetOldlist(
- sqlite3rbu *p,
+ sqlite3rbu *p,
RbuObjIter *pIter,
const char *zObj
){
@@ -169915,7 +169915,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetOldlist(
** "b = ?1 AND c = ?2"
*/
static char *rbuObjIterGetWhere(
- sqlite3rbu *p,
+ sqlite3rbu *p,
RbuObjIter *pIter
){
char *zList = 0;
@@ -169930,7 +169930,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetWhere(
zSep = " AND ";
}
}
- zList = rbuMPrintf(p,
+ zList = rbuMPrintf(p,
"_rowid_ = (SELECT id FROM rbu_imposter2 WHERE %z)", zList
);
@@ -169970,7 +169970,7 @@ static void rbuBadControlError(sqlite3rbu *p){
**
** The memory for the returned string is obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free it using
-** sqlite3_free().
+** sqlite3_free().
**
** If an OOM error is encountered when allocating space for the new
** string, an error code is left in the rbu handle passed as the first
@@ -169994,19 +169994,19 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetSetlist(
for(i=0; inTblCol; i++){
char c = zMask[pIter->aiSrcOrder[i]];
if( c=='x' ){
- zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=?%d",
+ zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=?%d",
zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
);
zSep = ", ";
}
else if( c=='d' ){
- zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
+ zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
);
zSep = ", ";
}
else if( c=='f' ){
- zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_fossil_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
+ zList = rbuMPrintf(p, "%z%s\"%w\"=rbu_fossil_delta(\"%w\", ?%d)",
zList, zSep, pIter->azTblCol[i], pIter->azTblCol[i], i+1
);
zSep = ", ";
@@ -170024,7 +170024,7 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetSetlist(
**
** The memory for the returned string is obtained from sqlite3_malloc().
** It is the responsibility of the caller to eventually free it using
-** sqlite3_free().
+** sqlite3_free().
**
** If an OOM error is encountered when allocating space for the new
** string, an error code is left in the rbu handle passed as the first
@@ -170048,8 +170048,8 @@ static char *rbuObjIterGetBindlist(sqlite3rbu *p, int nBind){
}
/*
-** The iterator currently points to a table (not index) of type
-** RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID. This function creates the PRIMARY KEY
+** The iterator currently points to a table (not index) of type
+** RBU_PK_WITHOUT_ROWID. This function creates the PRIMARY KEY
** declaration for the corresponding imposter table. For example,
** if the iterator points to a table created as:
**
@@ -170066,7 +170066,7 @@ static char *rbuWithoutRowidPK(sqlite3rbu *p, RbuObjIter *pIter){
const char *zSep = "PRIMARY KEY(";
sqlite3_stmt *pXList = 0; /* PRAGMA index_list = (pIter->zTbl) */
sqlite3_stmt *pXInfo = 0; /* PRAGMA index_xinfo =
|